JP7790491B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In gaming machines like those mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and provide a more sound gaming experience.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized in the following forms.

[form]
a predetermined detection means for detecting a predetermined operation;
a game value granting means electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executing a process for granting a game value for a game;
a game media providing means electrically connected to the game value providing means and configured to perform a process for providing game media;
a processing execution means electrically connected to the game value providing means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals, and which executes a specific processing which is a processing different from the processing for providing the game medium;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming value providing means
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information used in a process for awarding a game value to the game, the reference information being referenced in response to detection by the predetermined detection means;
a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means to the processing executing means after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine has started and before the execution of a predetermined game processing for progressing a game is started;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detecting means to the processing executing means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value providing means;
an execution means for executing the specific process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information relating to the processing result of the specific processing performed by the execution means;
Equipped with
the game value providing means is provided in a main control means for progressing the game, and the processing execution means is provided in a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The gaming value providing means and the processing execution means are operated by the same power source for the gaming machine,
This gaming machine is
a display means for displaying a game effect that is visible from the front of the gaming machine and is executed for each game, which is one unit of processing for announcing the result of a predetermined lottery processing;
a means for outputting the processing result information to the performance display means;
Equipped with
the game value providing means cannot directly change the processing result information stored in the processing result information storage means,
The gaming machine is configured such that the information based on the predetermined information signal is erased at a predetermined timing after the specific process is completed,
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined abnormality occurs, the game value providing means transmits information corresponding to the predetermined abnormality to the processing execution means, and the processing execution means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined abnormality.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The above configuration can improve the integrity of the game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning/losing table for the lottery to open electric gimmicks. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a main control device and the configuration of an inspection machine. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of the processing contents in the gaming history management chip and the inspection machine. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port provided in a main MPU. An explanatory diagram explaining the ball entry detection process performed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the goal determination process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how the presence or absence of a goal is detected. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a CPU of the game history management chip. A block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device and the configuration of the inspection machine provided in a pachinko machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing the processing contents of the gaming history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device and the configuration of the inspection machine provided in a pachinko machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic overview of the processing in the gaming history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of the processing in the main MPU in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 12 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process performed by the main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the game history processing executed by the main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by the main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 23 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 37 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 46 of the first embodiment. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of a part of the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 50 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 56 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning/losing table for the lottery to open electric gimmicks. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of processing executed by a pachinko machine of a comparative example. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. 10 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the through gate. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the MPU of the audio and light emission control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command response process executed in the MPU of the audio and light emission control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command response process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by a pachinko machine according to a first modified example of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening time setting process executed in the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command response process executed in the MPU of the audio and light emission control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command response process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by a pachinko machine according to a second modified example of the second embodiment. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by a pachinko machine according to a third modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning/losing table for the lottery to open electric gimmicks. An explanatory diagram explaining the variable winning mechanism. An explanatory diagram that explains what happens when a game ball enters the first large prize opening. This is an explanatory diagram that explains what happens when a game ball enters the non-V winning area of the second large winning slot. This is an explanatory diagram that explains what happens when a game ball enters the V winning area of the second large winning slot. An explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the opening and closing patterns of the first and second opening and closing doors in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed in response to a first-class jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in said opening and closing patterns. An explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the opening and closing patterns of the first and second opening and closing doors in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed in response to a second type jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in said opening and closing patterns. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the winning process for the starting gate. 10 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for skipping. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound and light side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing a command response process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. An explanatory diagram explaining the variable winning mechanism in variant example 1 of the third embodiment. An explanatory diagram explaining the variable winning mechanism in variant example 2 of the third embodiment. As a variant example 3 of the third embodiment, this is an explanatory diagram that explains the opening and closing patterns of the first and second opening and closing doors in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed in response to a first type jackpot, and an example of the behavior of the game ball in said opening and closing patterns. An explanatory diagram illustrating a variable winning mechanism as variant 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door and the behavior of the gaming ball in the opening and closing pattern, as a fourth variant of the third embodiment. An explanatory diagram explaining the variable winning mechanism in variant example 7 of the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (win/loss table for lottery for opening electric reels) used when conducting a lottery for opening electric reels. 10 is a time chart illustrating a point awarding effect (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how point-giving effect X1 is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how point-giving effect X2 is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how point-giving effect X3 is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the timer effect and the button press effect. 10 is a time chart illustrating a point awarding effect (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the colors of the stage. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the standby effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point awarding effect in which no points are awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the timer effect and button press effect executed during a game round. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the winning process for the starting gate. 10 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for skipping. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process; 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound and light side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing a command response process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a game play setting information storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing an update process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance information setting process. An explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot performance scenario table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a reach performance scenario table. As an example, this is an explanatory diagram illustrating a performance scenario corresponding to the provisional variable time T=t4 in the jackpot performance scenario table. An explanatory diagram illustrating a point-granting scenario table for jackpots and reach. An explanatory diagram illustrating a point awarding scenario for a jackpot or reach. An explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach performance scenario table. As an example, this is an explanatory diagram illustrating a performance scenario corresponding to the provisional variable time T=t24 in the non-reach performance scenario table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach point-granting scenario table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating each point awarding scenario for non-reach situations. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. This is an image diagram of a presentation pattern generated based on the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario set for the game round to be processed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point-awarding effect pattern table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point-awarding effect pattern recorded in a point-awarding effect pattern table. 10 is a flowchart showing a point-giving effect execution process. 10 is a flowchart showing a point accumulation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a control process at the time of point filling. 10 is a flowchart showing a button press performance process. 10 is a flowchart showing a point reset process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stage display control process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. An explanatory diagram illustrating the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario of the final game of consecutive presentations in variant example 8. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a modified example 9. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the point awarding effect in variant example 10. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a modified example 13. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an assignment history area. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an assignment history area. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point awarding effect in variant example 14. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a multiplication mode point awarding effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display mode of the pearl image when the mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during the execution of one point awarding performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of accumulated points. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of accumulated points in which the boundary line of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the display mode of accumulated points has been changed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points are displayed (at a plurality of locations) on the display surface 41a. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point awarding effect in which the number of points awarded is displayed at the start of the game. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a threshold reaching effect. An explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a carryover change effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer time extension effect. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters. This is an explanatory diagram showing the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table set in a pachinko machine. 10 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing examples of suggestive effects, specific end effects, and specific start effects. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine in a standby state. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is met after the volume of background music has reached zero and before the display of a demo video begins. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a restoration condition is met while the volume of background music is being reduced. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the winning process for the starting gate. 10 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for skipping. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a condition determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby process. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound and light side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing a command response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup command response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pending command response process. 10 is a flowchart showing an update process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the update process at the start of fluctuation. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby state transition process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command response process. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first modified example of the fifth embodiment. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when an RTC effect start condition is met while the pattern display device is displaying a background video. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when an RTC effect start condition is met while the pattern display device is displaying a demo video. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a transition condition is met while the pattern display device is displaying an RTC effect video. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is met while the pattern display device is displaying an RTC effect video. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the acoustic/optical side MPU of the first modified example of the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect processing executed in the sound/light side MPU of the first modified example of the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a standby state transition process executed in the acoustic/optical side MPU of the first modified example of the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a command response process executed in a display-side MPU of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (win/loss table for lottery for opening electric reels) used when conducting a lottery for opening electric reels. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in a ROM for audio data. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. 10 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the through gate. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing a BGM process. 10 is a flowchart showing a BGM initial setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a BGM change process. 10 is a flowchart showing a BGM continuous playback process. 10 is a flowchart showing a BGM muting process. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for game play presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing the game play presentation setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing for executing game play presentations. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for an opening/closing execution mode presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for waiting for customers. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine according to a first modified example of the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a BGM continuous playback process in Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a BGM silencing process in a first modified example of the sixth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine according to a second modified example of the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a BGM silencing process in a second modified example of the sixth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine according to a third modified example of the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a BGM continuous playback process in Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a BGM silencing process in Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine according to a fourth modified example of the sixth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a BGM continuous playback process in Modification 4 of the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a BGM silencing process in a fourth modified example of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in a voice data ROM in a sixth modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. An explanatory diagram explaining the V winning mechanism. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in winning lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (win/loss table for lottery for opening electric reels) used when conducting a lottery for opening electric reels. This is a time chart that explains Case 1, in which a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole. This is a time chart that explains Case 2, in which a small prize is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. 10 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a through ball entry process. 10 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the category determination gate. A flowchart showing the ball entry process for the large prize slot. 10 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a crane. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific process execution determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a type determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening/closing scenario setting process. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening/closing scenario in this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. A flowchart showing V winning processing. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound and light side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing a pending command response process. 10 is a flowchart showing an update process when a ball goes in. 10 is a flowchart showing the game play presentation setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby period effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening period effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the opening/closing processing period effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a first chance effect setting process. This is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when no accumulation is present. A flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process. This is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when V is not won. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending period effect setting process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. An explanatory diagram explaining the V winning mechanism. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in lotteries and the like. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (win/loss table for lottery for opening electric reels) used when conducting a lottery for opening electric reels. This is a time chart that explains Case 1, in which a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole. This is a time chart that explains Case 2, in which a small prize is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. 10 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a through ball entry process. 10 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the category determination gate. A flowchart showing the ball entry process for the large prize slot. 10 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a crane. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific process execution determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a type determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening/closing scenario setting process. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening/closing scenario in this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening time setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. A flowchart showing V winning processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound and light side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing a pending command response process. 10 is a flowchart showing an update process when a ball goes in. 10 is a flowchart showing the game play presentation setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby period effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening period effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the opening/closing processing period effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a first chance effect setting process. This is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when no accumulation is present. A flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process. This is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when V is not won. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending period effect setting process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment:
F. Sixth embodiment:
G. Seventh embodiment:
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Application to other configurations:
J. Regarding inventions extracted from the above embodiments:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to a first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a generally rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the gaming hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are located on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing during each play played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operating handle 25, gaming balls are launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism toward the front of the gaming board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor 25a for enabling the gaming ball launching mechanism to operate, a wait button 25b that the player presses to stop the gaming ball launching mechanism from launching gaming balls, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 through changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and gaming balls are launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism toward the front of the gaming board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10. Control devices for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 are located on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical units are provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 is equipped with a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board that has the function of managing the main control of the game and the function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing (also called traces of opening or traces of unsealing). For example, a seal sticker is affixed to the openable part, and the word "unsealed" appears when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio and light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes an LCD display that displays symbols and images for effects.

The third control unit 53 is equipped with a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for the payout of prize balls. When a command to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launching mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Additionally, the back of the inner frame 13 is equipped with several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 that is continuously replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the amusement hall, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping surface to allow game balls to flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically downstream of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls in response to commands from the payout control device 70.

Next, we will explain the game board. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, after which they flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 is provided with a general winning slot 32, a first starting slot 33, a second starting slot 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The gaming board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

General winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71. In this embodiment, three general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided as general winning openings 32. Hereinafter, general winning opening 32a will also be referred to as the first winning opening 32a, general winning opening 32b will also be referred to as the second winning opening 32b, and general winning opening 32c will also be referred to as the third winning opening 32c.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which game balls can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the bottom center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, and is located on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. The second starting hole 34 is also provided with an electric device 34a, which is a normal electric device.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is the gate that triggers the execution of a lottery to open the electric device 34a. Specifically, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 uses this passage as an opportunity to conduct an internal lottery (electric device release lottery). If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to the electric device release, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device release state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state, preventing game balls from entering the large winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). If the jackpot lottery results in a large winning or small winning, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that executes the opening and closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions from a closed state, in which game balls cannot enter, to an open state, in which game balls can enter, and then transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

In addition, an outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

In this embodiment, game balls that enter the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, the third winning hole 32c, the big winning hole 36a, and the outlet hole 43 are configured to merge into a discharge passage provided on the back of the game board 30, and this discharge passage is equipped with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects the game balls. As will be described later, in this embodiment, by detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to determine the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a static first pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second pattern. The second pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a static second pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first pending display unit 37c and a second pending display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 can be reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 can be reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is initiated, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends.

The special drawing unit 37, the regular drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured as segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may also be configured as various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device equipped in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the first start opening 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the second start opening 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display of the pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also displays effects during the open/close execution mode to which the game enters when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns and display surface 41a on the pattern display device 41. Figure 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns on the pattern display device 41. As shown in Figure 4(a), patterns representing the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that the variably displayed patterns may be patterns in which each of the numbers 1 to 8 is accompanied by an image of a character or the like.

Figure 4(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. Each symbol column Z1 to Z3 contains the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 4(a) arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol column is displayed in a variable display in which it scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction periodically. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the static display is achieved, if the result of the jackpot lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described manner, and various other variations in the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round is one unit of processing for notifying a player of the results of a jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on a winning entry in either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies a player of the results of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning entry in either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, it causes the segment display to change display in either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b for each play round, and then stops displaying the segment display so that it displays a value corresponding to the lottery result for the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a win at either the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34, it causes the symbol display device 41 to variably display a predetermined symbol sequence for each play, and then statically displays the symbol sequence so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is made up of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display begins to when the predetermined lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is statically displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The first hold display area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls based on winning at the first start port 33. The second hold display area Ds2 displays the number of reserved balls based on winning at the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won at the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is a maximum of four each.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of games. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 is equipped with a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the CPU 62x executes programs stored in the ROM 63, and an input/output port 62a. The MPU 62 also is equipped with a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65.

The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information (described below) based on game ball entry information for the starting gate, winning gate, and gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "entry gates"). The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to an inspection machine (described below). Details of the game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements.

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and a power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. In this embodiment, the power supply device 85 is also equipped with a capacitor 87, which continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time in the event of a power outage or when the power switch is turned OFF.

Also connected to the input side of the MPU 62 are ball entry detection sensors provided at each entry port. Specifically, the main entry port detection sensor 44a, which detects game balls that have entered the main entry port 36a, the first entry port detection sensor 44b, which detects game balls that have entered the first entry port 33, the second entry port detection sensor 44c, which detects game balls that have entered the second entry port 34, the first entry port detection sensor 44d, which detects game balls that have entered the first entry port 32a, the second entry port detection sensor 44e, which detects game balls that have entered the second entry port 32b, the third entry port detection sensor 44f, which detects game balls that have entered the third entry port 32c, the through gate detection sensor 44g, which detects game balls that have passed through the through gate 35, and the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, which detects game balls that have passed through the discharge passage described above. Based on signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered a start port or a prize port, and whether the gaming ball has passed through a through gate or a discharge passage. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the gaming ball's entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 62 are a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the electric role opening lottery results in a win, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the MPU 62. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a game ball has entered the general prize entry port 32, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls. If a game ball has entered the second start port 34, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the control handle 25. As described above, the control handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a wait button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When a player grips the control handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on. When the player rotates the control handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The audio and light emitting control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. Specifically, based on the various commands received from the main control device 60, the audio and light emitting control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, the operation of the speaker 46, and also controls the display control device 100. In addition, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the audio and light emitting control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the audio and light emitting control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform game performance that reflects the operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect that will be executed while the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a static manner, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in the jackpot lottery, etc. The various counters are provided in various counter areas of RAM 64, and are used by MPU 62 when performing the jackpot lottery, setting the display on main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display on pattern display device 41. Specifically, jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate jackpot types. Reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on pattern display device 41 is changed to a miss.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also has a reserve information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reserve information storage area 64b has a first reserve area Ra and a second reserve area Rb. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will now be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The jackpot random number counter C1 that has been moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

Next, we will explain the details of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 39, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, we will explain the details of the reach random number counter C3. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. However, if the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a jackpot has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed as varying symbols in symbol column Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained in detail. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 when determining the change time in the first and second pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the change time of the patterns on the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 begins to fluctuate. When determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area of ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e using the value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, and variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in this invention. Also, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, we will explain the hit/miss table. The hit/miss table is table data used to check against the jackpot random number counter C1 when a jackpot lottery is held based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes set for the jackpot lottery; a low probability mode and a high probability mode; when a jackpot lottery is held in low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a jackpot lottery is held in high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced.

Figure 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. Figure 7(a) shows the win/loss table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and Figure 7(b) shows the win/loss table for high probability mode.

As shown in Figure 7(a), the hit/miss table for the low probability mode has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 7(b), the hit/miss table for the high probability mode has 16 values from 0 to 15 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the low probability mode is included in the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the result of the jackpot lottery shows a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in this embodiment, a "small win" may also be set as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be explained. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode
(2) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) The lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) for the big win lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 1.6 seconds or until 10 balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

The opening time limit for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the number of balls that can be opened per opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for one opening may be longer or the number of balls that can be opened per opening may be set higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that no winning occurs in the variable winning device 36.

In this embodiment, the opening and closing execution mode does not have multiple types of winning modes, and the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode described above. In other words, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area of ROM 63.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. Figure 8(a) shows the allocation table for the first starting port, and Figure 8(b) shows the allocation table for the second starting port. The allocation table for the first starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the allocation table for the second starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting hole in Figure 8(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting hole 33 are set as 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot.

A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R probability variable jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

The 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0-39," "0-13" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot, "14-27" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot, "28-33" corresponds to a 16R regular jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has four types of jackpots. This diversifies the types of jackpots. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the 16R probability jackpot is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the 8R probability jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By providing multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage to the player in this way, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in Figure 8 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34 are set to be a 16R variable probability jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot. In the allocation table for the second starting port, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 39," "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R variable probability jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R normal jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot differs between a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, providing a clear difference in the advantages to the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released into the game area PA in the same manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery using the electric role release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role release 34a per time is set longer when the electric role release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs in high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one electric role. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, the time between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in meeting the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table (win/loss table for the lottery to open an electric reel) used when conducting the lottery to open an electric reel.

Figure 9(a) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 9(a), the win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature release. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in low-frequency support mode and the electric feature release lottery is executed, the electric feature release is won with a probability of 1 in 233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature release lottery is won in low-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 9(b) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 9(b), the win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature release. Four values from 462 to 465 have been set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in high-frequency support mode and the electric feature release lottery is executed, the electric feature release is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature release lottery is won in high-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low-frequency support mode.

Figure 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the MPU 62, CPU 62x, ROM 63, and RAM 64 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main CPU 62x, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 has a prize ball count data storage area and a calculation execution condition storage area.

The prize ball number data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball number data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. In this embodiment, the prize ball number data storage area stores the following prize ball number data:
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 (number of first starting hole prize balls P ₁ ): 3
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34 (number of second starting hole prize balls P ₂ ): 3
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first prize opening 32a (number of first prize opening balls P _N1 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second prize opening 32b (number of second prize opening balls P _N2 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the third prize opening 32c (number of third prize opening balls P _N3 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the big prize opening 36a (number of big prize opening balls P _S ): 15

The main MPU 62 determines the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance by referencing the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setup process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball count data set in this pachinko machine 10.

The calculation execution condition memory area stores calculation execution conditions that are the conditions under which the gaming history management chip 300 starts calculations to calculate gaming history information. In this embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored is that the number of gaming balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. The calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are sent to the gaming history management chip 300 during the initial setup process that is executed after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This allows the gaming history management chip 300 to grasp the calculation execution conditions that have been set for this pachinko machine 10.

The gaming history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various gaming history information based on the information on gaming balls entering each entrance and stores the calculated gaming history information. The gaming history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires information on gaming balls entering each entrance from the CPU 62x, a register 304 that stores the number of gaming balls that have entered each entrance, a prize ball number data memory 306 that stores prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a calculation execution condition memory 307 that stores calculation execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the entire gaming history management chip 300 and calculates gaming history information based on the number of gaming balls that have entered each entrance and the number of prize balls set for each entrance when the calculation execution condition is met, and a calculation result memory 309 that stores the calculated gaming history information.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

The inspection machine 320 is equipped with a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays the game history information received from the game history management chip 300, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 11 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the processing performed by the gaming history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320.

Buffer 302 is located between CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and register 304, and acquires ball entry information for each ball entry port from CPU 62x. Specifically, buffer 302 has multiple bits corresponding to each ball entry port, and CPU 62x turns ON ("1") the bit corresponding to the ball entry port where it determines that a game ball has entered. For example, when CPU 62x determines that a game ball has entered first starting port 33, it turns ON ("1") the bit in buffer 302 corresponding to first starting port 33.

The buffer 302 also has bits for determining the game mode and the state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as the game state) when a game ball enters each entry port. In this embodiment, the buffer 302 has bits for determining whether the machine is in normal mode (a mode that is not in high probability mode, high frequency support mode, or open/close execution mode), bits for determining whether the machine is in high probability mode, bits for determining whether the machine is in high frequency support mode, bits for determining whether the machine is in open/close execution mode, bits for determining whether the first reserved number is at its upper limit, bits for determining whether the second reserved number is at its upper limit, bits for determining whether the front door frame 14 is open, and bits for determining whether the pachinko machine 10 is experiencing an error such as a malfunction. For example, if the CPU 62x determines that the machine is in normal mode when a game ball enters the first start port 33, it turns ON ("1") the bit in the buffer 302 for determining whether the machine is in normal mode.

Register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entrance. Specifically, register 304 is made up of multiple counters corresponding to each entrance, and when it is determined that a bit in buffer 302 contains ball entry information (i.e., the bit is ON), 1 is added to the counter value corresponding to the bit determined to contain ball entry information. In this embodiment, register 304 is made up of a non-volatile register that can retain its memory even when the power supply is cut off.

In this embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by means of counters corresponding to the respective entrances.
Number of game balls entering the large prize opening 36a = Number of balls entering the large prize opening N _S
Number of game balls entering the first starting hole 33 = Number of balls entering the first starting hole N ₁
Number of game balls entering the second starting hole 34 = Number of balls entering the second starting hole N ₂
Number of game balls entering the first winning opening 32a = Number of balls entering the first winning opening N _N1
Number of game balls entering the second winning opening 32b = Number of balls entering the second winning opening N _N2
Number of game balls entering the third winning opening 32c = Number of balls entering the third winning opening N _N3
Number of game balls that passed through the through gate 35 = Number of balls that passed through the through gate _NG
Number of game balls passing through the discharge passage = Number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT
As described above, the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage is equal to the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each ball entrance for each game state.
The number of game balls that entered each entrance during normal mode. The number of game balls that entered each entrance during high probability mode. The number of game balls that entered each entrance during high frequency support mode. The number of game balls that entered each entrance during open/close execution mode. The number of game balls that entered the first start opening 33 during normal mode and while the first reserved number is at the upper limit. The number of game balls that entered the second start opening 34 during normal mode and while the second reserved number is at the upper limit. The number of game balls that entered each entrance while the front door frame 14 is open. The number of game balls that entered each entrance during an error.

For example, if it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first start port 33 in the buffer 302 contains ball entry information (the bit is ON), and if it is determined that the bit that determines whether or not normal mode is in effect contains information (the bit is ON), then 1 is added to the value of the first start port ball entry counter, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 33, and 1 is added to the value of the first start port ball entry counter during normal mode, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 33 during normal mode.

The prize ball count data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball count data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306. Therefore, the content of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63.

The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the calculation execution conditions are conditions for starting calculations to calculate game history information. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the calculation to calculate game history information is set to start each time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted by the CPU 62x to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Therefore, the content of the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is the same as the content of the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63. Note that the number of game balls that have passed through or entered a place other than the discharge passage may be stored as the criterion for the calculation execution condition, or a number other than 500 may be stored as the criterion.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 are met, and if it determines that the calculation execution conditions are met, calculates various pieces of game history information based on the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls that have entered each entrance stored in the register 304. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following values as game history information each time the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500:

・Ratio of prize balls = Number of prize balls paid out by the operation of the prize balls (number of prize balls) / Total number of prize balls paid out (total number of prize balls)
=(N ₂ ×P ₂ +N _S ×P _S )/(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ ×P ₂ +N _S ×P _S )
・Continuous feature ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by continuous feature operation (Number of consecutive feature prize balls) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (Total number of prize balls)
=(N _S ×P _S )/(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ ×P ₂ +N _S ×P _S )
・Ball payout rate (total)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls) / Number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 = (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S ) / N _OUT

The above values are calculated based on the following criteria.
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the device (number of prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the electric device 34a as a normal electric device and the variable winning device 36 as a special electric device = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 34 and the large winning hole 36a = N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of consecutive devices (number of consecutive device prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the variable winning device 36 as a special electric device = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the large winning opening 36a = N _S × P _S
The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning slots 32a to 32c = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3
- Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c, the first start opening 33, the second start opening 34, and the large prize opening 36a = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls that enter each entrance counted for each game state.

・Payout ratio (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during normal mode / Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during normal mode + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third winning ports 32a to 32c during normal mode / Payout rate (during normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 during normal mode / Payout rate (during high frequency support mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the high frequency support mode / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 during the high frequency support mode BY (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c during normal mode + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first start opening 33 during the period in normal mode when the first reserved number is at the upper limit + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the second start opening 34 during the period in normal mode when the second reserved number is at the upper limit / Number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 during normal mode · BY _MIN (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third winning slots 32a to 32c during normal mode / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 during normal mode. Ball entry rate while front door frame is open = Number of game balls that entered each winning slot while the front door frame 14 was open / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30. Ball entry rate during error = Number of game balls that entered each winning slot during an error / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30. Note that the above game history information is an example, and other game history information may also be calculated.

After calculating the various pieces of gaming history information described above, the CPU 308 stores the calculated pieces of gaming history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the values of each counter in the register 304 to "0." Note that, hereinafter, the various pieces of gaming history information calculated each time 500 gaming balls are launched onto the gaming board 30 will be collectively referred to as the "short-term gaming history information group."

Calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory that stores the gaming history information calculated by CPU 308, and in this embodiment, is configured as non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even when power is cut off. Calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term gaming history information groups were written. If there is no free area to write the calculated short-term gaming history information group, CPU 308 stores the calculated short-term gaming history information group in the area where the short-term gaming history information group with the oldest written order is stored. In other words, calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to overwrite the short-term gaming history information group in order, starting with the oldest (first-in, first-out method), and always stores the most recent short-term gaming history information group.

In this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1,200 sets of short-term gaming history information calculated every time 500 gaming balls are launched onto the gaming board 30. For example, if gaming balls are launched for 10 consecutive hours in one day, 60,000 gaming balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term gaming history information will be stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 per day. Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 is capable of storing sets of short-term gaming history information for the most recent 10 days.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the gaming history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of gaming history information. When the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the gaming history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. As a result, the inspection machine 320 acquires the gaming history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 and displays the acquired gaming history information on the display unit 328.

In this way, in this embodiment, every time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, i.e., every time 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30, game history information such as the combination ratio is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. The calculated game history information is then displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

A3. Details of various processes executed in the gaming machine:
Next, we will explain each process executed by the MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment). The processes executed by the MPU 62 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

First, we will explain the main processing with reference to the flowchart in Figure 12.

Figure 12 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62. In step S10101, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, the initial settings of each control device upon power-on and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 are executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initial setting process executes a process to transmit calculation data to the gaming history management chip 300. Specifically, the calculation data (prize ball count data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300. As described below, upon receiving the calculation data, the gaming history management chip 300 stores the prize ball count data and calculation execution conditions in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively, and transmits a setting completion command to the main MPU 62 indicating that storage is complete. After executing step S10101, the process proceeds to step S10102.

In step S10102, it is determined whether a setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that a setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the process proceeds to step S10103, where interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that a setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. In other words, until a setting completion command is received, the process does not proceed to step S10103, and interrupt permission is not set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur.

After executing step S10103, the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 proceeds. In other words, the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described below, but there will be remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed irregularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S10104, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S10105, random number initial value update processing is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S10106, fluctuation counter update processing is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. These update processing executes a process of reading the current numerical information from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 64, incrementing the read numerical information by 1, and then overwriting the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, in step S10107, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing in step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processing in steps S10104 to S10107 is repeated.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment).

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62. This timer interrupt process is initiated at a specific interval (4 msec intervals in this embodiment).

The timer interrupt process first executes a lottery random number update process in step S10201. The lottery random number update process updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4. Specifically, the current numerical information is read sequentially from the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, after which it is overwritten onto the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S10202.

In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and then the process proceeds to step S10203, where the fluctuation type counter CS is updated in the fluctuation type counter update process. Then the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, port output processing is executed. In port output processing, if output information was set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to provide output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 36c, 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the large prize opening 36a to an open state, output of a drive signal to the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is initiated, and if information is set to switch it to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped. Furthermore, if information is set to switch the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 to an open state, output of a drive signal to the electric device drive unit 34b is initiated, and if information is set to switch it to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, proceed to step S10205.

In step S10205, a read process is performed. During the read process, signals other than the ball-entering signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S10206.

In step S10206, the signals received from each goal detection sensor 44a-44h are read, and a goal detection process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the read information. The details of this goal detection process will be explained in detail later. Then, proceed to step S10207.

In step S10207, the ball entry detection information is output to a bit in the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the ball entry port determined to have received the game ball in the ball entry detection process in step S10206 is turned ON ("1"), and the bit corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON ("1"). Then, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a specified timer counter stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S10209, where the output setting process for the prize ball command is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10210.

In step S10210, a ball entry process for the start port is executed in response to a game ball entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In the ball entry process for the start port, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are obtained based on the determination that a game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the obtained counter values are stored in the pending information storage area 64b of RAM 64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

In step S10211, a through gate ball entry process is executed in response to a gaming ball entering (passing through) the through gate 35. In the through gate ball entry process, the value of the variable type counter CS is obtained based on the determination that a gaming ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the obtained counter value is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64. After executing step S10211, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the jackpot lottery and display control of the first and second symbol display units 37a and 37b. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. The game state transition process executes a process to transition the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, an electric role support process is executed to control the electric role device 34a. In the electric role support process, a determination is made as to whether or not the electric role device 34a should be opened (an electric role device opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric role device 34a should be opened, the electric role device 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S10214, the process proceeds to step S10215.

In step S10215, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process is executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the player operates the operating handle 25. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

In step S10216, external information setting processing is executed to control the start and end of external signal output according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt processing. After step S10216 is executed, this timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, we will explain the goal detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 13).

The ball entry detection process involves checking the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h. This check involves checking the input port 62b of the input/output ports 62a of the main MPU 62. Before explaining the ball entry detection process, we will explain the configuration of the input port 62b provided on the main MPU 62 with reference to Figure 14.

Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the input port 62b provided on the main MPU 62. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area storing information of "0" or "1" depending on the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, these areas include the 0th bit D0 through the 7th bit D7.

In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to input port 62b, in order to limit the number of signals input simultaneously to eight, the group of signals to be input to input port 62b is switched through switching control by the driver IC. During the ball entry detection process, the group of signals to be input to input port 62b is set for each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h.

When this setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the large prize entry opening detection sensor 44a, the first bit D1 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first start opening detection sensor 44b, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second start opening detection sensor 44c, the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first prize entry opening detection sensor 44d, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second prize entry opening detection sensor 44e, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the third prize entry opening detection sensor 44f, the sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h.

In this case, when each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h does not detect the passage of a game ball, it outputs a HIGH level signal indicating that it is not currently detecting the ball entry signal. When it detects the passage of a game ball, it outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is currently detecting the ball entry signal. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inversion circuit, which inverts the signal state before each of the detection signals is input to input port 62b. When input port 62b receives a LOW level signal through the inversion circuit, it stores "0" information (data 0 or absence information) in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HIGH level signal through the inversion circuit, it stores "1" information (data 1 or presence information) in the corresponding bit.

In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h do not detect the passage of a game ball, the corresponding bit stores "0," which indicates that no detection is in progress, and when the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h detect the passage of a game ball, the corresponding bit stores "1," which indicates that detection is in progress.

In addition, each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h may be configured to output a LOW level signal as a ball entry signal while not detecting the passage of a game ball, and to output a HI level signal as a ball entry signal while detecting the passage of a game ball. In this case, the above-mentioned inversion circuit may be omitted.

Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the scoring detection process executed by the main MPU 62. Figure 15(a) is a flowchart illustrating the scoring detection process executed by the main MPU 62. Figure 15(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating the scoring determination area used in the scoring detection process. In the scoring detection process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 15(a), first, in step S10301, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the first scoring determination area WA1 in the register of the main MPU 62. The first scoring determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in Figure 15(b-1), and has a data capacity sufficient to store all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. In this case, the storage source bits in bits 0 to 7, D0 to D7, and the storage destination bits in the first scoring area WA1 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence; for example, the information in bit 0, D0, is always stored in a specified bit in the first scoring area WA1.

Then, in step S10302, a wait process for ball entry detection is executed. During this wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any processing until a predetermined wait time has elapsed. In this pachinko machine 10, this wait time is set to 10 μsec. However, the specific wait time can be any value as long as it does not interfere with the execution of periodic timer interrupt processing and can fully achieve the effects of setting this wait process, described below. However, a range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec is preferable, and a range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec is more preferable.

By the way, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute one step of processing. Therefore, even if step S10302 is not set, a forced wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between step S10301 and step S10303. In this regard, step S10302 not only sets the minimum time required to execute the process, but also sets an additional wait time between the processing of step S10301 and the processing of step S10303.

In the following step S10303, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the second ball entry determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 62. Incidentally, since the information in the input port 62b is updated at intervals shorter than the time between the completion of step S10301 and the start of step S10303, the information transferred from the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 in step S10303 may be different from that in step S10301.

Like the first scoring area WA1, the second scoring area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in Figure 15 (b-2), and has a data capacity large enough to store all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. In this case, the source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the destination bits in the second scoring area WA2 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence, and the relationship between the source bits and destination bits is the same as in the first scoring area WA1.

Then, in step S10304, the goal determination process is executed, and the goal detection process ends. This goal determination process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 16.

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the ball entry determination process executed by the main MPU 62. In the ball entry determination process, first, in step S10401, the ball entry determination counter stored in the main RAM 64 is set to 8. The numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry ports. Specifically, in this embodiment, the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter, "8," corresponds to the 0th bit D0 of the large prize entry port 36a; "7," corresponds to the 1st bit D1 of the first starting port 33; "6," corresponds to the 2nd bit D2 of the second starting port 34; "5," corresponds to the 3rd bit D3 of the first prize entry port 32a; "4," corresponds to the 4th bit D4 of the second prize entry port 32b; "3," corresponds to the 5th bit D5 of the third prize entry port 32c; "2," corresponds to the 6th bit D6 of the through gate 35; and "1," corresponds to the 7th bit D7 of the discharge passage. In the following step S10402, the information of the bits corresponding to the current numerical information of the goal determination counter in the first goal determination area WA1 and the second goal determination area WA2 is obtained. The information obtained in this case is information read from the same bit in input port 62b.

In the following step S10403, an AND operation is performed on each piece of information obtained in step S10402, and the result of the AND operation is stored in a register. In step S10404, the result of the AND operation is stored in the corresponding bit of the first post-computation area WA3 or the second post-computation area WA4, which corresponds to the side of the area that differs from the side where the information resulting from the AND operation in the previous timer interrupt processing was stored. As shown in Figures 15(b-3) and 15(b-4), the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits, and have a data capacity sufficient to store all of the information resulting from the AND operation between each bit of the first post-computation area WA1 and each bit of the second post-computation area WA2. In this case, the order of the bits in the first post-computation area WA1 and the second post-computation area WA2 that were subject to the AND operation is uniquely determined from the order of the bits in the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4.

Then, in step S10405, the information of the bit corresponding to the current numerical information of the goal determination counter is read from either the first post-calculation area WA3 or the second post-calculation area WA4, which is the side where the information resulting from the AND process in the goal determination process in the previous timer interrupt process was stored. Then, in step S10406, an inversion process is performed to invert the read information between "0" and "1".

Then, in step S10407, an AND operation is performed on the information resulting from the AND operation in step S10403 and the information resulting from the inversion operation in step S10406, and in the following step S10408, it is determined whether the result of the AND operation is "1", which corresponds to the ball entry detection start information. If it is determined in step S10408 that the result of the AND operation is "1", processing proceeds to step S10409 and subsequent steps.

In step S10409, it is determined whether the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter indicates a bit corresponding to either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. If it corresponds to either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, in step S10410, the start port ball entry flag stored in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", and in step S10411, the numerical information of the three prize ball counter stored in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1.

The start hole entry flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, and to identify a state in which processing corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, other than the execution of a prize ball, should be performed. Incidentally, because the first start hole 33 and the second start hole 34 are each provided with ball entry detection sensors 44b, 44c, it is possible for a ball entry into the first start hole 33 and a ball entry into the second start hole 34 to be detected simultaneously within a single timer interrupt process. Therefore, to accommodate this, start hole entry flags are provided corresponding to the number of start holes 33, 34; specifically, two start hole entry flags are provided. The three prize ball counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times a three prize ball command, which instructs the execution of three prize balls, should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10409, step S10412 determines whether the numerical information of the current ball entry judgment counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the large prize opening 36a (variable prize opening device 36). If it corresponds to the variable prize opening 36, step S10413 sets the large prize opening ball entry flag stored in the main RAM 64 to "1", and step S10414 adds 1 to the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counter stored in the main RAM 64.

The large prize entry ball flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of a game ball into the variable prize entry device 36, and is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify a state in which processing corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the variable prize entry device 36, other than the execution of a prize ball, should be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times a 15 prize ball command, which instructs the execution of 15 prize balls, should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10412, step S10415 determines whether the numerical information of the current ball entry judgment counter indicates a bit corresponding to through gate 35. If it corresponds to through gate 35, step S10416 sets the through passage flag provided in main RAM 64 to "1".

The through-passing flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify that a gaming ball has passed through the through gate 35, and also to identify that the main MPU 62 is in a state where processing corresponding to the gaming ball entering the through gate 35 should be executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10415, step S10417 determines whether the numerical information of the current winning ball judgment counter indicates a bit corresponding to any of the first winning slot 32a, second winning slot 32b, and third winning slot 32c. If it corresponds to any of the first winning slot 32a, second winning slot 32b, and third winning slot 32c, step S10418 sets the general winning slot winning ball flag provided in the main RAM 64 to "1," and step S10419 increments the numerical information of the three prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 64 by 1.

The general prize slot ball entry flag is a flag used by the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of game balls into the first prize slot 32a, the second prize slot 32b, or the third prize slot 32c. Incidentally, because the first prize slot 32a, the second prize slot 32b, and the third prize slot 32c are each equipped with ball entry detection sensors 44d, 44e, and 44f, it is possible for ball entries into the first prize slot 32a, the second prize slot 32b, and the third prize slot to be detected simultaneously within a single timer interrupt process. Therefore, to accommodate this, general prize slot ball entry flags are provided corresponding to the number of general prize slots 32a, 32b, and 32c; specifically, three flags are provided. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter used by the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times a three-prize ball command, which commands the execution of 10 prize balls, should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10417, this means that the ball entered this time corresponds to the discharge passage, so in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag stored in the main RAM 64 is set to "1". The discharge passage passage flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10408, or after executing any of the processes in steps S10411, S10414, S10416, S10419, and S10420, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the goal determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10422, it is determined whether the goal determination counter is "0".

If the goal determination counter is not "0", steps S10402 to S10420 are executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the goal determination counter updated in step S10421. If steps S10402 to S10420 have been executed for the number of times the numerical information set in step S10401 has been set, a positive determination is made in step S10422, and the goal determination process ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 17, we will explain how the ball entry detection process (Figure 15) is executed to detect whether or not a ball has entered the general entry port 32, variable entry device 36, first start port 33, second start port 34, through gate 35, and discharge passage.

Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram that explains how the presence or absence of a goal is detected. First, with reference to Figure 17(A), the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as goal information) from goal detection sensors 44a to 44h will be explained. Figure 17(A) is a timing chart that explains the timing for monitoring each goal information item.

As shown in Figure 17 (A), in a configuration in which the timer interrupt process (Figure 13) is initiated at a cycle of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process of monitoring the goal scoring information is performed twice (steps S10301 and S10303) during each timer interrupt process. The process of monitoring each set of goal scoring information is performed at different times, but the process of monitoring the goal scoring information for the first side (step S10301) is performed when a time T2 has elapsed since the timer interrupt process was initiated.

In this case, the timing at which the ball entry detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is before processes whose processing times are prone to fluctuate, such as the game round control process and the electric support process, and furthermore, the processes executed in the timer interrupt process before the ball entry detection process are processes whose processing times are relatively less likely to fluctuate. Therefore, the period until the process of monitoring the first ball entry information in each processing round of the timer interrupt process begins is the same, approximately the same, or similar at T2. Therefore, of the processes that monitor a set of ball entry information included in each processing round of the timer interrupt process, the process of monitoring the first ball entry information is executed periodically.

Furthermore, among the processes for monitoring each set of scoring information, a wait process for scoring detection (step S10302) is executed between the process for monitoring the leading scoring information (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the trailing scoring information (step S10303). However, this wait process simply waits until a certain wait time T3 has elapsed without executing any processing. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of scoring information included in each processing session of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the trailing scoring information is executed periodically.

Next, with reference to Figure 17(B), we will explain the calculations performed when a goal determination is made. Figure 17(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the calculations performed when a goal determination is made. Note that while various calculations are actually performed in units of one bit, the following explanation will explain the calculations in units of one byte. However, a configuration in which calculations are actually performed in units of one byte as described below may also be used.

In the case of Figure 17 (B), first, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information from the first side during the nth timer interrupt process, "00100000" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1, as shown in Figure 17 (B1). In this case, the ball entry information from the third winning hole detection sensor 44f of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h indicates that a game ball has been detected (hereinafter also referred to as "ball entry information"), and the ball entry information from the other sensors indicates that a game ball has not been detected (hereinafter also referred to as "no ball entry information").

Furthermore, in the process of monitoring the subsequent ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process, as shown in Figure 17 (B2), "10100000" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h and the third winning opening detection sensor 44f each indicate ball entry information, while the other sensors indicate no ball entry information.

When the information in the first goal scoring determination area WA1 and the second goal scoring determination area WA2 is set as described above, the result of the AND operation will be "00100000," as shown in Figure 17 (B3), and this information will be set in the first post-calculation area WA3 as the goal scoring information monitoring result in the nth timer interrupt processing. Note that if the goal scoring information monitoring result in the n-1th timer interrupt processing is set in the first post-calculation area WA3, the goal scoring information monitoring result in the nth timer interrupt processing will be set in the second post-calculation area WA4. The goal scoring determination process is performed using the goal scoring information monitoring result in the n-1th time and the goal scoring information monitoring result in the nth time, but the details of this process will be omitted here.

Next, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information from the other side during the n+1th timer interrupt process, "10100110" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1, as shown in Figure 17 (B4). In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, the second starting hole detection sensor 44c, and the first starting hole detection sensor 44b each indicate a ball entry, while the other sensors indicate a no-ball entry.

Furthermore, in the process of monitoring the subsequent ball entry information in the n+1th timer interrupt process, as shown in Figure 17 (B5), "10100010" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, and the first starting hole detection sensor 44b each indicate a ball has entered, while the other sensors indicate a no-ball entry.

When the information in the first scoring determination area WA1 and the second scoring determination area WA2 is set as described above, the result of the AND operation is "10100010" as shown in Figure 17 (B6), and this information is set in the second post-calculation area WA4 as the result of monitoring the scoring information in the timer interrupt processing of the n+1th processing round.

Then, in the ball entry determination process (Figure 16) for the n+1th timer interrupt process, the results of the ball entry information monitoring for the nth timer interrupt process are first read from the first post-calculation area WA3, and an inversion process is performed on the read monitoring result information. This results in "11011111," as shown in Figure 17 (B7). The result of the inversion process is then ANDed with the results of the ball entry information monitoring for the n+1th timer interrupt process. This results in "10000010," as shown in Figure 17 (B8). In this case, the ball entry determination process determines that the discharge passage detection sensor 44h has detected a game ball entry, and also determines that the first start port detection sensor 44b has detected a game ball entry.

Also, as shown in Figure 17 (B4), in the process of monitoring the leading ball entry information during the n+1th timer interrupt process, the second start gate detection sensor 44c indicates that a ball has entered the game, but this is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if a switch from no-ball entry information to ball entry information is confirmed, it is not immediately determined that a ball has entered the game; rather, it is determined that a ball has entered the game if the ball entry information is confirmed multiple times. Therefore, as shown in Figure 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the trailing ball entry information during the n+1th timer interrupt process, the second start gate detection sensor 44c indicates that a ball has not entered the game, and the occurrence of electrical noise is not treated as a game ball entering the game.

In addition, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f indicates a ball has entered the game during both the process of monitoring one set of ball entry information during the nth timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of ball entry information during the n+1th timer interrupt process. This indicates that the sensor is continuing to detect a game ball whose entry has already been detected. In this case, the occurrence of a ball is determined on the condition that the monitoring result of the ball entry information during the nth timer interrupt process is "0," so a single game ball entering the game is not treated as multiple balls entering the game.

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h are monitored. If a ball entry corresponding to the awarding of a game ball occurs, the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, and 15 prize ball counter are incremented according to the location of the ball entry. If any of these counters is 1 or greater, a prize ball command is set in the prize ball command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (Figure 13), and the set prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70. In this case, the prize ball command output setting is performed only once per processing of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is 2 or greater, only one 15 prize ball command is sent per processing. However, this is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of prize ball commands (e.g., two or three) may be sent per processing.

It is also possible that the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, and 15 prize ball counter are all equal to or greater than "1." In this case, the output of the prize ball command with the greater number of prize balls will take priority. In other words, the output of the 15 prize ball command will take priority over the output of the 10 prize ball command and the output of the 3 prize ball command, and the output of the 10 prize ball command will take priority over the output of the 3 prize ball command.

When the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 15 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Also, when the 10 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 10 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Also, when the 3 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 3 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 3 prize ball counter is decremented by 1.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main processing when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300.

In step S10501, it is determined whether calculation data including prize ball count data and calculation execution conditions has been received. If it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. In other words, the process continues in an infinite loop without proceeding to the next step S10502 until calculation data is received.

In step S10502, the received prize ball count data is stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306. Then, proceed to step S10503, where the received calculation execution conditions are stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Then, proceed to step S10504.

In step S10504, a setting completion command is sent to the main CPU 62x, indicating that storage of the prize ball count data in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 has been completed and storage of the calculation execution conditions in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 has been completed. Then, proceed to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether the bit in buffer 302 contains ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (the bit has a "1" stored in it). If it is determined in step S10505 that the bit in buffer 302 contains ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process proceeds to step S10506, where 1 is added to the counter in the register corresponding to the bit in buffer 302. Specifically, for example, if the bit in buffer 302 corresponding to the first starting hole ball entry information is "1" and the bit corresponding to normal mode is "1", 1 is added to the counter in register 304 corresponding to the number of balls entering the special prize hole N _S , and 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the special prize hole during normal mode. Then, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10505 that there is no ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x in the bit of the buffer 302 (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 has been met. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT stored in the register 304 is 500, i.e., whether or not the number of game balls launched onto the game board 30 has reached 500. In step S10507, if it is determined that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 has been met (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

In step S10508, calculations are performed to calculate various game history information based on the prize ball count data stored in prize ball count data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls that have entered each entrance stored in register 304. Then, the process proceeds to step S10509, where the calculated various game history information is stored in calculation result storage memory 309. Then, the process proceeds to step S10510, where the number of game balls that have entered each entrance stored in register 304 is cleared to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S10511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 are not met (S10507: NO), the process proceeds to step S10511 without executing steps S10508 to S10510.

In step S10511, it is determined whether a transmission request command for game history information has been received from the inspection machine 320. If it is determined that a transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512, where the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 displays the received game history information on the display unit 328. After executing step S10512, the process returns to step S10505, and the processing from step S10505 onwards is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10511 that a transmission request command for game history information has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the processing of step S10512, and the processing from step S10505 onwards is repeated.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate game history information, which is information that correlates with the behavior of game balls in games that have been played. If the gaming machine has been illegally modified, the calculated game history information may be an unnatural value that differs from the expected value. Therefore, by checking the game history information, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of games can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 includes a calculation result storage memory 309 that stores the calculated game history information in a non-volatile manner. Because the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in a game that has been played, the game history information differs for each pachinko machine 10 and is unique to that pachinko machine 10. In other words, the game history information reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. According to this embodiment, the game history information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300, which is stored inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by obtaining the game history information from the pachinko machine 10 main body itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall, information regarding the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be obtained by a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, because pachinko machines 10 are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from a hall computer. In such cases, conventional pachinko machines 10 are unable to retain information regarding the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores game history information, which reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, in the calculation result memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 housed inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10. This allows game history information to be acquired from the pachinko machine 10 even when the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can always maintain a one-to-one association between the pachinko machine 10 and game history information, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether installed in a gaming hall or in circulation), and can manage and inspect the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. This improves the soundness of gameplay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are both mounted on the main MPU 62 and are configured to operate from the same power source. Therefore, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by a hall computer, even if a malfunction occurs in the power system of the hall computer or in the processing of the hall computer, the game history information can be calculated as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. If the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated from different power sources, a malfunction in the power supply to the game history management chip 300 could result in a malfunction in which the game history information cannot be calculated even though a game is being played by the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated from the same power source, and therefore the game history information can be calculated as long as a game is playable. This improves the reliability of the game history information.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, a space where traces of opening and closing (also known as traces of opening or unsealing) remain. Therefore, physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309 leaves traces of the board box being opened. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is altered through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, it is possible to determine this alteration from the traces on the board box. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the game history information can be prevented. Pachinko machines 10 are often circulated, and therefore come into various external contact during distribution. However, since the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, where traces of opening and closing remain, unauthorized alteration of the game history information by someone can be prevented, even in a situation where pachinko machines 10 are circulated frequently. Furthermore, because the gaming history information is information acquired based on games that have been played, it is possible to use the gaming history information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, according to this embodiment, by preventing unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected appropriately. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, thereby being able to calculate the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the prize balls paid out. Furthermore, even if different prize ball count data is set for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 can calculate correct game history information using the prize ball count data set for each type of pachinko machine 10. If the game machine has been illegally modified, the calculated game history information may be an unnatural value that differs from the expected value. Therefore, by confirming correct game history information, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gameplay can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x sends a signal including the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300. Therefore, even if the game history management chip 300 is configured in such a way that it cannot access the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, or in such a way that it cannot grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, the game history management chip 300 can obtain the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the main processing of the master CPU 62x, the timer interrupt process is not permitted to be interrupted and the game ball launch control process included in the timer interrupt process is not executed until a setting completion command is received. In other words, game balls are not launched until the prize ball count data has been completely stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306, which prevents game balls from being omitted from the calculation of game history information by the game history management chip 300.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, game history information is calculated and stored for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. Therefore, even if there is variation in the time it takes for each pachinko machine 10 to detect 500 game balls, game history information that is not affected by that variation can be calculated and stored. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which game balls are fired, highly accurate game history information that is less affected by this can be calculated and stored. Furthermore, the required storage capacity can be reduced compared to a configuration in which ball entry information for each ball entry port is stored as is.

Different types (models) of pachinko machines 10 have different gameplay characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing calculations to calculate game history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10. According to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and can therefore execute calculations to calculate game history information when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10 are met.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 performs calculations to calculate the game history information, it erases the number of game balls that have entered each entrance (counter value) stored in the register 304, making it possible to store information regarding the number of game balls that have entered the register 304 again. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the register 304.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320, which enables the inspection machine 320 to display the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10. The inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can then check the gaming history information displayed on the inspection machine 320.

A4. Other aspects of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 was set to 500 game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. However, the calculation execution condition may also be set to a time interval for executing the calculation. For example, the time interval for executing the calculation may be set to one hour, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may calculate the game history information every hour. An inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the detailed game history information calculated every hour and appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, since different types (models) of pachinko machines 10 have different game characteristics, the optimal conditions (time intervals) for executing calculations to calculate game history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even in this aspect 1, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and can execute calculations when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10 are met.

The CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 may also be configured to measure the elapsed time since the calculation was performed and determine whether or not the player is playing, suspending measurement of the elapsed time during periods when it is determined that no play is being performed. Specifically, for example, if there is no ball-winning information in the bits of the buffer 302 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., three minutes), it may determine that no play is being performed and suspend measurement of the elapsed time, and if ball-winning information is confirmed in the bits of the buffer 302, it may determine that play has resumed and resume measurement of the elapsed time. With this configuration, gaming history information can be calculated only for periods when play is actually being performed.

The elapsed time may be measured using a timer counter, or by providing an RTC (Real-Time Clock) and using the RTC's date and time information. It may also be configured to calculate game history information at predetermined times.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 was set to the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reaching 500. However, the calculation execution condition may also be set to the detection of a power interruption. Specifically, when the power outage monitoring circuit 86 detects a power interruption, it outputs a signal indicating the occurrence of a power interruption to the game history management chip 300. Upon receiving this signal, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 determines that a power interruption has occurred and calculates game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is composed of volatile memory, and the ball count information is erased. This configuration allows the game history information to be calculated based on the number of game balls detected during the period from when power was supplied to the pachinko machine 10 was first supplied to the pachinko machine 10 until the power interruption occurred. In other words, the game history information is calculated for each period from the opening to the closing of business hours of the game hall, meaning that the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, inspectors of the pachinko machine 10 can easily ascertain whether or not there has been a change in the characteristics of the game history information across the business days of the gaming hall, and can appropriately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified, etc. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by configuring the chip with a capacitor 87 that supplies power to the gaming history management chip 300 even after a power outage occurs, the CPU 308 can reliably complete the calculation of gaming history information and the storage of the gaming history information in the calculation result storage memory 309.

<Aspect 3>
In the first embodiment, the master CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. With this configuration, the game history information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, allowing an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to check the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 without using a dedicated device for checking the game history information (such as the inspection device 320). Note that it is preferable that the master CPU 62x be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309 but not be able to change data, etc. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, etc.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and an LED lamp may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., a predetermined location on the main display unit 45) to indicate that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy a predetermined condition. For example, the LED lamp may be configured to illuminate when a specific value included in the game history information (e.g., a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, or a payout ratio (during normal mode)) falls outside a predetermined range. This configuration allows a pachinko machine inspector to easily identify a pachinko machine 10 in which a specific value included in the game history information falls outside the predetermined range. Furthermore, by checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails near the first starting hole 33 or the general winning holes (the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c) have been tampered with, the payout ratio (in normal mode) will fall outside the predetermined range (e.g., 0.60 to 0.70) assumed when the pachinko machine was designed. Therefore, by configuring the LED lamp to light up when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is no longer within the predetermined range (e.g., 0.60 to 0.70), it is possible to properly determine whether the nails near the first starting hole 33 or the general winning holes (the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c) have been tampered with.

Furthermore, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp may be determined depending on the degree of deviation of a specific value included in the gaming history information (e.g., the combination ratio, consecutive combination ratio, or payout ratio (in normal mode)) from a predetermined range. For example, the first LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the combination ratio is within a predetermined range (0.70 or less), purple light when the combination ratio is 0.71 to 0.80, and red light when the combination ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the consecutive combination ratio is within a predetermined range (0.60 or less), purple light when the combination ratio is 0.61 to 0.70, and red light when the combination ratio is 0.71 to 1.00. Alternatively, the third LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), purple light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is between 0.71 and 0.80, and red light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is between 0.81 and 1.00. This configuration allows an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to easily determine how much a specific value included in the game history information deviates from the predetermined range. Preferably, the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309 but cannot change data. This configuration prevents the game history information from being destroyed or overwritten due to noise, program bugs, or other factors.

<Aspect 5>
In the first embodiment, the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x), but the game history management chip 300 may be configured to be able to access the prize ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 may access the main ROM 63 immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to obtain the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions), and store the obtained calculation data in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. With such a configuration, the processing load on the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the first embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to calculate gaming history information such as the ratio of winning devices, but the number of winning balls per 500 balls stored in the register may be stored as is, and the inspection machine 320 may calculate the gaming history information. This configuration can reduce the processing load on the gaming history management chip 300. Details of aspect 6 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 has a prize ball count data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

As in the first embodiment above, the prize ball count data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball count data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. Also, as in the first embodiment above, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setup process that is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball count data that has been set in this pachinko machine 10.

The memory execution condition memory area stores memory execution conditions that are the conditions under which the game history management chip 300 executes the memory process described below. In this mode 6, the memory execution condition is stored as the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaching 500. This memory execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setup process that is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the memory execution conditions that have been set for this pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information for each entry port from the CPU 62x, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, a prize ball number data memory 306 that stores prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a memory execution condition memory 307a that stores memory execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the overall game history management chip 300, and a ball number memory 309a that sequentially stores the numbers of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in the register 304. The above-mentioned storage process is a process of storing the numbers of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in the register 304 in the ball number memory 309a.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment 6, the number of winning balls information stored in the winning ball number storage memory 309a and the number of winning balls data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

The inspection machine 320 is equipped with a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays various information, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the number of balls entered stored in the number of balls entered storage memory 309a and the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates the game playing history information based on the received number of balls entered and the number of prize balls data, and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Figure 20 is an explanatory diagram that schematically illustrates the processing details of the gaming history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 in aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The processing performed by the buffer 302 and register 304 is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed description will be omitted.

The prize ball count data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball count data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this mode 6, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306. Therefore, the content of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63.

The memory execution condition storage memory 307a is a memory for storing the memory execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the memory execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted by the CPU 62x to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the memory execution condition storage memory 307a. Therefore, the contents of the memory execution conditions stored in the memory execution condition storage memory 307a are the same as the contents of the memory execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63.

The CPU 308 determines whether the stored execution condition stored in the stored execution condition memory 307a is met, and if it determines that the stored execution condition is met, stores information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the register 304 in the entry ball number memory 309a, and resets the value of each counter in the register 304 to "0." In this aspect 6, the CPU 308 stores information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the register 304 in the entry ball number memory 309a each time the value of the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500. Note that, hereinafter, information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term entry ball number information group."

Memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls is a memory that sequentially stores information about the number of scoring balls stored in register 304 (short-term scoring ball count information group). In this embodiment, it is configured as non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even if the power supply is cut off. Memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls also stores information about the order in which the short-term scoring ball count information group was written. If there is no free area to write a short-term scoring ball count information group, CPU 308 stores the short-term scoring ball count information group in the area where the short-term scoring ball count information group with the oldest written order is stored. In other words, memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls is configured to overwrite the oldest short-term scoring ball count information group in order (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent short-term scoring ball count information group is always stored.

In this aspect 6, the memory for storing the number of game balls 309a has a capacity capable of storing 1,200 sets of short-term game ball count information, which is information about the number of game balls that enter each game ball entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30. For example, if game balls are launched for 10 consecutive hours in one day, 60,000 game balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term game ball count information will be stored in the memory for storing the number of game balls 309a in one day. Therefore, the memory for storing the number of game balls 309a can store sets of short-term game ball count information for the most recent 10 days.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the gaming history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the short-term ball count information group and the prize ball count data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates gaming history information such as the ratio of special devices based on the short-term ball count information group and the prize ball count data, and displays the calculated gaming history information on the display unit 328.

Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320, like the CPU 308 in the first embodiment described above, is capable of calculating one short-term gaming history information group for one short-term ball entry count information group, and is also capable of adding up the number of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in each of multiple short-term ball entry count information groups and using this added number of game balls to calculate long-term gaming history information (long-term gaming history information group). In other words, the inspection machine 320 in this aspect 6 is capable of calculating not only short-term gaming history information groups based on the number of game balls that have entered each entry port over a short period in which 500 game balls have been launched, but also long-term gaming history information groups based on the number of game balls that have entered each entry port over a long period in which, for example, 600,000 game balls (approximately 10 days' worth) have been launched.

In addition, in this aspect 6, the following configuration may also be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received group of short-term ball entry count information on the display unit 328. The inspection machine 320 may also be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and display each received counter value on the display unit 328.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the gaming history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, a configuration in which the main CPU 62x transmits the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 to the inspection machine 320 may be used. With this configuration, the prize ball count data storage memory 306 can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming history management chip 300.

Furthermore, the storage execution conditions stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be configured to set a time interval for executing the storage process. For example, one hour may be set as the time interval for executing the storage process, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the storage process every time one hour has passed.

Furthermore, the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be set to the detection of a power outage. Specifically, when the power outage monitoring circuit 86 detects a power outage, it outputs a signal indicating that a power outage has occurred to the gaming history management chip 300, and the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300, upon receiving the signal, determines that a power outage has occurred and executes storage processing.

In addition, in aspect 6, the calculations for calculating the gaming history information are performed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but some or all of the calculations may be performed by the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300, and the gaming history information resulting from the calculations may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 7>
In the first embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to calculate gaming history information such as the ratio of winning combinations, but the configuration may also be such that the ball entry information is stored as is in the buffer, and the inspection machine 320 calculates gaming history information based on the ball entry information. This configuration reduces the processing load on the gaming history management chip 300. Details of aspect 7 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

In this aspect 7, the main MPU 62 is equipped with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date and time information to the gaming history management chip 300. The RTC 96 is equipped with a backup power supply, and can update the date and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 has a prize ball count data storage area. Note that in this mode 7, there is no calculation start condition storage area.

As in the first embodiment above, the prize ball count data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball count data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. Also, as in the first embodiment above, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setup process that is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball count data that has been set in this pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information for each entry port from the CPU 62x, a prize ball count data storage memory 306 that stores prize ball count data acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the overall game history management chip 300, and an entry information storage memory 309b that sequentially stores game ball entry information for each entry port stored in the buffer 302.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 to the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the winning ball information stored in the winning ball information storage memory 309b and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

The inspection machine 320 is equipped with a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays various information, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of ball scoring information, etc. and prize ball count data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the ball scoring information, etc. stored in the ball scoring information storage memory 309b and the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates game playing history information based on the received ball scoring information, etc. and prize ball count data, and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic overview of the processing performed by the gaming history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320 in aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

The processing performed in buffer 302 is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so further explanation will be omitted.

The goal information storage memory 309b sequentially stores goal information stored in the buffer 302 and information about the game status when the game ball entered the game. In this embodiment, it is configured with non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even if the power supply is cut off. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when goal information and information about the game status are stored, the date and time information when the game ball entered each goal opening is added and stored. The goal information storage memory 309b also stores information about the order in which goal information, etc. was written. If there is no free area to write goal information, etc., the CPU 308 stores the goal information, etc., in the area where the oldest goal information, etc. is stored. In other words, the goal information storage memory 309b is configured to overwrite the oldest goal information, etc., in order (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent goal information, etc. is always stored.

The prize ball count data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball count data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 7, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306. Therefore, the content of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63. Furthermore, in this aspect 7, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection device 320.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of ball entry information and prize ball count data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the ball entry information, game status information, and date and time information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b, as well as the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306, to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates game playing history information based on the received information and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 7 is not only capable of calculating gaming history information (short-term gaming history information group) based on the number of balls that enter each entrance over a short period in which 500 gaming balls are shot, but is also capable of calculating gaming history information (long-term gaming history information group) based on the number of balls that enter each entrance over a long period in which, for example, 600,000 gaming balls (approximately 10 days' worth) are shot. In other words, it is possible to calculate gaming history information for any period of time.

Furthermore, in this aspect 7, since date and time information (year, month, day, and time information) is added to the ball entry information, etc., the inspection machine 320 can calculate the gaming history information by specifying a date and time range for which the gaming history information is to be calculated, within the range of the date and time information added to the received ball entry information, etc. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can perform a detailed inspection based on the gaming history information for which a date and time range is specified.

In addition, in this aspect 7, the following configuration may also be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received ball entry information, etc., on the display unit 328. With this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can also ascertain the date and time when a game ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the gaming history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, a configuration in which the main CPU 62x transmits the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 to the inspection machine 320 may be used. With this configuration, the prize ball count data storage memory 306 can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming history management chip 300.

In addition, in aspect 7, the calculations for calculating the gaming history information are performed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but it is also possible to have the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 perform some or all of the calculations, and transmit the gaming history information resulting from the calculations to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 8>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63, and the gaming history management chip 300 acquires these conditions from the main ROM 63. However, the gaming history management chip 300 may also be configured to initially store these conditions in non-volatile memory. This configuration prevents the occurrence of a situation in which inappropriate calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63, making it impossible to properly store gaming history information or scored ball count information. For example, this prevents the occurrence of a situation in which an extremely short period (e.g., the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT = 5) is stored as the calculation execution condition or storage execution condition, resulting in only an extremely short period (e.g., about one hour) of gaming history information or scored ball count information being stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 or scored ball count storage memory 309a.

<Aspect 9>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to include functions for storing the number of gaming balls that have entered each entry port, calculating gaming history information such as the ratio of game devices, and storing the calculated gaming history information. However, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the gaming history management chip 300) may also include some of these functions. Alternatively, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the gaming history management chip 300) may include all of these functions without including the gaming history management chip 300. This configuration eliminates the need for a separate gaming history management chip 300, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. However, including the gaming history management chip 300 reduces the processing load on the main CPU 62x.

<Aspect 10>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to have some or all of the functions of a functional unit other than the gaming history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 or the main CPU 62x), or some or all of the functions of the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to be provided by a functional unit other than the gaming history management chip 300. For example, if the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to have some of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and manufacturing costs of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced, and if the inspection machine 320 is configured to have some of the functions of the gaming history management chip 300, the processing load and manufacturing costs of the gaming history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the first embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to calculate gaming history information such as the ratio of winning combinations, but the main CPU 62x may calculate the gaming history information without providing the gaming history management chip 300. Details of mode 11 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. This aspect 11 differs from the first embodiment (Figure 5) in that it does not include a game history management chip 300 and that the main RAM 64 includes a ball count storage area and a calculation result storage area.

The main CPU 62x updates the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the entrance ball number storage area of the main RAM 64 based on the game ball entry information received from the input/output port 62a. Then, when the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 are met, it performs calculations based on the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the entrance ball number storage area of the main RAM 64 to calculate game history information, and stores this game history information in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64. A detailed explanation is provided below.

24 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating an overview of the processing in the main MPU 62 in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is met, and if it determines that the calculation execution condition is met, stores information regarding the number of game balls that have entered each entrance, stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x, in the entering ball number storage area of the main RAM 64. In this aspect 11, the main CPU 62x stores information regarding the number of game balls that have entered each entrance, in the entering ball number storage area of the main RAM 64, every time the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x reaches 500. As mentioned above, the information regarding the number of game balls that enter each entry port counted while the 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30 is also referred to as the "short-term entry number information group."

The number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 is an area that sequentially stores information about the number of scoring balls (short-term scoring ball number information group). The number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 also stores information about the order in which the short-term scoring ball number information group was written. If there is no free area to write a short-term scoring ball number information group, the main CPU 62x stores the newly written short-term scoring ball number information group in the area where the oldest written short-term scoring ball number information group is stored. In other words, the number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 is configured to overwrite the oldest short-term scoring ball number information group in order (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent short-term scoring ball number information group is always stored.

In this aspect 11, the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 has a capacity capable of storing 1,200 sets of short-term entering ball count information, which is information about the number of entering balls into each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30. For example, if game balls are launched for 10 consecutive hours in one day, 60,000 game balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term entering ball count information will be stored in the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 per day. Therefore, the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 can store sets of short-term entering ball count information for the most recent 10 days.

The main CPU 62x then calculates a new set of short-term game history information for each newly stored set of short-term game ball count information each time the calculation execution conditions are met. Furthermore, the main CPU 62x adds up the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in each of the multiple short-term game ball count information groups, including the newly stored short-term game ball count information group, each time the calculation execution conditions are met, and uses this added number of game balls to calculate long-term game history information (long-term game history information group). In other words, the main CPU 62x in this aspect 11 can calculate not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of game balls entering each entry port over a short period in which 500 game balls were fired, but also a long-term game history information group based on the number of game balls entering each entry port over a long period in which, for example, 600,000 game balls (approximately 10 days' worth) were fired. The calculated game history information is then stored in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64.

The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 is composed of an area that sequentially stores short-term gaming history information groups and an area that stores long-term gaming history information groups. The area that sequentially stores short-term gaming history information groups also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term gaming history information groups were written. If there is no free area to write a short-term gaming history information group, the main CPU 62x stores the newly calculated short-term gaming history information group in the area that stores the short-term gaming history information group with the oldest written order. In other words, the area that sequentially stores short-term gaming history information groups of the main RAM 64 is configured to overwrite the oldest short-term gaming history information group first (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent short-term gaming history information group is always stored. The area that stores the long-term gaming history information group is overwritten with a newly calculated long-term gaming history information group each time the calculation execution condition is met. In other words, the area that stores the long-term gaming history information group will store the latest long-term gaming history information group calculated based on multiple short-term ball scoring information groups, including the latest short-term ball scoring information group.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the main CPU 62x. When the main CPU 62x receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 then displays the received game history information on the display unit 328.

In addition, in this aspect 11, when a predetermined operation is performed to display the game history information on the pattern display device 41, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is output to the audio and light control device 90 via the input/output port 62x and displayed on the pattern display device 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power supplied from the capacitor 87 is configured to retain the short-term ball count information group and game history information stored in the main RAM 64 for several days.

With this configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes processes for progressing the game, such as the jackpot lottery process, and processes for calculating and storing game history information. This eliminates the need for a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing game history information, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, the main RAM 64 is configured to store a group of short-term ball entry information, which is information regarding the number of game balls that entered each entry port counted while 500 game balls were launched onto the game board 30.This makes it possible to calculate the most recent group of short-term game history information and long-term game history information while significantly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64, compared to a configuration in which game ball entry information is stored in its original format (for example, a configuration in which it is stored in the format of the game ball entry information stored in the game ball entry information storage memory 309b in Figure 22).

The main CPU 62x is not limited to being configured to calculate both short-term gaming history information and long-term gaming history information as gaming history information, but may be configured to calculate only one of these.

<Aspect 12>
25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 12 of the first embodiment. The difference from the above-mentioned aspect 11 (FIG. 23) is that the main MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x, which is a rewritable non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even when the power supply is cut off. This flash memory 64x is provided with a ball entry number storage area for storing the short-term ball entry number information group in the above-mentioned aspect 11, and a calculation result storage area for storing the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-mentioned aspect 11.

The main CPU 62x in this mode 12 is configured to store the short-term ball count information group and the calculated game history information in flash memory 64x each time the calculation execution conditions are met.

This configuration reduces the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10 compared to a configuration that includes a game history management chip 300. Furthermore, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for an extended period of time, the short-term ball entry count information group and game history information are retained. Therefore, no matter what state the pachinko machine 10 is in (for example, a distribution state where the pachinko machine 10 is not supplied with power for an extended period of time), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected.

In addition, since there is no need to provide an area in the main RAM 64 for storing the short-term ball entry number information group and game history information, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 can be reduced, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 13>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to switch between a game mode, which is a mode in which a game progress process, which is a process for progressing a game, can be executed, and an inspection mode, which is a mode in which game history information is output to the inspection machine 320. The game progress process is a process that is executed based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and includes a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a process for displaying a variable pattern on the main display unit 45, and a process for opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b and the electric role device 34a.

In addition, in inspection mode, the game progress process may not be executed even if a gaming ball passes through the area detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h.

Specifically, for example, when the system transitions to inspection mode, the inspection mode flag in the main control device 60, which determines whether or not the system is in inspection mode, turns ON. The main control device 60 then determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and if it determines that the inspection mode flag is ON, it does not proceed to the processing flow for executing the normal game progress processing, but instead proceeds to the processing flow for inspection mode. As a result, even if the main control device 60 receives a signal from the ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h indicating that a game ball has been detected, it is configured not to execute processing based on the reception of that signal (for example, processing to obtain the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, processing to pay out prize balls, processing to send commands to the sound and light emission control device 90, etc.).

This configuration makes it possible to execute in test mode processes that are undesirable for execution in parallel with game progress processing, or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. Furthermore, this configuration means that game progress processing is not executed in test mode, so when developing a program for processing to be executed in test mode, there is no need to consider countermeasures for when game progress processing is executed in parallel, which significantly improves the efficiency of developing programs for processing to be executed in test mode.

Furthermore, the content of the game history information changes when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration were adopted in which processing to output game history information was executed in parallel with game progress processing, the game progress processing would be executed while an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 was inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information, causing the content of the game history information to change from time to time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, with the configuration of aspect 13, the game history information is output in an inspection mode in which game progress processing is not executed, even if a game ball has passed through a specified area, so it is possible to prevent the content of the game history information from changing while it is being output. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can carry out the inspection smoothly.

Note that the manner in which the gaming history information is output in the inspection mode is not limited to outputting the gaming history information to the inspection device 320 and displaying it, and other manners are also possible. For example, the gaming history information may be output to the symbol display device 41 and displayed.

In addition, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to game history information, and may be other information. For example, it may be other information based on the detection of game balls by the ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h, such as game ball entry information or information on the number of game balls that have entered.

<Aspect 14>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between a game mode and an inspection mode, if an inspector performs a predetermined operation (hereinafter also referred to as a "mode switching operation") to transition from the game mode to the inspection mode while the game progress processing in the game mode is being executed, the configuration may be such that the game mode is transitioned to the inspection mode when the game progress processing being executed has been completed up to a predetermined processing stage.

Specifically, for example, if a mode switching operation is performed by pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button during game progress processing in game mode, processing will be completed up to a predetermined processing stage for each game progress processing being executed (jackpot lottery processing, electric role release lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, pattern change display processing on the main display unit 45, opening and closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b and electric role device 34a, etc.). Then, once the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, processing after that processing stage will not be executed and the system will enter a standby state. Then, when all of the game progress processing being executed has been completed up to the predetermined processing stage, the system will transition from game mode to inspection mode.

This configuration reduces the occurrence of processing problems when transitioning to inspection mode compared to a configuration in which the game mode is transitioned to inspection mode immediately after a mode switching operation is performed, regardless of whether the ongoing game progress processing has completed up to a predetermined processing stage.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the game mode is switched to the inspection mode immediately after a mode switching operation is performed, regardless of whether the ongoing game progress processing has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, if a mode switching operation is performed while the main display unit 45 is executing a pattern change display process as part of the game progress processing in game mode, the game mode will switch to the inspection mode in the middle of the pattern change display on the main display unit 45, making it difficult to control the timing of the pattern stop and the pattern change time. In contrast, with the configuration of aspect 14, for example, if a mode switching operation is performed while the pattern change display process is being executed in game mode, the game mode will switch to the inspection mode when the pattern change display process has ended and the processing has completed up to the processing stage where the patterns have stopped. This makes it possible to prevent processing malfunctions such as difficulty in controlling the timing of the pattern stop and the pattern change time.

In addition, when transitioning (returning) from inspection mode to game mode, the remaining game progress processing steps that were scheduled to be executed before transitioning to inspection mode may be executed. This configuration can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable when the game progress processing they were hoping for ends in an incomplete state.

Furthermore, if a mode switching operation is performed while game progress processing is being executed in game mode, the system may be configured to transition from game mode to inspection mode when all of the game progress processing currently being executed is completed. This configuration can prevent processing errors from occurring when the game progress processing is resumed.

Furthermore, if a mode switching operation is performed during game progress processing in game mode, the game execution processing may be interrupted, and information that enables the interrupted game progress processing to be resumed may be stored in the main RAM 64, and once this storage is complete, the system may transition from game mode to inspection mode. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly transitions from game mode to inspection mode, making it possible to inspect many pachinko machines 10 in a short period of time.

Furthermore, the mode switching operation for transitioning from game mode to inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be performed in other ways. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button. Furthermore, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is performed may be performed.

<Aspect 15>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between game mode and inspection mode, if an automatic return condition is met during inspection mode, that is, 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode, the configuration may be such that the device transitions from inspection mode to game mode even if a predetermined operation for transitioning from inspection mode to game mode (for example, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button) has not been performed.

With this configuration, if 10 minutes have passed since the transition to inspection mode, the system is configured to transition from inspection mode to game mode even if the specified operation for transitioning from inspection mode to game mode has not been performed. This reliably prevents the machine from returning to game mode without performing the specified operation. For example, even if an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 using the game play history information output in inspection mode and then forgets to perform the specified operation, the machine will return to game mode 10 minutes after transitioning to inspection mode. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 does not return to a game mode in which game progress processing can be executed, preventing the player from playing the pachinko machine 10.

The automatic recovery condition is not limited to 10 minutes having passed since the transition to the inspection mode, and may be other conditions. For example, it may be 5 minutes having passed since the transition to the inspection mode, or 10 minutes having passed since the inspection device 320 was removed from the inspection terminals 65.

Furthermore, the specified operation for transitioning from inspection mode to game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button, and may be in other forms. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switch button.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a RAM clear button for initializing the main RAM 64 may be provided on the main control device 60, and when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button (hereinafter also referred to as an "erase operation") is performed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized).

Furthermore, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to switch between game mode and inspection mode. Furthermore, in a state after transitioning to inspection mode but before transitioning to game mode, such as during inspection mode, or when the power is turned off after transitioning to inspection mode, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be erased even if an erasure operation is performed by pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button.

With this configuration, even if an erase operation is performed to erase information stored in the main RAM 64 after transitioning to inspection mode but before transitioning to game mode, the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased. Therefore, even if an erase operation is accidentally performed in an attempt to transition to game mode after transitioning to inspection mode but before transitioning to game mode, the information can be prevented from being accidentally erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the erasure operation for erasing information stored in the main RAM 64 is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the operation for switching between game mode and inspection mode is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button, there is a risk that when attempting to switch from inspection mode to game mode by pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button, the player may accidentally press the RAM clear button while pressing the power button. However, with the configuration of aspect 16, even if an erasure operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button is performed after switching to inspection mode but before switching to game mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally erased.

More specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which the game progress processing being executed in game mode is temporarily stopped when transitioning from game mode to inspection mode, and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to inspection mode is stored in the main RAM 64, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the mode switch button to return from inspection mode to game mode, but accidentally presses the RAM clear button while pressing the power button, the information for resuming the game progress processing will be erased, making it impossible to resume the game progress processing after returning to inspection mode, which could be detrimental to the player. In contrast, the configuration of aspect 16 prevents the information stored in the main RAM 64 from being accidentally erased, even if the player accidentally presses the power button while pressing the RAM clear button in an attempt to transition to game mode after transitioning to inspection mode but before transitioning to game mode. This prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

The game history information may also be stored in the main RAM 64. With this configuration, there is no need to provide a separate dedicated memory for storing game history information, which reduces the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, when an erasure operation is executed, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (such as whether the power is on or off, or whether it is in game mode or inspection mode), and only information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (such as information stored to resume game progress processing) may be erased (initialized). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the intentional erasure of game history information that deviates from a predetermined specified range.

Note that the erase operation is not limited to pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and may be performed in other ways. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between a game mode and an inspection mode, when the main control device 60 transitions from the game mode to the inspection mode, it may transmit a game stop command to the audio and light-emitting control device 90, which is a command indicating that the game will be switched to the inspection mode and the game progress process will be temporarily stopped, and the game progress process that was being executed may be temporarily stopped in the inspection mode. Specifically, for example, if the main control device 60 transitions to the inspection mode while the main display unit 45 is displaying a varying pattern, it may turn off the display on the main display unit 45 and stop counting the time the patterns are varying on the main display unit 45. Furthermore, when the main control device 60 transitions from the inspection mode to the game mode, it may transmit a game resume command to the audio and light-emitting control device 90, which is a command indicating that the game will be switched to the game mode and the game progress process will be resumed.

The audio and light emitting control device 90 is configured to temporarily stop the currently running presentation when it receives a game stop command, and then resume the temporarily stopped presentation when it receives a game resume command. With this configuration, even when the main control device 60 transitions between game mode and inspection mode, it is possible to synchronize the game progress processing performed by the main control device 60 (e.g., the process of displaying changing patterns on the main display unit 45) with the presentation controlled by the audio and light emitting control device 90 (e.g., the process of displaying changing patterns on the pattern display device 41), preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable after transitioning to game mode.

The audio and light control device 90 may be configured not to stop the ongoing presentation even when it receives a game stop command. Specifically, for example, if a game stop command is received while the pattern display device 41 is displaying changing patterns, the device may continue to control the changing pattern display on the pattern display device 41, while displaying a layer of another image (for example, a black image) on top of the layer displaying the changing patterns. However, because the control of the changing pattern display on the pattern display device 41 continues, the changing pattern display continues below the black image layer. Then, when the pattern change time on the pattern display device 41 has elapsed, the changing pattern display below the black image layer ends, but the patterns do not stop but continue to sway slightly.

When a game resume command is received from the main control unit 60, the black image layer that was displayed above the layer displaying the changing symbols is removed, and the symbol layer is displayed again. At this time, the main control unit 60 transitions (returns) from inspection mode to game mode, and resumes the game progress processing (changing symbol display on the main display unit 45) that was stopped.

The main control device 60 then resumes the display of the changing patterns on the main display unit 45, where it had stopped counting the changing time, and when the remaining changing time has elapsed, that is, when it is time to stop the changing patterns on the main display unit 45, it sends a pattern stop command to the audio and light control device 90. Having received this pattern stop command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a pattern stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 completely stops the patterns that had been displayed in a slightly swaying manner on the pattern display device 41.

With this configuration, when the main control device 60 is in inspection mode, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off, and the display on the symbol display device 41 displays a black image. When the main control device 60 transitions from inspection mode to game mode, the display of the changing symbols on the main display unit 45, which had stopped counting the change time, resumes, and the symbols on the symbol display device 41 display a changing or slightly swaying display. The symbols on the symbol display device 41 also stop when the symbols on the main display unit 45 stop. This means that the display of the changing symbols on the main display unit 45 and the display of the changing symbols on the symbol display device 41 can be synchronized. Furthermore, since control of the currently running effects is not stopped even when a game stop command is received, malfunctions caused by temporarily stopping the control of the currently running effects can be prevented. For example, when control of effects is resumed after temporarily stopping control of effects, a discrepancy in the timing of multiple effects being executed, or a discrepancy between the video displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the audio output from the speaker 46, may occur.

In addition, if the main control device 60 is configured not to send a pattern stop command to the audio/luminescence control device 90 even when it is time to stop the pattern change on the main display unit 45, the pattern change display on the pattern display device 41 will continue to fluctuate slightly, and the pattern on the pattern display device 41 will stop when it receives a change command sent from the main control device 60 or a standby command sent when no hold information is stored.

<Aspect 18>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined time is reached. Specifically, for example, the game mode may be switched to the inspection mode when 11:10 PM is reached, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. With this configuration, the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 around 11:10 PM after the gaming hall closes, so that an inspector of the pachinko machines 10 can quickly inspect and check the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after the gaming hall closes, without having to go through the trouble of switching each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in response to receipt of a predetermined signal from the hall computer. With this configuration, for example, all pachinko machines 10 installed in a gaming hall can be switched to inspection mode all at once, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 can be displayed on each symbol display device 41. This allows pachinko machine 10 inspectors to quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without having to go through the trouble of switching each pachinko machine 10 from game mode to inspection mode.

<Aspect 19>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the game history information may be configured to be always displayed on the symbol display device 41. With such a configuration, the player or inspector can always check the game history information, and if an abnormality occurs, such as the game history information deviating from a predetermined range, the abnormality can be noticed immediately. As a result, the soundness of the game can be quickly ensured.

<Aspect 20>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a seven-segment display made up of seven light-emitting diodes may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the seven-segment display may display information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10. For example, when the main control device 60 transitions from the above-mentioned game mode to the inspection mode, the seven-segment display may be configured to display whether the combination ratio, payout ratio (in normal mode), etc. stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range.

More specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 transitions from game mode to inspection mode, a "1" is displayed on the seven-segment display, indicating that a display regarding the reel ratio will be made. If the reel ratio is within a predetermined range (specifically, if the reel ratio is 0.700 or less), an "O" indicating OK is displayed on the seven-segment display. On the other hand, if the reel ratio is not within the predetermined range, an "E" indicating an error is displayed on the seven-segment display. After the reel ratio display is made, a "2" is displayed on the seven-segment display, indicating that a display regarding the consecutive reel ratio will be made. If the consecutive reel ratio is within the predetermined range (specifically, if the consecutive reel ratio is 0.600 or less), an "O" indicating OK is displayed on the seven-segment display. On the other hand, if the consecutive reel ratio is not within the predetermined range, an "E" indicating an error is displayed on the seven-segment display. After the continuous feature ratio is displayed, the seven-segment display will display "2", indicating that the payout ratio (in normal mode) will be displayed, and if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a specified range (specifically, if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the range of 0.60 to 0.70), the seven-segment display will display "O", indicating OK; on the other hand, if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is not within the specified range, the seven-segment display will display "E", indicating an error.

This configuration makes it possible to quickly and easily check game history information such as the ratio of winning devices. Furthermore, because the seven-segment display consumes little power, it is possible to check game history information using only the small amount of power provided by capacitors and batteries installed inside the pachinko machine 10, even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

In addition, the seven-segment display may be configured to constantly display information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10. This configuration allows for quick and easy inspection of game history information, such as the ratio of winning combinations, without switching from game mode to inspection mode. Even in pachinko machines 10 that do not have an inspection mode, this allows for quick and easy inspection of game history information, such as the ratio of winning combinations. Furthermore, if the seven-segment display is configured to be located on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the seven-segment display is out of the player's field of vision, preventing the player from being distracted by the display on the seven-segment display and losing focus on the game. Meanwhile, when an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, he or she simply rotates the pachinko machine main body 12, which is supported by the hinge 15, toward himself or herself and checks the display on the seven-segment display located on the back of the pachinko machine main body 12, thereby allowing for quick and easy inspection of game history information, such as the ratio of winning combinations. Instead of a seven-segment display, other displays capable of displaying game history information in a recognizable manner may be used, such as a segment display made up of a number of light-emitting diodes other than seven.

<Aspect 21>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to calculate the game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 may be configured to transmit a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 during the initial setting process to the audio and light emitting control device 90, and the audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to calculate the game history information based on the acquired prize ball number data and the game ball entry information transmitted from the main control device 60, and to display the calculated game history information on the pattern display device 41.

With this configuration, even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is unable to access the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, or is unable to grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, the audio and light emitting control device 90 can still obtain the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, and calculate the game history information. Furthermore, because the audio and light emitting control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be significantly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 that can switch from the game mode to the inspection mode, but also to a gaming machine that can switch from the game mode to another mode. For example, they can be applied to a gaming machine that has a game status display mode that can display the status of processing related to the game, such as the status of the high probability mode flag or the high frequency support mode flag, the contents of stored pending information, etc.

<Aspect 23>
26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x calculates the above-mentioned game history information. The main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area). The first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for loading programs and the like for executing processes related to game progress, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for loading programs and the like for executing processes for calculating and displaying game history information (hereinafter also referred to as game history processes). When executing processes related to game progress (processes other than game history processes), the main CPU 62x writes information only to the first area of the main RAM 64, and when executing game history processes, it writes information only to the second area of the main RAM 64.

The first area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit ball entry detection information storage area, stack area, etc., which will be described later. The second area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit buffer area, prize ball tally buffer, calculation buffer, calculation result buffer, stack area, etc., which will be described later. These will be described in more detail later.

In addition, the input/output port 62a is connected to the game history information display unit 45z. The game history information display unit 45z is composed of four 7-segment displays and is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10. As will be described later, the game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x is displayed on this game history information display unit 45z.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) in mode 23 of the first embodiment. Note that in this mode, the timer interrupt processing is initiated at a 4 msec cycle, as in the first embodiment. Differences from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (Figure 13) described above include the content of the ball entry detection processing shown in step S10606, the addition of a game history process for calculating and displaying game history information as the final process of this timer interrupt processing (step S10616), and the omission of the ball entry detection information output process (step S10207 in Figure 13), which outputs ball entry detection information to the game history management chip. The remaining processing is the same as that described in the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (Figure 13). The ball entry detection processing of step S10606 shown in Figure 27 and the game history process of step S10616 are described below.

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 23 of the first embodiment. In this ball entry detection process in mode 23, if the previous (previous) timer interrupt process determines that there is no information ("0") in the bit of input port 62b, the current timer interrupt process determines that there is information ("1") in the bit of input port 62b, and the timer interrupt process subsequently determines that there is information ("1") in that bit again, then it is determined that a game ball has entered the ball entry hole corresponding to that bit. An example of the ball entry detection process is described below.

In step S10701, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 (Figure 14) of the input port 62b (hereinafter referred to as "scoring information") is read, and in step S10702, the read scoring information is stored in the first buffer, which is an 8-bit buffer. In other words, the first buffer is a buffer for storing scoring information read from each bit of the input port 62b during the current timer interrupt process. The second buffer, described below, is an 8-bit buffer for storing scoring information read from each bit of the input port 62b during the previous timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the first and second buffers are located in the first area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10702, the program proceeds to step S10703.

In step S10703, the ball entry determination counter stored in the main RAM 64 is set to 8. Then, the process proceeds to step S10704. The numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry ports, similar to the ball entry determination counter (step S10401) used in the ball entry determination process (Figure 16) of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in this embodiment, the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter, "8," corresponds to the 0th bit D0 of the large prize entry port 36a; "7" corresponds to the 1st bit D1 of the first starting port 33; "6" corresponds to the 2nd bit D2 of the second starting port 34; "5" corresponds to the 3rd bit D3 of the first prize entry port 32a; "4" corresponds to the 4th bit D4 of the second prize entry port 32b; "3" corresponds to the 5th bit D5 of the third prize entry port 32c; "2" corresponds to the 6th bit D6 of the through gate 35; and "1" corresponds to the 7th bit D7 of the discharge passage.

In step S10704, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the second buffer, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". If it is determined in step S10704 that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10704: NO), proceed to step S10705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10704 that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10704: YES), proceed to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10705 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10705, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the first buffer, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". In step S10705, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10705: YES), proceed to step S10706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10705 that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10705: NO), proceed to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10706 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10706, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the current input port 62b, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". In step S10706, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10706: YES), proceed to step S10707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10706: NO), proceed to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10707 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10707, it is determined which type of entry port the current numerical information of the entry determination counter indicates the bit corresponding to, and a ball entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the entry port corresponding to that bit is turned ON. Specifically, for example, if it is determined that the current numerical information of the entry determination counter indicates the bit corresponding to the special entry port 36a, the special entry port entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the special entry port 36a is turned ON. Furthermore, for example, if it is determined that the current numerical information of the entry determination counter indicates the bit corresponding to the second entry port 34, the second entry port entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the second entry port 34 is turned ON. After executing step S10707, proceed to step S10708.

In step S10708, the numerical information of the prize ball counter corresponding to the ball entry port where the ball entry flag was turned ON in step S10707, i.e., where it was determined that a game ball entered, is incremented by 1. Specifically, for example, if the large prize entry port ball entry flag is turned ON, the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by 1, and if the second start port ball entry flag is turned ON, the 3 prize ball counter is incremented by 1. After executing step S10708, proceed to step S10709.

In step S10709, the goal determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10710, it is determined whether the goal determination counter is "0".

If it is determined in step S10710 that the goal-scoring counter is not "0" (S10710: NO), steps S10704 to S10708 are executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the goal-scoring counter updated in step S10709. If steps S10704 to S10708 have been executed for the number of times the numerical information set in step S10703 has been executed, the goal-scoring counter will become "0," a positive determination is made in step S10710 (S10710: YES), and the process proceeds to step S10711.

In step S10711, the 8-bit scoring determination information stored in the first buffer is stored (copied) in the second buffer. As a result, the scoring determination information obtained from input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process will be referenced in the scoring detection process in the next timer interrupt process. After executing step S10711, proceed to step S10712.

In step S10712, ball entry detection information indicating that a game ball has been detected in the ball entry detection process of this timer interrupt process is stored in a ball entry detection information storage area capable of storing 8-bit information. Specifically, the ball entry detection information storage area stores, for each bit corresponding to each of the eight ball entry ports, a "1" if the ball entry flag is ON, and a "0" if the ball entry flag is OFF. For example, if the result of executing the ball entry detection process in this timer interrupt process is that the main prize entry port entry flag and the second start port entry flag are ON, and the ball entry flags corresponding to the other ball entry ports are OFF, the 8-bit ball entry detection information "00000101" is stored in the ball entry detection information storage area. This 8-bit ball entry detection information stored in the ball entry detection information storage area is referenced in the game history process described below. After step S10712 is executed, this ball entry detection process ends.

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the game history processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. This game history processing calculates the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, and executes processing to display these on the game history information display unit 45z. Specifically, the role ratio is calculated, and the calculated role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. Then, the consecutive role ratio is calculated, and the calculated consecutive role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. Then, the role ratio is calculated again, and the calculated role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. In this way, the role ratio and consecutive role ratio are alternately displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. An example of a specific process is described below.

In step S10801, a save process is executed to save information stored in the registers in the master CPU 62x (hereinafter referred to as register information) to the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. In this mode 23, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), before the game history process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) is executed, a process related to the progress of the game (steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27), which is a process other than the game history process, is executed. Therefore, in this save process, the register information related to the progress of the game is saved to the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the stack pointer in the master CPU 62x (the address value indicating the top level of the stack area in the first area) is saved (pushed) to the bottom of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. Then, the stack pointer of the master CPU 62x is set to the address value indicating the top level of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. Thereafter, the register information stored in the registers within the master CPU 62x is sequentially saved (pushed) to the stack area (the top level of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64) indicated by the stack pointer set in the master CPU 62x. By executing this saving process, the address value of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the master CPU 62x, allowing the master CPU 62x to execute the process of calculating and displaying the game history information described below using the second area of the master RAM 64. After executing step S10801, proceed to step S10802.

In step S10802, it is determined whether the abnormal flag stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is ON. The abnormal flag is a flag that is set ON when the prize ball tally value, described below, is an abnormal value. If it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormal flag is ON (S10802: YES), the process proceeds to step S10803, where the prize ball tally value is cleared to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S10804, where the abnormal flag is set OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S10805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormal flag is not ON (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to step S10805 without executing the processing of steps S10803 and S10804.

In step S10805, an OR operation is performed for each corresponding bit in the scoring detection information storage area and the buffer area, and the result of each OR operation (logical sum) is stored (overwritten) in the corresponding bit in the buffer area. Details of this process will be described later. The buffer area is an area that can store the same 8 bits of information as the scoring detection information storage area, and is located in the second area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10805, proceed to step S10806.

In step S10806, it is determined whether or not there is scoring detection information in at least one of the eight bits in the buffer area (whether or not one or more bits store a "1"). If it is determined in step S10806 that there is scoring detection information in at least one bit in the buffer area (S10806: YES), proceed to step S10807.

In step S10807, a target setting process is executed to set the eight bits in the buffer area to be the target of the prize ball tallying process, which will be described later. In this embodiment, two consecutive bits are set as the target of the prize ball tallying process in one target setting process. Furthermore, as described below, when the target setting process is executed in the next or subsequent timer interrupt process, the two consecutive bits adjacent to the two bits set in the previous target setting process are set as the target of the prize ball tallying process. In this manner, the two bits targeted for the prize ball tallying process are sequentially shifted to the adjacent bits. Note that after the last two bits of the eight bits are set as the target of the prize ball tallying process, the first two bits are again set as the target of the prize ball tallying process in the next target setting process. In this manner, in this embodiment, the order of the two bits to be set as the target of the prize ball tallying process from the eight bits in the buffer area is predetermined. After executing step S10807, the process proceeds to step S10808, where the prize ball tallying process corresponding to the set bits is executed. Here, a specific example of the processing from steps S10805 to S10808 will be explained using Figure 30.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. As described above, the ball entry detection information storage area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64, with each bit corresponding to a ball entry port. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the ball entry detection information storage area corresponds to the large prize port 36a, the first bit D1 to the first start port 33, the second bit D2 to the second start port 34, the third bit D3 to the first prize port 32a, the fourth bit D4 to the second prize port 32b, the fifth bit D5 to the third prize port 32c, the sixth bit D6 to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 to the discharge passage.

The buffer area is an 8-bit memory area provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, with each bit corresponding to a ball entry port. Specifically, in this embodiment, the 0th bit D0 of the buffer area corresponds to the large prize entry port 36a, the first bit D1 to the first start port 33, the second bit D2 to the second start port 34, the third bit D3 to the first prize entry port 32a, the fourth bit D4 to the second prize entry port 32b, the fifth bit D5 to the third prize entry port 32c, the sixth bit D6 to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 to the discharge passage. In other words, each bit in the buffer area corresponds to each bit in the ball entry detection information storage area.

In the ball entry detection process described above (Figure 28), when it is determined that a gaming ball has entered an entry port such as the large prize entry port 36a, the bit of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area that corresponds to the entry port into which it is determined that the gaming ball has entered is turned ON ("1").

Figure 30 (A1) shows an example of processing when the nth timer interrupt processing is executed. In this nth timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that game balls have entered the second starting hole 34 and the first winning hole 32a, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00001100." Furthermore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing are executed are "00000000." Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "00001100." As a result, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area, which is updated each time the timer interrupt processing is executed, is set as the processing target for the prize ball counting processing described below and is held in the buffer area until that processing is executed.

During the nth timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, the two consecutive bits, bit 0 D0 and bit 1 D1, are set as the targets for the prize ball counting process.

In the prize ball tallying process, if the 0th bit D0 (the bit corresponding to the large prize opening 36a) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "15" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of consecutive prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the 0th bit D0 is "0", this addition is not performed. In this embodiment, the prize ball tallying buffer is configured as a ring buffer, and is configured to store the number of prize balls paid out during the most recent specified period. Furthermore, the number of consecutive prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to the operation of the consecutive prize opening, and means the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the large prize opening 36a.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the first bit D1 (the bit corresponding to the first starting hole 33) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the first bit D1 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in Figure 30 (A1), the 0th bit D0 is "0" and the 1st bit D1 is also "0", so the above-mentioned addition is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (0th bit D0 and 1st bit D1) in the buffer area that are set as targets for the prize ball counting process are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A2) shows an example of processing when the n+1th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+1th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a gaming ball has entered the second winning slot 32b, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00010000". Furthermore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing are executed are "00001100", the same as the values in the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the nth timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "00011100".

During the n+1th timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, the two consecutive bits, the second bit D2 and the third bit D3, are set as the targets for the prize ball counting process.

In the prize ball tallying process, if the second bit D2 (the bit corresponding to the second start port 34) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of special prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the second bit D2 is "0", this addition is not performed. The number of special prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to the operation of the special device, and refers to the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the second start port 34 and the large prize port 36a.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the third bit D3 (the bit corresponding to the first winning slot 32a) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the third bit D3 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in Figure 30 (A2), the second bit D2 is "1", so "3" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus prize balls. Also, the third bit D3 is "1", so "10" is added to the total number of prize balls.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (second bit D2 and third bit D3) in the buffer area that are set as targets for the prize ball counting process are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A3) shows an example of processing when the n+2th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+2th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a gaming ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "01000000". Furthermore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing are executed are "00010000", the same as the values in the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the n+1th timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "01010000".

During the n+2th timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, two consecutive bits, the fourth bit D4 and the fifth bit D5, are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

During the prize ball tallying process, if the fourth bit D4 (the bit corresponding to the second winning slot 32b) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the fourth bit D4 is "0", this addition is not performed.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the fifth bit D5 (the bit corresponding to the third winning slot 32c) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the fifth bit D5 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in Figure 30 (A3), the fourth bit D4 is "1", so "10" is added to the total number of winning balls. Also, the fifth bit D5 is "0", so the above-mentioned addition is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (fourth bit D4 and fifth bit D5) in the buffer area that are set as targets for the prize ball counting process are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A4) shows an example of processing when the n+3th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+3th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 36a, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00100001." Furthermore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing are executed are "01000000," the same as the values in the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the n+2th timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "01100001."

During the n+3 timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, two consecutive bits, the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

However, in this embodiment, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. Furthermore, no prize balls are set in the through gate 35 or the discharge passage. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7 are set as targets for the prize ball tallying process, they are not added to the total number of prize balls, etc., in the prize ball tallying process. After that, the two bits (the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7) set as targets for the prize ball tallying process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

Then, in the n+4th timer interrupt process, bit 0 D0 and bit 1 D1 are again set as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process. Similar processing is then repeatedly executed. However, as described below, if there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), the target setting process (step S10807) and the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) are not executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), and at least one bit in the buffer area again contains ball entry detection information, and the target setting process is executed, the two bits set as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process in the previous target setting process are stored, and the two consecutive bits located next to those two bits are set as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process. Furthermore, if the two bits set as targets for the prize ball counting process in the previous target setting process are the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, then the two consecutive bits, the zeroth bit D0 and the first bit D1, are set as targets for the prize ball counting process.

As explained above, in this embodiment, two of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as the target for prize ball tallying processing in one timer interrupt process. Therefore, if there is ball detection information in at least one bit in the buffer area, the timer interrupt process will be executed four times, and the prize ball tallying processing will be executed for all eight bits in the buffer area.

Return to the explanation of Figure 29. After executing the prize ball tallying process in step S10808, proceed to step S10809.

In step S10809, a calculation result display control process is executed. Specifically, control is executed to display the value (the calculated game history information, which is the combination ratio or consecutive combination ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer described below on the game history information display unit 45z. After executing step S10809, the process proceeds to step S10810.

In step S10810, it is determined whether it is time to execute a calculation process to calculate game history information. Specifically, it is determined that it is time to execute the calculation process when a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment) has elapsed since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on, or when 5 seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the calculation process. If it is determined in step S10810 that it is time to execute the calculation process (S10810: YES), the program proceeds to step S10811. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10810 that it is not time to execute the calculation process (S10810: NO), the program proceeds to step S10813 without executing the processes of steps S10811 and S10812, which will be described later.

In step S10811, the type of gaming history information to be calculated in the calculation process (task 1 and task 2, described below) is set. In this mode, the type of gaming history information to be calculated is alternately set to the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S10812, where task 1 is specified as the next task to be executed in the task processing (step S10814, described below). After executing step S10812, the process proceeds to step S10813.

In step S10813, a process is executed to restore the register information saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 during the above-mentioned saving process to the register of the main CPU 62x. Specifically, the saved register information is restored (popped) to the register of the main CPU 62x, sequentially, starting from the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the top level of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64). Then, the value of the stack pointer saved at the bottom of the stack area of the second area (the address value indicating the top level of the stack area of the first area) is restored (popped) to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. By executing this restoration process, the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x is set to the address value of the stack area of the first area of the main RAM 64, allowing the main CPU 62x to once again execute processing related to the progress of the game using the first area of the main RAM 64. Then, this game history process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S10806, if it is determined in step S10806 that there is no ball-entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0") (S10806: NO), proceed to step S10814.

In step S10814, one of the following three tasks is executed if one is specified. If no task is specified, task 3 is executed. In other words, instead of executing the three tasks sequentially in one timer interrupt process, only one of the three specified tasks is executed in one timer interrupt process.

[Task 1]
The dividend and divisor required to calculate the game history information set as the calculation target are saved in the calculation buffer. Specifically, for example, if it is set to calculate a feature ratio, the number of feature prize balls is saved as the dividend and the total number of prize balls is saved as the divisor in the calculation buffer. Also, for example, if it is set to calculate a consecutive feature ratio, the number of consecutive feature prize balls is saved as the dividend and the total number of prize balls is saved as the divisor in the calculation buffer. Thereafter, task 2 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the next or subsequent timer interrupt processing.

[Task 2]
The dividend stored in the calculation buffer is divided by the divisor, and the calculation result (quotient) is stored in the calculation result buffer. After that, task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the next or subsequent timer interrupt processing.

[Task 3]
It is determined whether the prize ball tally values (number of prize balls for special feature devices, number of consecutive prize balls for special feature devices, total number of prize balls) are valid, and if it is determined that they are not valid, an abnormality flag is set ON, and then task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the next or subsequent timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize ball tally values are valid, the abnormality flag is not set ON, and task 3 is designated as the next task. Here, cases where the prize ball tally values are invalid include cases where there is a contradiction in the prize ball tally values, such as when the number of prize balls for special feature devices exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature devices exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature devices exceeds the number of prize balls for special feature devices.

After executing the specified task out of the three tasks described above, the process proceeds to step S10809 described above, where the value (role ratio or consecutive role ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. In this embodiment, the first 7-segment display constituting the game history information display unit 45z displays information indicating the type of game history information, and the remaining three 7-segment displays display the values of the game history information.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment described above, the processing related to game progress included in the timer interrupt processing (processing other than game history processing) is programmed to complete in a shorter time than the time until the next timer interrupt processing starts (4 msec in this embodiment), but the time required for the processing related to game progress to complete varies depending on the status of game progress. On the other hand, since the game history processing is processing unrelated to game progress, it is preferable to prioritize the time for executing the processing related to game progress in one timer interrupt processing over the time for executing the game history processing. Furthermore, the progress of game play is not affected even if the various processes included in the game history processing (e.g., prize ball tallying processing for each bit, calculation processing, etc.) are not configured to be executed continuously and completed in one timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the execution time of the processing related to game progress reaches its maximum depending on the status of game progress, the execution time of one timer interrupt processing (execution time of processing related to game progress + execution time of processing for game history) is shorter than the time until the next timer interrupt processing starts. The divided processing is executed in one timer interrupt processing, and the various processing is completed by executing the timer interrupt processing multiple times. As a result, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the processing for game history while ensuring the time required to execute the processing related to game progress in one timer interrupt processing.

Specifically, according to this aspect, one execution of the timer interrupt process can execute one of the two tasks (task 1 and task 2) that make up the arithmetic process, which is the process of calculating game history information. By executing the timer interrupt process twice, both tasks that make up the arithmetic process are executed. This reduces the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process compared to a configuration in which both tasks are executed in one execution of the timer interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the 4 msec interval (hereinafter also referred to as the interrupt interval) between starts of execution of the timer interrupt process, making it impossible to execute the timer interrupt process at 4 msec intervals.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, a series of processes with a predetermined execution order is divided into multiple tasks, and in one execution of the timer interrupt process, one of the multiple tasks is executed, and then the task to be executed after that task is specified. Therefore, even a series of processes that, if incorporated into the timer interrupt process, would require longer time to execute the timer interrupt process than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process can be incorporated into the timer interrupt process and executed. Specifically, according to this aspect, even in a gaming machine configured such that, if incorporated into the timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process would be longer than 4 msec, the arithmetic process for calculating game history information can be incorporated into the timer interrupt process, which is executed at 4 msec intervals. Furthermore, since the progress of the game is not affected even if not all tasks of the arithmetic process for calculating game history information are executed in one execution of the timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be allocated to the execution time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process, thereby improving the design flexibility of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process, and the prize ball tallying process can be executed for the set processing target bits. By executing the timer interrupt process multiple times, the prize ball tallying process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the prize ball tallying process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in one execution of the timer interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the 4 msec interval at which the timer interrupt process starts to be executed, making it impossible to execute the timer interrupt process at 4 msec intervals.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when two bits from the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process, they are set in a predetermined order. This eliminates the need to perform a determination process to determine which bit to set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process, simplifying the process and thereby improving processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to perform the determination process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x can execute the timer interrupt process four times in a time shorter than the shortest interval between two consecutive game balls entering a single ball entry port (approximately 18 msec in this embodiment), and therefore can execute the prize ball tallying process (step S10808 in FIG. 29) for all eight processing target candidates (bits D0-D7 in the buffer area) in a time shorter than this shortest interval. Therefore, even if two game balls enter the same ball entry port consecutively, even if the entry detection information updated based on the detection of the first game ball at that ball entry port is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, and then the entry detection information corresponding to the remaining ball entry ports is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, the prize ball tallying process can be completed for all of this entry detection information before the next game ball is detected at that ball entry port. In other words, by the time the ball entry detection information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entering the ball entry opening is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, the prize ball tallying process for the ball entry detection information updated based on the detection of the first game ball entering the ball entry opening will have already been completed. The effects of this configuration are explained below.

In a configuration like this, where the ball entry detection information uses binary information of "0" or "1" indicating whether a game ball has entered a certain entry port, if the prize ball counting process is not performed on the ball entry detection information that was updated from "0" to "1" based on the entry of the first game ball into a certain entry port by the time the entry of the second game ball into that entry port is detected at that entry port, the ball entry detection information corresponding to that entry port will still be "1" when the entry of the second game ball is detected at that entry port, and the entry of the second game ball cannot be recorded. In other words, even though two game balls have entered that entry port in succession, the ball entry detection information corresponding to that entry port cannot be distinguished from a situation where only one game ball has entered that entry port, and the prize ball counting process will treat it as a situation where one game ball has entered that entry port. As a result, the prize ball counting process may not be able to record the accurate number of prize balls.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the entry of the second game ball is detected at the entry port, the prize ball tallying process is executed on the entry detection information that has already been updated by the entry of the first game ball at the entry port, and since the entry detection information is set to "0," it is possible to record the entry of the second game ball. As a result, it is possible to record the accurate number of prize balls in the prize ball tallying process. This makes it possible to use binary information, "0" or "1," indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the game, as the entry detection information while ensuring accuracy in the prize ball tallying process, thereby reducing the memory capacity required to store the entry detection information and improving the processing speed of the prize ball tallying process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the gaming history processing (FIG. 29) includes a save process (step S10801 in FIG. 29) in which information held in a register within the master CPU 62x and used to execute processing related to game progress is written to a stack region in the second area of the master RAM 64. Therefore, when the master CPU 62x starts the gaming history processing, if the register within the master CPU 62x holds information for executing processing related to game progress that was being executed immediately before the start of the gaming history processing, the information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to the stack region in the second area of the master RAM 64. Therefore, the information for executing processing related to game progress that was held in the register within the master CPU 62x can be erased, and when the master CPU 62x executes the gaming history processing, the information for executing the gaming history processing can be held in the register within the master CPU 62x.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history processing (FIG. 29) includes a restoration process (step S10813 in FIG. 29) that causes the information written to the stack region of the second area of the main RAM 64 during the save process to be stored in the register of the main CPU 62x. Therefore, when the game history processing is terminated, the information for executing processing related to game progress is again stored in the register of the main CPU 62x, and the processing related to game progress that was being executed before the start of the game history processing can be executed again from the state it was in immediately before the start of the game history processing.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the save process and restore process are included in the game history process, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processes related to game progress other than the game history process can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing the game history process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history process without modifying the program for executing processes related to game progress other than the game history process. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute the game history process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute the game history process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x writes information in the game history processing only to the second area of the main RAM 64, thereby preventing information written in the first area of the main RAM 64 from being overwritten by the execution of the game history processing. Therefore, in a configuration in which processing related to game progress is executed using the first area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent the game history processing from affecting the processing related to the game progress.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x writes information in processing related to game progress only to the first area of the main RAM 64, thereby preventing information written in the second area of the main RAM 64 from being overwritten by the execution of processing related to game progress. Therefore, in a configuration in which processing for game history is executed using the second area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent processing related to game progress from affecting the processing for game history.

In addition, this embodiment is provided with an 8-bit buffer area capable of storing ball-entry detection information, so the ball-entry detection information stored in the ball-entry detection information storage area, which is updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed, can be set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process and retained until that process is executed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball counting process (step S10808) is executed in one timer interrupt process, the calculation process (tasks 1 and 2 in step S10814) is not executed. In other words, since both the prize ball counting process and the calculation process are not executed in one timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process, which would result in the timer interrupt process being unable to be executed at that interrupt interval. Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the prize ball counting process, in which the game ball entry status and processing load are correlated, is executed with priority over the calculation process in which the game ball entry status and processing load are not correlated. This prevents the interval between executions of the prize ball counting process from becoming too long, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the prize ball count value, which is the processing result of the prize ball counting process, from being unable to accurately reflect the game ball entry status. Specifically, for example, it is possible to prevent the next game ball from entering the ball entry port corresponding to a bit in the buffer area before the prize ball counting process is executed for that bit, resulting in two game balls being treated as one game ball.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) is not executed and it is determined that it is time to execute the calculation process (step S10810: YES), the calculation process (tasks 1 and 2 in step S10814) is executed. Therefore, neither the prize ball tallying process nor the calculation process is executed in a single timer interrupt process, and in this situation, instead of the prize ball tallying process and the calculation process, another process independent of these processes (in this embodiment, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally value (task 3 in step S10814)) can be executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when either the prize ball tallying process or the calculation process is executed in a single timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is configured to be shorter than the interrupt interval. Therefore, by executing a process with a shorter processing time than the prize ball tallying process and the calculation process in a situation where neither the prize ball tallying process nor the calculation process is executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from being longer than the interrupt interval.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, although it is possible to calculate two types of game history information, the combination ratio and the consecutive combination ratio, the calculation process in one timer interrupt process executes the calculation of either the combination ratio or the consecutive combination ratio. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the calculation process in one timer interrupt process executes the calculation of two types of game history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval, preventing the timer interrupt process from being able to be executed at the specified interrupt interval. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 for temporarily storing the calculated game history information.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, in the ball entry detection process, if the ball entry determination information for a bit corresponding to each ball entry port changes from "0" to "1" to "1," it is determined that a game ball has entered the ball entry port corresponding to that bit. Therefore, as with the first embodiment described above, the occurrence of erroneous detection due to electrical noise can be suppressed.

<Aspect 24>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the game history information is configured to calculate the ratio of game features and the ratio of consecutive game features, but the game history information to be calculated is not limited to these, and various game history information shown in the first embodiment can be calculated. For example, the ball output rate and payout ratio shown in the first embodiment can be calculated. In this case, the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30) can also be calculated, similar to the prize ball counting process described above (step S10808 in FIG. 29 ).

<Aspect 25>
In the game history processing of the above-mentioned mode 23 (Figure 29), if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is ON, the prize ball tally value is cleared (step S10803) and the abnormality flag is turned OFF (step S10804). However, if the abnormality flag is turned ON a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 26>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the calculation process, which is the process of calculating the game history information, is configured to be divided into multiple tasks for execution, but the type of process to be divided into multiple tasks is not limited to this calculation process, and various processes can be configured to be divided into multiple tasks for execution. For example, in a configuration in which the content of the effect to be executed is set by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90, the process of setting the content of the effect may be configured to be divided into multiple tasks for execution.

<Aspect 27>
In the above-described aspect 23, two bits out of eight bits in the buffer area are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process. However, the number of bits to be processed is not limited to two and may be other numbers. For example, five bits may be set as the processing targets in one timer interrupt process. Also, all eight bits may be set as the processing targets in one timer interrupt process. Furthermore, only certain bits out of the eight bits (for example, six bits from bit 0 D0 to bit 5 D5 in which prize balls are set) may be set as the processing targets, and two bits may be set as the processing targets in one timer interrupt process.

<Aspect 28>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the first area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as a memory area for executing processing related to the progress of the game, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as a memory area for executing processing for the game history, but the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be allocated as a memory area for executing processing other than processing for the game history.

The main RAM 64 may also be configured to be divided into three or more areas. For example, the third area of the main RAM 64 may be assigned as a memory area for executing processing to output game history information to the outside.

<Aspect 29>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the saving process and the restoration process are included in the game history process, but the saving process and the restoration process may be included in a process other than the game history process. For example, the saving process and the restoration process may be included in a process that is scheduled to be deleted when the design of the gaming machine is changed.

<Aspect 30>
In the above-described embodiment 23, the game history processing is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27), but the game history processing may also be incorporated into the main processing (FIG. 12). Also, in the above-described embodiment 23, the game history processing is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) as processing separate from processing related to game progress. However, processing other than the game history processing may also be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing as processing separate from processing related to game progress. For example, a transmission processing that transmits information regarding the game status to a hall computer installed in a gaming hall at a predetermined timing may be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing as processing separate from processing related to game progress. Also, various processing separate from processing related to game progress may be incorporated into the main processing.

<Aspect 31>
In the above-described aspect 23, the gaming history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the gaming history processing (FIG. 29) to calculate the gaming history information. However, the gaming history management chip 300 may be provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the gaming history processing (FIG. 29) to calculate the gaming history information. With this configuration, the gaming history information can be calculated in two systems, so that even if a malfunction occurs in one system, the gaming history information can still be calculated. Furthermore, if the gaming history information calculated from the two systems is compared and a notification (display) is given as to whether or not these values match, it becomes possible to confirm the reliability and accuracy of the calculated gaming history information.

The gaming history management chip 300 may also be configured to calculate gaming history information by executing the gaming history processing (Figure 29) described in aspect 23 above.

<Aspect 32>
In step S10805 of the game history processing (Figure 29) of the above-mentioned mode 23, the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area (Figure 30) provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 is read out using OR processing.However, instead of this configuration, an 8-bit storage area (hereinafter also referred to as the second ball entry detection information storage area) corresponding to the ball entry detection information storage area may be provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be duplicated (copied) to the second ball entry detection information storage area provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and the information of each duplicated bit may be read out using OR processing in step S10805.

The ball entry detection information storage area may also be configured to be located in the second area of the main RAM 64.

<Aspect 33>
In step S10814 of the gaming history processing ( FIG. 29 ) of the above-described aspect 23, if the calculation process (task 1 or task 2) for calculating gaming history information is not executed, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally included in task 3 is always executed. However, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally may be executed only once each time new gaming history information is calculated. Specifically, for example, after determining the validity of the prize ball tally in task 3, a determined flag indicating that the determination has been completed is set to ON. When task 3 is next executed, if the determined flag is ON, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally is not executed. Then, when task 1 is executed again, the determined flag may be set to OFF. This configuration makes it possible to determine the validity of the prize ball tally, which is the basis for calculating gaming history information, and ensure the validity of the gaming history information, while further shortening the processing time required to complete one gaming history processing.

<Aspect 34>
In step S10810 of the game history processing ( FIG. 29 ) of the above-described aspect 23, the timing to execute the calculation process is determined to be appropriate when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 minutes) has elapsed since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on, or when five seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the calculation process, and the game history information is calculated. However, instead of this configuration, the timing to execute the calculation process for the first time may be determined immediately after power-on, without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse, and thereafter, the timing to execute the calculation process may be determined every five seconds since the previous execution of the calculation process. In this configuration, the calculated game history information may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z as a flashing display until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally reaches 60,000. After the total number of prize balls reaches 60,000, the calculated game history information may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z as a solid display. This configuration makes it easy to determine whether a sufficient amount of statistical data has been accumulated to serve as the prize ball tally, which is the basis for calculating the displayed game history information. In addition, instead of the total number of winning balls, the display may be switched from flashing to lit based on the aggregate value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30).

<Aspect 35>
In step S10807 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above-mentioned aspect 23, the multiple processing candidates for the prize ball tallying process are configured to be pre-fixed as eight bits in the buffer area. However, it is also possible to divide the eight bits in the buffer area into two groups of four, select one of the two groups as the multiple processing candidates for the prize ball tallying process, and set two bits from the four bits belonging to the selected group as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process. However, as in the above-mentioned aspect 23, the multiple processing candidates for the prize ball tallying process are configured to be pre-fixed as eight bits in the buffer area, eliminating the need to select one of the two groups, thereby simplifying the processing and thereby improving processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to select one of the two groups.

<Aspect 36>
In the game history process of the above-mentioned aspect 23 (FIG. 29), the number and type of tasks (various processes) to be executed in the game history process in the current timer interrupt process may be determined based on the remaining time until the start of the next timer interrupt process. With this configuration, it is possible to execute tasks by effectively utilizing the remaining time until the start of the next timer interrupt process.

<Aspect 37>
31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 37 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 37, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to execute the process for calculating and displaying the above-mentioned game history information (game history process). Similarly to the above-mentioned aspect 23 (FIG. 26), the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area). The first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes related to the progress of games and various flags (such as a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag), while the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes for calculating and displaying the game history information (game history process) and various numerical information (such as the above-mentioned prize ball tally, ball count information, and game history information such as the ratio of winning balls). Then, as in the above-mentioned mode 23 (Figure 26), when the main CPU 62x is executing processing related to the progress of the game (processing other than processing for the game history), it writes information only to the first area of the main RAM 64, and when it is executing processing for the game history, it writes information only to the second area of the main RAM 64.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31 , the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with a flash memory 64x, which is a rewritable, non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even when power is cut off. In this embodiment, a NAND-type flash memory is used as the flash memory 64x, but a NOR-type flash memory may also be used. In the game history process, the main CPU 62x of this embodiment executes a process of writing various numerical information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 to the flash memory 64x at predetermined timing. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x executes a process of writing various prize ball tally values, etc. to the flash memory 64x each time the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value reaches 500. In other words, the flash memory 64x stores various numerical information (game history information such as prize ball tally value, ball count information, and bonus feature ratio) acquired based on the execution of games.

In this way, with this configuration, various numerical information obtained based on the execution of games (game history information such as prize ball totals, ball count information, and bonus feature ratios) is stored in flash memory 64x, so this numerical information can be retained even if the power supply to pachinko machine 10 is cut off for an extended period of time. For example, even if power is not supplied to pachinko machine 10 for an extended period of time during distribution, it is possible to check whether normal gameplay has been performed on that pachinko machine 10 based on the various numerical information stored in flash memory 64x.

<Aspect 38>
In the above aspect 37, a depressible flash memory clear button may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the flash memory 64x (such as the prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and game history information such as the ratio of special devices) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing an erasure process to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is provided, and a high-level signal is input to the input terminal of the erasure processing IC chip while the flash memory clear button is pressed. The erasure processing IC chip is then configured to execute an erasure process to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x based on the high-level signal input to the input terminal remaining for 10 seconds. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which information stored in flash memory 64x is erased by processing by the main CPU 62x, it is possible to erase information stored in flash memory 64x while minimizing the impact on game execution processing by the main CPU 62x and the operation of the main RAM 64.

Furthermore, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space that leaves evidence of opening. Specifically, for example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a circuit board box that has a seal attached that leaves evidence of opening, and the button cannot be pressed unless the seal is removed and the circuit board box is opened.

According to this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of a pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button, which leaves evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, based on whether or not there are any evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x has likely been erased.

If a pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, by illegally altering the nails), the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning combinations, etc.). A person inspecting whether a pachinko machine 10 is operating normally (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. This leaves evidence of the opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, so even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x, there will remain evidence that the information may have been erased in order to conceal the fraud. This makes it more difficult to conceal unauthorized modifications made to the pachinko machine 10, and ultimately reduces the motivation to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

It should be noted that pachinko machines 10 are sometimes traded and circulated, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only a person with a legitimate reason for wishing to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as a "legitimate person") could erase any traces of the board box being opened, it would be possible to ensure the integrity of play while promoting the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10. Specifically, for example, by establishing a distribution system in which only the legitimate manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 can affix a new seal, it would be possible to ensure the integrity of play while promoting the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10.

The configuration for erasing information stored in flash memory 64x based on the operation of the flash memory clear button is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which information stored in flash memory 64x is erased when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). Alternatively, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an IC chip for erasure processing is not provided, and the primary CPU 62x monitors whether the flash memory clear button is pressed, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), an erasure program for erasing the information stored in flash memory 64x is executed to erase the information.

Furthermore, the flash memory clear button is not limited to being stored inside a circuit board box with a seal attached, but may be stored in a space that leaves traces of opening (also known as traces of opening or closing). For example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a space covered by a lid member, and the flash memory clear button cannot be operated unless at least a portion of the lid member is destroyed to open the space. In such a configuration, the lid member must be destroyed to open the space in order to operate the flash memory clear button. Therefore, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the destroyed lid member remains as evidence that the space containing the flash memory has been opened. Furthermore, for example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a circuit board box formed by multiple case bodies (e.g., a box-shaped case body and a lid-shaped case body that can seal the open portion of the box-shaped case body) joined by a joint (crimped portion), and a predetermined portion of the joint (crimped portion) must be destroyed to separate the multiple case bodies that make up the circuit board box. With this configuration, operating the flash memory clear button requires destroying a specific portion of the joint (crimped portion) to separate the multiple case bodies and open the board box. Therefore, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the joint (crimped portion) where the specific portion was destroyed remains as a sign that the board box was opened. Furthermore, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be housed inside a board box joined by the above-described joint (crimped portion), and a seal that leaves a sign of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the bonded object when peeled may be affixed across the boundary between the multiple case bodies. With this configuration, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, in addition to the joint (crimped portion) where the specific portion was destroyed as a sign of the board box being opened, other signs of the board box being opened, such as the seal being peeled or cut at the boundary between the case bodies, remain.

<Aspect 39>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, the above-mentioned inspection machine 320 (Figure 10) for inspecting whether various game history information is within a normal range may be connected to the inspection terminal 65 provided on the main MPU 62, and when a predetermined signal (for example, an erase command) is received from the inspection machine 320, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and ratio of special devices) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in the above-described aspect 38, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing erasure processing to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is provided, and when an erasure command is sent from inspection device 320 connected to inspection terminals 65, the erasure command is input to an input terminal of the erasure processing IC chip. Then, based on receiving the erasure command from the input terminal, the erasure processing IC chip executes erasure processing to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

With this configuration, the erasure processing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x upon receiving an erasure command from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminals 65. This allows anyone who owns the inspection device 320 to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of information by anyone who does not own the inspection device 320.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modifications will affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning combinations, etc.). An inspector who inspects whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally can discover any illegal modifications to the pachinko machine 10 by, for example, connecting the inspection device 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x with the inspection device 320. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x requires an inspection device 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, by restricting who can have the inspection device 320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the emergence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

It should be noted that pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated from one place to another, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of that pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only those with a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of a pachinko machine 10 (for example, the manufacturer of that pachinko machine 10) and the above-mentioned inspectors have access to the inspection machine 320, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

Furthermore, when information stored in flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in flash memory 64x may be transmitted to an inspection device 320 connected to inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure.

Specifically, for example, upon receiving an erase command from the input terminal, the above-mentioned erasure processing IC chip transmits a transmission start command to the inspection device 320, indicating that it will begin transmitting the information stored in flash memory 64x. Upon receiving the transmission start command, the inspection device 320 transitions to a reception ready mode in which it can receive information, and transmits a reception ready command to the erasure processing IC chip, indicating that it is in reception ready mode. Upon receiving the reception ready command, the erasure processing IC chip begins transmitting the information stored in flash memory 64x. Upon completing transmission of the information, the erasure processing IC chip transmits a transmission completion command to the inspection device 320. Upon receiving the transmission completion command, the inspection device 320 checks the received information for errors such as missing data, and if no errors are found, transmits a reception completion command to the erasure processing IC chip. Upon receiving the reception completion command, the erasure processing IC chip executes an erasure process to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

With this configuration, even if information stored in flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the person who owns inspection device 320, the information erased from flash memory 64x will remain in inspection device 320, and the information can be confirmed by inspection device 320.

The configuration for erasing information stored in flash memory 64x upon receiving a predetermined signal from inspection device 320 is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which an erasure process IC chip is not provided, and the primary CPU 62x monitors whether an erasure command has been received from inspection device 320 connected to inspection terminals 65, and, upon receiving the erasure command, executes an erasure program for erasing the information stored in flash memory 64x, thereby erasing the information. Furthermore, upon receiving an erasure command from inspection device 320, the primary CPU 62x may transmit the information stored in flash memory 64x to the inspection device 320, and then executes an erasure program for erasing the information, thereby erasing the information stored in flash memory 64x.

In this embodiment, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased using an inspection device 320 that checks whether various pieces of gaming history information are within normal ranges. However, this is not limited to the configuration using an inspection device 320; it is also possible to erase information stored in the flash memory 64x using a dedicated terminal for erasing the information.

<Aspect 40>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when a flash memory clear button stored inside the space where traces of opening remain is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) and a predetermined signal (for example, an erase command) is received from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (such as the prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and game history information such as the ratio of special devices) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in aspect 38 above, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing an erasure processing to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is provided, and a high-level signal is input to the input terminal of the erasure processing IC chip while the flash memory clear button is pressed. Then, based on the high-level signal input to the input terminal remaining for 10 seconds, the erasure processing IC chip transitions to an erasure processing execution standby mode in which it can execute an erasure processing to erase information stored in flash memory 64x. When the erasure processing IC chip receives an erasure command from the inspection machine 320 in this erasure processing execution standby mode, it executes an erasure processing to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

According to this configuration, the flash memory clear button is stored inside the circuit board box, which leaves evidence of opening. Therefore, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 must be opened and the flash memory clear button must be operated, leaving evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the erasure processing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x upon receiving a predetermined signal from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, so that anyone who possesses the inspection device 320 can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Therefore, based on whether or not there are evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 may have been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x may have been erased, and it is also possible to restrict the erasure of that information by anyone without the inspection device 320.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modifications may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning combinations, etc.). An inspector who inspects whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally can discover any illegal modifications to the pachinko machine 10 by, for example, connecting the inspection device 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x with the inspection device 320. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x requires an inspection device 320 connectable to the inspection terminals 65 of the pachinko machine 10. Restricting who can have the inspection device 320 can prevent unauthorized individuals from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Even if an unauthorized individual were to obtain the inspection device 320, they would need to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. This would leave evidence of the opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, suggesting that even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x was erased, this would leave evidence that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. This prevents unauthorized individuals from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x and makes it more difficult to conceal unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the motivation to make illegal modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

It should be noted that pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated from one place to another, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of that pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if only those with a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of a pachinko machine 10 (for example, the manufacturer of that pachinko machine 10) and the inspectors described above can possess the inspection machine 320, and if a distribution system is established in which only legitimate parties can erase evidence of the board box being opened, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of play.

The configuration for erasing information stored in flash memory 64x when the flash memory clear button accepts a predetermined operation and receives a predetermined signal from inspection machine 320 is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the erasure process IC chip transitions to the above-mentioned erasure process execution standby mode when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) within a predetermined time period (e.g., 10 seconds). Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which, when an erasure command is received from inspection machine 320, the erasure process IC chip transitions to the above-mentioned erasure process execution standby mode, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined time period (e.g., 10 seconds) in the erasure process execution standby mode, the erasure process is executed to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x. Furthermore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an erasure process IC chip is not provided, and the primary CPU 62x executes a function equivalent to that of the erasure process IC chip to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

Furthermore, similar to the above-described aspect 39, when information stored in flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in flash memory 64x may be transmitted to inspection device 320 connected to inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure. With this configuration, even if the information stored in flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the owner of inspection device 320, the information erased from flash memory 64x remains on inspection device 320, and can therefore be confirmed by inspection device 320.

<Aspect 41>
In the above aspect 37, an operation panel that accepts input of authentication information (e.g., a PIN number) and a display that displays the input authentication information may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and when the authentication information input by the operation panel matches the authentication information that is individually set for the pachinko machine 10, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (such as the prize ball total, ball count information, and game history information such as the ratio of special devices) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in aspect 38 above, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing erasure processing to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is provided, and authentication information entered via the operation panel is input to the input terminal of the erasure processing IC chip. The erasure processing IC chip then determines whether the authentication information entered via the operation panel matches the authentication information stored in the ROM of the erasure processing IC chip, and if it determines that they match, executes erasure processing to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

According to this configuration, the erasure processing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on a match between the authentication information received by the reception means and the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10. This allows anyone who has the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, someone who knows the PIN number set in the pachinko machine 10) to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of information by anyone who does not have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10.

If a pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nails are illegally altered), the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning combinations, etc.). An inspector who inspects whether a pachinko machine 10 is operating normally can discover any illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to have the authentication information set on the pachinko machine 10. By restricting who can have the authentication information set on the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the emergence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

It should be noted that pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated from one place to another, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of that pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only a person with a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of that pachinko machine 10 (for example, the manufacturer of that pachinko machine 10) could have the authentication information set on that pachinko machine 10, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

The authentication information entered to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is not limited to a PIN; various types of authentication information can be used. For example, authentication information can include authentication characters (password, passphrase) that are a combination of multiple character strings, a barcode with a specific pattern, a password generated according to predetermined rules (e.g., a one-time password), or biometric authentication information of a specific person (fingerprint, iris, vein pattern, etc.).

<Aspect 42>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game including the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, etc.) is erased, and the information stored in the second area (information obtained based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, the number of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of special devices, etc.) may be configured not to be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the main CPU 62x determines whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, it erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, but does not erase the information stored in the second area.

This configuration makes it possible to erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of games) while leaving the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game). Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the control of game execution or when an amusement hall opens or closes for business, there is a desire to erase the information used to control the execution of games and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not to erase the information acquired based on the executed game. With this configuration, by operating the RAM clear button, it is possible to erase the information used to control the execution of games while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and initialize the control of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in addition to the RAM clear button described above, a second RAM clear button for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and when the second RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is ON, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether the second RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the second RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), it erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

With this configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) that cannot be erased by operating the RAM clear button can be erased by operating the second clear button.

Furthermore, the second RAM clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space that leaves evidence of opening. Specifically, for example, the second RAM clear button may be stored inside a circuit board box to which a seal that leaves evidence of opening has been affixed, and the button cannot be pressed unless the seal is removed and the circuit board box is opened.

According to this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button, which leaves traces of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 has likely been erased.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modifications will affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning devices, etc.). An inspector who checks whether a game is being played normally on the pachinko machine 10 can discover any illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, it is necessary to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. This leaves evidence of the opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, so even if a fraudulent person erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, there will remain evidence that the information may have been erased in order to conceal fraud. This makes it more difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to the pachinko machine 10, and ultimately reduces the motivation to make fraudulent modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

Note that pachinko machines 10 are sometimes traded and circulated, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only a person (a legitimate person) with a legitimate reason for wanting to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 could erase traces of the opening of the circuit board box, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of play. Specifically, for example, by establishing a distribution system in which only the legitimate manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 can affix a new seal, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of play.

The space in which traces of opening (also known as traces of unsealing or traces of opening and closing) remain can be configured in any of the various ways described in aspect 38 above.

<Aspect 43>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and when the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased.On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and when the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is not erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the main CPU 62x determines whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, it monitors whether the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). If it determines that the RAM clear button has been released within the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, but does not erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. On the other hand, if it determines that the RAM clear button has remained pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x does not erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, but erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64.

With this configuration, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64. In other words, the information to be erased can be selected without providing any other operation unit (e.g., a button) for selecting the information to be erased, thereby simplifying the structure of the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, if a malfunction occurs in controlling game execution or at the start or end of business hours of an amusement parlor, and you want to erase the information used to control game execution (the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) and initialize the control of the gaming machine, you can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and ensure that the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). On the other hand, if you want to erase the information acquired based on the game that was executed (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) and put the gaming machine into circulation again, you can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and ensure that the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). In this way, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

Note that while the process of erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed, which may result in errors in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port and the total number of winning balls. Therefore, by configuring the system so that game play does not begin until the erasure process is complete (for example, by preventing the launch of game balls), the occurrence of such errors can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and further, it is determined whether the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. If it is determined to be valid, the information is not erased, and if it is determined to be invalid, the information is erased. This configuration can prevent gameplay from starting while the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is invalid. Note that cases in which the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is invalid include, for example, when the number of prize balls for a special feature exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for a special feature exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls for a special feature exceeds the number of prize balls for a special feature, resulting in a discrepancy in the prize ball count.

<Aspect 44>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and when the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased.On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), not only is the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the main CPU 62x determines whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, it erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. Furthermore, the main CPU 62x monitors whether the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), and if it determines that the RAM clear button has been released within the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), it does not erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. On the other hand, if it determines that the RAM clear button has remained pressed for the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x also erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64.

With this configuration, similar to the above-described aspect 43, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64 by performing different operations on the RAM clear button. Furthermore, by performing the operation of turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and keeping the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), it is possible to erase both the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64.

Note that while the process of erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed, which may result in errors in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port and the total number of winning balls. Therefore, by configuring the system so that game play does not begin until the erasure process is complete (for example, by preventing the launch of game balls), the occurrence of such errors can be prevented.

<Aspect 45>
In the above aspect 37, if the RAM clear button located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), it erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

This configuration makes it possible to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 without providing a separate operation unit (e.g., a button) for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. Note that while the process of erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed temporarily, which may result in errors in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port, the total number of winning balls, etc. Therefore, by temporarily halting game play (e.g., temporarily preventing the launch of game balls) from the start to the end of the execution of the erasure process, the occurrence of such errors can be suppressed.

<Aspect 46>
In each of the above aspects, a configuration may be adopted in which, when information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, game history information such as the ratio of winning balls, and other information acquired based on the executed game), information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is erased. In other words, when a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is performed or when a predetermined signal for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is received from another device (e.g., the inspection machine 320), not only is the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 erased, but the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may also be erased without fail.

This configuration can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which information acquired based on an executed game (information stored in the second area of main RAM 64) is erased, but information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is not erased and remains unchanged. Specifically, for example, since the information acquired based on an executed game serves as collateral for determining the fairness of the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, when this collateral information is erased, it is preferable to initialize the game status of the pachinko machine 10 by erasing information used to control the execution of the game on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information related to the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag that indicate the game status). According to this configuration, when information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased, the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is also erased. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as is because the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is not erased even though the information used to ensure the fairness of the game has been erased.

Furthermore, for example, if a configuration were adopted in which information acquired based on a game played (information stored in the second area of main RAM 64) was erased but information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) was not erased and instead remained as is, the high probability mode or high frequency support mode may be maintained in the pachinko machine 10 even though the information acquired based on the game played (information stored in the second area of main RAM 64) was erased. In this case, when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10, the game starts in the high probability mode or high frequency support mode when the amount of information acquired based on the game played is insufficient to serve as statistical data, which increases the likelihood that game history information such as the ratio of bonus items will be calculated as biased values. Therefore, as in this embodiment, when information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, game history information such as the device ratio, etc.) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag) is also erased, making it possible to prevent game history information such as the device ratio from being calculated as a biased value.

A variety of operating modes can be used to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. For example, a RAM clear button located on the back of the pachinko machine 10 can be pressed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM clear button is left pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), a second RAM clear button located separately on the back of the pachinko machine 10 can be pressed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or both the RAM clear button and the second RAM clear button can be pressed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Furthermore, for example, if the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and the RAM clear button is no longer pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, including the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag, etc.) is erased, while the information stored in the second area (information obtained based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, game history information such as the ratio of winning balls, etc.) may not be erased.

This configuration makes it possible to erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of games) while leaving the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game). Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the control of game execution or when an amusement hall opens or closes for business, there is a desire to erase the information used to control the execution of games and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not to erase the information acquired based on the executed game. With this configuration, by operating the RAM clear button, it is possible to erase the information used to control the execution of games while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and initialize the control of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in this embodiment. The main CPU 62x executes this main processing when the power is turned on.

In step S10901, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is pressed (step S10901: YES), the process proceeds to step S10903, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button remains pressed.

If it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button is no longer pressed, that is, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is no longer pressed (step S10903: NO), the process proceeds to step S10904, where the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased and initial setting processing for that first area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button is still pressed (step S10903: YES), the process proceeds to step S10905, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

If it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (step S10905: NO), the process returns to step S10903, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button continues to be pressed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (step S10905: YES), the process proceeds to step S10906. In other words, if the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10904 described above, and if the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10906 described below.

In step S10906, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and initial setting processing for the first area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10907, where the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and initial setting processing for the second area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, where it is determined whether the information stored in the second area of main RAM 64 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether the prize ball tally (number of prize balls for special feature games, number of consecutive prize balls for special feature games, total number of prize balls), which is the information stored in the second area of main RAM 64, is valid. Here, a case where the prize ball tally is invalid is when there is a contradiction in the prize ball tally, such as when the number of prize balls for special feature games exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature games exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature games exceeds the number of prize balls for special feature games. If it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is invalid (step S10902: NO), the process proceeds to steps S10906 and S10907 described above, where the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 are erased. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid (step S10902: YES), the process proceeds directly to step S10908.

In step S10908, interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. After step S10908 is executed, the remaining processing of steps S10909 to S10912 follows. Since the remaining processing of steps S10909 to S10912 is the same as the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 in Figure 12 described above, a description of this processing will be omitted.

According to the processing flow described above, when the process of erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information obtained based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, and game history information such as the ratio of special devices) (processing of step S10906) is executed, the process of erasing information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag) (processing of step S10907) is also executed.

<Aspect 47>
In each of the above aspects, a configuration may be adopted in which, when information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, the number of balls entered, and game history information, including the ratio of special devices) is erased, information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is also erased. In other words, when an operation for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed or when a predetermined signal for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is received from another device (for example, the inspection machine 320), not only is the information stored in the flash memory 64x erased, but the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is also erased without fail.

This configuration can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which information acquired based on an executed game (information stored in flash memory 64x) is erased, but information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is not erased and remains unchanged. Specifically, for example, since the information acquired based on an executed game serves as collateral for determining the fairness of the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, when this collateral information is erased, it is preferable to initialize the game status of the pachinko machine 10 by erasing information used to control the execution of the game on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information related to the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag indicating the game status). According to this configuration, when information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in flash memory 64x) is erased, the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is also erased. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as is because the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is not erased even though the information used to ensure the fairness of the game has been erased.

Furthermore, when information stored in flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game) is erased, in addition to information stored in the first area of main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag), information stored in the second area of main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) may also be erased.

<Aspect 48>
In some of the above-mentioned embodiments, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes related to the progress of the game and various flags (such as a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag), and the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes for calculating and displaying game history information (game history processing) and various numerical information (game history information such as the above-mentioned prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and feature ratios), but instead of this configuration, a configuration may be used in which a RAM that performs the functions of the first area of the main RAM 64 (a RAM used for game progress processing) and a RAM that performs the functions of the second area of the main RAM 64 (a RAM used for game history processing) are separately provided.

<Aspect 49>
Among the above-described embodiments, in an embodiment including a flash memory 64x, the flash memory 64x may be configured to be stored in a space that leaves evidence of opening (e.g., a circuit board box with a seal attached). With this configuration, in order to tamper with the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 would need to be opened, leaving evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10. That is, based on whether or not evidence of opening remains on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x may have been tampered with. This makes it difficult to conceal tampering with the information stored in the flash memory 64x, thereby reducing the motivation to tamper with the information stored in the flash memory 64x and improving the integrity of the game.

The space in which traces of opening (also known as traces of unsealing or traces of opening and closing) remain can be configured in any of the various ways described in aspect 38 above.

<Aspect 50>
33 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of a part of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 50. The main MPU 62 in this aspect is provided with a ball entry detection IC 62c between the input/output port 62a and the main CPU 62x.

The ball entry detection IC 62c is electrically connected to each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h via the input/output port 62a, and determines whether a game ball has entered each entry port based on the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h. It then outputs information indicating the results of this determination (ball entry information, which is information regarding whether a game ball has entered each entry port) to the main CPU 62x and the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. This is explained in detail below.

Each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h, which detects the entry of a gaming ball into each entry port, is electrically connected to eight input bits, D0 through D7, provided in input port 62b. These eight input bits D0 through D7 are electrically connected to eight input bits R0 through R7 provided in entry ball detection IC 62c. In this embodiment, a low-level signal is always input to each of the eight input bits R0 through R7 provided in entry ball detection IC 62c. When a ball entry sensor detects the entry of a gaming ball into an entry port, the signal input to the input bit of the eight input bits R0 through R7 corresponding to that entry ball detection sensor rises from low to high.

The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether a game ball has entered each entry gate based on the signals output from each entry gate detection sensor 44a-44h. In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c monitors eight input bits R0-R7 corresponding to each of the eight entry gate detection sensors 44a-44h. When it detects a rising edge from a low level to a high level in the signal input to each input bit, it determines that a game ball has entered the entry gate corresponding to that input bit. However, if it detects a rising edge but the high level state does not continue for a predetermined period, or if it detects a rising edge but the rising edge occurred within a predetermined interval from the most recent falling edge, it determines that the detected rising edge is likely noise and therefore that a game ball has not entered the entry gate corresponding to that input bit. Various methods can be used to determine whether a game ball has entered each entry gate, including, for example, the method similar to the ball entry determination process described above (Figures 16 and 17).

The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether or not a gaming ball has entered each entry port at predetermined intervals, and outputs the ball entry information indicating the results of this determination via serial transmission to the main CPU 62x and also to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. In this embodiment, since eight ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are provided, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information (8 bits of ball entry information) indicating whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the eight entry ports at predetermined intervals (every 4 ms). Specifically, the ball entry detection IC 62c constantly outputs a low-level signal, and at predetermined intervals (every 4 ms) after determining whether a ball has entered the game, it outputs a 50 μs high-level signal as a start bit, then outputs eight bits of a 50 μs high-level signal (ball entered) or low-level signal (ball not entered) corresponding to whether a game ball has entered each of the eight entry ports, and finally outputs a 50 μs low-level signal as a stop bit.

The main CPU 62x receives ball entry information from the ball entry detection IC 62c and executes processing related to the progress of the game, such as the jackpot lottery described above and the payout of prize balls, based on the received ball entry information for each entry port. The main CPU 62x also executes the game history processing described above (Figure 29), and executes processing related to the calculation and display of game history information such as the payout rate (total), feature ratio, and consecutive feature ratio. The main CPU 62x then stores the numerical information used in the calculation process of the game history information and the calculated game history information in flash memory 64x.

Next, we will explain the inspection using an inspection device 320 that can receive the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c.

In this embodiment, while a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, that is, while a player or inspector is operating the operating handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 to launch game balls onto the game board 30 and play the game as usual, the inspector uses the inspection device 320 to inspect whether a legitimate game is being played on the pachinko machine 10 during this inspection period. This is explained in detail below.

The inspection machine 320 can execute a ball entry information reception mode in which it receives ball entry information for each ball entry port from the ball entry detection IC 62c; a ball entry port information setting mode in which it sets ball entry port information, which is information about the type of ball entry port and the number of winning balls provided in the pachinko machine 10; and a game history information calculation mode in which it calculates the various game history information described above based on the received ball entry information and the set ball entry port information.

When inspecting whether legitimate play is being played on a pachinko machine 10, an inspector connects the connection cable 329 of the inspection device 320 to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection device 320 to switch the inspection device 320 to the ball-entering information reception mode described above. The player or inspector then operates the operation handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 being inspected to launch game balls onto the game board 30, and continues playing the game as usual.

When the inspection device 320 switches to the goal information receiving mode, it outputs a high-level signal to the output permission signal line 329b in the connection cable 329. The output permission signal line 329b is electrically connected to the output permission determination bit 62d of the goal detection IC 62c via the inspection terminal 65. The goal detection IC 62c determines whether a high-level signal has been input to the output permission determination bit 62d, and outputs the above-mentioned goal information via the inspection terminal 65 to the information transmission signal line 329a in the connection cable 329 via serial transmission communication only during the period in which it determines that a high-level signal has been input to the output permission determination bit 62d.

In the ball entry information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 receives ball entry information corresponding to eight entry ports at predetermined intervals, and measures (counts) and stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port. The inspection machine 320 then displays information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each entry port that has been measured (counted) on the display unit 328. In other words, each time a game ball enters an entry port as the player or inspector plays a game, 1 is added to the information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, which is displayed on the display unit 328. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 will display the number of game balls that have entered each entry port after switching to the ball entry information reception mode.

After a sufficient inspection period (e.g., approximately 10 hours) has elapsed, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the entrance information reception mode, and the inspection machine 320 then transitions to the entrance information setting mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the entrance information setting mode, it displays an input screen on the display unit 328 for the inspector to input the entrance type and number of prize balls for each entrance. In this embodiment, the inspection machine 320 receives 8 bits of entrance information at predetermined intervals in the entrance information receiving mode, and therefore the display unit 328 displays an input screen for the inspector to input the entrance type and number of prize balls for each of the eight entrances. Note that the entrance type refers to the type of entrance at which each entrance detection sensor 44a-44h, such as the first start entrance 33, the second start entrance 34, the large prize entrance 36a, and the discharge passage, is installed, and the number of prize balls refers to the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters an entrance.

By operating the operation unit 327, the inspector inputs ball entrance information (ball entrance type information and prize ball number information) for each ball entrance into the inspection machine 320. Specifically, the inspector obtains information such as which bit in the ball entrance information output from the ball entrance detection IC 62c corresponds to which type of ball entrance (type information) and information such as how many prize balls should be set for each type of ball entrance (prize ball number information) from the specifications or instruction manual of the pachinko machine 10, and inputs this information into the inspection machine 320. When the inspector has finished inputting the ball entrance information, the inspection machine 320 transitions to game play history information calculation mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game history information calculation mode, it calculates the various game history information described above based on the number of game balls that entered each entrance measured (counted) in the ball entry information reception mode, and the type information and number of winning balls information set in the entrance information setting mode. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball payout rate (total), feature ratio, and consecutive feature ratio. Once the inspection machine 320 has completed calculating the various game history information, it displays the calculated various game history information on the display unit 328.

By checking the various gaming history information displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320, the inspector can confirm whether legitimate gaming was being carried out during the inspection period.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x, so that the inspection device 320 can receive ball entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x.

For example, if, instead of adopting the configuration of this embodiment, a configuration were adopted in which ball-entering information was output via the main CPU 62x to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, and if the main CPU 62x had a malfunction or been illegally tampered with, the malfunction or illegal tampering could affect the ball-entering information output to the inspection device 320. Furthermore, the reliability of the game history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x could be reduced due to the influence of a malfunction or illegal tampering of the main CPU 62x.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x. Therefore, even if the main CPU 62x has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the ball entry information output to the inspection device 320 will not be affected by the malfunction or tampering. As a result, the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can execute processing based on ball entry information that has not been affected by the malfunction or tampering. Specifically, the inspection device 320 can calculate game history information based on ball entry information that has not been affected by the main CPU 62x. Therefore, even if the main CPU 62x may have a malfunction or been tampered with and the game history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x is unreliable, an inspector inspecting the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can use the inspection device 320 to confirm game history information that has not been affected by the main CPU 62x. As a result, the integrity of gameplay can be ensured.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 using a serial transmission method.Therefore, compared to a configuration in which ball entry information is output using a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 that passes the ball entry information to the inspection device 320 can be simplified, and the configuration of the inspection device 320 that receives the ball entry information can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which ball entry information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry ports is output using a parallel transmission method, the inspection terminal 65 must be equipped with an output section (e.g., output bits) corresponding to the number of ball entry ports. Similarly, the inspection device 320 must be equipped with an input section (e.g., input bits) corresponding to the number of ball entry ports. Furthermore, because the number of ball entry ports provided on a pachinko machine 10 differs depending on the type (model) of pachinko machine 10, it becomes necessary to prepare an inspection device 320 equipped with a different number of input sections for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c includes a means for outputting ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the inspection terminal 65 may be configured to include at least one output unit capable of outputting ball entry information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10. This simplifies the configuration of the inspection terminal 65. Similarly, the inspection device 320 may be configured to include at least one input unit capable of inputting the ball entry information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10. This simplifies the configuration of the inspection device 320. Furthermore, even when the inspection device 320 is connected to pachinko machines 10 with different numbers of ball entry ports, the inspection device 320 can input ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports via a serial transmission method. In other words, the inspection machine 320 can be used with other pachinko machines 10 that have a different number of ball entrances. As a result, the versatility of the inspection machine 320 can be increased.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection device 320 only when it receives a Hi-level signal from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. This prevents the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 from being output to the outside unless the Hi-level signal is being received. This prevents the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

<Aspect 51>
In the above-mentioned aspect 50, in the entrance information setting mode of the inspection machine 320, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 to manually input the entrance information into the inspection machine 320, but instead of this configuration, the inspection machine 320 may receive the entrance information from the pachinko machine 10 and set it.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection device 320 transitions to the entrance gate information setting mode, it sends a signal requesting the transmission of entrance gate information (entrance gate information transmission request command) to the entrance gate detection IC 62c via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. Upon receiving this signal (entrance gate information transmission request command), the entrance gate detection IC 62c transmits the entrance gate information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. The inspection device 320 sets the entrance gate information received from the entrance gate detection IC 62c for each entrance gate and ends the entrance gate information setting mode.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, thereby eliminating the need to manually input ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) into the inspection device 320 and preventing incorrect ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) from being input to the inspection device 320. As a result, the inspection device 320 is able to calculate game history information based on the ball entry information and accurate ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information).

In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c is configured to transmit the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 upon receiving a predetermined signal (ball entry information transmission request command). However, instead of this configuration, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to transmit the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 when the connection cable 329 of the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 (i.e., when it detects that the connection cable 329 of the inspection device 320 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65). With this configuration, the inspection device 320 can quickly execute processing that requires the ball entry information after the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entrance detection IC 62c is configured to transmit the ball entrance information to the inspection device 320, but instead of this configuration, the main CPU 62x may read the ball entrance information stored in the main ROM 63 and transmit it to the inspection device 320.

<Aspect 52>
In the above-described embodiment 50, the ball-entry detection IC 62c is configured to output the ball-entry information via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission only during the period when it determines that a high-level signal is being input to the output permission determination bit 62d. However, other configurations may be used instead. For example, the ball-entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output the ball-entry information via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission only during the period when it determines that a signal of a predetermined pattern is being input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Furthermore, for example, the ball-entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output the ball-entry information via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission only when it determines that a signal of a predetermined pattern is being input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Furthermore, for example, a predetermined switch may be provided on the inspection terminal 65, and when it is determined that a cable terminal of a predetermined shape is connected to the inspection terminal 65 and the predetermined switch is pressed down, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information via the inspection terminal 65 using serial transmission communication.

<Aspect 53>
In the above-mentioned aspects 50 to 52, the inspection device 320 may be configured to transition to the goal entry information receiving mode after the goal entry information setting mode has been completed. With this configuration, the type of each goal entry is set at the time of transition to the goal entry information receiving mode, so that the type of each goal entry and the number of goals entered can be displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection device 320 during the goal entry information receiving mode.

As a result, the inspector can determine which type of entry port the game ball entered even while in the ball entry information reception mode. Furthermore, the inspector can confirm whether the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c is authentic by checking whether the information displayed on the display unit 328 (type of entry port and number of balls entered) matches the visually confirmed number of game balls that actually entered each entry port.

<Aspect 54>
In the above aspects 50 to 53, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to transition to a game history information reception mode, which is a mode for receiving game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, when the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and then transition to the above-mentioned ball entrance information setting mode, ball entrance information reception mode, and game history information calculation mode.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, it transitions to the game history information reception mode. Once the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game history information reception mode, it transmits a signal requesting the transmission of game history information (a game history information transmission request command) to the main CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. Upon receiving this signal (game history information transmission request command), the main CPU 62x transmits the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. Once the inspection machine 320 stores the game history information received from the main CPU 62x in RAM 326, it terminates the game history information reception mode and transitions to the entrance information setting mode.

When the inspection device 320 transitions to the entrance information setting mode, it sends a signal requesting the transmission of entrance information (entrance information transmission request command) to the main CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. Upon receiving this signal (entrance information transmission request command), the main CPU 62x transmits the entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. Once the inspection device 320 has set the entrance information received from the main CPU 62x for each entrance, it ends the entrance information setting mode and transitions to the entrance information receiving mode.

When the inspection machine 320 switches to the ball entry information reception mode, it receives ball entry information corresponding to the eight entry ports at predetermined intervals and measures (counts) and stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port. The inspection machine 320 then displays information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each entry port that it has measured (counted) on the display unit 328. In other words, each time a game ball enters an entry port as the player or inspector plays a game, 1 is added to the information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, which is displayed on the display unit 328. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 will display the number of game balls that have entered each entry port after switching to the ball entry information reception mode.

After a sufficient inspection period (for example, approximately 10 hours) has elapsed, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the ball-going information reception mode, and the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game history information calculation mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the gaming history information calculation mode, it calculates the various gaming history information described above based on the number of gaming balls that entered each entry port measured (counted) in the entry information reception mode and the type information and number of winning balls information set in the entry port information setting mode. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball payout rate (total), feature ratio, and consecutive feature ratio. When the inspection machine 320 has completed calculating the various gaming history information, it displays on the display unit 328 the various gaming history information calculated in the gaming history information calculation mode and the various gaming history information received in the gaming history information reception mode (the gaming history information stored in flash memory 64x). That is, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays game history information covering the inspection period during which the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 was connected to the pachinko machine 10 and received ball entry information in ball entry information reception mode, as well as game history information covering a predetermined period in the past that has been calculated by the main CPU 62x of the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the flash memory 64x.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can receive and display the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as first game history information) stored in the flash memory 64x. The inspection device 320 can also execute processing based on the ball entry information received during the inspection period. Specifically, the inspection device 320 can calculate game history information based on the ball entry information received during a specified inspection period while connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and display the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as second game history information). Therefore, for example, an inspector inspecting the pachinko machine 10 can compare the first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x provided in the pachinko machine 10 with the second game history information based on the ball entry information received by the inspection device 320 during the specified inspection period.

Here, if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 10 or unauthorized modifications (such as nail tampering) are made to the pachinko machine 10, causing a change in the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, a difference may arise between the first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x based on ball entry information over a predetermined period in the past) and the second game history information calculated by the inspection machine 320 based on ball entry information over a predetermined inspection period. Therefore, by noting the difference between the two pieces of game history information, an inspector inspecting the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether a malfunction or unauthorized modifications (such as nail tampering) have occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive and set the entrance information in the entrance information setting mode described above, and then transition to a game history information reception mode to receive the game history information. The inspection machine 320 may also be configured to calculate the game history information for the inspection period in the game history information calculation mode described above, and then transition to a game history information reception mode to receive the game history information stored in flash memory 64x.

<Aspect 55>
In the above-described aspects 50 to 54, the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to eight, but may be nine or more, or seven or less. The ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information corresponding to the number of ball entry ports. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has seven or fewer ball entry ports, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information using the first half of the eight bits output via serial transmission. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has nine or more ball entry ports, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information corresponding to nine or more ball entry ports by multiple 8-bit serial transmission outputs. Furthermore, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output 16-bit, 32-bit, or other ball entry information at once via serial transmission.

<Aspect 56>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the main CPU 62x is configured to execute the game history processing as one process included in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23: step S10616), but instead of this configuration, the CPU 62x may be configured to execute the game history processing during the remaining time of the above-mentioned main processing, rather than executing it as a timer interrupt processing.

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the primary CPU 62x in mode 56. In step S11001, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on and determination of the validity of data stored in RAM 64 are executed. After executing step S11001, the process proceeds to step S11002, where interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing (Figure 13) to occur.

After executing step S11002, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S11003 to S11007. That is, the main CPU 62x is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described above, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next. This remaining time will vary depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt processing, and this irregular time (remaining time) is used to repeatedly execute the processing (remaining processing) of steps S11003 to S11007.

In step S11003, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S11004, where a random number initial value update process is performed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and to step S11005, where a fluctuation counter update process is performed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, after which the read numerical information is overwritten on the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S11006.

In step S11006, the above-mentioned gaming history processing (Figure 29) is executed. As described above, the gaming history processing includes multiple tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 in Figure 29) that are executed sequentially to complete the calculation of gaming history information. The main CPU 62x executes some of the multiple tasks in one execution of the gaming history processing included in the remaining processing. In other words, the main CPU 62x completes the calculation of the gaming history information set as the calculation target by executing the gaming history processing multiple times. After executing step S11006, the process proceeds to step S11007, where an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing of step S11007, the process returns to step S11003, and the processing of steps S11003 to S11007 is repeated.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the remaining processing, including the gaming history processing, is repeatedly executed during the remaining time in the main processing (the period from the end of execution of one timer interrupt processing to the start of execution of the next timer interrupt processing), thereby preventing the execution of the remaining processing, including the gaming history processing, from starting even when the execution of one timer interrupt processing has not yet finished. In other words, by prioritizing the execution of the timer interrupt processing and repeatedly executing the remaining processing, including the gaming history processing, during the period when the timer interrupt processing is not being executed, it is possible to quickly calculate gaming history information.

Furthermore, if the configuration of this embodiment were not adopted and a configuration were adopted in which the game history processing was executed as part of the timer interrupt processing, the time required from start to finish of one execution of the timer interrupt processing would be longer. For example, even if a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt processing and it is time to start execution of the next timer interrupt processing, the execution of the first timer interrupt processing may not have finished yet, and the next timer interrupt processing may not be able to start until the execution of the first timer interrupt processing has finished. In this case, there is a risk that the delay in starting execution of the next timer interrupt processing will cause problems with the progress of the game.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the game history processing is executed as part of the remaining processing, which shortens the time required from start to finish of one execution of the timer interrupt processing compared to a configuration in which the game history processing is executed as part of the timer interrupt processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, for example, a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt processing, and it is time to start execution of the next timer interrupt processing, but the execution of the first timer interrupt processing has not yet finished. This prevents a situation in which the execution of the next timer interrupt processing cannot start until the execution of the first timer interrupt processing finishes. In this way, according to this embodiment, it is possible to efficiently and quickly calculate game history information by repeatedly executing the remaining processing, including the game history processing, during periods when timer interrupt processing is not being executed, while preventing malfunctions in game progress caused by delays in the start of execution of the next timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the gaming history processing includes multiple tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 of FIG. 29 ) that are executed sequentially to complete the calculation of gaming history information. The main CPU 62x executes some of the multiple tasks in one execution of the gaming history processing. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which all of the multiple tasks are executed in one execution of the gaming history processing, the time required from start to finish of one execution of the gaming history processing can be shortened. Specifically, for example, even if a condition for starting execution of timer interrupt processing is met during execution of the gaming history processing, the currently executing gaming history processing ends in a short time, thereby shortening the time from the satisfaction of the condition to the start of execution of the timer interrupt processing. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate gaming history information by repeatedly executing the remaining processing, while suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions due to delays in the start of execution of the timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the length of the remaining time changes depending on the length of time required from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, for example, as the length of one timer interrupt process increases, the remaining time from the end of that timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process decreases; conversely, as the length of one timer interrupt process decreases, the remaining time from the end of that timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process increases. If the remaining time is short, the number of times the game history process is executed can be reduced; conversely, if the remaining time is long, the number of times the game history process is executed can be increased. In other words, the number of times the game history process is executed can be changed depending on the length of the remaining time.

<Aspect 57>
At least some of the various functions described in each of the above embodiments (for example, a function for storing the number of game balls that have entered each entrance, a function for calculating the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered each entrance, a function for storing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, a function for calculating game history information such as the ratio of game balls to each entrance, a function for storing the calculated game history information, a function for displaying the stored game history information, a function for erasing various information stored in various storage means such as RAM or flash memory, etc.) may be realized by the game history management chip 300, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), or the inspection machine 320. Also, the game history management chip 300, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), and the inspection machine 320 may share or cooperate to realize at least some of these various functions.

<Aspect 58>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 but also to other types of gaming machines. For example, they can be applied to reel-type gaming machines such as pachinko-type slot machines. Specifically, for example, they can be applied to a configuration in which the ratio between the number of gaming medals won during a bonus, the number of gaming medals won by a sub-role drawn during a normal period, and the number of gaming medals won during a favorable period (AT, ART) other than the bonus is calculated and the ratio is displayed on a liquid crystal display device, or a configuration in which the ratio is output to an inspection machine and the ratio is displayed on the display unit of the inspection machine.

<Aspect 59>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, some or all of the functions implemented by software (by a CPU executing a program) may be implemented by hardware. For example, the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured with dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating gaming history information. This configuration can speed up the arithmetic processing for calculating gaming history information and prevent fraud, such as tampering with the arithmetic program to prevent accurate gaming history information from being calculated. The hardware may be configured with digital or analog circuits. Analog circuits can speed up arithmetic processing even more than digital circuits.

<Aspect 60>
One or more configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 59 may be replaced or combined as appropriate. One or more configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 59 may be combined with one or more configurations included in embodiments other than the first embodiment. Among the configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 59, non-essential configurations may be omitted as appropriate within the scope of the spirit of the invention.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 35 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a generally rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the gaming hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are located on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing during a jackpot lottery conducted by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that is pressed by the player to stop the game ball from being launched by the game ball launching mechanism, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

In addition, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with a predetermined launch strength, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the operating handle 25 is rotated to the maximum. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows toward the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. In other words, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can perform a so-called "right hit." Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched toward the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is on. In other words, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26, thereby realizing the launch of a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is configured to be located on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 may also be located in another position. For example, the game ball launch button 26 may be located inside (on the periphery of) the operating handle 25, similar to the weight button 25b. This allows the player to operate the operating handle 25, weight button 25b, and game ball launch button 26 with just their right hand.

Figure 36 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, after which they flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The gaming board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

General winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which game balls can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the bottom center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, and is located on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. The second starting hole 34 is also provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is the gate that triggers the execution of a lottery to open the electric device 34a. Specifically, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 uses this passage as an opportunity to execute an internal lottery (electric device release lottery). If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to the electric device release, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device release state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state, preventing game balls from entering the large winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). If the jackpot lottery results in a large winning or small winning, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that executes the opening and closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions from a closed state, in which game balls cannot enter, to an open state, in which game balls can enter, and then transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

In addition, an outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

Here, "entering" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a situation in which the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area PA, but also a situation in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32, variable winning device 36, first starting opening 33, and second starting opening 34 will also be referred to as "winning."

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a static first pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second pattern. The second pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a static second pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first pending display unit 37c and a second pending display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 can be reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 can be reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is initiated, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends.

The special drawing unit 37, the regular drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured as segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may also be configured as various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device equipped in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the first start opening 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the second start opening 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display of the pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also displays effects during the open/close execution mode to which the game enters when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 37 is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns and display surface 41a on the pattern display device 41. Figure 37(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed LCD patterns on the pattern display device 41. The LCD patterns are images displayed on the pattern display device 41, and correspond to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b. When a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface 41a, and when a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in Figure 37(a), the pattern display device 41 displays variably the numbers 1 to 8 as LCD patterns. The variably displayed patterns may also be numbers 1 to 8 with pictures of characters or the like.

Figure 37(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol column Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 37(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed in which each symbol column scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 37(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction periodically. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the static display is achieved, if the result of the jackpot lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described manner, and various other variations in the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change round ends, the static display is displayed, and the static display ends. It is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the results of the jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on a win in either the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the results of one jackpot lottery for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34, it causes the segment display in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to change for each play round, and then causes the segment display to change to a static display corresponding to the result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a pattern row as a first LCD pattern or a second LCD pattern for each play, and then statically displays the pattern row so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts to when the specified lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the specified lottery result is statically displayed.

As shown in Figure 37 (b), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2. The first pending display area Ds1 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending plays based on winning at the first starting port 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending plays based on winning at the second starting port 34. A pending play refers to an unexecuted play, in which a variable display has not yet begun to notify the results of the jackpot lottery for special information obtained based on winning at the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The number of pending plays that can be reserved based on winning at the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending plays. Furthermore, the number of pending plays that can be reserved based on winning at the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 can display hold displays corresponding to four hold play times.

Also, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the display surface 41a is equipped with a first synchronization display unit Sync1 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stationary display of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a of the special pattern unit 37, and a second synchronization display unit Sync2 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stationary display of the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display unit 37b of the special pattern unit 37. Specifically, when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a changing pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 flashes, and when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a stationary pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 lights up. Also, when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a changing pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 flashes, and when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a stationary pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 lights up.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the LCD general display area NA, the first synchronization display unit Sync1, and the second synchronization display unit Sync2, but the display surface 41a may be configured not to display some or all of these displays.

B2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 38 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is primarily composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio/light emitting control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs stored in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 70 and the power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control unit 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. In addition, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to various detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports and through gates, such as the general entry port 32, first start port 33, second start port 34, through gate 35, and variable entry device 36. Based on signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each ball entry port, and whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the gaming ball's entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are the variable winning drive unit 36c, which opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, the electric device drive unit 34b, which opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34, the door drive unit 48b, which opens and closes the door 48a, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the electric role opening lottery results in a win, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a game ball has entered the general prize entry port 32, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. If a game ball has entered the second start port 34, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the control handle 25. As described above, the control handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When a player grips the control handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on. When the player rotates the control handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched onto the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio and light control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it references the command information storage area 63f in the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio and light control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting devices such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 100. The audio and light control device 90 is also connected to a performance operation button 24, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a specified timing, it controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects that operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect that will be executed while the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a static manner, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 39 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. The various counter information is used by the MPU 62 when performing jackpot lotteries, setting the display on the main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for jackpot lotteries. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate jackpot types. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to a different pattern.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also has a reserve information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reserve information storage area 64b has a first reserve area Ra and a second reserve area Rb. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will now be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The jackpot random number counter C1 that has been moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

Next, we will explain the details of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 39, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, we will explain the details of the reach random number counter C3. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. However, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 37(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, a reach is reached when a varying symbol display is performed in symbol column Z2. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained in detail. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 when determining the change time in the first and second pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the change time of the patterns on the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 begins to fluctuate. When determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e using the value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, and variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in this invention. Also, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, we will explain the hit/miss table. The hit/miss table is table data used to check against the jackpot random number counter C1 when a jackpot lottery is held based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes set for the jackpot lottery; a low probability mode and a high probability mode; when a jackpot lottery is held in low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a jackpot lottery is held in high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced.

Figure 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. Figure 40(a) shows the win/loss table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and Figure 40(b) shows the win/loss table for high probability mode.

As shown in Figure 40(a), the hit/miss table for the low probability mode has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 40(b), the hit/miss table for the high probability mode has 16 values from 0 to 15 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the low probability mode is included in the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the result of the jackpot lottery shows a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in this embodiment, a "small win" may also be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be explained. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode
(2) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) The lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) for the big win lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 1.6 seconds or until 10 balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

The opening time limit for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the number of balls that can be opened per opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for one opening may be longer or the number of balls that can be opened per opening may be set higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that no winning occurs in the variable winning device 36.

In this embodiment, the opening and closing execution mode does not have multiple types of winning modes, and the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode described above. In other words, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 41 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. Figure 41(a) shows the allocation table for the first starting port, and Figure 41(b) shows the allocation table for the second starting port. The allocation table for the first starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the allocation table for the second starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting hole in Figure 41 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting hole 33 are set as 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot.

A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R probability variable jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

The 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0-39," "0-13" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot, "14-27" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot, "28-33" corresponds to a 16R regular jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has four types of jackpots. This diversifies the types of jackpots. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the 16R probability jackpot is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the 8R probability jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By providing multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage to the player in this way, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in Figure 41 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a 16R variable probability jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. In the allocation table for the second starting port, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 39," "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R variable probability jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R normal jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot differs between a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, providing a clear difference in the advantages to the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released into the game area PA in the same manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery using the electric role release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role release 34a per time is set longer when the electric role release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs in high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one electric role. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, the time between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in meeting the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 42 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table (win/loss table for the lottery to open an electric reel) used when conducting the lottery to open an electric reel.

Figure 42(a) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 42(a), the win/loss table for the electric feature opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature opening. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in low-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the electric feature opening is won with a probability of 1 in 233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in low-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 42(b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 42(b), the winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 that will result in a winning electric feature opening. Four values from 462 to 465 have been set as the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 that will result in a losing electric feature opening. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in high-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the probability of winning the electric feature opening is 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in high-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low-frequency support mode.

B3. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 43 is a timing chart outlining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. When a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode is made up of an opening period, which is the period until the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 begins, an opening/closing processing period, which is the period during which the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b is executed, and an ending period, which is the period after the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b has ended. In this embodiment, the first opening of the opening/closing door 36b begins immediately after the opening/closing processing period begins.

First, we will explain the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode, with reference to (A) in Figure 43.

As shown in (A) of Figure 43, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode in response to a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during the low-frequency support mode, it sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it is set to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect, regardless of the support mode state (game state) of the main control device 60. In other words, the audio and light emitting control device 90 is set to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively for one command. The opening effect is an effect that indicates to the player that the opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has begun due to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode. The right-hit notification effect is an effect that suggests to the player that a "right hit" is recommended. A player who recognizes the right-hit notification effect can understand that it would be better to change from a "left hit" to a "right hit."

Here, "right-handed hit" refers to a hitting style in which the operating handle 25 is rotated by a predetermined amount or more, causing the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined speed (launch strength, momentum) or more, and the launched game ball to circulate in the area to the right of the play area PA. On the other hand, "left-handed hit" refers to a hitting style in which the operating handle 25 is rotated by a predetermined amount or less, causing the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a speed (launch strength, momentum) less than the predetermined speed, and the launched game ball to circulate in the area to the left of the play area PA.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a variable winning device 36 is provided in the area to the right of the play area PA. During the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 opens and closes, making it possible for game balls to enter the large winning opening 36a provided inside the variable winning device 36. Therefore, during the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 opens and closes, a "right hit," which is a hitting method that circulates game balls in the area to the right of the play area PA, is recommended. For this reason, a right hit notification effect is executed after the opening effect.

After setting the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect, it sends an opening effect command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the audio and light emitting control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect, regardless of the support mode status (game status) of the main control device 60. In other words, the display control device 100 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively for one command. The display control device 100 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41. In this way, the opening effect is executed by the audio and light emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100 working together. Other effects, such as the right-hit notification effect and round effect described below, are also executed by the audio and light emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100 working together in the same way.

When the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect ends, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins control of the audio output so that audio corresponding to the right-hit notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins control of the illumination of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect ends, the display control device 100 begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the right-hit notification effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 10 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emission control unit 90 indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun.

After the audio and light control device 90 has completed the control corresponding to the three-second right-hit notification effect, it is set to execute a round effect when it receives an opening start command from the main control device 60. The round effect is an effect that indicates to the player that the opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is being executed.

After setting the round performance to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 transmits a round performance command to the display control device 100 to set the round performance to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the round performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round performance.

After the display control device 100 has completed the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, when it receives a round effect command from the audio and light control device 90, it sets the round effect to be executed and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it ends the control corresponding to the round performance and sets it to execute the ending performance. The ending performance is a performance that indicates to the player that the opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been completed.

After setting the ending performance to be executed, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the ending performance to be executed. The audio and light emission control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emission control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

In this embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, a through gate 35, an electric device 34a, and a second starting hole 34 are provided in the area to the right of the play area PA. When a game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode, there is a high probability of winning the electric device opening lottery, causing the electric device 34a to open, making it easier to insert the game ball into the second starting hole 34. Therefore, in this embodiment, even during the high-frequency support mode, when the electric device 34a has a high probability of opening, a "right hit," which is a hitting method that circulates game balls in the area to the right of the play area PA, is recommended. In this embodiment, because a right-hit notification effect is executed in the opening/closing execution mode, many players will recognize the right-hit notification effect and execute a "right hit." Furthermore, players who executed a "right hit" in the opening/closing execution mode will continue to execute a "right hit" during the high-frequency support mode even after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode will be explained with reference to Figure 43 (B). The main differences from the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode described above are that the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to 6.95 seconds and sends the opening start command 6.95 seconds after sending the opening command, and although the same processing as in Figure 43 (A) (when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode) is performed, in which the audio and light control unit 90 receives the opening command and sets it to execute an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect, the opening start command is received while the opening effect is being executed and before the right-hit notification effect has started to be executed, so the round effect is executed without executing the right-hit notification effect. The specific processing is explained below.

As shown in (B) of Figure 43, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode in response to a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during the high frequency support mode, it sets the length of the opening period to 7 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light emission control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect, regardless of the support mode status (game status) of the main control device 60. In other words, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command. After setting the device to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an opening effect command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect, regardless of the support mode state (game state) of the main control device 60. In other words, the display control device 100 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command. The display control device 100 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41.

As described above, the audio and light control device 90 is configured to initiate control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, which is set to be executed after the opening effect, upon completion of control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect. Similarly, the display control device 100 is configured to initiate control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, which is set to be executed after the opening effect, upon completion of control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect. However, if a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during the high-frequency support mode, the main control device 60 initiates the opening/closing processing period upon completion of the opening period set to 6.95 seconds, and transmits an opening start command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating the start of the opening/closing processing period. As a result, the audio and light control device 90 receives the opening start command from the main control device 60 while executing control corresponding to the opening effect and before starting control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. Upon receiving the opening start command, the audio and light control device 90 terminates control corresponding to the currently executing opening effect and sets the display to execute a round effect. In other words, even though the right-hit notification effect was set to be executed, the start of control of the right-hit notification effect by the audio and light control device 90 is canceled.

After setting the round performance to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 transmits a round performance command to the display control device 100 to set the round performance to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the round performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round performance.

The display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the audio and light control device 90 while executing control corresponding to the opening effect and before starting control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. Upon receiving the round effect command, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the opening effect that is currently being executed and sets it to execute the round effect. The display control device 100 then starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the pattern display device 41. In other words, even though the right-hit notification effect had been set to be executed, the start of control of the right-hit notification effect by the display control device 100 is canceled.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

In this way, in this embodiment, if a player wins a jackpot in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode when the player is performing a "left hit," an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect are executed, thereby informing the player that they have entered the opening/closing execution mode and that a "right hit" is recommended. Furthermore, if a player wins a jackpot in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode when the player is already performing a "right hit," a right-hit notification effect is not executed, thereby adding a sense of speed to the game and increasing the player's interest.

Note that when the game is not in the opening/closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 does not open, and the electric device 34a does not open at all, so a "left-handed hit" is recommended, which allows the game ball to enter the first starting hole 33. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode ends and the high-frequency support mode ends and the game transitions to the low-frequency support mode, a left-handed hit notification effect is executed, recommending a change from "right-handed hit" to "left-handed hit."

Next, we will provide an overview of the processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example.

Figure 44 is a timing chart outlining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example. The main differences from the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment described above are that the audio and light emitting control device 90 is set to execute only the opening effect when it receives an opening command, and that when the audio and light emitting control device 90 is to execute the right-hit notification effect, the main control device 60 sends a right-hit notification command to the audio and light emitting control device 90. This is explained in detail below.

First, we will explain the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode, with reference to (A) in Figure 44.

As shown in (A) of Figure 44, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example transitions to the opening/closing execution mode in response to a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during the low-frequency support mode, it sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening performance. After setting the device to execute an opening performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an opening performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute an opening performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the opening performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the opening performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41.

If a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode, the main control unit 60 will send a right-hit notification command to the audio and light control unit 90 seven seconds after the start of the opening period, indicating that it is time to execute a right-hit notification effect. Note that, as described below, if a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode, the main control unit 60 will not send a right-hit notification command.

After completing control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a right-hit notification command from the main control device 60 and sets it to execute a 3-second right-hit notification effect. After setting it to execute a right-hit notification effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a right-hit notification effect command to the display control device 100 to set it to execute a right-hit notification effect. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the right-hit notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-hit notification effect.

After the display control device 100 has completed control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect, when it receives a right-hit notification effect command from the audio and light control device 90, it sets the display control device 100 to execute a 3-second right-hit notification effect and starts control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the right-hit notification effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 10 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emission control unit 90 indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun.

After completing the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening start command from the main control device 60 and sets the round effect to be executed. After setting the round effect to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a round effect command to the display control device 100 to set the round effect to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 starts audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and starts light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect.

After the display control device 100 has completed the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, when it receives a round effect command from the audio and light control device 90, it sets the round effect to be executed and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

Next, the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during the high-frequency support mode will be explained with reference to (B) in Figure 44. The main differences from the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during the low-frequency support mode described above are that the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to 7 seconds, the main control unit 60 does not send a right-hit notification command to the audio and light-emitting control unit 90, and the opening start command is sent 7 seconds after the opening command is sent. The specific processing will be explained below.

As shown in (B) of Figure 44, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example transitions to the opening/closing execution mode in response to a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during the high-frequency support mode, it sets the length of the opening period to 7 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light emission control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening performance. After setting the device to execute an opening performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an opening performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute an opening performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the opening performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the opening performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 10 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emitting control unit 90, indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun. Note that, because the main control unit 60 has won a jackpot in the jackpot lottery during the high frequency support mode, it does not send a right-hit notification command to the audio and light emitting control unit 90, unlike the case shown in (A) of Figure 44 above. Therefore, in the example shown in (B) of Figure 44, the right-hit notification effect is not executed.

After completing control corresponding to the 7-second opening performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening start command from the main control device 60 and sets the round performance to be executed. After setting the round performance to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a round performance command to the display control device 100 to set the round performance to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the round performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round performance.

After the display control device 100 has completed control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect, when it receives a round effect command from the audio and light control device 90, it sets the display control device 100 to execute the round effect and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this comparative example, when executing two effects, an opening effect and a round effect, as shown in (B) of Figure 44, the main control unit 60 only needs to send two commands, an opening command and a release start command, to the audio and light emitting control unit 90. On the other hand, when executing three effects, an opening effect, a right hit notification effect, and a round effect, as shown in (A) of Figure 44, the main control unit 60 needs to send three commands, an opening command, a right hit notification command, and a release start command, to the audio and light emitting control unit 90. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example, when executing a right hit notification effect, the main control unit 60 needs to send a right hit notification command.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, even when three effects, an opening effect, a right-hit notification effect, and a round effect, are executed as shown in (A) of FIG. 43, or when two effects, an opening effect and a round effect, are executed without executing a right-hit notification effect as shown in (B) of FIG. 43, the main control unit 60 only needs to send two commands, an opening command and a release start command, to the audio/light emission control unit 90. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the main control unit 60 does not need to send a right-hit notification command whether or not the right-hit notification effect is executed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the frequency of command transmission by the main control unit 60 can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 60. Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the right-hit notification command shown in the comparative example of FIG. 44 is unnecessary, and therefore the data capacity required to store the right-hit notification command can be reduced from the data ROM of the main ROM 63. Furthermore, since the main control unit 60 does not need to determine the support mode state (game state) when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and then determine whether or not to send a right-hit notification command based on the result of that determination, the processing time of the main control unit 60 can be shortened, and since a program for that processing is not required, the capacity required to store the program that implements that processing can be reduced from the program ROM of the main ROM 63.

B4. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, the processing executed by the main control device 60 will be described, and then the processing executed by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

To progress each game, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the main MPU 62 also executes NMI interrupt processing, which is activated by the input of a power outage signal; however, a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
45 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is initiated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S20101, the system executes a reading process for the various detection sensors 67a-67e. That is, the system reads the status of the various detection sensors 67a-67e connected to the main control unit 60, determines the status of the sensors, and saves the detection information (winning detection information). Then, the system proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S20103.

In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the program proceeds to step S20104.

In step S20104, a ball entry process for the starting hole is executed in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting hole in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, proceed to step S20105.

In step S20105, a through gate ball entry process is executed in response to a game ball entering the through gate 35. Details of the through gate ball entry process in step S20105 will be described later. After step S20105 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Starting point entry processing>
Next, the ball-entry process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-entry process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 45: S20104).

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting hole. In step S20201, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting ball entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. If it is determined in step S20201 that the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S20203.

In step S20203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and this first start pending number RaN is set as the target for the processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of game balls pending based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 33. Then, proceed to step S20209.

If it is determined in step S20201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205, where it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S20205 that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out four gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20205 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read, and this second start pending number RbN is set as the target for the processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending balls based on the number of game balls entering the second start opening 34. Then, proceed to step S20209.

In step S20209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (S20209: NO), that is, if the start pending number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, if in step S20209 the number of pending start items N is less than the upper limit (S20209: YES), proceed to step S20210, add 1 to the number of pending start items N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step S20211, add 1 to the value stored in the total number of pending items storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total number of pending items CRN). The total number of pending start items CRN indicates the sum of the first number of pending start items RaN and the second number of pending start items RbN. Then proceed to step S20212.

In step S20212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (Figure 45) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding holding area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved number to which 1 was added in step S20210. Specifically, if the first start reserved number RaN is set as the target for processing, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (Figure 45) are stored in the first free memory area of the first holding area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step S20210. Additionally, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 45) are stored in the first free memory area in the second holding area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step S20210. After executing step S20212, proceed to step S20213.

In step S20213, a first-time determination process is executed. The first-time determination process is a process that determines the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc., based on the information (reserved information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the first-time determination process will be described later. After executing step S20213, proceed to step S20214.

In step S20214, a process for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the result of the advance determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to confirm that a game ball has entered the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 and the result of the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on that ball entry, before that hold information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of the normal process (Figure 49: step S20503), which will be described later.

In addition, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for this starting hole.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the winning process for the starting slot (FIG. 46: S20213).

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the advance determination process. As described above, the advance determination process is a process that executes determinations based on pending information, such as whether the jackpot lottery will be won or lost, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach has occurred, before the pending information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60.

In step S20301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the memory area upon the game ball entering the starting hole in the ball entry process for the starting hole (Figure 46) is read. Then, proceed to step S20302, where the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the result of the determination of the prior determination process executed upon a ball entry prior to this ball entry is read from the corresponding memory area, and the presence or absence of a special jackpot that will occur prior to the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is determined, thereby determining the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round.

In step S20302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round (S20302: YES), the process proceeds to step S20303, where the hit/miss table for low probability mode stored in the hit/miss table memory area 63a is referenced. After that, the process proceeds to step S20305, where, based on the result of referencing the hit/miss table for low probability mode, it is determined whether the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20302 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round (S20302: NO), the process proceeds to step S20304, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step S20305, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step S20305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S20305: YES), the process proceeds to step S20306, where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the current starting hole is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S20307, where the allocation table stored in the allocation table memory area 63b is referenced. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 that is the subject of this allocation was obtained based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, the allocation table for the first starting hole is referenced; if it was obtained based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, the allocation table for the second starting hole is referenced. After executing step S20307, the process proceeds to step S20308.

In step S20308, the allocation table is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to a special jackpot. If it is determined in step S20308 that it corresponds to a special jackpot (S20308: YES), the process proceeds to step S20309, where special jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. The first determination processing then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20308 that it does not correspond to a special jackpot (S20308: NO), the process proceeds to step S20310, where normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. The first determination processing then ends.

If it is determined in step S20305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (S20305: NO), the process proceeds to step S20311, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S20312, where the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table memory area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S20313, where, based on the reference to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to a reach occurrence.

If it is determined in step S20313 that a reach has occurred (S20313: YES), the process proceeds to step S20314, where reach occurrence information is stored in the first position determination process result storage area 64f. The first position determination process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20313 that a reach has not occurred (S20313: NO), the first position determination process ends.

<Through gate entry processing>
Next, the through gate ball entry process will be described. The through gate ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 45: S20105).

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the through gate. In step S20401, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S20401 that a gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 (S20401: YES), the process proceeds to step S20402, where it is determined whether the number of reserved feature items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved feature items SN is a value indicating the number of balls that have entered the through gate 35 and are reserved for the purpose of holding a lottery to open an electric feature. In this embodiment, the maximum value for the number of reserved feature items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20401 that a gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S20401: NO), the ball entry process for the through gate is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20402 that the number of reserved reel items SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S20402: YES), proceed to step S20403, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reel items SN. Then, proceed to step S20404.

In step S20404, the value of the electric feature release counter C4 updated in step S20103 (Figure 45) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric feature holding area 64c of RAM 64. Then, the through ball entry process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20402 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (S20402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for the through reels is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings for each control device are performed upon power-on, and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 is determined. Then, processing proceeds to step S20502.

In step S20502, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command that causes each sub-control device to start a demo video when power is turned on. Then, proceed to step S20503.

In step S20503, output data such as the start-up command set in step S20502, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, is sent to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step S20503, proceed to step S20504.

In step S20504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S20505.

In step S20505, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20506. In step S20506, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the jackpot lottery, setting the variable pattern display by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S20506, the process proceeds to step S20507.

In step S20507, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the program proceeds to step S20508.

In step S20508, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric device 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric device 34a. Details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S20509.

In step S20509, if the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined time, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-control device to start a demo video. Then, proceed to step S20510.

In step S20510, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (more precisely, the start of the command output processing in step S20503). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step S20510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (S20510: NO), in steps S20511 and S20512, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step S20511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Furthermore, in step S20512, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20510 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (S20510: YES), the process returns to step S20503, and the processes from step S20503 to step S20508 are executed.

Note that the execution time for each process from step S20503 to step S507 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game number control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 49: S20506).

Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the game round control process. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening and closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the pattern change in the game round in which a jackpot was won ends and the system transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S20601 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S20601: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S20602 onwards. In other words, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S20601: NO), the process proceeds to step S20602.

In step S20602, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is currently displaying a variable value. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b is currently displaying a variable value. This determination is made by determining whether the variable value display flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The variable value display flag is turned ON when variable value display is to be started for either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable value display ends.

If it is determined in step S20602 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying a variable value (S20602: NO), the process proceeds to steps S20603 to S20605 for starting a game. In step S20603, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0." If the total reserved number CRN is "0," this means that the start reserved number for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is "0." Therefore, if it is determined in step S20603 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S20603: YES), the game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20603 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S20603: NO), the process proceeds to step S20604.

In step S20604, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the fluctuation starts, and then the process proceeds to step S20605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S20605, a change start process is executed to start the change display on the main display unit 45 and the change display on the pattern display device 41. Details of the change start process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S20606.

In step S20606, the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. The play count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of plays executed in high frequency support mode. After executing step S20606, proceed to step S20607.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20602 that the main display unit 45 is performing a variable display (S20602: YES), proceed to step S20607.

In step S20607, it is determined whether the variable time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variable time is the time from when the symbol sequence begins to change until all symbol sequences have stopped, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20607, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of RAM 64 has become "0." The value of this variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (Figure 53) described below. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated.

If it is determined in step S20607 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S20607: NO), the process proceeds to step S20608, where the fluctuation display process is executed. The fluctuation display process is a process that changes the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After step S20608 is executed, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20607 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S20607: YES), the process proceeds to step S20609, where fluctuation end processing is executed. In the fluctuation end processing, the stopped symbols determined in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 52), described below, are displayed stopped on the main display unit 45 as the result of this game round. After executing step S20609, the process proceeds to step S20610.

In step S20610, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 52) described below. If it is determined in step S20610 that any of the jackpot flags is ON (S20610: YES), the process proceeds to step S20611, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, this game count control processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20610 that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S20610: NO), this game count control processing is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game play control process (FIG. 50: S20604).

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S20701, it is determined whether the holding area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, if the earliest-stored holding information (the holding information stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 39) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information (the holding information stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 39), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 39) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 39), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the second holding area Rb. In other words, by executing the processing of step S20701, the pending information can be processed in the order in which it was stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

If it is determined in step S20701 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step S20701: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area is performed in steps S20702 to S20707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20701 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S20701: NO), data setting processing for the second holding area is performed in steps S20708 to S20713.

In step S20702, the first start pending number RaN in the first pending area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S20703, where the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S20704. In step S20704, the data stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S20705.

In step S20705, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S20705, proceed to step S20706.

In step S20706, if the second symbol display unit flag in the various flags storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF; if it is not ON, the flag is maintained in that state. The second symbol display unit flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display will start from the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, proceed to step S20707.

In step S20707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. The data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S20707 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S20503 of normal processing (Figure 49). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

If it is determined in step S20701 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, i.e., if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S20701: NO), proceed to step S20708.

In step S20708, the second start pending number RbN in the second holding area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step S20709. In step S20709, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step S20710, where the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step S20711.

In step S20711, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S20711, proceed to step S20712.

In step S20712, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flags storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON; if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step S20713.

In step S20713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in the data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, i.e., corresponds to the second starting port 34, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. This data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S20713 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S20503 of normal processing (Figure 49). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 50: S20605).

Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S20801, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag that the MPU 62 uses to determine whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this embodiment, it is turned ON when the open/close execution mode related to winning a special jackpot ends, and is turned OFF if a normal jackpot is subsequently won. If it is determined in step S20801 that it is the high probability mode (S20801: YES), the process proceeds to step S20802.

In step S20802, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in Figure 40 (b). Then, proceed to step S20804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the mode is not high probability mode (S20801: NO), proceed to step S20803.

In step S20803, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in Figure 40 (a). Then, proceed to step S20804.

In step S20804, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (jackpot lottery) in step S20802 or step S20803 is a jackpot win. If the result of the hit/miss determination in step S20804 is a jackpot win (S20804: YES), in steps S20805 to S20812, processing is executed to set the game result and the stop result in the case of a jackpot win.

In step S20805, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20805 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S20805: NO), the process proceeds to step S20806, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting slot (see Figure 41 (a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R regular jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R regular jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20805 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S20805: YES), the process proceeds to step S20807, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting slot (see Figure 41 (b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R regular jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R regular jackpot. After executing the processing of step S20806 or step S20807, the process proceeds to step S20808.

In step S20808, it is determined whether the type of jackpot allocated in step S20806 or step S20807 is a variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S20808 that the game result is a variable jackpot (S20808: YES), the process proceeds to step S20809.

In step S20809, the process for setting the stop result for a special jackpot is executed. The process for setting the stop result for a special jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game in which a special jackpot is won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a special jackpot stored in the stop result table memory area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S20806 or step S20807 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address memory area of RAM 64. After executing step S20809, the process proceeds to step S20810.

In step S20810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R jackpot, the 16R jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R jackpot, the 8R jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S20814.

In step S20808, if it is determined that the type of jackpot allocated in step S20806 or step S20807 is not a special jackpot (S20808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot allocated is a regular jackpot, proceed to step S20811.

In step S20811, the stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a normal jackpot will be won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a normal jackpot stored in the stop result table memory area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S20806 or step S20807 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address memory area of RAM 64. After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

In step S20812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S20814.

In step S20804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S20802 or step S20803 is not a jackpot win (S20804: NO), proceed to step S20813 and execute the stop result setting process for a loss. The stop result setting process for a loss is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which results in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S20813, proceed to step S20814.

In step S20814, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on whether or not a jackpot has occurred and whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S20814, the process proceeds to step S20815.

In step S20815, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20815 that the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON (S20815: NO), the process proceeds to step S20816, where a first variable command is set. The first variable command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information acquired based on a win in the first start port 33, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variable time set in step S20814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20815 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S20815: YES), the process proceeds to step S20817, where a second variable command is set. The second variable command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information acquired based on a win in the second start port 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variable time set in step S20814. After executing step S20816 or step S20817, proceed to step S20818.

In step S20818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred and the results of the allocation determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on a 16R special jackpot, information on an 8R special jackpot, information on a 16R regular jackpot, information on an 8R regular jackpot, or information on a miss result.

The variation commands and type commands set in steps S20816 to S20818 are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S20503 of the normal processing (Figure 49). The audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation commands and type commands, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step S20818, proceed to step S20819.

In step S20819, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, begins displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display unit 37a and a changing display is initiated; if the second pattern display unit flag is ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display unit 37b and a changing display is initiated. After step S20819 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 52: S20814).

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable time. In step S20901, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of RAM 64 is obtained. Then, proceed to step S20902.

In step S20902, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the special jackpot flag or the regular jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S20902: YES), the process proceeds to step S20903.

In step S20903, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for the number of games in which the jackpot lottery is won is fixed. Then, the process proceeds to step S20904, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S20902 that the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won (S20902: NO), the process proceeds to step S20905, where it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current play. Since this process (S20905) is executed if the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won in step S20902, in step S20905 it is determined whether a reach will occur among the play times in which the jackpot lottery has not been won. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach will occur (S20905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S20906. When determining whether a reach will occur using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 is referenced.

In step S20906, the variable time table for reaching a winning position stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for reaching a winning position is constant. Then, the process proceeds to step S20904, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S20905 that a reach will not occur in the current game (S20905: NO), the process proceeds to step S20907, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S20904, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the variable time may be configured to be independent of the total reserved number CRN, or may be set so that the smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Also, when the second start reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first start reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time; and when the second start reserved number RbN is "1" or greater, the greater the second start reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss is reached may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a special jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a miss is allowed, and a variable time table for a complete miss may be set separately.

<Game status transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 49: S20507).

Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S21001, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is set ON at the start of the ending period and set OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21001: NO), proceed to step S21002, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is set ON at the start of the opening/closing processing period and set OFF at the end of the opening/closing processing period.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S21002: NO), the process proceeds to step S21003, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is the period for executing the opening performance in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21003: NO), proceed to step S21004, where it is determined whether the timing has come when the variable display of the patterns in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S21004 that the variable display has not come to an end (S21004: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21004 that the variable display has ended (S21004: YES), the process proceeds to step S21005, where it is determined whether the result of the jackpot lottery for this game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21005 that the result of the jackpot lottery for this game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21006, where the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S21007. Note that if the high probability mode flag is OFF in step S21006, the process proceeds directly to step S21007.

In step S21007, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various timer counter area 64d of RAM 64. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S21007, the process proceeds to step S21008.

In step S21008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S20503 of the normal processing (Figure 49). Based on receiving the opening command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the opening effect and right-hit notification effect to be executed, and begins controlling various devices so that these effects are executed sequentially. After executing step S21008, the process proceeds to step S21009, where the opening period flag is set ON. After that, the game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is ON (S21003: YES), proceed to step S21010.

In step S21010, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0." If it is determined in step S21010 that the opening period has ended (S21010: YES), the process proceeds to step S21011, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S21012.

In step S21012, the process executes a round display start process to notify the type of current open/close execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in ROM 63, and the number of rounds is confirmed from the identified stop result data. The confirmed number of rounds is then output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the output is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step S21012, the process proceeds to step S21013.

In step S21013, the number of rounds for the current opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in RAM 64 are checked, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM 64. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. After executing step S13913, proceed to step S21014.

In step S21014, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S21015, where an opening start command is set. The set opening start command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S20503 of the normal processing (Figure 49). This opening start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening start command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the execution of a round performance with content corresponding to the number of rounds, and begins controlling various devices so that the set round performance is executed. After executing step S21015, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S21002: YES), the process proceeds to step S21016, where the special prize opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, if the special prize opening 36a is closed, the special prize opening 36a is opened by driving the variable prize driving unit 36c, provided that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or greater. Furthermore, if the special prize opening 36a is open, the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 36c is stopped, and the special prize opening 36a is closed, provided that the opening limit time has elapsed since the special prize opening 36a was opened, or the opening limit number of game balls has entered the special prize opening 36a. Details of the special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

In step S21017, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21016: NO), the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21017: YES), the process proceeds to step S21018, where the opening/closing process period flag is turned OFF. After executing step S21018, the process proceeds to step S21019.

In step S21019, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is terminated so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

In step S21020, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). In this embodiment, the same fixed ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various timer counter area 64d of RAM 64. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

In step S21021, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S20503 of the normal processing (Figure 49). Based on receiving the ending command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets the device to execute an ending performance and begins controlling various devices so that the ending performance is executed. After executing step S21021, proceed to step S21022.

In step S21022, the ending period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is ON (S21001: YES), proceed to step S21023.

In step S21023, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S21019), is "0." If it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is not "0" (S21023: NO), the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (S21023: YES), the process proceeds to step S21024.

In step S21024, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S21025, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period has ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21025, the process proceeds to step S21026, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned OFF. Then, this game state transition process ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 54: S21007).

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S21101, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21101 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, if a transition to opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode (S21101: NO), proceed to step S21102, where the value "5000" corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the third timer counter area T3, and the opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21101 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, if a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high frequency support mode and the mode transitions to opening/closing execution mode (S21101: YES), the process proceeds to step S21103, where the value "3475", which corresponds to 6.95 seconds, is set in the third timer counter area T3, and the opening time setting process ends.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 54: S21016).

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening opening/closing process. In step S21201, it is determined whether the large prize opening 36a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the variable prize opening drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S21201 that the large prize opening 36a is not open (S21201: NO), the process proceeds to step S21202, where it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0." If it is determined in step S21202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21202: YES), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21202: NO), the process proceeds to step S21203.

In step S21203, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of closure of the large prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21203: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21203: YES), the process proceeds to step S21204, where the variable prize drive unit 36c is driven to open the large prize opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S21205.

In step S21205, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since all set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, the first timer counter area T1 is set to "15,000" (i.e., 30 seconds). Furthermore, to count the number of game balls that have entered the large winning slot 36a, the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "10." The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec. Note that if the pachinko machine 10 is set to low-frequency winning mode, for example, the first timer counter area T1 may be set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds) and the winning counter area PC may be set to "6." After executing step S21205, the process proceeds to step S21206.

In step S21206, an opening command is set. The large prize opening opening/closing process then ends. The opening command includes information for the sub-controllers, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun. The command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 49: step S20503). Based on the received opening command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has begun, and updates the presentation content displayed on the various lamps 47 and speaker 46 to reflect the fact that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun. The audio and light-emitting control device 90 also sends the opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has begun, and updates the presentation content displayed on the pattern display device 41 to reflect the fact that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun.

If it is determined in step S21201 that the special prize opening 36a is open (step S21201: YES), proceed to step S21207, where it is determined whether the value in the first timer counter area T1 is "0." In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration that the special prize opening 36a remains open. If it is determined in step S21207 that the value in the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21207: NO), proceed to step S21208.

In step S21208, whether or not a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 36a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable prize opening device 36. If it is determined in step S21208 that a ball has not entered (S21208: NO), the large prize opening opening opening process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21208 that a ball has entered (S21208: YES), the process proceeds to step S21209, where the value of the prize counter area PC is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S21210.

In step S21210, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter area PC is "0." If it is determined in step S21210 that the value of the prize counter area PC is not "0" (S21210: NO), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21207: YES), or if it is determined in step S21210 that the value of the prize counter area PC is "0" (S21210: YES), the process proceeds to step S21211, where the special prize opening closure process is executed. Specifically, the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is set to a non-driven state in order to close the special prize opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S21212.

In step S21212, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S21213, where it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0." If it is determined in step S21213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21213: YES), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21213: NO), the first timer counter area T1 is set to "1000" (i.e., 2 seconds). In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of closure of the large prize opening 36a. After executing step S21214, the process proceeds to step S21215, where a closure command is set. Then, the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

This set close command contains information for the sub-controllers, the audio and light emitting control device 90 and display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has been completed, and is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 49: step S20503). Based on the received close command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content displayed on the various lamps 47 and speakers 46 to content corresponding to the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a. The audio and light emitting control device 90 also sends the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received close command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content displayed on the pattern display device 41 to content corresponding to the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 54: S21024).

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S21301, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable flag or the 8R probability variable flag in RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S21301 that the 16R probability flag or 8R probability flag in RAM 64 is ON (S21301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21302, where a flag deletion process is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, or high frequency support mode flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, it is maintained in that state. After executing step S21302, the process proceeds to step S21303.

In step S21303, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S21304, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state transitions to one in which the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. The process then proceeds to step S21305.

In step S21305, a high probability mode command, which is a command containing information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the win/lose lottery mode is a high probability mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step S21309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21301 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag in RAM 64 is ON (S21301: NO), the process proceeds to step S21306, where flag erasure processing is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, or high frequency support mode flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, it is maintained in that state. Then, the process proceeds to step S21307.

In step S21307, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S21308, where the number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of plays counter PNC is a value that indicates the number of plays when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of plays. The process then proceeds to step S21309.

In step S21309, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command containing information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electrical support treatment>
Next, the electric support processing will be described. The electric support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 49: S20508).

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing. In step S21401, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step S21401, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21402.

In step S21402, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is turned ON if the electric feature opening lottery, which determines whether or not the electric feature 34a will be opened, is selected to open, and is turned OFF if the support in progress flag is ON. In step S21402, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (S21402: NO), the program proceeds to step S21403.

In step S21403, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In step S21403, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21403: NO), the main power support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21403: YES), the processing proceeds to step S21404.

In step S21404, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step S21404 that it is time to end the variable display (S21404: YES), the process proceeds to step S21405, where a loss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the loss display, the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the loss display displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21404 that it is not time to end the variable display (S21404: NO), the process proceeds to step S21406.

In step S21406, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S21406 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (S21406: NO), the main electric reel support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21406 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (S21406: YES), the processing proceeds to step S21407.

In step S21407, it is determined whether the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, and then the program proceeds to step S21408, where it determines whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the opening/closing execution mode in step S21407 (S21407: NO) and the game is in the high-frequency support mode in step S21408 (S21408: YES), the program proceeds to step S21409, where a lottery is held to unlock the electric feature. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature unlock counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the game is won in the lottery to unlock the electric feature. In addition, simultaneously with the lottery to unlock the electric feature, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 seconds). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated. The program then proceeds to step S21410.

In step S21410, it is determined whether the result of the electric reel opening lottery in step S21409 is a support win. If it is determined in step S21410 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is a support win (S21410: YES), the process proceeds to step S21411, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric reel 34a has been opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S21412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21410 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is not a support win (S21410: NO), the process proceeds to step S21412 without executing the processing of step S21411.

In step S21412, it is determined whether the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S21412 that the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode (S21412: YES), proceed to step S21413. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21412 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S21412: NO), the main power role support processing is terminated.

In step S21413, it is determined whether the play count counter area is "0". The play count counter is decremented by 1 each time a play is completed when the low probability mode is in high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S21413 that the play count counter area is not "0" (S21413: NO), the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21413 that the play count counter area is "0", the processing proceeds to step S21414, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing proceeds to step S21415.

In step S21415, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command containing information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the electric support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S21415 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 49: step S20503). Based on receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S21407 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (S21407: YES), or if it is determined in step S21418 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S21408: NO), the process proceeds to step S21416, where a lottery is held to open an electric reel. Specifically, the value stored in the electric reel reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric reel opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric reel opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric reel opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e., 29.5 seconds). Then, the process proceeds to step S21417.

In step S21417, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step S21416 is a support win. If it is determined in step S21417 that there is no support win (S21417: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21417 that there is a support win (S21417: YES), the process proceeds to step S21418, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S21402 that the support win flag is ON (S21402: YES), the process proceeds to step S21419, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step S21419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21419: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, and the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21419: YES), the process proceeds to step S21420.

In step S21420, a winning display is set. This ends the variable display of the image on the normal unit 38 with the winning display still displayed. Then, proceed to step S21421, turn the support in progress flag ON, and turn the support win flag OFF. Then, end the main role support processing.

If it is determined in step S21401 that the support flag is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21422, where an electric role opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. Then, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electrical switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 58: S21422).

Figure 59 is a flowchart showing the electric device opening/closing control process. In step S21501, it is determined whether the electric device 34a is open. Whether the electric device 34a is open is determined by whether the electric device drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the electric device 34a is open (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21502.

In step S21502, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role device 34a. In step S21502, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21502: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role device 34a has not ended, the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21502: YES), the process proceeds to step S21503, where a closing process is performed to control the electric device 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being open, is "0," the electric device 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is now used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250." After executing step S21503, the process proceeds to step S21504.

In step S21504, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S21505, where it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S21505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S21505: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S21505: YES), the process proceeds to step S21506, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21501 that the electric role 34a is not open (S21501: NO), proceed to step S21507 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric role 34a being closed. If it is determined in step S21507 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21507: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21507: YES), proceed to step S21508 to execute an opening process that controls the electric role 34a to the open state. Then, proceed to step S21509.

In step S21509, it is determined whether the device is in opening/closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the device is not in opening/closing execution mode (S21509: NO), the process proceeds to step S21510, where it is determined whether the device is in high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S21510 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S21510: YES), the process proceeds to step S21511, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). The main electric switch opening/closing control process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21509 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S21509: YES), or if it is determined in step S21510 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S21510: NO), proceed to step S21512 and set the second timer counter area T2 to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). Then, this electric switching control process ends.

B5. Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 60 is a block diagram that focuses on the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components, such as the power supply device 85, are omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on the audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is a device that incorporates ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, part of the area of RAM 94 is provided with a various flag storage area 94a, various counter area 94b, lottery counter area 94c, etc. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92; they may each be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the performance operation button 24, speaker 46, various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102; they may each be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various received commands, thereby controlling the VDP 105 (specifically, generating internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 104 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 102.

VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP 105 adjusts the timing of MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM 107 from character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and other data. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106, with each character ROM 106 responsible for storing image data and other data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

Video RAM 107 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively; the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 will also be referred to as the audio/light MPU 92, audio/light ROM 93, and audio/light RAM 94, respectively; and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will also be referred to as the display MPU 102.

B6. Various processes executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the audio and light emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the process executed in the audio and light emission control device 90 will be described, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed in the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 will be described.

Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 2 msec). The following describes the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt process.

In step S21601, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio-visual RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio-visual RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. Commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step S21601, the process proceeds to step S21602.

In step S21602, command response processing is executed. Command response processing is processing executed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62. Details of command response processing will be described later. After executing step S21602, proceed to step S21603.

In step S21603, light emission control processing is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control processing, light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the command response processing in step S21602 above. After executing step S21603, proceed to step S21604.

In step S21604, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command response process in step S21602 above. After step S21604 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, the command response process will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 61: S21602).

Figure 62 is a flowchart showing the command response processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio/light emitting control device 90. In step S21701, it is determined whether a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21701 that a high-frequency support mode command has been received (S21701: YES), the process proceeds to step S21702, where the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the audio/light side RAM 94 is turned ON. The audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag that allows the audio/light side MPU 92 to grasp the status of the support mode type in the main control device 60. After executing step S21702, the process proceeds to step S21703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21701 that a high-frequency support mode command has not been received (S21701: NO), the process proceeds to step S21703 without executing the processing of step S21702.

In step S21703, it is determined whether a low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21703 that a low-frequency support mode command has been received (S21703: YES), the process proceeds to step S21704, where the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the audio/light side RAM 94 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S21705, where a setting is made to execute a left-hit notification effect. Specifically, the process is made to start sound output control and light emission control corresponding to the left-hit notification effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S21706, where a left-hit notification effect command is sent to the display control device 100 to set the left-hit notification effect to be executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S21707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21703 that a low-frequency support mode command has not been received (S21703: NO), the processing of steps S21704 to S21706 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S21707.

In step S21707, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21707 that an opening command has been received (S21707: YES), the process proceeds to step S21708, where a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect are set to be executed. Specifically, the process is set to start audio output control and light emission control corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect has ended, the process is set to start audio output control and light emission control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. The process then proceeds to step S21709, where an opening effect command is sent to the display control device 100 to set the display control device 100 to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect. The process then proceeds to step S21710.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21707 that an opening command has not been received (S21707: NO), the processing of steps S21708 and S21709 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step S21710.

In step S21710, it is determined whether an opening start command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21710 that an opening start command has been received (S21710: YES), the process proceeds to step S21711, where a round effect is set to be executed. Specifically, the sound output control and light emission control corresponding to the round effect are set to start. At this time, if control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed and the right-hit notification effect has already been set to be executed, the control corresponding to the opening effect is terminated, the right-hit notification effect setting is canceled, and control corresponding to the round effect is set to start. Therefore, if the opening start command is received 6.95 seconds after receiving the opening command, the right-hit notification effect will not be executed. On the other hand, if the opening start command is received 10 seconds after receiving the opening command, the right-hit notification effect will be executed. After executing step S21711, the process proceeds to step S21712, where a round effect command is sent to the display control device 100 to set the round effect to be executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S21713.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21710 that an opening start command has not been received (S21710: NO), the processing of steps S21711 and S21712 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step S21713.

In step S21713, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21713 that an ending command has been received (S21713: YES), the process proceeds to step S21714, where settings are made to execute an ending performance. Specifically, settings are made to start audio output control and light emission control corresponding to the ending performance. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21715, where an ending performance command is sent to the display control device 100 to set the display control device 100 to execute an ending performance. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21716.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21713 that an ending command has not been received (S21713: NO), the processing of steps S21714 and S21715 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step S21716.

In step S21716, if any other command has been received, the processing corresponding to that command is executed. For example, if a variation command and a type command have been received, the type of effect to be executed in that game round is determined based on these commands, and the determined effect is set to be executed. This command response processing then ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include main processing, which is executed repeatedly from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90, and V interrupt processing, which is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected simultaneously, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step S21801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written to the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Other settings required for initialization are also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S21802.

In step S21802, interrupt permission is set. Once interrupt permission is set, the main processing executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, once interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S21901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described below, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and then instructs the VDP 105 to draw and display that image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated by the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed. As a result, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process for the image is completed, which prevents the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information currently being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are explained below.

In step S22001, command response processing is executed. In command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing (Figure 64) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to that command is executed. Details of command response processing will be described later.

In addition, the command response processing (S22001) analyzes all commands stored in the command memory area at that time, and executes processing corresponding to all of the analyzed commands. The reason for this will be explained. The command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command memory area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of a performance is set by the audio and light emission control device 90 and the performance begins, it is highly likely that various commands for specifying the content of that performance will be stored in the command memory area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance aspects, such as the preview performance and stop patterns, set by the audio and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that aspect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. The command response processing will be explained in detail later.

In step S22002, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which was set by the command response process (S22001) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S22003.

In step S22003, task processing is executed. In task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as determined by the display setting process (S22002), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up that image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S22004.

In step S22004, drawing processing is executed. In drawing processing, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters required to draw each character, as determined by task processing (S22003), are sent to VDP 105. VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and sends the image data to pattern display device 41 along with a drive signal to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S22005, where other processing is executed, and V interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, the command response processing will be described. The command response processing is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 65: S22001).

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing the command response processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S22101, it is determined whether a left-hit notification effect command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether a left-hit notification effect command is stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22101 that a left-hit notification effect command has been stored (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22102, where a setting is made to execute a left-hit notification effect. Specifically, it is set to start control of the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the left-hit notification effect. After executing step S22102, the process proceeds to step S22103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22101 that a left-hit notification effect command has not been stored (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22103 without executing the processing of step S22102.

In step S22103, it is determined whether an opening effect command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether an opening effect command is stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22103 that an opening effect command has been stored (S22103: YES), proceed to step S22104 and set up to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect. Specifically, it is set up to start control of the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the opening effect, and after control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect has ended, it is set up to start control of the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. After executing step S22104, proceed to step S22105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22103 that an opening effect command has not been stored (S22103: NO), proceed to step S22105 without executing the processing of step S22104.

In step S22105, it is determined whether a round effect command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether a round effect command has been stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22105 that a round effect command has been stored (S22105: YES), the process proceeds to step S22106, where the process is set to execute the round effect. Specifically, the process is set to start control of the drawing and display of images corresponding to the round effect. At this time, if control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed and the right-hit notification effect has already been set to be executed, the process ends control corresponding to the opening effect, cancels the right-hit notification effect setting, and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Therefore, if the round effect command is received 6.95 seconds after receiving the opening effect command, the right-hit notification effect will not be executed. Conversely, if the round effect command is received 10 seconds after receiving the opening effect command, the right-hit notification effect will be executed. After executing step S22106, the process proceeds to step S22107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22105 that a round effect command has not been stored (S22105: NO), processing in step S22106 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S22107.

In step S22107, it is determined whether an ending performance command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether an ending performance command is stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22107 that an ending performance command is stored (S22107: YES), the process proceeds to step S22108, where the process is set to execute the ending performance. Specifically, it is set to start controlling the drawing and display of images corresponding to the ending performance. After executing step S22108, the process proceeds to step S22109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22107 that an ending performance command is not stored (S22107: NO), the process proceeds to step S22109 without executing the processing of step S22108.

In step S22109, it is determined whether any other commands are stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored commands is executed. Then, this command response processing is terminated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following advantages:

In a typical pachinko machine 10, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 is to execute multiple effects sequentially, the main control device 60 sends commands to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to cause the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute each effect. Therefore, the more effects the audio and light emitting control device 90 is to execute, the more times the main control device 60 sends commands to the audio and light emitting control device 90.

Specifically, as shown in the comparative example of Figure 44, if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening effect, then a right-hit notification effect, and then a round effect, the main control device 60 will send an opening command to the audio and light emitting control device 90, then a right-hit notification command, and then a release start command. In this case, the main control device 60 will send commands to the audio and light emitting control device 90 three times. Also, if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening effect, then a round effect will be executed without executing a right-hit notification effect, the main control device 60 will send an opening command to the audio and light emitting control device 90, then a release start command without sending a right-hit notification command. In this case, the main control device 60 will send commands to the audio and light emitting control device 90 twice. That is, in a normal pachinko machine 10, if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is not to execute the right-hit notification effect, the main control device 60 only needs to send a command to the audio and light emitting control device 90 twice, but if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is to execute the right-hit notification effect, the main control device 60 will send a command to the audio and light emitting control device 90 three times.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, if the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening start command while sequentially executing multiple effects set by receiving an opening command, it will end the currently executing effect and execute a round effect. Therefore, even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is made to execute the round effect after executing all of the multiple effects, or even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is made to execute the round effect without executing some of the multiple effects, the main control device 60 only needs to send an opening command and an opening start command to the audio and light emitting control device 90. In other words, in either case, the main control device 60 only needs to send commands twice to the audio and light emitting control device 90.

Specifically, according to this embodiment, when an opening command is received, the audio and light control device 90 sets the device to sequentially execute the opening effect and the right-hit notification effect. If an opening start command is received while an opening effect is being executed and before the right-hit notification effect is executed, the device terminates the currently executing opening effect and executes the round effect without executing the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. In other words, when the audio and light control device 90 receives an opening start command while an opening effect is being executed, the device executes an overwrite process, rather than a parallel process, a standby process, or an invalid process. Overwrite processing is a process in which, when a new command to set another effect to be executed is received during execution of an effect, the currently executing effect is terminated, and if there is an effect set to be executed after the currently executing effect, the setting is erased, and an overwrite is set to execute the effect corresponding to the newly received command, and the set effect is executed. Parallel processing is a process in which, when a new command to set another effect to be executed is received during execution of an effect, the currently executing effect and the effect corresponding to the received command are executed simultaneously in parallel. Standby processing is processing in which, if a new command to set another effect to be executed while an effect is being executed is received, the effect currently being executed and the effect set to be executed after the currently being executed effect are finished, and after these effects are finished, the effect corresponding to the received command is executed. Disabling processing is processing in which, if a new command to set another effect to be executed while an effect is being executed is received, the received command is disabled and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed.

According to this embodiment, even if the opening effect and the right-hit notification effect are executed and then the audio and light control device 90 is made to execute the round effect, or even if the opening effect is executed and then the audio and light control device 90 is made to execute the round effect without executing the right-hit notification effect, the main control device 60 only needs to send an opening command and a release start command to the audio and light control device 90. In other words, the main control device 60 only needs to send commands to the audio and light control device 90 twice, whether or not the main control device 60 is made to execute the right-hit notification effect. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the frequency of command transmission by the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced. Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the right-hit notification command shown in the comparative example of FIG. 44 is unnecessary, so there is no need to store the right-hit notification command in the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63. Therefore, the storage capacity of the main ROM 63 that was required to store the right-hit notification command can be effectively utilized for other purposes.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main control unit 60 is configured to transmit different types of effects by the audio and light emitting control unit 90 depending on the interval between transmissions of the opening command and the opening start command. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the main control unit 60 transmits various commands to the audio and light emitting control unit 90 to cause the audio and light emitting control unit 90 to execute various types of effects, the processing load on the main control unit 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Specifically, according to this embodiment, the main control unit 60 can execute a first transmission mode ((A) in Figure 43) in which an opening start command is sent 10 seconds after sending the opening command, and a second transmission mode ((B) in Figure 43) in which an opening start command is sent 6.95 seconds after sending the opening command. When the main control unit 60 executes the first transmission mode, the audio and light emission control unit 90 executes a presentation mode in which a right-hit notification presentation is executed after executing the opening presentation, and when the main control unit 60 executes the second transmission mode, the audio and light emission control unit 90 executes a presentation mode in which a right-hit notification presentation is not executed after executing the opening presentation. Therefore, according to this embodiment, even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening effect and then execute a right-hit notification effect, or even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening effect and then not execute a right-hit notification effect, the main control device 60 only needs to send an opening command and then send an opening start command. Therefore, compared to a configuration (the configuration of the comparative example shown in FIG. 44) that executes control such as sending an opening command to cause the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening effect, and sending a right-hit notification command to execute the right-hit notification effect if the right-hit notification effect is to be executed after the opening effect, and not sending a right-hit notification command to execute the right-hit notification effect if the right-hit notification effect is not to be executed after the opening effect, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the main control unit 60 executes the first transmission mode ((A) of Figure 43), the audio and light emission control device 90 executes a performance mode in which an opening performance and a right-hit notification performance are executed, and then a round performance is executed, and when the main control unit 60 executes the second transmission mode ((B) of Figure 43), the audio and light emission control device 90 executes a performance mode in which an opening performance is executed, and then a round performance is executed without executing a right-hit notification performance. Therefore, according to this embodiment, even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening effect and then execute a right-hit notification effect, and then execute a round effect, or even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening effect and then execute a round effect without executing a right-hit notification effect, the main control device 60 only needs to send an opening command and then an opening start command. Therefore, compared to a configuration (the configuration of the comparative example shown in FIG. 44) that executes control such as sending an opening command to cause the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening effect, and sending a right-hit notification command to execute the right-hit notification effect if the right-hit notification effect is to be executed after the opening effect, not sending the right-hit notification command to execute the right-hit notification effect if the right-hit notification effect is not to be executed after the opening effect, and sending an opening start command to execute the round effect if the round effect is to be executed after the opening effect or the right-hit notification effect, this reduces the processing load on the main control device 60 and reduces the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main control device 60 determines the interval between sequentially transmitting the opening command and the release start command based on the state of the support mode when the jackpot lottery resulting in a jackpot is executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90, upon receiving the opening command and the release start command, executes an effect corresponding to the state of the support mode when the jackpot lottery was executed, based on the difference in the intervals at which these commands were received. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the main control device 60 sends various commands with different content to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to cause the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an effect corresponding to the state of the support mode, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if the recommended game ball launch mode (hitting style) changes from "left hit" to "right hit" due to the start of the opening/closing processing period of the opening/closing execution mode (if a jackpot is won during the low-frequency support mode in "left hit"), a right-hit notification effect is executed, and if the recommended game ball launch mode (hitting style) remains "right hit" even after the start of the opening/closing processing period of the opening/closing execution mode (if a jackpot is won during the high-frequency support mode in "right hit"), a right-hit notification effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect corresponding to the state of the support mode when a jackpot is won, while reducing the processing load on the main control unit 60.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main control unit 60 determines the length of the opening period based on the state of the support mode, and the audio and light emitting control unit 90 executes the same processing, i.e., setting the opening effect and right-hit notification effect to be executed regardless of the state of the support mode, but the content of the effect executed during the opening period is configured to differ depending on the state of the support mode. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the audio and light emitting control unit 90 can execute an effect with content appropriate to the length of the opening period without executing different processing depending on the state of the support mode. In other words, the audio and light emitting control unit 90 can execute an effect with content appropriate to the length of the opening period, which changes depending on the state of the support mode, without having to grasp the support mode state of the main control unit 60 and execute processing according to the state of the support mode, thereby reducing the processing load on the audio and light emitting control unit 90.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command, it executes processing to set multiple effects (opening effect and right-hit notification effect) to be executed sequentially, regardless of the state of support mode. If the opening start command is received while the multiple effects set by receiving the opening command are being executed sequentially, the currently executing effect is terminated and a round effect is executed. In this embodiment, the interval between when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives the opening command and when it receives the opening start command differs depending on the state of support mode. Therefore, the shorter the interval, the fewer effects will be executed out of the multiple effects set by receiving the opening command, and the longer the interval, the more effects will be executed. In other words, according to this embodiment, by executing a simple process to set multiple effects to be executed sequentially regardless of the state of support mode when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command, it is possible to vary the content of the effects executed during the opening period depending on the state of support mode.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command, it is set to sequentially execute an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect as multiple effects, regardless of the state of the support mode. If the opening command is received and then an opening start command is received before the right-hit notification effect is executed, the round effect is executed without executing the right-hit notification effect. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the interval between when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives the opening command and when it receives the opening start command differs depending on the state of the support mode, so that the right-hit notification effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, by performing a simple process of setting the audio and light emitting control device 90 to sequentially execute an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect regardless of the state of the support mode when it receives an opening command, it is possible to make whether or not the right-hit notification effect is executed during the opening period differ depending on the state of the support mode.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode, the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to a time (6.95 seconds in this embodiment) that is shorter than the 7 seconds from the start of the opening effect to the start of the right-hit notification effect (opening effect duration). Therefore, even if the main control unit 60 is under heavy load and the transmission of the opening start command is delayed, it is possible to prevent the audio and light control unit 90 from receiving the opening start command after the right-hit notification effect has started to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right-hit notification effect from being executed even when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode ((B) in Figure 43).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if a malfunction occurs in which the audio and light emitting control device 90 does not receive the opening start command, the right-hit notification effect is simply executed after the opening effect. Since the player simply needs to "hit right" during the opening and closing process, even if the right-hit notification effect is executed in an unintended situation, the player will not be put at a disadvantage. Therefore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that executes control that does not put the player at a disadvantage even if a malfunction occurs.

B7. Modification of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, including the following modifications: In the modifications described below, the same configurations and processes as those of the above-described embodiment will not be described.

B7-1. Variation 1:
67 is a timing chart outlining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 1 of the second embodiment. The main differences from the second embodiment described above are that when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery during the high-frequency support mode, the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds, and that the sound and light emission control unit 90 is aware of the type of support mode, and when an opening command is received, determines based on the type of support mode whether to set it to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect, or to execute a short opening effect that is completed (ended) in a shorter time than the opening effect (4 seconds in this modification). Specific processing will be described below.

First, we will explain the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode, with reference to (A) in Figure 67.

As shown in (A) of Figure 67, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode in response to a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during the low-frequency support mode, it sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it determines whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode. As described below, when the main control device 60 transitions from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode, it sends a high-frequency support mode command to the audio/light-emitting control device 90 indicating the transition to high-frequency support mode. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the high-frequency support mode command from the main control device 60, it turns on the audio/light-emitting side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the audio/light-emitting side RAM 94. When the main control device 60 transitions from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode, it sends a low-frequency support mode command to the audio/light-emitting control device 90 indicating the transition to low-frequency support mode. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the low-frequency support mode command from the main control device 60, it turns off the audio/light-emitting side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the audio/light-emitting side RAM 94. Therefore, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 can always determine the type of support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the audio/light-emitting side support mode flag. When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is not high-frequency support mode, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect. In other words, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command.

After setting the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect, it sends an opening effect command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect. In other words, the display control device 100 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command. The display control device 100 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect ends, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins control of the audio output so that audio corresponding to the right-hit notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins control of the illumination of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect ends, the display control device 100 begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the right-hit notification effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 10 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emission control unit 90 indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun.

After completing the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening start command from the main control device 60 and sets the round effect to be executed. After setting the round effect to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a round effect command to the display control device 100 to set the round effect to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 starts audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and starts light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect.

After the display control device 100 has completed the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, when it receives a round effect command from the audio and light control device 90, it sets the round effect to be executed and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

In this variant 1, as in the above embodiment, when the opening and closing execution mode ends, the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. In this variant 1 as well, during the high-frequency support mode, a "right hit," which is a hitting style that causes the game ball to flow into the area to the right of the game area PA, is recommended. In this variant 1 as well, because a right-hit notification effect is executed in the opening and closing execution mode, many players will recognize the right-hit notification effect and execute a "right hit." Furthermore, players who have been executing a "right hit" in the opening and closing execution mode will continue to execute a "right hit" during the high-frequency support mode even after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

Next, the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode will be explained with reference to (B) in Figure 67. The main differences from the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode described above are that the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds and sends the opening start command 4 seconds after sending the opening command, and that the audio and light control unit 90, upon receiving the opening command, determines that the mode is not high-frequency support mode and sets itself to execute a short opening effect, executing a round effect without executing the right-hit notification effect. Specific explanations are provided below.

As shown in (B) of Figure 67, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode in response to a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during the high frequency support mode, it sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light emission control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it determines whether the current support mode type is high-frequency support mode. If the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the current support mode type is high-frequency support mode, it sets a four-second short opening performance to be executed. After setting the short opening performance to be executed, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a short opening performance command to the display control device 100 to set the display control device 100 to execute the short opening performance. The audio and light emission control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the short opening performance. Specifically, the audio and light emission control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the short opening performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the short opening performance.

When the display control device 100 receives a short opening performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a four-second short opening performance and starts control corresponding to the short opening performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the short opening performance on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 4 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emission control unit 90 indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun.

After completing control corresponding to the 4-second short opening effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening start command from the main control device 60 and sets the round effect to be executed. After setting the round effect to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a round effect command to the display control device 100 to set the round effect to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect.

After the display control device 100 has completed control corresponding to the 4-second short opening effect, when it receives a round effect command from the audio and light control device 90, it sets the round effect to be executed and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

In this way, in this modified example, if a player wins a jackpot in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode when the player is performing a "left hit," an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect are executed, thereby informing the player that they have entered the open/close execution mode and that a "right hit" is recommended. Furthermore, if a player wins a jackpot in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode when the player is already performing a "right hit," a short opening effect that is shorter than the opening effect is executed, and no right-hit notification effect is executed. This adds an even greater sense of speed to the game compared to the second embodiment described above, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Various processes executed by the main control device of Modification 1>
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in Modification 1. Below, processing that differs from the second embodiment will be described, and a description of processing that is the same as the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Opening time setting process>
The opening time setting process in Modification 1 will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 54: S21007). The main difference from the opening time setting process in the second embodiment described above is that the length of the opening time is set to 4 seconds when the high frequency support mode flag is ON. This will be described in detail below.

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in Variation 1. In step S22201, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22201 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, if a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win in the jackpot lottery during the low-frequency support mode (S22201: NO), the process proceeds to step S22202, where the value "5000", which corresponds to 10 seconds, is set in the third timer counter area T3, and the opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22201 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON, i.e., if a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high frequency support mode and the mode transitions to opening/closing execution mode (S22201: YES), the process proceeds to step S22203, where the value "2000", which corresponds to 4 seconds, is set in the third timer counter area T3, and the opening time setting process ends.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device of Modification 1>
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 of Modification 1. Below, processing that differs from the second embodiment will be described, and a description of processing that is the same as the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Command response processing>
The command response processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 of Modification 1 will be described below. The command response processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 61: S21602). The main difference from the command response processing in the second embodiment (FIG. 62) described above is that when the audio/light side high frequency support mode flag is ON, a setting is made to execute a short opening effect. This will be described in detail below.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the command response processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 of Variant 1. In step S22301, it is determined whether a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22301 that a high-frequency support mode command has been received (S22301: YES), the process proceeds to step S22302, where the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the audio/light side RAM 94 is turned ON. The audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag that the audio/light side MPU 92 uses to grasp the status of the support mode type in the main control device 60. After executing step S22302, the process proceeds to step S22303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22301 that a high-frequency support mode command has not been received (S22301: NO), the process proceeds to step S22303 without executing the processing of step S22302.

In step S22303, it is determined whether a low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22303 that a low-frequency support mode command has been received (S22303: YES), the process proceeds to step S22304, where the sound/light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S22305, where a setting is made to execute a left-hit notification effect. Specifically, the process is made to start sound output control and light emission control corresponding to the left-hit notification effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S22306, where an opening effect command is sent to the display control device 100 to set the left-hit notification effect to be executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S22307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22303 that a low-frequency support mode command has not been received (S22303: NO), the processing of steps S22304 to S22306 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S22307.

In step S22307, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22307 that an opening command has not been received (S22307: NO), the process proceeds to step S22313 without executing the processing of steps S22308 to S22312 described below. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22307 that an opening command has been received (S22307: YES), it proceeds to step S22308, where it determines whether the sound/light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22308 that the sound/light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S22308: NO), it proceeds to step S22309, where a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect are set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start sound output control and light emission control corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect has ended, it is set to start sound output control and light emission control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. The process then proceeds to step S22310, where an opening effect command is sent to the display control device 100 to set it to execute an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect. The process then proceeds to step S22313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22308 that the sound/light high frequency support mode flag is ON (S22308: YES), the process proceeds to step S22311, where a 4-second short opening effect is set to be executed. Specifically, the process sets the start of sound output control and light emission control corresponding to the short opening effect. The process then proceeds to step S22310, where a short opening effect command is sent to the display control device 100 to set it to execute a short opening effect. The process then proceeds to step S22313.

In step S22313, it is determined whether an opening start command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22313 that an opening start command has been received (S22313: YES), the process proceeds to step S22314, where the round effect is set to be executed. Specifically, the audio output control and light emission control corresponding to the round effect are set to begin. Here, in this variant example 1, if the low-frequency support mode is transitioned to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 sends the opening start command 10 seconds after sending the opening command. Then, if the low-frequency support mode is transitioned to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 of the audio/light emission control unit 90 sets the MPU 92 to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect upon receiving the opening command. Therefore, if the low-frequency support mode is transitioned to the opening/closing execution mode, a 7-second opening effect will be executed, followed by a 3-second right-hit notification effect, and then the round effect will be executed. On the other hand, if the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode during high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 sends an opening start command four seconds after sending the opening command. Then, if the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode during high-frequency support mode, the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 sets the system to execute a four-second short opening effect upon receiving the opening command. Therefore, if the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode during high-frequency support mode, a four-second short opening effect will be executed, followed by a round effect. After executing step S22314, the system proceeds to step S22315, where a round effect command is sent to the display control device 100 to set the system to execute a round effect. Then, the system proceeds to step S22316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22313 that an opening start command has not been received (S22313: NO), the processing of steps S22314 and S22315 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step S22316.

In step S22316, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22316 that an ending command has been received (S22316: YES), the process proceeds to step S22317, where settings are made to execute an ending performance. Specifically, settings are made to start audio output control and light emission control corresponding to the ending performance. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22318, where an ending performance command is sent to the display control device 100 to set the display control device 100 to execute an ending performance. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22319.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22316 that an ending command has not been received (S22316: NO), the processing of steps S22317 and S22318 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step S22319.

In step S22319, if any other command has been received, the processing corresponding to that command is executed. For example, if a variation command and a type command have been received, the type of effect to be executed in that game round is determined based on these commands, and the determined effect is set to be executed. This command response processing then ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device of Modification 1>
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Modification 1. The following describes processing that differs from the second embodiment, and a description of processing that is the same as the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Command response processing>
The command response processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Modification 1 will be described. The command response processing is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 65: S22001). The main difference from the command response processing in the second embodiment (FIG. 66) described above is that a short opening effect is set to be executed when a short opening effect command is received. This will be described in detail below.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the command response processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Variation 1. In step S22401, it is determined whether a left-hit notification effect command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether a left-hit notification effect command is stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. In step S22401, if it is determined that a left-hit notification effect command is stored (S22401: YES), the process proceeds to step S22402, where a setting is made to execute a left-hit notification effect. Specifically, it is set to start controlling the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the left-hit notification effect. After executing step S22402, the process proceeds to step S22403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22401 that a left-hit notification effect command is not stored (S22401: NO), the process proceeds to step S22403 without executing the processing of step S22402.

In step S22403, it is determined whether an opening effect command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether an opening effect command is stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22403 that an opening effect command has been stored (S22403: YES), the process proceeds to step S22404, where the opening effect and right-hit notification effect are set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start control of the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect has ended, it is set to start control of the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. After executing step S22404, the process proceeds to step S22405. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22403 that an opening effect command has not been stored (S22403: NO), the process proceeds to step S22405 without executing the processing of step S22404.

In step S22405, it is determined whether a short opening effect command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether a short opening effect command is stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22405 that a short opening effect command is stored (S22405: YES), the process proceeds to step S22406, where a setting is made to execute a short opening effect. Specifically, it is set to start control of the drawing and display of images corresponding to the short opening effect. After executing step S22406, the process proceeds to step S22407. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22405 that a short opening effect command is not stored (S22405: NO), the process proceeds to step S22407 without executing the processing of step S22406.

In step S22407, it is determined whether a round performance command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether a round performance command is stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22407 that a round performance command has been stored (S22407: YES), the process proceeds to step S22408, where the process is set to execute the round performance. Specifically, the process is set to start controlling the drawing and display of images corresponding to the round performance. Here, in this variant example 1, if the low-frequency support mode is transitioned to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 of the sound and light control device 90 transmits the round performance command 10 seconds after transmitting the opening performance command. Then, if the low-frequency support mode is transitioned to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 transmits the opening performance command and is set to execute a 7-second opening performance and a 3-second right-hit notification performance upon receiving the opening performance command. Therefore, when the low-frequency support mode is transitioned to the open/close execution mode, a 7-second opening effect is executed, followed by a 3-second right-hit notification effect, and then a round effect is executed. On the other hand, when the high-frequency support mode is transitioned to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 92 of the audio/light control device 90 transmits the round effect command 4 seconds after transmitting the short opening effect command. When the high-frequency support mode is transitioned to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sets the display control device 100 to execute a 4-second short opening effect upon receiving the short opening effect command. Therefore, when the high-frequency support mode is transitioned to the open/close execution mode, a 4-second short opening effect is executed, followed by a round effect. After executing step S22408, the process proceeds to step S22409. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22407 that a round effect command has not been stored (S22407: NO), the process proceeds to step S22409 without executing step S22408.

In step S22409, it is determined whether an ending performance command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether an ending performance command is stored in the command memory area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22409 that an ending performance command is stored (S22409: YES), the process proceeds to step S22410, where the process is set to execute the ending performance. Specifically, it is set to start controlling the drawing and display of images corresponding to the ending performance. After executing step S22410, the process proceeds to step S22411. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22409 that an ending performance command is not stored (S22409: NO), the process proceeds to step S22411 without executing the processing of step S22410.

In step S22411, it is determined whether any other commands are stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored commands is executed. Then, this command response processing is terminated.

In addition to the effects of the second embodiment described above, the first variant provides the following effects:

According to this variant example 1, the audio and light emitting control device 90 is able to grasp the support mode status of the main control device 60, and even when it receives the same command from the main control device 60, it executes different effects depending on the support mode status of the main control device 60. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the main control device 60 sends various commands to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to cause the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute various effects, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Specifically, according to this variation 1, the audio and light emitting control device 90 executes an opening performance when it receives an opening command during low-frequency support mode, and executes a short opening performance when it receives an opening command during high-frequency support mode. Therefore, whether the main control device 60 is causing the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening performance or a short opening performance, it only needs to send opening commands with the same content. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which, for example, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening performance, a command for executing the opening performance is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90, and when the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute a short opening performance, a command for executing the short opening performance is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this variant example 1, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command during low frequency support mode, it executes an opening effect and then executes a right-hit notification effect. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which, for example, the main control device 60 sends an opening command to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening effect, and then sends a right-hit notification command to execute a right-hit notification effect (the configuration of the comparative example shown in Figure 44), the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this variant example 1, the main control unit 60 sends a high-frequency support mode command or a low-frequency support mode command when the support mode changes, and the audio/light emitting control unit 90 turns the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag ON when it receives a high-frequency support mode command, and turns the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag OFF when it receives a low-frequency support mode command. The audio/light emitting control unit 90 can then determine the support mode status of the main control unit 60 by referencing the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag. Therefore, the main control unit 60 does not need to include information regarding the support mode status in the opening command in order to have the audio/light emitting control unit 90 determine the support mode status, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 60 when sending an opening command.

Furthermore, according to this variant example 1, if the result of the jackpot lottery during low frequency support mode is a jackpot, the opening/closing processing period begins after an opening period of 10 seconds has elapsed since the end of the game round (pattern change) that resulted in the jackpot; and if the result of the jackpot lottery during high frequency support mode is a jackpot, the opening/closing processing period begins after an opening period of 4 seconds has elapsed since the end of the game round (pattern change) that resulted in the jackpot, thereby adding a sense of speed to play during high frequency support mode and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Specifically, during the high-frequency support mode, which is advantageous to the player, jackpot lotteries are held frequently, increasing the expectation that a jackpot will be won in the jackpot lottery and the opening/closing processing period will begin. Therefore, players play in the hope that the opening/closing processing period will begin sooner rather than in the hope that the opening/closing processing period will begin at all. In other words, during the high-frequency support mode, players seek a sense of speed in their play. According to this variation 1, during the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing processing period begins sooner after the end of a game in which the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, compared to during the low-frequency support mode. This adds a sense of speed to play during the high-frequency support mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to this variant 1, if an opening command is received during low-frequency support mode, a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect are executed within the 10-second opening period, and if an opening command is received during high-frequency support mode, a 4-second short opening effect is executed within the 4-second opening period, making it possible to execute effects of a length appropriate for either the 10-second opening period or the 4-second opening period.

B7-2. Variation 2:
FIG. 71 is a timing chart outlining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 2 of the second embodiment. The main differences from Modification 1 of the second embodiment described above are that the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and that the audio/light-emission control unit 90 is aware of the type of support mode and, upon receiving an opening command, determines based on the type of support mode whether to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect, or to execute a long opening effect that is completed (ended) in a longer time than the opening effect (10 seconds in this modification). Note that, in this embodiment, the content of the 7-second effect from the start to 7 seconds of the 10-second long opening effect is the same as the content of the 7-second opening effect, and the content of the 3-second effect from 7 seconds to 10 seconds is a newly added effect with different content (e.g., an effect featuring a different character not featured in the 7-second opening effect). Specific processing is described below.

First, we will explain the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode, with reference to (A) in Figure 71.

As shown in (A) of Figure 71, regardless of the type of support mode when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it references the audio and light support mode flag to determine whether the current support mode type is high-frequency support mode. If the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines that the current support mode type is not high-frequency support mode when it receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect. In other words, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command.

After setting the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect, it sends an opening effect command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect. In other words, the display control device 100 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command. The display control device 100 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect ends, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins control of the audio output so that audio corresponding to the right-hit notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins control of the illumination of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect ends, the display control device 100 begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the right-hit notification effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 10 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emission control unit 90 indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun.

After completing the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening start command from the main control device 60 and sets the round effect to be executed. After setting the round effect to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a round effect command to the display control device 100 to set the round effect to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 starts audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and starts light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect.

After the display control device 100 has completed the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, when it receives a round effect command from the audio and light control device 90, it sets the round effect to be executed and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening and closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

Next, the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode will be explained with reference to (B) in Figure 71. The main difference from the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode described above is that the audio and light emission control device 90, upon receiving the opening command, determines that the mode is not high-frequency support mode and sets itself to execute a long opening effect. This will be explained in detail below.

As shown in (B) of Figure 71, regardless of the type of support mode when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it references the audio/light support mode flag to determine whether the current support mode type is high-frequency support mode. If the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the current support mode type is high-frequency support mode, it sets a 10-second long opening performance to be executed. After setting the long opening performance to be executed, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a long opening performance command to the display control device 100 to set the display control device 100 to execute the long opening performance. The audio and light emission control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the long opening performance. Specifically, the audio and light emission control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the long opening performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the long opening performance.

When the display control device 100 receives a long opening effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 10-second long opening effect and starts control corresponding to the long opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the long opening effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 10 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emission control unit 90 indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun.

After completing control corresponding to the 10-second long opening effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening start command from the main control device 60 and sets the round effect to be executed. After setting the round effect to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a round effect command to the display control device 100 to set the round effect to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect.

After the display control device 100 has completed control corresponding to the 10-second long opening effect, when it receives a round effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the round effect to be executed and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it ends control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

In addition to the advantages of the above-described embodiment and Variation 1, Variation 2 offers the following advantages:

According to this variant example 2, the audio and light emitting control device 90 is able to grasp the support mode status of the main control device 60, and even when it receives the same command from the main control device 60, it executes different effects depending on the support mode status of the main control device 60. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the main control device 60 sends various commands to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to cause the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute various effects, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Specifically, according to this variation 2, the audio and light emitting control device 90 executes an opening effect when it receives an opening command during low-frequency support mode, and executes a long opening effect when it receives an opening command during high-frequency support mode. Therefore, whether the main control device 60 is causing the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening effect or a long opening effect, it only needs to send opening commands with the same content. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which, for example, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening effect, a command for executing the opening effect is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90, and when the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute a long opening effect, a command for executing the long opening effect is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this variant example 2, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command during low frequency support mode, it executes an opening effect and then executes a right-hit notification effect. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which, for example, the main control device 60 sends an opening command to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening effect, and then sends a right-hit notification command to execute a right-hit notification effect (the configuration of the comparative example shown in Figure 44), the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this variant example 2, the main control unit 60 sends a high-frequency support mode command or a low-frequency support mode command when the support mode changes, and the audio/light emitting control unit 90 turns the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag ON when it receives a high-frequency support mode command, and turns the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag OFF when it receives a low-frequency support mode command. The audio/light emitting control unit 90 can then determine the support mode status of the main control unit 60 by referencing the audio/light side high-frequency support mode flag. Therefore, the main control unit 60 does not need to include information regarding the support mode status in the opening command in order to have the audio/light emitting control unit 90 determine the support mode status, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 60 when sending an opening command.

Furthermore, according to this variation 2, the audio and light control device 90 is able to grasp the support mode status of the main control device 60 and determines the content of the effects to be executed during the opening period, which is the period from receiving the opening command to receiving the opening start command, based on the support mode status of the main control device 60. Therefore, the main control device 60 does not need to change the manner in which it sends the opening command and the opening start command depending on its support mode status, and can send the opening command and the opening start command in the same transmission manner each time. Therefore, the control required for the main control device 60 to change the transmission manner in which it sends the opening command and the opening start command depending on the support mode status can be omitted, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 60. In addition, because the program for executing this control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. Furthermore, according to this variation 2, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the main control device 60 sends various commands to the audio and light control device 90 to have the audio and light control device 90 execute various effects depending on the support mode status.

Furthermore, according to this variation 2, the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of whether the support mode state when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode. In other words, the main control unit 60 sends the opening command and the opening start command at the same interval even if the support mode state when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is different. Therefore, according to this variation 2, it is possible to omit the control required for the main control unit 60 to change the interval at which it sends the opening command and the opening start command depending on the support mode state, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 60. In addition, because the program for executing this control can be deleted, it is possible to reduce the program capacity of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, according to this variation 2, if the support mode state when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is low-frequency support mode, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 executes an opening effect in the first part of the opening period and executes a right-hit notification effect in the second part of the opening period. If the support mode state when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is high-frequency support mode, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 executes a long opening effect from 0 to 7 seconds with content identical to the opening effect in the first part of the opening period, and executes a long opening effect from 7 to 10 seconds in the second part of the opening period. Therefore, according to this variation 2, the same effect is executed in the first part of the opening period regardless of the support mode state of the main control device 60, and different effect content is executed in the second part of the opening period depending on the support mode state of the main control device 60, giving the player a sense of anticipation as to how the effect content will change from the first part to the second part of the opening period. Furthermore, according to this variation 2, an effect including content appropriate to the support mode state of the main control device 60 can be executed in the second part of the opening period.

B7-1. Variation 3:
72 is a timing chart outlining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 of the second embodiment. The main differences from Modification 1 of the second embodiment described above are that the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and that the sound and light emission control unit 90 is aware of the type of support mode, and when an opening command is received, determines based on the type of support mode whether to set it to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect, or to execute a 7-second opening effect and a round effect. Specific processing will be described below.

First, we will explain the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode, with reference to (A) in Figure 72.

As shown in (A) of Figure 72, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds and starts the opening period, regardless of the type of support mode when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and sends an opening command to the audio and light emission control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it references the audio and light support mode flag to determine whether the current support mode type is high-frequency support mode. If the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines that the current support mode type is not high-frequency support mode when it receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect. In other words, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command.

After setting the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect, it sends an opening effect command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the opening effect and right-hit notification effect. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-hit notification effect. In other words, the display control device 100 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command. The display control device 100 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect ends, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins control of the audio output so that audio corresponding to the right-hit notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and begins control of the illumination of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the right-hit notification effect. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the 7-second opening effect ends, the display control device 100 begins control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect that is set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the right-hit notification effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 10 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emission control unit 90 indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun.

After the audio and light emitting control device 90 completes the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification display and receives an opening start command from the main control device 60, it determines whether control corresponding to the round display is already being executed, and if it determines that control corresponding to the round display is not being executed, it sets the round display to be executed. After setting the round display to be executed, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a round display command to the display control device 100 to set the round display to be executed. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then starts control corresponding to the round display. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 starts audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round display is output from the speaker 46, and starts light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round display.

After the display control device 100 has completed the three-second control corresponding to the right-hit notification effect, when it receives a round effect command from the audio and light control device 90, it sets the round effect to be executed and starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the round effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening and closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

Next, the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during high-frequency support mode will be explained with reference to (B) in Figure 72. The main difference from the processing that occurs when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode described above is that the audio and light emission control device 90, upon receiving the opening command, determines that the mode is not high-frequency support mode and sets itself to execute the opening and round effects. This will be explained in detail below.

As shown in (B) of Figure 72, regardless of the type of support mode when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds, starts the opening period, and sends an opening command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the opening period has started.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it references the audio and light support mode flag to determine whether the current support mode type is high-frequency support mode. If the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines that the current support mode type is high-frequency support mode upon receiving an opening command from the main control device 60, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening performance and a round performance. In other words, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the device to execute two processes (two performances in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command.

After setting the opening performance and round performance to be executed, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends an opening-round performance command to the display control device 100 to set the opening performance and round performance to be executed. The audio and light emission control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the opening performance. Specifically, the audio and light emission control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the opening performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening-round effect command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it sets the device to execute a 7-second opening effect and round effect. In other words, the display control device 100 sets the device to execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) consecutively in response to one command. The display control device 100 then begins control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41.

When the control corresponding to the 7-second opening performance ends, the audio and light emission control device 90 begins control corresponding to the round performance that is set to be executed after the opening performance. Specifically, the audio and light emission control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the round performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round performance. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the 7-second opening performance ends, the display control device 100 begins control corresponding to the round performance that is set to be executed after the opening performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 begins control to display a video corresponding to the round performance on the pattern display device 41.

When the opening period, which is set to 10 seconds, ends, the main control unit 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and sends an opening start command to the audio and light emission control unit 90 indicating that the opening/closing processing period has begun.

When the audio and light control device 90 receives the release start command from the main control device 60, it determines whether control corresponding to the round performance is already being executed, and if it determines that control corresponding to the round performance is being executed, it discards the release start command and continues the control corresponding to the round performance that is already being executed. Therefore, in this case, a round performance command to set the display control device 100 to execute the round performance is not sent. However, the display control device 100 continues the control corresponding to the round performance that is already being executed.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been opened a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period has ended, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and sends an ending command to the audio and light control device 90 indicating that the ending period has begun.

When the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an ending command from the main control device 60, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance and sets the device to execute the ending performance. After setting the device to execute the ending performance, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends an ending performance command to the display control device 100 to set the device to execute the ending performance. The audio and light emitting control device 90 then begins control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 90 begins audio output control so that audio corresponding to the ending performance is output from the speaker 46, and begins light emission control of the various lamps 47 so that the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.

When the display control device 100 receives an ending performance command from the audio and light emission control device 90, it terminates control corresponding to the round performance, sets the device to execute the ending performance, and starts control corresponding to the ending performance. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a video corresponding to the ending performance on the pattern display device 41.

In addition to the effects of the above-described embodiment, Variation 3, Variation 1, and Variation 2, the following effects are achieved:

According to this variation 3, the audio and light emitting control device 90 is able to grasp the support mode status of the main control device 60, and even when it receives the same command from the main control device 60, it executes different effects depending on the support mode status of the main control device 60. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the main control device 60 sends various commands to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to cause the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute various effects, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Specifically, according to Variation 3, if the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command during low-frequency support mode, it executes an opening performance, and if the opening command is received during high-frequency support mode, it executes an opening performance followed by a round performance. Therefore, whether the main control device 60 is causing the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening performance or causing the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening performance followed by a round performance, the main control device 60 only needs to send the same opening command. This reduces the processing load on the main control device 60 and reduces the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63, compared to a configuration in which, for example, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening performance, it sends a command to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute the opening performance, and when the audio and light emitting control device 90 is caused to execute an opening performance followed by a round performance, it sends a command to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute the opening performance followed by the round performance.

Furthermore, according to this variant example 3, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives an opening command during low frequency support mode, it executes an opening effect and then executes a right-hit notification effect. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which, for example, the main control device 60 sends an opening command to the audio and light emitting control device 90 to execute an opening effect, and then sends a right-hit notification command to execute a right-hit notification effect (the configuration of the comparative example shown in Figure 44), the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this variation 3, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 is able to grasp the support mode status of the main control device 60 and determines the content of the effects to be executed during the opening period, which is the period from receiving the opening command to receiving the opening start command, based on the support mode status of the main control device 60. Therefore, the main control device 60 does not need to change the manner in which it sends the opening command and the opening start command depending on its support mode status, and can send the opening command and the opening start command in the same transmission manner each time. Therefore, the control required for the main control device 60 to change the transmission manner in which it sends the opening command and the opening start command depending on the support mode status can be omitted, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 60. In addition, because the program for executing this control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. Furthermore, according to this variation 3, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the main control device 60 sends various commands to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 to have the audio and light-emitting control device 90 execute various effects depending on the support mode status.

Furthermore, according to this variation 3, the main control unit 60 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of whether the support mode state when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode. In other words, the main control unit 60 sends the opening command and the opening start command at the same interval even if the support mode state when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is different. Therefore, according to this variation 3, it is possible to omit the control required for the main control unit 60 to change the interval at which it sends the opening command and the opening start command depending on the support mode state, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 60. In addition, because the program for executing this control can be deleted, it is possible to reduce the program capacity of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, according to Modification 3, if the support mode state when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is low-frequency support mode, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 executes an opening effect in the first part of the opening period and executes a right-hit notification effect in the second part of the opening period. If the support mode state when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is high-frequency support mode, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 executes an opening effect in the first part of the opening period and executes a round effect in the second part of the opening period. Therefore, according to Modification 3, the same effect is executed in the first part of the opening period regardless of the support mode state of the main control device 60, and different effect content is executed in the second part of the opening period depending on the support mode state of the main control device 60, giving the player a sense of anticipation about how the effect content will change from the first part to the second part of the opening period. Furthermore, according to Modification 3, it is possible to execute an effect including content appropriate to the support mode state of the main control device 60 in the second part of the opening period.

B7-4. Variation 4:
In the above embodiment and each of the above-described variations, the audio and light emitting control device 90 is configured to sequentially execute two effects (an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect) when it receives an opening command, but it may also be configured to sequentially execute three or more effects. With this configuration, the number of effects that are actually executed out of the three or more set effects changes depending on the timing at which the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives the opening start command. Therefore, by controlling and changing the timing at which the main control device 60 sends the opening start command, it is possible to change the number of effects that the audio and light emitting control device 90 executes.

B7-5. Variation 5:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the main control unit 60 is configured to send an opening start command to the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 when the opening and closing processing period begins, but the main control unit 60 may also be configured to send an opening start command to the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 when the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 actually opens.

B7-6. Variation 6:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the audio and light emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100 are configured to execute the right-hit notification effect after the opening effect has ended, but they may be configured to execute the right-hit notification effect by superimposing the display and audio output of the opening effect while continuing to display the opening effect. For example, the right-hit notification effect may be executed by displaying small characters such as "Right hit!" on the edge of the screen in a layer above the display while continuing to display the opening effect.

B7-7. Variation 7:
In the above embodiment and variant example 1, the length of the opening period when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery during high frequency support mode is set to be shorter than the length of the opening period when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery during low frequency support mode, but the length of the opening period when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery during high probability mode may also be set to be shorter than the length of the opening period when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery during low probability mode.

B7-8. Variation 8:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to measure the reception interval between multiple commands when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives the multiple commands from the main control device 60, and to determine the type of performance to be executed based on the measured reception interval. With this configuration, the main control device 60 does not need to transmit various commands corresponding to each performance, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 60.

B7-9. Variation 9:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the audio and light emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be configured to terminate the currently executing effect and execute the effect corresponding to the received command when a command to execute another effect is received during the execution of the effect. This configuration can prevent a situation in which multiple unrelated effects are executed at the same time, making it difficult for the player to recognize each effect.

B7-10. Variation 10:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the system is configured to transition to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode has ended, but the system may be configured not to transition to the high-frequency support mode even after the opening/closing execution mode has ended. Also, the system may be configured to include a jackpot type that transitions to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode has ended and a jackpot type that does not transition to the high-frequency support mode.

B7-11. Variation 11:
The configurations of the above embodiment and the above modifications can also be applied to other configurations in which commands are sent and received between two devices.

For example, this can also be applied to a configuration in which the main control unit 60 sends a variation command (variation pattern command) including information on the variation time to the audio and light emitting control unit 90, and then sends a confirmation command to stop (confirm) the pattern. Specifically, for example, upon receiving the variation command, the audio and light emitting control unit 90 can be set to sequentially execute multiple effects such as preview effects, reach effects, and super reach effects, and if it receives a confirmation command while the multiple effects are being executed sequentially, it can end the effect currently being executed and execute a confirmation effect that stops the pattern.

The present invention can also be applied to a configuration in which the main control unit 60 sends an opening command to the audio and light emitting control unit 90 indicating the start of a round (e.g., a first round opening command), and then sends an opening command to the audio and light emitting control unit 90 indicating the start of the next round (e.g., a second round opening command). Specifically, for example, the audio and light emitting control unit 90 that receives the first round opening command can be set to execute a first round effect corresponding to the first round, and if it receives a second round opening command while the first round effect is being executed, it can end the first round effect that is currently being executed and execute a second round effect. Note that the first round effect, second round effect, etc. are realized by the audio and light emitting control unit 90 sequentially executing multiple processes.

The present invention can also be applied to a configuration in which the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a presentation command to the display control device 100 instructing it to execute a specific presentation, and then sends a presentation operation command indicating that the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed by the player. Specifically, for example, upon receiving a panel selection presentation command, the display control device 100 can be configured to execute a panel selection presentation (for example, a presentation in which multiple panels rotate or move, or a presentation in which the frame of a panel moves) to select one panel from multiple panels, and if the presentation operation command is received while the panel selection presentation is being executed, the panel selection presentation being executed can be terminated and a presentation corresponding to a specific panel included in the multiple panels can be executed. The panel selection presentation is realized by the display control device 100 sequentially executing multiple processes.

It can also be applied to a configuration in which the main control device 60 transmits to the audio and light emitting control device 90 a variation command (variation pattern command) containing information about the variation time, etc., and a type command containing information about the result of the jackpot lottery, etc. Specifically, for example, the audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to determine the content of the effects to be executed in a game round and the content of the effects to be executed in the opening period based on the interval at which the variation command and type command are received.

B7-12. Variation 12:
In the above embodiment, the voice-emitting control device 90 may or may not execute the right-hit notification display depending on the reception interval between the opening command and the opening start command, but the voice-emitting control device 90 may or may not execute the right-hit notification display depending on the content of the information contained in the opening command.

C. Third embodiment:
C1. Structure of the gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described.

Figure 73 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a roughly rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 located in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are located on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has the function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and the function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a specific operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing during a jackpot lottery conducted by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that is pressed by the player to stop the game ball from being launched by the game ball launching mechanism, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

In addition, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with a predetermined launch strength, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the operating handle 25 is rotated to the maximum. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows toward the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. In other words, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can perform a so-called "right hit." Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched toward the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is on. In other words, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26, thereby realizing the launch of a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is configured to be located on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 may also be located in another position. For example, the game ball launch button 26 may be located inside (on the periphery of) the operating handle 25, similar to the weight button 25b. This allows the player to operate the operating handle 25, weight button 25b, and game ball launch button 26 with just their right hand.

Figure 74 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical units are provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 is equipped with a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board that handles the main control of the game and monitors the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio and light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes an LCD display that displays symbols and images for effects.

The third control unit 53 is equipped with a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for the payout of prize balls. When a command to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launching mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Additionally, the back of the inner frame 13 is equipped with several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 that is continuously replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the amusement hall, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping surface to allow game balls to flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically downstream of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls in response to commands from the payout control device 70.

Figure 75 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, after which they flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning mechanism KH. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH is a mechanism including a first variable winning device 57 and a second variable winning device 58. The gaming board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

General winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which game balls can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the bottom center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, and is located on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. The second starting hole 34 is also provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is the gate that triggers the execution of a lottery to open the electric device 34a. Specifically, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 uses this passage as an opportunity to execute an internal lottery (electric device release lottery). If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to the electric device release, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device release state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The first variable winning device 57 has a first large winning opening 57a that leads to the back side of the gaming board 30, and a first opening/closing door 57b that opens and closes the first large winning opening 57a. The first opening/closing door 57b is normally in a closed state so that game balls cannot enter the first large winning opening 57a. In the event of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery described below, the first opening/closing door 57b opens, allowing game balls to enter the first large winning opening 57a.

The second variable winning device 58 has a second large winning opening 58a that leads to the back side of the gaming board 30, and a second opening/closing door 58b that opens and closes the second large winning opening 58a. The second opening/closing door 58b is normally in a closed state, preventing game balls from entering the second large winning opening 58a. If a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the second opening/closing door 58b opens, allowing game balls to enter the second large winning opening 58a.

The second large prize opening 58a of the second variable prize device 58 has a V prize area FV and a non-V prize area FNV. The V prize area FV and non-V prize area FNV will be described later.

The second variable winning device 58 is located downstream of the first variable winning device 57. A gaming ball that reaches the first variable winning device 57 when the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is closed passes over the first opening/closing door 57b and reaches the second variable winning device 58. If the second opening/closing door 58b is open at this time, the gaming ball will enter the second large winning opening 58a.

Hereinafter, the first variable prize device 57 and the second variable prize device 58 will also be referred to simply as "variable prize devices." Furthermore, the first large prize opening 57a and the second large prize opening 58a will also be referred to simply as "large prize openings," and the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b will also be referred to simply as "opening/closing doors."

When a gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). If the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot or small jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode executes the opening and closing processes of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b transition to the opening/closing execution mode, they transition to an open state in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, allowing gaming balls to enter the first large winning opening 57a and the second large winning opening 58a. When predetermined conditions are met, they transition back to a closed state. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first large winning opening 57a or the second large winning opening 58a, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as prize balls. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the number of prize balls paid out by the payout device 71 when a gaming ball enters the first large prize opening 57a is different from the number of prize balls paid out by the payout device 71 when a gaming ball enters the second large prize opening 58a.

In addition, an outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

Here, "entering" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a situation in which the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area PA, but also a situation in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, game balls entering the general winning opening 32, first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58, first starting opening 33, and second starting opening 34 will also be referred to as winning.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a static first pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second pattern. The second pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a static second pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first pending display unit 37c and a second pending display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 can be reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 can be reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the first open/close door 57b or the second open/close door 58b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either the predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the first variable winning device 57 or the second variable winning device 58. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is initiated, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends.

The special drawing unit 37, the regular drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured as segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may also be configured as various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device equipped in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the first start opening 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the second start opening 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display of the pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also displays effects during the open/close execution mode to which the game enters when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 76 is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns and display surface 41a on the pattern display device 41. Figure 76(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed LCD patterns on the pattern display device 41. The LCD patterns are images displayed on the pattern display device 41, and correspond to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b. When a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface 41a, and when a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in Figure 76(a), the pattern display device 41 displays variably the numbers 1 to 8 as LCD patterns. The variably displayed patterns may also be numbers 1 to 8 accompanied by pictures of characters or the like.

Figure 76(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol column Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 76(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed in which each symbol column scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 76(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction periodically. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the static display is achieved, if the result of the jackpot lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described manner, and various other variations in the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change round ends, the static display is displayed, and the static display ends. It is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the results of the jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on a win in either the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the results of one jackpot lottery for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34, it causes the segment display in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to change for each play round, and then causes the segment display to change to a static display corresponding to the result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a pattern row as a first LCD pattern or a second LCD pattern for each play, and then statically displays the pattern row so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts to when the specified lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the specified lottery result is statically displayed.

As shown in Figure 76 (b), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2. The first pending display area Ds1 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending plays based on winning at the first starting port 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending plays based on winning at the second starting port 34. A pending play refers to an unexecuted play, in which a variable display has not yet begun to notify the results of the jackpot lottery for special information obtained based on winning at the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The number of pending plays that can be reserved based on winning at the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending plays. Furthermore, the number of pending plays that can be reserved based on winning at the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 can display hold displays corresponding to four hold play times.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the display surface 41a is equipped with a first synchronization display unit Sync1 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stationary display of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a of the special pattern unit 37, and a second synchronization display unit Sync2 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stationary display of the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display unit 37b of the special pattern unit 37. Specifically, when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a changing pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 flashes, and when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a stationary pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 lights up. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a changing pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 flashes, and when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a stationary pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 lights up.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the LCD general display area NA, the first synchronization display unit Sync1, and the second synchronization display unit Sync2, but the display surface 41a may be configured not to display some or all of these displays.

C2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 77 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is primarily composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio/light emitting control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs stored in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 70 and the power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control unit 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The input side of the main control board 61 is also connected to various detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports and through gates, such as the general entry port 32, first start port 33, second start port 34, through gate 35, and variable entry devices (first variable entry device 57, second variable entry device 58). Based on signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each ball entry port, and whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the gaming ball's entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are an electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34, a first variable winning drive unit 57c that opens and closes the first opening and closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57, a second variable winning drive unit 58c that opens and closes the second opening and closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the first variable winning drive unit 57c and the second variable winning drive unit 58c so that the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are opened and closed. Furthermore, if the electric role opening lottery results in an electric role opening, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a game ball has entered the general prize entry port 32, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. If a game ball has entered the second start port 34, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the control handle 25. As described above, the control handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When a player grips the control handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on. When the player rotates the control handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched onto the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio and light control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it references the command information storage area 63f in the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio and light control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting devices such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 100. The audio and light control device 90 is also connected to a performance operation button 24, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a specified timing, it controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects that operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect that will be executed while the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a static manner, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 78 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. The various counter information is used by the MPU 62 when performing jackpot lotteries, setting the display on the main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for jackpot lotteries. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate jackpot types. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to a miss.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also has a reserve information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reserve information storage area 64b has a first reserve area Ra and a second reserve area Rb. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will now be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The jackpot random number counter C1 that has been moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

Next, we will explain the details of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 39, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, we will explain the details of the reach random number counter C3. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. However, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 76(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed as varying symbols in symbol column Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained in detail. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 when determining the change time in the first and second pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the change time of the patterns on the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 begins to fluctuate. When determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e using the value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, and variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in this invention. Also, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, we will explain the hit/miss table. The hit/miss table is table data used to compare the jackpot random number counter C1 when a jackpot lottery is conducted based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has two jackpot lottery modes: a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode. When a jackpot lottery is conducted in the low-probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low-probability mode is referenced, and when a jackpot lottery is conducted in the high-probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high-probability mode is referenced. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores, as separate table data, a hit/miss table used to compare the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 33 with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c when a gaming ball enters the second start opening 34. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 stores four win/loss tables in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63: a win/loss table for the first starting hole (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting hole (for high probability mode), a win/loss table for the second starting hole (for low probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting hole (for high probability mode).

Figure 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. Figure 79(a) shows the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and Figure 79(b) shows the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in Figure 79(a), the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode) has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 79(b), the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) has 16 values from 0 to 15 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

Figure 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. Figure 80(a) shows the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and Figure 80(b) shows the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in Figure 80(a), the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 80(b), the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) has 16 values from 0 to 15 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery compared to the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the low probability mode is included in the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the result of the jackpot lottery shows a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in this embodiment, a "small win" may also be set as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) are opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be explained. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) the door of the variable winning device is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) The lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends (low probability mode or high probability mode).

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning devices in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, multiple opening and closing patterns (hereinafter simply referred to as "opening and closing patterns") may be provided for the first opening and closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening and closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58, with one opening and closing pattern set to correspond to each type of jackpot. In this embodiment, one opening and closing pattern is set to correspond to each type of jackpot, and the opening and closing modes of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b differ for each opening and closing pattern. The opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b in this embodiment will be described later.

In addition, as a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning devices in the opening and closing execution mode, a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is relatively high and low from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b can be set to continue opening once in the opening and closing execution mode for 5 seconds or until seven game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b can be set to continue opening once in the opening and closing execution mode for 1.6 seconds or until seven balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

The opening time limit for each opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the maximum number of balls that can be opened per opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for each opening or the maximum number of balls that can be opened per opening may be set longer or higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that no winning occurs in the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58). Note that in this embodiment, there is no low-frequency winning mode, and the high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 81 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. Figure 81(a) shows the allocation table for the first starting port, and Figure 81(b) shows the allocation table for the second starting port. The allocation table for the first starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the allocation table for the second starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting hole in Figure 81(a), the allocation table for the first starting hole has an 8R Type 1 jackpot and an 8R Type 2 jackpot set as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33. In this embodiment, of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 39," "0 to 27" corresponds to an 8R Type 1 jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R Type 2 jackpot.

For an 8R Type 1 jackpot, the total number of times the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 are opened in the opening/closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the opening/closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, for an 8R Type 1 jackpot, the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) are controlled during the opening/closing execution mode to make it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning zone FV of the second large winning opening 58a. If a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode for the jackpot lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high-probability mode.

In this embodiment, in the 8R Type 1 jackpot, the total number of times the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 are opened in the opening/closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds). In other words, either the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b opens once during one round. However, as another embodiment, the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) may open multiple times during one round. In this embodiment, the number of rounds during the opening/closing execution mode is controlled by decrementing the value set in the round counter area (described below) by one each time a round is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, control is exercised so that either the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b opens once before the value set in the round counter area is decremented once. As another example, the doors (first door 57b, second door 58b) may be opened multiple times before the value set in the round counter area is decremented once.

For an 8R Type 2 jackpot, the total number of times the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 are opened in the opening/closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the opening/closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, for an 8R Type 2 jackpot, the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) are controlled to open and close during the opening/closing execution mode so that a gaming ball is less likely to enter the V winning zone FV of the large winning opening 58a. However, if a gaming ball does enter the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode for the jackpot lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high-probability mode.

As such, compared to a Type 2 jackpot, it is easier for a game ball to enter the V prize area FV during round play in a Type 1 jackpot, so there is a high probability that the lottery mode for the jackpot lottery after the open/close execution mode has ended will be the high probability mode. On the other hand, compared to a Type 1 jackpot, it is harder for a game ball to enter the V prize area FV during round play in a Type 2 jackpot, so there is a low probability that the lottery mode for the jackpot lottery after the open/close execution mode has ended will be the high probability mode.

As shown in the allocation table for the second starting hole in Figure 81 (b), the allocation table for the second starting hole has a 16R Type 1 jackpot and an 8R Type 2 jackpot set as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34. In this embodiment, of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 39," "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R Type 1 jackpot, and "27 to 39" corresponds to an 8R Type 2 jackpot.

For a 16R Type 1 jackpot, the total number of times the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 are opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the opening/closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, for a 16R Type 1 jackpot, the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) are controlled during the opening/closing execution mode to make it easier for the gaming ball to enter the V winning zone FV of the second large winning opening 58a. If a gaming ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode for the jackpot lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high-probability mode.

As described above, for an 8R Type 2 jackpot, the total number of times the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 are opened in the opening/closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the opening/closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, for an 8R Type 2 jackpot, the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) are controlled to open and close during the opening/closing execution mode so that a gaming ball is less likely to enter the V winning zone FV of the second large winning opening 58a. However, if a gaming ball does enter the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode for the jackpot lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high-probability mode.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot differs between a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, providing a clear difference in the advantages to the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released into the game area PA in the same manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery using the electric role release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role release 34a per time is set longer when the electric role release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs in high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one electric role. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, the time between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in meeting the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table (win/loss table for the lottery to open an electric reel) used when conducting the lottery to open an electric reel.

Figure 82(a) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 82(a), the win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature release. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in low-frequency support mode and the electric feature release lottery is executed, the electric feature release is won with a probability of 1 in 233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature release lottery is won in low-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 82(b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 82(b), the winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in winning the electric feature opening. Four values from 462 to 465 have been set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in losing. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in high-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the electric feature opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in high-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low-frequency support mode.

C3. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variable winning mechanism KH. As described above, the variable winning mechanism KH comprises a first variable winning device 57 and a second variable winning device 58. Figure 83(a) shows an oblique view of the variable winning mechanism KH when the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are in a closed state. For ease of explanation, as shown in the figure, the point at which a game ball launched to the right of the game board 30 first reaches the variable winning mechanism KH is referred to as the reference point P0, and the flat portion on the variable winning mechanism KH that includes the reference point P0 is referred to as the flat portion SF.

The plane including the first opening/closing door 57b, the second opening/closing door 58b, and the flat surface SF slopes downward from the right side of the game board 30 toward the center. A game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 toward the right side of the game board 30 flows down the right side of the game board 30 and reaches reference point P0 on the flat surface SF. When the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are closed, a game ball that reaches reference point P0 flows down from reference point P0 to the first opening/closing door 57b to the second opening/closing door 58b in this order. Note that, as shown in the figure, for ease of explanation, the direction in which the game ball flows down from reference point P0 is defined as the X direction. As shown in the figure, the game ball passes over the top surface of the first opening/closing door 57b in the closed state in the X direction in approximately 0.4 seconds.

In addition, six columnar protrusions 59 are arranged on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. The protrusions 59 are arranged on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b so that their longitudinal direction is approximately perpendicular to the X direction. The protrusions 59 arranged on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b adjust the speed of the gaming balls flowing down the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b, and as a result, the protrusions 59 adjust the time it takes for the gaming balls to pass over the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b (passing time).

Two protrusions 59 are arranged in the area of the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b that corresponds to the non-V winning area FNV. Furthermore, four protrusions 59 are arranged in the area of the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b that corresponds to the V winning area FV. By arranging the protrusions 59 in this manner, a gaming ball passes through the area of the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b that corresponds to the non-V winning area FNV in the closed state in approximately two seconds, and passes through the area of the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b that corresponds to the V winning area FV in the closed state in approximately four seconds.

Figure 83(b) shows the variable winning mechanism KH when the first opening/closing door 57b is in the open state. Figure 83(c) shows the variable winning mechanism KH when the second opening/closing door 58b is in the open state. While the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b transition between the open state and the closed state according to a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Note that while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are never in the open state at the same time; the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are in one of the states shown in Figure 83(a), Figure 83(b), or Figure 83(c). In other words, the open state of the first opening/closing door 57b and the open state of the second opening/closing door 58b are mutually exclusive.

Figure 84 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the case where a gaming ball enters the first large prize opening 57a. Figure 84(a) shows a gaming ball GB1 flowing on the top surface of the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens, and a gaming ball GB2 flowing upstream of the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens.

Figure 84(b) shows the state immediately after the first opening/closing door 57b is opened. When the first opening/closing door 57b is opened, the game ball GB1 that was flowing on the top surface of the first opening/closing door 57b immediately before the first opening/closing door 57b was opened enters the first large prize opening 57a. Then, as shown in Figure 84(c), the game ball GB2 that was flowing upstream of the first opening/closing door 57b immediately before the first opening/closing door 57b was opened flows down and enters the first large prize opening 57a.

In this way, game balls flowing on the top surface of the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens, and game balls flowing upstream of the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens, enter the first large prize opening 57a after the first opening/closing door 57b opens.

Figure 85 is an explanatory diagram that explains the case where a gaming ball enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. Figure 85(a) shows a gaming ball GB3 circulating through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b just before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, and a gaming ball GB4 circulating upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b just before the second opening/closing door 58b opens.

Figure 85(b) shows the state immediately after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened. When the second opening/closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB3 that was circulating through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b was opened enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. Then, as shown in Figure 85(c), the game ball GB4 that was circulating upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b was opened flows down and enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a.

In this way, game balls circulating through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, and game balls circulating upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, enter the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a after the second opening/closing door 58b opens.

Figure 86 is an explanatory diagram that explains the case where a gaming ball enters the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. Figure 86(a) shows a gaming ball GB5 circulating through the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b just before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, and a gaming ball GB6 circulating through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b just before the second opening/closing door 58b opens.

Figure 86 (b) shows the state immediately after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened. When the second opening/closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB5 that was circulating through the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b was opened enters the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. On the other hand, the game ball GB6 that was circulating through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b was opened enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a, and does not enter the V winning area FV.

In this way, a gaming ball that was circulating through the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b was opened will enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened, but a gaming ball that was circulating through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b was opened will not enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened.

Figure 87 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed in response to a Type 1 jackpot, and an example of the behavior of the gaming ball in that opening and closing pattern. The bottom of Figure 87 shows a time chart illustrating the opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b, and the top of Figure 87 shows a graph illustrating an example of the behavior of the gaming ball in that opening and closing pattern. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the bottom of Figure 87 and the graph shown in the top of Figure 87 indicates the time (seconds) used commonly in both figures.

As shown in the lower part of Figure 87, in the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a Type 1 jackpot, the first opening/closing door 57b is opened and closed once as the first round of round play. Thereafter, the second opening/closing door 58b is opened and closed until the number of rounds for that jackpot is reached. For example, in the case of an 8R Type 1 jackpot, the first opening/closing door 57b is opened and closed once as the first round, and then the second opening/closing door 58b is opened and closed seven times as the second to eighth rounds. Also, in the case of a 16R Type 1 jackpot, the first opening/closing door 57b is opened and closed once as the first round, and then the second opening/closing door 58b is opened and closed 15 times as the second to sixteenth rounds. For ease of illustration, Figure 88 shows the first four opening and closing operations of the second opening/closing door 58b.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a Type 1 jackpot or a Type 2 jackpot, the conditions (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") under which the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) transition from an open state to a closed state are as follows:
- Seven game balls enter the large prize opening corresponding to the door in the open state. - 10 seconds have passed while the door is in the open state. When either of the above two items occurs, the door (first door 57b, second door 58b) will transition from an open state to a closed state.

Furthermore, the opening and closing of the doors (first door 57b, second door 58b) of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is controlled by an opening scenario, which is a program that records the conditions for transitioning the doors to an open state in addition to the closing conditions described above. Opening scenarios are prepared for each type of jackpot, and in this embodiment, three programs are prepared: an opening scenario for a 16R Type 1 jackpot, an opening scenario for an 8R Type 1 jackpot, and an opening scenario for an 8R Type 2 jackpot. Furthermore, each opening scenario prepared for each type of jackpot records the time it takes for the doors to transition from a closed state to an open state and the order in which the doors (first door 57b, second door 58b) are opened for each round in the opening and closing execution mode. For example, in the opening and closing execution mode for an 8R Type 1 jackpot, the first opening and closing door 57b transitions from an open state to a closed state, ending the first round, and then the second opening and closing door 58b transitions to an open state for the second round, but the time from when the first opening and closing door 57b transitions to a closed state until the second opening and closing door 58b transitions to an open state is set as the opening scenario for an 8R Type 1 jackpot.

If a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the main CPU 62 reads the opening scenario corresponding to the type of jackpot and determines whether or not the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b should be opened in accordance with the read opening scenario. In this way, the main CPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the opening/closing doors based on the closing conditions and opening scenario.

As described above, when a Type 1 jackpot is won, during the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) are controlled to open and close so that the gaming ball can easily enter the V winning zone FV of the second large winning opening 58a. In this embodiment, the timing at which the opening/closing doors transition to an open state is controlled based on the opening scenario, making it easier for the gaming ball to enter the V winning zone FV of the second large winning opening 58a.

Specifically, the period from the closing of the second door 58b to the next opening of the second door 58b (hereinafter also referred to as the "second door closing period CLT") is set to be equal to or greater than the time it takes for a gaming ball to pass through the area on the top surface of the second door 58b corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV (2 seconds in this embodiment), and less than the time it takes for a gaming ball to pass through the entire top surface of the second door 58b (the combined area of the area corresponding to the V winning area FV and the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV) (6 seconds in this embodiment). This controls the gaming ball to more easily enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a during the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a Type 1 jackpot. Hereinafter, the time it takes for a gaming ball to pass through the area on the top surface of the second door 58b corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV is also referred to as the "non-V winning area passing time NVT." The time it takes for the gaming ball to pass over the entire top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is also referred to as the "full surface passing time ALT." In other words, in this embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a first-class jackpot, the second opening/closing door closed period CLT is set so that the non-V winning area passing time NVT ≦ second opening/closing door closed period CLT < full surface passing time ALT, thereby controlling the gaming ball to more easily enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. The principle behind this is explained below.

By setting the non-V winning area passing time NVT to be less than or equal to the second opening/closing door closing period CLT, game balls that reach the most upstream part of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed can be made to pass through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b and flow down to the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, if game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at 0.6-second intervals reach the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds and pass through the most upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b at 0.6-second intervals, by setting the non-V winning area passing time NVT equal to or less than the second opening/closing door closed period CLT, the game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the second opening/closing door 58b first after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed can be made to pass through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b and circulate to the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. In other words, at least one game ball will be present in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b while the second opening/closing door 58b is closed. Therefore, by setting the second door closure period CLT to a value equal to or greater than the non-V winning area passage time NVT and transitioning the second door 58b to an open state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV.

Furthermore, by setting the second door closing period CLT < the full-surface passing time ALT, the second door 58b can be opened before the game ball passes through the most downstream portion of the top surface of the second door 58b, allowing the game ball to enter the V prize area FV. In other words, the game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the second door 58b first after the second door 58b closes can be allowed to enter the second large prize opening 58a (V prize area FV). As a result, in the opening and closing execution mode, during the period from when the doors begin opening in the second round to when the doors, which are open in the final round, transition to the closed state, it is possible to prevent a game ball that reaches the variable prize opening mechanism KH from passing through the variable prize opening mechanism KH and entering the outlet 43 without entering either the first large prize opening 57a or the second large prize opening 58a. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, from the time the door begins to open in the second round until the door, which is open in the final round, transitions to a closed state, almost all game balls circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH can be made to enter the first large winning opening 57a or the second large winning opening 58a. Therefore, if a player hits the ball to the right during a round of play corresponding to a Type 1 jackpot (8R Type 1 jackpot, 16R Type 1 jackpot), almost all game balls that reach the variable winning mechanism KH can be made to enter the large winning opening (first large winning opening 57a or second large winning opening 58a) without any misses. This allows the player to efficiently obtain bonuses (prize balls) during rounds of play.

In this embodiment, the value of the second door closing period CLT that satisfies the above condition is set to 3 seconds in the opening scenario. The period from when the first door 57b, which opened in the first round, transitions to a closed state until the second door 58b transitions to an open state is also set to 3 seconds in the opening scenario. By transitioning the second door 58b to an open state before the game ball that first reaches the top surface of the first door 57b after the first door 57b, which opened in the first round, transitions to a closed state, passes the most downstream point on the top surface of the second door 58b, game balls that reach the top surface of the second door 58b between the end of the first round and the start of the second round can also enter the second large prize opening 58a. As a result, in the opening and closing execution mode, from the time the doors begin to open in the first round until the doors, which are open in the final round, transition to a closed state, it is possible to make almost all of the game balls circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH enter the first large winning opening 57a or the second large winning opening 58a. For this reason, in this embodiment, the period from the time the first doors 57b, which opened in the first round, transition to a closed state until the second doors 58b transition to an open state is set to 3 seconds by the opening scenario.

The reason for opening the first door 57b in the first round of play in a round of play in the event of a Type 1 jackpot is to make the opening and closing pattern of the door in the Type 2 jackpot opening and closing execution mode described below similar to the opening and closing pattern of the door in the Type 1 jackpot opening and closing execution mode described above, making it difficult for the player to determine whether the jackpot is a Type 1 jackpot or a Type 2 jackpot from the behavior of the door. The reason for opening the first door 57b in the first round of play in the event of a Type 2 jackpot will be described later.

Next, we will explain the behavior of the gaming ball when an opening and closing pattern is executed in the first-class jackpot opening and closing execution mode. As mentioned above, the upper part of Figure 87 shows a graph illustrating an example of the behavior of the gaming ball when an opening and closing pattern is executed in the first-class jackpot opening and closing execution mode. The vertical axis of the graph indicates the distance in the X direction, with the reference point P0 (see Figure 83 (a)) of the variable winning mechanism KH as the origin. The vertical axis also shows the area in the X direction corresponding to the first large winning opening 57a (the upper surface of the first opening and closing door 57b) and the area corresponding to the second large winning opening 58a (the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b).

As mentioned above, the horizontal axis of the graph represents time (seconds). The solid and dashed lines shown on the graph represent the behavior of a single game ball. That is, the solid and dashed lines represent the behavior of a game ball flowing down in the X direction from the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH over time. The graph shown in this explanation illustrates the behavior of a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at 0.6 second intervals, reaching the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds, and circulating in the X direction through the variable winning mechanism KH.

The solid, thick rectangular area shown in the graph indicates the area (hereinafter also referred to as the open area) corresponding to the open state of the first and second doors 57b and 58b in the opening and closing pattern of the first and second doors 57b and 58b for a Type 1 jackpot. When the solid line showing the behavior of the gaming ball overlaps with the open area, this indicates that the gaming ball has entered the large prize opening (first large prize opening 57a or second large prize opening 58a) corresponding to that open area. The dashed line showing the behavior of the gaming ball indicates the behavior of the gaming ball in the X direction if the gaming ball did not enter the large prize opening.

The dots "・" at the intersections of the solid lines showing the behavior of game balls and the open areas indicate game balls entering the large prize opening (first large prize opening 57a or second large prize opening 58a). In other words, the number of dots "・" bordering one open area is the number of game balls that entered the large prize opening (first large prize opening 57a or second large prize opening 58a) due to the opening and closing of the door (first door 57b or second door 58b) corresponding to that open area. As described above, in this embodiment, the closing condition is that when seven game balls enter the large prize opening corresponding to an open door, the door transitions from an open state to a closed state. Therefore, seven dots "・" border each on the open area corresponding to one opening of the first door 57b and the open area corresponding to one opening of the second door 58b.

Furthermore, among the points "・" that touch each open area, the points "・" that touch the vertical sides of the rectangle that represent the open area indicate that the ball has already flown over the top surface of the open door before the door is opened, and entered the large prize opening (or prize area) corresponding to the open door at the same time as the door is opened. In other words, this corresponds to the behavior of game ball GB1 shown in Figure 84, game ball GB3 shown in Figure 85, and game balls GB5 and GB6 shown in Figure 86.

On the other hand, among the points "・" that touch each open area, the points "・" that touch the horizontal sides of the rectangle that represent the open area indicate that the ball was flowing upstream from each door before the door was opened, and reached and entered the large prize opening (or prize area) corresponding to the door after the door was opened. In other words, this corresponds to the behavior of game ball GB2 shown in Figure 84 and game ball GB4 shown in Figure 85.

In this embodiment, in the opening scenario for a Type 1 jackpot (for a 16R Type 1 jackpot, for an 8R Type 1 jackpot), the second door closure period CLT is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, the above-mentioned condition of "Non-V winning area passage time NVT (2 seconds) ≦ Second door closure period CLT (3 seconds)" is met. Therefore, as can be seen from the graph, at least one game ball enters the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a in every round from the second round onwards.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned condition of "second opening/closing door closing period CLT (3 seconds) < full surface passing time ALT (6 seconds)" is met. Therefore, for convenience of illustration, only the first five rounds can be shown, but it can be seen that from the start of the second round onwards, almost all of the game balls circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH have entered either the first large winning opening 57a or the second large winning opening 58a.

In this embodiment, the second door closing period CLT is set to 3 seconds in the opening scenario for a Type 1 jackpot (for a 16R Type 1 jackpot, for an 8R Type 1 jackpot). However, by further lengthening the value of the second door closing period CLT, it is possible to control the number of game balls to enter the V prize area FV of the second large prize opening 58a in each round from the second round onwards. For example, the second door closing period CLT value that satisfies the non-V prize area passing time NVT ≦ second door closing period CLT < full face passing time ALT can be set to a value such as 4 or 5 seconds.

Figure 88 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed in response to a Type 2 jackpot, and an example of the behavior of the gaming ball in that opening and closing pattern. The bottom of Figure 88 shows a time chart illustrating the opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b, and the top of Figure 88 shows a graph illustrating an example of the behavior of the gaming ball in that opening and closing pattern. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the bottom of Figure 88 and the graph shown in the top of Figure 88 indicates the time (seconds) used commonly in both figures.

As shown in the lower part of Figure 88, the opening and closing pattern in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a Type 2 jackpot is the same as the opening and closing pattern in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a Type 1 jackpot described above, in which the opening and closing operation of the first opening and closing door 57b is executed once as the first round of round play. Thereafter, the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing door 58b is executed until the number of rounds for that jackpot is reached.

In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a Type 2 jackpot, a closing condition is applied, which is the condition for transitioning the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) from an open state to a closed state. Furthermore, the 8R Type 2 jackpot opening scenario is applied as the opening scenario.

As described above, in the case of a Type 2 jackpot, during the opening/closing execution mode, the opening and closing of the doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is controlled so that the gaming ball is less likely to enter the V winning zone FV of the second large winning opening 58a. In this embodiment, the timing at which the doors transition to an open state is controlled based on the opening scenario, making it less likely that the gaming ball will enter the V winning zone FV of the second large winning opening 58a.

First, we will explain the opening and closing control of the second door 58b from the second round onwards. In the second round onwards, while the second door 58b is opened and closed multiple times, in order to make it difficult for game balls to enter the V prize zone FV of the second large prize opening 58a, the second door closing period CLT is set to be less than the non-V prize zone passing time NVT. With this setting, the second door 58b opens before a game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the upper surface of the second door 58b after the second door 58b is closed passes through the area corresponding to the non-V prize zone FNV on the upper surface of the second door 58b. Furthermore, a game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the upper surface of the second door 58b after the second door 58b is closed lands in the non-V prize zone FNV. During the period when the second door 58b is open, a game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second door 58b lands in the non-V prize zone FNV. Then, when the second door 58b is closed again, the gaming ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the upper surface of the second door 58b flows through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second door 58b. However, because the second door 58b opens before the gaming ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV, the gaming ball will enter the non-V winning area FNV. Therefore, from the second round onwards, by setting the second door closing period CLT < the non-V winning area passing time NVT, it is possible to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the V winning area FV. In this embodiment, the value of the second door closing period CLT that satisfies the above condition is set in the opening scenario to be the second door closing period CLT = 1.8 seconds.

Next, the reason for opening the first door 57b in the first round will be explained. As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a Type 2 jackpot, the second door 58b is opened and closed multiple times to prevent game balls from entering the V winning zone FV of the second large winning opening 58a. If the player had been hitting the ball from the right side before the opening/closing execution mode was initiated, and the second door 58b was opened in the first round, there is a possibility that a game ball will be present in the V winning zone FV on the top surface of the second door 58b when the second door 58b is opened in the first round. In this case, the game ball will enter the V winning zone FV despite the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a Type 2 jackpot. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a Type 2 jackpot, the first door 57b is opened in the first round to ensure that no game balls are present in the V winning zone FV on the top surface of the second door 58b when the second door 58b is first opened.

After the first door 57b transitions to a closed state, the gaming ball that first reaches the most upstream portion of the top surface of the first door 57b passes through the top surface of the first door 57b. By opening the second door 58b in the second round before the gaming ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second door 58b, the gaming ball can be placed in the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. In other words, the time from when the first door 57b transitions to a closed state until the second door 58b transitions to an open state in the second round must be shorter (less than 2.6 seconds in this embodiment) than the time required for the gaming ball that first reaches the most upstream portion of the top surface of the first door 57b to advance to the most downstream portion of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second door 58b.

Furthermore, if a gaming ball that passed the most downstream area on the top surface of the first opening/closing door 57b before the first opening/closing door 57b was opened in the first round (for example, a gaming ball circulating through the position of gaming ball GB4 shown in FIG. 85(a) before the first opening/closing door 57b was opened in the first round) is circulating in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b when the first round ends and the second round begins, opening the second opening/closing door 58b will cause the gaming ball to enter the V winning area FV. Therefore, the time from when the first opening/closing door 57b is opened in the first round to when the second opening/closing door 58b is opened in the second round must be longer than the time required for the gaming ball to circulate the most downstream area on the top surface of the first opening/closing door 57b and pass the most downstream area on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b (6.2 seconds or more in this embodiment).

In this embodiment, the open scenario is set to 2.5 seconds as the period from when the first door 57b, which is open in the first round, transitions to a closed state until the second door 58b opens in the second round. By setting it in this manner, the time from when the first door 57b transitions to a closed state until the second door 58b transitions to an open state in the second round is 2.5 seconds, which is shorter than the time required to pass over the top surface of the first door 57b (less than 2.6 seconds in this embodiment). Furthermore, the time from when the first door 57b transitions to an open state in the first round until the second door 58b transitions to an open state in the second round is 6.2 seconds or more, which is longer than the time required for a game ball to flow along the most downstream side of the top surface of the first door 57b and pass over the most downstream side of the top surface of the second door 58b. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the second type of jackpot, when the second opening and closing door 58b is first opened, it is possible to ensure that no game balls are present in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the top surface of the second opening and closing door 58b.

Next, we will explain the behavior of game balls when an opening and closing pattern is executed in the opening and closing execution mode for a second-type jackpot. As mentioned above, a graph showing an example of game ball behavior when an opening and closing pattern is executed in the opening and closing execution mode for a second-type jackpot is shown at the top of Figure 88. As with Figure 87, the graph shown in this explanation illustrates the behavior of game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at 0.6 second intervals, when the game balls reach the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds and circulate through the variable winning mechanism KH in the X direction.

In this embodiment, in the opening scenario for a Type 2 jackpot (8R Type 2 jackpot), the second door closing period CLT is set to 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the above-mentioned condition of "Second door closing period CLT (1.8 seconds) < Non-V prize area passage time NVT (2 seconds)" is met. Therefore, as can be seen from the graph, even though the second door 58b has opened and closed multiple times since the start of the opening and closing execution mode, no game balls have entered the V prize area FV of the second large prize opening 58a. Also, for convenience of illustration, only the first five rounds are shown, but it can be seen that since the start of the first round, almost all game balls circulating through the variable prize opening mechanism KH have entered the first large prize opening 57a or the second large prize opening 58a.

In this embodiment, the second door closing period CLT is set to 1.8 seconds in the opening scenario for a Type 2 jackpot, but the value of the second door closing period CLT for a Type 2 jackpot can be further shortened as long as the second door closing period CLT is less than the non-V winning area passing time NVT. This concludes the summary of the processing by the gaming machine.

C4. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
89 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is initiated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S30101, the process of reading various detection sensors is executed. That is, the status of the various detection sensors connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the status of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S30102.

In step S30102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S30103.

In step S30103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, proceed to step S30104. Note that the value of the variable type counter CS is updated during normal processing (Figure 95), which will be described later.

In step S30104, a prize-winning process for the start port is executed in response to a win at the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Details of the prize-winning process for the start port in step S30104 will be described later. After executing step S30104, proceed to step S30105.

In step S30105, the through winning process is executed in response to a win at the through gate 35. Details of the through winning process in step S30105 will be described later. After executing step S30105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for starting gate>
Next, the winning process for the starting slot will be described. The winning process for the starting slot is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 89: S30104).

Figure 90 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the start opening. In step S30201, whether or not the gaming ball has won (start winning) the first start opening 33 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start opening 33. If it is determined in step S30201 that the gaming ball has won the first start opening 33 (S30201: YES), the process proceeds to step S30202, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S30203.

In step S30203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step S30204.

In step S30204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and this first start pending number RaN is set as the target for the processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of pending balls based on winning entries into the first start opening 33. Then, proceed to step S30209.

If it is determined in step S30201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (S30201: NO), the process proceeds to step S30205, where it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S30205 that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (S30205: YES), the process proceeds to step S30206, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S30207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30205 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S30205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step S30207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device at the amusement hall that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step S30208.

In step S30208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read, and this second start pending number RbN is set as the target for the processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending balls based on winning entries into the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step S30209.

In step S30209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S30204 or step S30208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S30209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (S30209: NO), the winning process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, if in step S30209 the number of pending start items N is less than the upper limit (S30209: YES), proceed to step S30210, add 1 to the number of pending start items N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step S30211, add 1 to the value stored in the total number of pending items storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total number of pending items CRN). The total number of pending start items CRN indicates the sum of the first number of pending start items RaN and the second number of pending start items RbN. Then proceed to step S30212.

In step S30212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 updated in step S30103 (Figure 89), and the variable type counter CS updated in normal processing (Figure 95) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding holding area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the number of reserved items to which 1 was added in step S30210. Specifically, if the first start reserved number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in step S30103 (Figure 89) are stored in the first free memory area of the first holding area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step S30210. Additionally, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the target for processing, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S30103 (FIG. 89) are stored in the first free memory area in the second holding area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step S30210. After executing step S30212, proceed to step S30213.

In step S30213, a first-time determination process is executed. The first-time determination process is a process that determines the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, the variable time for the number of games, etc., based on the information (reserved information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the first-time determination process will be described later. After executing step S30213, proceed to step S30214.

In step S30214, a process for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the result of the first determination process (first determination information) executed based on the information (pending information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS is set as a pending command.

The hold command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to confirm that a win has occurred in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) made by the first determination process based on the hold information acquired based on that win, before the hold information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of the normal process (Figure 95: step S30703), which will be described later.

In addition, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a win at the first start gate 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. On the other hand, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a win at the second start gate 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items.

After executing step S30214, the main MPU 62 terminates the winning process for this starting slot.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the winning process for the starting slot (FIG. 90: S30213).

Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the advance determination process. As described above, the advance determination process is a process that, based on the reserved information, determines whether the jackpot lottery will be won, the type of jackpot, whether a reach has occurred, and the variable time for the number of play rounds, etc., before the reserved information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60.

In step S30301, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process determines whether the jackpot lottery was successful, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S30301, the process proceeds to step S30302.

In step S30302, a variable time information acquisition process is executed. This process determines the variable time for each game. Details of the variable time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S30302, the destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/Reach Information Acquisition Processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the advance determination process (FIG. 91: S30301).

Figure 92 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S30401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the memory area due to a win at the start port in the start port winning process (Figure 90) is read. Then, proceed to step S30402, where the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this winning will be executed as a play round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed due to a win prior to this winning is read from the corresponding memory area, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed prior to the jackpot lottery for this winning is determined, thereby determining the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this winning will be executed as a play round.

In step S30402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is low probability mode at the time the jackpot lottery for this winning event is executed as a game round (S30402: YES), the process proceeds to step S30403, where the win/loss table for low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referenced. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, where, based on the reference to the win/loss table for low probability mode, it is determined whether the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30402 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time the jackpot lottery for this winning event is executed as a game round (S30402: NO), the process proceeds to step S30404, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step S30405, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step S30405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S30405: YES), proceed to step S30406, where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the memory area due to a win in the current start port is read. Then, proceed to step S30407, where the allocation table stored in the allocation table memory area 63b is referenced. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 that is the subject of this allocation was obtained based on a win in the first start port 33, the allocation table for the first start port is referenced; if it was obtained based on a win in the second start port 34, the allocation table for the second start port is referenced. After executing step S30407, proceed to step S30408.

In step S30408, the allocation table is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to a Type 1 jackpot. If it is determined in step S30408 that it corresponds to a Type 1 jackpot (S30408: YES), the process proceeds to step S30409, where Type 1 jackpot information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64f. The first determination process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30408 that it does not correspond to a Type 1 jackpot (S30408: NO), the process proceeds to step S30410, where Type 2 jackpot information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. The first determination process then ends.

If it is determined in step S30405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (S30405: NO), the process proceeds to step S30411, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the current winning entry into the starting slot is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S30412, where the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table memory area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S30413, where, based on the reference to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step S30413 that a reach has occurred (S30413: YES), the process proceeds to step S30414, where reach occurrence information is stored in the first position determination process result storage area 64h. The first position determination process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30413 that a reach has not occurred (S30413: NO), the first position determination process ends.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 91: S30302).

Figure 93 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step S30501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the memory area due to a win at the start gate in the winning process for the start gate (Figure 90) is acquired. Then, proceed to step S30502.

In step S30502, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if a jackpot has been won (S30502: YES), the process proceeds to step S30503.

In step S30503, the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. After executing step S30503, proceed to step S30507.

In step S30507, the acquired variable time information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64. Then, this variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30502 that the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S30502: NO), the process proceeds to step S30504, where it is determined whether a reach will occur. If it is determined in step S30504 that a reach will occur (S30504: YES), the process proceeds to step S30505.

In step S30505, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S30507, where the obtained variable time information is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64, and the variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30504 that a reach will not occur in the current game (step S30504: NO), the process proceeds to step S30506, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S30507, where the obtained fluctuation time information is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64h in RAM 64, and the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the variable time. In other words, even if the value of the variable type counter CS is the same, the data in the variable time table referenced when determining the variable time for the relevant play round differs depending on the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN. When the variable time acquisition process is executed as part of the first determination process, i.e., when the variable time for the pending play round that is the subject of the first determination process is acquired, the number of reserved balls at the time the reserved play round that is the subject of the first determination process is executed is unknown. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable time is acquired assuming that the first start pending number RaN = 0 (and the second start pending number RbN = 0). Therefore, the variable time acquired by this variable time acquisition process may differ from the actual variable time when the reserved play round that is the subject of the first determination process is executed as a play round. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time acquired in the fluctuation time acquisition process, which is executed as part of the preliminary determination process, is also referred to as the "provisional fluctuation time Th."

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is configured to be set so that the larger the values of the first start-up pending number RaN and the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, other configurations are also possible, such as the larger the value of the total hold number CRN, so that the fluctuation time is set shorter. Furthermore, without being limited to this, for example, the configuration may be independent of the total hold number CRN, and the smaller the total hold number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0," the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the shorter the fluctuation time. When the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss occurs may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a first-class jackpot, a variable time table for a second-class jackpot, a variable time table for a miss occur, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set separately.

<Winning process for skip>
Next, the skip prize winning process will be described. The skip prize winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 89: step S30105).

Figure 94 is a flowchart showing the winning process for pass-through. In step S30601, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S30601 that the gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 (S30601: YES), the process proceeds to step S30602, where it is determined whether the number of reserved feature items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved feature items SN is a value indicating the number of winning feature items in the through gate 35 that are reserved for the purpose of holding the electric feature release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value for the number of reserved feature items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30601 that the gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S30601: NO), the winning process for pass-through is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30602 that the number of reserved reel items SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S30602: YES), proceed to step S30603, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reel items SN. Then, proceed to step S30604.

In step S30604, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S30103 (Figure 89) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64c of RAM 64. Then, the winning process for the through game is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30602 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (S30602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is the upper limit, the winning process for the pass is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 95 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S30701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings for each control device are performed upon power-on, and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 is determined. Then, processing proceeds to step S30702.

In step S30702, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command that causes each sub-control device to start a demo video when power is turned on. Then, proceed to step S30703.

In step S30703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S30702, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step S30703, proceed to step S30704.

In step S30704, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S30705.

In step S30705, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S30706. In step S30706, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the jackpot lottery, setting the variable pattern display by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S30706, the process proceeds to step S30707.

In step S30707, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S30708.

In step S30708, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric device 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric device 34a. Details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S30709.

In step S30709, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (more precisely, the start of the command output processing in step S30703). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step S30709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (S30709: NO), in steps S30710 and S30711, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step S30710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In step S30711, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30709 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (S30709: YES), the process returns to step S30703, and the processes from step S30703 to step S30708 are executed.

Note that the execution time for each process from step S30703 to step S30708 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 95: S30706).

Figure 96 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step S30801, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening and closing execution mode flag is set ON when the opening and closing execution mode starts and is set OFF when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S30801 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S30801: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S30802 onwards. In other words, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, no game round will be started regardless of whether a win has occurred in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S30801: NO), the process proceeds to step S30802.

In step S30802, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is currently displaying a variable value. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is currently displaying a variable value. This determination is made by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when variable display is to begin for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step S30802 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying a variable value (S30802: NO), the process proceeds to steps S30803 to S30806 to start the game. In step S30803, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0." If the total reserved number CRN is "0," this means that the start reserved number for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is "0." Therefore, if it is determined in step S30803 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S30803: YES), the game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30803 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S30803: NO), the process proceeds to step S30804.

In step S30804, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the fluctuation starts, and then the process proceeds to step S30805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S30805, a change start process is executed to start the change display on the main display unit 45 and the change display on the pattern display device 41. Details of the change start process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S30806.

In step S30806, the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. The play count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of plays executed in high frequency support mode. After step S30806 is executed, this play count control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30802 that the main display unit 45 is displaying a variable value (S30802: YES), processing for progressing through the game rounds is executed in steps S30807 to S30811.

In step S30807, it is determined whether the variable time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variable time is the time from when the symbol sequence begins to change until all symbol sequences stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S30807, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of RAM 64 has become "0." The value of this variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (Figure 99) described below. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated.

If it is determined in step S30807 that the change time has not elapsed (S30807: NO), the process proceeds to step S30808, where the change display process is executed. The change display process is a process that changes the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After step S30808 is executed, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30807 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S30807: YES), the process proceeds to step S30809, where fluctuation termination processing is executed. The fluctuation termination processing controls the display of the symbol display section so that the type of symbol to be displayed in the symbol display section determined in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 98), described below, is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. After executing step S30809, the process proceeds to step S30810.

In step S30810, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags (16R Type 1 jackpot flag, 8R Type 1 jackpot flag, 8R Type 2 jackpot flag) are ON. If any of the jackpot flags is ON in step S30810 (S30810: YES), the process proceeds to step S30811.

In step S30811, the open/close execution flag is turned ON. Then, this game count control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S30810, if none of the jackpot flags are ON (S30810: NO), this game count control process is terminated without executing step S30811.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game play control process (FIG. 96: S30804).

Figure 97 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S30901, it is determined whether the holding area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, if the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 78) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 78), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra, the holding area to be processed is determined to be the second holding area Rb. In other words, by executing the processing of step S30901, the pending information can be processed in the order in which it was stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

If it is determined in step S30901 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step S30901: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area is performed in steps S30902 to S30907. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30901 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S30901: NO), data setting processing for the second holding area is performed in steps S30908 to S30913.

In step S30902, the first start pending number RaN in the first pending area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S30903, where the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S30904. In step S30904, the data stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S30905.

In step S30905, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S30905, proceed to step S30906.

In step S30906, if the second symbol display section flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF; if it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information used to identify whether the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b is the target for the start of this variable display. Then, proceed to step S30907.

In step S30907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. The data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S30907 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S30703 of normal processing (Figure 95). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

If it is determined in step S30901 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S30901: NO), proceed to step S30908.

In step S30908, the second start pending number RbN in the second holding area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step S30909. In step S30909, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step S30910, where the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step S30911.

In step S30911, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S30911, proceed to step S30912.

In step S30912, if the second symbol display section flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON; if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step S30913.

In step S30913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, i.e., corresponds to the second starting port 34, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. This data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S30913 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S30703 of normal processing (Figure 95). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 96: S30805).

Figure 98 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S31001, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag that the MPU 62 uses to determine whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this embodiment, it is turned ON when the open/close execution mode related to the winning of a first-class jackpot ends, and is then turned OFF if a second-class jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S31001 that it is the high probability mode (S31001: YES), the process proceeds to step S31002.

In step S31002, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, if the fluctuation start process is triggered by a game ball entering the first start port 33, a determination is made as to whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the first start port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 79(b). Furthermore, if the fluctuation start process is triggered by a game ball entering the second start port 34, a determination is made as to whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the second start port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 80(b). Then, the process proceeds to step S31004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S31001: NO), the process proceeds to step S31003.

In step S31003, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, if the fluctuation start process is triggered by a gaming ball entering the first start port 33, a determination is made as to whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the first start port (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 79(a). Furthermore, if the fluctuation start process is triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start port 34, a determination is made as to whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the second start port (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 80(a). Then, proceed to step S31004.

In step S31004, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (jackpot lottery) in step S31002 or step S31003 is a jackpot win. If the result of the hit/miss determination in step S31004 is a jackpot win (S31004: YES), in steps S31005 to S31012, processing is executed to set the game result and the stop result in the case of a jackpot win.

In step S31005, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S31005 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S31005: NO), the process proceeds to step S31006, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting slot (see Figure 81 (a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range for an 8R type 1 jackpot or the numerical range for an 8R type 2 jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31005 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S31005: YES), the process proceeds to step S31007, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting slot (see Figure 81 (b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range for a 16R type 1 jackpot or the numerical range for an 8R type 2 jackpot. After executing the processing of step S31006 or step S31007, the process proceeds to step S31008.

In step S31008, it is determined whether the type of jackpot allocated in step S31006 or step S31007 is a Type 1 jackpot. If it is determined in step S31008 that the game result is a Type 1 jackpot (S31008: YES), the process proceeds to step S31009.

In step S31009, the stop result setting process for a Type 1 jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a Type 1 jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a Type 1 jackpot is won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a Type 1 jackpot stored in the stop result table memory area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S31006 or step S31007 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address memory area of RAM 64. After executing step S31009, the process proceeds to step S31010.

In step S31010, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S31006 or step S31007 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R type 1 jackpot, the 16R type 1 jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R type 1 jackpot, the 8R type 1 jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S31016.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31008 that the type of jackpot allocated in step S31006 or step S31007 is not a Type 1 jackpot (S31008: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot allocated is a Type 2 jackpot, proceed to step S31011.

In step S31011, the stop result setting process for a Type 2 jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a Type 2 jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a Type 2 jackpot will be won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a Type 2 jackpot stored in the stop result table memory area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S31006 or step S31007 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address memory area of RAM 64. After executing step S31011, proceed to step S31012.

In step S31012, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S31006 or step S31007 is turned ON. In this embodiment, the only type of second-class jackpot is the 8R second-class jackpot, so the 8R second-class jackpot flag is turned ON. Note that if multiple types of second-class jackpots are set, the corresponding second-class jackpot flags are turned ON. Then, proceed to step S31016.

In step S31004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S31002 or step S31003 is not a jackpot win (S31004: NO), proceed to step S31013 to determine whether a reach will occur in that game round. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c.

If it is determined in step S31013 that a reach will occur in that game round (S31013: YES), proceed to step S31014.

In step S31014, a reach stop result setting process is executed. This process sets which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game turn, which will result in a reach stop result. Specifically, by referencing the reach stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and this address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S31014, the process proceeds to step S31016.

If it is determined in step S31013 that a reach does not occur in that game round (S31013: NO), proceed to step S31015.

In step S31015, the process for setting the stop result for a loss is executed. The process for setting the stop result for a loss is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which will result in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and this address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S31015, the process proceeds to step S31016.

In step S31016, a process for setting the variable time is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on whether or not a jackpot has occurred and whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S31016, the process proceeds to step S31017.

In step S31017, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S31017 that the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON (S31017: NO), the process proceeds to step S31018, where a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information obtained based on a win in the first starting port 33, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S31016.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31017 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S31017: YES), the process proceeds to step S31019, where a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information acquired based on a win in the second starting port 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S31016. After executing step S31018 or step S31019, the process proceeds to step S31020.

In step S31020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the results of the allocation determination, and whether or not a reach has occurred. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on a 16R type 1 jackpot, information on an 8R type 1 jackpot, information on an 8R type 2 jackpot, or information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the result of a miss.

The variation commands and type commands set in steps S31018 to S31020 are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S30703 of the normal processing (Figure 95). The audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation commands and type commands, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step S31020, proceed to step S31021.

In step S31021, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, begins displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display unit 37a and a changing display is initiated; if the second pattern display unit flag is ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display unit 37b and a changing display is initiated. After step S31021 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 98: S31016).

Figure 99 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable time. In step S31101, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, proceed to step S31102.

In step S31102, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for this game has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags (16R Type 1 jackpot flag, 8R Type 1 jackpot flag, 8R Type 2 jackpot flag) in RAM 64 are ON, and if any of the flags are ON (S31102: YES), the process proceeds to step S31103.

In step S31103, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S31107, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S31102 that the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won (S31102: NO), the process proceeds to step S31104, where it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current play. Since this process (S31104) is executed if the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won in step S31102, in step S31104 it is determined whether a reach will occur among the play times in which the jackpot lottery has not been won. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach will occur (S31104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S31105. When determining whether a reach will occur using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 is referenced.

In step S31105, the variable time table for reaching a winning position stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for reaching a winning position is constant. Then, the process proceeds to step S31107, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S31104 that a reach will not occur in the current game (S31104: NO), the process proceeds to step S31106, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S31107, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process ends.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data in the fluctuation time table referenced will differ depending on the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN when determining the fluctuation time for that game round.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is configured to be set so that the larger the values of the first start-up pending number RaN and the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, other configurations are also possible, such as the larger the value of the total hold number CRN, so that the fluctuation time is set to be shorter. Furthermore, without being limited to this, for example, the configuration may be independent of the total hold number CRN, and the smaller the total hold number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0," the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the shorter the fluctuation time. When the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss occurs may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a first-class jackpot, a variable time table for a second-class jackpot, a variable time table for a miss occur, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set separately.

<Game status transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 95: S30707).

Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S31201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the large prize opening opening and closing processing period in the opening and closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening and closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S31201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S31201: NO), proceed to step S31202 to determine whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the opening period ends during the opening/closing execution mode and the large prize opening opening/closing processing period begins, during which the opening and closing operations of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 are executed, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing operations of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b end.

If it is determined in step S31202 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S31202: NO), proceed to step S31203, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S31203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S31203: NO), proceed to step S31204, where it is determined whether the timing has come when the variable display of the patterns in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S31204 that the variable display has not come to an end (S31204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31204 that the variable display has ended (S31204: YES), proceed to step S31205 and determine whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S31205 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S31205: YES), the process proceeds to step S31205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31205 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (S31205: NO), the game state transition process ends.

In step S31206, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step S31207.

In step S31207, an unlocking scenario corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. Specifically, if it is a 16R Type 1 jackpot, an unlocking scenario for a 16R Type 1 jackpot is set; if it is an 8R Type 1 jackpot, an unlocking scenario for an 8R Type 1 jackpot is set; and if it is an 8R Type 2 jackpot, an unlocking scenario for an 8R Type 2 jackpot is set. After executing step S31207, proceed to step S31208.

In step S31208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time length is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. After executing step S31208, proceed to step S31209.

In step S31209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S30703 of the normal processing (Figure 95). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the period of the large prize opening/closing processing, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S31209, the process proceeds to step S31210, where the opening period flag is set ON. After that, the game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S31203 that the opening period flag is ON (S31203: YES), proceed to step S31211.

In step S31211, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0." If it is determined in step S31211 that the opening period has ended (S31211: YES), the process proceeds to step S31212, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S31213.

In step S31213, the process for starting the round display to notify the type of current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in ROM 63, and the details of the number of rounds are confirmed from the identified stop result data. The confirmed details of the number of rounds are then output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the above output is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step S31213, the process proceeds to step S31214.

In step S31214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S31202 that the open/close execution mode flag is ON (S31202: YES), the process proceeds to step S31215, where the special prize opening/closing process is executed. The special prize opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S31215, the process proceeds to step S31216.

In step S31216, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the large prize opening/closing process has ended (S31216: YES), the process proceeds to step S31217. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31216 that the large prize opening/closing process has not ended (S31216: NO), the large prize opening/closing process ends immediately.

In step S31217, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then processing proceeds to step S31218.

In step S31218, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is terminated so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S31218, the process proceeds to step S31219.

In step S31219, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). In this embodiment, the same fixed ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. After executing step S31219, proceed to step S31220.

In step S31220, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S30603 of the normal processing (Figure 95). Upon receiving the ending command, the audio and light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode. After executing step S31220, proceed to step S31221.

In step S31221, the ending period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S31201 that the ending period flag is ON (S31201: YES), proceed to step S31222.

In step S31222, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S31219), is "0." If it is determined in step S31222 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (S31222: YES), proceed to step S31223.

In step S31223, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S31224, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period has ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S31224, the process proceeds to step S31225, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned OFF. Then, this game state transition process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31222 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (S31222: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 100: S31215).

Figure 101 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. In step S31301, it is determined whether the opening/closing door is open. In other words, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is open. If it is determined in step S31301 that the opening/closing door is not open (S31301: NO), the process proceeds to step S31302.

In step S31302, it is determined whether the opening conditions of the set opening scenario have been met. Specifically, the number of rounds to be executed is counted, and a timer counter is used to count whether the time during which the doors have been kept closed in the currently executed round has elapsed and the timing for opening has arrived, thereby determining whether the conditions for transitioning each door (first door 57b, second door 58b) to an open state have been met. If it is determined in step S31302 that the opening conditions of the opening scenario have not been met (S31302: NO), the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31302 that the unlocking conditions for the unlocking scenario are met (S31302: YES), proceed to step S31303.

In step S31303, the opening doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) for which it is determined that the opening conditions have been met are opened. After step S31303 is executed, the main prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31301 that the door is open (S31301: YES), the process proceeds to step S31304. In step S31304, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has entered the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. If it is determined in step S31304 that a gaming ball has entered the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a (S31304: YES), the process proceeds to step S31305.

In step S31305, the V prize flag is turned ON. The V prize flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V prize area FV, and is used to determine whether the lottery mode for the regular game that is executed after the end of the round of play will be set to high probability mode or low probability mode. After executing step S31305, proceed to step S31306.

In step S31306, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 95: step S30703). Upon receiving the V winning command, the audio and light emitting device executes settings to execute a V winning effect. The V winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that a gaming ball has entered the V winning area FV. After executing step S31306, the process proceeds to step S31307. On the other hand, if in step S31304 a gaming ball has not been detected entering the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a (S31304: NO), the process proceeds to step S31307 without executing steps S31305 and S31306.

In step S31307, it is determined whether the closing condition has been met. As described above, the closing condition is met when either "seven game balls have landed in the special prize opening corresponding to the open door" or "10 seconds have passed in the open state." If it is determined in step S31307 that the closing condition has not been met (S31307: NO), the special prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31307 that the closing condition has been met (S31307: YES), the process proceeds to step S31308.

In step S31308, the opening and closing door is transitioned to a closed state. After that, the main prize opening and closing process is terminated.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 100: S31226).

Figure 102 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S31401, it is determined whether the V winning flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S31401 that the V prize flag is ON (S31401: YES), the process proceeds to step S31402, where the flag erasure process is executed. Specifically, if the 16R Type 1 jackpot flag, 8R Type 1 jackpot flag, 8R Type 2 jackpot flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, they are maintained in that state. In addition, the V prize flag is turned OFF. After executing step S31402, the process proceeds to step S31403.

In step S31403, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S31404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state transitions to one in which the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Then the process proceeds to step S31405.

In step S31405, the number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of plays counter PNC indicates the number of plays when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of plays. Then, proceed to step S31406.

In step S31406, a high probability mode command, which is a command containing information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/lose lottery mode is a high probability mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step S31410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31401 that the V prize flag is not ON (S31401: NO), proceed to step S31407 and execute flag erasure processing. Specifically, if the 16R Type 1 jackpot flag, 8R Type 1 jackpot flag, 8 Type 2 jackpot flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, they are maintained in that state. Then proceed to step S31408.

In step S31408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S31409, where the number of games played counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. Then the process proceeds to step S31410.

In step S31410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command containing information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electrical support treatment>
Next, the electric support processing will be described. The electric support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 95: S30708).

Figure 103 is a flowchart showing the electric role support processing. In step S31501, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric role 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric role 34a is returned to the closed state. In step S31501, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (S31501: NO), the process proceeds to step S31502.

In step S31502, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is a flag that is turned ON if an open state win is achieved in the electric feature opening lottery, which determines whether or not the electric feature 34a will be opened, and is turned OFF if the support in progress flag is ON. If it is determined in step S31502 that the support win flag is not ON (S31502: NO), the program proceeds to step S31503.

In step S31503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In step S31503, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31503: NO), the main power support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31503: YES), the processing proceeds to step S31504.

In step S31504, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step S31504 that it is time to end the variable display (S31504: YES), the process proceeds to step S31505, where a loss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the loss display, the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the loss display displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31504 that it is not time to end the variable display (S31504: NO), the process proceeds to step S31506.

In step S31506, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S31506 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (S31506: NO), the main electric reel support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31506 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (S31506: YES), the processing proceeds to step S31507.

In step S31507, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the program proceeds to step S31508, where it determines whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step S31507 (S31507: NO) and the game is in the high-frequency support mode in step S31508 (S31508: YES), the program proceeds to step S31509, where a lottery is held to unlock the electric feature. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature unlock counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 461, the game is won (see Figure 82 (b)). Simultaneously with the electric feature unlock lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 seconds). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated. The program then proceeds to step S31510.

In step S31510, it is determined whether the result of the electric reel opening lottery in step S31509 is a support win. If it is determined in step S31510 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is a support win (S31510: YES), the process proceeds to step S31511, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric reel 34a has been opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S31512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31510 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is not a support win (S31510: NO), the process proceeds to step S31512 without executing the processing of step S31511.

In step S31512, it is determined whether the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S31512 that the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode (S31512: YES), proceed to step S31513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31512 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S31512: NO), the main role support processing is terminated.

In step S31513, it is determined whether the play count counter area is "0". The play count counter is decremented by 1 each time a play is completed when the low probability mode is in high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S31513 that the play count counter area is not "0" (S31513: NO), the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31513 that the play count counter area is "0", the processing proceeds to step S31514, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing proceeds to step S31515.

In step S31515, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command containing information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the electric support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S31515 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the external output process of normal processing (Figure 95: step S30703). Based on receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S31507 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (S31507: YES), or if it is determined in step S31518 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S31508: NO), the process proceeds to step S31516, where a lottery is held to open an electric reel. Specifically, the value stored in the electric reel reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric reel opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric reel opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric reel opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e., 29.5 seconds). Then, the process proceeds to step S31517.

In step S31517, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step S31516 is a support win. If it is determined in step S31517 that there is no support win (S31517: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31517 that there is a support win (S31517: YES), the process proceeds to step S31518, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S31502 that the support win flag is ON (S31502: YES), the process proceeds to step S31519, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step S31519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31519: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, and the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31519: YES), the process proceeds to step S31520.

In step S31520, a win display is set. This ends the variable display of the image on the normal unit 38 with the win display still displayed. Then, proceed to step S31521, turn the support in progress flag ON, and turn the support win flag OFF. Then, end the main role support processing.

If it is determined in step S31501 that the support flag is ON (S31501: YES), the process proceeds to step S31522, where an electric role opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. Then, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electrical switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 103: S31522).

Figure 104 is a flowchart showing the electric device opening/closing control process. In step S31601, it is determined whether the electric device 34a is open. Whether the electric device 34a is open is determined by whether the electric device drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the electric device 34a is open (S31601: YES), the process proceeds to step S31602.

In step S31602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role device 34a. If it is determined in step S31602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31602: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role device 34a has not ended, the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31602: YES), the process proceeds to step S31603, where a closing process is performed to control the electric device 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being open, is "0," the electric device 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is then used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250." After executing step S31603, the process proceeds to step S31604.

In step S31604, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S31605, where it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S31605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S31605: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S31605: YES), the process proceeds to step S31606, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. The main electric role opening/closing control process is then terminated.

If it is determined in step S31601 that the electric role 34a is not open (S31601: NO), proceed to step S31607, where it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the closed state of the electric role 34a. If it is determined in step S31607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31607: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31607: YES), proceed to step S31608, where an opening process is executed to control the electric role 34a to the open state. Then, proceed to step S31609.

In step S31609, it is determined whether the device is in opening/closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the device is not in opening/closing execution mode (S31609: NO), the process proceeds to step S31610, where it is determined whether the device is in high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S31610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S31610: YES), the process proceeds to step S31611, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). The main electric switch opening/closing control process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31609 that the switch is in the open/close execution mode (S31609: YES), or if it is determined in step S31610 that the switch is not in the high frequency support mode (S31610: NO), the process proceeds to step S31612, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). Then, the electric switch open/close control process ends.
C5. Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 105 is a block diagram that mainly shows the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components, such as the power supply device 85, have been omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on the audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is a device that incorporates a ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, part of the area of RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92; they may each be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the performance operation button 24, speaker 46, various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102; they may each be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various received commands, thereby controlling the VDP 105 (specifically, generating internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 104 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 102.

VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP 105 adjusts the timing of MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM 107 from character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and other data. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106, with each character ROM 106 responsible for storing image data and other data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

Video RAM 107 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively; the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 will also be referred to as the audio/light MPU 92, audio/light ROM 93, and audio/light RAM 94, respectively; and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will also be referred to as the display MPU 102.

C6. Various processes executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 2 msec). Below, we will explain the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt process.

In step S31701, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio-visual RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio-visual RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. Commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step S31701, the process proceeds to step S31702.

In step S31702, command response processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the received command. Details of command response processing will be described later. After executing step S31702, proceed to step S31703.

In step S31703, light emission control processing is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control processing, light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the command response processing in step S31702 above. After executing step S31703, proceed to step S31704.

In step S31704, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command response process in step S31702 above. After step S31704 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, the command response process will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 106: S31702).

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the command response processing. As described above, in the command response processing, processing is performed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step performed in the command response processing is described below.

In step S31801, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main CPU 62. The opening command is a command sent from the main CPU 62 to the sound/light MPU 92 at the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (Fig. 100: S31209), which is executed in response to a jackpot win in the jackpot lottery. If it is determined in step S31801 that an opening command has been received from the main CPU 62 (S31801: YES), the process proceeds to step S31802.

In step S31802, settings are made to execute an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect. Specifically, the lighting data and audio output data are set for the various lamps used for the opening effect and right-hit notification. The opening effect and right-hit notification effect are effects executed during the opening period of the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening effect executes an effect to notify the player that the open/close execution mode has begun. In addition, the right-hit notification effect executes an effect encouraging the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 and an effect encouraging the player to place the game ball in the V entry area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. After executing step S31802, the program proceeds to step S31703.

In step S31703, an opening effect command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the opening effect command, the display-side MPU 102 sets image data for the opening effect and the right-hit notification, and causes the pattern display device 41 to display an image based on that image data. After executing step S31803, the process proceeds to step S31804.

In step S31804, it is determined whether a V winning command has been received from the main CPU 62. The V winning command is a command sent from the main CPU 62 to the sound/light MPU 92 when a gaming ball enters the V winning area FV during the execution of the large prize opening opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S31804, proceed to step S31805.

In step S31805, settings are made to execute the V winning effect. Specifically, the lighting data for the various lamps used in the V winning effect and the audio output data are set. This effect notifies the player that the game ball has entered the V winning area FV. After executing step S31805, the program proceeds to step S31806.

In step S31806, a V winning effect command is sent to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the V winning effect command, it sets image data for the V winning effect and causes the pattern display device 41 to display an image based on that image data. After executing step S31806, proceed to step S31807.

In step S31807, processing is performed to respond to other commands received from the main CPU 62. After step S31807 is executed, this command response processing is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include main processing, which is executed repeatedly from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90, and V interrupt processing, which is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected simultaneously, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step S31901, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written to the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Other settings required for initialization are also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S31902.

In step S31902, interrupt permission is set. Once interrupt permission is set, the main processing executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, once interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S32001, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described below, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 110 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and then instructs the VDP 105 to draw and display that image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated by the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed. As a result, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process for the image is completed, which prevents the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information currently being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are explained below.

In step S32101, command response processing is executed. In command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing (Figure 109) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to that command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command has been stored, control of image drawing and display is initiated so that the performance mode specified by that performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a performance operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, and if it is determined that it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, it begins controlling the drawing and display of images so that the performance mode corresponding to the pressing of the performance operation button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, it analyzes the contents of the next command without executing any processing.

The command response process (S32101) analyzes all commands currently stored in the command memory area and executes processing corresponding to all analyzed commands. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed every 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command memory area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of a performance is set by the audio and light control device 90 and the performance begins, it is highly likely that various commands for specifying the content of that performance will be stored in the command memory area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the type of performance, such as the preview performance or LCD pattern set by the audio and light control device 90, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that type is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step S32102, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which was set by the command response process (S32101) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S32103.

In step S32103, task processing is executed. In task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as determined by the display setting process (S32102), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up that image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S32104.

In step S32104, drawing processing is executed. In drawing processing, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters required to draw each character, as determined by task processing (S32103), are sent to VDP 105. VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and sends the image data to pattern display device 41 along with a drive signal to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing. Then, proceed to step S32105, execute other processing, and then terminate V interrupt processing.

As explained above, the second large prize opening 58a is configured so that the V prize area FV and the non-V prize area FNV are adjacent to each other, and the second large prize opening 58a is opened and closed by the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, the entry of game balls into the two prize areas, the V prize area FV and the non-V prize area FNV, can be controlled by controlling the opening and closing of a single opening/closing door (the second large prize opening 58a).

In the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the first type of jackpot, by setting the value of the second opening and closing door closing period CLT so that the non-V winning area passing time NVT is equal to or less than the second opening and closing door closing period CLT, it is possible to cause game balls to enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. Furthermore, by setting the value of the second opening and closing door closing period CLT so that the second opening and closing door closing period CLT is less than the full area passing time ALT, it is possible to cause almost all game balls circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH to enter the second large winning opening 58a from the start of the second round onwards.

Furthermore, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, by setting the value of the second opening and closing door closing period CLT so that the second opening and closing door closing period CLT is less than the non-V winning area passing time NVT, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a, even if the second opening and closing door 58b is opened and closed multiple times.

In this way, by controlling the value of the second door closing period CLT, it is possible to control the entry of game balls into the V winning area FV and non-V winning area FNV.

Compared to general gaming machines, in general gaming machines, in order to execute control to cause gaming balls to enter the V prize area, a guide lever is installed to guide gaming balls to the V prize area, and the entry of gaming balls into the V prize area is controlled by controlling the operation of this guide lever. Therefore, the operation of the guide lever must be controlled separately from the operation control of the opening and closing door of the large prize opening, making the control more complex.

On the other hand, the gaming machine in this embodiment can control the entry of gaming balls into the V winning area FV by controlling the operation of the second opening/closing door 58b, thereby simplifying control. As a result, the control program can be simplified, and the memory capacity required to record the program can also be reduced.

In addition, in the case of a typical gaming machine equipped with a large prize opening on the upstream side of the flow path and a large prize opening (V prize opening) with a V prize area FV on the downstream side, when executing an open/close execution mode that makes it difficult for gaming balls to enter the V prize area FV, it is necessary to control the opening/closing door of the V prize opening so that it rarely (or never) transitions to an open state, or to set the open state time to an extremely short period of time, in order to prevent gaming balls from entering the V prize area FV. In addition, it is necessary to provide a guide valve inside the downstream V prize opening to control whether or not gaming balls are allowed to enter the V prize area FV. In the case of such gaming machines, the operational control for transitioning the opening/closing door between the open and closed states is complex, and the operational control of the above-mentioned guide valve must be performed separately from this operational control, further complicating the control, and it is also necessary to secure memory space to store the program for executing this control. Furthermore, if the V prize opening door rarely (or never) transitions to the open state, or if the open state lasts for an extremely short time, the player's sense of expectation in the opening execution mode will decrease.

On the other hand, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a large prize opening (first large prize opening 57a) on the upstream side of the flow path and a large prize opening (second large prize opening 58a) with a V prize zone FV on the downstream side, similar in configuration to the general gaming machine described above. However, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a non-V prize zone FNV upstream of the V prize zone FV, so that control of whether the gaming ball will land in the non-V prize zone FNV or the V prize zone FV can be achieved by controlling the operation of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, compared to the general gaming machine described above, control can be simplified and the memory space required to store the program for executing the operation control of the guide valve can be reduced. Furthermore, even in an opening/closing execution mode set to make it difficult for gaming balls to land in the V prize zone FV, the second opening/closing door 58b can be left open for a certain period of time, creating a sense of anticipation and tension for the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with protrusions 59 as an adjustment means for adjusting the time required for a gaming ball to pass over the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, the time required for a gaming ball to pass over the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b can be adjusted by adjusting the number of protrusions 59 arranged on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. As described above, in this embodiment, in order to control the entry of a gaming ball into the V winning area FV, in the opening/closing execution mode for a first-type jackpot, control must be performed to satisfy the conditions of non-V winning area passing time NVT≦second opening/closing door closing period CLT and second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full surface passing time ALT. However, the non-V winning area passing time NVT and full surface passing time ALT can be adjusted by adjusting the number of protrusions 59 arranged on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, in order to satisfy this condition, in addition to adjusting the value of the second door closing period CLT, it is also possible to adjust the number of protrusions 59 placed on the top surface of the second door 58b, thereby widening the setting range for the value of the second door closing period CLT.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first large prize opening 57a is provided upstream of the second large prize opening 58a. By opening the first opening/closing door 57b during the first round in the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to ensure that no gaming balls are present in the V prize winning area FV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b when the second opening/closing door 58b is first opened. As a result, it is possible to prevent gaming balls from entering the V prize winning area FV even when the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to a second-type jackpot.

C7. Modifications The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be embodied in various forms without departing from the spirit of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible.

C7-1. Variation 1:
111 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 1 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111(a), the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 1 includes a plate-like member MD1 above the second large winning opening 58a. Furthermore, the variable winning mechanism KH includes a magnetic member MD2 on the circulation surface through which game balls circulate, upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b.

The functions of the plate-shaped member MD1 and the magnetic member MD2 are explained using Figure 111(b). The plate-shaped member MD1 has the function of preventing a gaming ball traveling along the flow path from floating out of the flow path upstream of the second large prize opening 58a due to some factor, even if the second opening/closing door 58b is open and the gaming ball is capable of entering the non-V prize area FNV of the second large prize opening 58a when the gaming ball reaches the upstream side of the second large prize opening 58a, and passing through without entering the non-V prize area FNV. As shown in Figure 111(b), even if the gaming ball floats out of the flow path upstream of the second large prize opening 58a, the gaming ball can be caused to collide with the plate-shaped member MD1, changing its course toward the non-V prize area FNV and allowing the gaming ball to enter the non-V prize area FNV. This prevents the game ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a without entering the non-V winning area FNV, even though it is capable of entering the non-V winning area FNV.

The plate-shaped member MD1 may be made of rubber, resin, or a cushioning material. Alternatively, multiple nails may be placed in the position of the plate-shaped member MD1. The shape of the plate-shaped member MD1 may be wavy, concave, or uneven on the surface that collides with the game ball.

Like the plate-shaped member MD1, the magnetic member MD2 has the function of preventing a gaming ball traveling along the flow path from floating up from the flow path upstream of the second large winning opening 58a due to some factor, even though the second opening/closing door 58b is open and the gaming ball is eligible to enter the non-V winning zone FNV of the second large winning opening 58a when the gaming ball reaches the upstream side of the second large winning opening 58a, causing the gaming ball to pass through without entering the non-V winning zone FNV. The magnetic member MD2 is made of a magnetic material, and its magnetic force attracts the gaming ball toward the magnetic member MD2. This prevents the gaming ball from floating up from the flow path surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gaming ball from passing through without entering the non-V winning zone FNV of the second large winning opening 58a, even though the gaming ball is eligible to enter the non-V winning zone FNV of the second large winning opening 58a.

Instead of the magnetic member MD2, a buffer member made of resin, rubber, or other material may be placed in the position of the magnetic member MD2 to buffer the impact between the gaming ball and the flow path. When a buffer member is placed, the force that causes the gaming ball to float up from the flow path is reduced by buffering the impact between the gaming ball and the flow path, and the gaming ball can be prevented from floating up from the flow path.

C7-2. Variation 2:
FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 2 of the third embodiment. In Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 112(a), the first large winning opening 57a and the second large winning opening 58a are provided on the side of the flow path through which game balls flow. The first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are provided on the flow path surface of the flow path through which game balls flow. The first opening/closing door 57b is provided with a first ball entry prevention member 57d for preventing game balls from entering the first large winning opening 57a when the first opening/closing door 57b is closed. The second opening/closing door 58b is provided with a second ball entry prevention member 58d for preventing game balls from entering the second large winning opening 58a when the second opening/closing door 58b is closed.

The first ball entry prevention member 57d has the function of narrowing the opening of the first large prize opening 57a to a size that prevents game balls from entering the opening when the first opening/closing door 57b is closed. The second ball entry prevention member 58d has the function of narrowing the opening of the second large prize opening 58a to a size that prevents game balls from entering the opening when the second opening/closing door 58b is closed.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), the first opening/closing door 57b transitions from a closed state to an open state by tilting in the direction of the first large prize opening 57a. By tilting the first opening/closing door 57b in the direction of the first large prize opening 57a, the opening of the first large prize opening 57a becomes large enough for a gaming ball to enter. Furthermore, by tilting the first opening/closing door 57b in the direction of the first large prize opening 57a, gaming balls flowing through the open first opening/closing door 57b are guided in the direction of the first large prize opening 57a and enter the first large prize opening 57a.

Furthermore, as the first opening/closing door 57b is tilted, a step D1 is created between the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b and the flow path surface. Therefore, even if a game ball flows through the first opening/closing door 57b at a relatively high speed, it can be made to impact with this step, reducing its speed and guiding it toward the first large winning opening 57a. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from passing through the open first large winning opening 57a without entering it.

As shown in FIG. 112(c), the second opening/closing door 58b transitions from a closed state to an open state by tilting in the direction of the second large prize opening 58a. By tilting the second opening/closing door 58b in the direction of the second large prize opening 58a, the opening of the second large prize opening 58a (non-V prize area FNV and V prize area FV) becomes large enough for a game ball to enter. Furthermore, by tilting the second opening/closing door 58b in the direction of the second large prize opening 58a, game balls flowing through the open second opening/closing door 58b are guided in the direction of the second large prize opening 58a and enter the second large prize opening 58a.

Furthermore, when the second door 58b is tilted, the wall member W interposed between the area on the upper surface of the second door 58b corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV and the area on the upper surface of the second door 58b corresponding to the V winning area FV is not tilted like the second door 58b, but functions as a wall separating the area on the upper surface of the tilted second door 58b corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV from the area on the upper surface of the tilted second door 58b corresponding to the V winning area FV. Therefore, when the second door 58b is tilted, even if a gaming ball flows through the area on the upper surface of the second door 58b corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV at a relatively high speed, it can be slowed down by impacting with the wall member W and guided toward the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from passing through without entering the non-V winning area FNV.

In addition, when the second opening/closing door 58b is tilted, a step D2 is created between the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the tilted second opening/closing door 58b and the flow path surface. Therefore, even if a game ball flows through the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b at a relatively high speed, it can be made to impact with this step D2 to reduce its speed and guide it in the direction of the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from passing through without entering the V winning area FV.

Furthermore, in the variable winning mechanism KH in variant 2, a magnetic member 59a is arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b as an adjustment means for adjusting the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. The magnetic member 59a slows the speed of the game ball using its magnetic force, so by adjusting the number of magnetic members 59a arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b, the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b can be adjusted. In addition, the magnetic force exerted by the magnetic member 59a on the game ball causes the game ball to move in a unique manner as it passes over the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

C7-3. Variation 3:
The door opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to the opening/closing pattern shown in the third embodiment, and various opening/closing patterns can be adopted.

Figure 113 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed in response to a Type 1 jackpot, as Variation 3, and an example of the behavior of the gaming ball in said opening and closing patterns. The bottom of Figure 113 shows a time chart representing the opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b, and the top of Figure 113 shows a graph illustrating an example of the behavior of the gaming ball in said opening and closing patterns. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the bottom of Figure 113 and the graph shown in the top of Figure 113 indicates the time (seconds) used commonly in both figures.

As shown in the figure, in the opening and closing pattern of variant 3, the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b open and close alternately. With this opening and closing pattern, by controlling the time from when the first opening and closing door 57b transitions to a closed state until the second opening and closing door 58b opens, it is possible to control whether or not a gaming ball will enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. The time from when the first opening and closing door 57b transitions to a closed state until the second opening and closing door 58b opens can be set as an opening scenario.

For example, if the time from when the first door 57b transitions to the closed state until the second door 58b opens is set shorter than the time required for a gaming ball to enter the most upstream portion of the first door 57b and advance through the most downstream portion of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second door 58b, the gaming ball can be prevented from entering the V winning area FV, as shown in the opening of the second door 58b in the second round in FIG. 113. On the other hand, if the time from when the first door 57b transitions to the closed state until the second door 58b opens is set longer than the time required for a gaming ball to enter the most upstream portion of the first door 57b and advance through the most downstream portion of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second door 58b, the gaming ball can be prevented from entering the V winning area FV, as shown in the opening of the second door 58b in the fourth round in FIG. 113.

In this way, it is possible to combine the opening and closing operations of the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b in various ways within a single opening pattern. Furthermore, by setting and controlling the timing for opening the first opening and closing door 57b and the second opening and closing door 58b in an opening scenario, it is possible to control the entry of game balls into the V winning area FV.

In addition, the opening scenario may be set to an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 57b opens or closes, or an opening/closing pattern in which only the second opening/closing door 58b opens or closes.

In addition, in the third embodiment described above, the opening scenario is set to an opening/closing pattern that makes it easy for the gaming ball to enter the V winning zone FV and an opening/closing pattern that makes it difficult for the gaming ball to enter the V winning zone FV. However, the opening scenario may also be set to an opening/closing pattern in which the probability of the gaming ball entering the V winning zone FV while the opening/closing mode is being executed is approximately equal to the probability of the gaming ball not entering the V winning zone FV, or an opening/closing pattern in which the probability of the gaming ball entering the V winning zone FV while the opening/closing mode is being executed is approximately 70%. With such opening/closing patterns, depending on the behavior of the gaming ball, there will be cases in which the ball enters the V winning zone FV and cases in which the ball does not enter the V winning zone FV, which can create a sense of anticipation and tension for the player.

C7-4. Variation 4:
In the third embodiment, the two ball entry areas, the non-V entry area FNV and the V entry area FV, are controlled to open and close by a single door (second door 58b). However, this configuration is not limited to this. A configuration in which a single door controls the opening and closing of any number of ball entry areas can be adopted, and by controlling the opening and closing pattern of the door, it is possible to control the entry of game balls into each ball entry area. Furthermore, the area into which game balls enter is not limited to the large prize entry opening, and various entry openings may be applied. In this modified example, the entry area into which game balls can enter will be described in general terms.

Figure 114 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variable winning mechanism KH as variant 4. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH has three adjacent ball entry areas (ball entry area U1, ball entry area U2, and ball entry area U3) arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, based on the flow direction of the game ball flowing through the flow path. The variable winning mechanism KH also has an opening/closing door R that controls the opening and closing of the three ball entry areas. That is, by opening and closing the opening/closing door R, the three ball entry areas synchronously transition between a non-entry state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and a entry state, in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter. Note that the operation of the opening/closing door R is controlled by the main control device 60, similar to the first opening/closing door 57b and second opening/closing door 58b in the third embodiment.

Figure 115 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door R and the behavior of the gaming ball in that opening and closing pattern as a fourth variant of the third embodiment. The bottom of Figure 115 shows a time chart representing the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door R, and the top of Figure 115 shows a graph illustrating an example of the behavior of the gaming ball in that opening and closing pattern. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the bottom of Figure 115 and the graph shown in the top of Figure 115 indicates the time (seconds) used in common in both figures.

In the case of the opening and closing pattern shown in Figure 115, the entry of game balls into each ball entry area can be controlled by controlling the time from when the opening and closing door R transitions to a closed state until the next time the opening and closing door R opens. Note that the time from when the opening and closing door R transitions to a closed state until the next time the opening and closing door R opens can be set in the opening scenario.

As shown in the figure, in this modified example, the first opening of the door R controls the game ball to enter only the ball entry area U1, the second opening of the door R controls the game ball to enter both the ball entry area U1 and the ball entry area U2, the third opening of the door R controls the game ball to enter both the ball entry area U1, the ball entry area U2, and the ball entry area U3, the fourth opening of the door R controls the game ball to enter only the ball entry area U1, just like the first opening, and the fifth opening of the door R controls the game ball to enter both the ball entry area U1 and the ball entry area U2, just like the second opening.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which a single door controls the opening and closing of any number of ball entry areas and controlling the opening and closing pattern of the door, it is possible to control the entry of game balls into each ball entry area. Furthermore, because the state transitions of multiple ball entry areas are executed synchronously, control can be simplified compared to when the state transitions are controlled for each individual ball entry area.

Furthermore, because the ball entry regions U1, U2, and U3 are adjacently positioned from upstream to downstream of the flow path, when the state transitions of multiple ball entry regions are synchronized in response to the behavior of game balls circulating through the flow path, it is possible to execute control in response to the behavior of a small number of game balls. Specifically, in order to synchronize the state transitions of multiple ball entry regions in response to the behavior of game balls circulating through the flow path, it is necessary to grasp the behavior of game balls circulating in the surrounding areas of each ball entry region. For example, as a comparative example, if multiple ball entry regions are positioned at different locations, in order to synchronize the state transitions of the multiple ball entry regions in response to the behavior of the circulating game balls, it is necessary to control the behavior of game balls circulating in the surrounding areas of each distant ball entry region, which complicates control. In other words, since the total area including the surrounding areas of each ball entry region is relatively large and the number of game balls circulating through that total area is relatively large, the number of game balls whose behavior needs to be grasped increases, making control more complex. On the other hand, because the multiple ball entry zones in this modified example are arranged adjacent to each other, the total area including the surrounding areas of each ball entry zone is smaller than in the above-described comparative example. This reduces the number of game balls circulating through this total area, thereby reducing the number of game balls whose behavior needs to be monitored, simplifying control. Furthermore, in this modified example, the multiple ball entry zones are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, making it easier to monitor the behavior of game balls arriving at each ball entry zone and further simplifying control. Specifically, because the multiple ball entry zones are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, the direction of game balls arriving at each ball entry zone is relatively consistent, and the speed of game balls arriving at each ball entry zone also varies little, reducing the variation in the behavior of each game ball arriving at each ball entry zone. As a result, it becomes easier to monitor the behavior of game balls arriving at each ball entry zone, further simplifying control.

C7-5. Variation 5:
A configuration may be adopted in which a discharge delay means is provided to delay the discharge of the gaming ball that has entered the second large winning opening 58a from inside the second large winning opening 58a. This will be specifically described below.

A detection sensor is provided inside the second large prize opening 58a to determine whether all game balls that entered the second large prize opening 58a have been ejected from inside the second large prize opening 58a. When the second large prize opening 58a transitions from an open state to a closed state as part of a single round, the detection sensor is used to determine whether all game balls have been ejected from inside the second large prize opening 58a. The next round is then executed on the condition that all game balls have been ejected from the second large prize opening 58a. Typically, the period from when the second large prize opening 58a transitions from a closed state to when it transitions to the next open state is shorter than the period from when the second large prize opening 58a transitions from a closed state to when it transitions to the next open state. Therefore, it is possible to transition the second large prize opening 58a to an open state at the timing of opening set in the opening scenario.

In this modified example, a discharge delay means is provided inside the second large winning opening 58a to delay the discharge of game balls from inside the second large winning opening 58a. The discharge delay means may be a circular crane with a concave shape on the top surface, or a bypass flow path provided just before the discharge outlet of the second large winning opening 58a. Any other configuration may be used as long as it delays the discharge of game balls from inside the second large winning opening 58a.

When the discharge delay means functions, if the timing at which all game balls are discharged from inside the second large winning opening 58a is later than the timing at which the second large winning opening 58a transitions to the open state set in the open scenario, 58a may transition to the open state at a timing later than the timing set in the open scenario. In other words, depending on the amount of time the discharge delay means delays the discharge of game balls, the second large winning opening 58a may transition to the open state at the timing set in the open scenario, or may transition to the open state later than the timing set in the open scenario. Therefore, it is possible to change the timing at which the second large winning opening 58a transitions to the open state to a timing different from the preset timing.

As a result, for example, even if a Type 2 jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and an opening scenario is set in the opening/closing execution mode such that the first large winning opening 57a and the second large winning opening 58a are opened and closed at a time when it is unlikely that a gaming ball will enter the V winning area FV, the discharge delay means may function to cause the first large winning opening 57a and the second large winning opening 58a to be opened and closed at a time when it is likely that a gaming ball will enter the V winning area FV, creating a sense of anticipation and tension for the player. In other words, by providing a discharge delay means, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation and tension for the player regardless of the type of jackpot (or small win) that triggers the opening/closing execution mode.

In this modified example, the discharge delay means is provided inside the second large prize opening 58a, but it may also be provided in the first large prize opening 57a, or in both the first large prize opening 57a and the second large prize opening 58a.

C7-6. Variation 6:
In the third embodiment, the V winning area FV was a winning area set as a condition for executing the high probability mode when a gaming ball enters the area, but other configurations may be adopted. For example, the V winning area FV may be a winning area set as a condition for winning a jackpot when a gaming ball enters the area. For example, the V winning area FV may be adopted as the V winning area in a gaming machine (a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine) in which a jackpot is won when a predetermined small jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery and a gaming ball enters the V winning area FV in an open/close execution mode that is executed in response to the small jackpot.

C7-7. Variation 7:
116 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 7 of the third embodiment. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 7 includes a jump promoting member JP, which has the function of making the circulating game balls jump, on the circulation surface on which the game balls circulate and upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b.

When a gaming ball circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH passes through the jump promotion member JP at a predetermined speed or faster, the gaming ball floats up, and when the second opening/closing door 58b is in the open state, the gaming ball can jump over the non-V winning area FNV and enter the V winning area FV. Therefore, even if an opening/closing scenario that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the V winning area FV in the opening/closing execution mode is set, the function of the jump promotion member JP can still cause the gaming ball to enter the V winning area FV. As a result, no matter what type of big win (or small win) triggers the opening/closing execution mode, a sense of anticipation and tension can be created in the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine in variant 7 is equipped with a speed reduction mechanism LT that slows the speed of the gaming ball along its circulation path until it reaches the variable winning mechanism KH. A gaming ball that passes through the speed reduction mechanism LT circulates through the variable winning mechanism KH at a slower speed than a gaming ball that circulates through the variable winning mechanism KH without passing through the speed reduction mechanism LT. Therefore, even if the gaming ball passes through the jump promotion member JP and floats up, it will not be able to jump over the non-V winning area FNV and will enter the non-V winning area FNV.

In this way, by providing a speed reduction mechanism LT, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the speed reduction mechanism LT. This can further increase the enjoyment of the game.

D. Fourth embodiment:
D1. Structure of the gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described.

Figure 117 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a roughly rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are located on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has the function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and the function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a specific operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing during a jackpot lottery conducted by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that is pressed by the player to stop the game ball from being launched by the game ball launching mechanism, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

In addition, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with a predetermined launch strength, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the operating handle 25 is rotated to the maximum. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows toward the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. In other words, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can perform a so-called "right hit." Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched toward the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is on. In other words, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26, thereby realizing the launch of a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is configured to be located on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 may also be located in another position. For example, the game ball launch button 26 may be located inside (on the periphery of) the operating handle 25, similar to the weight button 25b. This allows the player to operate the operating handle 25, weight button 25b, and game ball launch button 26 with just their right hand.

Figure 118 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, after which they flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The gaming board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

General winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which game balls can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the bottom center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, and is located on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. The second starting hole 34 is also provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is the gate that triggers the execution of a lottery to open the electric device 34a. Specifically, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 uses this passage as an opportunity to execute an internal lottery (electric device release lottery). If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to the electric device release, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device release state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state, preventing game balls from entering the large winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). If the jackpot lottery results in a large winning or small winning, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that executes the opening and closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions from a closed state, in which game balls cannot enter, to an open state, in which game balls can enter, and then transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

In addition, an outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a static first pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a static second pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first pending display unit 37c and a second pending display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 can be reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 can be reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is initiated, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends.

The special drawing unit 37, the regular drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured as segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may also be configured as various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device equipped in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the first start opening 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the second start opening 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display of the pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also displays effects during the open/close execution mode to which the game enters when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 119 is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns and display surface 41a on the pattern display device 41. Figure 119(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed LCD patterns on the pattern display device 41. The LCD patterns are images displayed on the pattern display device 41, and correspond to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b. When a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface 41a, and when a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in Figure 119(a), the pattern display device 41 displays variably the numbers 1 to 8 as LCD patterns. The variably displayed patterns may also be numbers 1 to 8 with pictures of characters or the like added.

Figure 119(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol column Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 119(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed in which each symbol column scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 119(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction periodically. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the static display is achieved, if the result of the jackpot lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described manner, and various other variations in the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change round ends, the static display is displayed, and the static display ends. It is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the results of the jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on a win in either the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the results of one jackpot lottery for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34, it causes the segment display in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to change for each play round, and then causes the segment display to change to a static display corresponding to the result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a pattern row as a first LCD pattern or a second LCD pattern for each play, and then statically displays the pattern row so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts to when the specified lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the specified lottery result is statically displayed.

As shown in FIG. 119(b), a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The first pending display area Ds1 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending play times based on winning at the first start port 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending play times based on winning at the second start port 34. A pending play time is an unexecuted play time, and is a play time for which a variable display has not yet begun to notify the result of the jackpot lottery regarding special information obtained based on winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. The number of pending play times that can be reserved based on winning at the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display a pending display corresponding to four pending play times (hereinafter also referred to as the first pending play time display). Additionally, the number of reserved play times that can be reserved based on winning at the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second reserved display area Ds2 can display a reserved display corresponding to four reserved play times (hereinafter also referred to as the second reserved play time display).

Furthermore, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first executed game round display area J1, a second executed game round display area J2, and a stage St. The first executed game round display area J1 and the second executed game round display area J2 indicate whether the game round being executed (the game round currently being executed) is a game round based on a win at the first start gate 33 or a game round based on a win at the second start gate 34. The first executed game round display area J1 displays a game round based on a win at the first start gate 33, and the second executed game round display area J2 displays a game round based on a win at the second start gate 34. Furthermore, when a reserved game round displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 is executed as a game round, the image showing the reserved game round displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 moves to the first executed game round display area J1. When a reserved play time displayed in the second reserved play display area Ds2 is executed as a play time, the image showing the reserved play time displayed in the second reserved play display area Ds2 moves to the second executed play time display area J2. Hereinafter, the display shown in the first executed play time display area J1 will also be referred to as the first executed play time display, and the display shown in the second executed play time display area J2 will also be referred to as the second executed play time display.

Stage St is used for the point awarding effect, which will be described later. The point awarding effect and how Stage St is used will be explained in detail later.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 119(b), the display surface 41a is equipped with a first synchronization display unit Sync1 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stationary display of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a of the special pattern unit 37, and a second synchronization display unit Sync2 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stationary display of the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display unit 37b of the special pattern unit 37. Specifically, when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a changing pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 flashes, and when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a stationary pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 lights up. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a changing pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 flashes, and when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a stationary pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 lights up.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first executed game number display area J1, the second executed game number display area J2, the stage St, the first synchronous display section Sync1, and the second synchronous display section Sync2, but the display surface 41a may be configured not to display some or all of these displays.

D2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 120 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is primarily composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio/light emitting control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs stored in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 70 and the power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control unit 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. In addition, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to various detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports and through gates, such as the general entry port 32, first start port 33, second start port 34, through gate 35, and variable entry device 36. Based on signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each ball entry port, and whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the gaming ball's entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are the variable winning drive unit 36c, which opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, the electric device drive unit 34b, which opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34, the door drive unit 48b, which opens and closes the door 48a, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the electric role opening lottery results in a win, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a game ball has entered the general prize entry port 32, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. If a game ball has entered the second start port 34, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the control handle 25. As described above, the control handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When a player grips the control handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on. When the player rotates the control handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched onto the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio and light control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it references the command information storage area 63f in the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio and light control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting devices such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 100. The audio and light control device 90 is also connected to a performance operation button 24, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a specified timing, it controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects that operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect that will be executed while the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a static manner, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 121 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. The various counter information is used by the MPU 62 when performing jackpot lotteries, setting the display of the main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for jackpot lotteries. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when allocating jackpot types. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to a miss.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also has a reserve information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reserve information storage area 64b has a first reserve area Ra and a second reserve area Rb. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will now be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The jackpot random number counter C1 that has been moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

Next, we will explain the details of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 39, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, we will explain the details of the reach random number counter C3. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. However, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 119(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, a reach is reached when a varying symbol display is performed in symbol column Z2. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained in detail. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 when determining the change time in the first and second pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the change time of the patterns on the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 begins to fluctuate. When determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e using the value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, and variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in this invention. Also, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, we will explain the hit/miss table. The hit/miss table is table data used to compare the jackpot random number counter C1 when a jackpot lottery is conducted based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has two jackpot lottery modes: a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode. When a jackpot lottery is conducted in the low-probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low-probability mode is referenced, and when a jackpot lottery is conducted in the high-probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high-probability mode is referenced. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores, as separate table data, a hit/miss table used to compare the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 33 with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c when a gaming ball enters the second start opening 34. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 stores four win/loss tables in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63: a win/loss table for the first starting hole (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting hole (for high probability mode), a win/loss table for the second starting hole (for low probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting hole (for high probability mode).

Figure 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. Figure 122(a) shows the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and Figure 122(b) shows the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in Figure 122(a), the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode) has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 122(b), the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) has 16 values from 0 to 15 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery compared to the low probability mode.

Figure 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. Figure 123(a) shows the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and Figure 123(b) shows the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in Figure 123(a), the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 123(b), the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) has 16 values from 0 to 15 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the low probability mode is included in the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the result of the jackpot lottery shows a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in this embodiment, a "small win" may also be set as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be explained. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode
(2) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) The lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) for the big win lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 1.6 seconds or until 10 balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

The opening time limit for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the number of balls that can be opened per opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for one opening may be longer or the number of balls that can be opened per opening may be set higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that no winning occurs in the variable winning device 36.

In this embodiment, the opening and closing execution mode does not have multiple types of winning modes, and the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode described above. In other words, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. Figure 124(a) shows the allocation table for the first starting port, and Figure 124(b) shows the allocation table for the second starting port. The allocation table for the first starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the allocation table for the second starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting hole in Figure 124 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting hole 33 are set to 8R special jackpot and 8R normal jackpot.

An 8R probability jackpot is a jackpot in which the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

An 8R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values between "0" and "39," "0" and "24" correspond to an 8R special jackpot, and "25" and "39" correspond to an 8R regular jackpot.

As shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in Figure 124 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a 16R special jackpot and a 16R regular jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. In the allocation table for the second starting port, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 39," "0 to 24" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot, and "25 to 39" corresponds to a 16R regular jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot differs between a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, providing a clear difference in the advantages to the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has four types of jackpots. This diversifies the types of jackpots. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the 16R probability jackpot is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the 8R probability jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By providing multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage to the player in this way, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released into the game area PA in the same manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery using the electric role release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role release 34a per time is set longer when the electric role release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs in high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one electric role. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, the time between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in meeting the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table (win/loss table for the lottery to open an electric reel) used when conducting the lottery to open an electric reel.

Figure 125(a) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 125(a), the win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature release. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in low-frequency support mode and the electric feature release lottery is executed, the electric feature release is won with a probability of 1 in 233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature release lottery is won in low-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 125(b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 125(b), the winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 that will result in a winning electric feature opening. Four values from 462 to 465 have been set as the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 that will result in a losing electric feature opening. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in high-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the probability of winning the electric feature opening is 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in high-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low-frequency support mode.

D3. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 126 is a time chart illustrating the point-awarding effect (Case 1) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. The point-awarding effect is an effect in which points are awarded at a predetermined timing during the execution of a game round. Then, a button-pressing effect is executed every time 10 awarded points are accumulated. The button-pressing effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 during the period in which the button-pressing effect is being executed, or after the period in which the button-pressing effect is being executed has elapsed, an effect that suggests the possibility (expectation level) of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery for that game round is executed. Note that the effect that suggests the possibility (expectation level) of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery for that game round may be executed only when the player presses the effect operation button 24 during the period in which the button-pressing effect is being executed. Below, the point-awarding effect (Case 1) is specifically explained using the time chart.

Figure 126 shows a time chart of the point awarding effects and button press effects executed in one game session. In the game session shown in Figure 126, effect a1 is executed at the same time as the pattern begins to change. When effect a1 is executed, an image showing the change in the LCD pattern or a specified character image is displayed on the display surface 41a. In addition, in conjunction with the display of these images, sound is output and lamps are turned on. After the change begins, point awarding effect X1 is executed at a specified timing, as shown in the figure. The illustrated [+4P] indicates that 4 points will be awarded in the point awarding effect.

Figure 127 is an explanatory diagram showing how point-awarding effect X1 is executed. As shown in Figure 127(a), an image corresponding to effect a1 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Then, while effect a1 is being executed, a turtle character passes from right to left across the top of the display surface 41a. As shown in Figure 127(b), when the turtle character reaches the top center of the display surface 41a, pearls displaying the number of points to be awarded are dropped. Then, as shown in Figure 127(c), when the image corresponding to the dropped pearl reaches the stage St in the bottom center of the display surface 41a, the image corresponding to the number of pearls corresponding to the number of points awarded is accumulated. In other words, the number of pearls displayed on the stage St corresponds to the number of accumulated points. At this time, the color of the stage St changes from white to red. The color change of the stage St will be explained in detail later.

The number of points to be awarded in the point-awarding effect is notified to the player until the turtle character passes the upper center of the display surface 41a and an image of pearls displaying the number of points to be awarded is displayed. This creates a sense of anticipation for the number of points to be awarded during the period from the start of the point-awarding effect until the turtle character passes the upper center of the display surface 41a. As a variant, the number of points to be awarded may not be displayed on the image of the pearls dropped by the turtle character. This creates a sense of anticipation for the number of points to be awarded during the period from the dropped pearls reaching the stage St and the display of the image of the pearls corresponding to the number of points to be awarded. As will be described later, in this embodiment, there are cases where a point-awarding effect in which no points are awarded is executed (see Figure 134). In this case, the turtle character passes from the right edge to the left edge of the display surface 41a without dropping any pearls, which would indicate the awarding of points. Therefore, when a configuration is adopted in which the number of points to be awarded is not displayed on the image of the pearls dropped by the turtle character, as in this modified example, as a first step, when the turtle character appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a, the player is made aware that a point-awarding effect will be executed, creating a sense of anticipation. Then, as a second step, when the turtle character drops the pearls, the player is made aware that the executed point-awarding effect is not a point-awarding effect in which points are not awarded, creating a further sense of anticipation. Then, when the pearls dropped by the turtle reach stage St and images of pearls corresponding to the number of points awarded are displayed, the player, who recognizes the number of points awarded, is given a sense of anticipation and elation. In other words, when this modified example is adopted, a sense of anticipation can be created in the player in three stages: when the turtle character appears, when the turtle character drops pearls indicating the awarding of points, and when the dropped pearls reach stage St and images of pearls corresponding to the number of points awarded are displayed.

Referring back to Figure 126 for the explanation, Figure 126 shows the number of points accumulated by executing the point-awarding effect as "accumulated points." Because 4 points were accumulated by executing point-awarding effect X1, which awards 4 points, <4P> is shown as the accumulated points.

After point awarding effect X1 is executed, point awarding effect X2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in Figure 126, 3 points are awarded in this point awarding effect.

Figure 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how point-awarding effect X2 is executed. As shown in Figure 128(a), in point-awarding effect X2, similar to point-awarding effect X1, a turtle character passes from right to left above the top of display surface 41a while effect a1 is being executed. Then, when the turtle character reaches the top center of display surface 41a, pearls displaying the number of points to be awarded are dropped. Then, as shown in Figure 128(c), the image corresponding to the dropped pearl changes to an image of a number of pearls corresponding to the number of points awarded when it reaches stage St, and these pearls are accumulated. When point-awarding effect X2 is executed, 3 points are awarded, bringing the accumulated points to 7, and 7 pearls corresponding to the accumulated points are displayed on stage St.

As shown in Figure 126, after point awarding effect X2 is executed, point awarding effect X3 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the figure, 5 points are awarded in this point awarding effect.

Figure 129 is an explanatory diagram showing how point-awarding effect X3 is executed. As shown in Figure 129(a), in point-awarding effect X3, similar to point-awarding effect X1 and point-awarding effect X2, during effect a1, a turtle character passes from right to left above the display surface 41a. Then, when the turtle character reaches the top center of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be awarded is dropped. Then, as shown in Figure 129(c), when the image corresponding to the dropped pearl reaches stage St, the image on stage St changes to an image of one shell and two pearls indicating two points. The total accumulated points are 12 points, but because the accumulated points are 10 or more, in this embodiment, the 10 points worth of accumulated points are displayed as a single shell image. In addition, a timer indicating the time until the button-pressing effect is executed is displayed below the image of the shell. The effect in which the shell and timer are displayed is also referred to as a timer effect.

Figure 130 is an explanatory diagram explaining the timer effect and the button press effect. Figure 130(a) shows how the timer effect is executed. As shown in the figure, an image of a shell representing 10 accumulated points is displayed near stage St. The image of the shell indicates that a button press effect will be executed later. In addition, a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is executed is displayed below the image of the shell. The timer counts down as time passes. In addition, of the accumulated points that have become 12 points as a result of the execution of point awarding effect X3, the remaining 2 points are displayed as two pearls on stage St, other than the 10 points corresponding to the 10 pearls that have been transformed into shells.

While the timer effect is being executed, effect a1 is executed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Then, when the remaining time on the timer indicated by the timer effect reaches 0 (zero), the button press effect is executed.

Figure 130 (b) shows how the button press effect is executed. The button press effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect operation button 24. Specifically, an image of the shell that was displayed in the timer effect opening is displayed, along with the message "Press!".

In addition, in this example, just before the button press effect begins, that is, just before the remaining time on the timer in the timer effect reaches zero, the LCD symbols displayed in the main display area MA as effect a1 enter a pseudo-stopped state (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-stopped state). Then, while the LCD symbols are in the pseudo-stopped state, the button press effect is executed, and when the player presses the effect operation button 24 at the specified timing, effect a2 begins, as shown in Figure 130 (c), and the LCD symbols begin to change again.

In the pseudo-stop state, the LCD symbols are not completely stopped, but fluctuate slightly, and the internal processing of the pachinko machine 10 indicates that the LCD symbols are fluctuating. The pseudo-stop state of the LCD symbols is a display state that, for presentation purposes, makes the player perceive the LCD symbols as if they have transitioned to a stopped display. In this way, by pseudo-stopping the symbols and then starting to fluctuate again within one play, the effect that makes the player perceive the preview effects as if they are being performed continuously across play turns is also referred to in this embodiment as a pseudo-continuous preview effect.

In other words, in this explanation, the button press effect is used as a trigger to switch from the pseudo-continuous preview effect to the execution of effect a2. By using the button press effect in this way, a player who temporarily recognizes that they have lost the jackpot lottery by viewing the pseudo-stopped LCD patterns can feel as if they have temporarily avoided losing the jackpot lottery by pressing the effect operation button 24 themselves while the button press effect is being executed, giving the player a sense of relief and anticipation.

Furthermore, when a point-awarding effect is executed during a game, points are awarded and accumulated. Then, every time 10 points are accumulated, a timer effect is initiated, and a button-press effect is executed when the remaining time on the timer reaches 0. Therefore, a sense of anticipation can be created for the player each time a point-awarding effect is executed during a game. Furthermore, when 10 points are accumulated, a button-press effect is executed, and by the player pressing the button at the timing when the button-pressing effect is executed, various effects are then executed, such as an effect that changes the LCD pattern indicating the pseudo-stopped loss result again, or an effect that suggests the expected level of the game, thereby creating a sense of anticipation and tension for the player.

After the button press effect is executed, the images of the shells corresponding to the timer and button effects will disappear, and images of two pearls will be displayed, representing the remaining two accumulated points.

If a point-awarding effect is executed and points are accumulated, but the game ends without accumulating 10 or more points, the accumulated points may be reset (accumulated points: 0) or may be carried over to the next game. Whether the accumulated points are reset or carried over at the end of the game is determined by a predetermined process performed by the pachinko machine 10. This process will be explained in detail later.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the point awarding effect in all game plays, but executes the point awarding effect in some game plays. In particular, it executes the point awarding effect with high frequency in game plays that are in a reach (the jackpot lottery is a "miss") or in game plays that result in a jackpot.

Figure 131 is a time chart illustrating the point awarding effect (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. This explanation covers the case where accumulated points awarded in the point awarding effect are accumulated across multiple play sessions.

As shown in the figure, in game round U1, fluctuations begin and effect b1 is executed. In effect b1, an image showing the fluctuation of the LCD pattern or a predetermined character image is displayed on display surface 41a. Then, at a predetermined timing, point-awarding effect Y1 is executed. As shown in the figure, 5 points are awarded in this point-awarding effect. Therefore, the accumulated points become 5 points. Then, fluctuations in game round U1 end. At this time, in the point-awarding effect (case 2), when fluctuations in game round U1 end, the accumulated points are not reset but are carried over to the next game round U2 to be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the "Color of Stage St" column in Figure 131, the color of stage St is controlled as follows to indicate to the player whether the accumulated points will be carried over or not in the current game session.
(1) If no points have been accumulated, the stage St is set to white.
(2) When points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried over, the stage St is set to yellow.
(3) When points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over, the stage St is set to orange.
The color of the stage St is controlled as described above in (1) to (3).

As shown in the "Stage St Color" column in Figure 131, in the case of the point awarding effect (Case 2), when points are first accumulated in play round U1, stage St changes from white to yellow. Thereafter, in play round U2, the accumulated points are carried over to play round U3, so the color of stage St remains yellow. Then, when play round U3 begins, the accumulated points in play round U3 are not carried over to the next play round, so the color of stage St changes from yellow to orange. Thereafter, play round U3 ends with points accumulated until the end, so the color of stage St remains orange while play round U3 is being executed.

Figure 132 is an explanatory diagram explaining the color of stage St. Figure 132(a) shows stage St when no points have been accumulated. The color of stage St is set to white. Figure 132(b) shows stage St when points have been accumulated and accumulated points will be carried over. The color of stage St is set to yellow. Figure 132(c) shows stage St when points have been accumulated and accumulated points will not be carried over. The color of stage St is set to orange. In this way, the color of stage St is used to clearly indicate to the player whether accumulated points will be carried over or not.

By indicating to the player whether accumulated points will be carried over or not, for example, if the color of stage St is yellow, indicating that accumulated points will be carried over, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in the current play, the accumulated points carried over from that play and the points awarded in the next play will make the player infer that there is a high possibility that the accumulated points will reach 10 points or more in the next play, creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

Referring back to Figure 131 for explanation, when game round U1 ends and game round U2 begins, effect b2 is executed. After that, point-awarding effect Y2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the figure, 6 points are awarded in this point-awarding effect. Therefore, the accumulated points become 11 points. At this time, because the accumulated points have reached 10 points or more, the image of 10 pearls changes to an image of a shell, but while game round U2 is being executed, no timer indicating the time until the button press effect is displayed, and the word "Waiting" is displayed. Hereinafter, the effect in which the word "Waiting" is displayed will also be referred to as the waiting effect.

Figure 133 is an explanatory diagram explaining the standby effect. As shown in the figure, when the standby effect is executed, the word "Waiting" is displayed below the image of a shell. The standby effect indicates that a button press effect will not be executed in the current game round, but that a button press effect corresponding to those 10 accumulated points will be executed in the next or subsequent game round. Then, when the game moves to a game round in which a button press effect corresponding to those 10 accumulated points is executed, a timer effect is executed in place of the standby effect, and a countdown is executed to indicate the time until the button press effect corresponding to those 10 accumulated points is executed.

As shown in Figure 131, after point awarding effect Y2 ends, point awarding effect Y3 is executed at a predetermined timing. 0 points are awarded in this point awarding effect. In other words, even though the point awarding effect is executed, no points are awarded. Therefore, the accumulated points remain at 11 points.

Figure 134 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point-awarding effect in which no points are awarded. Figure 134 shows point-awarding effect Y3, which is executed in game round U2.

When the point awarding effect begins, a turtle character appears from the upper right edge of the display surface 41a and progresses toward the center, just as in a normal point awarding effect. Then, as shown in Figure 134(b), even when the turtle character reaches the upper center of the display surface 41a, the turtle character does nothing, but instead continues to progress to the left and advances to the upper left edge of the display surface 41a, as shown in Figure 134(c). By executing the point awarding effect [0P] in this way, it is possible to add a touch of excitement to the player's anticipation. The symbols then stop, and play round U2 ends. Note that the accumulated points in play round U2 are set to be carried over to the next play round (play round U3).

When game play U3 begins, effect b3 is executed, and a timer effect is executed in place of the standby effect executed in game play U2. In Figure 131, this is referred to as timer effect 1 to distinguish it from another timer effect that will be executed later. Timer effect 1 is the effect that corresponds to button press effect 1, which will be executed most recently. In other words, the time displayed on the timer in timer effect 1 is the time until button press effect 1 is executed.

As shown in Figure 131, point awarding effect Y4 [+3P] and point awarding effect Y5 [+7P] are executed at a predetermined timing after game round U3 begins. A total of 10 points are awarded through these two point awarding effects. Therefore, the accumulated points become 21 points. As mentioned above, the button press effect is executed once for every 10 accumulated points, so in game round U3, button press effect 2 is executed in addition to button press effect 1. Therefore, when point awarding effect Y5 is executed and 21 accumulated points are accumulated, timer effect 2 corresponding to button press effect 2 is executed.

Figure 135 is an explanatory diagram explaining the timer effect and button press effect executed in game round U3. Figure 135(a) shows how timer effect 1 and timer effect 2 are executed. As shown in the figure, the shell image and timer corresponding to timer effect 2 are displayed to the left of the shell image and timer corresponding to timer effect 1. As described above, the timer corresponding to timer effect 1 displays a countdown of the time until button press effect 1 is executed. The timer corresponding to timer effect 2 displays a countdown of the time until button press effect 2 is executed. Therefore, the time displayed on the timer corresponding to timer effect 1 is different from the time displayed on the timer corresponding to timer effect 2. In this way, by displaying multiple images corresponding to the timer effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the button press effect will be executed twice and to further increase the sense of anticipation.

After that, as shown in Figure 131, Button Press Effect 1 is executed. Figure 135 (b) shows how Button Press Effect 1 is executed. When Button Press Effect 1 starts, the image of the shellfish displayed in Timer Effect 1 opening is displayed, along with the words "Press!". The image corresponding to Timer Effect 2 remains displayed.

As shown in Figure 131, after button press effect 1 ends, effect b4 is executed. While effect b4 is being executed, timer effect 2 continues to count down and display the time until button press effect 2 is executed. After that, when the time counted down in timer effect 2 reaches 0, button press effect 2 is executed. Figure 135 (c) shows how button press effect 2 is executed. When button press effect 2 is executed, an image of the shellfish displayed in timer effect 2 opening is displayed, along with the message "Press!".

As shown in Figure 131, after button press effect 2 is executed, effect b5 is executed, after which the symbols stop and game round U3 ends. This concludes the explanation of the point awarding effect (Case 2).

In this embodiment, the probability of the button press effect being executed in a game turn is higher if the result of the jackpot lottery in that game turn is a jackpot than if the result is not a jackpot.

As explained above, in this embodiment, by executing the button press effect, the player can infer that there is a high probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)" when the button press effect is executed, creating a sense of anticipation in the player. Furthermore, by executing the point awarding effect, players who recognize that the button press effect will be executed when the accumulated points reach 10 or more can be given a sense of anticipation each time the point awarding effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the accumulated points accumulated in a game round may be reset when the game round ends, or may be carried over to the next game round without being reset. By resetting the accumulated points when the game round ends, the player is encouraged to accumulate 10 or more accumulated points by the end of the game round, further increasing the player's anticipation for the point awarding effect. Furthermore, once a game round has begun and the player recognizes that points have been accumulated through the execution of the point awarding effect, this makes the player aware of the time when the game round ends, when the accumulated points may be reset, and allows the player to pay attention to the manner in which the accumulated points are accumulated, i.e., the manner in which the point awarding effect is executed.

In addition, since accumulated points may be carried over to the next game, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in the current game, the points accumulated in that game will be valid if they are carried over to the next game, which helps prevent a decrease in the player's expectations due to not accumulating 10 points or more.

D4. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
136 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is initiated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S40101, the process of reading various detection sensors is executed. That is, the status of the various detection sensors connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the status of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S40102.

In step S40102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S40103.

In step S40103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, proceed to step S40104. Note that the value of the variable type counter CS is updated during normal processing (Figure 142), which will be described later.

In step S40104, a prize-winning process for the start port is executed in response to a win at the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Details of the prize-winning process for the start port in step S40104 will be described later. After executing step S40104, proceed to step S40105.

In step S40105, the through winning process is executed in response to a win at the through gate 35. Details of the through winning process in step S40105 will be described later. After executing step S40105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for starting gate>
Next, the winning process for the starting slot will be described. The winning process for the starting slot is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 136: S40104).

Figure 137 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the start opening. In step S40201, whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start opening 33 (start winning) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start opening 33. If it is determined in step S40201 that the gaming ball has won the first start opening 33 (S40201: YES), the process proceeds to step S40202, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S40203.

In step S40203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step S40204.

In step S40204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and this first start pending number RaN is set as the target for the processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of pending balls based on winning entries into the first start opening 33. Then, proceed to step S40209.

If it is determined in step S40201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (S40201: NO), the process proceeds to step S40205, where it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S40205 that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (S40205: YES), the process proceeds to step S40206, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S40207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40205 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S40205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step S40207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device at the amusement hall that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step S40208.

In step S40208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read, and this second start pending number RbN is set as the target for the processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending balls based on winning entries into the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step S40209.

In step S40209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S40204 or step S40208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S40209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (S40209: NO), the winning process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, if in step S40209 the number of pending start items N is less than the upper limit (S40209: YES), proceed to step S40210, add 1 to the number of pending start items N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step S40211, add 1 to the value stored in the total number of pending items storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total number of pending items CRN). The total number of pending items CRN indicates the sum of the first number of pending start items RaN and the second number of pending start items RbN. Then proceed to step S40212.

In step S40212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 updated in step S40103 (Fig. 136), and the variable type counter CS updated in normal processing (Fig. 142) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding holding area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the number of reserved items to which 1 was added in step S40210. Specifically, if the first start reserved number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in step S40103 (Fig. 136) are stored in the first free memory area of the first holding area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step S40210. Additionally, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S40103 (FIG. 136) are stored in the first free memory area in the second holding area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step S40210. After executing step S40212, proceed to step S40213.

In step S40213, a first-time determination process is executed. The first-time determination process is a process that determines the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, the variable time for the number of games, etc., based on the information (reserved information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the first-time determination process will be described later. After executing step S40213, proceed to step S40214.

In step S40214, a process for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the result of the first determination process (first determination information) executed based on the information (pending information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is set as a pending command.

The hold command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to confirm that a win has occurred in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) made by the first determination process based on the hold information acquired based on that win, before the hold information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 142: step S40703), which will be described later.

In addition, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a win at the first start gate 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. On the other hand, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a win at the second start gate 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items.

After executing step S40214, the main MPU 62 terminates the winning process for this starting slot.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the winning process for the starting slot (FIG. 137: S40213).

Figure 138 is a flowchart showing the advance determination process. As described above, the advance determination process is a process that, based on the reserved information, determines whether the jackpot lottery will be won, the type of jackpot, whether a reach has occurred, and the variable time for the number of play rounds, etc., before the reserved information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60.

In step S40301, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process determines whether the jackpot lottery was successful, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S40301, the process proceeds to step S40302.

In step S40302, variable time information acquisition processing is executed. This processing determines the variable time of the game session. Details of the variable time information acquisition processing will be described later.

After executing step S40302, the destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/Reach Information Acquisition Processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 138: S40301).

Figure 139 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S40401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the memory area due to a win at the start port in the start port winning process (Figure 137) is read. Then, proceed to step S40402, where the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this win is executed as a play round is determined. Specifically, the result of the determination of the prior determination process executed due to a win prior to this win is read from the corresponding memory area, and the presence or absence of a guaranteed jackpot that will occur prior to the jackpot lottery for this win is determined, thereby determining the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this win is executed as a play round.

In step S40402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is low probability mode at the time the jackpot lottery for this winning event is executed as a game round (S40402: YES), the process proceeds to step S40403, where the win/loss table for low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S40405, where, based on the result of referencing the win/loss table for low probability mode, it is determined whether the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40402 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time the jackpot lottery for this winning event is executed as a game round (S40402: NO), the process proceeds to step S40404, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step S40405, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step S40405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S40405: YES), proceed to step S40406, where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the memory area due to a win in the current start port is read. Then, proceed to step S40407, where the allocation table stored in the allocation table memory area 63b is referenced. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 that is the subject of this allocation was obtained based on a win in the first start port 33, the allocation table for the first start port is referenced; if it was obtained based on a win in the second start port 34, the allocation table for the second start port is referenced. After executing step S40407, proceed to step S40408.

In step S40408, the allocation table is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to a special jackpot. If it is determined in step S40408 that it corresponds to a special jackpot (S40408: YES), the process proceeds to step S40409, where special jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. The first determination processing then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40408 that it does not correspond to a special jackpot (S40408: NO), the process proceeds to step S40410, where normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. The first determination processing then ends.

If it is determined in step S40405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (S40405: NO), the process proceeds to step S40411, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the current winning entry into the starting slot is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S40412, where the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table memory area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S40413, where, based on the reference to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step S40413 that a reach has occurred (S40413: YES), the process proceeds to step S40414, where reach occurrence information is stored in the first position determination process result storage area 64h. The first position determination process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40413 that a reach has not occurred (S40413: NO), the first position determination process ends.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 138: S40302).

Figure 140 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step S40501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the memory area due to a win at the start gate in the winning process for the start gate (Figure 137) is acquired. Then, proceed to step S40502.

In step S40502, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if a jackpot has been won (S40502: YES), the process proceeds to step S40503.

In step S40503, the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. After executing step S40503, proceed to step S40507.

In step S40507, the acquired variable time information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64. Then, this variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S40502 that the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S40502: NO), the process proceeds to step S40504, where it is determined whether a reach will occur. If it is determined in step S40504 that a reach will occur (S40504: YES), the process proceeds to step S40505.

In step S40505, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S40507, where the obtained variable time information is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64, and the variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S40504 that a reach will not occur in the current game (step S40504: NO), the process proceeds to step S40506, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S40507, where the obtained fluctuation time information is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64h in RAM 64, and the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the variable time. In other words, even if the value of the variable type counter CS is the same, the data in the variable time table referenced when determining the variable time for the relevant play round differs depending on the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN. When the variable time acquisition process is executed as part of the first determination process, i.e., when the variable time for the pending play round that is the subject of the first determination process is acquired, the number of reserved balls at the time the reserved play round that is the subject of the process is executed as a play round is unknown. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable time is acquired assuming that the first start pending number RaN = 0 (and the second start pending number RbN = 0). Therefore, the variable time acquired by this variable time acquisition process may differ from the actual variable time when the reserved play round that is the subject of the first determination process is executed as a play round (the variable time acquired in the variable time setting process, described below). In this embodiment, the variable time acquired in the variable time acquisition process, which is executed as part of the advance determination process, is also referred to as the "provisional variable time." In this embodiment, the value of this provisional variable time is used in the process performed to execute the point awarding effect. The process using the provisional variable time will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is configured to be set so that the larger the values of the first start-up pending number RaN and the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, other configurations are also possible, such as the larger the value of the total hold number CRN, so that the fluctuation time is set shorter. Furthermore, without being limited to this, for example, the configuration may be independent of the total hold number CRN, and the smaller the total hold number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0," the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the shorter the fluctuation time. When the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss is reached may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a special jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a miss is allowed, and a variable time table for a complete miss may be set separately.

<Winning process for skip>
Next, the skip winning process will be described. The skip winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 136: step S40105).

Figure 141 is a flowchart showing the winning process for pass-through. In step S40601, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S40601 that the gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 (S40601: YES), the process proceeds to step S40602, where it is determined whether the number of reserved feature items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved feature items SN is a value indicating the number of winning feature items in the through gate 35 that are reserved for the purpose of holding a lottery to open an electric feature. In this embodiment, the maximum value for the number of reserved feature items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40601 that the gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S40601: NO), the winning process for pass-through is terminated.

If it is determined in step S40602 that the number of reserved reel items SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S40602: YES), proceed to step S40603, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reel items SN. Then, proceed to step S40604.

In step S40604, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S40103 (Figure 136) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64c of RAM 64. Then, the winning process for the skip ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40602 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (S40602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is the upper limit, the winning process for the pass is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 142 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S40701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings for each control device are performed upon power-on, and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 is determined. Then, processing proceeds to step S40702.

In step S40702, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command that causes each sub-control device to start a demo video when power is turned on. Then, proceed to step S40703.

In step S40703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S40702, the commands set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step S40703, proceed to step S40704.

In step S40704, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S40705.

In step S40705, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S40706. In step S40706, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the jackpot lottery, setting the variable pattern display by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first result display unit 37a and second result display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S40706, the process proceeds to step S40707.

In step S40707, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S40708.

In step S40708, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric device 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric device 34a. Details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S40709.

In step S40709, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (more precisely, the start of the command output processing in step S40703). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step S40709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (S40709: NO), in steps S40710 and S40711, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step S40710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Furthermore, in step S40711, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40709 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (S40709: YES), the process returns to step S40703, and the processes from step S40703 to step S40708 are executed.

Note that the execution time for each process from step S40703 to step S40708 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game number control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 142: S40706).

Figure 143 is a flowchart showing the game count control process. In step S40801, it is determined whether or not a special game state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening/closing execution mode flag is set ON when the game state is transitioned to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and set OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process. The ending period flag is set ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period) and set OFF at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S40801 that any of the opening period flag, open/close execution mode flag, or ending period flag is ON (S40801: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S40802 onwards. In other words, if the special game state is in progress, no game round will be started regardless of whether a win has occurred in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40801 that the special game state is not in progress (S40801: NO), the process proceeds to step S40802.

In step S40802, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is currently displaying changes. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is currently displaying changes. This determination is made by determining whether the change display flag in the change display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The change display flag is turned ON when change display is to begin for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when that change display ends.

If it is determined in step S40802 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying a variable value (S40802: NO), the process proceeds to steps S40803 to S40805 to start the game. In step S40803, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0." If the total reserved number CRN is "0," this means that the start reserved number for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is "0." Therefore, if it is determined in step S40803 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S40803: YES), the game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40803 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S40803: NO), the process proceeds to step S40804.

In step S40804, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the fluctuation starts, and then the process proceeds to step S40805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S40805, a change start process is executed to start the change display on the main display unit 45 and the change display on the pattern display device 41. Details of the change start process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S40806.

In step S40806, the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. The play count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of plays executed in high frequency support mode. After step S40806 is executed, this play count control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40802 that the main display unit 45 is displaying a variable value (S40802: YES), processing for progressing through the game rounds is executed in steps S40807 to S40809.

In step S40807, it is determined whether the variable time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variable time is the time from when the symbol sequence begins to change until all symbol sequences stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S40807, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of RAM 64 has become "0." The value of this variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (Figure 146) described below. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated.

If it is determined in step S40807 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S40807: NO), the process proceeds to step S40808, where the fluctuation display process is executed. The fluctuation display process is a process that changes the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After step S40808 is executed, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S40807 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S40807: YES), the process proceeds to step S40809, where fluctuation end processing is executed. The fluctuation end processing controls the display of the result display section so that the pattern to be displayed in the result display section for the current game round, which was determined in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 145) described below, is displayed on the result display section for the current game round. After step S40809 is executed, the game round control processing is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game play control process (FIG. 143: S40804).

Figure 144 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S40901, it is determined whether the holding area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, if the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 121) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 121), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra, the holding area to be processed is determined to be the second holding area Rb. In other words, by executing the processing of step S40901, the pending information can be processed in the order in which it was stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

If it is determined in step S40901 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step S40901: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area is performed in steps S40902 to S40907. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40901 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S40901: NO), data setting processing for the second holding area is performed in steps S40908 to S40913.

In step S40902, the first start pending number RaN in the first pending area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S40903, where the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S40904. In step S40904, the data stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S40905.

In step S40905, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S40905, proceed to step S40906.

In step S40906, if the second result display unit flag in the various flags storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF; if it is not ON, the flag is maintained in that state. The second result display unit flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display will start from the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Then, proceed to step S40907.

In step S40907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. The data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S40907 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S40703 of normal processing (Figure 142). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

If it is determined in step S40901 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S40901: NO), proceed to step S40908.

In step S40908, the second start pending number RbN in the second holding area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step S40909. In step S40909, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step S40910, where the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step S40911.

In step S40911, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S40911, proceed to step S40912.

In step S40912, if the second result display section flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is set to ON; if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step S40913.

In step S40913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, i.e., corresponds to the second starting port 34, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. This data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S40913 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S40703 of normal processing (Figure 142). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 143: S40805).

Figure 145 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S41001, it is determined whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag that the MPU 62 uses to determine whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this embodiment, it is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode related to winning a special jackpot ends, and is turned OFF if a regular jackpot is subsequently won. If it is determined in step S41001 that it is the high probability mode (S41001: YES), the program proceeds to step S41002.

In step S41002, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in Figure 122 (b). Then, proceed to step S41004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41001 that the mode is not high probability mode (S41001: NO), proceed to step S41003.

In step S41003, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in Figure 122 (a). Then, proceed to step S41004.

In step S41004, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (jackpot lottery) in step S41002 or step S41003 is a jackpot win. If the result of the hit/miss determination in step S41004 is a jackpot win (S41004: YES), in steps S41005 to S41012, processing is executed to set the game result and the stop result in the case of a jackpot win.

In step S41005, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S41005 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S41005: NO), the process proceeds to step S41006, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting slot (see Figure 124 (a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R regular jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R regular jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41005 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S41005: YES), the process proceeds to step S41007, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting slot (see Figure 124 (b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range for a 16R special jackpot or the numerical range for an 8R normal jackpot. After executing the processing of step S41006 or step S41007, the process proceeds to step S41008.

In step S41008, it is determined whether the type of jackpot allocated in step S41006 or step S41007 is a variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S41008 that the game result is a variable jackpot (S41008: YES), the process proceeds to step S41009.

In step S41009, the process for setting the stop result for a special jackpot is executed. The process for setting the stop result for a special jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game in which a special jackpot is won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a special jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S41006 or step S41007 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S41009, the process proceeds to step S41010.

In step S41010, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S41006 or step S41007 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R jackpot, the 16R jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R jackpot, the 8R jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S41016.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41008 that the type of jackpot allocated in step S41006 or step S41007 is not a special jackpot (S41008: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot allocated is a regular jackpot, proceed to step S41011.

In step S41011, the stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a normal jackpot will be won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S41006 or step S41007 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S41011, proceed to step S41012.

In step S41012, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S41006 or step S41007 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S41016.

In step S41004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S41002 or step S41003 is not a jackpot win (S41004: NO), proceed to step S41013 to determine whether a reach will occur in that game round. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c.

If it is determined in step S41013 that a reach will occur in that game round (S41013: YES), proceed to step S41014.

In step S41014, a reach stop result setting process is executed. This process sets which stop result will be displayed in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b when the variable display ends for the current game turn, which results in a reach stop result. Specifically, by referencing the reach stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and this address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S41014, the process proceeds to step S41016.

If it is determined in step S41013 that a reach does not occur in that game round (S41013: NO), proceed to step S41015.

In step S41015, a stop result setting process for a loss is executed. The stop result setting process for a loss is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which results in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and this address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S41015, proceed to step S41016.

In step S41016, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, based on whether or not a jackpot has been achieved or whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S41016, the process proceeds to step S41017.

In step S41017, it is determined whether the second result display flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S41017 that the second result display flag in RAM 64 is not ON (S41017: NO), the process proceeds to step S41018, where a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information obtained based on a win in the first starting port 33, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S41016.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41017 that the second result display flag is ON (S41017: YES), the process proceeds to step S41019, where a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information acquired based on a win at the second starting port 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and the variation time set in step S41016. After executing step S41018 or step S41019, the process proceeds to step S41020.

In step S41020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the results of the allocation determination, and whether or not a reach has occurred. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on a 16R special jackpot, information on an 8R special jackpot, information on a 16R regular jackpot, information on an 8R regular jackpot, or information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the result of a miss.

The variation commands and type commands set in steps S41018 to S41020 are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S40703 of the normal processing (Figure 142). The audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation commands and type commands, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step S41020, proceed to step S41021.

In step S41021, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round, either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, begins displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second result display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display unit 37a and a changing display is initiated; if the second result display unit flag is ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second result display unit 37b and a changing display is initiated. After step S41021 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 145: S41016).

Figure 146 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable time. In step S41101, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, proceed to step S41102.

In step S41102, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether the special jackpot flag or the regular jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S41102: YES), the process proceeds to step S41103.

In step S41103, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S41107, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S41102 that the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won (S41102: NO), the process proceeds to step S41104, where it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current play. Since this process (S41104) is executed if the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won in step S41102, in step S41104 it is determined whether a reach will occur among the play times in which the jackpot lottery has not been won. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach will occur (S41104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S41105. When determining whether a reach will occur using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 is referenced.

In step S41105, the variable time table for reaching a winning position stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for reaching a winning position is constant. Then, the process proceeds to step S41107, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S41104 that a reach will not occur in the current game (S41104: NO), the process proceeds to step S41106, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S41107, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process ends.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data in the fluctuation time table referenced will differ depending on the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN when determining the fluctuation time for that game round.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is configured to be set so that the larger the values of the first start-up pending number RaN and the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, other configurations are also possible, such as the larger the value of the total hold number CRN, so that the fluctuation time is set to be shorter. Furthermore, without being limited to this, for example, the configuration may be independent of the total hold number CRN, and the smaller the total hold number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0," the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the shorter the fluctuation time. When the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss is reached may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a special jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a miss is allowed, and a variable time table for a complete miss may be set separately.

<Game status transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 142: S40707).

Figure 147 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S41201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending presentation in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S41201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S41201: NO), proceed to step S41202, where it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening and closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is transitioned to the opening and closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing execution mode is ended.

If it is determined in step S41202 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S41202: NO), proceed to step S41203, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S41203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S41203: NO), proceed to step S41204, where it is determined whether the timing has come when the variable display of the symbols in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S41204 that the variable display has not come to an end (S41204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S41204 that the variable display has ended (S41204: YES), the process proceeds to step S41205, where it is determined whether the game result of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S41205: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step S41205, if it is determined that the game result of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode (S41205: YES), proceed to step S41206, where the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step S41207.

In step S41207, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time length is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. After executing step S41207, the process proceeds to step S41208.

In step S41208, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S40703 of the normal processing (Figure 142). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening and closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and opening and closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S41208, the process proceeds to step S41209, where the opening period flag is set ON. Thereafter, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S41203 that the opening period flag is ON (S41203: YES), proceed to step S41210.

In step S41210, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0." If it is determined in step S41210 that the opening period has ended (S41210: YES), the process proceeds to step S41211, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S41212.

In step S41212, the process executes a round display start process to notify the type of current open/close execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in ROM 63, and the number of rounds is confirmed from the identified stop result data. The confirmed number of rounds is then output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the output is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step S41212, the process proceeds to step S41213.

In step S41213, the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in RAM 64 is checked. In step S41213, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM 64 is a 16R probability flag or a 16R normal flag (S41213: YES), the process proceeds to step S41214, where "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM 64. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41213 that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM 64 is an 8R probability flag or an 8R normal flag (S41213: NO), the process proceeds to step S41215, where "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. After executing step S41214 or step S41215, the process proceeds to step S41216.

In step S41216, the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S41202 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S41202: YES), the process proceeds to step S41217, where the special prize opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, if the special prize opening 36a is closed, the special prize opening 36a is opened by driving the variable prize drive unit 36c, provided that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or greater. Furthermore, if the special prize opening 36a is open, the drive state of the variable prize drive unit 36c is stopped, and the special prize opening 36a is closed, provided that the opening limit time has elapsed since the special prize opening 36a was opened, or the opening limit number of prizes has been won. Details of the special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S41217, the process proceeds to step S41218.

In step S41218, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S41219: NO), the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S41218: YES), the process proceeds to step S41219, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step S41219, the process proceeds to step S41220.

In step S41220, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is terminated so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S41220, the process proceeds to step S41221.

In step S41221, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). In this embodiment, the same fixed ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. After executing step S41221, the process proceeds to step S41222.

In step S41222, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S40603 of the normal processing (Figure 142). Upon receiving the ending command, the audio and light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode. After executing step S41222, proceed to step S41223.

In step S41223, the ending period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S41201 that the ending period flag is ON (S41201: YES), proceed to step S41224.

In step S41224, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S41223), is "0." If it is determined in step S41224 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (S41224: YES), proceed to step S41225.

In step S41225, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S41226, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period has ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S41226, this game state transition process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41224 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (S41224: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 147: 11217).

Figure 148 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. In step S41301, it is determined whether the large prize opening 36a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the variable prize drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S41301 that the large prize opening 36a is not open (S41301: NO), the process proceeds to step S41302, where it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0." If it is determined in step S41302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S41302: YES), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S41302: NO), the process proceeds to step S41303.

In step S41303, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of closure of the large prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step S41303 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S41303: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41303 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S41303: YES), the process proceeds to step S41304, where the variable prize drive unit 36c is driven to open the large prize opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S41305.

In step S41305, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since all set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, the first timer counter area T1 is set to "15,000" (i.e., 30 seconds). Furthermore, to count the number of game balls that have entered the large winning slot 36a, the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "10." The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to low-frequency winning mode, for example, the first timer counter area T1 may be set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds) and the winning counter area PC may be set to "6." After executing step S41305, the process proceeds to step S41306.

In step S41306, an opening command is set. The large prize opening opening/closing process then ends. The opening command includes information for the sub-controllers, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun. The command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 142: step S40703). Based on the received opening command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has begun, and updates the presentation content displayed on the various lamps 47 and speaker 46 to reflect the fact that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun. The audio and light-emitting control device 90 also sends the opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has begun, and updates the presentation content displayed on the pattern display device 41 to reflect the fact that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun.

If it is determined in step S41301 that the special prize opening 36a is open (step S41301: YES), the process proceeds to step S41307, where it is determined whether the value in the first timer counter area T1 is "0." In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration that the special prize opening 36a remains open. If it is determined in step S41307 that the value in the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S41307: NO), the process proceeds to step S41308.

In step S41308, whether or not a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 36a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable prize opening device 36. If it is determined in step S41308 that no prize has been won (S41308: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41308 that a prize has been won (S41308: YES), the process proceeds to step S41309, where the value of the prize counter area PC is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S41310.

In step S41310, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter area PC is "0." If it is determined in step S41310 that the value of the prize counter area PC is not "0" (S41310: NO), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S41307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S41307: YES), or if it is determined in step S41310 that the value of the prize counter area PC is "0" (S41310: YES), the process proceeds to step S41311, where the special prize opening closure process is executed. Specifically, the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is set to a non-driven state in order to close the special prize opening 36a. The process then proceeds to step S41312.

In step S41312, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1. Then, proceeding to step S41313, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0." If it is determined in step S41313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S41313: YES), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S41313: NO), the first timer counter area T1 is set to "1000" (i.e., 2 seconds). In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of closure of the large prize opening 36a. After executing step S41314, proceeding to step S41315, it is determined that a closure command is set. Then, the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

This set close command contains information that allows the sub-controllers, the audio and light control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has been completed. It is transmitted to the audio and light control device 90 during the external output process of normal processing (Figure 142: step S40703). Based on the received close command, the audio and light control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content displayed on the various lamps 47 and speakers 46 to reflect the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a. The audio and light control device 90 also transmits the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its original information format. Based on the received close command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content displayed on the symbol display device 41 to reflect the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 147: S41226).

Figure 149 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S41401, it is determined whether a jackpot type flag corresponding to a guaranteed jackpot is set ON in RAM 64. In other words, it is determined whether the 16R guaranteed jackpot flag or the 8R guaranteed jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S41401 that the 16R probability flag or 8R probability flag in RAM 64 is ON (S41401: YES), the process proceeds to step S41402, where a flag deletion process is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, or high frequency support mode flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, it is maintained in that state. After executing step S41402, the process proceeds to step S41403.

In step S41403, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S41404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state transitions to one in which the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. The process then proceeds to step S41405.

In step S41405, the number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of plays counter PNC indicates the number of plays when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of plays. Then, proceed to step S41406.

In step S41406, a high probability mode command, which is a command containing information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step S41410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41401 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is ON in RAM 64 (S41401: NO), the process proceeds to step S41407, where flag erasure processing is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, or high frequency support mode flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, it is maintained in that state. Then, the process proceeds to step S41408.

In step S41408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S41409, where the number of games played counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. The process then proceeds to step S41410.

In step S41410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command containing information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electrical support treatment>
Next, the electric support processing will be described. The electric support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 142: S40708).

Figure 150 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing. In step S41501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step S41501, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (S41501: NO), the process proceeds to step S41502.

In step S41502, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is turned ON if the electric feature opening lottery, which determines whether or not the electric feature 34a will be opened, is selected to open, and is turned OFF if the support in progress flag is ON. In step S41502, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (S41502: NO), the program proceeds to step S41503.

In step S41503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In step S41503, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S41503: NO), the main power support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S41503: YES), the processing proceeds to step S41504.

In step S41504, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step S41504 that it is time to end the variable display (S41504: YES), the process proceeds to step S41505, where a loss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the loss display, the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the loss display displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41504 that it is not time to end the variable display (S41504: NO), the process proceeds to step S41506.

In step S41506, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S41506 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (S41506: NO), the main electric reel support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41506 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (S41506: YES), the processing proceeds to step S41507.

In step S41507, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the program proceeds to step S41508, where it determines whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step S41507 (S41507: NO) and the game is in the high-frequency support mode in step S41508 (S41508: YES), the program proceeds to step S41509, where a lottery is held to unlock the electric feature. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature unlock counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 461, the game is won (see Figure 125 (b)). Simultaneously with the electric feature unlock lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 seconds). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated. The program then proceeds to step S41510.

In step S41510, it is determined whether the result of the electric reel opening lottery in step S41509 is a support win. If it is determined in step S41510 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is a support win (S41510: YES), the process proceeds to step S41511, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric reel 34a has been opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S41512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41510 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is not a support win (S41510: NO), the process proceeds to step S41512 without executing the processing of step S41511.

In step S41512, it is determined whether the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S41512 that the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode (S41512: YES), proceed to step S41513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41512 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S41512: NO), the main role support processing is terminated.

In step S41513, it is determined whether the play count counter area is "0". The play count counter is decremented by 1 each time a play is completed when the low probability mode is in high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S41513 that the play count counter area is not "0" (S41513: NO), the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41513 that the play count counter area is "0", the processing proceeds to step S41514, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing proceeds to step S41515.

In step S41515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command containing information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the electric support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S41515 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the external output processing of normal processing (Figure 142: step S40703). Based on receiving the low-frequency support command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S41507 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (S41507: YES), or if it is determined in step S41518 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S41508: NO), the process proceeds to step S41516, where a lottery is held to open an electric reel. Specifically, the value stored in the electric reel reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric reel opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric reel opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric reel opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e., 29.5 seconds). Then, the process proceeds to step S41517.

In step S41517, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step S41516 is a support win. If it is determined in step S41517 that there is no support win (S41517: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41517 that there is a support win (S41517: YES), the process proceeds to step S41518, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S41502 that the support win flag is ON (S41502: YES), the process proceeds to step S41519, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step S41519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S41519: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, and the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S41519: YES), the process proceeds to step S41520.

In step S41520, a win display is set. This ends the variable display of the image on the normal unit 38 with the win display still displayed. Then, proceed to step S41521, turn the support in progress flag ON, and turn the support win flag OFF. Then, end the main role support processing.

If it is determined in step S41501 that the support flag is ON (S41501: YES), the process proceeds to step S41522, where an electric role opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. Then, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electrical switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 150: S41522).

Figure 151 is a flowchart showing the electric device opening/closing control process. In step S41601, it is determined whether the electric device 34a is open. Whether the electric device 34a is open is determined by whether the electric device drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the electric device 34a is open (S41601: YES), the process proceeds to step S41602.

In step S41602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a. If it is determined in step S41602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S41602: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a has not ended, the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S41602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S41602: YES), the process proceeds to step S41603, where a closing process is performed to control the electric device 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being open, is "0," the electric device 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is then used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250." After executing step S41603, the process proceeds to step S41604.

In step S41604, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S41605, where it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S41605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S41605: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S41605: YES), the process proceeds to step S41606, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S41601 that the electric role 34a is not open (S41601: NO), proceed to step S41607 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the closed state of the electric role 34a. If it is determined in step S41607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S41607: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S41607: YES), proceed to step S41608 to execute an opening process that controls the electric role 34a to the open state. Then, proceed to step S41609.

In step S41609, it is determined whether the device is in opening/closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the device is not in opening/closing execution mode (S41609: NO), the process proceeds to step S41610, where it is determined whether the device is in high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S41610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S41610: YES), the process proceeds to step S41611, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). The main electric switch opening/closing control process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41609 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S41609: YES), or if it is determined in step S41610 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S41610: NO), proceed to step S41612 and set the second timer counter area T2 to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). Then, this electric switching control process ends.

D5. Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 152 is a block diagram that mainly shows the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components, such as the power supply device 85, have been omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on the audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is a device that incorporates a ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, part of the area of RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92; they may each be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the performance operation button 24, speaker 46, various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102; they may each be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various received commands, thereby controlling the VDP 105 (specifically, generating internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 104 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 102.

VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP 105 adjusts the timing of MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM 107 from character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and other data. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106, with each character ROM 106 responsible for storing image data and other data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

Video RAM 107 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively; the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 will also be referred to as the audio/light MPU 92, audio/light ROM 93, and audio/light RAM 94, respectively; and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will also be referred to as the display MPU 102.

D6. Various processes executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 153 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is executed repeatedly at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 2 msec). Below, we will explain the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing.

In step S41701, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio-visual RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio-visual RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. Commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step S41701, the process proceeds to step S41702.

In step S41702, command response processing is executed. Command response processing is processing executed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62. Details of command response processing will be described later. After executing step S41702, proceed to step S41703.

In step S41703, the point awarding effect execution process is executed. The point awarding effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point awarding effect during the execution of a game round. Details of the point awarding effect execution process will be described later. After executing step S41703, proceed to step S41704.

In step S41704, a light emission control process is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the command response process in step S41702 and the point awarding effect execution process in step S4703. After executing step S41704, the process proceeds to step S41705.

In step S41705, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command response process in step S41702 above. After step S41705 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, the command response processing will be described. The command response processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 153: S41702).

Figure 154 is a flowchart showing command response processing. In step S41801, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S41801 that a hold command has been received (S41801: YES), the process proceeds to step S41802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41801 that a hold command has not been received (S41801: NO), the process proceeds to step S41806.

In step S41802, update processing is performed when a prize is won. In the update processing when a prize is won, processing is performed to enable the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information items acquired based on a prize being won at the first start port 33, the number of pending information items acquired based on a prize being won at the second start port 34, and the total number of these pending information items. Details of the update processing when a prize is won in step S41802 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of pending information items acquired based on a prize being won at the first start port 33 will be referred to as the "first pending number," the number of pending information items acquired based on a prize being won at the second start port 34 will be referred to as the "second pending number," and the sum of the first pending number and the second pending number will be referred to as the "total pending number." After executing step S41802, proceed to step S41803.

In step S41803, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled based on the number of hold information items acquired based on winning at the first start gate 33 identified in step S41802 and the number of hold information items acquired based on winning at the second start gate 34. After executing step S41803, the process proceeds to step S41804.

In step S41804, the contents of the hold command are stored in the game round setting information storage area 94d. That is, the information obtained by the first determination process executed by the main MPU 62 is sent to the audio/visual MPU 92 by the hold command, and the information on the first determination process included in the sent hold command is stored in the game round setting information storage area 94d.

Figure 155 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the game round setting information storage area 94d. The game round setting information storage area 94d has a game round setting information storage area for the first starting port and a game round setting information storage area for the second starting port. Figure 155(a) shows the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port, and Figure 155(b) shows the game round setting information storage area for the second starting port. Note that the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port and the game round setting information storage area for the second starting port have the same configuration, so only the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port shown in Figure 155(a) will be explained, and an explanation of the game round setting information storage area for the second starting port shown in Figure 155(b) will be omitted.

As shown in the figure, the game turn setting information storage area for the first starting port is divided into a first determination information area and a performance information area. Furthermore, each piece of information stored in the game turn setting information storage area for the first starting port is stored for each reserved game turn. The reserved game turns (n = 1 to 4) shown in the game turn setting information storage area for the first starting port are executed in the order of the reserved game turn for the first starting port (n = 1) to the reserved game turn for the first starting port (n = 4).

The first determination information area of the game turn setting information storage area for the first starting port stores information (hereinafter also referred to as first determination information) obtained by the first determination process executed by the main MPU 62 for each reserved game turn (n) for the first starting port. The first determination information is information obtained by the first determination process executed by the main MPU 62 and is information sent from the main MPU 62 to the sound/light side MPU 92 by a hold command. The sound/light side MPU 92 stores the information included in the hold command in the first determination information area of the game turn setting information storage area for the first starting port.

The effect information area of the first starting gate game turn setting information storage area is a storage area that stores information set by the effect information setting process described below based on the information stored in the first determination information area. The effect information area will be described later.

The advance determination information area of the first start slot game turn setting information storage area stores, for each reserved game turn, whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the provisional variation time. As described above, the provisional variation time is the variation time for that reserved game turn, assuming that the first start reserved number RaN = 0 and the second start reserved number RbN = 0 at the time that the reserved game turn is executed as a game turn.

The first-round determination information stored in the first-round determination information area and the effect information stored in the effect information area are linked to each reserved play round itself, and each time a play round is executed, the storage area shifts to the memory area for the next reserved play round. For example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), after one play round is executed, the first-round determination information and effect information stored in the memory area for the reserved play round (n=2) shift to the memory area for the reserved play round (n=1), the first-round determination information and effect information stored in the memory area for the reserved play round (n=3) shift to the memory area for the reserved play round (n=2), and the first-round determination information and effect information stored in the memory area for the reserved play round (n=4) shift to the memory area for the reserved play round (n=3).

Referring back to Figure 154 for the explanation. After executing step S41804, the process proceeds to step S41805. In step S41805, the effect information setting process is executed. The effect information setting process is a process in which various determinations are made based on the information stored in the game round setting information storage area, and various items related to the effects to be executed in each game round are set. Details of the effect information setting process will be described later. After executing step S41805, the process proceeds to step S41806.

In step S41806, it is determined whether a fluctuation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S41806 that a fluctuation command and a type command have been received (S41806: YES), proceed to step S41807.

In step S41807, the effect setting process is executed. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effects to be executed in the current game round. The effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S41807, the process proceeds to step S41808.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41806 that a variation command and a type command have not been received (S41806: NO), step S41807 is not executed and processing proceeds to step S41808.

In step S41808, processing is performed to respond to other commands received from the main MPU 62. After step S41808 is executed, this command response processing is terminated.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update process when a prize is won will be described. The update process when a prize is won is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 154: S41802).

Figure 156 is a flowchart showing the update process when a win is made. In step S41901, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was sent based on a win at the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S41901 that the pending command to be read this time was sent based on a win at the first start port 33 (S41901: YES), the process proceeds to step S41902, where the update process is performed on the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The first pending number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information obtained based on a win at the first start port 33. In the update process of the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the information on the number of pending information included in the pending command to be read this time. After executing step S41902, the process proceeds to step S41904.

If it is determined in step S41901 that the pending command to be read this time was not sent based on a win at the first start port 33 (S41901: NO), that is, if it is determined that the pending command was sent based on a win at the second start port 34, proceed to step S41903, where an update process is performed on the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The second pending number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information obtained based on a win at the second start port 34. In the update process of the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the information on the pending number included in the command to be read this time. After executing step S41903, proceed to step S41904.

The reason for the processing of steps S41902 and S41903 as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio and light-emitting control unit 90. Therefore, if power is cut off while pending information related to a win in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60, the pending information will be stored and maintained in the main control unit 60, but the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 will recognize that there are zero pending information items. In this case, if the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 were configured to count up the first pending item number counter area or the second pending item number counter area each time it receives a hold command, an inconvenience could arise in which the number of pending information items actually stored in the main control unit 60 would not match the number of pending information items recognized by the audio and light-emitting control unit 90. In contrast, in the present embodiment described above, the main control unit 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio and light emission control unit 90 sets the information on the number of held items included in the command in the first held item number counter area or the second held item number counter area each time it receives a hold command, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step S41904, an update process is executed for the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The total reserved number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to determine the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on winning at the first start port 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on winning at the second start port 34. In this update process, the information in the total reserved number counter area is updated to the sum of the information on the number of reserved items measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information on the number of reserved items measured in the second reserved number counter area. After executing step S41904, the update process for this winning event is terminated.

<Performance information setting process>
Next, the effect information setting process will be described. The effect information setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 154: S41805).

As described above, the effect information setting process makes various determinations based on the information stored in the game round setting information storage area and sets various items related to the effects to be executed in each game round. The various items that have been set are then stored in the effect information area of the game round setting information storage area. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the effect information area (see Figure 155) of the game round setting information storage area (game round setting information storage area for the first starting port, game round setting information storage area for the second starting port). We will then explain the effect information setting process.

As shown in Figure 155 (a), the effect information area of the play count setting information storage area for the first starting slot has storage areas for the point awarding effect flag, the final play count in succession flag, the carryover play count flag, the total number of awarded points, the effect scenario number, and the point awarding scenario number for each reserved play count.

We will explain the point awarding effect flag. The point awarding effect flag is a flag that becomes ON when a game turn is set to a game turn that will execute a point awarding effect.

The following explains the consecutive effect final play flag. In this embodiment, consecutive effects are point-awarding effects in which accumulated points are carried over across play times and used across multiple play times. The last play time in which consecutive effects are executed is also referred to as the consecutive effect final play time. The consecutive effect final play time flag is a flag that is turned ON when the play time is set as the consecutive effect final play time.

The carryover play count flag will now be explained. In this embodiment, a carryover play count is a play count that is executed before the final play count of a consecutive performance, i.e., a play count in which accumulated points are carried over. The carryover play count flag is a flag that is turned ON when a play count is set as a carryover play count.

The above-mentioned point-awarding effect flag, consecutive effect final play time flag, and carryover play time flag stored in the effect information area are turned OFF (reset) by updating the play time setting information storage area (Figure 167: S42112) after the effects for the play times corresponding to these flags are set in the effect setting process described below.

To explain the final consecutive play time and carryover play times more specifically, for example, in the case of the point-awarding play time (case 2) in Figure 131, the accumulated points are used in a series of three consecutive play times, play times U1 to U3, so the point-awarding play time is a consecutive play time that is executed over three play times. Play times U1 and U2 are carryover play times because they are play times in which the accumulated points are carried over. Play time U3 is the last play time in which consecutive play times are executed, so it is the final play time in which consecutive play times are executed. In this embodiment, the number of play times in which consecutive play times are executed is referred to as the number of play times executed Np. In the case of the point-awarding play time (case 2) in Figure 131, the consecutive play times are executed using three play times, so Np = 3. The number of play times executed Np is used in the process (effect information setting process).

The following explains the presentation scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as presentation scenario No.). In this embodiment, a presentation scenario is a program that sets various items related to the presentation to be executed in the target game round, such as the type of video to be executed in the target game round, the timing of executing that video, and the timing of executing the point-awarding presentation. Multiple presentation scenarios are stored in the sound/light side ROM 93. The presentation scenario No. is a code assigned to each presentation scenario and is used to identify one presentation scenario.

The point-awarding scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as the point-awarding scenario No.) will now be explained. In this embodiment, a point-awarding scenario is a program in which the number of points to be awarded in the point-awarding effect set for each effect scenario is set. Multiple point-awarding scenarios are stored in the sound/light side ROM 93. The point-awarding scenario No. is a code assigned to each point-awarding scenario and is used to identify one point-awarding scenario. The effect information area of the game play setting information storage area has been explained above.

Next, we will explain the effect information setting process. The effect information setting process is a process that sets the effect information (point awarding effect flag, final consecutive effect play flag, carryover play flag, total awarded points, effect scenario number, point awarding scenario number) stored in the effect information area corresponding to the reserved play round being processed.

Figure 157 is a flowchart showing the effect information setting process. The processing executed in the effect information setting process is broadly composed of three processing groups.

The processing group of steps S42003 to S42008 is a processing group that sets the presentation information for the target game if the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)."

The processing group of steps S42011 to S42015 is a processing group that sets the presentation information for a target game round when the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is a "miss (no reach)" and the target game round is set as the final game round of consecutive presentations.

The processing group of steps S42016 to S42018 is a processing group that sets the presentation information for the target game round when the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is a "miss (no reach)" and when a point-awarding presentation that does not have continuity with other game rounds is executed in the target game round (when continuous presentations are not executed), or when a point-awarding presentation is not executed.

The details of the effect information setting process are explained below, but for the sake of convenience, we will first explain the process for determining which of the three processing groups above to execute (steps S42001, S42002, and S42010), then explain the processing group from steps S42016 to S42018, then explain the processing group from steps S42003 to S42008, and finally explain the processing group from steps S42011 to S42015.

In step S42001, the information stored in the game round setting information storage area is read. If the game round to be processed is based on a game ball entering the first start port 33, the information recorded in the game round setting information storage area for the first start port is read; if the game round to be processed is based on a game ball entering the second start port 34, the information recorded in the game round setting information storage area for the second start port is read. After executing step S42001, proceed to step S42002.

In step S42002, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)" based on the information in the advance determination information area corresponding to the target game round in the game round setting information storage area. If it is determined in step S42002 that the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is neither a "jackpot" nor a "miss (reach occurs)," i.e., if it is determined to be a "miss (reach does not occur)" (S42002: NO), proceed to step S42010.

In step S42010, it is determined whether the consecutive effect final play flag for the reserved play time (preceding reserved play time) one play time before the play time to be processed is ON. By executing this process, the reserved play time (preceding reserved play time) one play time before the play time to be processed is set as the carryover play time, and it is determined whether a consecutive effect can be executed with the play time to be processed as the final play time for consecutive effects. In this embodiment, when executing a consecutive effect in which the play time where the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss (no reach)" is set as the final play time for consecutive effects, the number of play times for which consecutive effects will be executed (number of play times executed Np) is set to 2, and therefore the preceding play time that is subject to the determination of whether the consecutive effect final play time flag is ON is limited to the preceding reserved play time one play time before the play time to be processed.

At the time when the effect information setting process for the target game turn is executed, if the reserved game turn immediately before the target game turn is set to not execute a point-awarding effect, or if the reserved game turn immediately before the target game turn is set to execute a point-awarding effect (without executing a consecutive effect), the consecutive effect final game turn flag for the reserved game turn is set to OFF. Note that at the time when the effect information setting process for the target game turn is executed, the reserved game turn immediately before the target game turn is not set to be a carryover game turn in a consecutive effect, and the reserved game turn immediately before the target game turn is not set to be a carryover game turn and therefore the consecutive effect final game turn flag for the reserved game turn is not set to OFF. The reason for this is explained below.

When the effect information setting process for the target game turn is executed, the effect information for the reserved game turn that has already been set has already been set. However, in this embodiment, the effect information for the reserved game turn that has already been set may be modified (reset) in conjunction with the execution of the effect information setting process for the target game turn. In this embodiment, after the final game turn of the consecutive effects is set, the reserved game turn that will be executed before the final game turn of the consecutive effects is set (reset) as a carryover game turn. Therefore, when the effect information setting process for the target game turn is executed (in other words, when the effect information for the target game turn has not yet been set), the reserved game turn immediately before the target game turn has not been set as a carryover game turn in the consecutive effects. Note that the modification (resetting) of the effect information for the reserved game turn that has already been set will be explained in detail when describing the processing group of steps S42003 to S42008 and the processing group of steps S42011 to S42015.

If it is determined in step S42010 that the consecutive effect final game round flag for the reserved game round immediately before the target game round is ON (S42010: YES), the process proceeds to step S42016. That is, the process proceeds to the processing group of steps S42016 to S42018 described above. As described above, the processing group of steps S42016 to S42018 is a processing group that sets the effect information for the target game round when the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is a "miss (no reach)" and a point-awarding effect that does not have continuity with other game rounds is executed in the target game round (when consecutive effects are not executed), or when no point-awarding effect is executed. In this embodiment, for a reserved game round that is already set as the consecutive effect final game round at the time the effects for the target game round are set, the setting of the consecutive effect final game round takes priority, and the game round is not later corrected (reset) to a carryover game round in the consecutive effect. Therefore, in step S42010, if the final consecutive effect flag for the reserved play time immediately preceding the target play time is ON, a process group (steps S42016 to S42018) is executed to set an effect for the target play time that does not have continuity with the reserved play time.

In step S42016, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a point-awarding effect will be executed for the target game turn. The point-awarding effect in this process is a point-awarding effect that is executed for the target game turn alone, without any continuity with other game turns. In this embodiment, the lottery in this process is executed using a predetermined random number, and is set so that the probability of the lottery result being that a point-awarding effect will be executed is 50%. After executing step S42016, the process proceeds to step S42017.

In step S42017, the result of the lottery in step S42016 is determined, and if it is determined that the lottery result is that a point-awarding effect will be executed in the game session being processed (S42017: YES), the process proceeds to step S42018.

In step S42018, the total number of points to be awarded in the point awarding effect executed in one game turn to be processed (total awarded points) is determined. In this process, the total awarded points are determined by a predetermined lottery and are set to be between 0 and 9 points. In other words, the total awarded points are set so that 10 accumulated points will not be accumulated in the game turn to be processed and a button press effect will not be executed. This is to prevent the button press effect from being executed in a game turn where the result of the jackpot lottery is neither a "jackpot" nor a "miss (reach occurs)," which would give the player unnecessary hope. After executing step S42018, proceed to step S42009.

On the other hand, in step S42017, the result of the lottery in step S42016 is determined, and if it is determined that the lottery result is that the point awarding effect will not be executed in the game session being processed (S42017: NO), step S42018 is not executed and processing proceeds to step S42009.

In step S42009, the effect information area of the game round setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S42016 to S42018 are recorded in the effect information area of the game round setting information recording area. For example, if it is determined that a point-awarding effect will be executed for one game round to be processed, the point-awarding effect flag is set to ON, the consecutive effect final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points are set to the total awarded points value determined in step S42018. The effect scenario No. and point-awarding scenario No. are set to NULL. In this embodiment, only for game rounds where the consecutive effect final game round flag is ON, an effect pattern for the effect to be executed for that game round is generated from the effect scenario and point-awarding scenario. For effects to be executed for game rounds where the consecutive effect final game round flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read and set from a pre-prepared effect pattern table. The effect pattern table that is set when a point-awarding effect is executed for one game played to be processed will be described later.

Furthermore, if it is decided not to execute a point awarding effect for the game round being processed, the point awarding effect flag is set to OFF, the consecutive effect final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points are not set and remain NULL. The effect scenario number and point awarding scenario number are not set and remain NULL.

In step S42009, the effect information area in the game play setting information recording area is updated, and then the effect information setting process is terminated.

Next, the processing group of steps S42003 to S42008 will be described. As described above, the processing group of steps S42003 to S42008 is a processing group that sets presentation information for the target game if the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)."

As described above, in step S42002, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)" based on the information in the advance determination information area corresponding to the target game round in the game round setting information storage area. Then, in step S42002, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)" (S42002: YES), the process proceeds to step S42003.

In step S42003, the consecutive effect final play flags of the reserved play times prior to the play time to be processed in the play time setting information storage area are read, and the number of reserved play times for which the consecutive effect final play time flags are OFF consecutively from the play time to be processed is identified. In this process, by identifying the number of reserved play times for which the consecutive effect final play time flags are OFF consecutively from the play time to be processed, the reserved play times prior to the play time to be processed are used as carryover play times, and a determination is made as to whether consecutive effects can be executed using the play time to be processed as the consecutive effect final play time. Although the effect information for the reserved play times prior to the play time to be processed has already been set, in this embodiment, the reserved play times for which the consecutive effect final play time flags are OFF consecutively from the play time to be processed are determined to be play times that can be reset as carryover play times. Hereinafter, the number of reserved play times in which the consecutive effect final play time flag is OFF, starting from the play time to be processed, will be referred to as the resettable play time Fn.

For example, in the case of the game turn setting information storage area for the first starting port shown in FIG. 155(a), if the game turn to be processed is the reserved game turn (n=4), the consecutive effect final game turn flags for the reserved game turns (n=3) and (n=2), which are consecutive game turns from the reserved game turn (n=4), are OFF consecutively, so in this case the resettable game turn count Fn=2. Note that the game turn setting information storage area for the first starting port shown in FIG. 155(a) indicates the case where the reserved game turn (n=4) is the game turn to be processed in the effect information setting process, so the information in the effect information area for the reserved game turn (n=4) has not been set. In other words, the information in the effect information area is set by this effect information setting process.

Also, if the number of reserved plays in which the consecutive effect final play flag is OFF from the play to be processed is 0, the resettable play count Fn is set to 0.

After executing step S42003, proceed to step S42004.

In step S42004, the number of plays that can be used for the continuous effect (hereinafter referred to as the executed play count Np) is determined based on the resettable play count Fn identified in step S42003. In this embodiment, the executed play count Np is determined by lottery using random numbers. As described above, the resettable play count Fn is the number of plays that can be used for the carryover effect, so the maximum possible value for the executed play count Np is the resettable play count Fn plus 1 as the final play count for the continuous effect. Therefore, in step S42004, the executed play count Np, which will be a value equal to or less than Fn+1, is determined by a predetermined lottery. The random number used in this lottery may be obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole corresponding to the play count to be processed, or may be obtained when the lottery is executed. Note that if the resettable play count Fn = 0, the executed play count Np will necessarily be 1. After executing step S42004, proceed to step S42005.

In step S42005, a presentation scenario is determined based on the provisional variable time for the game round being processed. As described above, the presentation scenario is a program that sets various items related to the presentation to be executed in the game round being processed, such as the type of video to be executed in the game round being processed, the timing for executing that video, and the timing for executing the point-awarding presentation. In this embodiment, the presentation scenario is determined by referencing the jackpot presentation scenario table or reach presentation scenario table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round being processed is a "jackpot," the presentation scenario is determined using the jackpot presentation scenario table, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss (reach occurs)," the presentation scenario is determined using the reach presentation scenario table.

Figure 158 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot presentation scenario table. As shown in the figure, the jackpot presentation scenario table has four types of presentation scenarios corresponding to one variable time (provisional variable time) that can be set for the target game turn. Figure 159 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the reach presentation scenario table. As with the jackpot presentation scenario table, four types of presentation scenarios correspond to one variable time (provisional variable time) that can be set for the target game turn.

Figure 160 is an explanatory diagram illustrating, as an example, the presentation scenario corresponding to the provisional variation time T = t4 in the jackpot presentation scenario table. Figure 160(a) shows the presentation scenarios for jackpots corresponding to the provisional variation time T = t4 (presentation scenario Esc (D1) to presentation scenario Esc (D4)). As shown in the figure, each of the four presentation scenarios is set to correspond to the length of the provisional variation time T = t4, and each differs in the type of presentation executed, the timing of the point awarding presentation and the button press presentation, etc. Note that "pseudo consecutive" in the figure indicates pseudo consecutive presentation, "Bt" indicates button press presentation, and "Pe" indicates point awarding presentation.

In addition, the time it takes for a given play to fluctuate varies depending on the number of reserved plays at the time the play corresponding to the presentation scenario is executed. In this embodiment, the more reserved plays there are, the shorter the time it takes for that play to fluctuate. Therefore, in this embodiment, each presentation scenario is prepared for each number of reserved plays.

Figure 160(b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating that one type of presentation scenario (presentation scenario Esc (D1)) is prepared for each number of reserved plays (first start reserved number RaN: 0-4). As shown in the figure, each presentation scenario has the same presentation video to be executed and the same number of times the point-awarding effect is executed, but the presentation scenario that is applied when the number of reserved plays is large is set to have a shorter execution time.

In step S42005 (Figure 157), four types of presentation scenarios corresponding to the provisional variable time of the game round to be processed are identified from the jackpot presentation scenario table (or reach presentation scenario table), and one presentation scenario from the four identified presentation scenarios is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. Note that the process of selecting one of the five presentation scenarios shown in Figure 160 (b) is selected according to the number of reserved game rounds immediately before the game round corresponding to that presentation scenario is executed. After executing step S42005, proceed to step S42006.

In step S42006, a point awarding scenario corresponding to the number of games played Np is determined based on the determined presentation scenario. The point awarding scenario is a program that sets the number of points to be awarded in the point awarding presentation set for each presentation scenario. In this process, the point awarding scenario is determined based on the point awarding scenario table for jackpots and reaches stored in the sound/light side ROM 93.

Figure 161 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the point awarding scenario table for jackpots and near-win situations. As shown in the figure, two point awarding scenarios are set in correspondence with each presentation scenario and each number of plays executed Np (1 to 4) determined in step S42004. In this process, two point awarding scenarios are identified based on the determined presentation scenario and number of plays executed Np, and one point awarding scenario from the two identified point awarding scenarios is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. In reality, as shown in Figure 161, the point awarding scenario table for jackpots and near-win situations has two point awarding scenario numbers set in correspondence with each number of plays executed Np, and once the point awarding scenario number of the point awarding scenario to be executed is determined, the point awarding scenario corresponding to that point awarding scenario number is read from the sound/light side ROM 93.

Figure 162 is an explanatory diagram illustrating point awarding scenarios for jackpots and reach. As shown in the figure, for each point awarding scenario, the award point value that matches the presentation scenario executed in the target game round is set in the execution order of the point awarding presentation set in the presentation scenario, and the total number of points to be awarded in each preceding game round is set corresponding to the number of games executed Np. For example, as shown in Figure 161, point awarding scenario Psc (A2g) is selected when the presentation scenario set in the target game round is Esc (A2) and the number of games executed Np = 4. Psc (A2g) also sets the number of points to be awarded in the target game round for each point awarding presentation executed. Specifically, as shown in Figure 162, 1 point is awarded in the first point awarding presentation in the target game round, 2 points in the second point awarding presentation, 3 points in the third point awarding presentation, 1 point in the fourth point awarding presentation, and 2 points in the fifth point awarding presentation.

In addition, each point-awarding scenario is set with a total number of points to be awarded in the point-awarding effects executed in the preceding game rounds 1 to 3. In Figure 162, the game round executed immediately before the relevant game round (the game round to be processed) is referred to as preceding game round 1, the game round executed immediately before preceding game round 1 is referred to as preceding game round 2, and the game round executed immediately before preceding game round 2 is referred to as preceding game round 3. In the case of the point-awarding scenario Psc (A2g) in Figure 162 given as an example above, the total number of points awarded in preceding game round 1, executed immediately before the game round to be processed, is 5 points, the total number of points awarded in preceding game round 2, executed immediately before preceding game round 1, is 4 points, and the total number of points awarded in preceding game round 3, executed immediately before preceding game round 2, is 1 point. The timing for executing the point awarding effect in each of advance play times 1 to 3 and the number of points awarded in each point awarding effect are determined based on the variable time of each advance play time and the total number of points awarded in the effect setting process described below. After executing step S42006, proceed to step S42007.

In step S42007, it is determined whether the number of plays to be executed Np determined in step S42004 is 2 or greater. That is, it is determined whether a continuous performance in which the target play count is set as the final play count of the continuous performance and the preceding play count is set as the carryover play count will be executed. More specifically, if a continuous performance in which the preceding play count is set as the carryover play count is executed, it is necessary to reset (modify) the performance information for the preceding play count that has already been set. Therefore, it is determined whether resetting is necessary by determining whether the number of plays to be executed Np is 2 or greater. If it is determined in step S42007 that the number of plays to be executed Np is 2 or greater (S42007: YES), proceed to step S42008.

In step S42008, the total points awarded for each preceding game session stored in the point awarding scenario set for the game session being processed are read. In other words, the total points awarded for the point awarding effects executed for each preceding game session are read. After executing step S42008, proceed to step S42009.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42007 that the number of games played Np is not 2 or more (S42007: NO), step S42008 is not executed and processing proceeds to step S42009.

In step S42009, the presentation information area of the game round setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S42003 to S42008 are recorded in the presentation information area of the game round setting information recording area. For example, if it is determined that a reserved play round prior to the target play round will be used as a carryover play round and that a continuous presentation will be executed using the target play round as the final play round of the continuous presentation, the point awarding presentation flag of the presentation information corresponding to the target play round used as the carryover play round is reset to ON, the final play round of the continuous presentation flag is reset to OFF, and the carryover play round flag is reset to ON. The total awarded points are reset to the total awarded points for each of the target play rounds read in step S42008. The presentation scenario No. and point awarding scenario No. are reset to NULL. As described above, in this embodiment, only for a game in which the consecutive effect final game round flag is ON, a presentation pattern for the presentation to be executed in that game round is created from the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario. For presentations to be executed in game rounds in which the consecutive effect final game round flag is not ON, a predetermined presentation pattern is read and set from a prepared presentation pattern table. The presentation pattern table prepared for presentations to be executed in game rounds in which the consecutive effect final game round flag is not ON will be described later.

Then, the point awarding effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the target play time to be used as the final play time of the consecutive effects is set to ON, the final play time flag of the consecutive effects is set to ON, and the carryover play time flag is set to OFF. The total awarding points is set to NULL. The total awarding points is a parameter used when determining the effect to be executed in a play time where the final play time flag of the consecutive effects is not ON. For the final play time of the consecutive effects, since the effect scenario and point awarding scenario are set for each point awarding effect, it is not necessary to set the total awarding points. The effect scenario No. is set to the effect scenario No. corresponding to the effect scenario determined in step S42005. The point awarding scenario No. is set to the point awarding scenario No. corresponding to the point awarding scenario determined in step S42006.

In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game turn is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)," and that game turn is not set as the final game turn for consecutive effects when executing consecutive effects, i.e., even if the number of games executed Np = 1, the consecutive effects for the number of games executed Np = 1 are deemed to be executed, and that game turn is treated as the final game turn for consecutive effects. In other words, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game turn is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)," the final game turn for consecutive effects flag in the effect information area corresponding to that game turn is always set to ON. This prevents a game turn for which the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)" from being reset as a carryover game turn when determining the effect information for a game turn executed after that game turn. Therefore, in this embodiment, accumulated points for a game turn for which the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)" are not carried over to a later game turn.

In step S42009, the effect information area in the game play setting information recording area is updated, and then the effect information setting process is terminated.

Next, the processing group of steps S42011 to S42015 will be described. As described above, the processing group of steps S42011 to S42015 is a processing group that sets the presentation information for a target game round when the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is a "miss (no reach)" and the target game round is set as the final game round of consecutive presentations.

As described above, in step S42010, it is determined whether the consecutive effect final play flag of the reserved play time (preceding reserved play time) immediately before the play time to be processed is ON. Then, if it is determined in step S42010 that the consecutive effect final play flag of the reserved play time immediately before the play time to be processed is not ON (S42010: NO), the process proceeds to step S42011. In other words, if it is determined that a consecutive effect can be executed by setting the reserved play time immediately before the play time to be processed (preceding reserved play time) as the carryover play time and setting the play time to be processed as the consecutive effect final play time, the process proceeds to step S42011.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when a continuous effect is executed in which the final play of the continuous effect is set to a play in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss (no reach)," the number of play times for which the continuous effect is executed (number of play times executed Np) is set to 2. This is because reducing the number of play times for which the continuous effect is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss (no reach)" prevents the player from feeling unnecessary anticipation. Furthermore, when the number of play times in which the continuous effect is executed reaches three or more, the player is made to recognize that the result of the jackpot lottery for the final play of the continuous effect is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach)," giving the player the enjoyment of counting the number of times the continuous effect is executed, and the player's anticipation can be amplified as the number of times the continuous effect is executed increases. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous effect is executed in which the final play of the continuous effect is set to a play in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss (no reach)," the number of play times for which the continuous effect is executed (number of play times executed Np) is set to 2, but this is not limiting, and a configuration in which the number of play times executed Np is set to 3 or 4 may also be used.

In step S42011, the reserved play time (previous reserved play time) immediately preceding the target play time is set as the carryover play time, and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous play with the target play time set as the final play time of the continuous play, i.e., a continuous play time of Np = 2. In this embodiment, this is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. In this embodiment, the probability of the lottery result being that a continuous play will be executed is set to 20%. In other words, the execution of a continuous play (carrying over accumulated points) is set to have a high probability if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)," and a low probability if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss (reach does not occur)." This setting creates a strong sense of anticipation in players who recognize that accumulated points have been carried over during the execution of a play time. After executing step S42011, proceed to step S42012.

In step S42012, it is determined whether a decision was made in step S42011 to execute a continuous effect (Np = 2).

If it is determined in step S42011 that a continuous effect (Np = 2) will not be executed (S42012: NO), proceed to step S42016. In other words, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game is a "miss (no reach)," and it is possible to execute a point-awarding effect that does not have continuity with other game times in the target game time, the process will be performed using the processing group of steps S42016 to S42018. The processing group of steps S42016 to S42018 has been described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42011 that a continuous effect (Np = 2) will be executed (S42012: YES), proceed to step S42013.

In step S42013, a presentation scenario is determined based on the provisional variable time for the game round being processed. In this embodiment, the presentation scenario is determined by referring to the presentation scenario table for non-reach games stored in the sound/light side ROM 93.

Figure 163 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the non-reach presentation scenario table. As shown in the figure, the non-reach presentation scenario table corresponds to two types of presentation scenarios for one variable time (provisional variable time) that can be set for the target game turn.

Figure 164 is an explanatory diagram illustrating, as an example, a presentation scenario corresponding to the provisional variable time T=t24 in the non-reach presentation scenario table. As shown in the figure, each presentation scenario is set so that the variable time corresponds to T=t24, and each scenario differs in the type of presentation executed and the timing at which the point-awarding presentation is executed. Furthermore, no button press presentation is set in the non-reach presentation scenario. That is, the point-awarding scenario described below is set so that the points awarded by the point-awarding presentation do not accumulate to 10 or more. In other words, the accumulation of 10 or more points is limited to when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)." This creates a strong sense of anticipation in the player when 10 or more points are accumulated.

Furthermore, as with the jackpot presentation scenario and reach presentation scenario described above, the fluctuation time of the play count varies depending on the number of reserved play counts at the time the play count corresponding to the presentation scenario is executed. In this embodiment, the greater the number of reserved play counts, the shorter the fluctuation time of the play count. Therefore, in this embodiment, each presentation scenario is prepared for each number of reserved play counts. After executing step S42013, proceed to step S42014.

In step S42014, a point-awarding scenario is determined based on the determined performance scenario. In this process, the point-awarding scenario is determined based on the non-reach point-awarding scenario table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93.

Figure 165 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the non-reach point-awarding scenario table. As shown in the figure, one point-awarding scenario is set corresponding to each performance scenario. In reality, as shown in Figure 165, the non-reach point-awarding scenario table is set so that one point-awarding scenario number corresponds to each performance scenario, and the point-awarding scenario corresponding to the point-awarding scenario number of the point-awarding scenario to be executed is read from the sound/light side ROM 93.

Figure 166 is an explanatory diagram explaining each point-awarding scenario for non-reach situations. As shown in the figure, for each point-awarding scenario, the value of the points to be awarded that matches the presentation scenario to be executed in the game round to be processed is set in the order in which the point-awarding presentation set in the presentation scenario is executed, and the total number of points to be awarded in the preceding game round executed one before is set.

After executing step S42014, proceed to step S42015.

In step S42015, the total points awarded for the preceding game play stored in the point awarding scenario set for the game play to be processed are read. In other words, the total points awarded for the point awarding effect executed in the preceding game play are read. After executing step S42015, proceed to step S42009.

In step S42009, the presentation information area of the game round setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S42011 to S42015 are recorded in the presentation information area of the game round setting information recording area. In other words, the reserved play round one before the target play round is used as the carryover play round, and a continuous presentation is executed using the target play round as the final play round of the continuous presentation. Therefore, the point awarding presentation flag of the presentation information corresponding to the target play round used as the carryover play round is reset to ON, the final play round of the continuous presentation flag is reset to OFF, and the carryover play round flag is reset to ON. The total awarded points are reset to the total awarded points for the target play round read in step S42015. The presentation scenario No. and point awarding scenario No. are reset to NULL. As described above, in this embodiment, only for a game in which the consecutive effect final game round flag is ON, the effect pattern to be executed in that game round is created from the effect scenario and point awarding scenario. For effects to be executed in game rounds in which the consecutive effect final game round flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read and set from a pre-prepared effect pattern table.

Then, the point awarding effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the target play time to be used as the final play time of the consecutive effects is set to ON, the final play time flag of the consecutive effects is set to ON, and the carryover play time flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points is set to NULL. As described above, the total awarded points is a parameter used when determining the effect to be executed in a play time where the final play time flag of the consecutive effects is not ON. For the final play time of the consecutive effects, since the effect scenario and point awarding scenario are set for each point awarding effect, it is not necessary to set the total awarded points. The effect scenario No. is set to the effect scenario No. corresponding to the effect scenario determined in step S42013. The point awarding scenario No. is set to the point awarding scenario No. corresponding to the point awarding scenario determined in step S42014.

In step S42009, the effect information area in the game play setting information recording area is updated, and then the effect information setting process is terminated.

<Performance setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 154: S41807).

Figure 167 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. In step S42101, it is determined whether the consecutive effect final game round flag for the game round to be processed in this process is ON based on the game round setting information storage area (Figure 155). In step S42101, if it is determined that the consecutive effect final game round flag for the game round to be processed is ON (S42101: YES), the process proceeds to step S42102.

In step S42102, the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario set for the target play are read based on the play count setting information storage area (Figure 155). At this time, the presentation scenario corresponding to the number of reserved play counts at the time of this processing is read (see Figure 160 (b)). After executing step S42102, proceed to step S42103.

In step S42103, a presentation pattern is generated based on the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario set for the game session being processed.

Figure 168 is an illustration of an effect pattern generated based on the effect scenario and point-awarding scenario set for the target game turn. The effect scenario records the timing for executing each point-awarding effect and the timing for executing a button press effect. The point-awarding scenario records the number of points to be awarded for each point-awarding effect set in that effect scenario. The sound/light-emitting MPU 92 generates an effect pattern by reading the effect scenario and point-awarding scenario set for the target game turn, and sets it as the effect pattern for that target game turn. As described above, in this embodiment, only for game turns in which the consecutive effect final game turn flag is ON, the effect pattern to be executed for that game turn is generated from the effect scenario and point-awarding scenario. For effects to be executed in game turns in which the consecutive effect final game turn flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read from a pre-prepared effect pattern table and set. After executing step S42103, proceed to step S42107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42101 that the final consecutive effect game round flag for the game round being processed is not ON (S42101: NO), proceed to step S42104.

In step S42104, it is determined whether the point awarding effect flag for the game turn to be processed in this process is ON based on the game turn setting information storage area (Figure 155). If it is determined in step S42104 that the point awarding effect flag for the game turn to be processed is ON (S42104: YES), the process proceeds to step S42105. In other words, if the game turn to be processed is set as a carryover game turn when consecutive effects are executed, or if the game turn to be processed is set to execute a point awarding effect in one of the game turns to be processed, the process proceeds to step S42105.

In step S42105, the presentation pattern for the target game turn is determined based on the variable time and total number of awarded points for that game turn. Specifically, a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time and total number of awarded points is identified from the point awarding presentation pattern table pre-stored in the sound/light side ROM 93, and set as the presentation pattern for that target game turn.

Figure 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the point-awarding effect pattern table. As shown in the figure, the point-awarding effect pattern table stores one effect pattern (point-awarding effect pattern) corresponding to the variable time of the game and the total awarded points.

Figure 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point-awarding effect pattern recorded in the point-awarding effect pattern table. As shown in the figure, the effect patterns recorded in the point-awarding effect pattern table not only set the timing at which the point-awarding effect is executed, but also the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect. In this embodiment, in a game round in which the consecutive effect final game round flag is ON, the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect is set by generating the effect pattern to be executed in that game round from the effect scenario and the point-awarding scenario. However, in a game round in which the consecutive effect final game round flag is not ON, as shown in Figure 170, an effect pattern is prepared in which the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect is preset.

In this way, the same effect pattern table can be used when the target game turn is set as a carryover game turn when consecutive effects are executed, or when the target game turn is set to execute a point-awarding effect in one of the target game turns, thereby reducing data volume. Note that if the target game turn is set as a carryover game turn when consecutive effects are executed, the accumulated points are carried over to the next game turn. If the target game turn is set to execute a point-awarding effect in one of the target game turns, the accumulated points must be reset at the end of the current game turn. However, display control when accumulated points are carried over and when they are not carried over is achieved using the carryover game turn flag in the point accumulation process described below. Therefore, the same effect pattern can be applied when the target game turn is set as a carryover game turn when consecutive effects are executed, or when the target game turn is set to execute a point-awarding effect in one of the target game turns. After executing step S42105 (FIG. 167), proceed to step S42107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42104 that the point awarding effect flag for the game to be processed is not ON (S42104: NO), the process proceeds to step S42106. In other words, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the game to be processed is a "miss (no reach)" and the point awarding effect is not executed for the game, the process proceeds to step S42106.

In step S42106, a presentation pattern is determined based on the variable time of the game round being processed. Specifically, a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time is identified from the normal presentation pattern table pre-stored in the sound/light side ROM 93, and set as the presentation pattern for the game round being processed. The normal presentation pattern table stores one presentation pattern for each variable time of the game round. After executing step S42016, proceed to step S42107.

In step S42107, a process for setting the LCD symbols to be stopped is executed. In the LCD symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is formed on the active line L is set as the information for the current stopped symbols. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the same symbol combination, and a combination of the same even symbols may also be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for combinations of the same odd symbols and combinations of the same even symbols. However, instead, the former may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the latter, or the latter may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the former. Additionally, the "7" symbol combination will only be selected in the case of a 16R special jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery for this game is a 16R regular jackpot or an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even symbols will be selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for this game is a miss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, the information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of identical symbols does not occur on the active line L, but a reach symbol combination occurs on the active line L, is determined as the information on the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, the information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of identical symbols does not occur on the active line L, but a reach symbol combination does not occur on the active line L, is set as the information on the current stop symbol. After executing step S42107, proceed to step S42108.

In step S42108, a process for setting a variable display pattern is executed. In this process, information about the variable time for the current game round is identified from the content of the currently received variable command, and a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of this variable time information and the information about the stopped symbols identified in step S42107 above is selected. When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced. After executing step S42108, the process proceeds to step S42109.

In step S42109, the effect pattern, LCD symbol to be stopped, and variable display pattern set in the processing of steps S42103, S42105, and S42106 are set as an effect command, and processing proceeds to step S42110.

In step S42110, the set performance command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the pattern display device 41. Then, proceed to step S42111.

In step S42111, the pending information is updated. Specifically, the information in the total pending number counter area of the audio/visual side RAM 94 is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area is decremented by 1. After executing step S42111, proceed to step S42112.

In step S42112, an update process is performed on the game round setting information storage area 94d (Figure 155). If the game round being processed is triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33, the game round setting information (first determination information and presentation information) stored in the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port is shifted to the storage area for the adjacent reserved game round, as shown in Figure 155(a). If the game round being processed is triggered by a ball entering the second starting port 34, the game round setting information (first determination information and presentation information) stored in the game round setting information storage area for the second starting port is shifted to the storage area for the adjacent reserved game round, as shown in Figure 155(b). After step S42110 is executed, the presentation setting process is terminated.

<Point awarding effect execution process>
Next, the point-awarding effect execution process will be described. As described above, the point-awarding effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point-awarding effect during the execution of a game round. The point-awarding effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 153: S41703).

Figure 171 is a flowchart showing the point awarding effect execution process. In step S42201, point accumulation processing is executed. The point accumulation processing controls the start of execution of the point awarding effect and controls the display of points awarded in the point awarding effect as a pearl image representing accumulated points on stage St. Details of the point accumulation processing will be described later. After executing step S42201, proceed to step S42202.

In step S42202, point replenishment control processing is executed. When 10 accumulated points have been accumulated (replenished), point replenishment control processing determines whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect in response to the replenishment, and controls the execution of one of the effects. Details of point replenishment control processing will be described later. After step S42202 is executed, step S42203 is executed.

In step S42203, button press effect processing is executed. The button press effect processing is processing that controls the execution of the button press effect. Details of the button press effect processing will be described later. After executing step S42203, proceed to step S42204.

In step S42204, point reset processing is executed. The point reset processing is a process that determines whether accumulated points should be reset or carried over when a game session ends, and controls the execution of resetting accumulated points. Details of the point reset processing will be described later. After executing step S42204, proceed to step S42205.

In step S42205, stage display control processing is executed. The stage display control processing is processing for controlling the color of the stage St. Details of the stage display control processing will be described later. After step S42205 is executed, this point-granting effect execution processing is terminated.

<Point accumulation process>
Next, the point accumulation process will be described. The point accumulation process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point-giving effect execution process (FIG. 171: S42201).

Figure 172 is a flowchart showing the point accumulation process. In step S42301, it is determined whether the point awarding effect flag is ON. The point awarding effect flag is a flag that is turned ON when the execution of a point awarding effect is started during the execution of a game round, and is turned OFF when the point awarding effect ends. In step S42301, if it is determined that the point awarding effect flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the point awarding effect has not started (S42301: NO), the process proceeds to step S42302.

In step S42302, it is determined whether it is time to start the point-awarding effect based on the effect pattern set for the game session being processed. If it is determined in step S42302 that it is time to start the point-awarding effect (S42302: YES), the process proceeds to step S42303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42302 that it is not time to start the point-awarding effect (S42302: NO), the point accumulation process is terminated.

In step S42303, the number of points to be awarded in the starting point-awarding effect is read from the effect pattern set for the game session being processed. After executing step S42303, proceed to step S42304.

In step S42304, a point awarding effect video display start command corresponding to the number of points to be awarded is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the point awarding effect video display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display, on the pattern display device 41, a point awarding effect video corresponding to the number of points to be awarded. After executing step S42304, the process proceeds to step S42305.

In step S42305, audio corresponding to the point-awarding effect video corresponding to the number of points to be awarded is started to be output, and control is started to cause the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point-awarding effect video. After executing step S42305, proceed to step S42306.

In step S42306, the point-granting effect execution flag is turned ON. After step S42306 is executed, this point accumulation process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42301 that the point awarding effect flag is ON, i.e., if it is determined that the point awarding effect has started (S42301: YES), proceed to step S42307.

In step S42307, it is determined whether or not the timing has come when the points have been awarded in the point awarding performance that has started. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pearl displaying the number of awarded points has reached stage St after being dropped by the turtle character in the point awarding performance (see Figure 127). If it is determined in step S42307 that the points have not been awarded in the point awarding performance that has started (S42307: NO), this point accumulation process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42307 that the points have been awarded in the point awarding performance that has started (S42307: YES), the process proceeds to step S42308.

In step S42308, the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is updated according to the number of awarded points. The accumulated point counter Cpnt is a counter for counting the value of accumulated points. In step S42308, if points are awarded in the point awarding effect, a value corresponding to the number of awarded points is added to the accumulated point counter Cpnt. After executing step S42308, proceed to step S42309.

In step S42309, it is determined whether the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 10 or greater. In other words, it is determined whether points are awarded through the point awarding effect and the accumulated points are 10 or greater. If it is determined in step S42309 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is not 10 or greater (S42309: NO), proceed to step S42310.

In step S42310, a point accumulation video display start command corresponding to the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The point accumulation video is a video that displays a number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulated points on the stage St. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point accumulation video display start command, it executes processing to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an effect video that displays a number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulated point counter Cpnt on the stage St. After executing step S42310, the process proceeds to step S42311.

In step S42311, audio corresponding to the point accumulation video begins to be output, and control begins to cause the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point accumulation video. After executing step S42311, proceed to step S42312.

In step S42312, the point-granting effect execution flag is turned OFF. Then, this point accumulation process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42309 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 10 points or more (S42309: YES), proceed to step S42313.

In step S42313, the value of the recharged counter Cw is incremented by 1. The recharged counter Cw is a counter that is incremented by 1 every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated. After executing step S42313, proceed to step S42314.

In step S42314, the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is decremented by 10. After executing step S42314, proceed to step S42315.

In step S42315, the unprocessed flag is turned ON. The unprocessed flag is turned ON when 10 accumulated points have been accumulated and the process of determining whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for those 10 accumulated points has not yet been performed, and is turned OFF when that process is completed. Note that the process of determining whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for those 10 accumulated points is performed in the point replenishment control process described below. After executing step S42315, proceed again to step S42309.

In other words, steps S42313 to S42315 are repeated until the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt becomes less than 10. The value of the recharged counter Cw is then incremented by the number of times steps S42313 to S42315 are executed. In other words, if 10 accumulated points are viewed as one accumulated point group, the number of accumulated point groups included in the accumulated points after points are awarded through the point awarding effect is counted, and the number of accumulated point groups is added to the recharged counter Cw (S42313), and the accumulated points corresponding to the number of accumulated point groups added to the recharged counter Cw are subtracted from the accumulated point counter Cpnt (S42314).

After executing steps S42313 to S42315, the process proceeds again to step S42309. If it is determined that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is not 10 points or more (S42309: NO), the process proceeds to step S42310. The process from step S42310 onwards has been described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

<Control process when filling points>
The point replenishment control process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point awarding effect execution process (FIG. 171: S42202).

Figure 173 is a flowchart showing the control processing when points are replenished. In step S42401, it is determined whether the unprocessed flag is ON. As described above, the unprocessed flag is set ON when 10 accumulated points have been accumulated and the process of determining whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for those 10 accumulated points has not yet been performed, and is set OFF when the process of determining whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for those 10 accumulated points has been completed.

If it is determined in step S42401 that the unprocessed flag is ON (S42401: YES), the process proceeds to step S42404. The processes of steps S42404 to S42411 determine whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for 10 accumulated points, and control the execution of either effect. Therefore, if it is determined that the unprocessed flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that 10 accumulated points have been accumulated, the processes of steps S42404 to S42411 are executed to determine whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for 10 accumulated points, and control the execution of either effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S42401: NO), proceed to step S42402.

In step S42402, it is determined whether a change command or type command has been received. In other words, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round of play. If it is determined in step S42402 that a change command or type command has been received, that is, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round of play (S42402: YES), the process proceeds to step S42403.

In step S42403, it is determined whether the recharged counter Cw = 0. If it is determined in step S42403 that the recharged counter Cw is not 0 (S42403: NO), proceed to step S42404. In other words, if there is one or more accumulated point groups equivalent to the 10 accumulated points described above, proceed to step S42404.

Here, we will explain why the process proceeds to step S42404 when it is determined in step S42402 that a variation command or type command has been received (S42402: YES) and it is determined in step S42403 that the filled counter Cw is not equal to 0 (S42403: NO).

In this embodiment, the trigger for executing either the standby effect or the timer effect is when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated, as well as when a new game round begins. When the game round in which the standby effect is being executed ends and the next new game round begins, and the new game round is the final game round of the consecutive effects, the timer effect is executed instead of the standby effect. Explained using Figure 131, the standby effect that began execution in game round U2, which is the carryover game round, switches to timer effect 1 when game round U3, the final game round of the consecutive effects, begins.

Therefore, even if it is determined in step S42401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S42401: NO), if it is determined by executing step S42402 that a new round of play has begun (S42402: YES), and if it is determined by executing step S42403 that one or more accumulated point groups (10 accumulated points) exist (S42403: NO), it is necessary to proceed to step S42404 and execute the processes of steps S42404 to S42411 to determine whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for the 10 accumulated points. Therefore, if it is determined in step S42402 that a fluctuation command or type command has been received (S42402: YES), and it is determined in step S42403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S42403: NO), it is necessary to proceed to step S42404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42402 that a variation command or type command has not been received (S42402: NO), and if it is determined in step S42403 that the refilled counter Cw = 0 (S42403: YES), this point refill control process is terminated.

In step S42404, it is determined whether the carryover play count flag for the game count to be processed is ON. If it is determined in step S42404 that the carryover play count flag for the game count to be processed is ON (S42404: YES), the process proceeds to step S42405.

In step S42405, a command to start displaying a video for standby effects corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw is sent to the display-side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the command to start displaying a video for standby effects corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw, it executes processing to display the standby effect video on the pattern display device 41. For example, if the filled counter Cw = 1, one image (see Figure 133) indicating a standby effect is displayed. If the filled counter Cw = 2, two images indicating a standby effect are displayed. After executing step S42405, the process proceeds to step S42406.

In step S42406, audio corresponding to the standby effect video is started to be output, and control is started to cause the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the standby effect video. After step S42406 is executed, the process proceeds to step S42411.

In step S42411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. Then, this point refueling control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42404 that the carryover play count flag for the play count being processed is not ON (S42404: NO), proceed to step S42407.

In step S42407, the time until a button effect is executed is obtained based on the effect pattern for the game turn being processed. For example, if one button press effect is executed in the game turn being processed, the time until that button press effect is executed is obtained; if two button press effects are executed in the game turn being processed, the time until both button press effects are executed is obtained. After executing step S42407, proceed to step S42408.

In step S42408, a timer effect video display start command corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect is sent to the display-side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the timer effect video display start command, it executes processing to display, on the symbol display device 41, a timer effect video corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect is executed. For example, if one button press effect is executed in the game turn being processed, a timer effect video is displayed that displays a countdown of the time until the button press effect is executed. If two button press effects are executed in the game turn being processed, a timer effect video is displayed that displays a countdown of the time until the first button press effect is executed, and a timer effect video is displayed that displays a countdown of the time until the second button press effect is executed (see FIG. 135(a)). After executing step S42408, proceed to step S42409.

In step S42409, audio corresponding to each timer effect video is started to be output, and control is started to cause the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to that timer effect video. After step S42409 is executed, the process proceeds to step S42410.

In step S42410, the value of the filled counter Cw is reset to 0. After executing step S42410, proceed to step S42411.

As described above, in step S42411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. Then, this point refueling control process ends.

<Button press effect processing>
Next, the button press effect processing will be described. The button press effect processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point award effect execution processing (FIG. 171: S42203).

Figure 174 is a flowchart showing the button press effect processing. In step S42501, it is determined whether it is time to start the button press effect based on the effect pattern set for the game round being processed. If it is determined in step S42501 that it is time to start the button press effect (S42501: YES), the process proceeds to step S42502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42501 that it is not time to start the button press effect (S42501: NO), the button press effect processing ends.

In step S42502, a button press effect video display start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the button press effect video display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display the button press effect video (see FIG. 130(b)) on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S42502, the process proceeds to step S42503.

In step S42503, audio corresponding to the button press effect video is output, and control is started to cause the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the button press effect video. After step S42503 is executed, this button press effect processing ends.

<Point reset process>
Next, the point reset process will be described. The point reset process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 171: S42204).

Figure 175 is a flowchart showing the point reset process. In step S42601, it is determined whether it is time to end the game round based on the presentation pattern set for the game round being processed. If it is determined in step S42601 that it is time to end the game round (S42601: YES), the process proceeds to step S42602.

In step S42602, it is determined whether the carryover play count flag is ON. If it is determined in step S42602 that the carryover play count flag is not ON (S42602: NO), the process proceeds to step S42603.

In step S42603, the accumulated point counter Cpnt is reset (Cpnt←0). In other words, accumulated points are not carried over for play times other than carryover play times, which are play times in which accumulated points are carried over, so at the end of that play time, the accumulated point counter Cpnt corresponding to the accumulated points for that play time is set to 0. After step S42603 is executed, this point reset process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42601 that it is not time to end the game (S42601: NO), and if it is determined in step S42602 that the carryover game time flag is ON (S42602: YES), the accumulated point counter Cpnt is not reset and this point reset process is terminated.

<Stage display control process>
Next, the stage display control process will be described. The stage display control process is a process for controlling the color of the stage St. The stage display control process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point-giving performance execution process (FIG. 171: S42205).

Figure 176 is a flowchart showing the stage display control process. In step S42701, it is determined whether the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 0. If it is determined in step S42701 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 0 (S42701: YES), the process proceeds to step S42702.

In step S42702, a stage video display start command that sets the color of the stage St to white is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the stage video display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display a stage video in which the color of the stage St is set to white on the symbol display device 41. In this embodiment, if no points have been accumulated, the stage St is set to white even if the game turn being processed is a carryover game turn or the final game turn of a consecutive effect. After executing step S42702, this stage display control processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42701 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is not 0 (S42701: NO), proceed to step S42703.

In step S42703, it is determined whether the carryover play count flag for the game count to be processed is ON. If it is determined in step S42703 that the carryover play count flag for the game count to be processed is ON (S42703: YES), the process proceeds to step S42704.

In step S42704, a stage video display start command that sets the color of the stage St to yellow is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the stage video display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display a stage video in which the color of the stage St has been set to yellow on the symbol display device 41. As described above, in this embodiment, if points have been accumulated in the carryover play, the color of the stage St is set to yellow. After executing step S42704, this stage display control processing ends.

If it is determined in step S42703 that the carryover play count flag for the play count being processed is not ON (S42703: NO), proceed to step S42705.

In step S42705, a stage video display start command that sets the color of the stage St to orange is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the stage video display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display a stage video in which the color of the stage St has been set to orange on the symbol display device 41. As described above, in this embodiment, if points have been accumulated in the final game of the continuous performance, the color of the stage St is set to orange. After executing step S42705, this stage display control processing ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include main processing, which is executed repeatedly from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90, and V interrupt processing, which is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected simultaneously, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 177 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step S42801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 is cleared. Next, compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written to the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Other settings required for initialization are also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S42802.

In step S42802, interrupt permission is set. Once interrupt permission is set, the main processing executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, once interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 178 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S42901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described below, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and then instructs the VDP 105 to draw and display that image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated by the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed. As a result, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process for the image is completed, which prevents the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information currently being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are explained below.

In step S43001, command response processing is executed. In command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing (Figure 178) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to that command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command has been stored, control of image drawing and display is initiated so that the performance mode specified by that performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a performance operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed. If it is determined that it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode corresponding to the pressing of the performance operation button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, the contents of the next command are analyzed without executing any processing.

The command response process (S43001) analyzes all commands currently stored in the command memory area and executes processing corresponding to all analyzed commands. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed every 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command memory area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of a performance is set by the audio and light control device 90 and the performance begins, it is highly likely that various commands for specifying the content of that performance will be stored in the command memory area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the type of performance, such as the preview performance or LCD pattern set by the audio and light control device 90, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that type is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step S43002, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which was set by the command response process (S43001) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S43003.

In step S43003, task processing is executed. In task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as determined by the display setting process (S43002), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up that image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S43004.

In step S43004, drawing processing is executed. In drawing processing, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters required to draw each character, as determined by task processing (S43003), are sent to VDP 105. VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and sends the image data to pattern display device 41 along with a drive signal to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S43005, where other processing is executed, and V interrupt processing is terminated.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the presentation scenario is set so that a button press effect is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)." Therefore, by executing the button press effect, a sense of anticipation can be created in players who recognize that there is a high probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)" when the button press effect is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the performance scenario is set to execute a button press performance, points are awarded so that the accumulated points reach 10 or more by executing a point awarding performance before the button press performance is executed. Therefore, by executing the point awarding performance, a sense of anticipation can be created for the player, who recognizes that the button press performance will be executed when the accumulated points reach 10 or more, each time the point awarding performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the accumulated points accumulated in a game round may be reset at the end of that game round, or may be carried over to the next game round without being reset. By resetting the accumulated points at the end of that game round, the player is encouraged to accumulate 10 or more accumulated points by the end of the game round, further increasing the player's anticipation for the point awarding effect. Furthermore, once a game round has begun and the player recognizes that points have been accumulated through the execution of the point awarding effect, this makes the player aware of the time when the game round will end, when the accumulated points may be reset, and allows the player to pay attention to the manner in which the accumulated points are accumulated, i.e., the manner in which the point awarding effect is executed.

In addition, since accumulated points may be carried over to the next game, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in the current game, the points accumulated in that game will be valid if they are carried over to the next game, which helps prevent a decrease in the player's expectations due to not accumulating 10 points or more.

In this embodiment, the color of the stage St indicates to the player whether or not accumulated points will be carried over. This gives the player a sense of anticipation that even in a game where 10 or more accumulated points are not accumulated, there is a possibility that 10 or more accumulated points will be accumulated in the next game, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's anticipation in a game where 10 or more accumulated points are not accumulated.

In this embodiment, a button press effect is used as the process that is executed when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated. When 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated and the player has a sense of accomplishment, a further button press effect is executed, which actively engages the player in the game, drawing even more attention to the game and further increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

In this embodiment, accumulated points are indicated to the player as an image of a pearl on stage St, allowing the player to always be aware of their accumulated points.

In this embodiment, a timer effect is executed, which continuously creates a sense of anticipation for the button press effect to be executed after the time indicated by the timer effect has elapsed during the period from when the timer effect is executed to when the button press effect is executed. Furthermore, the timer effect counts down the remaining time until the button press effect, so the indicated remaining time decreases, increasing the player's sense of anticipation as the timing for the button press effect to be executed approaches.

In addition, even if 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the standby effect may begin and the timer effect may not be executed immediately after 10 accumulated points are accumulated. Therefore, by recognizing whether or not the timer effect will be executed immediately after 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the player can enjoy guessing when the button press effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a timer effect is executed in the game round in which the button press effect is executed, so when a timer effect is executed in the game round, it is possible to draw the player's attention to that game round and create a sense of anticipation.

In this embodiment, if 10 accumulated points are accumulated and the timer effect is to be executed in the next or subsequent play, the standby effect is executed before the timer effect is executed. Therefore, even during the period between when 10 accumulated points are accumulated and when the timer effect is executed, the execution of the standby effect makes the player aware that the timer effect will be executed in a later play, and maintains the player's anticipation for the timer effect.

In this embodiment, the processing details for a given game turn, such as whether or not to execute a point-awarding effect in that game turn, the number of points to be awarded in the point-awarding effect, whether or not accumulated points will be carried over, whether or not to execute a standby effect, whether or not to execute a timer effect, and which game turn to execute a button-press effect, are determined based on special information for game turns executed after that game turn (hereinafter also referred to as a subsequent game turn). More specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the subsequent game turn is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurs)," a continuous effect may be executed with that subsequent game turn set as the final game turn of the continuous effect, and in that case, that game turn is set as a carryover game turn. In other words, the processing details for that game turn are determined based on special information for the subsequent game turn. In this way, it is possible to maintain correlation across multiple game turns regarding each of the processing details, such as whether or not to execute a point-awarding effect, the number of points to be awarded in the point-awarding effect, whether or not accumulated points will be carried over, whether or not to execute a standby effect, whether or not to execute a timer effect, and whether or not to execute a button-press effect. By linking the processing content of each game round with the processing content of other game rounds, for example, when a predetermined process is executed in a game round currently being played, the player is not only prompted to speculate about the relationship between that predetermined process and the progress of that game round, but is also prompted to speculate about the relationship between that predetermined process and the progress of subsequent game rounds. In other words, no matter how the game progresses in the current game round, various possibilities remain for the progress of subsequent game rounds, keeping the player's sense of anticipation alive.

In addition, in this embodiment, a presentation scenario is prepared in which the more times a button press effect is executed in a continuous presentation, the more the presentation executed after each button press effect develops (the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery suggested by the effect). This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for the game each time the player presses the effect operation button 24 in a button press effect. Therefore, even if the continuous presentation is long, by increasing the number of button press effects according to the length of the continuous presentation period, it is possible to prevent the player's concentration from decreasing and further increase their sense of anticipation.

D7. Modification of the fourth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, including the following modifications: In the modifications described below, the same configurations and processes as those of the above-described embodiment will not be described.

D7-1. Variation 1:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which points are always awarded when a specific effect is executed. As an example of realizing such a configuration, it can be realized by setting the effect scenario and the point awarding scenario in advance.

Specifically, the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario are set to include the case where a point awarding presentation with non-zero awarded points is executed after a predetermined presentation (for example, a normal reach presentation), and the case where a point awarding presentation with zero awarded points is executed. In this case, the case where a point awarding presentation with non-zero awarded points is executed and the case where a point awarding presentation with zero awarded points is executed may be set to one presentation scenario and point awarding scenario, or they may be set to separate presentation scenarios and point awarding scenarios. Furthermore, instead of a configuration where a point awarding presentation with zero awarded points is executed after a predetermined presentation, a configuration where no point awarding presentation is executed after a predetermined presentation may be adopted, or both may be adopted.

On the other hand, the performance scenario and point awarding scenario are set so that a point awarding performance in which the awarded points are not 0 is always executed after a specific performance (for example, a super reach performance). The specific performance may be a specific reach performance or a specific cut-in performance, or a dedicated performance to suggest that a point awarding performance in which the awarded points are not 0 will be executed.

By doing this, if a specific effect is executed in a game round, points will always be awarded in that game round, which gives players who want points a sense of anticipation for the execution of the specific effect and attracts their attention to the game. Furthermore, when a specific effect is executed, it gives players who were hoping for points a sense of excitement, which can increase their interest in the game.

For example, if the accumulated points are 9 and one more point is awarded to bring the accumulated points to 10 or more, causing a button press effect to be executed, the player can be given a strong sense of anticipation for a specific effect to be executed. Furthermore, if a specific effect is executed and points are awarded in such a situation, the player can be given a strong sense of accomplishment.

D7-2. Variation 2:
In the fourth embodiment, if accumulated points in a current game are carried over to the next game, points may be awarded in the game after that game. As an example of realizing such a configuration, it can be realized by setting the performance scenario and the point awarding scenario in advance.

Specifically, the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario set for the final play of the consecutive presentation are set to a point awarding presentation in which the awarded points are always unequal to zero. Furthermore, in the point awarding scenario, a total number of points is set that is always unequal to zero for the carryover play times after the first carryover play time in the consecutive presentation.

By doing this, players who wish to receive points can be given a sense of anticipation that their accumulated points will be carried over at the end of a round of play. This allows players to keep their attention on the game even at the end of that round of play. Furthermore, when accumulated points are carried over at the end of a round of play, players who wished to receive points can be given a sense of anticipation that points will be awarded in a round of play that follows, and a sense of excitement can be created, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

For example, if a player knows that if accumulated points are carried over, points will definitely be awarded in the next round of play, and if the accumulated points are at 9 but the round is about to end, if the accumulated points are carried over, points will definitely be awarded in the next round of play and the button press effect will be executed, which gives the player a strong sense of anticipation that the accumulated points will be carried over and prevents a decrease in anticipation if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the current round of play. Furthermore, if accumulated points are carried over in such a situation, it can give the player a strong sense of accomplishment.

Furthermore, when accumulated points in a current game are carried over to the next game, the configuration is not limited to one in which points are always awarded in a game after the current game. Alternatively, if a specific effect (for example, an effect in which a blue crayfish character appears) is executed in a current game, points may be always awarded in a game after that game. This can create a sense of anticipation for future game times for players who have executed a specific effect in the current game.

D7-3. Variation 3:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which, in a point-awarding effect executed in a series of game times in which consecutive effects are executed, a limit is placed on the number of times that a point-awarding effect in which the awarded points are 0 is executed. Alternatively, in a point-awarding effect executed in only one game time, a limit may be placed on the number of times that a point-awarding effect in which the awarded points are 0 is executed. As an example of realizing such a configuration, it can be realized by setting the effect scenario and the point-awarding scenario in advance.

Let me explain in more detail. As mentioned above, the point-awarding scenario sets the number of points to be awarded for each point-awarding effect executed in the final play of a series of consecutive effects. Therefore, a limit is placed on the number of times that the value "0" can be set as the number of points to be awarded for each point-awarding effect. For example, the number of times that the value "0" can be set as the number of points to be awarded is limited to three or fewer times.

In addition, for presentation patterns used for carryover play times and play times in which point awarding effects are executed after only one play time, there will be a limit on the number of "0" points that can be set as the value for the number of points to be awarded for each point awarding effect.

By doing this, a player who recognizes that the number of times a point-awarding effect with 0 awarded points has been executed has reached the upper limit can be given a strong sense of anticipation that the point-awarding effect will be executed. This is because, if the number of times a point-awarding effect with 0 awarded points has been executed has reached the upper limit, points will always be awarded when a point-awarding effect is executed thereafter. Therefore, even when a point-awarding effect with 0 awarded points is executed, a player can be given a sense of anticipation that the number of times a point-awarding effect with 0 awarded points has been executed has reached the upper limit.

In other words, when a point-awarding effect is executed, if the awarded points are not 0, points are awarded, giving the player a sense of excitement. Also, even if the awarded points are 0, the player can be given a sense of anticipation (a sense of anticipation that the number of times a point-awarding effect with 0 awarded points has been executed will reach the upper limit). As a result, the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened both when a point-awarding effect with 0 awarded points is executed and when a point-awarding effect with 0 awarded points is executed.

D7-4. Variation 4:
The configuration may be such that an effect (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled effect) that is executed when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in a predetermined game round can be executed in the game round. Also, the configuration may be such that the unfilled effect is executed at a predetermined rate when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points.

Furthermore, when an unfilled effect is executed, the higher the accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect is executed, the higher the expectation (probability) that the jackpot lottery result for that game will be a "jackpot."

Specifically, the settings are made so that an effect scenario that executes an unfilled effect is more likely to be selected if the result of the jackpot lottery for that game is a "jackpot." For example, if the effect scenario is selected by lottery using lottery random numbers and lottery table data, the lottery table data is set so that an unfilled effect is executed if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot." The lottery table data is then set so that the probability of that effect scenario being selected is low (e.g., less than 30%) in cases other than when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot." Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot," the point-awarding scenario applied to that effect scenario is set so that the accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect are relatively high (e.g., 8 or 9 points). Conversely, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss (reach occurs)," the point-awarding scenario applied to that effect scenario is set so that the accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect are relatively low (e.g., 4 or 5 points).

By doing this, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a given number of plays and the button press effect is not executed, if the unfilled effect is executed, the more accumulated points there are, the higher the expectation (probability) that the jackpot lottery result will be a "jackpot" in that given number of plays, giving the player a sense of anticipation. In other words, if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a given number of plays and the button press effect is not executed, and there are a relatively large number of accumulated points, the player can be given a sense of anticipation that the unfilled effect will be executed.

In addition, the unfilled effect may be configured so that the effect content varies depending on the amount of accumulated points before the unfilled effect is executed.

By doing this, regardless of the amount of accumulated points, players can be drawn to the content of the unfilled effect, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

The following configuration may also be adopted. That is, the configuration may be such that the effect executed after the execution of the unfilled effect (hereinafter also referred to as the unfilled development effect) can be executed in a game round. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the expectation (probability) of the result of the jackpot lottery for that game round being a "jackpot" is higher when the accumulated points are less than 10 points and the unfilled development effect is executed after the execution of the unfilled effect, than when the accumulated points are 10 points or more and the button press effect is executed. For example, if the effect scenario is selected by lottery using random numbers and lottery table data, the lottery table data is set so that the unfilled effect and the unfilled development effect are executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot." Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery is anything other than a "jackpot," the lottery table data is set so that the probability of the effect scenario being selected is low (for example, less than 5 percent). Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is anything other than a "jackpot," this configuration can be achieved by setting the lottery table data so that the probability of the relevant presentation scenario being selected is lower than the probability of a presentation scenario including a button press presentation being selected.

By doing this, the expectation (probability) that the jackpot lottery result for that game turn will be a "jackpot" is higher when the unfilled development effect is executed than when the button press effect is executed. Therefore, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in a game turn and the button press effect is not executed, if the unfilled development effect is executed, the player can be given a strong sense of anticipation that the unfilled development effect will be executed thereafter. Furthermore, since the expectation (probability) that the jackpot lottery result for that game turn will be a "jackpot" is higher when the unfilled development effect is executed than when the button press effect is executed, an even stronger sense of anticipation can be given to a player who recognizes that the unfilled development effect has been executed. In summary, the button press effect is executed when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more, creating a sense of anticipation for the player. Even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points, the player can be given a sense of anticipation that the unfilled development effect will be executed. Furthermore, if the unfilled development effect is executed, the player can be given a strong sense of anticipation that the unfilled development effect will be executed. This gives players a sense of anticipation no matter what the game situation is.

D7-5. Variation 5:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of each display (hereinafter collectively referred to as game number display) of the first executed game number display shown in the first executed game number display area J1, the first reserved game number display shown in the first reserved display area Ds1, the second executed game number display shown in the second executed game number display area J2, and the second reserved game number display shown in the second reserved display area Ds2 is changed. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a temporal correlation between the timing of awarding points (i.e., the timing of executing the point awarding effect) and the timing of changing the display mode of the game number display.

In this case, the display mode of the game number display may indicate the possibility (expectation level) of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery for the game number corresponding to each game number display.

By correlating the timing of the change in the display mode of the number of plays displayed and the awarding of points in this way, the player's sense of anticipation can be synergistically increased.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, while a game is being played, the display mode of the game number display is changed and then a point awarding effect is executed within a predetermined time (e.g., within one second). In this case, an even stronger sense of anticipation and excitement can be imparted to a player who has become more excited upon recognizing that the display mode of the game number display has changed, by having the player recognize that the point awarding effect has been executed within the predetermined time. Note that if the game number for which the display mode of the game number display is being changed is a game number that is currently being played, an even stronger sense of anticipation and excitement can be imparted to the player.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing of changing the display mode of the game number display and the timing of executing the point awarding effect are simultaneous during the execution of a game round. In this case, by making the player aware of the change in the display mode of the game round display and the execution of the point awarding effect at the same time, the player's sense of anticipation can be synergistically increased. Furthermore, if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is changed is the game round currently being executed, an even stronger sense of anticipation and excitement can be imparted to the player.

A further configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the game number display is changed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after the point awarding effect is executed during the execution of a game round. In this case, an even stronger sense of anticipation and elation can be imparted to a player whose sense of anticipation has increased upon recognizing that the point awarding effect has been executed, by having the player recognize that the display mode of the game number display has changed within the predetermined time. Furthermore, if the game round for which the display mode of the game number display is being changed is the game round currently being executed, an even stronger sense of anticipation and elation can be imparted to the player.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode after the change in the number of plays display correlates with the number of points awarded by the point awarding effect. By doing so, if the display mode after the change in the number of plays display matches the player's expectations, i.e., if the display mode after the change in the number of plays display is a display mode that suggests high expectations, and if the number of points awarded by the point awarding effect is relatively large, it is possible to give the player an even stronger sense of expectation and superiority.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the expected level suggested by the display mode after the change in the game count display, the greater the number of points awarded by the point-awarding effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game count display. That is, when the display mode after the change in the game count display is a first display mode, the number of points awarded by the point-awarding effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode may be defined as a first number of points; and when the display mode after the change in the game count display is a second display mode suggesting a higher expected level than the first display mode, the number of points awarded by the point-awarding effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode may be defined as a second number of points, in which case the average number of second points may be greater than the average number of first points.

By doing this, when there is a high expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery for a given game turn will be a "jackpot," there is a high probability that the display mode of the game turn display will be changed to the second display mode.Furthermore, when the game turn display changes to the second display mode, the number of points awarded by the point awarding effect, which is executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game turn display, is often greater than when it changes to the first display mode.Therefore, by executing the change in the display mode of the game turn display and the execution of the point awarding effect in a timing correlation, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's anticipation for the result of the jackpot lottery.

All of the above configurations can be realized by setting the display mode of the game number display in a presentation scenario. For example, by using a presentation scenario set so that the display mode of the game number display changes from white to red simultaneously with the execution of the point awarding presentation, it is possible to realize one of the above configurations, in which the timing for changing the display mode of the game number display and the timing for executing the point awarding presentation are simultaneous during the execution of a game number.

Furthermore, by applying a point awarding scenario in which a presentation scenario is set to change the game count display to a display mode that suggests high expectations, and a point awarding scenario in which the number of points awarded by the point awarding effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game count display is set to a large value, it is possible to realize one of the configurations described above, in which the higher the expectation suggested by the display mode after the change in the game count display, the greater the number of points awarded by the point awarding effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game count display. Shapes, patterns, colors, characters, etc. can be used as the display mode of the game count display.

Furthermore, the effect that has a temporal correlation with the timing at which the display mode of the game number display is changed is not limited to a configuration in which the point-awarding effect is the effect. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which there is a temporal correlation between the timing at which the display mode of the game number display is changed and the timing at which a predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) is executed in a game number. This can also synergistically increase the player's anticipation for the outcome of the jackpot lottery.

D7-6. Variation 6:
In the fourth embodiment, the number of points to be awarded for each point-awarding effect executed in the final game of the consecutive effects was preset in the point-awarding scenario (see FIG. 162 ). However, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect is set in real time during the execution of the final game of the consecutive effects. For example, the point-awarding scenario may be configured to include information on the number of times the point-awarding effect will be executed in the final game of the consecutive effects and the total number of points to be awarded in the final game of the consecutive effects. After the start of the final game of the consecutive effects, a lottery is held based on this information to determine the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect. This makes it difficult for a player to guess the pattern in which points will be awarded, thereby attracting the player's attention to the game.

D7-7. Variation 7:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect of reducing accumulated points is executed. This can add a sense of excitement to the player's game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which points are increased and a button press effect is executed when the points reach 10 points, but a configuration may also be adopted in which a predetermined number of points are accumulated from the start of a game round, an effect of subtracting points is executed, and a button press effect is executed when the accumulated points reach or exceed the predetermined number of points. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which 10 points are accumulated at the start of a game round, and points are gradually reduced by an effect of subtracting points, and a button press effect is executed when the points reach 0 points.

D7-8. Variation 8:
In the above embodiment, the timing of the point awarding effect is set in advance in the effect scenario, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration and other configurations may also be used. This will be described in detail below.

In the fourth embodiment, when setting the effect for the final game of a series of consecutive effects, a configuration was adopted in which a configuration scenario was used in which the timing for executing the point-awarding effect was preset. However, in this modified example, a configuration was adopted in which a configuration scenario was used in which one or more timings at which the point-awarding effect can be executed, i.e., one or more candidate timings for the timing for executing the point-awarding effect (hereinafter also referred to as candidate timings), was set. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when setting the effect for a game in which a point-awarding effect is executed using only one game, and when setting the effect for a carryover game, a configuration was adopted in which a configuration pattern was used in which the timing for executing the point-awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect were preset. However, in this modified example, a configuration was adopted in which a configuration scenario was used in which one or more candidate timings were set, as in the case of setting the effect for the final game of a series of consecutive effects.

Figure 180 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the presentation scenario and point award scenario for the final play of the consecutive performance in Variation 8. As an example, Figure 180 shows the presentation scenario and point award scenario for the carryover play round and the final play round of the consecutive performance for a consecutive performance where the number of plays executed (Np) = 2. In this variant, as in the fourth embodiment, the presentation scenario for the final play round of the consecutive performance is set based on the provisional variable time of the play round set for the final play round of the consecutive performance. As described above, the presentation scenario in this variant sets the timing for executing the button press presentation, but not the timing for executing the point award presentation. Instead, multiple candidate timings are set as candidates for the timing for executing the point award presentation. In the presentation scenario in Figure 180, the candidate timings are indicated by dashed arrows. Based on the point award scenario described below, the sound/light side MPU 92 determines one or more timings (hereinafter also referred to as execution timings) for actually executing the point award presentation during the execution of a play round from the multiple candidate timings set in the presentation scenario.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in the point awarding scenario table for jackpots and reach in Figure 161, two point awarding scenarios are set for each number of plays (Np) executed for the point awarding scenario corresponding to each effect scenario, and after the number of plays of consecutive effects is determined, one of the two point awarding scenarios set for that number of plays is selected by lottery. In contrast, in this modified example, one point awarding scenario is set for each number of plays (Np) executed for the point awarding scenario corresponding to each effect scenario. Figure 180 shows a point awarding scenario where the number of plays of consecutive effects is two (i.e., number of plays executed Np = 2). As shown in the figure, the point awarding scenario in this modified example sets, for the final play of consecutive effects, the total number of points to be awarded for each period up to each button press effect set in the effect scenario (hereinafter referred to as the total awarding points for the period), and for the carryover play times, the total awarding points, which is the total number of points to be awarded for that play time, is set, as in the above embodiment.

For the final play of the consecutive effects, the sound/light side MPU 92 determines the execution timing of the point awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point awarding effect based on the total points awarded for the period and multiple candidate timings set in the effect scenario up to the period of each button press effect. In the example shown in Figure 180, the point awarding scenario sets 13 points as the total points to be awarded for the period from the start of the final play of the consecutive effects to button press effect 1 (Bt1 in the figure), and the effect scenario sets 10 candidate timings within that period. Therefore, for example, a configuration is adopted in which one or more execution timings are determined from the 10 candidate timings, the number of points to be awarded in the point awarding effect to be executed at each determined execution timing is then determined, and finally, the number of points to be awarded in each point awarding effect to be executed is determined by lottery using random numbers.

The timing of each point-awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect can be determined by various other methods. For example, a random value is determined by lottery, with the maximum value being 13 points, which is the total number of points awarded for the period from the start of the final consecutive effect play to button press effect 1, and this determined value is set as the number of points to be awarded in the first point-awarding effect. Next, a random value is determined by lottery, with the maximum value being the value obtained by subtracting the number of points to be awarded in the first point-awarding effect from the total number of points to be awarded for the period, 13 points, and this determined value is set as the number of points to be awarded in the second point-awarding effect. In this manner, the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect is determined by lottery, and the determined number of points is subtracted from the total number of points to be awarded for the period, 13 points, until the number of remaining points finally reaches zero. Since there are ten possible timings from the start of the final consecutive effect play to button press effect 1, if the remaining points have not yet reached zero by the end of the ninth lottery, the number of points to be awarded in the final, tenth point-awarding effect is automatically set to the remaining number of points. In this way, after determining the number of times the point-awarding effects will be performed and the number of points to be awarded for each point-awarding effect, the execution timing for the number of times the point-awarding effects will be performed is determined by lottery from among the candidate timings for the effect scenario.

In this modified example, by determining the timing of the execution of the point-awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect through lottery, the timing of the execution of the point-awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded do not follow a pattern even for the same effect scenario. This prevents players from getting bored and allows them to make various guesses, creating a sense of anticipation. For this reason, in this modified example, only one point-awarding scenario is set for each number of plays executed (Np) for the point-awarding scenario corresponding to each effect scenario. In other words, in this modified example, even if only one point-awarding scenario is set for each number of plays executed (Np) for the point-awarding scenario corresponding to each effect scenario, it is possible to set multiple point-awarding patterns.

The above explanation also describes a method for determining the timing of executing the point-awarding effect in the final play of a series of consecutive plays and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect. However, this determination method can also be used in the carryover play of a series of consecutive plays. In the fourth embodiment, the execution timing of the point-awarding effect when executing the point-awarding effect in a carryover play and when executing the point-awarding effect in a single play was set in advance in the play pattern. However, as in this modified example, the execution timing of the point-awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, a play scenario is first determined based on the variable time of the carryover play. As shown in FIG. 180, the play scenario prepared for the carryover play has multiple candidate timings set, similar to the play scenario for the final play of the series of consecutive plays described above. Then, based on the candidate timings set in the play pattern for that play round and the total points to be awarded for that play round, the timing of executing the point-awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect are determined by lottery, similar to the final play round of the series of consecutive plays described above. In the fourth embodiment described above, a presentation pattern was used in which the timing of the point-awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect were preset. However, in this modified example, the timing of the point-awarding effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding effect are determined by lottery. This allows for a presentation scenario in which multiple candidate timings are set, similar to the final game of the consecutive effects in this modified example, without using a presentation pattern like in the fourth embodiment. In this way, even in presentation scenarios in which the same effect is executed, the timing of the point-awarding effect and the number of points awarded do not follow a pattern. This prevents players from getting bored and allows players to make various guesses, creating a sense of anticipation.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation pattern for the carryover play round was determined by referencing the point-awarding presentation pattern table, and the presentation pattern corresponding to the total points awarded set in the point-awarding scenario determined based on the final play round of consecutive presentations and the variable time for the carryover play round. In contrast, in this modified example, the presentation pattern is determined based on the variable time for the carryover play round, regardless of the total points awarded. The timing for executing the point-awarding presentation and the number of points awarded for each point-awarding presentation are determined based on the candidate timings set in the determined presentation pattern and the total points awarded. Therefore, there is no need to provide a point-awarding presentation pattern table corresponding to the variable time for the carryover play rounds and the total points awarded; instead, a point-awarding presentation pattern table corresponding only to the variable time can be provided. In other words, it is possible to provide multiple presentation patterns that are compatible only with the variable time, without taking the total points awarded into consideration. Furthermore, because the timing for awarding points for each presentation pattern is determined by lottery, the presentation pattern and the timing for awarding points do not become patterned, consistently creating a sense of anticipation for the player.

D7-9. Variation 9:
In the above-mentioned variant example 8, the point awarding scenario records the total points to be awarded in the period corresponding to the carried-over play times, and for the final play time of the consecutive performance, records the total points to be awarded for the period until each button press performance is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the following configuration can be adopted.

Figure 181 is an explanatory diagram illustrating variant 9. In this variant, the point awarding scenario does not set a total award point for the period corresponding to the carryover play rounds, but rather sets the number of points to be awarded from the start of the carryover play rounds to the most recently executed button press effect, or the number of points to be awarded from the button press effect to the next executed button press effect, i.e., the total award points for the period. Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 181, the total award points for the period from the start of the carryover play rounds to the execution of the button press effect (Bt1) for the final play round of the consecutive effects is set.

The configuration of the presentation scenario is the same as in Variation 8 above. That is, one or more candidate timings are set for the presentation scenario for the carryover play round and the presentation scenario for the final play round of the consecutive play round. The timing for executing the point-awarding presentation and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding presentation are determined by lottery, as in Variation 8 above, based on the number of points to be awarded up until each button-pressing presentation set in the point-awarding scenario and the candidate timings up until each button-pressing presentation set in the presentation scenario. In this way, the timing for executing the point-awarding presentation across the carryover play round and the final play round of the consecutive play round, and the number of points to be awarded in each point-awarding presentation, are determined by lottery, which further reduces the patterning of the timing for executing the point-awarding presentation and the number of points awarded, compared to Variation 8 above.

D7-10. Variation 10:
The point awarding effect is not limited to the effect shown in the fourth embodiment (the effect in which a turtle character awards points), and various other effects can be adopted.

Figure 182 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the point awarding effect in Variation 10. As shown in Figure 182(a), for example, an image showing a roulette wheel for determining the points to be awarded may be displayed on the display surface 41a. The roulette wheel displays numbers (e.g., 0 to 19) corresponding to the number of points that may be awarded. After the roulette wheel is spun, as shown in Figure 182(b), the roulette wheel is stopped, and as shown in Figure 182(c), the number of points corresponding to the number indicated by the arrow that has stopped on the roulette wheel is awarded. By configuring the point awarding effect in this manner, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player about the points that will be awarded while the roulette wheel is spinning. Furthermore, since the roulette wheel includes "0" as the number of points that can be awarded, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the player in addition to a sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, a point awarding effect may be configured to span multiple game turns. For example, the roulette may not be stopped in the game turn in which it starts spinning, but may be stopped in subsequent game turns. By executing a point awarding effect that spans multiple game turns in this way (hereinafter also referred to as a carryover point awarding effect), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation and tension for the points that will be awarded to the player over a long period of time, spanning multiple game turns.

For example, if a game is on hold and it is decided that points will be awarded in that game, a process is executed to set the presentation scenario for the preceding game so that a roulette video showing a carryover point award presentation is displayed on the display surface 41a in the game that is executed before that game (preceding game). If the preceding game has not yet been executed at the time when it is decided that points will be awarded in the held game (held game), the presentation scenario is set to execute a carryover point award presentation in that preceding game. Furthermore, if a preceding game that is executed before the held game has already been executed at the time when it is decided that points will be awarded in the held game (held game), the display of a roulette video showing a carryover point award presentation begins in real time from that point in time in the currently executing preceding game. By displaying the roulette video layer showing the carryover point award presentation as a layer higher than the video layer of the presentation in the preceding game, the point award presentation can be started from the preceding game. In this case, for example, by displaying the roulette video showing the carryover point awarding effect near the periphery of the display surface 41a, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty viewing the video display for the effect in the preceding play round.

In the carryover point awarding effect of this modified example, if the first effect is the effect from when the roulette is spun until it stops spinning, i.e., the effect suggesting that points will be awarded, and the second effect is the effect where the roulette stops spinning, the points to be awarded are announced, and the image of the pearl indicating the accumulated points on stage St changes to display the accumulated points after they have been awarded, i.e., the effect indicating that points will be awarded, various configurations can be adopted as long as the first effect is started in the preceding play round and the second effect is executed in the play round executed after the preceding play round.

By adopting a configuration in which the first effect is started in a prior game round and the second effect is executed in a game round executed after the prior game round, the following effects can be created. The first effect can give the player a sense of anticipation that points may be awarded. The second effect is an effect indicating that points will be awarded, so when a player recognizes the second effect, they are made to realize that points have been awarded, giving them a sense of superiority and satisfaction. Furthermore, by combining the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above with the configuration of this modified example, the following effects can be created. If the prior game round is defined as the first game round and the game round executed after the prior game round is defined as the second game round, the first effect corresponding to the points awarded in the second game round may start in either the first game round or the second game round. In other words, when the first effect is executed in a specified number of plays, points may be awarded in that specified number of plays, or in a play that is executed after that specified number of plays; this allows the player, who recognizes that the first effect has been executed, to guess which of these cases it will be, creating a sense of anticipation.

In addition, as a configuration in which the first effect is started in a preceding game round and the second effect is executed in a game round executed after the preceding game round, a configuration in which the first effect is executed from start to finish in the first game round and the second effect is executed from start to finish in the second game round may be adopted, or a configuration in which the effect of the roulette spinning in the first effect is started in the first game round and the effect of the roulette stopping during rotation in the first effect and the start to finish of the second effect may be adopted in the second game round. Furthermore, both of these configurations may be adopted simultaneously. When both configurations are adopted and combined with a configuration in which the point-awarding effect does not span game rounds, a player who recognizes that the first effect has started in a given game round first experiences the fun and anticipation of guessing whether the roulette will stop spinning in that game round. If the roulette stops during that game, the player can enjoy the excitement and anticipation of guessing whether the points corresponding to the number of points indicated by the roulette stopping will be awarded during that game or in a subsequent game. This provides players with a gradual sense of excitement and anticipation.

Furthermore, as described in the fourth embodiment above, accumulated points may or may not be reset at the end of a game round, so the player can be made to pay attention to the accumulated points even at the end of the game round. Furthermore, with this modified example, when the first effect is executed, points may be awarded in that specified game round or in a game round executed after that specified game round, making it possible to make the player pay attention when the game round changes. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a variety of expectations when the game round changes.

The first and second effects in this modified example are not limited to the configuration described in this modified example, and various other effects can be used. For example, among the point awarding effects in the fourth embodiment described above, the first effect could be the effect in which a turtle character appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a and drops a pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded, and the second effect could be the effect in which the turtle character drops the pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded, the pearl reaches stage St, changes into an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points, and the point awarding effect ends.

D7-11. Variation 11:
In the fourth embodiment, the point awarding effect may be configured to vary depending on the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. For example, the color of the turtle shell, which is the character displayed in the point awarding effect, may be displayed as white if the number of points awarded is 0 to 2, yellow if the number of points awarded is 3 to 6, blue if the number of points awarded is 7 to 9, green if the number of points awarded is 10 to 15, and red if the number of points awarded is 16 to 20. This configuration can be realized, for example, by the following process. In step S42303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 172), the number of awarded points is read, and then the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point awarding effect is determined based on the number of points read. Then, in step S42304, a point awarding effect video display start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102, including information about the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point awarding effect. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-awarding effect moving image display start command, it reads the turtle shell color information included in the point-awarding effect moving image display start command and executes processing to display a point-awarding effect moving image on the symbol display device 41, in which a turtle with a shell color corresponding to the information is displayed. In this way, the present configuration can be realized. With this configuration, in addition to the display of the number of points displayed in the point-awarding effect, the color of the turtle shell can give the player a sense of expectation and superiority.

In addition, for example, in the fourth embodiment described above, the pearl dropped by the turtle character in the point awarding effect displays the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points is not displayed on the pearl, and the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle varies depending on the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. Such a configuration can also be realized by processing similar to the above-mentioned processing in which the color of the turtle's shell varies depending on the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. That is, in step S42303 of the point accumulation processing (FIG. 172), after the number of awarded points is read, the color of the pearl to be displayed in the point awarding effect is determined depending on the number of awarded points read. Then, in step S42304, information on the color of the pearl to be displayed in the point awarding effect is included in the video display start command for the point awarding effect and sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the point-awarding effect video display start command, the display MPU 102 reads the pearl color information included in the point-awarding effect video display start command and executes processing to display on the symbol display device 41 a point-awarding effect video in which pearls of a color corresponding to the information are displayed. In this modified example, since the number of points is not displayed on the pearls dropped by the turtle character in the point-awarding effect, the display MPU 102 executes processing to display on the symbol display device 41 a point-awarding effect video in which the number of points is not displayed on the pearls dropped by the turtle character. This allows the player to build anticipation for the number of points to be awarded, since the player cannot clearly grasp the number of points to be awarded even when the point-awarding effect begins. Furthermore, since the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle varies depending on the number of points to be awarded, the player can enjoy guessing the number of points to be awarded based on the color of the pearls.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the character displayed in the point awarding effect changes depending on the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. For example, the character displayed in the point awarding effect may be set to a turtle character when 0 to 2 points are awarded, an octopus character when 3 to 6 points are awarded, a crab character when 7 to 9 points are awarded, a shark character when 10 to 15 points are awarded, and a whale character when 16 to 20 points are awarded. This configuration can also be implemented using processing similar to the configuration described above, i.e., the configuration in which the color of the turtle's shell and the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle change depending on the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which, when a point awarding effect is executed and points are awarded, causing the accumulated points to exceed a threshold value (10 points), the mode of the executed point awarding effect is set to a mode different from that of point awarding effects executed in other cases. For example, when the accumulated points are 3 and a point awarding effect is executed to award 9 points, the accumulated points exceed 10 points, so a configuration may be adopted in which the character displayed in the point awarding effect is set to a whale character instead of the turtle character displayed in the normal point awarding effect. Furthermore, when a point awarding effect is executed and points are awarded, causing the accumulated points to exceed a threshold value (10 points), and the number of points awarded by the point awarding effect is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the point awarding effect is set to a mode different from that of point awarding effects executed in other cases. For example, if the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) as a result of points being awarded through the execution of a point awarding effect, and the number of points awarded through the point awarding effect is 8 points or more, the character displayed in the point awarding effect may be changed from a turtle character to a crab character, and the crab character may be set to drop a larger pearl than usual.

This configuration can be realized, for example, by the following process. During the point accumulation process (FIG. 172), a determination is made based on the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario as to whether the point awarding effect to be executed is the last point awarding effect executed before the button press presentation, and whether the points awarded in the point awarding effect are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 8 points). That is, during the point accumulation process (FIG. 172), if a determination is made based on the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario that the point awarding effect to be executed is the last point awarding effect executed before the button press presentation, and that the points awarded in the point awarding effect are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 8 points), a point awarding effect animation display start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102, in which the crab character drops a larger pearl than usual. Upon receiving the point awarding effect animation display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process to display, on the symbol display device 41, an animation for the point awarding effect in which the crab character drops a larger pearl than usual. This configuration can be realized in this manner. With this configuration, when a point-awarding effect in which the crab character drops a larger-than-normal pearl is executed, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of anticipation and superiority than when a normal point-awarding effect is executed. Furthermore, while playing, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether a point-awarding effect in which the crab character drops a larger-than-normal pearl will be executed.

Other configurations such as the following may be adopted. For example, if a point-awarding effect is executed and points are awarded, causing the accumulated points to exceed a threshold (10 points), and a super-reach effect is executed after a button-press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the point-awarding effect executed before the super-reach effect is executed is set to a mode different from the mode of the point-awarding effect executed in other cases. More specifically, when the accumulated points are 5, a point-awarding effect in which 9 points are awarded is executed, causing the accumulated points to exceed the threshold (10 points), and a super-reach effect is executed after a button-press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold. A configuration may be adopted in which the character displayed in the point-awarding effect executed before the super-reach effect is executed is set to a whale character instead of the turtle character displayed in the normal point-awarding effect. Note that a normal-reach effect is an effect executed when the symbols reach a reach state. A super-reach effect is an effect that suggests to the player that there is a higher expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot compared to when only a normal-reach effect is executed. The special reach effect, which will be described later, is an effect that indicates to the player that there is a higher expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery compared to when only the normal reach effect is executed, or when the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed together.

This configuration is not limited to cases where the accumulated points exceed a threshold value (10 points) when points are awarded through the execution of a point awarding effect, and the effect executed after the button press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold is a super reach effect. It may also be applied to cases where the effect executed after the button press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold is a special reach effect, or an effect that immediately notifies the player that a jackpot has been won (hereinafter also referred to as a one-shot announcement effect). In other words, when the accumulated points exceed a threshold value (10 points) when points are awarded through the execution of a point awarding effect, and the button press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold is followed by the special reach effect or the one-shot announcement effect, the configuration employs a setting in which the mode of the point awarding effect executed is different from the mode of the point awarding effect executed in other cases.

This type of configuration can be realized, for example, by the following process. In the point accumulation process (Figure 172), a determination is made based on the presentation scenario and the point awarding scenario as to whether the point awarding effect to be executed is the last point awarding effect to be executed before the button press effect. If it is determined that the point awarding effect to be executed is the last point awarding effect to be executed before the button press effect, the type of effect to be executed after the button press effect following the point awarding effect is determined based on the presentation scenario. If it is determined that the effect is a specific type of effect, such as a normal reach effect, super reach effect, special reach effect, or one-shot announcement effect, a special type of point awarding effect that is different from other cases is set as the point awarding effect before the button press effect, depending on the type of effect. In this way, the above configuration can be realized.

In this way, when the point awarding effect is executed and points are awarded, the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points), and depending on the type of effect that is executed after the button press effect that is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold, the mode of the point awarding effect that is executed before that effect is executed is different from the point awarding effect that is executed in other cases. This not only gives the player a sense of anticipation that points will be awarded, but also gives the player other senses of anticipation and the fun of guessing what will happen in the game afterwards. Furthermore, having multiple types of point awarding effect makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the point awarding effect that is executed each time.

In other words, in this modified example, the presentation scenario set for a given game is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS corresponding to that game. Then, a point awarding scenario is determined based on the presentation scenario determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS corresponding to that game, and the mode of point awarding presentation to be executed in that game is determined based on that presentation scenario and the point awarding scenario.

D7-12. Variation 12:
In the fourth embodiment, the point awarding mode may be configured to suggest the subsequent progress of the game. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the point awarding mode, in which 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are awarded by three point awarding effects, suggests that a special reach effect will be executed after a button press effect is subsequently executed, or a configuration may be adopted in which the point awarding mode, in which 7 points, 7 points, and 7 points are awarded by three point awarding effects, suggests that a one-shot announcement effect will be executed after a button press effect is subsequently executed. Such a configuration may be realized, for example, as follows.

For point-awarding scenarios linked to performance scenarios that are set to execute specific effects, such as special reach effects or one-shot announcement effects, this configuration can be achieved by pre-setting the number of points to be awarded for each point-awarding effect set in the point-awarding scenario to a value of, for example, 3, 4, or 1. This can draw even more attention from players to the number of points awarded in each point-awarding effect. Furthermore, based on the manner in which points are awarded, players can make various guesses about the subsequent progress of the game, creating even more anticipation in the player.

Note that the content suggested by the manner in which points are awarded is not limited to the subsequent performance, and may, for example, suggest the number of points to be awarded in the subsequent point awarding performance, the result of the jackpot lottery, or the carryover of accumulated points.

D7-13. Variation 13:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which information regarding the manner in which points have already been awarded (hereinafter also referred to as point awarding manner information) is displayed. For example, the point awarding manner information may be displayed as a history of the manner in which points have been awarded. The history of the manner in which the points have been awarded may be displayed using colors, characters, etc.

Figure 183 is an explanatory diagram illustrating variant example 13. Figure 183 shows how a pearl image representing points accumulated on stage St during the point awarding effect displays the history of how points have been awarded.

Figure 183(a) shows the accumulated points on stage St after the accumulated points are reset and a new round of play is started, and the first (first) point awarding effect is executed, awarding four points. In this modified example, the accumulated points are reset and a new round of play is started, and the points accumulated as a result of the first point awarding effect being executed are displayed as an image of a white pearl on stage St.

Figure 183 (b) shows the accumulated points on stage St after the accumulated points have been reset, a new round of play has begun, and the second point awarding effect has been executed, resulting in two points being awarded. In this modified example, the accumulated points are reset, a new round of play has begun, and the second point awarding effect has been executed, resulting in the accumulated points being displayed as an image of a yellow pearl on stage St.

Figure 183 (c) shows the accumulated points on stage St after the accumulated points have been reset and a new round of play has begun, and the third point awarding effect has been executed, resulting in three points being awarded. In this modified example, the accumulated points are reset and a new round of play has begun, and the points accumulated as a result of the third point awarding effect being executed are displayed as an image of a yellow-green pearl on stage St.

In this way, the image showing the points accumulated as a result of each point-awarding effect being executed can be distinguished by color according to the point-awarding effect that triggered the awarding of those accumulated points, thereby displaying the history of how points were awarded. For example, by a player viewing the pearl image showing the accumulated points shown on stage St in Figure 183(c), the player can recognize that points were awarded in the following order: 4 points → 2 points → 3 points.

This modified example can be realized, for example, by providing an award history storage area, which is a storage area that stores the history of points awarded by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, in the sound and light side RAM 94 of the sound and light emission control device 90.

Figures 184 and 185 are explanatory diagrams illustrating the award history area. As shown in Figure 184(a), the award history memory area pre-sets the number of times points have been awarded (number of times the point awarding effect has been executed) since the accumulated points were reset and a new round of play began, and the color (display color) that displays the pearl image corresponding to the points accumulated by the point awarding effect corresponding to each awarding effect. Each time a point awarding effect is actually executed, a value indicating the points awarded is stored in the awarded points memory area (hereinafter also referred to as the awarded point memory area). In the case of the award history area shown in Figure 184(a), it can be seen that 4 points were awarded by the first point awarding effect, 2 points were awarded by the second point awarding effect, and 3 points were awarded by the third point awarding effect.

Figure 184(b) shows the award history memory area when a point awarding effect is executed once more from the state of Figure 184(a) and 6 points are awarded. In this modified example, the award history memory area stores the awarded points in the memory area one column to the right of the awarded point memory area every time 10 points are accumulated. Since 9 points have already been accumulated in the first to third awards, as shown in Figure 184(b), in the fourth award, 1 of the 6 awarded points is stored in the memory area in the same column as the first to third awards, and the remaining 5 points are stored in the memory area one column to the right. When displaying a pearl image corresponding to the accumulated points on stage St, the awarded points in the rightmost column of the awarded point memory area and the display color corresponding to the number of awards are read, and the pearl image is displayed on stage St. In this way, by dividing the memory area into 10-point intervals, even if a timer effect (or standby effect) is executed when 10 points are accumulated, 10 points are subtracted from the accumulated points, and new points are accumulated on stage St, an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points can be displayed on stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points actually awarded since the accumulated points were reset and a new round of play began. Furthermore, the award history memory area shown in this modified example can also accommodate cases where 10 or more points are awarded in a single point awarding effect.

Figure 185 shows the award history memory area when a point awarding effect is executed once more from the state of Figure 184 (b) and 17 points are awarded. In this case, 5 of the 17 points are stored in the second column of the awarded point memory area, making the second column's memory area 10 points. Of the remaining 12 points, 10 are stored in the third column of the awarded point memory area, and the remaining 2 points are stored in the fourth column of the awarded point memory area. In this way, even if 10 or more points are awarded in one point awarding effect, by reading the awarded points in the rightmost column of the awarded point memory area and the display color corresponding to the number of points awarded, it is possible to display an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points actually awarded from the state in which the accumulated points have been reset and a new game play has begun.

The following describes the timing for storing, reading, and resetting the points awarded in the award history storage area. When storing awarded points in the award history storage area, for example, a configuration can be adopted in which the awarded points are stored in the award history storage area when the number of awarded points to be executed is read in step S42302 of the point accumulation process (Figure 172). In this case, as explained above, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the awarded points are stored in the storage area one to the right within the awarded point storage area.

To read the award history storage area, for example, in step S42310 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 172), the awarded points in the rightmost column of the awarded point storage area in the award history storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of times the points have been awarded are read, and a point accumulation video display start command is sent to the display side MPU 102 to display an image of a pearl (point accumulation video) in a display color corresponding to the number of times the points have been awarded. Upon receiving this point accumulation video display start command, the display side MPU 102 displays an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of times the points have been awarded.

To reset the award history storage area, for example, the accumulated point counter Cpnt is reset in step S42603 of the point reset process (Figure 175), and then the award history storage area is reset. By performing such processing, the configuration in this modified example can be realized.

By adopting the configuration of this modified example, it is possible for a player to check the history of how points have been awarded, such as the number of times a point-awarding effect has been executed and the number of points awarded per point-awarding effect. Furthermore, a player who has checked the history of how points have been awarded can speculate about the number of point-awarding effects that will be executed in the future and the number of points that will be awarded, building a sense of anticipation for the game. Furthermore, when a configuration is adopted in which the way points are awarded suggests the progress of the game in the future, as in the above modified example 12, allowing a player to check the history of how points have been awarded, as in this modified example, can further encourage the player to speculate about the progress of the game in the future, attracting the player's attention to the game and building a sense of anticipation for the player.

In this modified example, the history of how points were awarded is displayed by the color of the pearl image, which indicates accumulated points. However, the points awarded for each point-awarding effect may also be displayed by a character that distinguishes them, or by a mark, pattern, etc. The points awarded for each point-awarding effect may also be displayed directly as numbers. For example, if 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are awarded in three point-awarding effects, "3, 4, 1" would be displayed on the display surface 41a. In this way, various display modes can be used as long as the player can recognize the history of how points were awarded.

Furthermore, the point awarding mode information may be displayed so that only the number of points awarded during the most recent point awarding performance can be identified. For example, among the pearl images displayed on stage St as accumulated points, only the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points awarded during the most recent point awarding performance may be configured to differ in color, pattern, shape, etc. from the other pearl images.

D7-14. Variation 14:
The point awarding effect in the fourth embodiment may be such that points are awarded multiple times in one point awarding effect. For example, in the point awarding effect, the effect from when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and drops a pearl indicating the number of points to be awarded is called a point award suggestion effect, and the effect from when the turtle character drops the pearl indicating the number of points to be awarded and the pearl reaches the stage St, changing into an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points, and the point awarding effect ends is called a point award execution effect. In this case, the point award suggestion effect is executed once, and then the point award execution effect is executed twice.

Figure 186 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point awarding effect in Variation 14. As shown, Figure 186(a) shows the execution of a point awarding suggestion effect, which is one of the point awarding effects. That is, it shows the execution of an effect from when a turtle character appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a to when the character begins dropping pearls indicating the number of points to be awarded. Figure 186(b) shows the execution of a first point awarding effect after the point awarding suggestion effect is executed. As shown, this point awarding effect is an effect indicating that four points will be awarded. Figure 186(c) shows the execution of a second point awarding effect after the first point awarding effect is executed. As shown, this point awarding effect is an effect indicating that five points will be awarded. Figure 186(d) shows the end of the point awarding effect as the second point awarding effect ends.

By adopting this configuration, players who recognize the point-award suggestion effect can be given a sense of anticipation about how many times the point-award execution effect will be executed afterwards, i.e., how many points will be awarded. Furthermore, if the point-award execution effect is executed multiple times after one point-award suggestion effect is executed, a sense of surprise and surprise can be given to players who recognize that the point-award suggestion effect has been executed and who assumed that one point-award execution effect would be executed afterwards.

Note that Figure 186 describes an example in which two point awarding execution effects are executed for one point awarding suggestion effect, but it is also possible to execute N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2) point awarding execution effects for one point awarding suggestion effect. Furthermore, the value of N may be different for each point awarding effect.

The point awarding effect in this modified example can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, if two point awarding execution effects are executed for one point awarding suggestion effect, in the point awarding scenario applied in the fourth embodiment, the point value corresponding to one point awarding effect (e.g., 9 points) can be divided into two (e.g., 4 points and 5 points), and one of the divided point values (4 points) is awarded in the first point awarding execution effect, and the other of the divided point values (5 points) is awarded in the second point awarding execution effect. This process simply obtains a single point value set in the point awarding scenario corresponding to the point awarding suggestion effect to be executed. In other words, even if point awarding execution effects are executed N times for one point awarding suggestion effect, it is sufficient to obtain a single point value set in the point awarding scenario. The obtained point value is then divided by N and used for each point awarding execution effect. Therefore, even if point awarding execution effects are executed N times in one point awarding effect, the process up to obtaining the point value to be awarded from the point awarding scenario remains the same regardless of the value of N, thereby simplifying the process. Additionally, the point value set in advance for the point awarding scenario can be set regardless of the value of N, simplifying the process of setting the number of points for the point awarding scenario.

In addition, the point awarding effect in this modified example can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, if two point awarding execution effects are executed in response to one point awarding suggestion effect, the point values corresponding to the two point awarding effects are obtained in the point awarding scenario applied in the fourth embodiment. For example, if the number of points set for the first point awarding effect in the point awarding scenario is 4 points, and the number of points set for the second point awarding effect in the point awarding scenario is 5 points, the point values corresponding to the two point awarding effects are obtained. Then, after executing one point awarding suggestion effect, the first point awarding execution effect is executed using the number of points set for the first point awarding effect in the point awarding scenario, which is 4 points, and then the second point awarding execution effect is executed using the number of points set for the second point awarding effect in the point awarding scenario, which is 5 points. The above configuration can also be realized in this way. According to this type of processing, when executing N point award execution effects for one point award suggestion effect, it is only necessary to obtain the number (N) of point values corresponding to the number (N) of point award execution effects to be executed from the point award scenario. This eliminates the need to divide the point value corresponding to one point award effect by N, as in the above configuration, and simplifies the processing.

D7-15. Variation 15:
In the fourth embodiment, the point awarding effect suggested that an addition process would be performed on the accumulated points already accumulated on the stage St. For example, taking the point awarding effect shown in FIG. 128 as an example, assume that four points are already accumulated on the stage St. When the point awarding effect is executed, a point awarding effect is executed that indicates that the number of points (three points) displayed on the pearl dropped by the turtle will be added to the already accumulated number of points (four points). Thus, the point awarding effect in the fourth embodiment suggested that newly awarded points would be added to the accumulated points already accumulated on the stage St (hereinafter, also referred to as the "addition" effect). When the point awarding effect in the "addition" mode is executed, the number of points resulting from adding the points awarded by the point awarding effect in the "addition" mode to the points displayed as accumulated points is displayed as new accumulated points. However, the point awarding effect is not limited to the "addition" mode, and other modes may also be employed. For example, a point awarding effect may be adopted that suggests that a multiplication process will be performed on the accumulated points already accumulated on the stage St (hereinafter also referred to as a multiplication effect).

Figure 187 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the point awarding effect in the multiplication mode. In the point awarding effect in the multiplication mode, as shown in Figure 187(a), a turtle character appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a, and then, as shown in Figure 187(b), the turtle character drops a pearl, which displays "x2" indicating a multiplication process on the pearl. Then, as shown in Figure 187(c), when the pearl displayed with "x2" reaches stage St, the number of points (8 points) obtained by multiplying the 4 points already displayed on stage St as accumulated points by 2 is displayed as new accumulated points, corresponding to the "x2" displayed on the pearl.

This type of configuration can be achieved as follows. For example, in a point awarding scenario, a point value corresponding to a multiplication mode point awarding effect is set. In this case, if the value of accumulated points up to that multiplication mode point awarding effect is X, the value by which the accumulated points are multiplied in that multiplication mode point awarding effect is A, and the point value corresponding to the multiplication mode point awarding effect set in the point awarding scenario is Y, the value of Y calculated as Y = XA - X is set in the point awarding scenario as the point value corresponding to the multiplication mode point awarding effect. In addition, the effect scenario is set so that a multiplication mode point awarding effect is executed. In this way, the above configuration can be achieved.

This configuration creates a sense of anticipation for the value by which accumulated points will be multiplied for players who recognize the multiplication mode point awarding effect, and draws the player's attention to the multiplication mode point awarding effect. Furthermore, when the multiplication mode point awarding effect is executed, players who recognize the appearance of a turtle character on the display surface 41a and assume that the addition mode point awarding effect will be executed can be surprised and their sense of anticipation can be greatly increased.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of the multiplication mode point awarding effect is controlled (changed) according to the magnitude of the value by which the accumulated points are multiplied. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle changes, or a configuration in which a different character appears (for example, an octopus appears instead of a turtle), depending on the magnitude of the value by which the accumulated points are multiplied. In this way, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the multiplication mode point awarding effect.

Furthermore, when a multiplication mode point awarding effect is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a number of points greater than the number of points obtained by multiplying the accumulated points already accumulated is displayed as new accumulated points. For example, if four points have already been accumulated, a multiplication mode point awarding effect is executed. In the multiplication mode point awarding effect, the pearl dropped by the turtle is displayed with "x2" indicating a multiplication process. In this case, normally, when the "x2" indicating a multiplication process reaches stage St, eight points (four points x 2) would be displayed as new accumulated points, but in this point awarding effect, a number of points greater than eight (for example, 10 points) is displayed. This can provide a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who realizes that the new accumulated points are greater than the number of accumulated points obtained by multiplying the accumulated points already accumulated.

In addition, the point awarding effect can be implemented in either an additive or multiplicative form, which creates a sense of tension and suspense for the player as to whether an additive or multiplicative point awarding effect will be executed.

Furthermore, when an additive point awarding effect is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a number of points greater than the number of points obtained by adding the points already accumulated may be displayed as new accumulated points. This can provide a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes that the new accumulated points are greater than the number of points obtained by adding the points already accumulated.

The point awarding effect is not limited to addition or multiplication, and various calculation modes, such as subtraction or division, may also be used. This can draw the player's attention to the point awarding effect being executed and add excitement to the player's anticipation.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the point awarding effect changes during the execution of one point awarding effect. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the point awarding effect changes from an addition mode to a multiplication mode, or from a multiplication mode to an addition mode, during the execution of one point awarding effect. Alternatively, a configuration in which the mode of the point awarding effect changes multiple times during the execution of one point awarding effect. In this way, the player can be made to recognize that the calculation method executed by the point awarding effect has changed, providing an element of surprise to the player. Furthermore, since the value of the new accumulated points after the calculation process is executed can vary greatly depending on the calculation method executed by the point awarding effect, changing the mode of the point awarding effect can provide a sense of tension to the player and add a tone to the player's anticipation.

Figure 188 is an explanatory diagram showing, as an example, the display mode of the image of a pearl dropped by a turtle (hereinafter simply referred to as the pearl image) when the mode changes between addition mode and multiplication mode during the execution of one point awarding effect. Figure 188(a) shows an image of a pearl when the mode of the point awarding effect is addition mode. The pearl image displays the arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition, suggesting that the point awarding effect is in addition mode. Figure 188(b) shows an image of a pearl when the mode of the point awarding effect is in multiplication mode. The pearl image displays the arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication, suggesting that the point awarding effect is in multiplication mode.

For example, when changing from addition to multiplication during the execution of a point-awarding effect, the arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition displayed on the pearl image in FIG. 188(a) is rotated to change to the arithmetic symbol "×" indicating multiplication displayed on the pearl image in FIG. 188(b). Conversely, when changing from multiplication to addition during the execution of a point-awarding effect, the arithmetic symbol "×" indicating multiplication displayed on the pearl image in FIG. 188(b) is rotated to change to the arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition displayed on the pearl image in FIG. 188(a). By adopting this configuration, the meaning of nearly identical line-drawn symbols, such as "+" and "×," can be significantly changed by rotating them, and despite the simple process, a great sense of tension can be created for the player, and the player's sense of anticipation can be enhanced.

In addition, if the mode changes between addition and multiplication multiple times during the execution of one point awarding effect, the arithmetic symbol "+" (or "x") displayed on the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle as it falls may be rotated continuously. Then, at a predetermined timing (for example, when the pearl reaches stage St), the rotation of the arithmetic symbol is stopped, and points (an image of a pearl representing accumulated points) equivalent to the amount of the operation (addition or multiplication) performed on the accumulated points indicated by the arithmetic symbol at the time of stopping are displayed on stage St. This makes it possible to further draw the player's attention to the point awarding effect.

D7-16. Variation 16:
In the fourth embodiment described above, the accumulated points are displayed as an image of one pearl on the stage St, but the display is not limited to this configuration, and the accumulated points can be displayed in various ways.

Figure 189 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode of accumulated points. The display mode of accumulated points shown in this modified example is a display mode in which the accumulated points only take on a meaningful shape (image) once the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold (10 points). Figures 189(a) to 189(j) show how points are accumulated from 1 point to 10 points. In the display mode shown in Figure 189, the image becomes a single pearl only once the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. By adopting this type of display mode, it is possible to inspire the player to create a meaningful image from partial images, and to give the player a sense of accomplishment when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 and a meaningful image is formed.

In addition, in Figure 189, the boundary line (outline) of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is displayed, but the display is not limited to this, and a display mode that does not display the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point may also be used.

Figure 190 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode for accumulated points in which the boundary line of the partial pearl image corresponding to one point is not displayed. As shown in the figure, because the boundary line of the partial pearl image corresponding to one point is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of accumulated points. Therefore, the accumulated points may reach the threshold value without the player realizing it, which can surprise the player.

As another display mode for accumulated points, as described in Figures 189 and 190, a shape (image) that takes on a single meaning only when the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold (10 points) may be displayed. However, a shape (image) that takes on a single meaning only when the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold (10 points) may be changed at a predetermined timing. For example, as shown in Figure 189, accumulated points may be displayed in a display mode that changes to a single pearl image only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. Subsequently, as the accumulated points reach the threshold, the pearl image changes to a shell image indicating a timer effect or a shell image indicating a standby effect, and the accumulated points on stage St return to 0 points. When new accumulated points are accumulated from the 0 point state, as shown in Figure 191, the new accumulated points may be displayed in a display mode that changes to a single whale image only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. This configuration can draw the player's attention to the accumulated points on stage St. Furthermore, each time a meaningful shape (image) is changed once the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold (10 points), the player is prompted to imagine what kind of shape (image) will be formed, creating a new sense of anticipation for the player.

Furthermore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the shape (image) formed as the accumulated points accumulate varies depending on the expected level (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in a given game. For example, if the accumulated points reach a threshold and a button press effect is executed, followed by a one-shot announcement effect, an image of a single mambo is used as the shape formed as the accumulated points accumulate. And, for example, if the accumulated points reach a threshold and a button press effect is executed, followed by a special reach effect, an image of a single shark is used as the shape formed as the accumulated points accumulate. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the accumulated points on stage St, and increase the player's sense of anticipation as the image representing the accumulated points is formed.

D7-17. Variation 17:
In the fourth embodiment, a countable amount of "points" is used as the object of awarding, but an uncountable amount may also be used. For example, instead of the point awarding effect, an effect in which liquid is added to a container displayed on the stage St may be used.

D7-18. Variation 18:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration was adopted in which the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button press effect was set to 10 points, but this configuration is not limited to this, and any positive value can be used as the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button press effect.

D7-19. Variation 19:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a button press effect is executed when the accumulated points reach a threshold value. However, a configuration in which other effects are executed may also be adopted, not limited to a button press effect. For example, when the accumulated points reach a threshold value, a predetermined reach effect may be executed instead of a button press effect. In other words, since a reach effect is always reached when 10 accumulated points are accumulated, a sense of anticipation for a reach effect can be given to the player each time points are awarded. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific process, such as a button press effect, is not executed even when the accumulated points reach a threshold value. In this way, the player is forced to guess whether a specific process, such as a button press effect, will be executed after the accumulated points reach a threshold value, thereby giving the player a sense of tension.

D7-20. Variation 20:
In the fourth embodiment, whether accumulated points will be carried over or not is indicated by a change in the color of the stage St, but this may be indicated by other methods such as lighting up, flashing, changing the shape of the stage St, etc. Alternatively, a dedicated lamp or the like may be provided to indicate whether accumulated points will be carried over or not.

D7-21. Variation 21:
In the fourth embodiment, during the period allocated to the button press effect (hereinafter also referred to as the button press effect period), a mode may be adopted in which the effect executed from the time the effect operation button 24 is operated until the end of the button press effect period is changed depending on the timing at which the player presses the effect operation button 24. This can be achieved by measuring the time from the start of the button press effect period until the time the player presses the effect operation button 24, and then, depending on the measured value, reading and executing effect image data from an effect memory area in which effects corresponding to the period from the time the effect operation button 24 is operated until the end of the button press effect period are recorded. This prevents the button press effects from becoming patterned, and allows the player to focus on the button press effects.

D7-22. Variation 22:
In the above fourth embodiment, the only position (image) having the function of accumulating the awarded points was the stage St displayed on the display surface 41a, but a configuration may be adopted in which multiple positions (images) having the function of accumulating the awarded points are displayed on the display surface 41a (multiple locations).

Figure 192 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which multiple (multiple locations) positions (images) that have the function of accumulating awarded points are displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in Figure 192(a), a first stage St1, a second stage St2, and a third stage St3 are displayed on the display surface 41a as positions (images) that have the function of accumulating awarded points. In this modified example, each stage St has a different presentation function. Specifically, the presentation that is executed when the number of points accumulated on each stage St reaches a threshold value is different for each stage.

When the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold, a timer effect (or standby effect) and a button press effect are then executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, a one-shot announcement effect is executed. As described above, the one-shot announcement effect is an effect that immediately notifies the player that they have won the jackpot lottery. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold can recognize that they have won the jackpot lottery in the game in which the button press effect is executed, triggered by the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reaching the threshold.

When the points accumulated in the second stage St2 reach the threshold, a timer effect (or standby effect) and a button press effect are then executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, a special reach effect is executed. As described above, the special reach effect is an effect that suggests to the player that there is a higher expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery compared to when only the normal reach effect is executed, or when the normal reach effect is executed in addition to the super reach effect. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the second stage St2 have reached the threshold can recognize that there is a higher expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in the game in which the button press effect is executed, triggered by the points accumulated in the second stage St2 reaching the threshold.

When the points accumulated in the third stage St3 reach the threshold, a timer effect (or standby effect) and a button press effect are then executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, a normal reach effect is executed. The normal reach effect is an effect that indicates to the player that there is a higher expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery compared to when the normal reach effect is not executed. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the third stage St3 have reached the threshold can recognize that at least a normal reach effect will be executed in the game in which the button press effect is executed, which is triggered by the points accumulated in the third stage St3 reaching the threshold.

Due to the characteristics of each stage St, when points are awarded, players will hope that the most points will be accumulated in the first stage St1 of the three stages St, followed by the second stage St2, and finally the third stage St3.

In the point awarding effect shown in Figure 192, when a turtle character appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a, the pearl image showing the number of points to be awarded is not displayed. The turtle character moves from the right edge to the left edge of the display surface 41a.

Then, as shown in Figure 192(b), the turtle character drops a pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded as it passes over the stage St where the points to be awarded in the point awarding effect are to be accumulated. As shown in Figure 192(c), after the dropped pearl reaches the stage St where the points to be awarded in the point awarding effect are to be accumulated, it changes into an image of a pearl displaying accumulated points, and the points are accumulated on that stage St.

This type of effect can be achieved by pre-setting the target stages St (first stage St1, second stage St2, third stage St3) for accumulating points in each point-awarding effect executed in that game turn in the effect scenario and point-awarding scenario set for the game turn in which that effect is executed.

By adopting this configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to the location (stage St) where points will be accumulated during the point-awarding effect, providing the player with a new level of enjoyment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 192(a), when a player notices that a turtle character has appeared on display surface 41a during the point-awarding effect, this creates a sense of anticipation about which stage St the points will be accumulated on, as well as the number of points that will be awarded. Then, as shown in FIG. 192(b), when a player notices the turtle character passing over the top of each stage St, this creates a sense of anticipation and tension about the location (stage St) where points will be accumulated, and also creates anticipation about the number of points that will be awarded. Furthermore, for example, if a pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded by the turtle character is dropped on the stage St that the player was expecting (e.g., the first stage St1), this can provide the player with a sense of superiority.

In the point awarding effect described in Figure 192, as shown in Figure 192(a), when the turtle character appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a, the image of a pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded is not displayed. However, this is not the only possible configuration. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which when the turtle character appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a, an image of a pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded is displayed.

Figure 193 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point awarding effect in which the number of points to be awarded is displayed at the start. As shown in Figure 193(a), in this point awarding effect, when a turtle character appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a, a pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded is displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 193(b), as the turtle character passes over the top of each stage St, a pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded is dropped onto one of the three stages St (first stage St1, second stage St2, third stage St3). Then, as shown in Figure 193(c), after the pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded reaches the target stage St for accumulating the points to be awarded in the point awarding effect, it changes to an image of a pearl indicating accumulated points, and the points are accumulated as accumulated points on that stage St.

This type of effect differs from the point awarding effect shown in FIG. 192 in that the number of awarded points is displayed at the start of the point awarding effect. In this case, a player who recognizes the number of awarded points will not necessarily desire points to be accumulated in the first stage St1. If there is a stage St where the accumulated points will reach a threshold value as a result of the currently executed point awarding effect (for example, the second stage St2 shown in FIG. 193), the player may desire points to be accumulated in that stage St. In this way, with the point awarding effect shown in FIG. 193, the player determines the stage St in which they desire points to be accumulated by considering which stage St has the highest expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery when the accumulated points reach the threshold value, as well as the current point accumulation status of each stage St. Therefore, by executing this type of point awarding effect, the player can enjoy understanding the state of their game from multiple angles.

In addition to the point-awarding effect (point-awarding effect), a configuration may be adopted in which other point-related effects are executed. For example, an effect may be executed that, when executed, ensures that the accumulated points of one of the three stages St reach a threshold (hereinafter also referred to as a threshold-reaching effect).

Figure 194 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a threshold reaching effect. As shown in Figure 194(a), when the threshold reaching effect begins, a crab character holding a pearl passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a. Then, as shown in Figure 194(b), the crab character drops the pearl on the target stage St where the accumulated points are to reach the threshold. When the dropped pearl reaches the stage St, as shown in Figure 194(c), the accumulated points of the target stage St where the accumulated points are to reach the threshold change to indicate that the threshold has been reached. Then, as shown in Figure 194(d), a timer effect corresponding to the stage St where the threshold has been reached is executed. In the example of Figure 194, the accumulated points of the first stage St1 reach the threshold, and the timer effect image (an image of a whale character and a timer) prepared for the first stage St1 is displayed. As described above, when the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold, a timer effect (or standby effect) and a button press effect are then executed, and after the button press effect is executed, a one-shot announcement effect is executed.

This configuration can be achieved by setting the threshold reaching effect in advance in the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario set for the game session in which the threshold reaching effect is executed.

By adopting this configuration, in addition to the point awarding effect, it is possible to give the player a new sense of anticipation regarding points. Specifically, the outcome of the game will vary greatly depending on which stage St is the target of the threshold reached in the executed threshold reaching effect, which can give the player a great sense of anticipation and tension.

Note that the first stage St1, second stage St2, and third stage St3 each have a single announcement effect, a special reach effect, and a normal reach effect that are executed when the points accumulated in that stage St reach a threshold, but this is not limited to such a configuration, and other effects or processes may also be executed.

Furthermore, as in the fourth embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the points accumulated in each of the first stage St1, second stage St2, and third stage St3 may or may not be carried over across game turns. As in the fourth embodiment, by allowing accumulated points to not be carried over, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player that the accumulated points in each stage will reach the threshold value by the end of the game turn. Furthermore, once a player recognizes that point accumulation has begun in at least one of the stages, this can make the player aware of the time when the game turn will end and draw their attention to the manner in which the accumulated points in each stage are awarded. Furthermore, by allowing accumulated points to be carried over across game turns, even if the accumulated points in at least one of the three stages do not reach the threshold value in a game turn, the accumulated points are not reset at the end of the game turn but are maintained until the next game turn, creating a sense of anticipation in the player that the accumulated points may reach the threshold value in the next game turn. In other words, this sense of anticipation can be created for accumulated points on each of the three stages, increasing the opportunities for players to feel a sense of anticipation even more than in the fourth embodiment above.

D7-23. Variation 23:
In the fourth embodiment, an effect may be executed that makes it appear as if the currently running game turn has been changed from a game turn that is not a carryover game turn to a carryover game turn (hereinafter also referred to as a carryover change effect).

Figure 195 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a carryover change effect. In the game turn shown in Figure 195(a), the color of stage St is orange, indicating that the game turn is not a carryover game turn. When the carryover change effect is executed in that game turn, an octopus character riding on a yellow stage appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a. Note that when the yellow stage is displayed in the position of stage St on the display surface 41a, it indicates that the game turn is a carryover game turn.

After the octopus character appears on the yellow stage, as shown in Figure 195(b), the yellow stage falls as the yellow stage and the octopus character pass over the top of stage St. Then, as shown in Figure 195(c), the image of the yellow stage is superimposed on the orange stage St, and the color of stage St then changes from orange to yellow. In other words, as the carryover change effect is executed, the color of stage St changes from a color (orange) indicating that it is not a carryover play round to a color (yellow) indicating that it is a carryover play round.

By adopting this configuration, players who recognize the execution of the carryover change effect will realize that the play turn in question has been changed from a non-carryover play turn to a carryover play turn, giving them a sense of surprise and anticipation for the next play turn.

In addition, in this modified example, an octopus character appears on a yellow stage, similar to the carryover change effect, and the yellow stage and octopus character pass over the top of stage St. However, the yellow stage does not fall, and the yellow stage and octopus character simply pass from the right edge to the left edge of the display surface 41a. In other words, a dummy effect disguised as a carryover change effect is also executed. By executing a dummy effect disguised as a carryover change effect, a player who recognizes the appearance of the octopus character on the yellow stage can guess whether the image of the yellow stage will fall, thereby making them guess whether the current play round will change to a carryover play round or not, creating a sense of tension. Furthermore, if the yellow stage falls, a sense of superiority and anticipation can be imparted to the player.

This configuration can be achieved by setting the carryover change effect in advance in the effect scenario and point awarding scenario set for the play round in which the carryover change effect is executed, and then executing a process in the stage display control process (Figure 176) that, when the carryover change effect is executed, sets the color of the stage St when point accumulation begins to the color of the stage St when the play round is not a carryover play round (orange).

D7-24. Variation 24:
In the above fourth embodiment, an effect may be executed in which the remaining time indicated by the timer effect is extended (hereinafter also referred to as a timer time extension effect).

Figure 196 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer extension effect. In the game shown in Figure 196(a), the timer effect is being executed. When the timer extension effect begins, as shown in Figure 196(a), a fish character holding a timer (hereinafter also referred to as the extension timer) appears from the right edge of the display surface 41a. Then, as shown in Figure 196(b), as the fish character holding the extension timer passes over the image of a shell and timer representing the timer effect, the extension timer hanging from the fish character falls and becomes superimposed on the image of the timer representing the timer effect. Then, as shown in Figure 196(c), the remaining time until the button press effect, indicated by the image of the timer representing the timer effect, is extended.

In other words, for processing purposes, the remaining time until the button press effect before it is extended is the time set as the dummy remaining time (hereinafter also referred to as the dummy remaining time). Then, when the remaining dummy time approaches 0 (zero) or after it reaches 0 (zero), the timer time extension effect is executed, and the remaining time indicated by the timer in the timer effect is updated to the true remaining time. In this way, the configuration of this modified example can be realized.

This type of timer time extension effect can lend credibility to the dummy remaining time by showing the remaining time at an intermediate dividing point in the currently running effect or the time until the end of the currently running effect, thereby making the player trust the dummy remaining time. Then, by executing the timer time extension effect and updating the remaining time shown on the timer in the timer effect from the dummy remaining time to the true remaining time, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and anticipation.

In addition, in this modified example, a fish character with an extension timer hanging from it appears, just like in the timer extension effect, and passes over the top of stage St; however, the extension timer does not fall, and the fish character with the extension timer hanging from it simply passes from the right edge to the left edge of display surface 41a, i.e., a dummy effect disguised as a timer extension effect is also executed. By executing a dummy effect disguised as a timer extension effect, a player who recognizes the appearance of a fish character with a timer hanging from it is forced to guess whether the timer will fall, thereby making them guess whether the remaining time indicated by the timer effect will be extended, creating a sense of tension. Furthermore, if the extension timer falls, a sense of superiority and anticipation can be imparted to the player.

D7-25. Variation 25:
In the fourth embodiment, the control may be performed such that the greater the number of times accumulated points are carried over consecutively, i.e., the greater the number of times carryover games are executed consecutively, the higher the likelihood of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery for the final game of the consecutive performances that is executed thereafter.As a specific example, the control is performed such that the greater the likelihood of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery for the final game of the consecutive performances that is executed after three consecutive carryover games are executed, compared to the case where the final game of the consecutive performances is executed after one carryover game is executed.

For example, if the advance determination process determines that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery for a reserved play, the greater the number of play times (preceding play times) executed before the reserved play, the more likely it is that a continuous effect will be executed from the play times executed after the advance determination process determines that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery for the reserved play to the reserved play. Specifically, in the effect information setting process, when the number of play times Np to be executed is determined by lottery based on the number of resettable play times Fn, the lottery table data for determining the number of play times Np to be executed is set so that the probability of the value of the number of play times Np being larger is higher when the reserved play time (the game time to be processed) is a jackpot compared to when it is a miss (a reach occurs). In this way, the more consecutive play times carried over are executed, the higher the expectation of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery for the final play time of the continuous effect that is executed thereafter. By adopting this configuration, the more consecutive play times carried over are executed, the greater the player's sense of anticipation can be increased.

Furthermore, control may be implemented so that the more times accumulated points are carried over consecutive play times while remaining below the threshold (10 points), the higher the likelihood of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery for the final play time of the consecutive performance. For example, if the advance determination process determines that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery for the reserved play time, and the performance information setting process determines the performance scenario and point awarding scenario corresponding to the number of plays executed Np, the table data for the lottery to determine the performance scenario and point awarding scenario is set so that the probability of the performance scenario and point awarding scenario being determined in which the accumulated points do not reach the threshold (10 points) from the carryover play time to the final play time of the consecutive performance is higher when the reserved play time (the play time being processed) is a jackpot compared to when a miss (a reach occurs). By doing this, it is possible to implement control such that the more times accumulated points are carried over from one play to the next while maintaining a state in which the accumulated points do not reach the threshold value (10 points), the higher the likelihood of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery for the final play of the subsequent consecutive performances.

This creates a sense of anticipation in players who recognize that their accumulated points are being carried over from one play to the next while maintaining a state in which the accumulated points have not yet reached the threshold (10 points). As a result, it is possible to prevent players' anticipation from waning when the accumulated points have not yet reached the threshold.

D7-26. Variation 26:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the accumulated point threshold for executing the button press effect is changed. Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which the timer effect or standby effect is not executed even when 10 accumulated points have been accumulated, but the timer effect, standby effect, or button press effect is executed when the accumulated points exceed 10 and a predetermined number of points exceeding 10 (e.g., 15 points), or a configuration may be adopted in which the timer effect, standby effect, or button press effect is executed even when 10 accumulated points have not been accumulated. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the player is not notified that the accumulated point threshold for executing the button press effect has been changed. In such a configuration, a presentation scenario and a point awarding scenario specialized for a process in which the threshold has been changed are prepared in advance, and further, only when the process is to be executed, the threshold value set in various processes (usually "10") is set to the changed threshold value (e.g., "15") and executed. By adopting such a configuration, the button press effect can be executed at a timing unexpected by the player, thereby providing a sense of surprise to the player.

A configuration may also be adopted in which this threshold-changing process is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game in which this process is executed is a jackpot or a miss (a reach occurs). By adopting such a configuration, a sense of anticipation can be created for players who realize that the threshold has been changed, i.e., players who realize that they have accumulated more than 10 points, and players who realize that a button press effect has been executed even when they have not accumulated 10 points.

A further possible configuration is to use a display to notify the player that the accumulated point threshold for executing the button press effect will change. For example, a display may be executed suggesting that the accumulated point threshold for executing the button press effect will change from 10 points to 5 points. This allows the player to anticipate that the button press effect will be executed more easily than if the accumulated point threshold for executing the button press effect were 10 points. Furthermore, if a predetermined number of points have already been accumulated (for example, 6 points), and a display suggesting that the accumulated point threshold for executing the button press effect will change from 10 points to 5 points is executed, the number of points required for the button press effect to be executed will already have been accumulated. In this case, if a timer display is executed immediately after a display suggesting that the accumulated point threshold for executing the button press effect will change from 10 points to 5 points is executed, prior to the button press effect, a sense of surprise and anticipation can be imparted to the player. This configuration can be achieved by pre-setting the display scenario and point-awarding scenario.

D7-27. Variation 27:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of awarded points awarded for each game is displayed in association with each of the first executed game number display shown in the first executed game number display area J1, the first reserved game number display shown in the first reserved display area Ds1, the second executed game number display shown in the second executed game number display area J2, and the second reserved game number display shown in the second reserved display area Ds2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as game number display). More specifically, when points are awarded for a specific game number, a display corresponding to the number of points awarded for that game number (award point suggestion display) may be displayed near the game number display corresponding to that specific game number (e.g., directly above that game number display). In this case, the awarded point suggestion display may be displayed corresponding to all displayed game number displays, or the awarded point suggestion display may be displayed corresponding to some of the displayed game number displays. By adopting such a configuration, a player who recognizes the awarded point suggestion display can be given various guesses and expectations about the game number corresponding to the displayed awarded point suggestion display. For example, when an award point suggestion display is displayed in association with a game number display corresponding to a pending game number, the player who recognizes the award point suggestion display can be given various guesses and expectations regarding the pending game number. Also, for example, when points less than 10 points have been awarded in the current game number, and the sum of the number of points corresponding to the award point suggestion display displayed in association with the game number display corresponding to the next game number and the number of points currently awarded is 10 points or more, the player can be made to desire that the points be carried over to the next game number even more than when the award point suggestion display displayed in association with the game number display corresponding to the next game number is not displayed, and if the points are carried over, a great sense of expectation can be given to the player.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the award point suggestion display corresponding to a predetermined number of plays is first displayed in association with a play play display corresponding to a different number of plays than the predetermined number of plays, and then displayed in association with the play play display corresponding to the predetermined number of plays. For example, a number image displayed as an award point suggestion display directly above the play play display corresponding to the reserved play play for the first starting slot (n=1) is moved at a predetermined timing to directly above the play play display corresponding to the reserved play play (n=2).

By adopting this configuration, it is possible to overturn a player's guess based on the point award suggestion display displayed in association with a play count display corresponding to a play count different from the specified play count, providing a sense of surprise to the player.

This configuration can be achieved by presetting the presentation scenario and point awarding scenario so that the award point suggestion display corresponding to a predetermined number of plays is first displayed in association with a play number display corresponding to a different number of plays than the predetermined number of plays, and then displayed in association with the play number display corresponding to the predetermined number of plays.

Another possible configuration is to display an award point suggestion display corresponding to the number of points to be awarded in a given number of plays, after displaying an award point suggestion display corresponding to the number of points to be awarded in a given number of plays. For example, the image of the number "5" displayed as an award point suggestion display directly above the play play display corresponding to the reserved play play for the first starting slot (n=1) is changed to an image of the number "7" at a predetermined timing.

This can overturn a player's guess based on a point award suggestion display that corresponds to a different number of points than will be awarded in a given game, providing a sense of surprise to the player and adding a touch of excitement to the player's expectations.

This type of configuration can also be achieved by pre-setting the performance scenario and point awarding scenario.

E. Fifth embodiment:
E1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 197 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to one embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a generally rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are located on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing during each play played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When a player operates the operating handle 25, gaming balls are launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism toward the front of the gaming board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor for permitting the operation of the gaming ball launching mechanism, a wait button that is pressed by the player to stop the gaming ball launching mechanism from launching gaming balls, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and gaming balls are launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism toward the front of the gaming board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10. Control devices for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 are located on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 198 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical units are provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 is equipped with a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board that has the function of managing the main control of the game and the function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio and light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes an LCD display that displays symbols and images for effects.

The third control unit 53 is equipped with a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for the payout of prize balls. When a command to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launching mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Additionally, the back of the inner frame 13 is equipped with several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 that is continuously replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the amusement hall, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping surface to allow game balls to flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically downstream of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls in response to commands from the payout control device 70.

Next, we will explain the game board. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

Figure 199 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 has multiple openings that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The gaming board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, multiple general winning openings 32 are provided on the gaming board 30. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71.

The first and second starting holes 33 and 34 both open upward and are arranged vertically side by side, with the first starting hole 33 higher than the second starting hole 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting hole 34 is provided with an electric device 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric device 34a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, when the electric device 34a is open, the game ball can enter the second starting hole 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that runs vertically. When a gaming ball enters the through gate 35, that is, when the gaming ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 triggers an internal lottery (lottery to open an electric device) using the winning entry as a trigger. If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to open an electric device, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that enters the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after winning and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball enters the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a jackpot opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the jackpot opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state, preventing game balls from entering the jackpot opening 36a. If a jackpot is won as a result of an internal lottery (jackpot lottery) by the main control device 60 and the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b alternates between an open state, allowing game balls to enter, and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a jackpot lottery by the main control device 60, triggered by a win in the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, and the opening/closing door 36b alternates between an open state and a closed state. In other words, if a jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on a win in the first starting hole 33, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode, allowing a win in the jackpot opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of a jackpot lottery based on a win in the second starting opening 34, the system transitions to an open/close execution mode in which a prize can be won in the large prize opening 36a of the variable prize device 36. In this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the large prize opening 36a of the variable prize device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The special chart unit 37 comprises a first result display unit 37a and a second result display unit 37b. The first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a jackpot lottery is held, triggered by a win in the first starting hole 33, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable display or a predetermined display as the display mode until it displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. When the lottery is completed, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

When a jackpot lottery is held, triggered by a win in the second starting hole 34, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable display or a predetermined display as the display mode until it displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. When the lottery ends, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special chart unit 37 further includes a first reserve display unit 37c and a second reserve display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 are reserved. The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. Also, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 are reserved. The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit.

The regular map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by a win at the through gate 35, the regular map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the regular map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Note that the special map unit 37 and regular map unit 38 are not limited to being composed of light-emitting displays using segment displays or LED lamps, and may be composed of various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is initiated, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends and a new game session begins.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured as various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first result display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a win at the first start gate 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Furthermore, when the second result display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a win at the second start gate 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to display effects triggered by a win at the first start gate 33 or the second start gate 34, but also displays effects during the open/close execution mode to which the mode is entered when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 200 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns variably displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the display surface 41a. Figure 200(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in Figure 200(a), patterns representing the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that the variably displayed patterns may be patterns in which each of the numbers 1 to 8 is accompanied by an image of a character or the like.

Figure 200(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol column Z1-Z3, the numbers 1-8 shown in Figure 200(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed in which each symbol column scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 200(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1-Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction periodically. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the static display is achieved, if the result of the jackpot lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described manner, and various other variations in the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round is one unit of processing for notifying a player of the results of a jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on a winning entry in either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies a player of the results of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning entry in either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, it causes the segment display to change display in either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b for each play round, and then stops displaying the segment display so that it displays a value corresponding to the lottery result for the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a win at either the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34, it causes the symbol display device 41 to variably display a predetermined symbol sequence for each play, and then statically displays the symbol sequence so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is made up of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display begins to when the predetermined lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is statically displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 200(b), a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The first hold display area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls based on winning at the first start port 33. The second hold display area Ds2 displays the number of reserved balls based on winning at the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won at the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is a maximum of four each.

E2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 201 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is primarily composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio/light emitting control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs stored in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input and output ports. The input side of the main control board 61 is connected to various detection sensors 67a-67e, the payout control device 70, and a power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control unit 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The main control board 61 is also connected to multiple detection sensors 67a-67e provided in various winning openings, such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. The main MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a game ball flowing down the game area PA during play has entered each winning port. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for a jackpot based on whether a ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and executes a lottery for opening an electric device based on whether a ball has entered the through gate 35.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the electric role opening lottery results in a win, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric role drive unit 34b so that the electric role 34a is opened. During each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 sends the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a win in the general winning slot 32 is identified, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a win in the first starting slot 33 is identified, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls. If a win in the second starting slot 34 is identified, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60. A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The audio and light control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it references the command information storage area 63f in the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio and light control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting devices such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 100. The effect operation button 24 is also connected to the audio and light control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a specified timing, the audio and light control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform game effects that reflect that operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the preview effect that will be executed in each game round. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time that the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 202 is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. The various counter information is used by the MPU 62 when performing jackpot lotteries, setting the display of the main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used in jackpot lotteries. A jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. A reach random number counter C3 is used in reach lotteries to determine whether a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to a miss.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first result display section 37a and second result display section 37b of the main display section 45, and in the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

RAM 64 has a reserve information storage area 64b. The reserve information storage area 64b is composed of a first reserve area Ra, a second reserve area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserve number storage area. When game balls enter the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 sequentially, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 at the time of the winning are stored in chronological order in the reserve information storage area 64b.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will now be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of RAM 64 when the gaming ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b when the gaming ball enters the first start port 33, and is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b when the gaming ball enters the second start port 34. The random number value that results in a jackpot win is stored as a win/lose table in the win/lose table storage area 63a of ROM 63.

Figure 203 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table memory area 63a. The pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes for the jackpot lottery: a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode. Figure 203(a) shows the hit/miss table for the low-probability mode, and Figure 203(b) shows the hit/miss table for the high-probability mode. As shown in Figure 203(a), in a gaming state where the hit/miss table for the low-probability mode is referenced in the jackpot lottery, two random numbers result in a jackpot win. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 203(b), in a gaming state where the hit/miss table for the high-probability mode is referenced in the jackpot lottery, 20 random numbers result in a jackpot win. Furthermore, the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot win in the low-probability mode is included in the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot win in the high-probability mode. Note that the number and values of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a special jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within a range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. More specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start port 33, it is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b (RAM 64), and when a gaming ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, we will explain the types of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (2) The lottery mode for the big win lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends. (3) The support mode for the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening and closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the frequency of winnings in the variable winning device 36 is relatively high and low from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b can be set to open and close 15 times from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, with each opening continuing until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 winnings have been won through the opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b can be set to open and close twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, with each opening continuing until 0.2 seconds have passed or until 10 winnings have been won through the opening and closing door 36b.

When the operating handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is controlled to launch one game ball toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 seconds. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode, no game balls actually win. However, it may be configured so that game balls can win even in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode.

The number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed, the limit time for opening per opening, and the limit number of items that can be opened per opening are all arbitrary, as long as the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may be set to open and close more times, have a longer limit time for opening per opening, or have a higher limit number of items that can be opened per opening than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the low-frequency winning mode opening/closing execution mode may be configured so that winning in the variable winning device 36 does not actually occur.

As the lottery mode for the jackpot lottery after the completion of the (2) open/close execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 can be set to either a probability lottery mode in which the jackpot lottery is conducted using a high-probability win/loss table, or a normal lottery mode in which the jackpot lottery is conducted using a low-probability win/loss table. As explained using Figure 203, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the jackpot lottery is conducted using a high-probability win/loss table compared to when the jackpot lottery is conducted using a low-probability win/loss table.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released in the same manner into the game area PA.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4 is the same in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, but the number of times the electric role 34a is opened when an electric role opening lottery is won is set more frequently in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening may be set longer. Also, if an electric role opening lottery is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set shorter than the opening time for each opening. Furthermore, the minimum time ensured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning at the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in achieving the conditions for obtaining special information.

In low frequency support mode, the probability of winning is higher in the first start hole 33 than in the second start hole 34, but in high frequency support mode, the probability of winning is higher in the second start hole 34 than in the first start hole 33. When a win occurs in the second start hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of electric role release per unit time in the high-frequency support mode compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be configured, for example, to increase the probability of winning the electric role release lottery in the electric role release lottery. Furthermore, in a configuration in which multiple types of reserved time are available for the period between one electric role release lottery and the next, the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of the following conditions: increasing the number of releases, lengthening the open time, shortening the reserved time between one electric role release lottery and the next, shortening the average reserved time, and increasing the probability of winning.

As described above, multiple types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, multiple types of jackpots are allocated using the jackpot type counter C2. The allocation destinations for the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored as an allocation table in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 204 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. Figure 204(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting slot, and Figure 204(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting slot.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting hole in Figure 204 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting hole 33 are set as 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot.

A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R probability variable jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

The 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0-39," "0-13" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot, "14-27" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot, "28-33" corresponds to a 16R regular jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has four types of jackpots. This diversifies the types of jackpots. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the 16R probability jackpot is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the 8R probability jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By providing multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage to the player in this way, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in FIG. 204(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a 16R certain variable jackpot and an 8R certain variable jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. In the allocation table for the second starting port, of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 ranging from "0 to 39," "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R certain variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R certain variable jackpot. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, all jackpots based on winning through the second starting port 34 are certain variable jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot win differs between when the jackpot win is based on winning through the first starting port 33 and when the jackpot win is based on winning through the second starting port 34.

In this way, the allocation of jackpot types between the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 provides a clear difference in the advantages to the player. Therefore, the player plays in the hope of winning the second start port 34, out of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. If the winning/losing lottery results in a loss, the game will not switch to the open/close execution mode, and the winning/losing lottery mode and support mode will not change.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described in detail. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first reserved area Ra of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the first start port 33, and the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reserved area Rb of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the second start port 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra or the second reserve area Rb is then moved to the execution area AE and compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c in ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach will occur. However, if a jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines whether a reach will occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 200(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed as varying symbols in symbol column Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be described in detail. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 to determine the change time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and the change time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the change type counter CS is acquired when determining the change pattern at the start of change display in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern. A change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the change time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 249, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is updated periodically and stored in the electric role holding area 64c of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held using the stored value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric role 34a is controlled to a closed state.

In addition, a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first start gate 33, and a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb corresponds to the holding information related to the second start gate 34, and these holding information correspond to the special information in this invention.

E3. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 205 is a time chart illustrating an example of the processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. In this explanation, the characteristics of the processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using two examples, case a1 and case a2.

Figure 205 (a) shows, as case a1, the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when a player wins the jackpot lottery in the first game round (hereinafter simply referred to as a "jackpot") and loses the jackpot lottery in the second game round played after the first game round. In this embodiment, we will explain a case where the jackpot lottery in the game round immediately preceding the first game round is a loss, and there are no other game rounds between the first and second game rounds. Note that there may be other game rounds between the first and second game rounds. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there are other game rounds between the first and second game rounds will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), if the jackpot lottery is won in the first play round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a preview effect and a reach effect. The preview effect is executed immediately before or after the start of the pattern fluctuations, and is an effect that indicates to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot lottery. The reach effect is executed after the reach effect, and is an effect that indicates to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result announcement effect that notifies the player of the result of the jackpot lottery for the first play round. In the first play round, the jackpot is announced as a result announcement effect.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state. The special gaming state is a state in which a bonus is awarded to the player. As shown in the figure, in the special gaming state, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect. As an opening effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the start of the opening/closing execution mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. During the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect. As shown in Figure 205 (a), in this explanation, the period for executing the ending effect is referred to as the ending period.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes suggestive effects, special game state reproduction effects, and specific end effects during the ending period. Suggestive effects are effects that suggest reproducing effects that have already been executed. In this embodiment, suggested effects are effects that suggest reproducing the preview effects, reach effects, and result announcement effects that were selected and executed from multiple types in the first game round. Furthermore, special game state reproduction effects are effects that reproduce at least a portion of effects that have already been executed in the special game state.

Figure 206 is an explanatory diagram showing examples of suggestive effects, specific end effects, and specific start effects, which will be described later. Figure 206(a) shows a suggestive effect, Figure 206(b) shows a specific end effect, and Figure 206(c) shows a specific start effect. The suggestive effect shown in Figure 206(a) is an effect that suggests that the female character will reproduce the effects executed in the first game round, namely, the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), after executing the suggestive effect during the ending period, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed in the first game round as a special game state reproduction effect. In this embodiment, the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed in the first game round are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, but only a portion of the preview effect, reach effect, or result announcement effect executed in the first game round may be reproduced. For example, when executing the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect as the special game state reproduction effect, the reach effect and result announcement effect may be reproduced preferentially, and some or all of the preview effect may be omitted. By omitting some or all of the preview effect that is frequently executed under normal circumstances and preferentially reproducing the reach effect and result announcement effect (jackpot announcement) that are executed only when a reach effect or jackpot occurs, the special game state reproduction effect can be executed by focusing on the effects that the player strongly desires to see, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the variable and stationary symbol displays are reproduced as a special game state reproduction effect, the content of the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed will differ in part from the content of the symbols actually displayed in the first game round.

After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a special end effect. Figure 206 (b) shows an example of a special end effect. As shown in the figure, the special end effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the female character suggests that the special game state reproduction effect has ended.

Let's return to Figure 205(a) for explanation. The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state with the end of the special ending effect. Thereafter, the second game round is executed. The jackpot lottery for the second game round is a miss. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal preview effect (also called a normal preview effect) that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, and a result announcement effect (miss announcement). This concludes the explanation of case a1.

Next, case a2 will be explained. Figure 205(b) shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in case a2, in which the jackpot lottery is won in the first game and also in the second game.

As shown in FIG. 205(b), if the jackpot lottery is won in the first play, the pachinko machine 10 executes a preview effect and a reach effect. Then, after executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result announcement effect that notifies the player of the result of the jackpot lottery for the first play. In the first play, the jackpot is announced as a result announcement effect.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 transitions from the gaming state to the special gaming state. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special gaming state. As an opening effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the start of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect during the ending period.

In case a2, unlike case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestive effect during the ending period. The content of the suggestive effect is the same as the content of the suggestive effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state upon the end of the suggestive effect. In other words, the ending period in case a2 is shorter than the ending period in case a1.

The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestive effect. Thereafter, the second game round is executed. In case a2, the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round as well. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game round replay effect as the effect in the second game round. A game round replay effect is an effect that reproduces at least a portion of an effect that has already been executed in a game round. In this embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced as the game round replay effect. That is, the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect (jackpot announcement) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, this result announcement effect (jackpot announcement) functions as part of the game round replay effect and also functions as an announcement of the result of the jackpot lottery in the second game round. Then, the second game round ends with the end of the game round replay effect.

As will be explained later using a flowchart, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of a game in which a jackpot lottery is won is constant. That is, in case a2, the first game and the second game are both game in which a jackpot lottery is won, so the fluctuation time of the first game and the fluctuation time of the second game are the same. Therefore, the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed in the first game can be executed as a game round reproduction effect in the second game.

In this embodiment, the variable time for a game round that wins a jackpot lottery is controlled to be constant. However, the variable time for a game round that wins a jackpot lottery may be set using a random number, so that the variable time for the game round at the time of a jackpot is different each time. In this case, if the second game round is longer than the first game round, a pre-prepared suggestive effect may be performed at the start of the second game round using the difference in the variable time between the second game round and the first game round (excess time). By preparing multiple types of suggestive effects for each length of excess time, suggestive effects can be performed at the start of the second game round even if the excess time is different each time. The suggestive effect performed using excess time will be performed after the suggestive effect performed in the special game state after the first game round. Therefore, the content of the suggestive effect performed using excess time may be set so that the suggestive effect performed in the special game state and the suggestive effect performed using excess time have continuity. By doing this, even if the second game round is longer than the first game round, the game round reproduction effect can be executed in the second game round without causing the player any discomfort.

Furthermore, if the second game round is shorter than the first game round, only some of the preview effects, reach effects, and result announcement effects executed in the first game round may be executed as game round reproduction effects. For example, when preview effects, reach effects, and result announcement effects are executed as game round reproduction effects, the reach effects and result announcement effects may be reproduced preferentially, and some or all of the preview effects may be omitted when executing the game round reproduction effects. By omitting some or all of the preview effects that are executed frequently under normal circumstances and preferentially reproducing reach effects and result announcement effects (jackpot announcements) that are executed only when a reach effect or jackpot is reached, it is possible to prioritize the reproduction of effects that the player strongly desires to see reproduced.

As shown in FIG. 205(b), after the second game round ends, the pachinko machine 10 transitions the game state to a special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a special start effect in the opening effect of the special game state. The special start effect is executed as the opening effect of the subsequent special game state if the jackpot lottery for the second game round is won and a game round reproduction effect is executed in the second game round.

Figure 206 (c) shows an example of a special start effect. The special start effect shown in the figure is an effect suggesting that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second play round, and is an effect suggesting that a special play state (open/close execution mode) will begin as a result of the jackpot in the second play round. After executing the special start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the open/close execution mode and the ending effect. In this case, the effect executed in the open/close execution mode and the ending effect (normal ending effect) are effects executed in the case of a normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect suggesting that the special play state will end.

The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been explained above using two cases, Case A1 and Case A2. As explained in Case A1, if the jackpot lottery for the second play is a miss, the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed after the suggestive effect are executed as special game state reproduction effects that reproduce the effects executed in the first play, and the player also recognizes them as reproductions of effects that have already been executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery for the second play is a win, as in Case A2, the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed after the suggestive effect are executed as reproductions of effects that have already been executed, but in reality, they are play round reproduction effects executed as a result of winning the jackpot lottery for the second play. If a player has first viewed the special game state reproduction effect in case a1, the player will recognize the game round reproduction effect in the second game round in case a2 as merely a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round, as in case a1, and will be unlikely to predict that he or she will have won the jackpot lottery for the second game round. In this state, when the preview effect and reach effect are executed in the second game round and the result announcement effect announces that the player has won the jackpot lottery for the second game round, the player will realize for the first time that the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed in the second game round are not simply a reproduction of the effects executed in the first game round, but are executed as a result of winning the jackpot lottery for the second game round. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 and the game round reproduction effect in case a2 in this way, an element of surprise is added to the game, and a sense of anticipation can be created in the player for an effect that reproduces at least a portion of the effect executed in the first game round. Furthermore, by making the second game round in case a2 develop in an unexpected way for the player, the player can be surprised and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in case a2, even though the jackpot lottery for the second play has been won, a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed in the first play will be reproduced, making it even more difficult for the player to predict that they have won the jackpot lottery for the second play. This further adds an element of surprise to the game.

Furthermore, as in case a2, if the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed in the first play round are reproduced exactly and executed in the second play round, there is a possibility that the player will not realize that they have won the jackpot lottery in the second play round even when the result announcement effect in the second play round is executed. However, after the second play round ends, a specific start effect is executed in the special play state, so the player can be made aware that they have won the jackpot lottery in the second play round at the time the specific start effect is executed.

E4. Overview of processing in standby state:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in a standby state will be described. The standby state refers to a state after a game has ended and neither a special game state nor a next game has started.

Figure 207 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in standby mode. This Figure 207 shows a state diagram indicating whether the pattern displayed on the main display unit 45 is changing, the display mode of the pattern display device 41, the output content of the sound output from the sound and light emission control device 90, and the output level (volume) of the sound. Figure 207 also shows the ON/OFF state of the standby mode flag in the main control device 60, the ON/OFF state of the transition condition establishment flag in the main control device 60, and the ON/OFF state of the cue determination flag in the sound and light emission control device 90. These flags will be described later.

Numbers such as "01" written in the display mode of the pattern display device 41 indicate the temporal position of the video data, with "01" indicating the beginning of the video data. The temporal position of the video data is the position of the video data corresponding to each time of the video displayed with a temporal length, and is the position of the video data corresponding to the temporal position of the video when the video data is viewed in terms of temporal length. For example, the time code recorded in the video data can be used as the temporal position of the video data. In this embodiment, when the video data of the background video is displayed up to the temporal position "30", it returns to the temporal position "01" and is displayed from the beginning again.

Numbers such as "01" written in the audio output content indicate the temporal position of the music data, with "01" indicating the beginning of the music data. The temporal position of music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of music output with a duration, and is the position of the music data corresponding to the temporal position of the music when the music data is viewed in terms of duration. For example, the time code recorded in the music data can be used as the temporal position of the music data. In this embodiment, once the background music data has been output up to the time position "30", it returns to the time position "01" and is output from the beginning again.

The display control device 100 displays a background video on the symbol display device 41 during a game round that displays a result corresponding to the jackpot lottery, and also causes the symbol display device 41 to continue displaying the background video even in standby mode after the game round has ended. The background video is a video displayed behind the symbols on the symbol display device 41, and when images or videos such as the preview effects and reach effects described above are displayed, it is displayed behind these images or videos. The background video in this embodiment is a video of a character dancing to the rhythm of the background music described below.

The audio and light emission control device 90 outputs background music (BGM) corresponding to the background video described above from the speaker 46 during a game round, and also continues to output the background music from the speaker 46 during standby mode after a game round has ended. In this embodiment, the background music is music that is output continuously in response to the background video and has the same duration as the background video. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, by outputting background music at time position "10" when the background video at time position "10" is displayed, a one-to-one correspondence between the display of the background video and the rhythm of the background music is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 207, when a game round ends, i.e., when the changing of the symbols on the main display unit 45 stops, the main control unit 60 turns the standby state flag ON (time t1). Then, after the changing of the symbols on the main display unit 45 stops and the standby state is entered, if 15 seconds have passed without the start of either the special game state or the next game round, i.e., if 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON, the main control unit 60 determines that the transition condition has been met, turns the transition condition met flag ON, and turns the standby state flag OFF (time t2).

The transition condition transitions the audio output mode from a mode in which background music is output at a volume preset by the player to a mode in which the background music volume is zero (muted state), and transitions the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from a mode in which a background video is displayed to a mode in which a demo video is displayed. In other words, when the transition condition is met, the audio output mode transitions to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 transitions to a mode in which the continuity of the background video is interrupted. Note that a demo video is a video different from the background video, and is a video intended to convey the appeal of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, the demo video may display the model name of the pachinko machine 10, explain how to play the pachinko machine 10, or explain the characters and story that appear in the pachinko machine 10. Note that a demo video is also sometimes called an attract video.

As shown in FIG. 207, when the transition condition is met at time t2, the audio and light emitting control device 90 transitions the audio output mode from a mode in which background music is output at a volume preset by the player (mode up to time t2), to a mode in which the background music continues to be output while the volume of the background music is reduced (faded out) over time (mode from time t2 to time t3), to a mode in which the background music volume is zero (mode from time t3 onwards). In this embodiment, the audio and light emitting control device 90 continues to output the background music until five seconds have elapsed since the background music volume reached zero, and stops outputting the background music when five seconds have elapsed since the background music volume reached zero (time t4). In the example shown in FIG. 207, the volume preset by the gaming ball is maximum volume.

When the transition condition is met, the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to a mode in which the demo video is displayed 5 seconds after the background music volume reaches zero (time t4). The audio and light emission control device 90 turns on the cue determination flag at the timing when the demo video starts to be displayed (time t4). The cue determination flag is a flag for determining whether to start displaying and outputting the background video and background music from their temporal beginning position "01" when the return condition described below is met. In this embodiment, the cue determination flag is turned on when the audio output mode transitions to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 transitions to a mode in which the continuity of the background video is interrupted.

After the transition condition is met, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 and a game turn (changing symbol display) begins, the main control device 60 determines that the return condition is met and turns the transition condition fulfillment flag OFF. The return condition is a condition for returning the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode displaying a background video and returning the audio output mode to a mode in which background music is output at a volume preset by the player.

As shown in FIG. 207, if the return condition is met after the background music volume has reached zero and the demo video display has begun (time t5), the cue determination flag is ON, and the display control device 100 and the audio and light-emitting control device 90 execute cue processing for the background video and background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the pattern display device 41 from a mode displaying the demo video to a mode displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background video on the pattern display device 41, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background video from the temporal start position "01". The audio and light-emitting control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and, when outputting the background music, starts outputting the background music from the temporal start position "01". Therefore, the background video and background music are both displayed and output starting from their temporal start positions.

The audio and light emission control device 90 can output multiple types of background music, and when performing cueing processing for background music and background video (processing to start outputting music or displaying video from the temporal starting position "01"), the type of background music to be cueed for can be selected randomly by lottery. The display control device 100 can display multiple types of background video corresponding to multiple types of background music, and can select a background video corresponding to the selected background music and perform the cueing processing. With this configuration, players can enjoy multiple types of background music and background video, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 208 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is met after the background music volume has reached zero and before the demo video starts to be displayed. As shown in Figure 208, if the return condition is met after the background music volume has reached zero and before the demo video starts to be displayed (time t4), the cue determination flag is OFF, so the display control device 100 continues to display the background video on the pattern display device 41, and the audio and light emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume previously set by the player. In this way, the display mode and audio output mode of the pattern display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition was met.

Figure 209 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is met while the volume of the background music is being reduced. As shown in Figure 209, if the return condition is met while the volume of the background music is being reduced (time t3), the cue determination flag is OFF, so the display control device 100 continues to display the background video on the symbol display device 41, and the audio and light emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume previously set by the player. In this way, the display mode and audio output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition was met.

As described above, according to this embodiment, if the restoration condition is met after the volume of the background music has reached zero and the display of the demo video has begun (Figure 207), the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode displaying the demo video to the mode displaying the background video. When displaying the background video on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background video from a predetermined time position in the background video. The audio and light emission control device 90 also executes a process to restore the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, starts outputting the background music from a predetermined time position in the background music. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background video begins varies depending on when the restoration condition is met, the display of the background video and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized. This improves the quality of the game presentation and increases the enjoyment of the game. Examples of configurations in which the temporal position at which the background video starts to be displayed varies depending on when the return condition is met include a configuration in which, when the return condition is met after the demo video has started to be displayed, the background video starts to be displayed from the temporal position of the background video that was displayed immediately before the transition to the mode in which the demo video is displayed; a configuration in which, when returning from the mode in which the demo video is displayed to the mode in which the background video is displayed, the temporal position at which the background video starts to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time since the transition to the mode in which the demo video is displayed; and a configuration in which, even after the transition from the mode in which the background video is displayed to the mode in which the demo video is displayed, the playback of the background video continues as an internal process, and, when returning from the mode in which the demo video is displayed to the mode in which the background video continues to be played as an internal process, the background video that continues to be played as an internal process is displayed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if the return condition is met after the background music volume has reached zero and the demo video display has begun (Figure 207), the display control device 100 starts displaying the background video from its temporal beginning position "01," and the audio and light emission control device 90 starts outputting the background music from its temporal beginning position "01." Therefore, compared to a configuration in which display starts from a temporal beginning position in the background video and background music output starts from a temporal beginning position, the sense of discomfort felt by the player can be reduced. For example, if a configuration in which display starts from a temporal beginning position in the background video and background music output starts from a temporal beginning position were adopted, the player would have to view the background video and background music from a temporal beginning position after the return condition is met, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or dissatisfied, as if they had not yet viewed parts of the background video and background music. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the player can view the background video and background music from their chronological beginning, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and gives the player a sense of satisfaction that they are able to view the entire background video and background music from their chronological beginning. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if the return condition is met after the background music volume has reached zero and before the demo video display begins (Figure 208), the display control device 100 continues to display the background video on the pattern display device 41, and the audio and light emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume previously set by the player. This allows for a natural, seamless return to the state before the transition condition was met, while maintaining synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if a return condition is met while the volume of the background music is being reduced (Figure 209), the display control device 100 continues to display the background video on the pattern display device 41, and the audio and light emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume previously set by the player. This allows for a natural, seamless return to the state before the transition condition was met, while maintaining synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the transition condition is determined to be met if 15 seconds have passed since the end of a game round without either the special game state or the next game round starting, so the volume of the background music can be reduced over time in a state where it is highly likely that the player is not playing.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a game round starts in the standby state, it is determined that the return condition has been met, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to a mode that displays background video, and the audio output mode returns to a mode that outputs background music at a volume preset by the player, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that a game round has started and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

E5. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, we will explain an example of specific control for executing the processes shown in Case A1 and Case A2 in the pachinko machine 10. First, we will explain the process executed in the main control device 60, and then we will explain the process executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100.

To progress each game, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 also executes NMI interrupt processing, which is initiated by the input of a power outage signal; however, a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
210 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is initiated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S50101, the system executes a reading process for the various detection sensors 67a-67e. That is, the system reads the status of the various detection sensors 67a-67e connected to the main control unit 60, determines the status of the sensors, and saves the detection information (winning detection information). Then, the system proceeds to step S50102.

In step S50102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S50103.

In step S50103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the program proceeds to step S50104.

In step S50104, a prize-winning process for the start port is executed in response to a win at the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Details of the prize-winning process for the start port in step S50104 will be described later. After executing step S50104, proceed to step S50105.

In step S50105, the through winning process is executed in response to a win at the through gate 35. Details of the through winning process in step S50105 will be described later. After executing step S50105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for starting gate>
Next, the winning process for the starting slot will be described. The winning process for the starting slot is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 210: S50104).

Figure 211 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the start opening. In step S50201, whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start opening 33 (start winning) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start opening 33. If it is determined in step S50201 that the gaming ball has won the first start opening 33 (S50201: YES), the process proceeds to step S50202, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S50203.

In step S50203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step S50204.

In step S50204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and this first start pending number RaN is set as the target for the processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of pending balls based on winning entries into the first start opening 33. Then, proceed to step S50209.

If it is determined in step S50201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (S50201: NO), the process proceeds to step S50205, where it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S50205 that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (S50205: YES), the process proceeds to step S50206, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out four gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S50207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50205 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S50205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step S50207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step S50208.

In step S50208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read, and this second start pending number RbN is set as the target for the processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending balls based on winning entries into the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step S50209.

In step S50209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S50204 or step S50208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S50209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (S50209: NO), the winning process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, if in step S50209 the number of pending start items N is less than the upper limit (S50209: YES), proceed to step S50210, add 1 to the number of pending start items N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step S50211, add 1 to the value stored in the total number of pending items storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total number of pending items CRN). The total number of pending items CRN indicates the sum of the first number of pending start items RaN and the second number of pending start items RbN. Then proceed to step S50212.

In step S50212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S50103 (Figure 210) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding holding area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved number to which 1 was added in step S50210. Specifically, if the first start reserved number RaN is set as the target for processing, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S50103 (Figure 210) are stored in the first free memory area of the first holding area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step S50210. Additionally, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S50103 (Fig. 210) are stored in the first free memory area in the second holding area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step S50210. After executing step S50212, proceed to step S50213.

In step S50213, a first-time determination process is executed. The first-time determination process is a process that determines the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc., based on the information (reserved information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the first-time determination process will be described later. After executing step S50213, proceed to step S50214.

In step S50214, a process for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the result of the advance determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to confirm that a win has occurred in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the result of the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on that win, before the hold information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of the normal process (Figure 214: step S50503), which will be described later.

In addition, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a win at the first start gate 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. On the other hand, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a win at the second start gate 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of hold items.

After executing step S50214, the main MPU 62 terminates the winning process for this starting slot.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the winning process for the starting slot (FIG. 211: S50213).

Figure 212 is a flowchart showing the advance determination process. As described above, the advance determination process is a process that executes determination results, such as whether the jackpot lottery will be won or lost, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach has occurred, based on the pending information, before the pending information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60.

In step S50301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the memory area due to a win at the start port in the winning process for the start port (Figure 211) is read. Then, proceed to step S50302, where the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this win is executed as a play round is determined. Specifically, the result of the determination of the prior determination process executed due to a win prior to this win is read from the corresponding memory area, and the presence or absence of a special jackpot that will occur prior to the jackpot lottery for this win is determined, thereby determining the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this win is executed as a play round.

If it is determined in step S50302 that the lottery mode is low probability mode at the time the jackpot lottery for this winning event is executed as a game round (S50302: YES), the process proceeds to step S50303, where the win/loss table for low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S50305, where, based on the reference to the win/loss table for low probability mode, it is determined whether the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50302 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time the jackpot lottery for this winning event is executed as a game round (S50302: NO), the process proceeds to step S50304, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step S50305, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step S50305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S50305: YES), the process proceeds to step S50306, where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the memory area due to a win in the current start port is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S50307, where the allocation table stored in the allocation table memory area 63b is referenced. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 that is the subject of this allocation was obtained based on a win in the first start port 33, the allocation table for the first start port is referenced; if it was obtained based on a win in the second start port 34, the allocation table for the second start port is referenced. After executing step S50307, the process proceeds to step S50308.

In step S50308, the allocation table is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to a special jackpot. If it is determined in step S50308 that it corresponds to a special jackpot (S50308: YES), the process proceeds to step S50309, where special jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. The first determination processing then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50308 that it does not correspond to a special jackpot (S50308: NO), the process proceeds to step S50310, where normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. The first determination processing then ends.

If it is determined in step S50305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (S50305: NO), the process proceeds to step S50311, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the current winning entry into the starting slot is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S50312, where the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table memory area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S50313, where, based on the reference to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step S50313 that a reach has occurred (S50313: YES), the process proceeds to step S50314, where reach occurrence information is stored in the first position determination processing result storage area 64f. The first position determination processing then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50313 that a reach has not occurred (S50313: NO), the first position determination processing ends.

<Winning process for skip>
Next, the skip prize winning process will be described. The skip prize winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 210: S50105).

Figure 213 is a flowchart showing the winning process for pass-through. In step S50401, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S50401 that the gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 (S50401: YES), the process proceeds to step S50402, where it is determined whether the number of reserved feature items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved feature items SN is a value indicating the number of winning feature items in the through gate 35 that are reserved for the purpose of holding a lottery to open an electric feature. In this embodiment, the maximum value for the number of reserved feature items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50401 that the gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S50401: NO), the winning process for pass-through is terminated.

If it is determined in step S50402 that the number of reserved reel items SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S50402: YES), proceed to step S50403, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reel items SN. Then, proceed to step S50404.

In step S50404, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S50103 (Fig. 210) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64c of RAM 64. Then, the winning process for the skip ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50402 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (S50402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the winning process for the pass is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 214 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S50501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings for each control device are performed when power is turned on, and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 is determined. Then, processing proceeds to step S50502.

In step S50502, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command that causes each sub-control device to start a demo video when power is turned on. Then, proceed to step S50503.

In step S50503, output data such as the start-up command set in step S50502, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. After executing step S50503, proceed to step S50504.

In step S50504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S50505.

In step S50505, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S50506. In step S50506, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the jackpot lottery, setting the variable pattern display by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first result display unit 37a and second result display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S50506, the process proceeds to step S50507.

In step S50507, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S50508.

In step S50508, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric device 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric device 34a. Details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S50509.

In step S50509, if the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined time, standby processing is executed to cause each control device on the sub-side to start a demo video. Details of the standby processing will be described later. Then, proceed to step S50510.

In step S50510, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (more precisely, the start of the command output processing in step S50503). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step S50510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (S50510: NO), in steps S50511 and S50512, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step S50511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step S50512, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50510 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (S50510: YES), the process returns to step S50503, and the processes from step S50503 to step S50508 are executed.

Note that the execution time for each process from step S50503 to step S507 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 214: S50506).

Figure 215 is a flowchart showing the game count control process. In step S50601, it is determined whether or not a special game state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening/closing execution mode flag is set ON when the game state is transitioned to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and set OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process. The ending period flag is set ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period) and set OFF at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S50601 that any of the opening period flag, open/close execution mode flag, or ending period flag is ON (S50601: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S50602 onwards. In other words, if the special game state is in progress, no game round will be started regardless of whether a win has occurred in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50601 that the special game state is not in progress (S50601: NO), the process proceeds to step S50602.

In step S50602, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is currently displaying changes. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is currently displaying changes. This determination is made by determining whether the change display flag in the change display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The change display flag is turned ON when change display is to begin for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when that change display ends.

If it is determined in step S50602 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying a variable value (S50602: NO), the process proceeds to steps S50603 to S50605 for starting a game. In step S50603, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0." If the total reserved number CRN is "0," this means that the start reserved number for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is "0." Therefore, if it is determined in step S50603 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S50603: YES), the game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50603 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S50603: NO), the process proceeds to step S50604.

In step S50604, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the fluctuation starts, and then the process proceeds to step S50605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S50605, a change start process is executed to start the change display on the main display unit 45 and the change display on the pattern display device 41. Details of the change start process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S50606.

In step S50606, the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. The play count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of plays executed in high frequency support mode. After executing step S50606, proceed to step S50607.

In step S50607, the standby state flag is turned OFF. The standby state flag is turned ON when the standby state begins and is turned OFF when the main display unit 45 begins to display changes or when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state began. After executing step S50607, proceed to step S50608.

In step S50608, it is determined whether the transition condition fulfillment flag is ON. The transition condition fulfillment flag is turned ON 15 seconds after the standby state begins, and is turned OFF when the main display unit 45 begins to change display. If it is determined in step S50608 that the transition condition fulfillment flag is ON (S50608: YES), the process proceeds to step S50609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50608 that the transition condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S50608: NO), the game count control process is terminated.

In step S50609, a return condition satisfaction command is set. The return condition satisfaction command is a command that causes each sub-control device to recognize that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has begun, i.e., that the return condition has been satisfied. After executing step S50609, proceed to step S50610.

In step S50610, the transition condition establishment flag is turned OFF. Then, the game play control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50602 that the main display unit 45 is displaying a variable value (S50602: YES), the game progress processing of steps S50611 to S50615 is executed.

In step S50611, it is determined whether the variable time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variable time is the time from when the symbol sequence begins to change until all symbol sequences have stopped, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S50611, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of RAM 64 has become "0." The value of this variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (Figure 218) described below. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated.

If it is determined in step S50611 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S50611: NO), the process proceeds to step S50612, where the fluctuation display process is executed. The fluctuation display process is a process that changes the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After step S50612 is executed, the game round control process ends.

If it is determined in step S50611 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S50611: YES), the process proceeds to step S50613, where the fluctuation end process is executed. The fluctuation end process controls the display of the result display unit so that the pattern to be displayed in the result display unit for the current game round, which was determined in the fluctuation start process (Fig. 217) described below, is displayed on the result display unit. After executing step S50613, the process proceeds to step S50614.

In step S50614, the standby state flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S50615, where the standby state time setting process is executed. Specifically, the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter area 64d is set to "7500" (i.e., 15.0 seconds). The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter used to measure the elapsed time since the standby state began, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec. After step S50615 is executed, the game play control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game play control process (FIG. 215: S50604).

Figure 216 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S50701, it is determined whether the holding area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, if the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 202) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 202), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 202) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 202), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the second holding area Rb. In other words, by executing the processing of step S50701, the pending information can be processed in the order in which it was stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

If it is determined in step S50701 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step S50701: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area is performed in steps S50702 to S50707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50701 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S50701: NO), data setting processing for the second holding area is performed in steps S50708 to S50713.

In step S50702, the first start pending number RaN in the first pending area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S50703, where the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S50704. In step S50704, the data stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S50705.

In step S50705, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S50705, proceed to step S50706.

In step S50706, if the second result display unit flag in the various flags storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF; if it is not ON, the flag is maintained in that state. The second result display unit flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display will start from the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Then, proceed to step S50707.

In step S50707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in the data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. The data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S50707 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S50503 of normal processing (Figure 214). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

If it is determined in step S50701 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, i.e., if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S50701: NO), proceed to step S50708.

In step S50708, the second start pending number RbN in the second holding area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step S50709. In step S50709, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step S50710, where the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step S50711.

In step S50711, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S50711, proceed to step S50712.

In step S50712, if the second result display section flag in the various flags storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is set to ON; if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step S50713.

In step S50713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, i.e., corresponds to the second starting port 34, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. This data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S50713 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S50503 of normal processing (Figure 214). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 215: S50605).

Figure 217 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S50801, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag that the MPU 62 uses to determine whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this embodiment, it is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode related to winning a special jackpot ends, and is turned OFF if a normal jackpot is subsequently won. If it is determined in step S50801 that it is the high probability mode (S50801: YES), the process proceeds to step S50802.

In step S50802, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in Figure 203 (b). Then, proceed to step S50804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50801 that the mode is not high probability mode (S50801: NO), proceed to step S50803.

In step S50803, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in Figure 203 (a). Then, proceed to step S50804.

In step S50804, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (jackpot lottery) in step S50802 or step S50803 is a hit/miss jackpot. If the result of the hit/miss determination in step S50804 is a hit/miss jackpot (S50804: YES), steps S50805 to S50812 are executed to set the game result and the stop result in the case of a hit/miss jackpot.

In step S50805, it is determined whether the second result display flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S50805 that the second result display flag is not ON (S50805: NO), the process proceeds to step S50806, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting slot (see Figure 204 (a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R regular jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R regular jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50805 that the second result display flag is ON (S50805: YES), the process proceeds to step S50807, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting slot (see Figure 204 (b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R regular jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R regular jackpot. After executing the processing of step S50806 or step S50807, the process proceeds to step S50808.

In step S50808, it is determined whether the type of jackpot allocated in step S50806 or step S50807 is a variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S50808 that the game result is a variable jackpot (S50808: YES), the process proceeds to step S50809.

In step S50809, the process for setting the stop result for a special jackpot is executed. The process for setting the stop result for a special jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game in which a special jackpot is won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a special jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S50806 or step S50807 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S50809, the process proceeds to step S50810.

In step S50810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S50806 or step S50807 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R jackpot, the 16R jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R jackpot, the 8R jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S50814.

In step S50808, if it is determined that the type of jackpot allocated in step S50806 or step S50807 is not a special jackpot (S50808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot allocated is a regular jackpot, proceed to step S50811.

In step S50811, the stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a normal jackpot will be won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S50806 or step S50807 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S50811, proceed to step S50812.

In step S50812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S50806 or step S50807 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S50814.

In step S50804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S50802 or step S50803 is not a jackpot win (S50804: NO), proceed to step S50813 and execute the stop result setting process for a loss. The stop result setting process for a loss is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which results in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S50813, proceed to step S50814.

In step S50814, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, based on whether or not a jackpot has been achieved or whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S50814, the process proceeds to step S50815.

In step S50815, it is determined whether the second result display section flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S50815 that the second result display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON (S50815: NO), the process proceeds to step S50816, where a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information acquired based on a win at the first start port 33, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S50814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50815 that the second result display section flag is ON (S50815: YES), the process proceeds to step S50817, where a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information acquired based on a win at the second start port 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S50814. After executing step S50816 or step S50817, proceed to step S50818.

In step S50818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred and the results of the allocation determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R special jackpot information, 8R special jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or a miss result.

The variation commands and type commands set in steps S50816 to S50818 are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S50503 of the normal processing (Figure 214). The audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the effects for that game round based on the received variation commands and type commands, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effects is executed. After executing step S50818, proceed to step S50819.

In step S50819, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round, either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, begins displaying the changing patterns. Specifically, if the second result display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display unit 37a and the changing display is begun; if the second result display unit flag is ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second result display unit 37b and the changing display is begun. After step S50819 is executed, this changing start process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 217: S50814).

Figure 218 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable time. In step S50901, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of RAM 64 is obtained. Then, proceed to step S50902.

In step S50902, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the special jackpot flag or the regular jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S50902: YES), the process proceeds to step S50903.

In step S50903, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for the number of games in which the jackpot lottery is won is fixed. Then, the process proceeds to step S50904, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S50902 that the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won (S50902: NO), the process proceeds to step S50905, where it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current play. Since this process (S50905) is executed if the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won in step S50902, in step S50905 it is determined whether a reach will occur among the play times in which the jackpot lottery has not been won. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach will occur (S50905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S50906. When determining whether a reach will occur using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 is referenced.

In step S50906, the variable time table for reaching a winning position stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for reaching a winning position is constant. Then, the process proceeds to step S50904, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S50905 that a reach will not occur in the current game (S50905: NO), the process proceeds to step S50907, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S50904, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the variable time may be configured to be independent of the total reserved number CRN, or may be set so that the smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Also, when the second start reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first start reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time; and when the second start reserved number RbN is "1" or greater, the greater the second start reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss is reached may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a special jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a miss is allowed, and a variable time table for a complete miss may be set separately.

<Game status transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 214: S50507).

Figure 219 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S51001, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. As explained in Figure 205, the ending period is the period for executing the ending presentation in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S51001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S51001: NO), the process proceeds to step S51002, where it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening and closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is transitioned to the opening and closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing execution mode is ended.

If it is determined in step S51002 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S51002: NO), proceed to step S51003, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S51003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S51003: NO), proceed to step S51004, where it is determined whether the timing has come when the variable display of the symbols in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S51004 that the variable display has not ended (S51004: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S51004 that the variable display has ended (S51004: YES), the process proceeds to step S51005, where it determines whether the game result of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it determines whether any of the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S51005: NO), the game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S51005 that the game result for this round (jackpot lottery result) corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode (S51005: YES), the process proceeds to step S51006, where the standby state flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S51007, where the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S51008.

In step S51008, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time length is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various timer counter area 64d of RAM 64. After executing step S51008, the process proceeds to step S51009.

In step S51009, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S50503 of the normal processing (Figure 214). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening and closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and opening and closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S51009, the process proceeds to step S51010, where the opening period flag is set ON. After that, the game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S51003 that the opening period flag is ON (S51003: YES), proceed to step S51011.

In step S51011, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0." If it is determined in step S51011 that the opening period has ended (S51011: YES), the process proceeds to step S51012, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S51013.

In step S51013, the process executes a round display start process to notify the type of current open/close execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in ROM 63, and the number of rounds is confirmed from the identified stop result data. The confirmed number of rounds is then output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the output is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step S51013, the process proceeds to step S51014.

In step S51014, the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability flag) stored in RAM 64 is checked. In step S51014, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM 64 is a 16R probability flag or a 16R normal flag (S51014: YES), the process proceeds to step S51015, where "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of RAM 64. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51014 that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM 64 is an 8R probability flag or an 8R normal flag (S51014: NO), the process proceeds to step S51016, where "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. After executing step S51015 or step S51016, the process proceeds to step S51017.

In step S51017, the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S51002 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S51002: YES), the process proceeds to step S51018, where the special prize opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, if the special prize opening 36a is closed, the special prize opening 36a is opened by driving the variable prize drive unit 36c, provided that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or greater. Furthermore, if the special prize opening 36a is open, the drive state of the variable prize drive unit 36c is stopped, and the special prize opening 36a is closed, provided that the opening limit time has elapsed since the special prize opening 36a was opened, or the opening limit number of prizes has been won. Details of the special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S51018, the process proceeds to step S51019.

In step S51019, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S51019: NO), the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S51019: YES), the process proceeds to step S51020, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step S51020, the process proceeds to step S51021.

In step S51021, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is terminated so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S51021, the process proceeds to step S51022.

In step S51022, a condition determination process is executed. The condition determination process is a process that determines whether or not case a2 shown in Figure 205 applies. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a suggestion effect will be executed during the ending period if the jackpot lottery is won in the next game round, and whether or not a process will be executed to reproduce the effects executed in the current game round (preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect (jackpot announcement)) in the variable time of the next game round. The condition determination process will be described later. After executing step S51022, the process proceeds to step S51023.

In step S51023, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the duration of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S51023, the process proceeds to step S51024.

In step S51024, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S50503 of the normal processing (Figure 214). Upon receiving the ending command, the audio and light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode. After executing step S51024, proceed to step S51025.

In step S51025, the ending period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S51001 that the ending period flag is ON (S51001: YES), proceed to step S51026.

In step S51026, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S51023), is "0." The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in the ending time setting process (FIG. 221), which will be described later. In step S51026, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (S51026: YES), proceed to step S51027.

In step S51027, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S51028, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period has ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S51028, the process proceeds to step S51029.

In step S51029, the standby state flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S51030, where the standby state time setting process is executed. Specifically, the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter area 64d is set to "7500" (i.e., 15.0 seconds). After executing step S51030, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (S51026: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 219: S51017).

Figure 220 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. In step S51101, it is determined whether the large prize opening 36a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the variable prize drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S51101 that the large prize opening 36a is not open (S51101: NO), the process proceeds to step S51102, where it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0." If it is determined in step S51102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S51102: YES), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S51102: NO), the process proceeds to step S51103.

In step S51103, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of closure of the large prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step S51103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S51103: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S51103: YES), the process proceeds to step S51104, where the variable prize drive unit 36c is driven to open the large prize opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S51105.

In step S51105, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since all set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, the first timer counter area T1 is set to "15,000" (i.e., 30 seconds). Furthermore, to count the number of game balls that have entered the large winning slot 36a, the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "10." The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to low-frequency winning mode, for example, the first timer counter area T1 may be set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds) and the winning counter area PC may be set to "6." After executing step S51105, the process proceeds to step S51106.

In step S51106, an opening command is set. The large prize opening opening/closing process then ends. The opening command includes information for the sub-controllers, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun. The command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 214: step S50503). Based on the received opening command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has begun, and updates the presentation content displayed on the various lamps 47 and speakers 46 to reflect the fact that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun. The audio and light-emitting control device 90 also sends the opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has begun, and updates the presentation content displayed on the pattern display device 41 to reflect the fact that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun.

If it is determined in step S51101 that the special prize opening 36a is open (step S51101: YES), the process proceeds to step S51107, where it is determined whether the value in the first timer counter area T1 is "0." In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration that the special prize opening 36a remains open. If it is determined in step S51107 that the value in the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S51107: NO), the process proceeds to step S51108.

In step S51108, whether or not a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 36a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable prize opening device 36. If it is determined in step S51108 that a prize has not been entered (S51108: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51108 that a prize has been entered (S51108: YES), the process proceeds to step S51109, where the value of the prize counter area PC is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S51110.

In step S51110, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter area PC is "0." If it is determined in step S51110 that the value of the prize counter area PC is not "0" (S51110: NO), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S51107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S51107: YES), or if it is determined in step S51110 that the value of the prize counter area PC is "0" (S51110: YES), the process proceeds to step S51111, where the special prize opening closure process is executed. Specifically, the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is set to a non-driven state in order to close the special prize opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S51112.

In step S51112, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step S51113, where it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0." If it is determined in step S51113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S51113: YES), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S51113: NO), the first timer counter area T1 is set to "1000" (i.e., 2 seconds). In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of closure of the large prize opening 36a. After executing step S51114, proceed to step S51115, where a closure command is set. Then, the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

This set close command contains information for the sub-controllers, the audio and light emitting control device 90 and display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has been completed, and is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 during the external output process of normal processing (Figure 214: step S50503). Based on the received close command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content displayed on the various lamps 47 and speakers 46 to reflect the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a. The audio and light emitting control device 90 also sends the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received close command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content displayed on the pattern display device 41 to reflect the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a.

<Condition determination process>
Next, the condition determination process will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 219: S51022).

As described above, the condition determination process is a process that determines whether or not case a2 shown in Figure 205 applies. The condition that makes it possible to execute the process for case a2 is to win the jackpot lottery in the first play round and also win the jackpot lottery in the second play round. This condition determination process is executed immediately before the end of the open/close execution mode after winning the jackpot lottery in a play round, and is a process that determines whether or not the jackpot lottery will be won in the next play round.

Figure 221 is a flowchart showing the condition determination process. In step S51201, it is determined whether the number of reserved items CRN > 0. By executing this process, when a special game state is being executed after the first game round, it is confirmed whether there is a game round immediately after the special game state. If there is no game round, there is no game round equivalent to the second game round in which a game round reproduction effect can be executed immediately after the suggestion effect, and it is impossible to execute the process for case a2.

If it is determined in step S51201 that the reserved number CRN is greater than 0 (S51201: YES), proceed to step S51202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51201 that the reserved number CRN is not greater than 0 (S51201: NO), the condition determination process ends.

In step S51202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the next game is read. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the memory area due to a win at the start port in the start port winning process (Figure 211) is read. Then, proceed to step S51203.

In step S51203, it is determined whether the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing this process, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for the next game will be conducted in high probability mode or low probability mode.

If it is determined in step S51203 that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S51203: YES), the process proceeds to step S51204, where the hit/miss table for the low probability mode stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S51206, where, based on the result of referencing the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51203 that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S51203: NO), the process proceeds to step S51205, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S51206, where, based on the result of referencing the hit/miss table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step S51206, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S51206: YES), proceed to step S51207.

In step S51207, it is determined whether the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON. The effect overlap avoidance flag is a flag used in case a2 (Figure 205) to prevent the game round replay effect executed in the second game round from being further reproduced and executed during the ending period of the special game state after the second game round. If it is determined in step S51207 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is not ON (S51207: NO), the process proceeds to step S51208, where the condition fulfillment flag is set ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S51209.

In step S51209, a condition fulfillment command is set. The condition fulfillment command is a command that includes information for the audio and light emission control device 90, which is the sub-side, to recognize that the condition fulfillment flag is ON. The condition fulfillment command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 by the external output process of the normal process (Figure 214: step S50503). Then, the condition determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (S51206: NO), or if it is determined in step S51207 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON (S51207: YES), this condition determination process is terminated.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 219: S51023).

Figure 222 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S51301, it is determined whether the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S51301 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is not ON (S51301: NO), proceed to step S51302, where it is determined whether the condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S51302 that the condition fulfillment flag is ON (S51302: YES), proceed to step S51303.

In step S51303, the fourth timer counter area T4, which is the ending time timer, is set to "3000" (6 seconds). The processing in step S51303 is processing to set the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a2 of Figure 205. In case a2, only the suggestive effect is executed during the ending period, and the effect executed in the first game round is not reproduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, 6 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the suggestive effect. After executing step S51303, proceed to step S51304, where the condition fulfillment flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step S51305.

In step S51305, the effect overlap avoidance flag is turned ON. Then, this ending time setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51302 that the condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S51302: NO), proceed to step S51306.

In step S51306, the fourth timer counter area T4 is set to "15000" (30 seconds). The processing in step S51306 is processing for setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of Figure 205. In case a1, suggestive effects and special game state reproduction effects are executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 30 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute suggestive effects and special game state reproduction effects. Note that in this embodiment, the time required for suggestive effects is fixed at 6 seconds, and the time required for special game state reproduction effects is fixed at 24 seconds. After executing step S51303, this ending time setting processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S51301 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON (S51301: YES), the process proceeds to step S51307, where an effect overlap avoidance command is set. The effect overlap avoidance command is a command that includes information for the audio and light emission control device 90, which is the sub-side, to recognize that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON. The effect overlap avoidance command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 214: step S50503). After executing step S51307, the process proceeds to step S51308.

In step S51308, "4000" (8 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The processing in step S51308 is processing for setting the ending time in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of Figure 205. In case a2, the normal ending presentation is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 8 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the normal ending presentation.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 219: S51028).

Figure 223 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S51401, it is determined whether a jackpot type flag corresponding to a guaranteed jackpot is set ON in RAM 64. In other words, it is determined whether the 16R guaranteed jackpot flag or the 8R guaranteed jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S51401 that the 16R probability flag or 8R probability flag in RAM 64 is ON (S51401: YES), the process proceeds to step S51402, where a flag deletion process is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, or high frequency support mode flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, it is maintained in that state. After executing step S51402, the process proceeds to step S51403.

In step S51403, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S51404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state transitions to one in which the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. The process then proceeds to step S51405.

In step S51405, the number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of plays counter PNC indicates the number of plays when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of plays. Then, proceed to step S51406.

In step S51406, a high probability mode command, which is a command containing information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step S51410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51401 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is ON in RAM 64 (S51401: NO), the process proceeds to step S51407, where flag erasure processing is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, or high frequency support mode flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, it is maintained in that state. Then, the process proceeds to step S51408.

In step S51408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S51409, where the number of games played counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. Then the process proceeds to step S51410.

In step S51410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command containing information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electricity support treatment>
Next, the electric support processing will be described. The electric support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 214: S50508).

Figure 224 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing. In step S51501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step S51501, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (S51501: NO), the process proceeds to step S51502.

In step S51502, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is turned ON if the electric feature opening lottery, which determines whether or not the electric feature 34a will be opened, is selected to open, and is turned OFF if the support in progress flag is ON. In step S51502, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (S51502: NO), the program proceeds to step S51503.

In step S51503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S51503 that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S51503: NO), the main power support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S51503: YES), the processing proceeds to step S51504.

In step S51504, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step S51504 that it is time to end the variable display (S51504: YES), the process proceeds to step S51505, where a loss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the loss display, the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the loss display displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51504 that it is not time to end the variable display (S51504: NO), the process proceeds to step S51506.

In step S51506, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S51506 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (S51506: NO), the main electric reel support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51506 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (S51506: YES), the processing proceeds to step S51507.

In step S51507, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the program proceeds to step S51508, where it determines whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step S51507 (S51507: NO) and the game is in the high-frequency support mode in step S51508 (S51508: YES), the program proceeds to step S51509, where a lottery is held to unlock the electric feature. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature unlock counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the game is won in the lottery to unlock the electric feature. Simultaneously with the lottery to unlock the electric feature, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 seconds). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated. The program then proceeds to step S51510.

In step S51510, it is determined whether the result of the electric reel opening lottery in step S51509 is a support win. If it is determined in step S51510 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is a support win (S51510: YES), the process proceeds to step S51511, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric reel 34a has been opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S51512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51510 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is not a support win (S51510: NO), the process proceeds to step S51512 without executing the processing of step S51511.

In step S51512, it is determined whether the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S51512 that the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode (S51512: YES), the process proceeds to step S51513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51512 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S51512: NO), the main role support processing is terminated.

In step S51513, it is determined whether the play count counter area is "0". The play count counter is decremented by 1 each time a play is completed when the low probability mode is in high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S51513 that the play count counter area is not "0" (S51513: NO), the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51513 that the play count counter area is "0", the processing proceeds to step S51514, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing proceeds to step S51515.

In step S51515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command containing information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the electric support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S51515 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the external output processing of normal processing (Figure 214: step S50503). Based on receiving the low-frequency support command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S51507 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (S51507: YES), or if it is determined in step S51518 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S51508: NO), the process proceeds to step S51516, where a lottery is held to open an electric reel. Specifically, the value stored in the electric reel reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric reel opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric reel opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric reel opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e., 29.5 seconds). Then, the process proceeds to step S51517.

In step S51517, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step S51516 is a support win. If it is determined in step S51517 that there is no support win (S51517: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51517 that there is a support win (S51517: YES), the process proceeds to step S51518, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S51502 that the support win flag is ON (S51502: YES), the process proceeds to step S51519, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step S51519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S51519: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, and the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S51519: YES), the process proceeds to step S51520.

In step S51520, a win display is set. This ends the variable display of the image on the normal unit 38 with the win display still displayed. Then, proceed to step S51521, turn the support in progress flag ON, and turn the support win flag OFF. Then, end the main role support processing.

If it is determined in step S51501 that the support flag is ON (S51501: YES), the process proceeds to step S51522, where an electric role opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. Then, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electrical switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 224: S51522).

Figure 225 is a flowchart showing the electric device opening/closing control process. In step S51601, it is determined whether the electric device 34a is open. Whether the electric device 34a is open is determined by whether the electric device drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the electric device 34a is open (S51601: YES), the process proceeds to step S51602.

In step S51602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a. In step S51602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S51602: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a has not ended, the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S51602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S51602: YES), the process proceeds to step S51603, where a closing process is performed to control the electric device 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being open, is "0," the electric device 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is then used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250." After executing step S51603, the process proceeds to step S51604.

In step S51604, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S51605, where it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S51605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S51605: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S51605: YES), the process proceeds to step S51606, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S51601 that the electric role 34a is not open (S51601: NO), proceed to step S51607, where it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the closed state of the electric role 34a. If it is determined in step S51607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S51607: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S51607: YES), proceed to step S51608, where an opening process is executed to control the electric role 34a to the open state. Then, proceed to step S51609.

In step S51609, it is determined whether the device is in opening/closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the device is not in opening/closing execution mode (S51609: NO), the process proceeds to step S51610, where it is determined whether the device is in high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S51610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S51610: YES), the process proceeds to step S51611, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). The main electric switch opening/closing control process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51609 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S51609: YES), or if it is determined in step S51610 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S51610: NO), proceed to step S51612, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). Then, this electric switching control process ends.

<Standby processing>
Next, the standby process will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 214: S50509).

Figure 226 is a flowchart showing standby processing. In step S51701, it is determined whether the standby state flag is ON. If it is determined in step S51701 that the standby state flag is ON (S51701: YES), the process proceeds to step S51702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S51701: NO), this standby processing is terminated.

In step S51702, it is determined whether 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, and if the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, it is determined that 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON. If it is determined in step S51702 that 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON, the process proceeds to step S51703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51702 that 15 seconds have not passed since the standby state flag was turned ON, this standby process is terminated.

In step S51703, the standby state flag is turned OFF, and processing proceeds to step S51704, where the transition condition fulfillment flag is turned ON. Processing then proceeds to step S51705, where a transition condition fulfillment command is set. The transition condition fulfillment command is a command for each sub-side control device to recognize that 15 seconds have passed since the standby state began, i.e., that the transition condition has been fulfilled. After step S51705 is executed, this standby processing ends.

E6. Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 227 is a block diagram that focuses on the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components, such as the power supply device 85, have been omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on the audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is a device that incorporates a ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, part of the area of RAM 94 is provided with a various flag storage area 94a, various counter area 94b, lottery counter area 94c, etc. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92; they may each be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the performance operation button 24, speaker 46, various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102; they may each be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various received commands, thereby controlling the VDP 105 (specifically, generating internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 104 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 102.

VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP 105 adjusts the timing of MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM 107 from character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and other data. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106, with each character ROM 106 responsible for storing image data and other data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

Video RAM 107 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively; the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 will also be referred to as the audio/light MPU 92, audio/light ROM 93, and audio/light RAM 94, respectively; and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will also be referred to as the display MPU 102.

E7. Various processes executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the audio and light emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the process executed in the audio and light emission control device 90 will be described, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the acoustic/optical side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 228 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is executed repeatedly at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing is explained below.

In step S51801, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio-visual RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio-visual RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. Commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step S51801, the process proceeds to step S51802.

In step S51802, command response processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the received command. Details of command response processing will be described later. After executing step S51802, proceed to step S51803.

In step S51803, standby state transition processing is executed to reduce the audio output level (volume) in standby state and start a demo video. Details of the standby state transition processing will be described later. After executing step S51803, proceed to step S51804.

In step S51804, light emission control processing is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control processing, light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the command response processing in step S51802 above. After executing step S51804, proceed to step S51805.

In step S51805, audio output control processing is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control processing, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command response processing in step S51802 above. After step S51805 is executed, this timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, the command response processing will be described. The command response processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 228: S51802).

Figure 229 is a flowchart showing the command response processing. As described above, in the command response processing, processing is performed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step performed in the command response processing is explained below.

In step S51901, it is determined whether a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51901 that a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51901: YES), the process proceeds to step S51902, where startup command response processing is executed. Details of the startup command response processing will be described later. After executing step S51902, the process proceeds to step S51903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51901 that a startup command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S51901: NO), the process proceeds to step S51903 without executing step S51902.

In step S51903, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51903 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51903: YES), the process proceeds to step S51904, where hold command response processing is executed. Details of the hold command response processing will be described later. After executing step S51904, the process proceeds to step S51905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51903 that a hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S51903: NO), the process proceeds to step S51905 without executing step S51904.

In step S51905, it is determined whether a fluctuation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51905 that a fluctuation command and a type command have been received (S51905: YES), the process proceeds to step S51906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51905 that a fluctuation command and a type command have not been received (S51905: NO), the process proceeds to step S51907.

In step S51906, the effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process, the preview effect, reach effect, stop symbols, variable display pattern, etc. to be executed in the current game round are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S51906, proceed to step S51907.

In step S51907, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51907 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51907: YES), the process proceeds to step S51908, where the opening effect setting process is executed. In the opening effect setting process, the type of jackpot contained in the currently received opening command is identified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to that type of jackpot is set, and an opening effect command with information corresponding to the content of the effect set is sent to the display MPU 102. Then, the process proceeds to step S51909.

In step S51909, the opening and closing execution mode effect setting process is executed. In the opening and closing execution mode effect setting process, the content of the effect to be executed in the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the information on the number of rounds and the type of jackpot included in the opening command. After executing step S51909, proceed to step S51910.

If it is determined in step S51907 that an opening command has not been received (S51907: NO), steps S51908 and S51909 are not executed, and the process proceeds to step S51910.

In step S51910, it is determined whether a condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51910 that a condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51910: YES), the process proceeds to step S51911, where the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound/light side RAM 94 is turned ON. After executing step S51911, the process proceeds to step S51912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51910 that a condition fulfillment command has not been received (S51910: NO), the process proceeds to step S51912 without executing step S51911.

In step S51912, it is determined whether a performance overlap avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51912 that a performance overlap avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51912: YES), the process proceeds to step S51913, where the sound/light side performance overlap flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound/light side RAM 94 is turned ON. After executing step S51913, the process proceeds to step S51914. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51912 that a performance overlap avoidance command has not been received (S51912: NO), the process proceeds to step S51914 without executing step S51913.

In step S51914, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S51914 that an ending command has been received (S51914: YES), the process proceeds to step S51915, where the ending performance setting process is executed. The ending performance setting process sets the content of the ending performance for the ending period based on information regarding the ending time included in the currently received ending command and information on the ON/OFF status of the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag. The ending performance setting process will be described later. After executing step S51915, the process proceeds to step S51920.

If it is determined in step S51914 that an ending command has not been received (S51914: NO), step S51915 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S51916.

In step S51916, it is determined whether a transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51916 that a transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51916: YES), the process proceeds to step S51917, where the volume reduction flag is set ON. The volume reduction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, and is set ON when processing to reduce the audio output level (volume) begins, and is set OFF when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. After executing step S51917, the process proceeds to step S51918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51916 that a transition condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S51916: NO), the process proceeds to step S51918 without executing step S51917.

In step S51918, it is determined whether a return condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51918 that a return condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51918: YES), the process proceeds to step S51919, where the return condition satisfaction flag is set ON. The return condition satisfaction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, and is set ON when processing to restore the audio output level (volume) or to end the demo video is started, and is set OFF when the audio output level (volume) has been restored and the demo video has ended. After executing step S51919, the process proceeds to step S51920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51918 that a return condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S51918: NO), the process proceeds to step S51920 without executing step S51919.

In step S51920, other setting processes are executed. In other setting processes, for example, the performance content corresponding to the high frequency support mode command, low frequency support mode command, open command, and close command is set. In addition, when the performance operation button 24 is pressed, a performance operation command is sent to the display side MPU 102 to recognize that the performance operation button 24 has been pressed. After executing step S51920, this command response process is terminated.

<Startup command response processing>
Next, the startup command response process will be described. The startup command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 229: S51902).

Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the startup command response process. As described above, the startup command response process is executed when a startup command is received from the main MPU 62. The following describes the processing of each step executed in the startup command response process.

In step S52001, a demo video start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The demo video start command is a command that causes the display-side MPU 102 to start displaying the demo video. Upon receiving the demo video start command, the display-side MPU 102 begins processing to display the demo video on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S52001, proceed to step S52002.

In step S52002, the demo video display flag is turned ON. The demo video display flag is a flag indicating that a demo video is being displayed on the pattern display device 41, and is turned ON when the display of the demo video begins and turned OFF when the display of the demo video ends. After executing step S52002, proceed to step S52003.

In step S52003, the cue determination flag is set ON. As described above, the cue determination flag is a flag used to determine whether or not to start outputting and displaying the background music and background video from their temporal beginnings when the return conditions are met and the output of the background music and the display of the background video begin. If the cue determination flag is ON when the return conditions are met, the outputting and displaying of the background music and background video begin from their temporal beginnings. After step S52003 is executed, this startup command response process ends.

<Pending command response processing>
Next, the hold command response process will be described. The hold command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 229: S51904).

Figure 231 is a flowchart showing the pending command response process. As described above, the pending command response process is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62. The following describes the processing of each step executed in the pending command response process.

In step S52101, update processing is performed when a prize is won. In the update processing when a prize is won, processing is performed to enable the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information items acquired based on a prize being won at the first start port 33, the number of pending information items acquired based on a prize being won at the second start port 34, and the total number of these pending information items. Details of the update processing when a prize is won in step S52101 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of pending information items acquired based on a prize being won at the first start port 33 will be referred to as the "first pending number," the number of pending information items acquired based on a prize being won at the second start port 34 will be referred to as the "second pending number," and the sum of the first pending number and the second pending number will be referred to as the "total pending number." After executing step S52101, proceed to step S52102.

In step S52102, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode (color and combination of lit LED lamps) of the first hold display unit 37c and the second hold display unit 37d is controlled based on the number of hold information items acquired based on winning entries at the first start port 33 identified in step S52101 and the number of hold information items acquired based on winning entries at the second start port 34. After step S52102 is executed, the hold command response process is terminated.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update process when a prize is won will be described. The update process when a prize is won is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command response process (FIG. 231: S52101).

Figure 232 is a flowchart showing the update process when a prize is won. In step S52201, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was sent based on a prize being won at the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S52201 that the pending command to be read this time was sent based on a prize being won at the first start port 33 (S52201: YES), the process proceeds to step S52202, where the update process is performed on the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The first pending number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information obtained based on a prize being won at the first start port 33. In the update process of the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the information on the number of pending information included in the pending command to be read this time. After executing step S52202, the process proceeds to step S52204.

In step S52201, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not sent based on a win at the first start port 33 (S52201: NO), that is, if it is determined that the pending command was sent based on a win at the second start port 34, proceed to step S52203, where an update process is performed on the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The second pending number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information obtained based on a win at the second start port 34. In the update process of the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the information on the number of pending information included in the command to be read this time. After executing step S52203, proceed to step S52204.

The reason for the processing of steps S52202 and S52203 as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio and light-emitting control unit 90. Therefore, if power is cut off while pending information related to a win in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60, the pending information will be stored and maintained in the main control unit 60, but the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 will recognize that there are zero pending information items. In this case, if the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 were configured to count up the first pending item number counter area or the second pending item number counter area each time it receives a hold command, an inconvenience could arise in which the number of pending information items actually stored in the main control unit 60 would not match the number of pending information items recognized by the audio and light-emitting control unit 90. In contrast, in the present embodiment described above, the main control unit 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio and light emission control unit 90 sets the information on the number of held items included in the command in the first held item number counter area or the second held item number counter area each time it receives a hold command, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step S52204, an update process is executed for the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The total reserved number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to determine the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on winning at the first start port 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on winning at the second start port 34. In this update process, the information in the total reserved number counter area is updated to the sum of the information on the number of reserved items measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information on the number of reserved items measured in the second reserved number counter area. After executing step S52204, the update process for this winning event is terminated.

<Performance setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 229: S51906).

Figure 233 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is executed when it is determined that a variation command and a type command have been received, and is used to set the content of the effects to be executed in the current game round. Specific steps in the effect setting process are explained below.

In step S52301, the currently received fluctuation command is read, and information regarding the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether a reach has occurred, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. The read information is then stored in a register in the sound/light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step S52302.

In step S52302, it is determined whether the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52302 that the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S52302: NO), proceed to step S52303.

In step S52303, a process for setting the type of effect is executed. The process for setting the type of effect executed in step S52303 is a process for setting the content of the preview effect and reach effect for the game round. The process for setting the type of effect will be described later. After executing step S52303, the process proceeds to step S52304.

In step S52304, the stopping symbol setting process is executed. In the stopping symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game is a 16R probability jackpot, an 8R probability jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stopping result in which the same symbol combination is formed on the active line L is set as the stopping symbol information for the current game. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game is a 16R probability jackpot or an 8R probability jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the same symbol combination, and a combination of the same even symbols may also be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for combinations of the same odd symbols and combinations of the same even symbols. However, the former may be selected at a higher rate than the latter, or the latter may be selected at a higher rate than the former. Furthermore, the "7" symbol combination is selected only in the case of a 16R probability jackpot. Additionally, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game is a 16R regular jackpot or an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even-numbered symbols will be selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for this game is a miss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, the information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of identical symbols does not occur on the active line L, but a reach symbol combination occurs on the active line L, is determined as the information on the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, the information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of identical symbols does not occur on the active line L, but a reach symbol combination does not occur on the active line L, is set as the information on the current stop symbol. After executing step S52304, proceed to step S52305.

In step S52305, processing is executed to determine the variable display pattern for the current game round. In this processing, information on the variable time for the current game round is identified from the content of the currently received variable command, and a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of this variable time information and the information on the stopped symbols identified in step S52304 above is selected. When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced. Then, proceed to step S52306.

In step S52306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery for the current game has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the received fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S52306 that the jackpot lottery for the current game has been won (S52306: YES), the process proceeds to step S52307.

In step S52307, information on the effect type, stop symbols, and variable display pattern set for the current round of play is stored. Specifically, the settings made in the effect setting process of step S52303 are stored. This process is performed to reproduce the effects from the round of play in which the jackpot lottery was won. After step S52307 is executed, the process proceeds to step S52312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52306 that the jackpot lottery for the current round of play has not been won (S52306: NO), the process proceeds to step S52312 without executing step S52307.

If it is determined in step S52302 that the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag is ON (S52302: YES), the process proceeds to step S52308. In other words, if it is determined that processing corresponding to case a2 described in FIG. 205 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S52308.

In step S52308, the information on the effect type, stop symbols, and variable display pattern stored in step S52307 of the effect setting process for the previous game is read. Then, proceed to step S52309.

In step S52309, the process for setting the effect type is executed based on the information on the effect type, stop symbols, and variable display pattern read in step S52308. In other words, the process sets an effect with the same content as the effect executed in the previous game. Then, the process proceeds to step S52310.

In step S52310, the process for setting the stop symbols is executed based on the information on the effect type, stop symbols, and variable display pattern read in step S52308. In other words, the process sets the stop symbols to the same content as the stop symbols displayed in the previous game round. Then, the process proceeds to step S52311.

In step S52311, a variable display pattern setting process is executed based on the information on the effect type, stop symbols, and variable display pattern read in step S52308. In other words, a variable display pattern with the same content as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game is set. Then, proceed to step S52312.

In step S52312, the information on the effect type, stop symbols, and variable display pattern set for the current game round is set in the effect command. Then, proceed to step S52313, where the effect command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S52313, proceed to step S52314, where update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. Details of the update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance setting process (FIG. 233: S52314).

Figure 234 is a flowchart showing the update process at the start of fluctuation. In step S52401, it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation command is the first fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S52401 that the currently received fluctuation command is the first fluctuation command (S52401: YES), the process proceeds to step S52402, where the first pending number counter stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S52404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52401 that the currently received fluctuation command is not the first fluctuation command (S52401: NO), the process proceeds to step S52403, where the second pending number counter stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S52404.

In step S52404, the information in the total reserved item counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is updated so that the total reserved item number stored in the total reserved item counter area is decremented by 1. The update process at the start of fluctuation is then terminated.

<Opening performance setting process>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 229: S51908).

Figure 235 is a flowchart showing the opening effect setting process. In step S52501, it is determined whether the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52501 that the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S52501: NO), the process proceeds to step S52502.

In step S52502, the normal start effect is set as the opening effect. In this embodiment, as explained in case a2 of Figure 205, an opening effect that is executed only in special cases, such as a specific start effect (see Figure 206 (c)), is prepared as the opening effect in the special game state. In step S52502, the opening effect that is executed except in special cases such as case a2 (normal start effect) is set as the opening effect. After executing step S52502, proceed to step S52505.

If it is determined in step S52501 that the sound/light condition fulfillment flag is ON (S52501: YES), the process proceeds to step S52503. In step S52503, a specific start effect is set as the opening effect. After executing step S52503, the process proceeds to step S52504, where the sound/light condition fulfillment flag is set OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S52505.

In step S52505, an opening effect command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The opening effect command includes information about the opening effect set in step S52502 or step S52503. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display the effect content corresponding to the received opening effect command on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S52505, this opening effect setting processing ends.

<Ending performance setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 229: S51915).

Figure 236 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S52601, it is determined whether the sound/light effect overlap flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52601 that the sound/light effect overlap flag is not ON (S52601: NO), the process proceeds to step S52602.

In step S52602, it is determined whether the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52602 that the sound/light side condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S52602: NO), the process proceeds to step S52603. In other words, if it is determined that the effects corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of Figure 205 (suggestion effect, special game state reproduction effect, and specific end effect) will be executed, the process proceeds to step S52603.

In step S52603, the information on the effect type, stop symbols, and variable display pattern stored in step S52307 of the effect setting process (Figure 233) is read. Then, proceed to step S52604.

In step S52604, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read in step S52603. Then, proceed to step S52605, where the suggestion effect, special game state reproduction effect, and specific end effect are set as ending effects. In other words, the effects to be executed during the ending period in the special game state after the first play in case a1 of Figure 205 are set. Then, proceed to step S52609.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52602 that the sound/light condition fulfillment flag is ON (S52602: YES), the process proceeds to step S52606. In other words, if it is determined that a presentation (suggestion presentation) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first play in case a2 of Figure 205 will be executed, the process proceeds to step S52606.

In step S52606, the suggested effect is set as the ending effect. Then, proceed to step S52609.

If it is determined in step S52601 that the sound/light effect overlap flag is ON (S52601: YES), the process proceeds to step S52607. In other words, if it is determined that the effect corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of Figure 205 (normal ending effect) will be executed, the process proceeds to step S52607.

In step S52607, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is an effect that suggests the end of the special game state. Then, proceed to step S52608.

In step S52608, the sound/light performance overlap flag is turned OFF, and then processing proceeds to step S52609.

In step S52609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect content set in step S52605, step S52606, or step S52607 is sent to the display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S52609, this ending effect setting processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, when a special game state reproduction effect is executed, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 stores information indicating the effect type, stopping symbols, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round, as shown in steps S52603 to S52605 and S52609. When the special game state reproduction effect is executed, a command indicating the effect type, stopping symbols, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round is again sent from the audio and light-emitting control device 90 to the display control device 100 as part of an ending command, thereby causing the pattern display device 41 to display an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives a command indicating the effect type, stopping symbols, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round as part of the ending command from the audio and light-emitting control device 90, it reads from the program ROM 103 a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of effect type, stopping symbols, and variable display pattern indicated in the received command, and writes it to the work RAM 104. The pattern data table is a group of information that defines the processing required to display one frame of image at the timing of image update when displaying a video corresponding to the effects for the current game on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In other words, the pattern data table defines a group of information that corresponds to each frame from the start timing to the end timing of the effects for the current game.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the information group corresponding to each frame and issues drawing instructions to the VDP 105 to display one frame's worth of image. In accordance with the drawing instructions from the MPU 102, the VDP 105 reads out images from the character ROM 106, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the pattern display device 41, thereby displaying one frame of image on the display surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially issues drawing instructions to the VDP 105 for the information group for each frame stored in the pattern data table, thereby enabling the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round to be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

In this embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above processing, but other processing may also be adopted in the audio and light control device 90 and display control device 100 as processing for executing the special game state reproduction effect. For example, instead of storing information indicating the effect type, stopping symbols, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round in the audio and light control device 90 as in this embodiment, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 instructing it to temporarily store a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of effect type, stopping symbols, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round. In accordance with this command, the display control device 100 temporarily stores a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of effect type, stopping symbols, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round.

After that, when executing a special game state reproduction effect, the audio and light emitting control device 90 outputs a command to the display control device 100 indicating that it should issue drawing instructions to the VDP 105 according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. In accordance with this command, the display control device 100 issues drawing instructions to the VDP 105 according to the temporarily stored pattern data table, thereby executing a special game state reproduction effect. In this way, various processes can be adopted in the audio and light emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100 as processing for executing a special game state reproduction effect.

<Waiting state transition process>
Next, the standby state transition process will be described. The standby state transition process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 228: S51803).

Figure 237 is a flowchart showing the standby state transition process. In step S52701, it is determined whether the return condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52701 that the return condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S52701: NO), the process proceeds to step S52702.

In step S52702, it is determined whether the demo video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52702 that the demo video display flag is not ON (S52702: NO), the process proceeds to step S52703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52702 that the demo video display flag is ON (S52702: YES), the standby state transition process is terminated.

In step S52703, it is determined whether the demo video start waiting flag is ON. The demo video start waiting flag is a flag that the audio and light emission control device 90 uses to identify that it is waiting for the demo video to start. The flag is turned ON when the audio output level (volume) reaches zero, and is turned OFF when five seconds have passed since the audio output level (volume) reached zero without the return condition being met. In step S52703, if it is determined that the demo video start waiting flag is not ON (S52703: NO), the process proceeds to step S52704.

In step S52704, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S52704: YES), the process proceeds to step S52705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S52704: NO), the standby state transition process is terminated.

In step S52705, processing is performed to reduce the audio output level (volume). Specifically, in this embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set to 3000 levels, and processing is performed to lower the audio output level by one level. In this embodiment, the standby state transition processing is performed every 2 msec, so the audio output level (volume) drops from its maximum value to zero in approximately 6 seconds. After executing step S52705, processing proceeds to step S52706.

In step S52706, it is determined whether the audio output level (volume) has reached zero. If it is determined in step S52706 that the audio output level (volume) has reached zero (S52706: YES), the process proceeds to step S52707, where the volume reduction flag is turned OFF, and to step S52708, where the demo video start waiting flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S52709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52706 that the audio output level (volume) has not reached zero (S52706: NO), this standby state transition process is terminated.

In step S52709, the demo video start wait time setting process is executed. Specifically, the demo video start wait timer counter Tx stored in the various counter area 94b is set to "2500" (i.e., 5.0 seconds). The demo video start wait timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time since the audio output level (volume) reached zero, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec. After step S52709 is executed, this standby state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S52703 that the demo video start waiting flag is ON (S52703: YES), proceed to step S52710.

In step S52710, it is determined whether the 5-second demo video start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, and if the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, it is determined that the 5-second demo video start waiting period has ended. If it is determined in step S52710 that the demo video start waiting period has ended, the process proceeds to step S52711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52710 that the demo video start waiting period has not ended, this standby state transition process is terminated.

In step S52711, processing is performed to stop the output of background music. Then, processing proceeds to step S52712, where a demo video start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the demo video start command, the display-side MPU 102 begins processing to display the demo video on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S52712, processing proceeds to step S52713.

In step S52713, the demo video start waiting flag is turned OFF, and processing proceeds to step S52714, where the demo video display flag is turned ON. Then, processing proceeds to step S52715, where the cue determination flag is turned ON, and this standby state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S52701 that the return condition fulfillment flag is ON (S52701: YES), the process proceeds to step S52716, where it is determined whether the cue determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52716 that the cue determination flag is not ON (S52716: NO), the process proceeds to step S52717, where the audio output level (volume) is restored to the value previously set by the player. In this embodiment, the value previously set by the player is the maximum value, so the audio output level (volume) is restored to the maximum value. After executing step S52717, the process proceeds to step S52718.

In step S52718, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S52718: YES), the process proceeds to step S52719, where the volume reduction flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S52720. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S52718: NO), the process proceeds to step S52720 without executing step S52719.

In step S52720, it is determined whether the demo video start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52720 that the demo video start waiting flag is ON (S52720: YES), the process proceeds to step S52721, where the demo video start waiting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S52722, where the return condition fulfillment flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52720 that the demo video start waiting flag is not ON (S52720: NO), the process proceeds to step S52722 without executing step S52721, where the return condition fulfillment flag is turned OFF. After executing step S52722, this standby state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S52716 that the cue determination flag is ON (S52716: YES), the process proceeds to step S52723, where a demo video end command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the demo video end command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing to end the display of the demo video. After executing step S52723, the process proceeds to step S52724, where the demo video display flag is set to OFF. The process then proceeds to step S52725.

In step S52725, a background video start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the background video start command, the display-side MPU 102 begins processing to display the background video on the pattern display device 41 from its temporal beginning position. Then, proceed to step S52726.

In step S52726, the audio output level (volume) is restored to the value previously set by the player. In this embodiment, the value previously set by the player is the maximum value, so the audio output level (volume) is restored to the maximum value. After executing step S52726, proceed to step S52727.

In step S52727, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, because the cue determination flag is ON, output begins from the temporal beginning of the background music. Then, processing proceeds to step S52728, where the cue determination flag is turned OFF. Then, processing proceeds to step S52729, where the return condition establishment flag is turned OFF, and this standby state transition processing ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include main processing, which is executed repeatedly from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90, and V interrupt processing, which is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected simultaneously, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 238 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step S52801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 is cleared. Next, compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written to the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Other settings required for initialization are also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S52802.

In step S52802, interrupt permission is set. Once interrupt permission is set, the main processing executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, once interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 239 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S52901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described below, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 240 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and then instructs the VDP 105 to draw and display that image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated by the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed. As a result, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process for the image is completed, which prevents the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information currently being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are explained below.

In step S53001, command response processing is executed. In command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing (Figure 239) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to that command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command has been stored, control of image drawing and display is initiated so that the performance mode specified by that performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a performance operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed. If it is determined that it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode corresponding to the pressing of the performance operation button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, the contents of the next command are analyzed without executing any processing.

In addition, the command response processing (S53001) analyzes all commands stored in the command memory area at that time, and executes processing corresponding to all of the analyzed commands. The reason for this will be explained. The command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command memory area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of a performance is set by the audio and light control device 90 and the performance begins, it is highly likely that various commands for specifying the content of that performance will be stored in the command memory area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance aspects, such as the preview performance and stop patterns, set by the audio and light control device 90, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that aspect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Details of the command response processing will be explained later.

In step S53002, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which was set by the command response process (S53001) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S53003.

In step S53003, task processing is executed. In task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as determined by the display setting process (S53002), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up that image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S53004.

In step S53004, drawing processing is executed. In drawing processing, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters required to draw each character, as determined by task processing (S53003), are sent to VDP 105. VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and sends the image data to pattern display device 41 along with a drive signal to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S53005, where other processing is executed, and V interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, the command response processing will be described. The command response processing is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 240: S53001).

Figure 241 is a flowchart showing command response processing. In step S53101, it is determined whether or not a performance command is stored in the command memory area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S53101 that a performance command is stored, the process proceeds to step S53102, where processing to start displaying the performance corresponding to the performance command is executed. Specifically, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S53102, the process proceeds to step S53103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53101 that a performance command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53103 without executing step S53102.

In step S53103, it is determined whether an opening effect command is stored in the command memory area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S53103 that an opening effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S53104, where display start processing for the opening effect corresponding to the opening effect command is executed. Specifically, image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode specified by the opening effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, after the opening effect has ended, image drawing and display control is started so that the open/close execution mode effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S53104, the process proceeds to step S53105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53103 that an opening effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53105 without executing step S53104.

In step S53105, it is determined whether an ending performance command is stored in the command memory area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S53105 that an ending performance command is stored, the process proceeds to step S53106, where display start processing for the ending performance corresponding to the ending performance command is executed. Specifically, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the ending performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S53106, the process proceeds to step S53107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53105 that an ending performance command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53107 without executing step S53106.

In step S53107, it is determined whether a demo video start command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S53107 that a demo video start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S53108, where demo video display start processing is executed. Specifically, image drawing and display control is initiated so that the demo video specified by the demo video start command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that in this embodiment, the demo video display is repeated until a demo video end command, described below, is received. After executing step S53108, the process proceeds to step S53109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53107 that a demo video start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53109 without executing step S53108.

In step S53109, it is determined whether a demo video end command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S53109 that a demo video end command is stored, the process proceeds to step S53110, where processing is performed to end the display of the demo video. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S53111. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53109 that a demo video end command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53111 without executing step S53110.

In step S53111, it is determined whether a background video start command is stored in the command memory area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S53111 that a background video start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S53112, where processing is executed to start displaying the background video. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the background video is displayed on the pattern display device 41 from its temporal beginning position. After executing step S53112, the process proceeds to step S53113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53111 that a background video start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53113 without executing step S53112.

In step S53113, it is determined whether any other commands are stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, if the above-mentioned performance operation command is stored, processing that would be executed if the above-mentioned performance operation command were stored is executed. Thereafter, this command response processing is terminated.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the jackpot lottery for the second play is a miss, as in case a1, the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed after the suggestive effect are executed as special game state reproduction effects that reproduce the effects executed in the first play, and the player also recognizes them as reproductions of effects that have already been executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery for the second play is a win, as in case a2, the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed after the suggestive effect are executed as reproductions of effects that have already been executed, but in reality, they are play round reproduction effects executed as a result of winning the jackpot lottery for the second play. If a player has first viewed the special game state reproduction effect in case a1, the player will recognize the game round reproduction effect in the second game round in case a2 as merely a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round, as in case a1, and will be unlikely to predict that he or she will have won the jackpot lottery for the second game round. In this state, when the preview effect and reach effect are executed in the second game round and the result announcement effect announces that the player has won the jackpot lottery for the second game round, the player will realize for the first time that the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed in the second game round are not simply a reproduction of the effects executed in the first game round, but are executed as a result of winning the jackpot lottery for the second game round. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 and the game round reproduction effect in case a2 in this way, an element of surprise is added to the game, and a sense of anticipation can be created in the player for an effect that reproduces at least a portion of the effect executed in the first game round. Furthermore, by making the second game round in case a2 develop in an unexpected way for the player, the player can be surprised and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in case a2, even though the jackpot lottery for the second play has been won, a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the preview effect, reach effect, and result announcement effect executed in the first play will be reproduced, making it even more difficult for the player to predict that they have won the jackpot lottery for the second play. This further adds an element of surprise to the game.

Furthermore, in case a2, if the jackpot lottery for the second play is won, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect will be executed as a reproduction of an effect that has already been executed, but in reality, it is executed as a result of winning the jackpot lottery for the second play. Therefore, there are at least three cases in which the reach effect will be executed: when it is executed for its original function of suggesting to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot lottery; when it is executed as a reproduction of an effect that has already been executed; and when it is executed as a reproduction of an effect that has already been executed, but in reality, it is executed as a result of winning the jackpot lottery for the second play. This can increase the player's attention, interest, and anticipation for the reach effect.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if a return condition is met after the volume of the background music has reached zero and the display of the demo video has begun (Figure 207), the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode displaying the demo video to the mode displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background video on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background video from a predetermined time position in the background video. Furthermore, the audio and light emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and, when outputting the background music, starts outputting the background music from a predetermined time position in the background music. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background video begins varies depending on when the return condition is met, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background video and the output of the background music. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if the return condition is met after the background music volume has reached zero and the demo video display has begun (Figure 207), the display control device 100 starts displaying the background video from its temporal beginning position "01," and the audio and light emission control device 90 starts outputting the background music from its temporal beginning position "01." Therefore, compared to a configuration in which display starts from a temporal beginning position in the background video and background music output starts from a temporal beginning position, the sense of discomfort felt by the player can be reduced. For example, if a configuration in which display starts from a temporal beginning position in the background video and background music output starts from a temporal beginning position were adopted, the player would have to view the background video and background music from a temporal beginning position after the return condition is met, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or dissatisfied, as if they had not yet viewed parts of the background video and background music. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the player can view the background video and background music from their chronological beginning, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and gives the player a sense of satisfaction that they are able to view the entire background video and background music from their chronological beginning. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if the return condition is met after the background music volume has reached zero and before the demo video display begins (Figure 208), the display control device 100 continues to display the background video on the pattern display device 41, and the audio and light emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume previously set by the player. This allows for a natural, seamless return to the state before the transition condition was met, while maintaining synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if a return condition is met while the volume of the background music is being reduced (Figure 209), the display control device 100 continues to display the background video on the pattern display device 41, and the audio and light emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume previously set by the player. This allows for a natural, seamless return to the state before the transition condition was met, while maintaining synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the transition condition is determined to be met if 15 seconds have passed since the end of a game round without either the special game state or the next game round starting, so the volume of the background music can be reduced over time in a state where it is highly likely that the player is not playing.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a game round starts in the standby state, it is determined that the return condition has been met, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to a mode that displays a background video, and the mode of outputting background music returns to a mode that outputs background music at a volume preset by the player, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that a game round has started and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

E8. Modification of the fifth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, including the following modifications: In the modifications described below, the same configurations and processes as those of the above-described embodiment will not be described.

E8-1. Variation 1:
242 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10 in a first modified example of the fifth embodiment. The difference between this modified example and the fifth embodiment described above is that an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information is provided in the sound and light emission control device 90. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 acquires the date and time information output from the RTC 96 and executes an RTC effect, which is an effect based on the acquired date and time information. In this modified example, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines whether the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition, and if it determines that the time information matches, it begins processing to execute the RTC effect. The RTC effect in this modified example is composed of a 300-second RTC effect video and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect video, and is executed at 00 minutes past the hour.

Figure 243 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is met while the symbol display device 41 is displaying a background video. The RTC effect in progress flag shown in the figure is a flag that is turned ON when the RTC effect start condition is met and the RTC effect starts, and is turned OFF when the RTC effect ends.

When the time reaches 00 minutes past the hour while the symbol display device 41 is displaying a background video and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from a mode displaying a background video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video. Furthermore, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 transitions from a mode displaying a background video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video (time t1), the audio and light emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music and starts outputting the RTC effect music from the temporal start position "01" while maintaining the audio output level (volume) previously set by the player.

When the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video (300 seconds in this modified example) has ended (time t2), the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from a mode displaying the RTC effect video to a mode displaying the background video. When transitioning to a mode displaying the background video, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background video from the temporal start position "01". Furthermore, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 transitions to a mode displaying the background video (time t2), the audio and light emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and starts outputting the background music from the temporal start position "01" while maintaining the audio output level (volume) preset by the player.

The audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to output multiple types of background music, and when performing background music cueing processing (processing that starts output or display from the temporal beginning position "01"), the type of background music to be cueed for may be selected randomly by lottery, and the display control device 100 may be configured to display multiple types of background videos corresponding to multiple types of background music, and to select a background video corresponding to the selected background music and perform the cueing processing. This configuration allows the player to enjoy multiple types of background music and background videos, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. In Figure 246, described below, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 and display control device 100 perform background music and background video cueing processing, a configuration in which background music and background video are selected from multiple types may also be adopted.

Figure 244 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is met while the pattern display device 41 is displaying a demo video.

When the time reaches 00 minutes while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo video and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from a mode displaying a demo video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video. Furthermore, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 transitions from a mode displaying a demo video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video (time t1), the audio and light emission control device 90 begins outputting the RTC effect music from the temporal beginning position "01" and restores the audio output level (volume) to the output level previously set by the player.

When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in this modified example) of the RTC effect video has ended (time t2), the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the pattern display device 41 from a mode displaying the RTC effect video to a mode displaying the demo video. When transitioning to a mode displaying the demo video, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal beginning position "01" of the demo video. Furthermore, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 transitions to a mode displaying the demo video (time t2), the audio and light emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and reduces the audio output level (volume) to 0.

Figure 245 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a transition condition is met while the pattern display device 41 is displaying an RTC effect video. As described above, the transition condition is a condition for transitioning the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to a mode for displaying a demo video and for transitioning the audio output mode to a mode in which the volume is zero (mute state).

When the time reaches 00 minutes while the symbol display device 41 is displaying a background video and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from a mode displaying a background video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video. Furthermore, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 transitions from a mode displaying a background video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video (time t1), the audio and light emission control device 90 stops outputting background music and starts outputting the RTC effect music from the temporal beginning position "01" while maintaining the audio output level (volume) previously set by the player.

When the pattern change on the main display unit 45 stops while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect video (time t2), and 15 seconds have passed since the pattern change stopped and the transition condition is met (time t3), the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to a mode displaying a demo video after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video (300 seconds in this modified example) has ended (time t4). When transitioning to a mode displaying the demo video, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal beginning position "01" of the demo video. Furthermore, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 transitions to a mode displaying the demo video (time t4), the audio and light emission control device 90 stops output of the RTC effect music and reduces the audio output level (volume) to 0.

Figure 246 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is met while the symbol display device 41 is displaying an RTC effect video. As described above, the return condition is a condition for returning the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode in which a background video is displayed, and returning the audio output mode to a mode in which background music is output at a preset volume.

When the time reaches 00 minutes while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo video and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from a mode displaying a demo video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video. Furthermore, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 transitions from a mode displaying a demo video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video (time t1), the audio and light emission control device 90 begins outputting the RTC effect music from the temporal beginning position "01" and restores the audio output level (volume) to the output level previously set by the player.

When the pattern on the main display unit 45 begins to change while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect video and the return condition is met (time t2), the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to a mode displaying the background video (time t3) after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video (300 seconds in this modified example) has ended. Furthermore, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 returns to a mode displaying the background video (time t3), the audio and light emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and starts outputting the background music from the temporal beginning position "01" while maintaining the audio output level (volume) preset by the player.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. Below, processing that differs from the fifth embodiment described above will be described, and processing that is the same as the fifth embodiment described above will not be described.

Figure 247 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound/light side MPU 92 of Variation 1 of the fifth embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt processing (Figure 228) executed in the sound/light side MPU of the fifth embodiment is that the RTC effect processing (step S51802a) is executed after the command response processing (step S51802) and before the standby state transition processing (step S51803) is executed; the other processing is the same as in the fifth embodiment. The RTC effect processing executes processing to execute the RTC effect. Details of the RTC effect processing are explained below.

Figure 248 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect processing executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 in variant 1 of the fifth embodiment. In step S53401, it is determined whether the RTC effect in progress flag is ON. The RTC effect in progress flag is a flag that the sound/light side MPU 92 uses to determine whether an RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S53401 that the RTC effect in progress flag is not ON (S53401: NO), the process proceeds to step S53402, where the time information output from the RTC 96 is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S53403.

In step S53403, it is determined whether the read-in time information matches the time that has been preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect. In this modified example, it is determined whether the read-in time information matches the 00th minute of every hour. If it is determined in step S53403 that the read-in time information does not match the time that has been preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S53403: NO), the RTC effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53403 that the read-in time information matches the time that has been preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S53403: YES), the process proceeds to step S53404.

In step S53404, the RTC effect time setting process is executed. Specifically, the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter area 94b is set to "150000" (i.e., 5.0 min). The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time since the RTC effect started, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec. After executing step S53404, the process proceeds to step S53405.

In step S53405, an RTC effect video start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the RTC effect video start command, the display-side MPU 102 begins processing to display the RTC effect video on the pattern display device 41. After executing step S53405, proceed to step S53406.

In step S53406, the RTC effect music output start process is executed. Specifically, output begins from the temporal beginning of the RTC effect music. If background music is being output, output of the background music is stopped and output of the RTC effect music begins from the temporal beginning. Then, the process proceeds to step S53407, where the RTC effect in progress flag is set ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S53408.

In step S53408, it is determined whether any of the volume reduction flag, the waiting for Temo video start flag, or the demo video display flag is ON. A situation in which any of the volume reduction flag, the waiting for Temo video start flag, or the demo video display flag is ON means that the transition conditions described above are met and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. If it is determined in step S53408 that any of the volume reduction flag, the waiting for Temo video start flag, or the demo video display flag is ON (S53408: YES), proceed to step S53409.

In step S53409, the reduced audio output level (volume) is restored to the value previously set by the player. Then, proceeding to step S53410, the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is turned ON. The post-RTC effect demo video start flag is a flag for starting the demo video after the RTC effect has ended, and is turned ON when the transition conditions are met before the RTC effect starts, or when the transition conditions are met while the RTC effect is being executed. After executing step S53410, proceeding to step S53411, the volume reduction flag, the demo video start waiting flag, and the demo video displaying flag that were turned ON are turned OFF. Then, proceeding to step S53412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53408 that the volume reduction flag, demo video start waiting flag, and demo video display flag are all OFF (S53408: NO), processing proceeds to step S53412 without executing the processes of steps S53409 to S53411.

In step S53412, it is determined whether the return condition fulfillment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S53412 that the return condition fulfillment flag is ON (S53412: YES), the process proceeds to step S53413, where the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S53414, where the return condition fulfillment flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53412 that the return condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S53412: NO), the process for this RTC effect is terminated without executing the processes of steps S53413 and S53414.

If it is determined in step S53401 that the RTC effect in progress flag is ON (S53401: YES), i.e., if an RTC effect is being executed, proceed to step S53415.

In step S53415, it is determined whether it is time for the RTC effect to end. Specifically, it is determined whether the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S53403 is 0. If it is determined in step S53415 that it is time for the RTC effect to end (S53415: YES), the process proceeds to step S53416, where processing for when the RTC effect ends is carried out. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53415 that it is not time for the RTC effect to end (S53415: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of steps S53408 to S53414 described above. The reason for this is that even while the RTC effect is being executed, the transition condition or return condition may be met, and it is therefore necessary to carry out the processing of steps S53408 to S53414.

In step S53416, the RTC effect in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step S53417, where processing to stop the output of the RTC effect music is executed. Then, proceed to step S53418.

In step S53418, it is determined whether the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S53418 that the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is not ON (S53418: NO), the process proceeds to step S53419, where a background video start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the background video start command, the display-side MPU 102 begins processing to display the background video on the pattern display device 41 from its temporal start position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S53420, where background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, output of the background music begins from its temporal start position. Thereafter, this RTC effect processing ends.

If it is determined in step S53418 that the demo video start flag after RTC effect is ON (S53418: YES), the process proceeds to step S53421, where a demo video start command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the demo video start command, the display-side MPU 102 begins processing to display the demo video on the pattern display device 41 from its temporal beginning position. The process then proceeds to step S53422, where the demo video display in progress flag is set to OFF. The process then proceeds to step S53423.

In step S53423, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to 0. This is because, in this variant, no music is set to be output along with the demo video. After executing step S53423, the process proceeds to step S53424, where the cue determination flag is set ON. This process allows the cue determination flag to be set ON while the demo video is being displayed. After executing step S53424, the process proceeds to step S53425, where the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is set OFF. Then, this RTC effect processing ends.

Figure 249 is a flowchart showing the standby state transition process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 in Variation 1 of the fifth embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition process (Figure 237) executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 in the fifth embodiment is that a process for determining whether the RTC performance in progress flag is ON (step S52700) is executed before a process for determining whether the return condition establishment flag is ON (step S52701) is executed; the other processes are the same as those in the fifth embodiment.

In step S52700, it is determined whether the RTC effect in progress flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RTC effect in progress flag is ON (S52700: YES), the standby state transition process is terminated. In other words, the system is configured not to transition to standby state while the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52700 that the RTC effect in progress flag is not ON (S52700: NO), the system proceeds to step S52701, where it is determined whether the return condition fulfillment flag is ON. The following process is the same as in the fifth embodiment, so explanation will be omitted.

Figure 250 is a flowchart showing the command response processing executed by the display-side MPU 102 of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. The difference from the command response processing (Figure 241) executed by the display-side MPU 102 of the fifth embodiment is that the processing of steps S53112a and S53112b, which will be described later, is executed after the processing of starting the display of the background video (step S53112) is executed and before other processing (step S53113) is executed; the other processing is the same as in the fifth embodiment.

In step S53112a, it is determined whether an RTC effect video start command is stored in the command memory area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S53112a that an RTC effect video start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S53112b, where processing is executed to start displaying the RTC effect video. Specifically, image drawing and display control is started so that the RTC effect video is displayed on the pattern display device 41 from its temporal beginning position. After executing step S53112b, the process proceeds to step S53113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53112a that an RTC effect video start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53113 without executing step S53112b. The following processing is the same as in the fifth embodiment, so description is omitted.

As explained above, according to this modified example, as shown in FIG. 243, a transition is made from a mode displaying a background video to a mode displaying an RTC effect video, and then, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video ends, a transition is made from a mode displaying an RTC effect video to a mode displaying a background video, and when transitioning to a mode displaying the background video, display begins from a predetermined temporal position in the background video. Therefore, control can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which display of the background video begins changes when transitioning to a mode displaying the background video. Note that examples of configurations in which the temporal position at which the display of the background video begins varies when transitioning to a mode in which the background video is displayed include a configuration in which, when a predetermined display period for the RTC effect video has ended, the background video begins to be displayed from the temporal position of the background video that was displayed immediately before transitioning to a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed; a configuration in which, when transitioning from a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed to a mode in which the background video is displayed, the temporal position at which the display of the background video begins is determined based on the elapsed time since transitioning to a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed; and a configuration in which playback of the background video continues as an internal process even after transitioning from a mode in which the background video is displayed to a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed, and, when transitioning from a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed to a mode in which the background video is displayed, is displayed on the pattern display device 41, which has been continuously played as an internal process.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in FIG. 244, the display transitions from a mode in which a demo video is displayed to a mode in which an RTC effect video is displayed, and then, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video ends, the display transitions from a mode in which an RTC effect video is displayed to a mode in which a demo video is displayed, and when the display transitions to a mode in which a demo video is displayed, the display starts from a predetermined time position of the demo video. Therefore, control can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the demo video display starts changes when the display transitions to a mode in which a demo video is displayed. Note that examples of configurations in which the temporal position at which the display of the demo video begins varies when transitioning to a mode in which the demo video is displayed include a configuration in which, when a predetermined display period for the RTC effect video has ended, the demo video begins to be displayed from the temporal position of the demo video that was displayed immediately before transitioning to a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed; a configuration in which, when transitioning from a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed to a mode in which the demo video is displayed, the temporal position at which the display of the demo video begins is determined based on the elapsed time since transitioning to a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed; and a configuration in which playback of the demo video continues as an internal process even after transitioning from a mode in which the demo video is displayed to a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed, and, when transitioning from a mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed to a mode in which the demo video is displayed, the demo video that has continued to be played as an internal process is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in FIG. 245, even if the transition condition is met while the RTC effect video is being displayed, the RTC effect video will not be interrupted during the predetermined display period, but will transition to a mode in which the demo video is displayed after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video has ended, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in FIG. 246, even if the return condition is met while the RTC effect video is being displayed, the RTC effect video will not be interrupted during the predetermined display period, and will return to displaying the background video after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video has ended, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when multiple pachinko machines 10 of this modified example are installed, as shown in Figures 243 and 246, the display period of the RTC effect video ends on each pachinko machine 10 substantially simultaneously, and the machine transitions to displaying the background video. Furthermore, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the background video from a predetermined time position in the background video when displaying it, so that the background videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 can be synchronized. In other words, a spectacular situation can be created in which the background videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player visiting a gaming hall where multiple pachinko machines 10 of this modified example are installed will witness a spectacular situation in which the background videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in Figures 243 and 246, when the display period of the RTC effect video ends and the transition to a mode in which the background video is displayed is made, the display starts from the temporal beginning of the background video. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player compared to a configuration in which the display starts from a temporally intermediate position in the background video when transitioning to a mode in which the background video is displayed. For example, if a configuration in which the display starts from a temporally intermediate position in the background video when transitioning to a mode in which the background video is displayed is adopted, the player will have to view the background video from a temporally intermediate position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable or dissatisfied as if there is a portion of the background video that they have not viewed. In contrast, according to this modified example, the player can view the background video from its temporally initial position, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and provides the player with the satisfaction of being able to view the entire background video from its temporally initial position. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in Figures 243 and 246, when the display period of the RTC effect video ends and the transition to a mode in which the background video is displayed occurs, background music begins to be output from a predetermined time position. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the background music output begins varies, the display of the background video and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized. As a result, the quality of the game's presentation can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. Examples of configurations in which the temporal position at which background music output begins can vary include, for example, a configuration in FIG. 243 in which, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video has ended, background music begins to be output from the temporal position of the background music that was being output immediately before transitioning to a mode in which RTC effect music is output; a configuration in which, when transitioning from a mode in which RTC effect music is output to a mode in which background music is output, the temporal position at which background music output begins is determined based on the elapsed time since transitioning to a mode in which RTC effect music is output; and a configuration in which playback of background music continues as an internal process even after transitioning from a mode in which background music is output to a mode in which RTC effect music is output, and when transitioning from a mode in which RTC effect music is output to a mode in which background music is output, the background music that has been continuously played as an internal process is output.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in Figures 243 and 246, when the display period of the RTC effect video ends and the transition to a mode where the background video is displayed occurs, background music begins to be output from its temporal beginning, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player compared to a configuration in which background music begins to be output from a temporal beginning. For example, if a configuration in which background music begins to be output from a temporal beginning were adopted, the player would have to listen to the background music from a temporal beginning, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or unsatisfied as if there was a part of the background music that they had not listened to. In contrast, according to this modified example, the player can listen to the background music from its temporal beginning, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and gives the player a sense of satisfaction that they have been able to listen to all of the background music from its temporal beginning. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when multiple pachinko machines 10 of this modified example are installed, as shown in Figures 244 and 245, the display period of the RTC effect video ends on each pachinko machine 10 substantially simultaneously, and the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a mode in which it displays the demo video. Furthermore, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the demo video from a predetermined time position in the demo video when displaying the demo video, so that the demo videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 can be synchronized. In other words, a spectacular situation can be created in which the demo videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player visiting a gaming hall where multiple pachinko machines 10 of this modified example are installed will witness a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in Figures 244 and 245, when the display period of the RTC effect video ends and the display transitions to a mode where a demo video is displayed, the display begins from the temporal beginning of the demo video. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player compared to a configuration in which the display begins from a temporally intermediate position in the demo video when the display transitions to a mode where a demo video is displayed. For example, if a configuration in which the display begins from a temporally intermediate position in the demo video when the display transitions to a mode where a demo video is displayed and the display begins from a temporally intermediate position in the demo video is adopted, the player will have to watch the demo video from a temporally intermediate position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable or dissatisfied as if there is a portion of the demo video that they have not viewed. In contrast, according to this modified example, the player can watch the demo video from its temporally beginning, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and provides the player with the satisfaction of being able to watch the entire demo video from its temporal beginning. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

E8-2. Variation 2:
In the above embodiment and modified example, when a transition condition is met, the audio output mode is transitioned to a mode in which the volume of the background music is zero, via a mode in which the background music continues to be output while the volume of the background music is reduced over time. However, instead, when a transition condition is met, the audio output mode may be transitioned to a mode in which the volume of the background music is zero, without a mode in which the background music continues to be output while the volume of the background music is reduced over time.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment and modified example, when the transition condition is met, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is configured to transition to a mode in which a demo video is displayed 5 seconds after the volume of the background music reaches zero. However, instead, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 may be configured to transition to a mode in which a demo video is displayed when the volume of the background music reaches zero.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment and modified example, the background music continues to be output until five seconds have passed since the background music volume reached zero, and then the background music output stops after five seconds have passed. However, instead, the background music output may be stopped when the background music volume reaches zero.

E8-3. Variation 3:
In the above embodiment and modified example, when the return condition is met after the volume of the background music reaches zero and the display of the demo video begins ( FIG. 207 ), the background video is displayed starting from the temporal start position "01" and the background music is output starting from the temporal start position "01." However, the configuration is not limited to starting the display and output of the background video and background music from their temporal start positions. For example, the background video and background music may be displayed and output starting from a predetermined, most exciting temporal position (the start position of the so-called chorus). That is, the display may start from a predetermined temporal position in the background video, and the output of the background music may start from a predetermined temporal position that corresponds to the predetermined temporal position in the background video. Even with this configuration, the display of the background video and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized, compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background video begins varies depending on the timing at which the return condition is met. This can improve the quality of the game presentation and increase the enjoyment of the game.

E8-4. Variation 4:
In the above embodiment and modified example, when the transition condition is met, the volume of the background music is set to zero. However, the volume of the background music does not have to be set to completely zero. For example, when the transition condition is met, the volume of the background music may be set to a volume below a level that the player cannot perceive. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made aware that the transition condition has been met.

Alternatively, the audio output mode before the transition condition is met may be a mode in which background music is output at a first volume level, and the audio output mode to which the transition occurs after the transition condition is met may be a mode in which background music is output at a second volume level that is lower than the first volume level. Even with this configuration, the player can be made aware that the transition condition has been met.

E8-5. Variation 5:
In the above embodiment and the above modified example, when a transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is transitioned from a mode displaying a background video to a mode displaying a demo video. However, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to which the transition occurs after the transition condition is satisfied are not limited to a mode displaying a background video and a mode displaying a demo video. For example, if the display mode of the pattern display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied is a mode displaying a predetermined video, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to which the transition occurs after the transition condition is satisfied may be a mode displaying an image different from the predetermined video or a mode in which the image display is stopped. For example, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to which the transition occurs after the transition condition is satisfied may be a mode displaying a video different from the predetermined video, a mode in which at least a portion of the predetermined video is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the predetermined video is not displayed, a mode in which a still image different from the predetermined video is displayed, or a mode in which neither the video nor the still image is displayed.

E8-6. Variation 6:
In the above embodiment and modified example, a detection sensor may be provided to detect that a gaming ball has been shot onto the gaming board 30, and if the detection sensor does not detect a gaming ball for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), it may be determined that the transition condition has been met. In this way, the transition condition will not be met if a gaming ball has been shot onto the gaming board 30, and it is possible to reduce the occurrence of an unpleasant situation for the player, such as the transition condition being met even though the player is playing.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to determine that the return condition has been met if the detection sensor detects a gaming ball after the transition condition has been met. In this way, even after the transition condition has been met, the return condition will be met if a gaming ball is ejected onto the gaming board 30, thereby reducing unpleasant situations for players where the return condition is not met for a long period of time (e.g., one minute) even though the player has started playing.

E8-7. Variation 7:
In the above embodiment and modified example, the background video and the background music corresponding to the background video may be selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background video and the background music corresponding to the background video may be selected depending on whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or not, the player's selection, etc.

E8-8. Variation 8:
The times, values, etc. specifically set in the above embodiment and the above modified example are merely examples, and can be set appropriately to other times, values, etc. For example, the time from when the pattern stops changing until the transition condition is met may be set to a value other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the volume of the background music reaches zero until the demo video starts may be set to a value other than 5 seconds.

E8-9. Variation 9:
In the above embodiment and modified example, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is a mode in which a demo video is displayed, the audio output mode is configured to be a mode in which no music is output and the volume is zero, but instead, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is a mode in which a demo video is displayed, the audio output mode may be configured to be a mode in which demo music, which is music corresponding to the demo video, is output at an output level (volume) preset by the player.

In this configuration, when the display period of the RTC effect video ends and the mode transitions to displaying the demo video, the demo music may be configured to start outputting from a predetermined time position. With this configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the demo video and the output of the demo music, compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the demo music output starts varies. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased. Furthermore, the predetermined time position of the demo music may be the temporal beginning position of the demo music. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player, compared to a configuration in which the demo music output starts from a temporal position in the middle.

E8-10. Variation 10:
In the above-mentioned variant example 1, the MPU 92 of the audio and light emitting control device 90 acquires time information, which is information relating to the time, from the RTC 96, and determines whether the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as an RTC performance start condition, and if it determines that it matches, starts processing to execute the RTC performance. However, instead of this, the audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to, after executing an RTC performance once, measure the elapsed time since the start of the previous RTC performance, determine whether a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the start of the previous RTC performance, and if it determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, start processing to execute the RTC performance.

E8-11. Variation 11:
In the above-described first modification, the audio and light emitting control device 90 is configured to output the RTC effect music at an output level (volume) preset by the player, but instead, the audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to output the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) regardless of the output level (volume) preset by the player. With such a configuration, the impact and attention-grabbing power of the RTC effect can be improved, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

E8-12. Variation 12:
In addition to adopting the configuration of Variation 11 described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the maximum output level (volume) is maintained when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) ends and background music is output. The effects of such a configuration are explained below. A player who enjoys the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) is fascinated by the impact of the effect executed at the maximum output level (volume), and may desire to continue playing at the maximum output level (volume) even after the RTC effect has ended. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue playing at the maximum output level (volume) even after the RTC effect has ended.

Furthermore, in addition to adopting the configuration of Variant 11 above, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) ends and background music begins to be output, the output level (volume) may be restored to the level previously set by the player. This configuration can further emphasize the special feeling of the RTC effect that was being executed, thereby further increasing anticipation for the next RTC effect and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in addition to adopting the configuration of Variant Example 11 above, when the output of RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) ends and background music is output, a volume setting screen for the player to set the audio output level (volume) may be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the background music may be output at the audio output level (volume) specified by the player. The effects of this configuration are explained below. A player who has listened to RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) may become accustomed to the high volume, and their preferred output level (volume) may change from before listening to the RTC effect music. For this reason, after the RTC effect ends, they may wish to reset the audio output level (volume) to their preferred output level. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to reset the audio output level (volume) to their preferred output level after the RTC effect ends.

F. Sixth embodiment:
F1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 251 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a generally rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the gaming hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are located on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing during a jackpot lottery conducted by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that is pressed by the player to stop the game ball from being launched by the game ball launching mechanism, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

In addition, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with a predetermined launch strength, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the operating handle 25 is rotated to the maximum. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows toward the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. In other words, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can perform a so-called "right hit." Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched toward the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is on. In other words, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26, thereby realizing the launch of a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is configured to be located on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 may also be located in another position. For example, the game ball launch button 26 may be located inside (on the periphery of) the operating handle 25, similar to the weight button 25b. This allows the player to operate the operating handle 25, weight button 25b, and game ball launch button 26 with just their right hand.

Figure 252 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, after which they flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The gaming board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

General winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which game balls can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the bottom center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, and is located on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. The second starting hole 34 is also provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is the gate that triggers the execution of a lottery to open the electric device 34a. Specifically, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 uses this passage as an opportunity to execute an internal lottery (electric device release lottery). If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to the electric device release, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device release state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state, preventing game balls from entering the large winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). If the jackpot lottery results in a large winning or small winning, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that executes the opening and closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions from a closed state, in which game balls cannot enter, to an open state, in which game balls can enter, and then transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

In addition, an outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

Here, "entering" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a situation in which the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area PA, but also a situation in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, game balls entering the general winning opening 32, variable winning device 36, first starting opening 33, and second starting opening 34 will also be referred to as winning.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a static first pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second pattern. The second pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a static second pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first pending display unit 37c and a second pending display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 can be reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 can be reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is initiated, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends.

The special drawing unit 37, the regular drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured as segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may also be configured as various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device equipped in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the first start opening 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the second start opening 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display of the pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also displays effects during the open/close execution mode to which the game enters when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 253 is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns and display surface 41a on the pattern display device 41. Figure 253(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed LCD patterns on the pattern display device 41. The LCD patterns are images displayed on the pattern display device 41, and correspond to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b. When a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface 41a, and when a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in Figure 253(a), the pattern display device 41 displays variably the numbers 1 to 8 as LCD patterns. The variably displayed patterns may also be numbers 1 to 8 with pictures of characters or the like.

Figure 253(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol column Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 253(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed in which each symbol column scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 253(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction periodically. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the static display is achieved, if the result of the jackpot lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described manner, and various other variations in the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change round ends, the static display is displayed, and the static display ends. It is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the results of the jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on a win in either the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the results of one jackpot lottery for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34, it causes the segment display in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to change for each play round, and then causes the segment display to change to a static display corresponding to the result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a pattern row as a first LCD pattern or a second LCD pattern for each play, and then statically displays the pattern row so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts to when the specified lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the specified lottery result is statically displayed.

As shown in Figure 253 (b), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2. The first pending display area Ds1 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending plays based on winning at the first starting port 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending plays based on winning at the second starting port 34. A pending play refers to an unexecuted play, in which a variable display has not yet begun to notify the results of the jackpot lottery for special information obtained based on winning at the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The number of pending plays that can be reserved based on winning at the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending plays. Furthermore, the number of pending plays that can be reserved based on winning at the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 can display hold displays corresponding to four hold play times.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 253(b), the display surface 41a is equipped with a first synchronization display unit Sync1 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stopped display of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a of the special pattern unit 37, and a second synchronization display unit Sync2 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stopped display of the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display unit 37b of the special pattern unit 37. Specifically, when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a changing pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 flashes, and when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a stopped pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 lights up. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a changing pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 flashes, and when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a stopped pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 lights up.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the LCD general display area NA, the first synchronization display unit Sync1, and the second synchronization display unit Sync2, but the display surface 41a may be configured not to display some or all of these displays.

F2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 254 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is primarily composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio/light emitting control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs stored in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 70 and the power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control unit 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. In addition, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to various detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports and through gates, such as the general entry port 32, first start port 33, second start port 34, through gate 35, and variable entry device 36. Based on signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each ball entry port, and whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the gaming ball's entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are the variable winning drive unit 36c, which opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, the electric device drive unit 34b, which opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34, the door drive unit 48b, which opens and closes the door 48a, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the electric role opening lottery results in a win, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a game ball has entered the general prize entry port 32, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. If a game ball has entered the second start port 34, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When a player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism toward the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched toward the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio and light control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it references the command information storage area 63f in the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio and light control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting devices such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 100. The audio and light control device 90 is also connected to a performance operation button 24, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a specified timing, it controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects that operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect that will be executed while the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a static manner, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 255 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. The various counter information is used by the MPU 62 when performing jackpot lotteries, setting the display of the main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for jackpot lotteries. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when allocating jackpot types. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to a miss.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also has a reserve information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reserve information storage area 64b has a first reserve area Ra and a second reserve area Rb. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will now be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1199, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The jackpot random number counter C1 that has been moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

Next, we will explain the details of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 39, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, we will explain the details of the reach random number counter C3. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. However, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 253(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, a reach is reached when a varying symbol display is performed in symbol column Z2. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained in detail. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 when determining the change time in the first and second pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the change time of the patterns on the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 begins to fluctuate. When determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e using the value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, and variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in this invention. Also, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, we will explain the hit/miss table. The hit/miss table is table data used to check against the jackpot random number counter C1 when a jackpot lottery is held based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes set for the jackpot lottery; a low probability mode and a high probability mode; when a jackpot lottery is held in low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a jackpot lottery is held in high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced.

Figure 256 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. Figure 256(a) shows the win/loss table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and Figure 256(b) shows the win/loss table for high probability mode.

As shown in Figure 256(a), the hit/miss table for the low probability mode has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 256(b), the hit/miss table for the high probability mode has 16 values from 0 to 15 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the low probability mode is included in the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the result of the jackpot lottery shows a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in this embodiment, a "small win" may also be set as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be explained. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode
(2) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) The lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) for the big win lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 1.6 seconds or until 10 balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

The opening time limit for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the number of balls that can be opened per opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for one opening may be longer or the number of balls that can be opened per opening may be set higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that no winning occurs in the variable winning device 36.

In this embodiment, the opening and closing execution mode does not have multiple types of winning modes, and the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode described above. In other words, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 257 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. Figure 257(a) shows the allocation table for the first starting port, and Figure 257(b) shows the allocation table for the second starting port. The allocation table for the first starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the allocation table for the second starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting hole in Figure 257 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting hole 33 are set to be 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot.

A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R probability variable jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

The 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0-39," "0-13" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot, "14-27" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot, "28-33" corresponds to a 16R regular jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has four types of jackpots. This diversifies the types of jackpots. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the 16R probability jackpot is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the 8R probability jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By providing multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage to the player in this way, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in Figure 257 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a 16R variable probability jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. In the allocation table for the second starting port, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 39," "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R variable probability jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R normal jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot differs between a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, providing a clear difference in the advantages to the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released into the game area PA in the same manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery using the electric role release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role release 34a per time is set longer when the electric role release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs in high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one electric role. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, the time between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in meeting the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 258 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table (win/loss table for the lottery to open an electric reel) used when conducting the lottery to open an electric reel.

Figure 258(a) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 258(a), the win/loss table for the electric feature opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature opening. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in low-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the electric feature opening is won with a probability of 1 in 233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in low-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 258(b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 258(b), the winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 that will result in a winning electric feature opening. Four values from 462 to 465 have been set as the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 that will result in a losing electric feature opening. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in high-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the probability of winning the electric feature opening is 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in high-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low-frequency support mode.

F3. Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 259 is a block diagram that focuses on the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components, such as the power supply device 85, are omitted.

The audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90 is equipped with an MPU 92, which is a computing device that controls the entire audio and light emission control device 90; a sound output LSI 97 that generates sound signals and drives the speaker 46 based on the generated sound signals to output sound; and an audio data ROM 98, which is memory that stores various audio data. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is a device incorporating ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in ROM 93 are executed. For example, part of the RAM 94 is provided with a various flag storage area 94a, various counter area 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 92; they may each be integrated into separate chips.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates sound to be played based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback start command from the MPU 92, it identifies the sound to start playing as instructed by the playback start command, reads audio data corresponding to the identified sound from the audio data ROM 98, and generates the sound to be played. The sound output LSI 97 then outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Furthermore, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback end command from the MPU 92, it identifies the sound to end playing as instructed by the playback end command, and ends playback of the identified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels and can simultaneously generate, synthesize (mix), and output from the speaker 46 a maximum of 16 sounds. The sound output LSI 97 can also mute the output of the sound being played for each audio channel in accordance with instructions from the MPU 92, and can also cancel the mute setting. For audio channels that are muted, the sound output LSI 97 reads the corresponding audio data and generates the sound to be played. However, when mixing with the sound of other audio channels, the sound level of the muted audio channel is set to 0, or the sound of the muted audio channel is not input to the mixing circuit, thereby preventing the sound of the muted audio channel from being mixed. This prevents the sound of the muted audio channel from being output from the speaker 46.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the performance operation button 24, speaker 46, various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102; they may each be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various received commands, thereby controlling the VDP 105 (specifically, generating internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 104 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 102.

VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP 105 adjusts the timing of MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM 107 from character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and other data. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106, with each character ROM 106 responsible for storing image data and other data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

Video RAM 107 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively; the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 will also be referred to as the audio/light MPU 92, audio/light ROM 93, and audio/light RAM 94, respectively; and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will also be referred to as the display MPU 102.

Figure 260 is an explanatory diagram that schematically shows the data structure of data stored in the audio data ROM. The audio data ROM 98 of this embodiment is provided with an audio data storage area 98a for effects that stores audio data corresponding to the content of various effects, as well as audio data such as sound effects and lines from various characters, and a BGM music data storage area 98b that stores BGM music data to be played as BGM (Background Music) regardless of the content of the effects.

In this embodiment, audio data ROM 98 stores audio data in MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) format. However, any format can be used for the audio data. That is, the audio data may be in a data format in which sound waveforms are sampled using a linear pulse code variation method, or may be data compressed using various audio compression methods such as MP3 or AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). Furthermore, MIDI files conforming to the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for producing various sounds may be stored as audio data in audio data ROM 98. In this case, the sound output LSI 97 may be equipped with a MIDI sound source, and may be configured to read from the audio data ROM 98 a MIDI file for playing the type of sound instructed to start playback by the MPU 92, and then cause the MIDI sound source to produce sound in accordance with the read MIDI file, thereby executing playback of that sound. We will now return to the description of this embodiment.

In the example shown in Figure 260, the BGM music data storage area stores audio data groups that make up 15 types of BGM music M1 to M15. In this embodiment, one BGM piece is stored divided into an introductory section that corresponds to the introductory part of the BGM piece, and a main section that corresponds to the main melody that follows the introductory section. Furthermore, the introductory section that makes up the BGM piece is stored divided into multiple pieces of audio data, and the main section is also stored divided into multiple pieces of audio data.

For example, as shown in Figure 260, the introductory portion of BGM piece M1 is divided into two pieces of audio data (first introductory portion audio data and second introductory portion audio data) and stored, while the main portion of BGM piece M1 is divided into four pieces of audio data (first main portion audio data, second main portion audio data, third main portion audio data, and fourth main portion audio data). Each of the six pieces of audio data that make up BGM piece M1 has a playback time of 16 seconds. In other words, BGM piece M1 has a total playback time of 96 seconds (= 16 seconds x 6), with the introductory portion having a playback time of 32 seconds and the main portion, which is the main melody, having a playback time of 64 seconds.

Here, the time length of one bar of the BGM music M1 is two seconds. Therefore, the playback time of each piece of audio data that makes up the BGM music M1 is eight bars long. In other words, the temporal beginning of each piece of audio data that makes up the BGM music M1 coincides with the break between bars in the BGM music M1. Generally, music is structured in segments of eight or sixteen bars. For this reason, this embodiment is configured so that the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable starting playback from any of the audio data that makes up the BGM music M1. Specifically, for example, even if playback starts from the second main audio data that makes up part of the BGM music M1, the vocals will not be played back halfway through. The effect of dividing a single BGM piece into multiple audio data in a manner that makes it less likely for the player to feel uncomfortable will be described later.

Note that the playback time and number of divisions for each piece of audio data that makes up BGM piece M1 shown in Figure 260 are examples, and the playback time and number of divisions for each piece of audio data that makes up one BGM piece can be set arbitrarily depending on the length of time and content of the bars of the BGM piece, as long as the divisions do not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, the playback times for each piece of audio data that makes up one BGM piece may be divided differently, and the number of divisions for the introduction and main sections may be set arbitrarily.

As described below, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment selects one BGM piece from multiple BGM pieces as the piece to be played. When playback of the selected BGM piece begins, it first sequentially plays back audio data constituting the introductory portion of the BGM piece, followed by audio data constituting the main portion. After playback of the last audio data constituting the main portion (the fourth main portion audio data in the case of BGM piece M1) is completed, playback resumes from the first audio data constituting the main portion of the BGM piece (the first main portion audio data). In other words, when BGM pieces are repeatedly played, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment repeatedly plays back the main portion corresponding to the main melody as the repeat target. Therefore, when BGM pieces are repeatedly played, the introductory portion of the BGM piece is not played each time the piece is repeated. This prevents a player's excitement listening to the main portion corresponding to the main melody of the BGM piece from being dampened by the replay of the introductory portion. In the example shown in Figure 260, the introduction section of the BGM piece M1 is made up of two pieces of introduction audio data, and the main section is made up of four pieces of main section audio data, but the introduction section and the main section may each be made up of one piece of audio data.

F4. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 261 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. Figure 261 shows the content of the audio data played on audio channel 1, the state of the mute setting on audio channel 1, and the content of the audio data played on audio channel 2.

The audio and light emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment sets one BGM piece from multiple BGM pieces to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data that makes up the set BGM piece from the BGM piece data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98. The audio and light emission control device 90 also reads and plays audio data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed from the effect audio data storage area 98a of the audio data ROM 98 on audio channel 2. That is, in this embodiment, audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and audio channel 2 is used for effect. In the example shown in FIG. 261, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets BGM piece M1 to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data that makes up BGM piece M1 on audio channel 1.

As shown in FIG. 261, while the first introductory section audio data constituting the BGM music M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon reaching the timing to execute the preview performance Y1, begins playing audio data corresponding to the preview performance Y1 on audio channel 2. However, in this case, unlike when executing the reach performance R1 described below, audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the audio corresponding to the preview performance Y1 and the audio of the BGM music M1 are both synthesized and output from the speaker 46.

Then, while the second introductory section audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon encountering the timing to execute the reach effect R1, begins playing the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 on audio channel 2. In this case, unlike when the above-mentioned preview effect Y1 is executed, audio channel 1 is set to mute. Therefore, while the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 is being played, the BGM piece M1 is not output from the speaker 46.

Then, upon completion of playback of audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2, the audio and light emission control device 90 starts playing the third main-part audio data, which is the audio data next to the second main-part audio data of BGM song M1 currently being played on audio channel 1, and cancels the mute setting on channel 1. In other words, upon completion of playback of audio data corresponding to reach effect on audio channel 2, the audio and light emission control device 90 of this embodiment starts playing the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM song to which the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 belongs, and cancels the mute setting on audio channel 1.

However, if there is no audio data following the audio data currently being played (if the fourth main-part audio data of BGM song M1 is being played) when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is released (when playback of audio data corresponding to the reach effect on audio channel 2 has finished), playback is configured to start from the first audio data that makes up the main part of that BGM song (the first main-part audio data of BGM song M1).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 261, after the audio and light emission control device 90 has finished playing the fourth main-part audio data of the BGM piece M1 on audio channel 1, it starts playing from the first main-part audio data of the BGM piece M1. In other words, after the audio and light emission control device 90 of this embodiment has finished playing the last audio data constituting the set BGM piece (the fourth main-part audio data of the BGM piece M1), it does not start playing from the first audio data of the BGM piece (the first introductory audio data of the BGM piece), but rather starts playing from the first audio data constituting the main part of the BGM piece (the first main-part audio data of the BGM piece M1).

Although not shown in FIG. 261, in audio channels other than audio channels 1 and 2, short audio data such as sound effects and character dialogue is played back according to the content of the performance and output from speaker 46. In this embodiment, even when audio data such as sound effects is played back in audio channels other than audio channels 1 and 2, audio channel 1 is not set to mute, so BGM music is output from speaker 46 together with sound effects, etc.

As described above, according to this embodiment, while audio data corresponding to the preview effect is being played, BGM music is also output from the speaker 46, but while audio data corresponding to the reach effect is being played, BGM music is not output from the speaker 46. This makes it possible to highlight the audio corresponding to the reach effect, and to draw the player's attention to the reach effect even more. Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the reach effect ends and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled, playback starts from the beginning of the audio data that makes up the BGM music. As described above, this embodiment is configured so that the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable no matter which audio data that makes up the BGM music is played first. Therefore, when the reach effect ends, the BGM music can be restored while reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player.

If the control of this embodiment were not implemented, that is, if playback of the audio data constituting the BGM music were not started from the beginning when the mute setting for audio channel 1 was released, and playback of the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 were continued even when the mute setting for audio channel 1 was released, then when the mute setting for audio channel 1 was released, the player would hear the BGM music starting from the middle of the audio data constituting the BGM music (for example, in the middle of a vocal part included in the BGM music), which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or uneasy. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, playback of the audio data constituting the BGM music starts from the beginning when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is released. This prevents the BGM music from starting to play from the middle of a vocal part included in the BGM music, for example, and reduces the player's discomfort or discomfort.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, playback of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the currently played audio data belongs begins when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is released. This causes playback of the BGM music to resume from a time position close to when the BGM music would have continued to play from the start to the end of the execution of the reach effect, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by players who imagine the BGM music continuing to play from the start to the end of the execution of the reach effect.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when background music is played repeatedly (repeat playback), the introductory portion of the background music is not played repeatedly, which prevents a player who has been excited by listening to the main part of the background music from feeling depressed by having the introductory portion of the background music played again.

F5. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, the processing executed by the main control device 60 will be described, and then the processing executed by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

To progress each game, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the main MPU 62 also executes NMI interrupt processing, which is activated by the input of a power outage signal; however, a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
262 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is initiated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S60101, the system executes a reading process for the various detection sensors 67a-67e. That is, the system reads the status of the various detection sensors 67a-67e connected to the main control unit 60, determines the status of the sensors, and saves the detection information (winning detection information). Then, the system proceeds to step S60102.

In step S60102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S60103.

In step S60103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the program proceeds to step S60104.

In step S60104, a ball entry process for the starting hole is executed in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting hole in step S60104 will be described later. After executing step S60104, proceed to step S60105.

In step S60105, a through gate ball entry process is executed in response to a game ball entering the through gate 35. Details of the through gate ball entry process in step S60105 will be described later. After step S60105 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Starting point entry processing>
Next, the ball-entry process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-entry process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 262: S60104).

Figure 263 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting hole. In step S60201, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting ball entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. If it is determined in step S60201 that the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (S60201: YES), the process proceeds to step S60202, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S60203.

In step S60203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step S60204.

In step S60204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and this first start pending number RaN is set as the target for the processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of game balls pending based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 33. Then, proceed to step S60209.

If it is determined in step S60201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (S60201: NO), the process proceeds to step S60205, where it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S60205 that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (S60205: YES), the process proceeds to step S60206, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out four gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S60207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60205 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S60205: NO), the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step S60207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step S60208.

In step S60208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read, and this second start pending number RbN is set as the target for the processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending balls based on the number of game balls entering the second start opening 34. Then, proceed to step S60209.

In step S60209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S60204 or step S60208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S60209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (S60209: NO), that is, if the start pending number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, if in step S60209 the number of pending start items N is less than the upper limit (S60209: YES), proceed to step S60210, add 1 to the number of pending start items N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step S60211, add 1 to the value stored in the total number of pending items storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total number of pending items CRN). The total number of pending items CRN indicates the sum of the first number of pending start items RaN and the second number of pending start items RbN. Then proceed to step S60212.

In step S60212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S60103 (Figure 262) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding holding area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved number to which 1 was added in step S60210. Specifically, if the first start reserved number RaN is set as the target for processing, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S60103 (Figure 262) are stored in the first free memory area of the first holding area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step S60210. Additionally, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S60103 (Fig. 262) are stored in the first free memory area in the second holding area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step S60210. After executing step S60212, proceed to step S60213.

In step S60213, a first-time determination process is executed. The first-time determination process is a process that determines the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc., based on the information (reserved information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the first-time determination process will be described later. After executing step S60213, proceed to step S60214.

In step S60214, a process for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the result of the advance determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to confirm that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the result of the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entry, before the hold information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Fig. 266: step S60503) described below.

In addition, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step S60214, the main MPU 62 terminates the ball entry process for this starting hole.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the winning process for the starting slot (FIG. 263: S60213).

Figure 264 is a flowchart showing the advance determination process. As described above, the advance determination process is a process that executes determinations such as whether the jackpot lottery will be won or lost, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach has occurred, based on the pending information, before the pending information becomes the subject of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 60.

In step S60301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the memory area upon the game ball entering the starting hole in the ball entry process for the starting hole (Figure 263) is read. Then, proceed to step S60302, and determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the result of the determination of the prior determination process executed upon a ball entry prior to this ball entry is read from the corresponding memory area, and the presence or absence of a special jackpot that will occur before the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is determined, thereby determining the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round.

In step S60302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round (S60302: YES), the process proceeds to step S60303, where the hit/miss table for low probability mode stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a is referenced. After that, the process proceeds to step S60305, where, based on the result of referencing the hit/miss table for low probability mode, it is determined whether the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60302 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round (S60302: NO), the process proceeds to step S60304, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step S60305, where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step S60305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S60305: YES), the process proceeds to step S60306, where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the current starting hole is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S60307, where the allocation table stored in the allocation table memory area 63b is referenced. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 that is the subject of this allocation was obtained based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, the allocation table for the first starting hole is referenced; if it was obtained based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, the allocation table for the second starting hole is referenced. After executing step S60307, the process proceeds to step S60308.

In step S60308, the allocation table is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to a special jackpot. If it is determined in step S60308 that it corresponds to a special jackpot (S60308: YES), the process proceeds to step S60309, where special jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. The first determination processing then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60308 that it does not correspond to a special jackpot (S60308: NO), the process proceeds to step S60310, where normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. The first determination processing then ends.

If it is determined in step S60305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (S60305: NO), the process proceeds to step S60311, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S60312, where the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table memory area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S60313, where, based on the reference to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step S60313 that a reach has occurred (S60313: YES), the process proceeds to step S60314, where reach occurrence information is stored in the first position determination processing result storage area 64f. The first position determination processing then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60313 that a reach has not occurred (S60313: NO), the first position determination processing ends.

<Through gate entry processing>
Next, the through gate ball entry process will be described. The through gate ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 262: S60105).

Figure 265 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the through gate. In step S60401, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S60401 that a gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 (S60401: YES), the process proceeds to step S60402, where it is determined whether the number of reserved feature items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved feature items SN is a value indicating the number of balls that have entered the through gate 35 and are reserved for the purpose of holding a lottery to open an electric feature item. In this embodiment, the maximum value for the number of reserved feature items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60401 that a gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S60401: NO), the ball entry process for the through gate is terminated.

If it is determined in step S60402 that the number of reserved reel items SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S60402: YES), proceed to step S60403, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reel items SN. Then, proceed to step S60404.

In step S60404, the value of the electric feature release counter C4 updated in step S60103 (Fig. 262) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric feature holding area 64c of RAM 64. Then, the through ball entry process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60402 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (S60402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for the through reels is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 266 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S60501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings for each control device are performed when power is turned on, and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 is determined. Then, processing proceeds to step S60502.

In step S60502, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command that causes each sub-control device to start a demo video when power is turned on. Then, proceed to step S60503.

In step S60503, output data such as the start-up command set in step S60502, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step S60503, proceed to step S60504.

In step S60504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S60505.

In step S60505, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S60506. In step S60506, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the jackpot lottery, setting the variable pattern display by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S60506, the process proceeds to step S60507.

In step S60507, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S60508.

In step S60508, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric device 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric device 34a. Details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S60509.

In step S60509, if the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined time, standby processing is executed to cause each control device on the sub-side to start a demo video. Then, proceed to step S60510.

In step S60510, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (more precisely, the start of the command output processing in step S60503). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step S60510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (S60510: NO), in steps S60511 and S60512, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step S60511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step S60512, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60510 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (S60510: YES), the process returns to step S60503, and the processes from step S60503 to step S60508 are executed.

Note that the execution time for each process from step S60503 to step S60507 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 266: S60506).

Figure 267 is a flowchart showing the game round control process. In step S60601, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening and closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the pattern change in the game round in which a jackpot was won ends and the system transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S60601 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S60601: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S60602 onwards. In other words, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S60601: NO), the process proceeds to step S60602.

In step S60602, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is currently displaying a variable value. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b is currently displaying a variable value. This determination is made by determining whether the variable value display flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The variable value display flag is turned ON when variable value display is to be started for either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable value display ends.

If it is determined in step S60602 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying a variable value (S60602: NO), the process proceeds to steps S60603 to S60605 for starting a game. In step S60603, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0." If the total reserved number CRN is "0," this means that the start reserved number for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is "0." Therefore, if it is determined in step S60603 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S60603: YES), the game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60603 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S60603: NO), the process proceeds to step S60604.

In step S60604, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the fluctuation starts, and then the process proceeds to step S60605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S60605, a change start process is executed to start the change display on the main display unit 45 and the change display on the pattern display device 41. Details of the change start process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S60606.

In step S60606, the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. The play count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of plays executed in high frequency support mode. After executing step S60606, proceed to step S60607.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60602 that the main display unit 45 is displaying a variable image (S60602: YES), the process proceeds to step S60607.

In step S60607, it is determined whether the variable time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variable time is the time from when the symbol sequence begins to change until all symbol sequences have stopped, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S60607, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of RAM 64 has become "0." The value of this variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (Figure 270) described below. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated.

If it is determined in step S60607 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S60607: NO), the process proceeds to step S60608, where the fluctuation display process is executed. The fluctuation display process is a process that changes the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After step S60608 is executed, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S60607 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S60607: YES), the process proceeds to step S60609, where fluctuation termination processing is executed. In the fluctuation termination processing, the stopped symbols determined in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 269), described below, are displayed as stopped symbols on the main display unit 45 as the result of the current game round. After executing step S60609, the process proceeds to step S60610.

In step S60610, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the fluctuation start processing (Fig. 269) described below. If it is determined in step S60610 that any of the jackpot flags is ON (S60610: YES), the process proceeds to step S60611, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the game count control processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60610 that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S60610: NO), the process proceeds to step S60612.

In step S60612, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". If it is determined in step S60612 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S60612: YES), the process proceeds to step S60613, where a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is a command that includes information that causes the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that no reserved information is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b at the time the pattern change (play round) has ended. The customer waiting command set in step S60613 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S60503 of the normal processing (Figure 266). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60612 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S60612: NO), the play round control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game play control process (FIG. 267: S60604).

Figure 268 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S60701, it is determined whether the holding area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, if the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 255) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 255), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 255) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 255), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the second holding area Rb. In other words, by executing the processing of step S60701, the pending information can be processed in the order in which it was stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

If it is determined in step S60701 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step S60701: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area is performed in steps S60702 to S60707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60701 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S60701: NO), data setting processing for the second holding area is performed in steps S60708 to S60713.

In step S60702, the first start pending number RaN in the first pending area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S60703, where the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S60704. In step S60704, the data stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S60705.

In step S60705, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S60705, proceed to step S60706.

In step S60706, if the second symbol display unit flag in the various flags storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF; if it is not ON, the flag is maintained in that state. The second symbol display unit flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display will start from the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, proceed to step S60707.

In step S60707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in the data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. The data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S60707 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S60503 of normal processing (Figure 266). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

If it is determined in step S60701 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S60701: NO), proceed to step S60708.

In step S60708, the second start pending number RbN in the second holding area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step S60709. In step S60709, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step S60710, where the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step S60711.

In step S60711, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S60711, proceed to step S60712.

In step S60712, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flags storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON; if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step S60713.

In step S60713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, i.e., corresponds to the second starting port 34, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. This data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S60713 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S60503 of normal processing (Figure 266). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 267: S60605).

Figure 269 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S60801, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag that the MPU 62 uses to determine whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this embodiment, it is turned ON when the open/close execution mode related to winning a special jackpot ends, and is turned OFF if a regular jackpot is subsequently won. If it is determined in step S60801 that it is the high probability mode (S60801: YES), the process proceeds to step S60802.

In step S60802, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for high probability mode shown in Figure 256 (b). Then, proceed to step S60804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60801 that the mode is not high probability mode (S60801: NO), proceed to step S60803.

In step S60803, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in Figure 256 (a). Then, proceed to step S60804.

In step S60804, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (jackpot lottery) in step S60802 or step S60803 is a jackpot win. If the result of the hit/miss determination in step S60804 is a jackpot win (S60804: YES), steps S60805 to S60812 execute processing to set the game result and the stop result in the case of a jackpot win.

In step S60805, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S60805 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S60805: NO), the process proceeds to step S60806, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting slot (see FIG. 257(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R regular jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R regular jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60805 that the second symbol display flag is ON (S60805: YES), the process proceeds to step S60807, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting slot (see FIG. 257(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R regular jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R regular jackpot. After executing the processing of step S60806 or step S60807, the process proceeds to step S60808.

In step S60808, it is determined whether the type of jackpot allocated in step S60806 or step S60807 is a variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S60808 that the game result is a variable jackpot (S60808: YES), the process proceeds to step S60809.

In step S60809, the process for setting the stop result for a special jackpot is executed. The process for setting the stop result for a special jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game in which a special jackpot is won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a special jackpot stored in the stop result table memory area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S60806 or step S60807 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address memory area of RAM 64. After executing step S60809, the process proceeds to step S60810.

In step S60810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S60806 or step S60807 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R jackpot, the 16R jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R jackpot, the 8R jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S60814.

In step S60808, if it is determined that the type of jackpot allocated in step S60806 or step S60807 is not a special jackpot (S60808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot allocated is a regular jackpot, proceed to step S60811.

In step S60811, the stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a normal jackpot will be won. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a normal jackpot stored in the stop result table memory area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S60806 or step S60807 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address memory area of RAM 64. After executing step S60811, the process proceeds to step S60812.

In step S60812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step S60806 or step S60807 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S60814.

In step S60804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S60802 or step S60803 is not a jackpot win (S60804: NO), proceed to step S60813 and execute the stop result setting process for a loss. The stop result setting process for a loss is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which results in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S60813, proceed to step S60814.

In step S60814, a process for setting the variable time is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on whether or not a jackpot has occurred and whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S60814, the process proceeds to step S60815.

In step S60815, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S60815 that the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON (S60815: NO), the process proceeds to step S60816, where a first variable command is set. The first variable command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information acquired based on a win in the first start port 33, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variable time set in step S60814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60815 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (S60815: YES), the process proceeds to step S60817, where a second variable command is set. The second variable command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information acquired based on a win in the second start port 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variable time set in step S60814. After executing step S60816 or step S60817, proceed to step S60818.

In step S60818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred and the results of the allocation determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R special jackpot information, 8R special jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or a miss result.

The variation commands and type commands set in steps S60816 to S60818 are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S60503 of the normal processing (Fig. 266). The audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation commands and type commands, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step S60818, proceed to step S60819.

In step S60819, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, begins displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display unit 37a and a changing display is initiated; if the second pattern display unit flag is ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display unit 37b and a changing display is initiated. After step S60819 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 269: S60814).

Figure 270 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable time. In step S60901, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of RAM 64 is obtained. Then, proceed to step S60902.

In step S60902, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery for the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the special jackpot flag or the regular jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S60902: YES), the process proceeds to step S60903.

In step S60903, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for the number of games in which the jackpot lottery is won is fixed. Then, proceed to step S60904, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S60902 that the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won (S60902: NO), the process proceeds to step S60905, where it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current play. Since this process (S60905) is executed if the jackpot lottery for the current play has not been won in step S60902, in step S60905 it is determined whether a reach will occur in the play among the play sessions in which the jackpot lottery has not been won. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach will occur (S60905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S60906. When determining whether a reach will occur using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 is referenced.

In step S60906, the variable time table for reaching a winning position stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for reaching a winning position is constant. Then, the process proceeds to step S60904, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S60905 that a reach will not occur in the current game (S60905: NO), the process proceeds to step S60907, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S60904, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the variable time may be configured to be independent of the total reserved number CRN, or may be set so that the smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Also, when the second start reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first start reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time; and when the second start reserved number RbN is "1" or greater, the greater the second start reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss is reached may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a special jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a miss is allowed, and a variable time table for a complete miss may be set separately.

<Game status transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 266: S60507).

Figure 271 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S61001, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is set ON at the start of the ending period and set OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S61001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S61001: NO), proceed to step S61002, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is set ON at the start of the opening/closing processing period and set OFF at the end of the opening/closing processing period.

If it is determined in step S61002 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S61002: NO), the process proceeds to step S61003, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is the period for executing the opening performance in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S61003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S61003: NO), the process proceeds to step S61004, where it is determined whether the timing has come when the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S61004 that the variable display has not come to an end (S61004: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S61004 that the variable display has ended (S61004: YES), the process proceeds to step S61005, where it is determined whether the result of the jackpot lottery for this game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode flag is not ON (S61005: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S61005 that the result of the jackpot lottery for this game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode (S61005: YES), the process proceeds to step S61006, where the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S61007. Note that if the high probability mode flag is OFF in step S61006, the process proceeds directly to step S61007.

In step S61007, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various timer counter area 64d of RAM 64. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S61007, the process proceeds to step S61008.

In step S61008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S60503 of the normal processing (Figure 266). Based on receiving the opening command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the opening effect and right-hit notification effect to be executed, and begins controlling various devices so that these effects are executed sequentially. After executing step S61008, the process proceeds to step S61009, where the opening period flag is set ON. After that, the game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S61003 that the opening period flag is ON (S61003: YES), proceed to step S61010.

In step S61010, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0." If it is determined in step S61010 that the opening period has ended (S61010: YES), the process proceeds to step S61011, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S61012.

In step S61012, the process executes a round display start process to notify the type of current open/close execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in ROM 63, and the number of rounds is confirmed from the identified stop result data. The confirmed number of rounds is then output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the output is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step S61012, the process proceeds to step S61013.

In step S61013, the number of rounds for the current opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in RAM 64 are checked, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM 64. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. After executing step S61013, proceed to step S61014.

In step S61014, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S61015, where an opening start command is set. The set opening start command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S60503 of the normal processing (Fig. 266). This opening start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening start command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sets the execution of a round performance with content corresponding to the number of rounds, and begins controlling various devices so that the set round performance is executed. After executing step S61015, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S61002 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S61002: YES), the process proceeds to step S61016, where the special prize opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, if the special prize opening 36a is closed, the special prize opening 36a is opened by driving the variable prize driving unit 36c, provided that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or greater. Furthermore, if the special prize opening 36a is open, the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 36c is stopped, and the special prize opening 36a is closed, provided that the opening limit time has elapsed since the special prize opening 36a was opened, or the opening limit number of game balls has entered the special prize opening 36a. Details of the special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S61016, the process proceeds to step S61017.

In step S61017, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S61016: NO), the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S61017: YES), the process proceeds to step S61018, where the opening/closing process period flag is set to OFF. After executing step S61018, the process proceeds to step S61019.

In step S61019, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is terminated so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S61019, the process proceeds to step S61020.

In step S61020, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). In this embodiment, the same fixed ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various timer counter area 64d of RAM 64. After executing step S61020, proceed to step S61021.

In step S61021, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S60503 of normal processing (Figure 266). Based on receiving the ending command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets the device to execute an ending performance and begins controlling various devices so that the ending performance is executed. After executing step S61021, proceed to step S61022.

In step S61022, the ending period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S61001 that the ending period flag is ON (S61001: YES), proceed to step S61023.

In step S61023, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S61019), is "0." If it is determined in step S61023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is not "0" (S61023: NO), the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (S61023: YES), the process proceeds to step S61024.

In step S61024, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S61025, where transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is processing for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period has ended. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S61025, the process proceeds to step S61026, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S61027.

In step S61027, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". If it is determined in step S61027 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S61027: YES), the process proceeds to step S61028, where a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is a command that includes information that causes the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that no reserved information is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b at the time the opening/closing execution mode ends. The customer waiting command set in step S61028 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S60503 of the normal processing (Figure 266). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61027 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S61028: NO), the game state transition process ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 271: S61007).

Figure 272 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S61101, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S61101 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, if a transition to opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win in a jackpot lottery during low-frequency support mode (S61101: NO), the process proceeds to step S61102, where the value "5000", which corresponds to 10 seconds, is set in the third timer counter area T3, and the opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61101 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, if a transition to opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win in the jackpot lottery during high frequency support mode (S61101: YES), the process proceeds to step S61103, where the value "3500", which corresponds to 7 seconds, is set in the third timer counter area T3, and the opening time setting process ends.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 271: S61016).

Figure 273 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. In step S61201, it is determined whether the large prize opening 36a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the variable prize drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S61201 that the large prize opening 36a is not open (S61201: NO), the process proceeds to step S61202, where it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0." If it is determined in step S61202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S61202: YES), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S61202: NO), the process proceeds to step S61203.

In step S61203, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of closure of the large prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step S61203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S61203: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S61203: YES), the process proceeds to step S61204, where the variable prize drive unit 36c is driven to open the large prize opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S61205.

In step S61205, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since all set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, the first timer counter area T1 is set to "15,000" (i.e., 30 seconds). Furthermore, to count the number of game balls that have entered the large winning slot 36a, the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "10." The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec. Note that if the pachinko machine 10 is set to low-frequency winning mode, for example, the first timer counter area T1 may be set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds) and the winning counter area PC may be set to "6." After executing step S61205, the process proceeds to step S61206.

In step S61206, an opening command is set. The large prize opening opening/closing process then ends. The opening command includes information for the sub-controllers, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun. The command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 266: step S60503). Based on the received opening command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has begun, and updates the presentation content displayed on the various lamps 47 and speaker 46 to reflect the fact that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun. The audio and light-emitting control device 90 also transmits the opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has begun, and updates the presentation content displayed on the pattern display device 41 to reflect the fact that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has begun.

If it is determined in step S61201 that the special prize opening 36a is open (step S61201: YES), the process proceeds to step S61207, where it is determined whether the value in the first timer counter area T1 is "0." In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration that the special prize opening 36a remains open. If it is determined in step S61207 that the value in the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S61207: NO), the process proceeds to step S61208.

In step S61208, whether or not a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 36a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable prize opening device 36. If it is determined in step S61208 that a ball has not entered (S61208: NO), the large prize opening opening opening process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61208 that a ball has entered (S61208: YES), the process proceeds to step S61209, where the value of the prize counter area PC is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S61210.

In step S61210, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter area PC is "0." If it is determined in step S61210 that the value of the prize counter area PC is not "0" (S61210: NO), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S61207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S61207: YES), or if it is determined in step S61210 that the value of the prize counter area PC is "0" (S61210: YES), the process proceeds to step S61211, where the special prize opening closure process is executed. Specifically, the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is set to a non-driven state in order to close the special prize opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S61212.

In step S61212, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S61213, where it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0." If it is determined in step S61213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S61213: YES), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S61213: NO), the first timer counter area T1 is set to "1000" (i.e., 2 seconds). In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of closure of the large prize opening 36a. After executing step S61214, the process proceeds to step S61215, where a closure command is set. Then, the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

This set close command contains information for the sub-controllers, the audio and light emitting control device 90 and display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has been completed, and is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 266: step S60503). Based on the received close command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content displayed on the various lamps 47 and speakers 46 to reflect the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a. The audio and light emitting control device 90 also sends the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received close command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content displayed on the pattern display device 41 to reflect the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 271: S61024).

Figure 274 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S61301, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable flag or the 8R probability variable flag in RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S61301 that the 16R probability flag or 8R probability flag in RAM 64 is ON (S61301: YES), the process proceeds to step S61302, where a flag deletion process is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, or high frequency support mode flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, it is maintained in that state. After executing step S61302, the process proceeds to step S61303.

In step S61303, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S61304, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state transitions to one in which the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. The process then proceeds to step S61305.

In step S61305, a high probability mode command, which is a command containing information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step S61310, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61301 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag in RAM 64 is ON (S61301: NO), the process proceeds to step S61306, where flag erasure processing is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability flag, 8R probability flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, or high frequency support mode flag is ON, it is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, it is maintained in that state. Then, the process proceeds to step S61307.

In step S61307, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S61308, where the number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of plays counter PNC is a value that indicates the number of plays when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of plays. The process then proceeds to step S61309.

In step S61309, a low probability mode command, which is a command containing information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the win/lose lottery mode is a low probability mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step S61310.

In step S61310, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command containing information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electrical support treatment>
Next, the electric support processing will be described. The electric support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 266: S60508).

Figure 275 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing. In step S61401, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step S61401, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (S61401: NO), the process proceeds to step S61402.

In step S61402, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is turned ON if the electric feature opening lottery, which determines whether or not the electric feature 34a will be opened, is selected to open, and is turned OFF if the support in progress flag is ON. In step S61402, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (S61402: NO), the program proceeds to step S61403.

In step S61403, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In step S61403, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S61403: NO), the main power support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S61403: YES), the processing proceeds to step S61404.

In step S61404, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step S61404 that it is time to end the variable display (S61404: YES), the process proceeds to step S61405, where a miss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the miss display displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61404 that it is not time to end the variable display (S61404: NO), the process proceeds to step S61406.

In step S61406, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S61406 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (S61406: NO), the main electric reel support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61406 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (S61406: YES), the processing proceeds to step S61407.

In step S61407, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the program proceeds to step S61408, where it determines whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step S61407 (S61407: NO) and the game is in the high-frequency support mode in step S61408 (S61408: YES), the program proceeds to step S61409, where a lottery is held to unlock the electric feature. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature unlock counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the game is won in the lottery to unlock the electric feature. In addition, simultaneously with the lottery to unlock the electric feature, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 seconds). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated. The program then proceeds to step S61410.

In step S61410, it is determined whether the result of the electric reel opening lottery in step S61409 is a support win. If it is determined in step S61410 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is a support win (S61410: YES), the process proceeds to step S61411, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric reel 34a has been opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S61412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61410 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is not a support win (S61410: NO), the process proceeds to step S61412 without executing the processing of step S61411.

In step S61412, it is determined whether the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S61412 that the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode (S61412: YES), the process proceeds to step S61413. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61412 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S61412: NO), the main role support processing is terminated.

In step S61413, it is determined whether the play count counter area is "0". The play count counter is decremented by 1 each time a play is completed when the low probability mode is in high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S61413 that the play count counter area is not "0" (S61413: NO), the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61413 that the play count counter area is "0", the processing proceeds to step S61414, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing proceeds to step S61415.

In step S61415, a low-frequency support mode command, which includes information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the electric support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S61415 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 266: step S60503). Based on receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S61407 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (S61407: YES), or if it is determined in step S61418 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S61408: NO), the process proceeds to step S61416, where a lottery is held to open an electric reel. Specifically, the value stored in the electric reel reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric reel opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric reel opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric reel opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e., 29.5 seconds). Then, the process proceeds to step S61417.

In step S61417, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step S61416 is a support win. If it is determined in step S61417 that there is no support win (S61417: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61417 that there is a support win (S61417: YES), the processing proceeds to step S61418, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S61402 that the support win flag is ON (S61402: YES), the process proceeds to step S61419, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step S61419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S61419: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, and the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S61419: YES), the process proceeds to step S61420.

In step S61420, a winning display is set. This ends the variable display of the image on the normal unit 38 with the winning display still displayed. Then, proceed to step S61421, turn the support in progress flag ON, and turn the support win flag OFF. Then, end the main role support processing.

If it is determined in step S61401 that the support flag is ON (S61401: YES), the process proceeds to step S61422, where an electric role opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. Then, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electrical switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 275: S61422).

Figure 276 is a flowchart showing the electric device opening/closing control process. In step S61501, it is determined whether the electric device 34a is open. Whether the electric device 34a is open is determined by whether the electric device drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the electric device 34a is open (S61501: YES), the process proceeds to step S61502.

In step S61502, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role device 34a. In step S61502, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S61502: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role device 34a has not ended, the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S61502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S61502: YES), the process proceeds to step S61503, where a closing process is performed to control the electric device 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being open, is "0," the electric device 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is then used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250." After executing step S61503, the process proceeds to step S61504.

In step S61504, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S61505, where it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S61505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S61505: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S61505: YES), the process proceeds to step S61506, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S61501 that the electric role 34a is not open (S61501: NO), proceed to step S61507, where it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric role 34a being closed. If it is determined in step S61507 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S61507: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S61507: YES), proceed to step S61508, where an opening process is executed to control the electric role 34a to the open state. Then, proceed to step S61509.

In step S61509, it is determined whether the device is in opening/closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the device is not in opening/closing execution mode (S61509: NO), the process proceeds to step S61510, where it is determined whether the device is in high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S61510 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S61510: YES), the process proceeds to step S61511, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). The main electric switch opening/closing control process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61509 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S61509: YES), or if it is determined in step S61510 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S61510: NO), proceed to step S61512 and set the second timer counter area T2 to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). Then, this electric opening/closing control process ends.

F6. Various processes executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the audio and light emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the process executed in the audio and light emission control device 90 will be described, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the acoustic/optical side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 277 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is executed repeatedly at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing is explained below.

In step S63101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio-visual RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio-visual RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. Commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step S63101, the process proceeds to step S63102.

In step S63102, BGM processing is executed. BGM processing involves processing such as setting and playing BGM music. Details of BGM processing will be described later. After executing step S63102, proceed to step S63103.

In step S63103, processing for game round presentation is executed. In the game round presentation processing, processing related to the presentation to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops is carried out. Details of the game round presentation processing will be described later. After executing step S63103, proceed to step S63104.

In step S63104, processing for the opening and closing execution mode presentation is executed. In the opening and closing execution mode presentation processing, processing related to the presentation during the opening period, the presentation during the opening and closing processing period, and the presentation during the ending period is performed. Details of the opening and closing execution mode presentation processing will be described later. After executing step S63104, proceed to step S63105.

In step S63105, a customer waiting process is executed. In the customer waiting process, a process is executed to display a demo video on the symbol display device 41 if a game has not been played for a predetermined period of time. Details of the customer waiting process will be described later. After executing step S63105, the process proceeds to step S63106.

In step S63106, a light emission control process is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in each of the performance processes described above. After executing step S63106, the process proceeds to step S63107.

In step S63107, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After step S63107 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<BGM processing>
Next, the BGM processing will be described. The BGM processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 277: S63102).

Figure 278 is a flowchart showing BGM processing. In step S63201, BGM initial setting processing is executed. In the BGM initial setting processing, when the first game play begins after the pachinko machine 10 is started, BGM music M1 is set as the music to be played on audio channel 1, and processing is executed to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start playing BGM music M1. Details of the BGM initial setting processing will be described later. After executing step S63201, the program proceeds to step S63202.

In step S63202, a BGM change process is executed. In the BGM change process, the BGM music to be played on audio channel 1 is changed when the lottery mode or support mode is changed, such as when the open/close execution mode ends or when 100 games have been played in the high-frequency support mode. Details of the BGM change process will be described later. After executing step S63202, the program proceeds to step S63203.

In step S63203, BGM continuous playback processing is executed. In BGM continuous playback processing, when playback of the audio data constituting the BGM music set for playback has finished, processing is executed to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start playback of the next audio data constituting that BGM music. Details of the BGM continuous playback processing will be described later. After executing step S63203, proceed to step S63204.

In step S63204, BGM muting processing is executed. In BGM muting processing, audio channel 1 is muted when the reach effect starts, and processing is executed to cancel the muting setting for audio channel 1 when the reach effect ends. Details of the BGM muting processing will be described later. After step S63204 is executed, this BGM processing ends.

<BGM Initial Setting Processing>
Next, the BGM initial setting process will be described. The BGM initial setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for BGM processing (FIG. 278: S63201).

Figure 279 is a flowchart showing the BGM initial setting process. In step S63301, it is determined whether the BGM initial setting complete flag is ON. The BGM initial setting complete flag is OFF immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and as described below, is a flag that is turned ON when BGM piece M1 is initially set as the first BGM piece to be played after powering on. If it is determined in step S63301 that the BGM initial setting complete flag is ON (S63301: YES), that is, if the initial setting of the BGM piece to be played has already been completed, the BGM initial setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63301 that the BGM initial setting complete flag is not ON (S63301: NO), the process proceeds to step S63302.

In step S63302, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S63302 that a variation command and a type command have been received (S63302: YES), processing proceeds to step S63303, where BGM piece M1 is set as the piece to be played on audio channel 1. Processing then proceeds to step S63304, where processing is executed to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM piece M1 set as the piece to be played. Processing then proceeds to step S63305, where the BGM initial setting completion flag is set ON, and this BGM initial setting processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63302 that a variation command and a type command have not been received (S63302: NO), this BGM initial setting processing ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, playback of BGM piece M1 begins when the first symbol change (game turn) begins after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. However, other processing modes can also be adopted as variants of the BGM initial setting process. For example, a configuration can be adopted in which a BGM piece other than BGM piece M1 is set as the first BGM piece to be played after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a configuration can be adopted in which the first BGM piece to be played after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is set randomly, or a configuration can be adopted in which an image for selecting one BGM piece from multiple BGM pieces is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the player is allowed to select the first BGM piece to be played after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the BGM music M1 is configured to start playing when the first symbol change (game turn) begins after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on; however, as a modified example, after the first BGM music to be played after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the BGM music that has been set may start playing at a volume equal to or lower than a predetermined volume without waiting for the first symbol change (game turn) to begin.

<BGM change processing>
Next, the BGM change process will be described. The BGM change process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for BGM processing (FIG. 278: S63202).

Figure 280 is a flowchart showing the BGM change process. In step S63401, it is determined whether a high probability mode command has been received. The high probability mode command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when the opening/closing execution mode ends and the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode. If it is determined in step S63401 that a high probability mode command has been received (S63401: YES), the process proceeds to step S63402, where a random number acquisition process for setting BGM is executed. Specifically, the value of a random number counter for setting BGM music is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S63403, where the BGM selection table for high probability mode is referenced, and the BGM music corresponding to the acquired random number counter value is set as the music to be played. Note that the BGM selection table for high probability mode has BGM music M6 to M10 set in correspondence with the random number counter value. That is, in this embodiment, during high probability mode, one of the BGM pieces M6 to M10 is played on audio channel 1. After executing step S63403, proceed to step S63404, where processing is executed to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM piece set for playback. Thereafter, this BGM change processing ends.

If it is determined in step S63401 that a high probability mode command has not been received (S63401: NO), the process proceeds to step S63405, where it is determined whether a low probability mode command has been received. The low probability mode command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is low probability mode at the time the opening and closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the result is a normal jackpot that is not a special jackpot, the support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is high frequency support mode. Therefore, receiving a low probability mode command means that the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is low probability mode and the support mode is high frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S63405 that a low-probability mode command has been received (S63405: YES), i.e., if the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, proceed to step S63406 and execute a random number acquisition process for setting BGM. Specifically, the value of a random number counter for setting BGM music is acquired. Then, proceed to step S63407 and refer to the high-frequency support mode BGM selection table to set the BGM music corresponding to the acquired random number counter value as the playback target. Note that the high-frequency support mode BGM selection table stores the random number counter value and BGM music M11-M15 in correspondence with each other. In other words, in this embodiment, when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, one of BGM music M11-M15 is played on audio channel 1. After executing step S63407, the process proceeds to step S63404 described above, where processing is executed to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM piece set for playback. Thereafter, this BGM change processing ends.

If it is determined in step S63405 that a low-probability mode command has not been received (S63405: NO), the process proceeds to step S63408, where it is determined whether a low-frequency support mode command has been received. The low-frequency support mode command is a command transmitted from the master MPU 62 when the lottery mode is low-probability mode and a predetermined number of symbol variations (plays) (100 in this embodiment) have been performed without a jackpot win while the support mode is high-frequency support mode (see step S61415 in FIG. 275). Therefore, receiving a low-frequency support mode command means that the lottery mode is low-probability mode and the support mode has transitioned to normal mode, where the lottery mode is low-probability mode and the support mode is low-frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S63408 that a low-frequency support mode command has been received (S63408: YES), the process proceeds to step S63409, where a random number acquisition process for setting BGM is executed. Specifically, the value of a random number counter for setting BGM is acquired. Then, processing proceeds to step S63410, where the normal mode BGM selection table is referenced and the BGM piece corresponding to the acquired random number counter value is set as the piece to be played. Note that the normal mode BGM selection table stores BGM pieces M1-M5 in correspondence with the random number counter value. In other words, in this embodiment, during normal mode, where the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, one of the BGM pieces M1-M5 is played on audio channel 1. After executing step S63410, processing proceeds to step S63404 described above, where processing is performed to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM piece set as the piece to be played. The BGM change processing then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63408 that a low frequency support mode command has not been received (S63408: NO), the BGM change processing ends.

In this embodiment, the background music to be played is changed when the game mode switches to lottery mode or support mode. However, as a variation, the background music to be played may be changed at other times. For example, the background music to be played may be changed when the pattern changes (play times) a predetermined number of times (e.g., 30 times).

<BGM continuous playback processing>
Next, the BGM continuous playback process will be described. The BGM continuous playback process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the BGM process (FIG. 278: S63203).

Figure 281 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous playback processing. In step S63501, it is determined whether playback of audio data has finished on audio channel 1. If it is determined in step S63501 that playback of audio data has finished on audio channel 1 (S63501: YES), the process proceeds to step S63502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63501 that playback of audio data has not finished on audio channel 1 (S63501: NO), the BGM continuous playback processing is terminated. Note that various methods can be used to determine whether playback of audio data has finished on audio channel 1. For example, the sound output LSI 97 may be configured to send a signal indicating that playback of audio data has finished to the audio/light side MPU 92 when playback of each audio data has finished. As another example, information regarding the data structure of the audio data groups that make up each BGM piece may be stored in the audio/light-side ROM 93, and when playback of the audio data begins, the audio/light-side MPU 92 may obtain the playback time of the audio data based on the information regarding the data structure and set the playback time in a timer counter, and determine whether playback of the audio data on audio channel 1 has finished depending on whether the timer counter has reached 0.

In step S63502, it is determined whether or not there is audio data following the audio data that has finished being played. Specifically, for example, if BGM music M1 is set as the playback target, and playback of the second introductory section audio data of BGM music M1 has finished, the BGM music M1 contains first main section audio data as the audio data following the second introductory section audio data, so it is determined that there is audio data following the audio data that has finished being played. On the other hand, if playback of the fourth main section audio data of BGM music M1 has finished, there is no audio data following the fourth main section audio data in BGM music M1, so it is determined that there is no audio data following the audio data that has finished being played. Note that various methods can be used to determine whether or not there is audio data following the audio data that has finished being played in the BGM music. For example, the last audio data of a group of audio data constituting a BGM piece may include information indicating that the audio data is the last audio data in the group of audio data constituting the BGM piece, and when the sound output LSI 97 finishes reproducing the last audio data, it transmits a signal to the sound output MPU 92 indicating that the reproduction of the audio data has ended, and the signal includes information indicating that the audio data whose reproduction has ended is the last audio data in the group of audio data constituting the BGM piece, and the sound output MPU 92 analyzes the signal to determine whether or not audio data next to the audio data that has finished reproducing exists in the BGM piece.As another example, information regarding the data structure of the audio data groups constituting each BGM piece may be stored in the sound output ROM 93, and the sound output MPU 92 may be able to determine whether or not audio data next to the audio data that has finished reproducing exists in the BGM piece based on the information regarding the data structure. As another example, information regarding the data structure of the audio data groups that make up each BGM piece may be stored in an audio data ROM 98, and the sound/light side MPU 92 may be configured to be able to access the audio data ROM 98, and to be able to determine whether audio data following the audio data that has finished being played exists in the BGM piece, based on the information regarding the data structure stored in the audio data ROM 98.

If it is determined in step S63502 that audio data exists that follows the audio data whose playback has finished (S63502: YES), the process proceeds to step S63503, where the sound output LSI 97 begins playback of the next audio data in audio channel 1. The BGM continuous playback process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63502 that audio data does not exist that follows the audio data whose playback has finished (S63502: NO), the process proceeds to step S63504, where the sound output LSI 97 begins playback of the first main-part audio data of the BGM piece that is set to be played in audio channel 1. Therefore, in this embodiment, after playback of the introduction of the BGM piece has finished, the main part is repeatedly played. After step S63504 is executed, the BGM continuous playback process ends.

<BGM noise reduction processing>
Next, the BGM silencing process will be described. The BGM silencing process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 278: S63204).

Figure 282 is a flowchart showing the BGM muting process. In step S63601, it is determined whether the BGM muting start flag is ON. As will be described later, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when the reach effect starts and when two minutes have passed without any pattern changes (plays) being performed during a period other than the open/close execution mode, and is turned OFF when audio channel 1 is set to muting. In other words, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when audio channel 1 is set to muting.

If it is determined in step S63601 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S63601: YES), the process proceeds to step S63602, where audio channel 1 is set to mute. Then, the process proceeds to step S63603, where the BGM mute start flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S63604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63601 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S63601: NO), the process proceeds to step S63604 without executing the processing of steps S63602 and S63603.

In step S63604, it is determined whether the BGM muting end flag is ON. As described below, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the reach effect ends and when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 during the period when the demo video described below is being displayed (when the pattern begins to vary), and is turned OFF when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. In other words, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S63604 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S63604: NO), the BGM mute processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63604 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S63604: YES), the process proceeds to step S63605, where it is determined whether the cue flag is ON. As will be described later, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 while the demo video is being displayed (when the pattern variation begins), and is a flag that determines whether to start playing the BGM music from the beginning (first introductory audio data) when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S63605 that the cue flag is not ON (S63605: NO), proceed to step S63606, where it is determined whether or not there is audio data following the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 for that BGM piece. Specifically, for example, if BGM piece M1 is set as the playback target and the second introductory section audio data of BGM piece M1 is currently being played, the BGM piece M1 contains first main section audio data as the audio data following the second introductory section audio data, so it is determined that there is audio data following the audio data currently being played. On the other hand, if the fourth main section audio data of BGM piece M1 is currently being played, there is no audio data following the fourth main section audio data in BGM piece M1, so it is determined that there is no audio data following the audio data currently being played.

If it is determined in step S63606 that there is audio data following the audio data being played (S63606: YES), the process proceeds to step S63607, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the next audio data on audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S63608, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is cancelled. That is, when the reach effect ends and the mute setting on audio channel 1 is cancelled, playback of the audio data constituting the BGM music starts from the beginning. Then, the process proceeds to step S63609, where the BGM mute end flag is set to OFF, and the BGM mute processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63606 that there is no audio data following the audio data currently being played (S63606: NO), processing proceeds to step S63610, where the sound output LSI 97 begins playing the first main-part audio data of the BGM music set as the playback target on audio channel 1. Processing then proceeds to step S63608, where the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. That is, since there is no audio data following the audio data currently being played when the reach effect ends and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled, playback of the BGM music set as the playback target is repeated, but the audio data constituting the introductory part of the BGM music is not played, and playback begins from the beginning of the first main-part audio data constituting the main part of the BGM music. Processing then proceeds to step S63609, where the BGM mute end flag is turned OFF, and this BGM mute processing ends.

If it is determined in step S63605 that the cue flag is ON (S63605: YES), the process proceeds to step S63611, where the cue flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S63612, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set to be played on audio channel 1. That is, in this embodiment, when the demo video is resumed and the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled, playback starts from the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set to be played. Then, the process proceeds to step S63608 described above, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, the process proceeds to step S63609, where the BGM mute end flag is set to OFF, and the BGM mute processing ends.

<Processing for game play presentation>
Next, the game play presentation process will be described. The game play presentation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 277: S63103).

Figure 283 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation processing. In step S63701, the game round presentation setting processing is executed. The game round presentation setting processing is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is a process for setting the presentation to be executed in a game round when that game round starts. Details of the game round presentation setting processing will be described later. After executing step S63701, the program proceeds to step S63702.

In step S63702, the game round effect execution process is executed. The game round effect execution process is executed when the game round effect setting process described above is set to execute game round effects (preview effects and reach effects). Details of the game round effect execution process will be described later. After step S63702 is executed, the game round effect execution process is terminated.

<Game performance setting process>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect process (FIG. 283: S63701).

Figure 284 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation setting process. In step S63801, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S63801 that a variation command and a type command have not been received (S63801: NO), this game round presentation setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63801 that a variation command and a type command have been received (S63801: YES), the process proceeds to step S63802.

In step S63802, the currently received fluctuation command is read, and information regarding the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether a reach has occurred, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. The read information is then stored in a register in the sound/light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step S63803.

In step S63803, the effect pattern setting process is executed. The effect pattern setting process determines and sets the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round (the content and timing of the preview effect and reach effect) based on the effect pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S63803, proceed to step S63804.

In step S63804, a process for setting the stop symbols is executed. In the process for setting the stop symbols, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is formed on the active line L of the symbol display device 41 is set as the information for the current stop symbols. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the same symbol combination, and a combination of the same even symbols may also be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for combinations of the same odd symbols and combinations of the same even symbols. However, the former may have a higher selection rate than the latter, or the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Additionally, the "7" symbol combination will only be selected in the case of a 16R special jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery for this game is a 16R regular jackpot or an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even symbols will be selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for this game is a miss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, the information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of identical symbols does not occur on the active line L, but a reach symbol combination occurs on the active line L, is determined as the information on the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, the information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of identical symbols does not occur on the active line L, but a reach symbol combination does not occur on the active line L, is set as the information on the current stop symbol. After executing step S63804, proceed to step S63805.

In step S63805, processing is executed to set the variable display pattern for the current game round. In this processing, information on the variable time for the current game round is identified from the content of the currently received variable command, and a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of this variable time information and the information on the stopped symbols set in step S63804 above is selected. When selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced. Then, proceed to step S63806.

In step S63806, the information on the presentation pattern, stop symbols, and variable display pattern set for this game round is set in the presentation command. Then, proceed to step S63807, where the presentation command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing to display the presentation content corresponding to the received presentation command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S63807, proceed to step S63808, where update processing at the start of variation is executed. The update processing at the start of variation is processing to update the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step S63808, the presentation setting processing for this game round is terminated.

<Effect pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 284: S63803).

Figure 285 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step S63901, the effect pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound/light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S63902.

In step S63902, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (jackpot lottery) for the current round of play is a jackpot win. If it is determined in step S63902 that the hit/miss determination result is a jackpot win (S63902: YES), the process proceeds to step S63903, where the jackpot effect pattern table is referenced and an effect pattern corresponding to the variable time and effect pattern random number for the current round of play is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step S63907, where the selected effect pattern is set as the effect pattern to be executed for the current round of play.

If, in step S63902, it is determined that the result of the hit/miss determination for the current round of play is not a jackpot win (S63902: NO), the process proceeds to step S63904, where it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination for the current round of play is a reach occurrence. If, in step S63904, it is determined that the result of the hit/miss determination for the current round of play is a reach occurrence (S63904: YES), the process proceeds to step S63905, where the reach effect pattern table is referenced and an effect pattern corresponding to the variable time and effect pattern random number for the current round of play is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step S63907, where the selected effect pattern is set as the effect pattern to be executed for the current round of play.

If step S63904 determines that the result of the win/loss determination for the current round of play is not a reach occurrence (S63904: NO), proceed to step S63906, refer to the loss effect pattern table, and select an effect pattern that corresponds to the variable time and effect pattern random number for the current round of play. Then, proceed to step S63907, and set the selected effect pattern as the effect pattern to be executed for the current round of play. After executing step S63907, this effect pattern setting process ends.

<Processing for executing game performance>
Next, the game round performance execution process will be described. The game round performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round performance process (FIG. 283: S63702).

Figure 286 is a flowchart showing the game round effect execution processing. In step S64001, it is determined whether or not a presentation pattern set in the above-mentioned presentation pattern setting processing (Figure 285) exists. If it is determined in step S64001 that a set presentation pattern does not exist (S64001: NO), the game round effect execution processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64001 that a set presentation pattern exists (S64001: YES), the processing proceeds to step S64002.

In step S64002, the set presentation pattern is referenced, and then the process proceeds to step S64003, where it is determined whether it is time to start a game round presentation (preview presentation, reach presentation). As mentioned above, the presentation pattern stores the content and timing of the presentation to be executed in that game round.

If it is determined in step S64003 that it is not the timing to start a game round effect (preview effect, reach effect) (S64003: NO), the process proceeds to step S64012, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64003 that it is the timing to start a game round effect (preview effect, reach effect) (S64003: YES), the process proceeds to step S64004, where it is determined whether it is the timing to start a preview effect.

If it is determined in step S64004 that it is time to start the preview effect (S64004: YES), the process proceeds to step S64005, where a video display start command corresponding to the content of the preview effect set in the effect pattern is sent to the display control device 100. Then, the process proceeds to step S64006, where light emission control processing for the various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the preview effect set in the effect pattern is started. Then, the process proceeds to step S64007, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing audio data corresponding to the content of the preview effect set in the effect pattern on audio channel 2. Then, the process for executing this game round effect is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64004 that it is not the timing to start the preview effect (S64004: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the reach effect, the process proceeds to step S64008, where the BGM mute start flag is turned ON. In this manner, in this embodiment, audio channel 1 is not set to mute while the preview effect is being executed, but audio channel 1 is set to mute while the reach effect is being executed. After executing step S64008, the process proceeds to step S64009, where a video display start command corresponding to the content of the reach effect set in the effect pattern is sent to the display control device 100. Then, the process proceeds to step S64010, where light emission control processing of the various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the reach effect set in the effect pattern is started. Then, the process proceeds to step S64011, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to start playing audio data on audio channel 2 corresponding to the content of the reach effect set in the effect pattern. Then, the process for executing this game round effect ends.

As described above, if it is determined in step S64003 that it is not the time to start a game turn effect (preview effect, reach effect) (S64003: NO), the process proceeds to step S64012. In step S64012, it is determined whether it is the time to end the reach effect. If it is determined in step S64012 that it is the time to end the reach effect (S64012: YES), the process proceeds to step S64013, where the BGM mute end flag is turned ON. This cancels the mute setting for audio channel 1 at the end of the reach effect. After step S64013 is executed, the process for executing this game turn effect is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64012 that it is not the time to end the reach effect (S64012: NO), the process for executing this game turn effect is terminated without executing the process of step S64013.

<Open/close execution mode performance processing>
Next, the process for effecting the opening and closing execution mode will be described. The process for effecting the opening and closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 277: S63104).

Figure 287 is a flowchart showing the processing for the opening and closing execution mode performance. In step S64101, it is determined whether an opening command has been received. If it is determined in step S64101 that an opening command has been received (S64101: YES), the processing proceeds to step S64102, where playback of the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 is stopped. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S64103, where a video display start command corresponding to the opening performance is sent to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the video display start command corresponding to the opening performance, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to start displaying the video corresponding to the opening performance. After executing step S64103, the processing proceeds to step S64104, where light emission control processing of the various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the opening performance is started. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S64105, where playback of audio data corresponding to the content of the opening performance is started by the sound output LSI 97 on audio channel 2. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S64106. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64101 that an opening command has not been received (S64101: NO), the processing proceeds to step S64106 without executing the processing from step S64102 to step S64105 described above.

In step S64106, it is determined whether an open start command has been received. If it is determined in step S64106 that an open start command has been received (S64106: YES), the process proceeds to step S64107, where a video display start command corresponding to the round effect is sent to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the video display start command corresponding to the round effect, the display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to start displaying the video corresponding to the round effect. After executing step S64107, the process proceeds to step S64108, where light emission control processing of the various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the round effect is started. Then, the process proceeds to step S64109, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing audio data corresponding to the content of the round effect on audio channel 2. Then, the process proceeds to step S64110. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64106 that an open start command has not been received (S64106: NO), the process proceeds to step S64110 without executing the processing of steps S64107 to S64109 described above.

In step S64110, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S64110 that an ending command has been received (S64110: YES), the process proceeds to step S64111, where a video display start command corresponding to the ending performance is sent to the display control device 100. When the display control device 100 receives the video display start command corresponding to the ending performance, it causes the pattern display device 41 to start displaying the video corresponding to the ending performance. After executing step S64111, the process proceeds to step S64112, where it starts light emission control processing for the various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the ending performance. Then, it proceeds to step S64113, where it causes the sound output LSI 97 to start playing audio data corresponding to the content of the ending performance on audio channel 2. Then, the process for this opening/closing execution mode performance ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64110 that an ending command has not been received (S64110: NO), the processing for this opening/closing execution mode presentation is terminated without executing the processing of steps S64111 to S64113 described above.

<Processing for waiting customers>
Next, the customer waiting process will be described. The customer waiting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 277: S63105).

Figure 288 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting process. In step S64201, it is determined whether a customer waiting command has been received. As described above, the customer waiting command is a command sent from the main control unit 60 when no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time the symbol change (play round) has ended, and when no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time the opening/closing execution mode has ended. If it is determined in step S64201 that a customer waiting command has been received (S64201: YES), the process proceeds to step S64202, where the customer waiting flag is set to ON. The customer waiting flag is a flag used to determine whether a period of two minutes without symbol change (play round) occurring when not in the opening/closing execution mode continues. The flag is set to ON when the customer waiting command described above is received, and is set to OFF when a change command and a type command are received, as described below. After executing step S64202, the process proceeds to step S64203. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64201 that a customer waiting command has not been received (S64201: NO), the process of step S64202 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S64203.

In step S64203, it is determined whether the waiting for customers flag is ON. If it is determined in step S64203 that the waiting for customers flag is ON (S64203: YES), the process proceeds to step S64204, where it is determined whether two minutes have passed since the waiting for customers flag was turned ON. If it is determined in step S64204 that two minutes have passed since the waiting for customers flag was turned ON (S64204: YES), the process proceeds to step S64205.

In step S64205, the waiting customer flag is turned OFF. Then, proceeding to step S64206, the BGM mute start flag is turned ON. Then, proceeding to step S64207, a demo video display start command is sent to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the demo video display start command, the display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to begin displaying the demo video. Then, proceeding to step S64208, the demo video display in progress flag is turned ON. The demo video display in progress flag is a flag for determining whether or not a demo video is being displayed. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment sets audio channel 1 to mute and begins displaying the demo video when a period of two minutes continues in which no symbol fluctuations (plays) are being performed while not in the open/close execution mode. After executing step S64208, proceed to step S64209.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64203 that the waiting for customers flag is not ON (S64203: NO), and if it is determined in step S64204 that two minutes have not passed since the waiting for customers flag was turned ON (S64204: NO), the process proceeds to step S64209 without executing the processing of steps S64205 to S64208 described above.

In step S64209, it is determined whether a fluctuation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S64209 that a fluctuation command and a type command have not been received (S64209: NO), the customer waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64209 that a fluctuation command and a type command have been received (S64209: YES), the process proceeds to step S64210, where it is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S64210 that the waiting for customers flag is ON (S64210: YES), the process proceeds to step S64211, where the waiting for customers flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S64212. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64210 that the waiting for customers flag is not ON (S64210: NO), the process proceeds to step S64212 without executing the processing of step S64211.

In step S64212, it is determined whether the demo video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S64212 that the demo video display flag is ON (S64212: YES), the process proceeds to step S64213, where a demo video display end command is sent to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the demo video display end command, the display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to end the display of the demo video. Then, the process proceeds to step S64214, where the demo video display flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S64215, where the BGM mute end flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S64216, where the cue flag is turned ON, and the customer waiting process is terminated. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a pattern change (a play turn) begins while the demo video is being displayed, the display of the demo video is terminated, the BGM mute end flag is turned ON, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, by turning on the cue flag, playback will begin from the beginning (first introductory audio data) of the BGM song set for playback on audio channel 1.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64212 that the demo video display flag is not ON (S64212: NO), the processing for waiting for the actual customer is terminated without executing the processing of steps S64213 to S64216 described above.

By executing the customer waiting process of Figure 288 described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment mutes audio channel 1 by turning on the BGM mute start flag when a period of two minutes continues in which no symbol changes (game rounds) are being executed while not in the open/close execution mode, and begins displaying a demo video. Then, if a symbol change (game round) begins while the demo video is being displayed, the display of the demo video ends, and the BGM mute end flag is turned on to cancel the mute setting on audio channel 1. Then, by turning on the cue flag, playback begins on audio channel 1 from the beginning (first introductory audio data) of the BGM song set to be played.

However, the processing mode for customer waiting is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 288, and other modes can also be adopted as modified examples.

For example, as a modified example, when a period of one minute continues in which no symbol changes (game turns) are being performed while not in the opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 mutes audio channel 1 by turning on the BGM mute start flag. However, the demo video display does not begin. Then, when one minute has passed since audio channel 1 was muted while no symbol changes (game turns) have begun while not in the opening/closing execution mode, the demo video display may begin. That is, after a period of one minute continues in which no symbol changes (game turns) are being performed while not in the opening/closing execution mode, the demo video display does not begin, but audio channel 1 remains muted for one minute. In this configuration, if a symbol change (game turn) begins during the period from when audio channel 1 is muted to when the demo video display begins, the cue flag is not turned on. Instead, the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 belongs is started, and the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled, just as when the reach effect ends. The reason for this is that although the symbols have not started changing for more than one minute, it is highly likely that the same player is continuing to play on the pachinko machine. On the other hand, if the symbols start changing (a play round) while the demo video is being displayed, the demo video display may be terminated and the cue flag may be turned ON, thereby starting playback from the beginning of the BGM music set to be played on audio channel 1 (first introductory audio data), and the mute setting on audio channel 1 may be canceled. The reason for this is that the symbols have not started changing for more than two minutes, and it is highly likely that a new player has started playing on the pachinko machine.

In this way, in the above-described variant, the playback start position of the BGM music at the time the mute setting is released is determined depending on the length of time that audio channel 1 has been set to mute. In other words, just as when the reach effect ends, the configuration is such that it determines whether to release the mute setting on audio channel 1 by starting playback of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 belongs, or to release the mute setting on audio channel 1 by starting playback from the beginning (first introductory audio data) of the BGM music set to be played on audio channel 1, depending on the length of time that audio channel 1 has been set to mute.

In another variant, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the open/close execution mode and a period of one minute continues in which no symbol changes (game turns) are being executed, the pachinko machine 10 executes a process to fade out the volume of audio channel 1 over five seconds. After the five-second fade-out period has elapsed, the BGM mute start flag is turned ON to set audio channel 1 to mute. However, the display of the demo video does not begin. The demo video may also be configured to begin displaying when one minute has elapsed since audio channel 1 was set to mute while symbol changes (game turns) have not yet started. In this configuration, if a symbol change (game turn) begins during the five-second fade-out period, the volume of audio channel 1 is restored to the volume before the fade-out process began. Furthermore, if the change in the symbols (a game turn) starts within 30 seconds after audio channel 1 is set to mute, the cue flag is not set to ON, and, similar to when the reach effect ends, playback of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 belongs is started, and the mute setting of audio channel 1 is cancelled. On the other hand, if the change in the symbols (a game turn) starts 30 seconds after audio channel 1 is set to mute (including the period during which the demo video is being displayed), the display of the demo video may be terminated if a demo video is being displayed, and the cue flag may be set to ON to start playback from the beginning (first introductory audio data) of the BGM music set to be played on audio channel 1, and the mute setting of audio channel 1 may be cancelled. In other words, the cueing process that starts playback from the beginning of the BGM music (first introductory audio data) may be configured to be executed even if the symbol change (game turn) begins before the demo video starts to be displayed during the period when audio channel 1 is set to mute.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include main processing, which is executed repeatedly from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90, and V interrupt processing, which is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected simultaneously, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 289 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step S64301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written to the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Other settings required for initialization are also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S64302.

In step S64302, interrupt permission is set. Once interrupt permission is set, the main processing executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, once interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 290 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S64401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described below, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 291 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and then instructs the VDP 105 to draw and display that image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated by the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed. As a result, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process for the image is completed, which prevents the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information currently being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are explained below.

In step S64501, command response processing is executed. In command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing (Figure 290) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, if a video display start command corresponding to a preview effect has been stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the video corresponding to the preview effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Also, if a video display start command corresponding to a reach effect has been stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the video corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Also, if a video display start command corresponding to an opening effect has been stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the video corresponding to the opening effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Also, if a video display start command corresponding to a round effect has been stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the video corresponding to the round effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Also, if a video display start command corresponding to an ending effect has been stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the video corresponding to the ending effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Additionally, if a demo video display start command has been stored, image drawing and display control will begin so that the demo video is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In addition, the command response processing (S64501) analyzes all commands stored in the command memory area at that time, and executes processing corresponding to all of the analyzed commands. The reason for this will be explained. The command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command memory area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of a performance is set by the audio and light emission control device 90 and the performance begins, it is highly likely that various commands for specifying the content of that performance will be stored in the command memory area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance aspects, such as the preview performance and stop patterns, set by the audio and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that aspect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Details of the command response processing will be explained later.

In step S64502, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which was set by the command response process (S64501) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S64503.

In step S64503, task processing is executed. In task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as determined by the display setting process (S64502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up that image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S64504.

In step S64504, drawing processing is executed. In drawing processing, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters required to draw each character, as determined by task processing (S64503), are sent to VDP 105. VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and sends the image data to pattern display device 41 along with a drive signal to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S64505, where other processing is executed, and V interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, this embodiment can achieve the following effects:

In this embodiment, after the entire BGM piece set for playback has been played from its temporal beginning (in Figure 261, the temporal beginning of the first introductory audio data of BGM piece M1) to its temporal end (in Figure 261, the temporal end of the fourth main part audio data of BGM piece M1), playback begins not from the temporal beginning of the introductory part of the BGM piece, but from the temporal beginning of the main part corresponding to the main melody of the BGM piece (in Figure 261, the temporal beginning of the first main part audio data of BGM piece M1). This prevents the player, who has been excited by listening to the main part of the BGM piece, from feeling dampened by the introductory part being played again.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to start playback of BGM music from multiple predetermined temporal positions (the temporal beginning of the audio (part of the BGM music) recorded in each piece of audio data that makes up the BGM music). The temporal beginning of the audio (part of the BGM music) recorded in each piece of audio data that makes up a single BGM piece coincides with the break between bars in that BGM piece. Therefore, since playback can be started from the break between bars in that BGM piece, playback of that BGM piece can be started from a temporal position different from the temporal beginning of the entire BGM piece, without causing the player any discomfort.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the BGM music includes vocals, the temporal beginning position of the audio recorded in each piece of audio data that makes up a single BGM piece (a portion of that BGM piece) is set to a temporal position within the playback time of that BGM piece that does not include vocals. Therefore, even if playback of each piece of audio data that makes up a single BGM piece is started from its temporal beginning position, the vocals will not be played back halfway through. Therefore, it is possible to start playback of a BGM piece that includes vocals from a temporal position other than the beginning position of the entire BGM piece, without giving the player the feeling of incongruity or discomfort that comes from the vocals being played back halfway through.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if BGM music is being played when the mute state of audio channel 1 begins, playback of that BGM music continues even after the mute state begins. Then, when the mute state ends, playback of that BGM music begins from a predetermined temporal position (in FIG. 261, the temporal beginning position of the audio (part of the BGM music) recorded in each audio data that makes up BGM music M1) that is located immediately after the temporal playback position of the BGM music being played when the mute state ends (in FIG. 261, the temporal beginning position of the audio recorded in the second main audio data of BGM music M1).

Accordingly, according to this embodiment, BGM music continues to be played even while audio channel 1 is muted, and it is possible to start playback of the BGM music from a predetermined time position while minimizing the discrepancy between the player's imagination of the time position of the BGM music after the muted state ends, who expects the BGM music to continue playing even after the muted state ends, and the time position of the BGM music that actually begins playing upon the end of the muted state. As described above, in this embodiment, the multiple predetermined time positions of the BGM music are set so that starting playback of the BGM music from those time positions does not feel strange to the player, and therefore playback of the BGM music can be started when the muted state ends without causing any discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, while the sound corresponding to the reach effect is being played on sound channel 2, the background music being played on sound channel 1 is muted and not output from speaker 46, making the sound corresponding to the reach effect stand out even more and allowing the player to focus their attention on the sound corresponding to the reach effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the demo video returns from the display state and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled, playback begins from the first introductory audio data of the BGM music set to be played. The reason for this is explained below. When a demo video is displayed on a pachinko machine 10, it is often the case that no player is in front of the pachinko machine 10. Then, when a new player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 10, starts playing, and a game ball lands in the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34, starting the pattern change (a game turn), the display of the demo video ends, the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled, and playback begins from the beginning of the introductory portion of the BGM music. In other words, a new player sitting down in front of the pachinko machine 10 and starting play can listen to the BGM music from the beginning of the introductory portion without missing anything, further heightening the player's anticipation for the upcoming game.

F7. Modification of the sixth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, including the following modifications: Note that in the modifications described below, descriptions of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

F7-1. Variation 1:
292 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. The main difference from the sixth embodiment described above is that the method of setting the audio data to be played back when audio channel 1 is released from the mute setting is different. Fig. 292 shows the content of the audio data to be played back on audio channel 1, the state of the mute setting on audio channel 1, and the content of the audio data to be played back on audio channel 2.

The audio and light emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example sets one BGM piece from multiple BGM pieces to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data constituting the set BGM piece from the BGM piece data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98. The audio and light emission control device 90 also reads and plays audio data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed from the effect audio data storage area 98a of the audio data ROM 98 on audio channel 2. In other words, in this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and audio channel 2 is used for effect. In the example shown in FIG. 292, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets BGM piece M1 to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data constituting BGM piece M1 on audio channel 1.

As shown in FIG. 292, while the first introductory section audio data constituting the BGM music M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon reaching the timing to execute the preview performance Y1, begins playing audio data corresponding to the preview performance Y1 on audio channel 2. However, in this case, unlike when executing the reach performance R1 described below, audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the audio corresponding to the preview performance Y1 and the audio of the BGM music M1 are both synthesized and output from the speaker 46.

Then, while the second introductory section audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon encountering the timing to execute the reach effect R1, begins playing the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 on audio channel 2. In this case, unlike when the above-mentioned preview effect Y1 is executed, audio channel 1 is set to mute. Therefore, while the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 is being played, the BGM piece M1 is not output from the speaker 46.

After that, when playback of the second introductory section audio data finishes while audio channel 1 is muted, the audio and light emission control device 90 starts playback of the next audio data, the first main section audio data, and sets the first main section audio data that has started playback as the audio data for return. In other words, when playback of audio data finishes for the first time after audio channel 1 is muted and playback of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data that has finished playback belongs is started, the audio and light emission control device 90 of this modified example sets the audio data that has started playback as the audio data for return. After that, when playback of the audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2 finishes, the audio and light emission control device 90 starts playback of the first main section audio data, which is the audio data set for return, and cancels the muting setting of audio channel 1.

However, if no return audio data has been set when the mute setting on audio channel 1 is released (when playback of audio data corresponding to the reach effect on audio channel 2 has finished), i.e., if playback of new audio data has not begun during the period when audio channel 1 was mute and no return audio data has been set, then, as in the sixth embodiment described above, playback of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM song to which the audio data currently being played during the period when audio channel 1 was mute belongs is started. Furthermore, if there is no audio data following the audio data currently being played during the period when audio channel 1 was mute (when the fourth main-part audio data of BGM song M1 was being played), playback is started from the first audio data constituting the main part of the BGM song (the first main-part audio data of BGM song M1). However, as a variant, if there is no audio data following the audio data being played while audio channel 1 is muted (if the fourth main audio data of BGM piece M1 is being played), playback may start from the first audio data of that BGM piece (the first introductory audio data of BGM piece M1).

In this way, in this modified example, while audio data corresponding to the preview effect is being played, BGM music is also output from the speaker 46, but while audio data corresponding to the reach effect is being played, BGM music is not output from the speaker 46. This makes it possible to highlight the audio corresponding to the reach effect, and to draw the player's attention to the reach effect even more. Furthermore, according to this modified example, when the reach effect ends and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled, playback starts from the beginning of the audio data that makes up the BGM music. As described above, this modified example is configured so that the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable no matter which audio data that makes up the BGM music M1 is played first. Therefore, when the reach effect ends, the BGM music can be restored while reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player.

Furthermore, compared to the sixth embodiment described above, this modified example can reduce the amount of BGM audio data that is played back and inaudible to the player while audio channel 1 is muted. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 261 of the sixth embodiment described above, the player is unable to hear the audio recorded in the first main audio data and second main audio data of BGM music M1 played back while audio channel 1 is muted. However, in the example shown in FIG. 292 of this modified example, the player is able to hear the audio recorded in the first main audio data and second main audio data of BGM music M1 played back while audio channel 1 is muted after the muting setting is canceled. This can therefore reduce player dissatisfaction caused by not being able to hear part of the BGM music due to the muting of audio channel 1 resulting from the execution of a reach effect.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device of Modification 1>
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 of Modification 1. Below, processing that differs from the sixth embodiment will be described, and a description of processing that is the same as the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<BGM continuous playback processing>
A description will be given of the BGM continuous playback process in Modification 1. The BGM continuous playback process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for BGM processing (FIG. 278: S63203).

Figure 293 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous playback processing in variant 1. In step S64601, it is determined whether playback of audio data has ended on audio channel 1. If it is determined in step S64601 that playback of audio data has ended on audio channel 1 (S64601: YES), the process proceeds to step S64602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64601 that playback of audio data has not ended on audio channel 1 (S64601: NO), the BGM continuous playback processing ends.

In step S64602, it is determined whether or not there is audio data following the audio data whose playback has finished in the BGM piece. Specifically, for example, if BGM piece M1 is set as the playback target and playback of the second introductory section audio data of BGM piece M1 has finished, it is determined that next audio data exists, since the first main section audio data exists in BGM piece M1 as the audio data following the second introductory section audio data. On the other hand, if playback of the fourth main section audio data of BGM piece M1 has finished, it is determined that there is no next audio data following the fourth main section audio data in BGM piece M1, so it is determined that there is no next audio data.

If it is determined in step S64602 that the next audio data exists (S64602: YES), the process proceeds to step S64603, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to begin playing the next audio data in audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S64605, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64602 that the next audio data does not exist (S64602: NO), the process proceeds to step S64604, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to begin playing the first main-part audio data of the BGM music set for playback in audio channel 1. Therefore, in this modified example, after playback of the introduction of the BGM music has finished, the main part of the BGM music is repeatedly played. After executing step S64604, the process proceeds to step S64605.

In step S64605, it is determined whether the return setting flag is ON. As described below, the return setting flag is set ON when mute setting for audio channel 1 is initiated (see step S64704 in FIG. 294), and is set OFF when audio data (return audio data) that will begin playing when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is released is set. In other words, when the return setting flag is ON, it means that audio channel 1 is set to mute and that return audio data should be set. On the other hand, when the return setting flag is not ON, it means that audio channel 1 is not set to mute or that return audio data has already been set. In other words, when the return setting flag is not ON, it means that return audio data should not be set.

If it is determined in step S64605 that the return setting flag is not ON (S64605: NO), the system is not in a state where return audio data should be set, and so this BGM continuous playback process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64605 that the return setting flag is ON (S64605: YES), the system is in a state where return audio data should be set, and so the system proceeds to step S64606, where the audio data that began playback in step S64603 or step S64604 is set as return audio data. Thereafter, the system proceeds to step S64607, where the return setting flag is turned OFF, and this BGM continuous playback process is terminated.

<BGM noise reduction processing>
Next, a description will be given of the BGM silencing process in Modification 1. The BGM silencing process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 278: S63204).

Figure 294 is a flowchart showing the BGM muting process in Variation 1. In Step S64701, it is determined whether the BGM muting start flag is ON. As described above, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when the reach effect starts and when two minutes have passed without any pattern changes (plays) being executed during a period other than the open/close execution mode, and is turned OFF when audio channel 1 is set to muting. In other words, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when audio channel 1 is set to muting.

If it is determined in step S64701 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S64701: YES), the process proceeds to step S64702, where audio channel 1 is set to mute. Then, the process proceeds to step S64703, where the BGM mute start flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S64704, where the return setting flag described above is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S64705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64701 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S64701: NO), the process proceeds to step S64705 without executing the processes of steps S64702 to S64704.

In step S64705, it is determined whether the BGM muting end flag is ON. As described above, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the reach effect ends and when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 during the period in which the demo video is displayed (when the pattern begins to vary), and is turned OFF when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. In other words, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S64705 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S64705: NO), the BGM mute processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64705 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S64705: YES), the process proceeds to step S64706, where it is determined whether the cue flag is ON. As described above, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 while the demo video is being displayed (when the pattern variation begins), and is a flag that determines whether to start playing the BGM music from the beginning (first introductory audio data) when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S64706 that the cue flag is not ON (S64706: NO), proceed to step S64707, where it is determined whether the return setting flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S64707 that the return setting flag is not ON (S64707: NO), that is, if return audio data has already been set, the process proceeds to step S64708, where the sound output LSI 97 begins playing the audio data set for return on audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S64709, where the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, the process proceeds to step S64710, where the BGM mute end flag is set OFF, and the BGM mute processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64707 that the return setting flag is ON (S64707: YES), i.e., the audio data being played when the mute setting for audio channel 1 began did not end by the time the mute setting was released, and therefore steps S64605 through S64607 are not executed in the BGM continuous playback process (Fig. 293), and no return audio data is set, proceed to step S64711, where the return setting flag is set OFF. Then, proceed to step S64712, where it is determined whether audio data following the audio data being played on audio channel 1 exists in the BGM music. Specifically, for example, if BGM music M1 is set as the playback target and the second introduction audio data of BGM music M1 is currently being played, then the first main part audio data exists as the audio data following the second introduction audio data in BGM music M1, and it is determined that audio data following the audio data being played exists. On the other hand, if the fourth main part audio data of the BGM song M1 is currently being played, there is no audio data following the fourth main part audio data in the BGM song M1, so it is determined that there is no audio data following the audio data currently being played.

If it is determined in step S64712 that there is audio data following the audio data being played (S64712: YES), the process proceeds to step S64713, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the next audio data on audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S64709 described above, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, the process proceeds to step S64710, where the BGM mute end flag is turned OFF, and the BGM mute processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64712 that there is no audio data following the audio data being played (S64712: NO), the process proceeds to step S64714, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the first main-part audio data of the BGM music set as the playback target on audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S64709 described above, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, proceed to step S64710, turn the BGM mute end flag OFF, and end this BGM mute processing.

If it is determined in step S64706 that the cue flag is ON (S64706: YES), processing proceeds to step S64715, where the cue flag is set to OFF. Then, processing proceeds to step S64716, where the sound output LSI 97 begins playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set to be played on audio channel 1. In other words, in this modified example, when the demo video is resumed and the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled, playback begins from the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set to be played. Then, processing proceeds to step S64709 described above, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, processing proceeds to step S64710, where the BGM mute end flag is set to OFF, and this BGM mute processing ends.

As explained above, this modified example can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment described above.

In this modified example, if BGM music is being played when the mute state of audio channel 1 begins, playback of that BGM music continues even after the mute state begins. The system then stores a predetermined temporal position of the BGM music first played during the mute state (in Figure 292, this is the temporal beginning position of the audio (part of the BGM music) recorded in the first main audio data of BGM music M1), and begins playback of that BGM music from the stored temporal position when the mute state ends.

Accordingly, according to this modified example, the temporal position of the BGM music that begins playback upon the end of the mute state is the predetermined temporal position of the BGM music that was first played during the mute state, preventing the length of time that the BGM music is not output from the output means and therefore inaudible to the player from becoming too long between the start and end of the mute state. As a result, it becomes possible to start playback of the BGM music from a predetermined temporal position while preventing player frustration such as when a desired part of the BGM music ends and is no longer able to be heard during the mute state. Furthermore, in this modified example, the multiple predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music are set so that starting playback of the BGM music from those temporal positions does not feel strange to the player, so playback of the BGM music can begin when the mute state ends without causing the player any discomfort.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 292, even after the first main-part audio data of the BGM song M1 is set as the return audio data, playback of the first main-part audio data of the BGM song M1 continues, and then playback of the second main-part audio data of the BGM song M1 begins. However, after the return audio data is set, playback of audio data on audio channel 1 may be stopped until the mute setting is released and playback of the return audio data begins. This reduces the processing load on the sound output LSI 97.

F7-2. Variation 2:
295 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment. The main difference from the sixth embodiment described above is that the method of setting the audio data to be played back when audio channel 1 is released from the mute setting is different. Fig. 295 shows the content of the audio data to be played back on audio channel 1, the state of the mute setting on audio channel 1, and the content of the audio data to be played back on audio channel 2.

The audio and light emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example sets one BGM piece from multiple BGM pieces to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data constituting the set BGM piece from the BGM piece data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98. The audio and light emission control device 90 also reads and plays audio data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed from the effect audio data storage area 98a of the audio data ROM 98 on audio channel 2. In other words, in this modified example, similar to the sixth embodiment, audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and audio channel 2 is used for effect. In the example shown in FIG. 295, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets BGM piece M1 to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data constituting BGM piece M1 on audio channel 1.

As shown in FIG. 295, while the first introductory section audio data constituting the BGM music M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon reaching the timing to execute the preview performance Y1, begins playing audio data corresponding to the preview performance Y1 on audio channel 2. However, in this case, unlike when executing the reach performance R1 described below, audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the audio corresponding to the preview performance Y1 and the audio of the BGM music M1 are both synthesized and output from the speaker 46.

Then, while the second introductory section audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon encountering the timing to execute the reach effect R1, begins playing the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 on audio channel 2. In this case, unlike when the above-mentioned preview effect Y1 is executed, audio channel 1 is set to mute. Therefore, while the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 is being played, the BGM piece M1 is not output from the speaker 46.

Then, when playback of the audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2 ends, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 randomly selects one piece of audio data from the audio data group of the background music to which the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 belongs, starts playback of the selected audio data, and cancels the mute setting on channel 1. Figure 295 shows an example in which fourth main-part audio data is selected from the audio data group of the background music M1 to which the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 belongs, and playback of the fourth main-part audio data is started.

In this way, in this modified example, while audio data corresponding to the preview effect is being played, BGM music is also output from the speaker 46, but while audio data corresponding to the reach effect is being played, BGM music is not output from the speaker 46. This makes it possible to highlight the audio corresponding to the reach effect, and to draw the player's attention to the reach effect even more. Furthermore, according to this modified example, when the reach effect ends and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled, playback starts from the beginning of the audio data that makes up the BGM music. As described above, this modified example is configured so that the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable no matter which audio data that makes up the BGM music M1 is played first. Therefore, when the reach effect ends, the BGM music can be restored while reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the audio data for the BGM music that starts playing when the reach effect ends and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is released is selected at random, so when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is released, the flow of music for one BGM song may change significantly. In such cases, playback starts from the beginning of the audio data, refreshing the player's mood and allowing the player to start playing in a new mood after the reach effect ends, and the BGM music can be restored while reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player when the reach effect ends.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device of Modification 2>
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 of Modification 2. The following describes processing that differs from the sixth embodiment, and a description of processing that is the same as the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<BGM noise reduction processing>
A description will be given of the BGM silencing process in Modification 2. The BGM silencing process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 278: S63204).

Figure 296 is a flowchart showing the BGM muting process in Variation 2. In Step S64801, it is determined whether the BGM muting start flag is ON. As described above, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when the reach effect starts and when two minutes have passed without any pattern changes (plays) being executed during a period other than the open/close execution mode, and is turned OFF when audio channel 1 is set to muting. In other words, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when audio channel 1 is set to muting.

If it is determined in step S64801 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S64801: YES), the process proceeds to step S64802, where audio channel 1 is set to mute. Then, the process proceeds to step S64803, where the BGM mute start flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S64804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64801 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S64801: NO), the process proceeds to step S64804 without executing the processing of steps S64802 and S64803.

In step S64804, it is determined whether the BGM muting end flag is ON. As described above, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the reach effect ends and when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 during the period in which the demo video is displayed (when the pattern begins to vary), and is turned OFF when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. In other words, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S64804 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S64804: NO), the BGM mute processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64804 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S64804: YES), the process proceeds to step S64805, where it is determined whether the cue flag is ON. As described above, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 while the demo video is being displayed (when the pattern begins to vary), and is a flag that determines whether to start playing the BGM music from the beginning (first introductory audio data) when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S64805 that the cue flag is not ON (S64805: NO), the process proceeds to step S64806, where a BGM return random number is obtained from the BGM return random number counter. Then, the process proceeds to step S64807, where the BGM return table corresponding to the BGM song being played is referenced, and the sound output LSI 97 is caused to begin playing the audio data corresponding to the obtained BGM return random number. That is, one piece of audio data is randomly selected from the multiple pieces of audio data that make up the BGM song set to be played, and the sound output LSI 97 is caused to begin playing the selected audio data on audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S64808.

In step S64808, the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, proceed to step S64809, turn OFF the BGM mute end flag, and end this BGM mute processing.

If it is determined in step S64805 that the cue flag is ON (S64805: YES), processing proceeds to step S64810, where the cue flag is set to OFF. Then, processing proceeds to step S64811, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to start playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set to be played on audio channel 1. In other words, in this modified example, when the demo video is resumed and the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled, playback will begin from the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set to be played. Then, processing proceeds to step S64808 described above, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, processing proceeds to step S64809, where the BGM mute end flag is set to OFF, and this BGM mute processing ends.

As explained above, this modification can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment and the modification described above.

In this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, it is possible to start playback of BGM music from multiple predetermined temporal positions (the temporal beginning of the audio (part of the BGM music) recorded in each piece of audio data that makes up the BGM music). In this modified example, if BGM music is being played when the mute state of audio channel 1 begins, playback of the BGM music will begin at a temporal position selected at random from the multiple predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music (the temporal beginning of the fourth main audio data of the BGM music M1, which is set randomly in Figure 295).

Therefore, according to this modified example, the player cannot predict from which predetermined time position the BGM music that was being played at the start of the mute state on audio channel 1 will begin playing when the mute state ends. This provides a sense of surprise and surprise to the player, and makes it possible to start playing the BGM music from a predetermined time position while preventing the game from becoming monotonous. As described above, in this modified example as well, the multiple predetermined time positions for the BGM music are set so that starting playback of the BGM music from those time positions does not feel strange to the player, so playback of the BGM music can begin when the mute state ends without causing the player any discomfort.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 295, even after audio channel 1 is set to mute, playback of the second introduction audio data of BGM music M1 continues, and then playback of the first main audio data of BGM music M1 and the second main audio data of BGM music M1 begins. However, after audio channel 1 is set to mute, playback of audio data on audio channel 1 may be stopped until the mute setting is released and playback of randomly set audio data begins. This reduces the processing load on the sound output LSI 97.

F7-3. Variation 3:
297 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. The main difference from Modification 1 described above is that the method of setting the audio data to be played back when audio channel 1 is released from the mute setting is different. Fig. 297 shows the content of the audio data to be played back on audio channel 1, the state of the mute setting on audio channel 1, and the content of the audio data to be played back on audio channel 2.

The audio and light emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example sets one BGM piece from multiple BGM pieces to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data constituting the set BGM piece from the BGM piece data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98. The audio and light emission control device 90 also reads and plays audio data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed from the effect audio data storage area 98a of the audio data ROM 98 on audio channel 2. In other words, in this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment above, audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and audio channel 2 is used for effect. In the example shown in FIG. 297, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets BGM piece M1 to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data constituting BGM piece M1 on audio channel 1.

As shown in FIG. 297, while the first introductory section audio data constituting the BGM music M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon reaching the timing to execute the preview performance Y1, begins playing audio data corresponding to the preview performance Y1 on audio channel 2. However, in this case, unlike when executing the reach performance R1 described below, audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the audio corresponding to the preview performance Y1 and the audio of the BGM music M1 are both synthesized and output from the speaker 46.

Then, while the second introductory section audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon encountering the timing to execute the reach effect R1, begins playing the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 on audio channel 2. In this case, unlike when the above-mentioned preview effect Y1 is executed, audio channel 1 is set to mute. Therefore, while the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 is being played, the BGM piece M1 is not output from the speaker 46.

After that, when playback of the second introduction audio data ends while audio channel 1 is muted, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 starts playback of the next audio data, the first main-part audio data, and sets the first main-part audio data that has started to be played as the return audio data. After that, when playback of the first main-part audio data ends while audio channel 1 is muted, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 starts playback of the next audio data, the second main-part audio data, and resets the second main-part audio data that has started to be played as the return audio data. In other words, if return audio data has already been set, the audio data that has started to be played is overwritten and reset as the return audio data. In this way, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 of this modified example sets the audio data that has started to be played as the return audio data each time playback of audio data ends while audio channel 1 is muted and playback of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data that has finished playing belongs is started. After that, when playback of the audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2 ends, the audio and light emission control device 90 starts playing the second main audio data, which is the audio data set for return, and cancels the mute setting on audio channel 1.

However, if no audio data for restoration has been set when the mute setting on audio channel 1 is released (when playback of audio data corresponding to the reach effect on audio channel 2 has finished), i.e., if playback of new audio data has not begun during the period when audio channel 1 was muted and no audio data for restoration has been set, then, as in the sixth embodiment described above, playback of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM song to which the audio data currently being played during the period when audio channel 1 was muted belongs is started. Furthermore, if there is no audio data following the audio data currently being played during the period when audio channel 1 was muted (when the fourth main-part audio data of BGM song M1 was being played), playback is started from the first audio data constituting the main part of that BGM song (the first main-part audio data of BGM song M1).

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device of Modification 3>
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 of Modification 3. The following describes processing that differs from the sixth embodiment, and a description of processing that is the same as the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<BGM continuous playback processing>
A description will be given of the BGM continuous playback process in Modification 3. The BGM continuous playback process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for BGM processing (FIG. 278: S63203).

Figure 298 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous playback processing in variant example 3. In step S64901, it is determined whether playback of audio data has finished on audio channel 1. If it is determined in step S64901 that playback of audio data has finished on audio channel 1 (S64901: YES), the process proceeds to step S64902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64901 that playback of audio data has not finished on audio channel 1 (S64901: NO), the BGM continuous playback processing ends.

In step S64902, it is determined whether or not there is audio data following the audio data whose playback has finished in the BGM music piece. Specifically, for example, if BGM music piece M1 is set as the playback target and playback of the second introductory section audio data of BGM music piece M1 has finished, it is determined that next audio data exists, since the first main section audio data exists in BGM music piece M1 as the audio data following the second introductory section audio data. On the other hand, if playback of the fourth main section audio data of BGM music piece M1 has finished, it is determined that there is no next audio data following the fourth main section audio data in BGM music piece M1, so it is determined that there is no next audio data.

If it is determined in step S64902 that the next audio data exists (S64902: YES), the process proceeds to step S64903, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to begin playing the next audio data in audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S64905, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64902 that the next audio data does not exist (S64902: NO), the process proceeds to step S64904, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to begin playing the first main-part audio data of the BGM music set for playback in audio channel 1. Therefore, in this modified example, after playback of the introduction of the BGM music has finished, the main part of the BGM music is repeatedly played. After executing step S64904, the process proceeds to step S64905.

In step S64905, it is determined whether the return setting flag is ON. As will be described later, the return setting flag is a flag that is turned ON when muting of audio channel 1 begins (see step S65004 in FIG. 299) and is turned OFF when the muting of audio channel 1 is canceled. When the return setting flag is ON, it means that audio channel 1 is set to muting and that return audio data should be set.

If it is determined in step S64905 that the return setting flag is not ON (S64905: NO), the system is not in a state where return audio data should be set, and the BGM continuous playback process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64905 that the return setting flag is ON (S64905: YES), the system is in a state where return audio data should be set, and the system proceeds to step S64906, where the audio data that began playback in step S64903 or step S64904 is set as the return audio data. Note that in this modified example, the return setting flag is not turned OFF even when return audio data is set, and the return audio data is overwritten and reset each time playback of audio data on audio channel 1 ends. Thereafter, the system proceeds to step S64907, the return setting completed flag is turned ON, and the BGM continuous playback process is terminated.

<BGM noise reduction processing>
Next, a description will be given of the BGM silencing process in Modification 3. The BGM silencing process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 278: S63204).

Figure XF20 is a flowchart showing the BGM muting process in Variation 3. In Step S65001, it is determined whether the BGM muting start flag is ON. As described above, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when the reach effect starts and when two minutes have passed without any pattern changes (plays) being executed during a period other than the open/close execution mode, and is turned OFF when audio channel 1 is set to muting. In other words, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when audio channel 1 is set to muting.

If it is determined in step S65001 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S65001: YES), the process proceeds to step S65002, where audio channel 1 is set to mute. Then, the process proceeds to step S65003, where the BGM mute start flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S65004, where the return setting flag described above is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S65005. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65001 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S65001: NO), the process proceeds to step S65005 without executing the processes from step S65002 to step S65004.

In step S65005, it is determined whether the BGM muting end flag is ON. As described above, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the reach effect ends and when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 during the period in which the demo video is displayed (when the pattern begins to vary), and is turned OFF when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. In other words, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S65005 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S65005: NO), the BGM mute processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65005 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S65005: YES), the process proceeds to step S65006, where it is determined whether the cue flag is ON. As described above, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 while the demo video is being displayed (when the pattern begins to vary), and is a flag that determines whether to start playing the BGM music from the beginning (first introductory audio data) when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S65006 that the cue flag is not ON (S65006: NO), proceed to step S65007, where it is determined whether the return setting flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S65007 that the restoration setting completion flag is ON (S65007: YES), that is, if restoration audio data has already been set, the process proceeds to step S65008, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the audio data set for restoration on audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S65909, where the restoration setting completion flag and the restoration setting flag are set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S65010, where the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, the process proceeds to step S65011, where the BGM mute end flag is set to OFF, and this BGM mute processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65007 that the return setting flag is not ON (S65007: NO), i.e., the audio data being played when the mute setting for audio channel 1 was initiated did not end by the time the mute setting was released, and therefore steps S64905 through S64907 are not executed in the BGM continuous playback process (Fig. 298), and no return audio data is set, proceed to step S65012, where the return setting flag is set OFF. Then, proceed to step S65013, where it is determined whether audio data following the audio data being played on audio channel 1 exists in the BGM music. Specifically, for example, if BGM music M1 is set as the playback target and the second introduction audio data of BGM music M1 is currently being played, then first main-section audio data exists as the audio data following the second introduction audio data in BGM music M1, and it is determined that audio data following the audio data being played exists. On the other hand, if the fourth main part audio data of the BGM song M1 is currently being played, there is no audio data following the fourth main part audio data in the BGM song M1, so it is determined that there is no audio data following the audio data currently being played.

If it is determined in step S65013 that there is audio data following the audio data being played (S65013: YES), the process proceeds to step S65014, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the next audio data on audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S65010 described above, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, the process proceeds to step S65011, where the BGM mute end flag is turned OFF, and this BGM mute processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65013 that there is no audio data following the audio data being played (S65013: NO), the process proceeds to step S65015, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the first main-part audio data of the BGM song set to be played on audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S65010 described above, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, proceed to step S65011, turn the BGM mute end flag OFF, and end this BGM mute processing.

If it is determined in step S65006 that the cue flag is ON (S65006: YES), processing proceeds to step S65016, where the cue flag is set to OFF. Then, processing proceeds to step S65017, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to start playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set to be played on audio channel 1. In other words, in this modified example, when the demo video is resumed and the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled, playback will begin from the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set to be played. Then, processing proceeds to the above-mentioned step S65010, where the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, processing proceeds to step S65011, where the BGM mute end flag is set to OFF, and this BGM mute processing ends.

As explained above, this modification can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment and each modification described above.

According to this modified example, the temporal position of the BGM music piece that begins playback upon the end of the mute state is the predetermined temporal position of the BGM music piece that was last played during the mute state. This reduces the discrepancy between the player's imagination of the temporal position of the BGM music piece after the mute state ends, who expects that the BGM music piece will continue to play even during the mute state of audio channel 1, and the temporal position of the BGM music piece that actually begins playback upon the end of the mute state. As described above, in this embodiment, the predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music piece are set so that starting playback of the BGM music piece from those temporal positions does not feel strange to the player. Therefore, playback of the BGM music piece can begin upon the end of the mute state without causing any discomfort to the player.

F7-4. Variation 4:
Figure 300 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 4 of the sixth embodiment. The main difference from the sixth embodiment described above is that the timing for canceling the mute setting on audio channel 1 is after the playback of audio data corresponding to the reach effect has ended, and is synchronized with the timing at which playback of new audio data starts on audio channel 1. Figure 300 shows the content of the audio data played on audio channel 1, the state of the mute setting on audio channel 1, and the content of the audio data played on audio channel 2.

The audio and light emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example sets one BGM piece from multiple BGM pieces to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data that makes up the set BGM piece from the BGM piece data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98. The audio and light emission control device 90 also reads and plays audio data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed from the effect audio data storage area 98a of the audio data ROM 98 on audio channel 2. That is, in this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment, audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and audio channel 2 is used for effect. In the example shown in FIG. 300, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets BGM piece M1 to be played on audio channel 1, and sequentially reads and plays the audio data that makes up BGM piece M1 on audio channel 1.

As shown in Figure 300, while the first introductory section audio data constituting the BGM music M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon reaching the timing to execute the preview performance Y1, begins playing audio data corresponding to the preview performance Y1 on audio channel 2. However, in this case, unlike when executing the reach performance R1 described below, audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the audio corresponding to the preview performance Y1 and the audio of the BGM music M1 are both synthesized and output from the speaker 46.

Then, while the second introductory section audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 is being played on audio channel 1, the audio and light emission control device 90, upon encountering the timing to execute the reach effect R1, begins playing the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 on audio channel 2. In this case, unlike when the above-mentioned preview effect Y1 is executed, audio channel 1 is set to mute. Therefore, while the audio data corresponding to the reach effect R1 is being played, the BGM piece M1 is not output from the speaker 46.

Then, when playback of the audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2 ends, the audio and light emission control device 90 enters a mute setting release standby state, waiting to release the mute setting on audio channel 1. Then, when playback of the second main-part audio data ends during the mute setting release standby state, the audio and light emission control device 90 begins playback of the next audio data, the third main-part audio data, and releases the mute setting on audio channel 1 at the start of playback of that audio data.

In other words, when the audio data (audio data corresponding to reach effect R1) on audio channel 2 that triggered the start of the mute setting on audio channel 1 finishes playing, the audio and light emission control device 90 of this modified example enters a mute setting release standby state, waiting for the mute setting on audio channel 1 to be released, triggered by the end of playback of that audio data on audio channel 2. Then, when playback of audio data on audio channel 1 finishes during the mute setting release standby state, the audio and light emission control device 90 starts playing the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data that has finished playing belongs, and releases the mute setting on audio channel 1 at the start of playback of that audio data.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device of Modification 4>
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 of Modification 4. Below, processing that differs from the sixth embodiment will be described, and a description of processing that is the same as the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<BGM continuous playback processing>
A description will be given of the BGM continuous playback process in Modification 4. The BGM continuous playback process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for BGM processing (FIG. 278: S63203).

Figure XF21 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous playback process in variant 4. In step S65101, it is determined whether playback of audio data has finished on audio channel 1. If it is determined in step S65101 that playback of audio data on audio channel 1 has finished (S65101: YES), the process proceeds to step S65102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65101 that playback of audio data on audio channel 1 has not finished (S65101: NO), the BGM continuous playback process ends.

In step S65102, it is determined whether or not there is audio data following the audio data whose playback has finished. Specifically, for example, if BGM music M1 is set as the playback target and playback of the second introductory section audio data of BGM music M1 has finished, it is determined that next audio data exists, since the first main section audio data exists in BGM music M1 as the audio data following the second introductory section audio data. On the other hand, if playback of the fourth main section audio data of BGM music M1 has finished, it is determined that there is no next audio data following the fourth main section audio data in BGM music M1, so it is determined that there is no next audio data.

If it is determined in step S65102 that the next audio data exists (S65102: YES), the process proceeds to step S65103, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to begin playing the next audio data in audio channel 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S65105, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65102 that the next audio data does not exist (S65102: NO), the process proceeds to step S65104, where the sound output LSI 97 is caused to begin playing the first main-part audio data of the BGM music set for playback in audio channel 1. Therefore, in this modified example, after playback of the introduction of the BGM music has finished, the main part of the BGM music is repeatedly played. After executing step S65104, the process proceeds to step S65105.

In step S65105, it is determined whether the BGM mute standby flag is ON. As will be described later, the BGM mute standby flag is a flag that is turned ON when the BGM mute end flag is turned ON (see step S65206 in FIG. 302), and is a flag that indicates that the above-mentioned mute setting release standby state is in effect.

If it is determined in step S65105 that the BGM mute standby flag is not ON (S65105: NO), the system is not in a state waiting to cancel the mute setting, and the BGM continuous playback process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65105 that the BGM mute standby flag is ON (S65105: YES), the system is in a state waiting to cancel the mute setting, and the process proceeds to step S65106, where the mute setting for audio channel 1 is cancelled. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S65107, where the BGM mute standby flag is set OFF, and the BGM continuous playback process is terminated.

<BGM noise reduction processing>
A description will be given of the BGM silencing process in Modification 4. The BGM silencing process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 278: S63204).

Figure 302 is a flowchart showing the BGM muting process in Variation 4. In Step S65201, it is determined whether the BGM muting start flag is ON. As described above, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when the reach effect starts and when two minutes have passed without any symbol fluctuations (plays) being performed during a period other than the open/close execution mode, and is turned OFF when audio channel 1 is set to muting. In other words, the BGM muting start flag is turned ON when audio channel 1 is set to muting.

If it is determined in step S65201 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S65201: YES), the process proceeds to step S65202, where audio channel 1 is set to mute. Then, the process proceeds to step S65203, where the BGM mute start flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S65204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65201 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S65201: NO), the process proceeds to step S65204 without executing the processing of steps S65202 and S65203.

In step S65204, it is determined whether the BGM muting end flag is ON. As described above, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the reach effect ends and when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 during the period in which the demo video is displayed (when the pattern begins to vary), and is turned OFF when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. In other words, the BGM muting end flag is turned ON when the muting setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S65204 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S65204: NO), the BGM mute processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65204 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S65204: YES), the process proceeds to step S65205, where it is determined whether the cue flag is ON. As described above, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 while the demo video is being displayed (when the pattern begins to vary), and is a flag that determines whether to start playing the BGM music from the beginning (first introductory audio data) when the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled.

If it is determined in step S65205 that the cue flag is not ON (S65205: NO), proceed to step S65206, where the BGM mute standby flag is set to ON. Then, proceed to step S65207, where the BGM mute end flag is set to OFF. Then, this BGM mute processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65205 that the cue flag is ON (S65205: YES), proceed to step S65208, where the cue flag is set to OFF. Then, proceed to step S65209, where the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set as the playback target on audio channel 1. In other words, in this modified example, when the demo video is resumed and the mute setting on audio channel 1 is canceled, playback will start from the first introduction audio data of the BGM music set as the playback target. Then, proceed to step S65210, where the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. Then, proceed to step S65207 described above, where the BGM mute end flag is turned OFF, and this BGM mute processing ends.

As explained above, this modification can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment and each modification described above.

According to this modified example, while audio channel 1 is in a muted state, the muted state of audio channel 1 is ended when the playback position of the BGM music reaches one of multiple predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music (the temporal beginning positions of the audio (part of the BGM music) recorded in each audio data constituting the BGM music) (in Figure 300, the temporal beginning position of the audio recorded in the third main part audio data of BGM music M1). In other words, when the muted state of audio channel 1 ends, output of the BGM music begins from a predetermined temporal position of the BGM music. Therefore, the muted state of the BGM music can be ended and output of the BGM music can begin without causing any discomfort to the player. Furthermore, according to this modified example, it is possible to start outputting the BGM music from a predetermined time position in the BGM music simply by ending the muted state of the BGM music, without controlling the time position at which playback of the BGM music starts when the muted state of the BGM music ends.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, while audio channel 1 is in a muted state, the muted state of audio channel 1 ends when the playback position of the BGM music reaches the nearest predetermined temporal position of the BGM music after the end of playback of the audio corresponding to the reach effect (in Figure 300, the temporal beginning position of the audio recorded in the third main audio data of BGM music M1). Therefore, according to this modified example, while audio corresponding to the reach effect on audio channel 1 is being played, the BGM music is in a muted state where it is not output from speaker 46, making the audio corresponding to the reach effect stand out even more and allowing the player to focus their attention on the audio corresponding to the reach effect.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, depending on the playback position of the BGM music at the timing when playback of the audio corresponding to the reach effect ends, it may take some time for that playback position to reach a predetermined time position in the BGM music. In other words, a period in which neither the audio corresponding to the reach effect nor the BGM music is being output can be inserted between the timing when playback of the audio corresponding to the reach effect ends and the timing when the muted state of the BGM music ends. Here, if two sounds are played back to back without a silent period in between, it may be difficult to accurately hear the beginning of the later of the two sounds. Therefore, according to this modified example, a period can be inserted between the end of playback of the sound corresponding to the reach effect and the end of the muted state of the BGM music during which neither the sound corresponding to the reach effect nor the BGM music is output from speaker 46. This allows the player to accurately hear the part immediately after the muted state of the BGM music ends (the part where the output of the BGM music begins), and it becomes possible to direct the player's attention to the BGM music after playback of the sound corresponding to the reach effect has ended.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, since playback of the BGM music continues even after the mute state of audio channel 1 begins, output of the BGM music resumes from the same time position as if the BGM music had continued to be output from the start to the end of playback of the audio corresponding to the reach effect. Therefore, this does not cause discomfort to players who have imagined that the BGM music would continue to be played from the start to the end of playback of the audio corresponding to the reach effect. In other words, according to this modified example, output of the BGM music can be resumed after playback of the audio corresponding to the reach effect has ended, without causing discomfort to the player.

However, in this variant, a period in which neither the audio corresponding to the reach effect nor the BGM music is being output can be inserted between the timing at which the playback of the audio corresponding to the reach effect ends and the timing at which the muted state of the BGM music ends, but the length of this period will vary depending on the playback position of the BGM music at the timing at which the playback of the audio corresponding to the reach effect ends. Therefore, a configuration that allows the length of the period in which neither the audio corresponding to the reach effect nor the BGM music is being output to be a constant length will be explained in variant 5 below.

F7-5. Variation 5:
261, 292, 295, and 297, the sixth embodiment and modified examples 1 to 3 are configured to cancel the mute setting on audio channel 1 at the timing of the end of playback of audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2, but instead, the mute setting on audio channel 1 may be configured to cancel at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the timing of the end of playback of audio data corresponding to reach effect on audio channel 2. In other words, a predetermined silent period (for example, 1 second) occurs between the end of playback of audio data corresponding to reach effect and the start (restart) of playback of BGM music.

Specifically, when this modified example is applied to the sixth embodiment (Fig. 261) described above, the audio and light emission control device 90 is configured to start playing the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data currently being played on audio channel 1 belongs when a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the end of playback of the audio data corresponding to the reach effect on audio channel 2, and to cancel the mute setting on audio channel 1.

Furthermore, when this modified example is applied to the above-mentioned modified example 1 (Figure 292), the audio and light emission control device 90 will be configured to start playing audio data set for return when a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the end of playback of audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2, and to cancel the mute setting on audio channel 1.

Furthermore, when this modified example is applied to the above-mentioned modified example 2 (Figure 295), the audio and light-emitting control device 90 is configured to randomly select one piece of audio data from the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being played on audio channel 1 belongs, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the end of playback of the audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2, start playback of the selected audio data, and cancel the mute setting on channel 1.

Furthermore, when this modified example is applied to the above-mentioned modified example 3 (Figure 297), the audio and light emission control device 90 will be configured to start playing audio data set for return when a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the end of playback of audio data corresponding to reach effect R1 on audio channel 2, and to cancel the mute setting on audio channel 1.

As explained above, this modification can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment and the modification described above.

According to this modified example, a predetermined silent period (e.g., one second) can be inserted between the end of playback of audio data corresponding to the reach effect and the start (resumption) of playback of the background music. Here, if two sounds are played back to back without a silent period in between, it may be difficult to accurately hear the start of the later of the two sounds. Therefore, according to this modified example, a predetermined silent period (e.g., one second) can be inserted between the end of playback of audio data corresponding to the reach effect and the start (resumption) of playback of the background music, allowing the player to accurately hear the start of the background music and focusing the player's attention on the background music.

The control of this modified example can be achieved, for example, by determining in step S64012 of FIG. 286 whether one second has passed since the end of the reach effect, and if it is determined that one second has passed since the end of the reach effect, proceeding to step S64013 and executing processing to turn on the BGM mute end flag.

F7-6. Variation 6:
In the sixth embodiment and variants 1 to 5 described above, as shown in Fig. 260, a single BGM piece is divided into multiple audio data and recorded, and playback of the BGM piece can be started from multiple predetermined temporal positions by specifying any one of the audio data that make up the BGM piece. However, as variant 6, instead, a single BGM piece may be recorded as a single piece of audio data, multiple playback start positions may be set for the BGM piece recorded on the single audio data, and playback of the single audio data may be started by specifying one of the multiple playback start positions. An example in which multiple playback start positions are set for BGM piece M1 will be described below.

Figure 303 is an explanatory diagram that schematically shows the data structure of data stored in the audio data ROM in variant 6. Figure 303 shows an example in which the BGM piece M1 shown in Figure 260 is recorded as a single piece of audio data, the BGM piece M1 audio data. In this variant, the single BGM piece M1 audio data has playback start positions set at multiple predetermined time positions in the BGM piece M1.

In the example shown in Figure 303, the temporal beginning of the BGM piece M1 is set as the first introductory section playback start position, a position 16 seconds after the temporal beginning of the BGM piece M1 is set as the second introductory section playback start position, a position 32 seconds after the temporal beginning of the BGM piece M1 is set as the first main section playback start position, a position 48 seconds after the temporal beginning of the BGM piece M1 is set as the second main section playback start position, a position 64 seconds after the temporal beginning of the BGM piece M1 is set as the third main section playback start position, and a position 80 seconds after the temporal beginning of the BGM piece M1 is set as the fourth main section playback start position.

That is, the temporal beginning of the first introductory portion audio data of the BGM piece M1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the first introductory portion playback start position shown in FIG. 303, the temporal beginning of the second introductory portion audio data of the BGM piece M1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the second introductory portion playback start position shown in FIG. 303, the temporal beginning of the first main-part audio data of the BGM piece M1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the first main-part playback start position shown in FIG. 303, the temporal beginning of the second main-part audio data of the BGM piece M1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the second main-part playback start position shown in FIG. 303, the temporal beginning of the third main-part audio data of the BGM piece M1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the third main-part playback start position shown in FIG. 303, and the temporal beginning of the fourth main-part audio data of the BGM piece M1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the fourth main-part playback start position shown in FIG. 303.

Even in a configuration such as this sixth variation, in which one BGM piece is recorded as a single piece of audio data and multiple playback start positions are set for the BGM piece recorded on that single piece of audio data, it is possible to execute the same control as in the sixth embodiment and variations 1 to 5 described above, and to achieve the same effects.

For example, after playing the entire BGM piece set for playback from its temporal beginning (the start point of playback of the first introductory portion of the BGM piece M1 audio data) to its temporal end (the end point of the BGM piece M1 audio data), playback can be configured to start from the temporal beginning of the main portion of the BGM piece that corresponds to the main melody (the start point of playback of the first main portion of the BGM piece M1 audio data), rather than from the temporal beginning of the introductory portion of the BGM piece. This configuration, like the sixth embodiment, can prevent a player's mood, which has been excited by listening to the main portion of the BGM piece, from being dampened by the replay of the introductory portion.

Furthermore, for example, if BGM music is being played when the mute state of audio channel 1 begins, playback of the BGM music continues even after the mute state begins, and when the mute state ends, playback of the BGM music begins from one of the multiple playback start positions of the BGM music, which is located immediately after the temporal position of the BGM music being played when the mute state ends. This configuration, as with the sixth embodiment, enables BGM music to continue playing even during the mute state of audio channel 1, minimizing discrepancies between the temporal position of the BGM music after the mute state ends and the actual temporal position of the BGM music that began playing when the mute state ended. Furthermore, in this modified example, multiple playback start positions for BGM music are set so that starting playback of BGM music from those playback start positions does not feel strange to the player, so playback of the BGM music can begin when the mute state ends without causing the player any discomfort.

Furthermore, for example, if background music is being played when the mute state of audio channel 1 begins, playback of that background music continues even after the mute state begins. The playback start position of the background music first played during the mute state is stored, and playback of that background music begins from the stored playback start position upon the end of the mute state. With this configuration, as with Variation 1 above, the temporal position of the background music that begins playback upon the end of the mute state is the playback start position of the background music first played during the mute state. This prevents the length of time that the player is unable to hear the background music because it is not output from the output means between the start and end of the mute state from becoming too long. As a result, it becomes possible to start playback of the background music from a predetermined temporal position while preventing player frustration caused by the desired part of the background music ending during the mute state. Furthermore, in this modified example, multiple playback start positions for BGM music are set so that starting playback of BGM music from those playback start positions does not feel strange to the player, so playback of the BGM music can begin when the mute state ends without causing the player any discomfort.

Furthermore, for example, if BGM music was being played when the mute state of audio channel 1 began, the end of the mute state triggers playback of the BGM music from a playback start position selected at random from among the multiple playback start positions of the BGM music. With this configuration, as with Variation 2 above, the player cannot predict from which playback start position of the BGM music that was being played when the mute state of audio channel 1 began will start playback when the mute state ends. This provides a sense of surprise and surprise to the player, preventing the game from becoming monotonous, and making it possible to start playback of the BGM music from a predetermined time position. Furthermore, in this variant, the multiple playback start positions of the BGM music are set so that starting playback of the BGM music from these playback start positions does not feel strange to the player, so playback of the BGM music can begin when the mute state ends without causing the player any discomfort.

Note that if the configuration does not allow you to specify a playback start position for audio data and start playback from that playback start position (for example, if the audio data is in a data format that does not allow playback to start from an intermediate time position), as shown in the sixth embodiment and variations 1 to 6 above, by adopting a configuration in which a single BGM piece is divided into multiple pieces of audio data and recorded, it becomes possible to start playback of the BGM piece from multiple predetermined time positions.

F7-7. Variation 7:
In the sixth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when audio channel 1 is muted, a fade-out process may be executed to gradually decrease the volume and transition to a muted state. Furthermore, when the muting setting of audio channel 1 is cancelled, a fade-in process may be executed to gradually increase the volume and return it to a predetermined volume. This configuration can further reduce the sense of incongruity felt when the BGM music transitions to a muted state and when it returns from a muted state.

F7-8. Variation 8:
The configuration and control described in the sixth embodiment and each of the modified examples can be applied not only to a configuration for playing audio data constituting background music, but also to a configuration for playing various types of audio data. For example, the configuration and control described above can be applied to a configuration for playing audio data corresponding to round effects played during the opening and closing processing period in the opening and closing execution mode, audio data corresponding to RTC effects, etc. Furthermore, the audio data in audio channel 2 that initiates the mute setting of audio channel 1 is not limited to audio data corresponding to reach effects, and various types of audio data can be used. For example, various types of audio data can be used, such as audio data corresponding to preview effects, audio data corresponding to character lines and sound effects, and audio data constituting background music corresponding to specific game states.

F7-9. Variation 9:
In the sixth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration is such that playback of background music continues on audio channel 1 even when audio channel 1 is in a muted state. However, the configuration may be such that playback of background music does not continue while audio channel 1 is in a muted state, as long as the configuration is capable of executing processing that can identify the temporal playback position of the background music, assuming that playback of the background music continues even after audio channel 1 enters a muted state.

G. Seventh embodiment:
G1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 304 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a generally rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the gaming hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are disposed on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing when a winning lottery, a jackpot, or a reach occurs, etc., conducted by the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that is pressed by the player to stop the game ball from being launched by the game ball launching mechanism, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

In addition, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with a predetermined launch strength, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the operating handle 25 is rotated to the maximum. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows toward the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. In other words, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can perform a so-called "right hit." Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched toward the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is on. In other words, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26, thereby realizing the launch of a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is configured to be located on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 may also be located in another position. For example, the game ball launch button 26 may be located inside (on the periphery of) the operating handle 25, similar to the weight button 25b. This allows the player to operate the operating handle 25, weight button 25b, and game ball launch button 26 with just their right hand.

Figure 305 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a type determination gate 202, and a variable winning device 36. The gaming board 30 is also provided with a V winning mechanism 210. Furthermore, the gaming board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

General winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which game balls can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the bottom center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is held.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, and is located on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. The second starting hole 34 is also provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is the gate that triggers the execution of a lottery to open the electric device 34a. Specifically, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 uses this passage as an opportunity to execute an internal lottery (electric device release lottery). If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to the electric device release, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device release state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 has a first large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the first large winning opening 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state so that a gaming ball cannot enter the first large winning opening 36a. When a gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). If the winning lottery results in a big win or a small win, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that executes the opening and closing process of the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 and the second opening/closing door 213 provided in the V winning mechanism 210, which will be described later. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and then transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The type determination gate 202 is a ball entry port used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery during a specified round of play and the round of play ends, the open/close execution mode is initiated. In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the open/close execution mode is initiated, a presentation (right-hit suggestion presentation) is executed to guide the player to fire the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30. In accordance with the right-hit suggestion presentation, the player operates the operating handle 25 to fire the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the main control unit 60 executes a type determination process to determine the type of jackpot, triggered by the game ball's entry. The type of jackpot is then determined by this type determination process. The type determination process executed by the main control unit 60 and the jackpot types set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a static first pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second pattern. The second pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a static second pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first pending display unit 37c and a second pending display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 can be reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 can be reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps (hereinafter also referred to as round lamps) arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the first open/close door 36b or the second open/close door 213 remains open until one of the following conditions is met: the elapse of a predetermined maximum duration, or the entry of a predetermined maximum number of game balls into the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. When the open/close execution mode is initiated and a jackpot type is determined in the type determination process executed in response to a game ball entering the type determination gate 202, the round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds that correspond to the determined jackpot type, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends. In other words, even if the open/close execution mode is initiated, if no gaming ball has entered the type determination gate 202 after the start of the open/close execution mode, the type determination process will not be initiated, the jackpot type (including the number of rounds of play) will not be determined, and the number of rounds of play will not be displayed on the round display unit 39. If a gaming ball subsequently enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process will be initiated, the jackpot type (including the number of rounds of play) will be determined, and the number of rounds of play will be displayed on the round display unit 39.

The special drawing unit 37, the regular drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured as segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may also be configured as various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device equipped in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display based on a preview of the lottery results, etc. in accordance with this. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display based on this. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display based on a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, but also displays effects during the opening/closing execution mode, which is entered when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 306 is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns and display surface 41a on the pattern display device 41. Figure 306(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed LCD patterns on the pattern display device 41. The LCD patterns are images displayed on the pattern display device 41, and correspond to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b. When a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface 41a, and when a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in Figure 306(a), the pattern display device 41 displays variably the numbers 1 to 8 as LCD patterns. The variably displayed patterns may also be the numbers 1 to 8 with characters or other designs added.

Figure 306(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol column Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 306(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed in which each symbol column scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 306(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction periodically. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the symbols are displayed statically, if the result of the winning lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is displayed is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various other variations of the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change round ends, the static display is displayed, and the static display ends. It is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the results of a winning lottery for special information acquired based on a ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the results of a winning lottery for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, it causes the segment display in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to change for each play round, and then causes the segment display to change to a static display corresponding to the result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a pattern row as a first LCD pattern or a second LCD pattern for each play, and then statically displays the pattern row so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts to when the specified lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the specified lottery result is statically displayed.

As shown in Figure 306 (b), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2. The first pending display area Ds1 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending play times based on a ball entering the first starting port 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending play times based on a ball entering the second starting port 34. A pending play time is an unexecuted play time for which a variable display has not yet begun to notify the winning lottery results for special information obtained based on a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The number of pending play times that can be reserved based on a ball entering the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display a pending display (hereinafter also referred to as the first pending play time display) corresponding to four pending play times. Furthermore, the number of pending play times that can be reserved based on a ball entering the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending play times (hereinafter also referred to as second pending play time displays).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 306(b), the display surface 41a is equipped with a first synchronization display unit Sync1 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stationary display of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a of the special pattern unit 37, and a second synchronization display unit Sync2 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stationary display of the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display unit 37b of the special pattern unit 37. Specifically, when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a changing pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 flashes, and when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a stationary pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 lights up. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a changing pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 flashes, and when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a stationary pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 lights up.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first hold display area Ds1, the second hold display area Ds2, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2, but the display surface 41a may be configured not to display some or all of these displays.

Figure 307 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the V winning mechanism 210. As shown in Figure 307(a), the V winning mechanism 210 includes a crane 220, a flow path 211 that allows game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30 to flow to the crane 220, a second opening/closing door 213 that opens and closes the second large winning opening 212 so that game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30 can enter the flow path 211, a detection sensor 214 that detects the flow of game balls from the second large winning opening 212, an outlet 215 that communicates with the back side of the game area, a storage valve 216 that temporarily stores game balls that flow in from the second large winning opening 212 in a storage section 218 of the flow path 211, and a storage valve drive mechanism 217 that drives the storage valve 216. The crane 220 also has one V winning slot 222 and five non-V winning slots 224. The V winning slot 222 is a winning slot that will result in a jackpot if a gaming ball enters it. The non-V winning slots 224 do not result in a jackpot even if a gaming ball enters them, and instead eject the gaming ball from the gaming area.

Next, we will explain the operation of the V winning mechanism 210. If a specific type of big win or small win is won in the winning lottery during a game round, and the opening/closing execution mode is initiated after the game round ends, the opening conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are met, and the second opening/closing door 213 opens as shown in Figure 307 (a).

When the player operates the operating handle 25 to launch a gaming ball to the right side of the gaming board 30 and the gaming ball passes near the second opening/closing door 213 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, the gaming ball is guided by the open second opening/closing door 213 and flows from the second large winning opening 212 into the flow path 211, as shown in FIG. 307(b). The gaming ball that first flows into the flow path 211 after the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is stored in the storage section 218 by the closed storage valve 216. In this embodiment, the storage section 218 can store only one gaming ball. As a variant, a configuration in which multiple gaming balls can be stored in the storage section 218 may be adopted.

As shown in Figure 307 (c), when one game ball is stored in the storage section 218 and a game ball flows in from the second large winning opening 212, the game ball is prevented from flowing into the storage section 218 by the game ball already stored in the storage section 218, and flows in the direction of the discharge opening 215 in the flow path 211, and is discharged from the discharge opening 215 to the back side of the play area.

As shown in Figure 307(d), when the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are met, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Details of the closing conditions will be described later. Thereafter, as shown in Figure 307(e), the storage valve drive mechanism 217 drives the storage valve 216 in the opening direction, and the game balls stored in the storage section 218 flow in the direction of the crane 220 in the flow path 211. The game balls discharged from the flow path 211 then flow over the top surface of the crane 220 and then enter the V winning port 222 or the non-V winning port 224. As described above, if a game ball enters the V winning port 222, a jackpot is awarded, and if a game ball enters the non-V winning port 224, it is not a jackpot and is discharged from the game area.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time a gaming ball enters (flows into) the second large winning opening 212 of the V winning mechanism 210, 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71. The entry of a gaming ball into the second large winning opening 212 is detected by the detection sensor 214.

As mentioned above, if a modified configuration is adopted in which the storage section 218 is capable of storing multiple game balls, opening the storage valve 216 will allow multiple game balls to flow over the top surface of the crane 220, thereby increasing the probability that a game ball will enter the V entry port 222 and raising the player's expectations. In this case, even if two game balls enter the V entry port 222, only the game ball that first enters the V entry port 222 will be treated as a jackpot; the second game ball entering the V entry port 222 will not be treated as a jackpot and will be ejected to the back of the play area, just like a game ball entering the non-V entry port 224.

G2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 308 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is primarily composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio/light emitting control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs stored in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 70 and the power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control unit 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. In addition, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to various detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports and through gates, such as the general entry port 32, first start port 33, second start port 34, through gate 35, and variable entry device 36. Based on signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each entry port, and whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first entry port 33 and the second entry port 34.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are a first opening/closing door drive unit 36c that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34, a second opening/closing door drive unit 213b that opens and closes the second opening/closing door 213, a storage valve drive mechanism 217 that drives the storage valve 216, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 drives and controls the first opening/closing door drive unit 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b opens and closes, and drives and controls the second opening/closing door drive unit 213b so that the second opening/closing door 213 opens and closes. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a specific jackpot or small win, the MPU 62 drives and controls the storage valve drive mechanism 217 so that the storage valve 216 opens and closes. Furthermore, if the electric role release is selected as a result of the electric role release lottery, the MPU 62 drives and controls the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a opens. Furthermore, during each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, the MPU 62 controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a game ball has entered the general prize entry port 32, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. If a game ball has entered the second start port 34, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the control handle 25. As described above, the control handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When a player grips the control handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on. When the player rotates the control handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched onto the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio and light control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it references the command information storage area 63f in the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio and light control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting devices such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 100. The audio and light control device 90 is also connected to a performance operation button 24, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a specified timing, it controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects that operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect that will be executed while the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a static manner, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 309 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in winning lotteries, etc. The various counter information is used by the MPU 62 when performing winning lotteries, allocating jackpot types, setting the display on the main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for winning lotteries. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when allocating jackpot types. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination to determine whether or not a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to a miss.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also has a reserve information storage area 64b, a determination process execution area 64c, and a type determination process execution area 64i. The reserve information storage area 64b has a first reserve area Ra and a second reserve area Rb. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b.

The winning random number counter C1 will now be described in detail. As mentioned above, the winning random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one in sequence within the range of 0 to 1199, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, where it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot. The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, where it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The winning random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will result.

Next, we will explain the details of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the pending information storage area 64d when a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode, or when a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 222.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses these winning random number counter C1 values to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which is obtained when a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the opening/closing execution mode has started and is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i. The jackpot type (the number of rounds played) determined by the type determination process is displayed on the round display unit 39.

Next, we will explain the details of the reach random number counter C3. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. However, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 306(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed as varying symbols in symbol column Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained in detail. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 when determining the change time in the first and second pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the change time of the patterns on the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 begins to fluctuate. When determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e using the value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role opening counter C4, and the variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in this invention. Also, at least one of the values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, we will explain the hit/miss table. The hit/miss table is table data used to compare the hit random number counter C1 when a hit lottery is conducted based on the hit random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes for the hit lottery: a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode. When a hit lottery is conducted in the low-probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low-probability mode is referenced, and when a hit lottery is conducted in the high-probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high-probability mode is referenced. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores, as separate table data, a hit/miss table used to compare the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c when a gaming ball enters the second start hole 34. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 stores four win/loss tables in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63: a win/loss table for the first starting hole (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting hole (for high probability mode), a win/loss table for the second starting hole (for low probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting hole (for high probability mode).

Figure 310 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. As shown in the figure, the hit/miss table for the first starting port has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the five values from 5 to 9 are set as small hits (misses). Small hits (misses) will be discussed later. Values other than the ten values from 0 to 9 (10 to 1199) are normal misses.

Figure 311 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. As shown in the figure, the hit/miss table for the second starting port has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) will result in a small hit (miss).

Here, a small win (loss) is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to opening/closing execution mode, in which the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is opened or closed, but does not trigger a transition to support mode. In contrast, a normal loss is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to opening/closing execution mode, and does not trigger a transition to support mode either. In the following explanation, a small win (loss) will also be referred to simply as a "small win," and a normal loss will also be referred to simply as a "loss."

Next, the types of jackpots will be explained. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode
(2) The manner of opening and closing control of the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) The manner of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the first opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 game balls have entered the first opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the first opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have entered the first opening and closing door 36b.

The opening time limit for each opening of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 and the number of balls that can be opened per opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 or the V winning mechanism 210 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for each opening may be longer or the number of balls that can be opened per opening may be set higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that balls do not actually enter the variable winning device 36 or the V winning mechanism 210.

In this embodiment, if a winning lottery results in a jackpot and a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed in response to the jackpot, or if a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 222, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 312 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. Figure 312(a) shows the allocation table for the first starting gate (when a jackpot is won). This allocation table is referenced when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game played triggered by the ball entering the first starting gate.

Figure 312(b) shows the allocation table for a V entry triggered by a ball entering the first starting port. This allocation table is referenced when a small win occurs in a game session triggered by a ball entering the first starting port, and when the ball enters the V entry port 222 during the open/close execution mode triggered by the small win, resulting in a big win.

Figure 312(c) shows the allocation table for the second starting port (when a jackpot is won and when a V entry is triggered by a ball entering the second starting port). This allocation table is referenced when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game played in which a ball enters the second starting port, and when a small jackpot is won in a game played in which a ball enters the second starting port, and the jackpot is won when the ball enters the V entry port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting hole in Figure 312(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the types of jackpots that can be won in the winning lottery in a game played after a ball has entered the first starting hole are set to 5R Type 1 jackpot, 5R Type 2 jackpot, and 10R regular jackpot.

A 5R Type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is five, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of times that a Type 1 jackpot can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to 90. In other words, after 90 times of play in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

A 5R Type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is five, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of rounds that can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to five. In other words, after five rounds of play in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

A 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is 10, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0 to 99," "0 to 44" corresponds to a 5R Type 1 jackpot, "45 to 60" corresponds to a 5R Type 2 jackpot, and "61 to 99" corresponds to a 10R regular jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for V winnings triggered by a ball entering the first starting port in Figure 312 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a small win occurs in a game session triggered by a ball entering the first starting port, and the ball enters the V winning port 222 during the open/close execution mode triggered by the small win, resulting in a jackpot, the jackpot types are set to be a 5R Type 1 jackpot or a 10R normal jackpot.

The 5R Type 1 jackpot and 10R regular jackpot have already been explained in the allocation table for the first starting slot in Figure 312(a) above, so further explanation will be omitted.

In the distribution table for V wins triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0-99," "0-64" corresponds to a 5R Type 1 jackpot, and "65-99" corresponds to a 10R regular jackpot.

As shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in Figure 312 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types are set as 15R Type 1 jackpot, 4R Type 1 jackpot, and 4R Type 2 jackpot when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game played triggered by a ball entering the second starting port, and when a small jackpot is won in a game played triggered by a ball entering the second starting port and the jackpot is won by a ball entering the V winning port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small jackpot.

A 15R Type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which 15 rounds of play are executed during the opening and closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of times that a Type 1 jackpot can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to 90. In other words, after 90 rounds of play are executed in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

A 4R Type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is four, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of times that a Type 1 jackpot can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to 90. In other words, after 90 times of play in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

A 4R Type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is four, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of times that a Type 2 jackpot can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to five. In other words, after five rounds of play in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

In the allocation table for the second starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0 to 99," "0 to 49" corresponds to a 15R Type 1 jackpot, "50 to 57" corresponds to a 4R Type 1 jackpot, and "58 to 99" corresponds to a 4R Type 2 jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot differs depending on whether the jackpot is won in a lottery held in a game played triggered by a ball entering the first starting port, a small win in a game played triggered by a ball entering the first starting port and the jackpot is won when the ball enters the V winning port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small win, a jackpot is won in a lottery held in a game played triggered by a ball entering the second starting port, or a small win in a game played triggered by a ball entering the second starting port and the jackpot is won when the ball enters the V winning port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small win, and there is a clear difference in the advantages to the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the type determination process execution area 64i. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the values of the winning random number counter C1 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed in the first and second symbol display units 37a and 37b, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the round display unit 39. When determining the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed in the first and second symbol display units 37a and 37b, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released into the game area PA in the same manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery using the electric role release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role release 34a per time is set longer when the electric role release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs in high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one electric role. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, the time between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in meeting the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 313 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table (win/loss table for the lottery to open an electric reel) used when conducting the lottery to open an electric reel.

Figure 313(a) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 313(a), the win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature release. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in low-frequency support mode and the electric feature release lottery is executed, there is a 1/233 probability of winning the electric feature release. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature release lottery is won in low-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 313(b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 313(b), the winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 that will result in a winning electric feature opening. Four values from 462 to 465 have been set as the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 that will result in a losing electric feature opening. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in high-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the probability of winning the electric feature opening is 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in high-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low-frequency support mode.

G3. Game Flow:
Next, the general flow of the game in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained using Figure 305.

When a player starts playing, he or she operates the operating handle 25 to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30. Hereinafter, launching the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30 will also be referred to as a "left hit," and launching the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 will also be referred to as a "right hit."

When a player starts hitting with the left hand and causes the game ball to land in the first starting hole 33, a game round begins to notify the results of the winning lottery triggered by the ball landing in the first starting hole 33. If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the opening and closing execution mode begins after the game round ends. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the type of jackpot (see Figure 312) has not yet been determined at the time a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined in the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed after the game round in which the winning lottery was won has ended.

When the round in which the jackpot was won ends, the open/close execution mode begins. When the open/close execution mode begins, an effect (right-hit suggestion effect) is executed that suggests to the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 (right hit). When the player recognizes the right-hit suggestion effect and shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and the game ball enters (passes) the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is executed in response to the first game ball entering (passing) the type determination gate 202 after the open/close execution mode begins. The type determination process is a process for determining the type of jackpot. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

Once the type of jackpot is determined by executing the type determination process, a round of play begins in which the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 perform opening and closing operations based on the opening/closing scenario set for that jackpot type. The opening/closing scenario is a program that predetermines the patterns of the opening and closing operations of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213. Details of the opening/closing scenario will be provided later.

When a game ball hit by a player from the right side enters the first large prize opening 36a or the second large prize opening 212 during the period when a round of play is being played (hereinafter referred to as the opening/closing processing period), the player is awarded the number of game balls set for each large prize opening as a bonus (prize balls).

In this embodiment, an opening/closing scenario is set in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens only in specific cases, allowing a gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening 212. As described in FIG. 307, when a gaming ball enters the second large winning opening 212, one of the gaming balls that entered the second large winning opening 212 is stored in the storage section 218, and then, after the storage valve 216 opens, the gaming ball flows from the flow path 211 to the crane 220 (see FIG. 307(e)). When a gaming ball flowing through the crane 220 enters the V winning opening 222, a new jackpot is confirmed. When a new jackpot is confirmed as a result of a gaming ball entering the V winning opening 222, the currently running opening/closing execution mode is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the gaming ball into the V winning opening 222 is initiated. As mentioned above, when a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined when the gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode after the end of the game in which the jackpot was won. However, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is triggered by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, the type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

As explained in Figure 312, the allocation of jackpot types for a jackpot triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33 (Figure 307(a)) is different from the allocation of jackpot types for a jackpot triggered by a V entry triggered by a ball entering the first starting port (Figure 307(b)). In this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types for a jackpot triggered by a V entry triggered by a ball entering the first starting port is more likely to award a player with a larger bonus. Therefore, even if a jackpot triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33 has been confirmed, if the second opening/closing door 213 opens during a round of play, the player will hope that the gaming ball will enter the second large entry port 212 and then the V entry port 222. This can increase the player's sense of anticipation even during a round of play.

If the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball can be placed in the second large prize opening 212, but the game ball cannot be placed in the V prize opening 222, the round of play based on the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the first start opening 33 will continue.

When a round of play ends and the open/close execution mode subsequently ends, if the high-frequency support mode is set for the type of jackpot that triggered the open/close execution mode, the support mode for the next play session executed after the open/close execution mode ends will be the high-frequency support mode. In this case, the player hits the ball to the right to cause the ball to enter the through gate 35, triggering a lottery to open the electric device. If the player wins the lottery to open the electric device, the electric device 34a opens, allowing the ball to enter the second start opening 34. As a result, a winning lottery is executed triggered by the ball entering the second start opening 34.

The result of the lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 34 will be a jackpot or a small jackpot. If a jackpot is won, just as in the case of a jackpot being won in the lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot is determined by having a gaming ball enter the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode executed after the round in which the jackpot was won has ended. Then, a round of play set to the determined jackpot type is played.

On the other hand, if a small prize is won in the lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting opening 34, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened once after the round in which the small prize was won is completed. If a gaming ball enters the second large prize opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open and then a gaming ball enters the V prize opening 222, a jackpot is confirmed and the opening/closing execution mode is initiated in response to the jackpot. In the opening/closing execution mode, a round of play set for that jackpot type is played, and a bonus is awarded to the player.

Next, we will explain what happens when a player starts playing, hits the ball with his left hand to land it in the first starting hole 33, and wins a small prize in the lottery triggered by the ball landing in the first starting hole 33.

If a small jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting opening 33, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens once after the end of the game in which the small jackpot was won. After the open/close execution mode begins, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed, suggesting the player to make a right hit. If the player makes a right hit in accordance with the right-hit suggestion effect, causes the gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and then the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222, a jackpot is confirmed, and the open/close execution mode is initiated in response to the jackpot. In the open/close execution mode, a round of play set for the type of jackpot is played, and a bonus is awarded to the player. The above explains the general flow of play on the gaming machine in this embodiment.

G4. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 314 is a time chart that explains, as Case 1, the case where a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. The outline of the processing described below is not executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, but is executed only in specific cases.

When a player hits the ball with their left hand and the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, game round U1 begins, and the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a begin to change. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in game round U1. After that, the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a stop changing. At this time, a symbol pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a, but no effect is executed that clearly suggests that a jackpot has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio signal; instead, an effect is executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether they have won a jackpot or a minor jackpot. Therefore, a player who is aware of the results of the winning lottery through the image display on the symbol display device 41 or the audio output will not be able to recognize that they have won a jackpot in the winning lottery corresponding to game round U1.

After the game round U1 in which the winning lottery was won has ended, the opening and closing execution mode begins. As described above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot has not been determined at the time the jackpot is won in the lottery. The type of jackpot is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the opening and closing execution mode has started. Therefore, even when the game round in which the winning lottery was won has ended, the round display unit 39 does not display the number of rounds to be played in the opening and closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the period from the start of the opening and closing execution mode until the type of jackpot is determined is also referred to as the "waiting period."

After the winning play U1 is completed, the open/close execution mode begins, and at the same time, a presentation suggesting a right hit (right hit suggestion presentation) is executed, along with a presentation indicating that the player may be awarded a special prize; more specifically, a presentation suggesting that there are two opportunities (chances) to win the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the "double chance presentation") is executed.

When a player recognizes that the right-hit suggestion effect and the second chance effect have been executed, they execute a right hit, and when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is executed and the type of jackpot is determined. Once the type of jackpot is determined, the waiting period ends and the opening period begins. The right-hit suggestion effect is also executed during the opening period. After the opening period ends, the opening/closing process period begins. During the opening/closing process period, rounds of play are executed the number of times corresponding to the determined jackpot type. At this time, a round of play is executed in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens during the first round of play (first round) of the number of rounds of play corresponding to the jackpot type. In addition, when the opening/closing process period begins, an effect is executed (hereinafter also referred to as the first chance effect) that suggests that the first of two opportunities (chances) to win a jackpot has begun.

More specifically, in the first chance performance, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, and an effect is executed to encourage the player to place the game ball in the second large prize opening 212 and then in the V prize opening 222.

If the player recognizes the first chance effect being executed and hits the right button, and is able to cause the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and the game ball is able to be stored in the storage section 218 (see Figure 307) (progress to "Stored in storage section" on the time chart), the storage valve 216 will perform one opening and closing operation after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. At this time, the one game ball stored in the storage section 218 will flow through the flow path 211 and into the crane 220.

A gaming ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V winning slot 222 or the non-V winning slot 224. When a gaming ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V winning slot 222 (proceed to [Ball enters V winning slot] on the time chart), the round of play that was initiated as a result of the jackpot being won in the lottery for game round U1 continues, the jackpot triggered by the gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222 is not confirmed, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222 is not initiated. Furthermore, the player is not granted any special benefits as a result of the gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222, and the gaming status is not changed.

However, in this embodiment, the V entry jackpot effect is executed when a gaming ball enters the V entry port 222. The V entry jackpot effect is an effect that suggests that a gaming ball has entered the V entry port 222 and that a jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, the letter "V" is displayed on the display surface 41a, along with the word "jackpot."

By executing the V entry jackpot presentation when a gaming ball enters the V entry port 222, the player can be made to believe that a new jackpot has been confirmed by the entry of the gaming ball into the V entry port 222, and a sense of anticipation can be created. Furthermore, the player can be made to believe that an opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the gaming ball into the V entry port 222 has begun.

Then, after the V-entry jackpot effect is executed, the first round of the round play, which was initiated as a result of the jackpot winning lottery in game round U1, ends, and the second round (2R) begins. From the second round onwards, an effect is executed that suggests that a new opening/closing execution mode has begun. This makes the player realize that a new opening/closing execution mode has begun based on the entry of a game ball into the V-entry opening 222, creating a sense of anticipation in the player. In other words, a new sense of anticipation can be created in the player during the round play, which was initiated as a result of the jackpot winning lottery in game round U1.

On the other hand, if a game ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the non-V entry port 224 (progressing to [Ball not entering V entry port] on the time chart), an effect indicating that the second of two available chances to win a jackpot has begun (hereinafter also referred to as the second chance effect) is executed. The second chance effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time, an effect indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed is executed at the time the player operates the effect operation button 24. Furthermore, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. In this case, the round of play that was triggered by the winning of the jackpot in the winning lottery for game round U1 continues, and the jackpot is not confirmed as a result of the operation of the effect operation button 24 in the second chance effect, and a new opening/closing execution mode is not initiated. Furthermore, the operation of the effect operation button 24 in the second chance effect does not result in any special benefits being awarded to the player, and the game state is not changed.

However, in this embodiment, when the effect operation button 24 is operated during the second chance effect, a jackpot effect suggesting a jackpot is executed. Alternatively, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time after the execution of an effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. By executing a jackpot effect after the execution of the second chance effect in this way, the player can be made to believe that a new jackpot has been confirmed by the second chance effect, and a sense of anticipation can be created.

After the jackpot effect is executed, the first round of the round of play that was initiated as a result of the jackpot winning lottery in play round U1 ends, and the second round (R 2) begins. From the second round onwards, an effect is executed that suggests that a new opening/closing execution mode has begun. This makes the player realize that a new opening/closing execution mode has begun based on the jackpot winning from the second chance effect, creating a sense of anticipation in the player. In other words, a new sense of anticipation can be created in the player during the round of play that was initiated as a result of the jackpot winning lottery in play round U1.

The system may be configured so that the effect executed during round play from the second round onwards when a game ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V entry port 222 is different from the effect executed during round play from the second round onwards when a game ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the non-V entry port 224. For example, if a game ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V entry port 222, an effect suggesting that an opening/closing execution mode based on the game ball entering the V entry port 222 is being executed as the effect during round play from the second round onwards; and if a game ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the non-V entry port 224 and a jackpot effect is executed by the second chance effect, an effect suggesting that an opening/closing execution mode based on a new jackpot by the second chance effect is being executed as the effect during round play from the second round onwards. In this way, in both cases, the same round of play is essentially being played, triggered by the jackpot being won in the lottery for round U1, but by using different presentations during rounds from round 2 onwards, it is possible to give the player different expectations, broaden the scope of play, and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Next, we will explain what happens when a player recognizes the first chance effect and hits the right button, but is unable to cause the game ball to enter the second large prize opening 212 when the second door 213 is open, and is therefore unable to store the game ball in the storage section 218 (progressing to "Not stored in storage section" on the time chart). In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second door 213 closes. The second chance effect in this case also prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time, an effect indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed is executed at the time the player operates the effect operation button 24. Furthermore, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. In this case, just as when the game progresses to [Ball not entering V entry slot] shown on the time chart, the round of play that was triggered by the jackpot winning lottery in game round U1 continues, and the jackpot is not confirmed when the effect operation button 24 is operated in the second chance effect, and a new opening/closing execution mode is not initiated. Furthermore, the operation of the effect operation button 24 in the second chance effect does not result in any special benefits being awarded to the player, and the game status is not changed.

However, in this embodiment, when the effect operation button 24 is operated during the second chance effect, a jackpot effect suggesting a jackpot is executed. Alternatively, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time after the execution of an effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. By executing a jackpot effect after the execution of the second chance effect in this way, the player can be made to believe that a new jackpot has been confirmed by the second chance effect, and a sense of anticipation can be created.

After the jackpot effect is executed, the first round of the round of play that was initiated as a result of the jackpot winning lottery in play round U1 ends, and the second round (R 2) begins. From the second round onwards, an effect is executed that suggests that a new opening/closing execution mode has begun. This makes the player realize that a new opening/closing execution mode has begun based on the jackpot winning in the second chance effect, and creates a sense of anticipation in the player. In other words, a new sense of anticipation can be created in the player during the round of play that was initiated as a result of the jackpot winning lottery in play round U1. Case 1 has been described above.

Figure 315 is a time chart illustrating Case 2, where a small prize is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. In this embodiment, the processing described below is executed in all cases where a small prize is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33.

When the player hits the ball with his left hand and the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, starting game round U2, the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a begin to change. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in game round U2. After that, the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a stop changing. At this time, a symbol pattern indicating a small win is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a, but no effect is executed that clearly suggests that a small win has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio signal, and instead, an effect is executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether they have won a big win or a small win. Therefore, a player who is aware of the results of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio signal will not be able to recognize that they have won a small win in the winning lottery corresponding to game round U1.

After the game round U2 in which the small prize was won ends, the open/close execution mode begins. If a small prize is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the open/close execution mode begins. Then, during the opening period of the open/close execution mode, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed, as well as an effect indicating that the player may be awarded a special prize; more specifically, an effect indicating that there are two opportunities (chances) to win the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a "double chance effect") is executed.

After the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period begins. During the opening/closing processing period, a round of play is played in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened only once. Furthermore, when the opening/closing processing period begins, an effect is played (hereinafter also referred to as the "first chance effect") indicating that the first of two available opportunities (chances) to win a jackpot has begun.

More specifically, in the first chance presentation, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, and the presentation is executed to encourage the player to place the game ball in the second big prize opening 212, and then to place the game ball in the V prize opening 222 to confirm the big win.

If the player recognizes the first chance effect being executed and hits the right button, and is able to cause the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and the game ball is able to be stored in the storage section 218 (see Figure 307) (progress to "Stored in storage section" on the time chart), the storage valve 216 will perform one opening and closing operation after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. At this time, the one game ball stored in the storage section 218 will flow through the flow path 211 and into the crane 220.

A gaming ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V entry port 222 or the non-V entry port 224. When a gaming ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V entry port 222 (progress to "Ball Enters V Entry Port" on the time chart), a jackpot is confirmed. Then, upon confirmation of a jackpot, a V entry jackpot effect is executed. The V entry jackpot effect is an effect that suggests that a gaming ball has entered the V entry port 222 and that a jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, the letter "V" and the word "jackpot" are displayed on the display surface 41a. Note that the V entry jackpot effect executed in case 1 and the V entry jackpot effect executed in case 2 may be the same or similar in content, or may be completely different in content. In this embodiment, the V entry jackpot effect executed in case 1 and the V entry jackpot effect executed in case 2 are the same or similar in content. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the progress of the game they are currently playing is in Case 1 or Case 2, allowing the player to make various guesses and creating a sense of anticipation.

After that, the opening/closing execution mode, which is triggered by a small win in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33, ends. Then, a new opening/closing execution mode is started when a jackpot is won based on the game ball entering the V winning port 222. If a jackpot is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning port 222, the type of jackpot is determined along with the confirmation of the jackpot.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the jackpot presentation executed when a gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222 in case 1 and the jackpot presentation executed when a gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222 in case 2 are the same or similar presentations. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether a jackpot has been confirmed by the gaming ball entering the V winning opening 222, allowing the player to make various guesses and creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

On the other hand, if a game ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the non-V entry port 224 (progressing to [Ball not entering V entry port] on the time chart), an effect indicating that the second of two available chances to win the jackpot has begun (hereinafter also referred to as the second chance effect) is executed. The second chance effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time, an effect indicating that a loss has been confirmed at the time the player operates the effect operation button 24 is executed. Furthermore, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect indicating that a loss has been confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed is executed. Note that the confirmation of a loss suggested in the second chance effect suggests that the winning lottery for game round U2 has resulted in a loss (or was a loss).

After the second chance effect is executed, the round play that was being executed in response to the small jackpot being won in the winning lottery for play round U2 ends, and the open/close execution mode then ends. Then, an effect is executed that encourages the player to make a left-handed hit (left-handed hit suggestion effect). The player makes a left-handed hit and again attempts to get the game ball into the first starting hole 33.

Next, we will explain what happens when a player recognizes the first chance effect and hits the right button, but is unable to cause the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and is therefore unable to store the game ball in the storage section 218 (progressing to "Not stored in storage section" on the time chart). In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. The second chance effect in this case also prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a specified period of time, an effect is executed indicating that a miss has been confirmed at the time the player operates the effect operation button 24. Furthermore, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a specified period of time after the execution of the effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect is executed indicating that a miss has been confirmed after the specified period has elapsed.

After the second chance effect is executed, the round play that was being executed in response to the small jackpot being won in the winning lottery for play round U2 ends, and the open/close execution mode then ends. Then, an effect is executed that encourages the player to make a left-handed hit (left-handed hit suggestion effect). The player makes a left-handed hit and again attempts to get the game ball into the first starting hole 33.

As explained above, whether a jackpot is won (Case 1) or a small jackpot is won (Case 2) in the winning lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the first symbol display unit 37a will display a symbol pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery, but no effect will be executed suggesting the result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio sound. Therefore, a player who is aware of the result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio sound will not be able to recognize the result of that game round at the end of the game round. As a result, even if a player has won a small jackpot, this can give the player the feeling of anticipation that they may have won a jackpot.

Furthermore, after the game has finished, in both Case 1 and Case 2, the right-hit suggestion effect and the second chance suggestion effect are executed, so even during the period when these effects are being executed after the game has finished, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the player may have won a big jackpot rather than a small jackpot in the lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot is not determined at the time of the lottery, but is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode. Once the type of jackpot is determined, the round lamp on the round display unit 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of rounds played that correspond to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, if a small jackpot is won, the round lamp does not light up. In other words, whether a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the round lamp does not light up immediately after the end of a play round, so the player can avoid having to determine whether they won a jackpot or a small jackpot in that play round based on the round lamp after the play round has ended.

As a result, after a round of play ends, the player is not aware of the results of the winning lottery until they make a right hit and cause the game ball to enter the type determination gate 202, and this allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time that they may have won a big win rather than a small win. In other words, even after a round of play ends and the opening and closing execution mode based on a big win or small win begins, this allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, attracting their attention to the game. Furthermore, when the type of big win is determined, the player is required to make a right hit and cause the game ball to enter the type determination gate 202, which allows the player to be actively involved in determining the type of big win, and allows the player to further focus their attention on the game during the opening and closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in Case 1, even though a jackpot is won in the lottery for game round U1 and a game ball subsequently enters V winning slot 222, the round of play that was initiated as a result of the jackpot win in the lottery for game round U1 continues, the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering V winning slot 222 is not confirmed, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the game ball entering V winning slot 222 is not initiated. Furthermore, the game ball entering V winning slot 222 does not grant any benefits to the player, and the game status is not changed. On the other hand, in case 2, if a small prize is won in the winning lottery for game round U2 and the game ball then enters the V winning opening 222, a big prize is confirmed, and after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small prize win in the winning lottery for game round U2 ends, a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by the big prize based on the game ball entering the V winning opening 222 begins. In other words, since a bonus may or may not be awarded to the player when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during play, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the player is allowed to guess whether or not a bonus will be awarded, and a sense of anticipation can be created in the player that a bonus may be awarded.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 222, the player is prompted to guess whether the result of the lottery in the game that triggered the gaming ball to enter the V winning slot 222 will be a big win or a small win, giving the player an even greater sense of anticipation.

In addition, in case 1, when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222, a V winning jackpot presentation is executed in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, even though no special benefit is awarded in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222. In case 2, when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222, a special benefit is awarded in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, and a V winning jackpot presentation is executed in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222. Therefore, even in cases where no special benefit is awarded in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in a player who recognizes that a V winning jackpot has been executed, that a special benefit may be awarded.

In case 1, even if a gaming ball enters the V winning hole 222, no special bonus will be awarded as a result of that ball entering. However, the first chance performance executes an effect that encourages the player to enter the V winning hole 222. This gives players who recognize that this effect has been executed hope that a special bonus may be awarded, and further encourages the player to launch the gaming ball in a manner that will result in the gaming ball entering the V winning hole 222.

Furthermore, in Case 1, when a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 222, even though the first round of the round game that was executed as a result of winning the jackpot in the lottery for game round U1 ends and the second round (2R) begins, from the second round onwards, an effect is executed that suggests that a new opening/closing execution mode has begun. By doing this, the player can be made to perceive as if a new opening/closing execution mode has begun based on the gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222, and a sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player. In other words, a new sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player during the round game that was executed as a result of winning the jackpot in the lottery for game round U1.

G5. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
316 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is initiated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S70101, the process of reading various detection sensors is executed. That is, the status of the various detection sensors connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the status of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S70102.

In step S70102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S70103.

In step S70103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S70104. Note that the value of the variable type counter CS is updated during normal processing (Fig. 325), which will be described later.

In step S70104, a ball entry process for the starting hole is executed in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting hole in step S70104 will be described later. After executing step S70104, proceed to step S70105.

In step S70105, a through ball entry process is executed in response to the game ball entering (passing through) the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step S70105 will be described later. After executing step S70105, proceed to step S70106.

In step S70106, ball entry processing for the category determination gate is executed in response to a game ball entering the category determination gate. Details of the ball entry processing for the category determination gate in step S70106 will be described later. After executing step S70106, proceed to step S70107.

In step S70107, ball entry processing for the large prize opening is executed in response to a game ball entering the large prize opening. Details of the ball entry processing for the large prize opening in step S70107 will be described later. After executing step S70107, proceed to step S70108.

In step S70108, the Kloun ball entry process is executed in response to the game ball entering the Kloun. Details of the Kloun ball entry process in step S70108 will be described later. After executing step S70108, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Starting point entry processing>
Next, the ball-entry process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-entry process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 316: S70104).

Figure 317 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting hole. In step S70201, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. If it is determined in step S70201 that the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (S70201: YES), the process proceeds to step S70202, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S70203.

In step S70203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step S70204.

In step S70204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and this first start pending number RaN is set as the target for the processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the first start opening 33. Then, proceed to step S70209.

If it is determined in step S70201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (S70201: NO), the process proceeds to step S70205, where it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S70205 that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (S70205: YES), the process proceeds to step S70206, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S70207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70205 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S70205: NO), the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step S70207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step S70208.

In step S70208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read, and this second start pending number RbN is set as the target for the processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step S70209.

In step S70209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S70204 or step S70208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S70209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (S70209: NO), the ball entry process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, if in step S70209 the number of pending start items N is less than the upper limit (S70209: YES), proceed to step S70210, add 1 to the number of pending start items N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step S70211, add 1 to the value stored in the total number of pending items storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total number of pending items CRN). The total number of pending items CRN indicates the sum of the first number of pending start items RaN and the second number of pending start items RbN. Then proceed to step S70212.

In step S70212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS, updated in step S70103 (Figure 316), and the value of the reach random number counter C3, updated in normal processing (Figure 325), are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding holding area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the number of reserved items to which 1 was added in step S70210. Specifically, if the first start reserved number RaN is set as the target for processing, the values of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, updated in step S70103 (Figure 316), are stored in the first free memory area of the first holding area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step S70210. Furthermore, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the target for processing, the values of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S70103 (Fig. 316) are stored in the first free memory area in the second holding area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step S70210. After executing step S70212, proceed to step S70213.

In step S70213, a first-time determination process is executed. The first-time determination process is a process that determines the winning lottery result (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a winning lottery has occurred, the variable time for the number of games, etc., based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the first-time determination process will be described later. After executing step S70213, proceed to step S70214.

In step S70214, a process for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the result of the first determination process (first determination information) executed based on the information (pending information) on the values of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is set as a pending command.

The hold command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the determination result (first determination information) made by the first determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entry, before the hold information becomes the subject of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of the normal process (Figure 325: step S71003), which will be described later.

In addition, when the audio and light control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the first starting port 33, it sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio and light control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the second starting port 34, it sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step S70214, the main MPU 62 terminates the ball entry process for this starting hole.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the lead determination process will be described. The lead determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the starting hole ball entry process (FIG. 317: S70213).

Figure 318 is a flowchart showing the advance determination process. As described above, the advance determination process is a process that, based on the pending information, determines whether the winning lottery will be successful, the type of jackpot, whether a reach has occurred, and the variable time for the number of play rounds, etc., before the pending information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control unit 60.

In step S70301, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process determines whether the winning lottery was successful, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S70301, the process proceeds to step S70302.

In step S70302, variable time information acquisition processing is executed. This processing determines the variable time of the game session. Details of the variable time information acquisition processing will be described later.

After executing step S70302, the destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/Reach Information Acquisition Processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 318: S70301).

Figure 319 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S70401, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the memory area (reserved area) due to a ball entering the starting hole in the starting hole ball entry process (Figure 317) is read. Then, proceed to step S70402.

In step S70402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 that was read is based on the first holding area Ra. In other words, it is determined whether the holding information that is the target of the advance determination process is information acquired in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, or information acquired in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 34. In step S70402, if it is determined that the read holding area is based on the first holding area Ra (S70402: YES), the process proceeds to step S70403, where the winning/losing table for the first starting hole is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S70405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70402 that the read-out holding area is not based on the first holding area Ra, i.e., if the read-out holding area is based on the second holding area Rb (S70402: NO), proceed to step S70404 and refer to the win/loss table for the first starting port. Then proceed to step S70405.

In step S70405, it is determined whether the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S70405 that the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery (S70405: YES), the process proceeds to step S70406.

In step S70406, the jackpot information is stored in the advance determination process result storage area 64h. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70405 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 read does not indicate a jackpot in the winning lottery (S70405: NO), proceed to step S70407.

In step S70407, it is determined whether the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a small win in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S70407 that the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a small win in the winning lottery (S70407: YES), proceed to step S70408.

In step S70408, the small win information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the big win/reach information acquisition process ends.

In step S70407, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 does not indicate a small win in the winning lottery (S70407: NO), proceed to step S70409.

In step S70409, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S70410, where the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S70411, where, based on the reference to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step S70411 that a reach has occurred (S70411: YES), the process proceeds to step S70412, where reach occurrence information is stored in the next determination process result storage area 64h. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70411 that a reach has not occurred (S70411: NO), the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 318: S70302).

Figure 320 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step S70501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the memory area due to a ball entering the starting hole in the starting hole ball entry process (Figure 317) is acquired. Then, proceed to step S70502.

In step S70502, it is determined whether the winning lottery for the current game round has resulted in a win. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the winning lottery result determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if a jackpot has been won (S70502: YES), the process proceeds to step S70503.

In step S70503, the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. After executing step S70503, proceed to step S70509.

In step S70509, the acquired variable time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64. Then, this variable time information acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S70502 that the result of the winning lottery is not a big win (step S70502: NO), proceed to step S70504 to determine whether or not a small win has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round. If it is determined in step S70504 that a small win has been won (S70504: YES), proceed to step S70505.

In step S70505, the small win variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. After executing step S70505, proceed to step S70509.

In step S70509, the acquired variable time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64. Then, this variable time information acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S70504 that a small win has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game (S70504: NO), the process proceeds to step S70506, where it is determined whether a reach has occurred. If it is determined in step S70506 that a reach has occurred (S70506: YES), the process proceeds to step S70507.

In step S70507, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S70509, where the obtained variable time information is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64, and the variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S70506 that a reach will not occur in this game (step S70506: NO), the process proceeds to step S70508, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S70509, where the obtained fluctuation time information is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64h in RAM 64, and the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

<Processing a through ball>
Next, the through ball scoring process will be described. The through ball scoring process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 316: step S70105).

Figure 321 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry processing. In step S70601, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S70601 that a gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 (S70601: YES), the process proceeds to step S70602, where it is determined whether the number of reserved feature items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved feature items SN is a value indicating the number of balls that have entered the through gate 35 and are reserved for the purpose of holding a lottery to open an electric feature item. In this embodiment, the maximum value for the number of reserved feature items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70601 that a gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S70601: NO), the through ball entry processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S70602 that the number of reserved reel items SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S70602: YES), proceed to step S70603, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reel items SN. Then, proceed to step S70604.

In step S70604, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S70103 (Fig. 316) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64c of RAM 64. Then, the through ball entry process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70602 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (S70602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is the upper limit, the ball entry process for the through reels is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Ball entry processing for category determination gate>
Next, the ball scoring process for the category determination gate will be described. The ball scoring process for the category determination gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 316: step S70106).

Figure 322 is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the category determination gate. In step S70701, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the category determination gate 202. If it is determined in step S70701 that the gaming ball has entered the category determination gate 202 (S70701: YES), the process proceeds to step S70702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70701 that the gaming ball has not entered the category determination gate 202 (S70701: NO), the ball entry processing for the category determination gate ends immediately.

In step S70702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, which triggers the opening/closing execution mode and the type determination process (see FIG. 332) to be executed. In the ball entry process for this type determination gate, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which determines the jackpot type, is stored in the memory area, and then the flag is turned OFF (S70705).

If it is determined in step S70702 that the category determination permission flag is ON (S70702: YES), proceed to step S70703. If it is determined in step S70702 that the category determination permission flag is not ON (S70702: NO), the ball entry process for the category determination gate ends.

In step S70703, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding memory area (type determination process execution area 64i). Then, proceed to step S70704.

In step S70704, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i, and is turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process (see Figure 332) described below. After executing step S70704, proceed to step S70705.

In step S70705, the category determination permission flag is turned OFF. Then, the ball entry process for the category determination gate is terminated.

<Ball entry processing for the big prize slot>
Next, the ball entry process for the big prize opening will be described. The ball entry process for the big prize opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 316: step S70107).

Figure 323 is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the large prize opening. In step S70801, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the first large prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step S70801 that the gaming ball has entered the first large prize opening 36a (S70801: YES), the process proceeds to step S70802. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S70801 that the gaming ball has entered the first large prize opening 36a (S70801: NO), the process proceeds to step S70804.

In step S70802, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on a ball entering the first large prize opening 36a is set. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the first large prize opening 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step S70802, proceed to step S70803.

In step S70803, a first major prize opening ball entry command is set. The first major prize opening ball entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the first major prize opening 36a. The first major prize opening ball entry command is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 325: step S71003) described below. After executing step S70803, proceed to step S70804.

In step S70804, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second large prize opening 212. If it is determined in step S70804 that the gaming ball has entered the second large prize opening 212 (S70804: YES), the process proceeds to step S70805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70804 that the gaming ball has not entered the second large prize opening 212 (S70804: NO), the ball entry process for the large prize opening is terminated.

In step S70805, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on a ball entering the second large prize opening 212 is set. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second large prize opening 212, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step S70805, proceed to step S70806.

In step S70806, a second large prize opening ball entry command is set. The second large prize opening ball entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 212. The second large prize opening ball entry command is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 325: step S71003) described below. After step S70806 is executed, the ball entry process for the large prize opening is terminated.

<Ball entry process for the Kroon>
Next, the process for scoring a ball for the Kroon will be described. The process for scoring a ball for the Kroon is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 316: step S70108).

Figure 324 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the Kroon. In step S70901, it is determined whether the Kroon ball entry permission flag is ON. The Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened during the large prize opening/closing process (Figure 335), and is turned OFF when a game ball enters the V prize opening 222 or non-V prize opening 224 of the Kroon 220 (Figure 324: S70910). This prevents game balls from unintentionally flowing into the Kroon due to damage or abnormality in the storage valve drive mechanism 217 or the storage valve 216, resulting in a big win, even when the storage valve 216 has not performed an opening operation. If it is determined in step S70901 that the Kroon ball entry permission flag is ON (S70901: YES), the process proceeds to step S70902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70901 that the Kroon entry permission flag is not ON (S70901: NO), the Kroon entry process ends.

In step S70902, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the V winning opening 222. If it is determined in step S70902 that a gaming ball has entered the V winning opening 222 (S70902: YES), the process proceeds to step S70903.

In step S70903, it is determined whether the small win flag is ON. That is, this process determines whether the game ball's entry into the V winning opening 222 was triggered by a small win in the winning lottery or a jackpot in the winning lottery. As explained in Case 1 of FIG. 314, if a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 as a result of winning a small win in the winning lottery, a jackpot is confirmed. However, if a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 as a result of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, the round game that was being executed as a result of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery for that game round continues, and the jackpot triggered by the game ball's entry into the V winning opening 222 is not confirmed, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the game ball's entry into the V winning opening 222 is not initiated. Furthermore, the entry of a gaming ball into the V winning slot 222 does not confer any special benefits to the player, nor does it change the game state. Therefore, in step S70903, it is determined whether the entry of the gaming ball into the V winning slot 222 was triggered by a small win in the winning lottery, or a big win in the winning lottery, thereby determining whether a big win has been confirmed. If it is determined in step S70903 that the small win flag is ON (S70903: YES), the process proceeds to step S70904.

In step S70904, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding memory area (type determination processing execution area 64i). As described above, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting gate 33 or the second starting gate 34, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding memory area (type determination processing execution area 64i) in the ball entry processing for the type determination gate, triggered by a gaming ball entering the type determination gate 202 during execution of the open/close execution mode. However, in the case of a jackpot triggered by a gaming ball entering the V winning gate 222, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding memory area (type determination processing execution area 64i) upon the gaming ball entering the V winning gate 222. After executing step S70904, proceed to step S70905.

In step S70905, the V-winning jackpot flag is turned ON. The V-winning jackpot flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V-winning opening 222, and is turned OFF after the opening time for the V-winning jackpot opening/closing execution mode has been set (Fig. 335: S71910). After executing step S70905, proceed to step S70906.

In step S70906, a V entry command is set. The V entry command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a game ball has entered the V entry port 222, triggered by a small win in the winning lottery. The V entry command is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 325: step S71003), which will be described later. After executing step S70906, proceed to step S70910.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70903 that the small hit flag is not ON (S70903: NO), proceed to step S70907.

In step S70907, a dummy V entry command is set. The dummy V entry command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a game ball has entered the V entry port 222, triggered by a jackpot in the winning lottery. The dummy V entry command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 325: step S71003), which will be described later. After executing step S70907, proceed to step S70910.

If it is determined in step S70902 that a game ball has not entered the V winning hole 222 (S70902: NO), proceed to step S70908.

In step S70908, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224. If it is determined in step S70908 that a game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224 (S70908: YES), the process proceeds to step S70909. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70908 that a game ball has not entered the non-V winning opening 224 (S70908: NO), the ball entry process for the Kluen is terminated.

In step S70909, a non-V winning command is set. The non-V winning command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a game ball has entered the non-V winning port 224. The non-V winning command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003) described below. After executing step S70909, proceed to step S70910.

In step S70910, the Kroon entry permission flag is turned OFF. Then, the Kroon entry process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 325 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S71001, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings for each control device are performed upon power-on, and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 is determined. Then, processing proceeds to step S71002.

In step S71002, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command that causes each sub-control device to start a demo video when power is turned on. Then, proceed to step S71003.

In step S71003, output data such as the start-up command set in step S71002, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, is sent to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variable command, a variable type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step S71003, proceed to step S71004.

In step S71004, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S71005.

In step S71005, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S71006. In step S71006, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the drawing of winning balls, setting the variable display of patterns by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S71006, the process proceeds to step S71007.

In step S71007, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S71008.

In step S71008, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric device 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric device 34a. Details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S71009.

In step S71009, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (more precisely, the start of the command output processing in step S71003). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step S71009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (S71009: NO), in steps S71010 and S71011, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step S71010, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step S71011, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71009 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (S71009: YES), the process returns to step S71003, and the processes from step S71003 to step S71008 are executed.

Note that the execution time for each process from step S71003 to step S71008 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 325: S71006).

Figure 326 is a flowchart showing the game round control process. In step S71101, it is determined whether or not a special game state is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the pattern change has ended in a game round in which a big win or small win has been won in the winning lottery (S71112), and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is ended in the game state transition process (Figure 331) (Figure 331: S71629).

If it is determined in step S71101 that the open/close execution mode flag is ON (S71101: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S71102 onwards. In other words, if the special game state is in progress, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71101 that the open/close execution mode flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the special game state is not in progress (S71101: NO), proceed to step S71102.

In step S71102, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is currently displaying a variable value. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b is currently displaying a variable value. This determination is made by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when variable display is to begin for either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step S71102 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying a variable value (S71102: NO), the process proceeds to steps S71103 to S71107 to start the game. In step S71103, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserved number for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is "0". Therefore, if it is determined in step S71103 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S71103: YES), the game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71103 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S71103: NO), the process proceeds to step S71104.

In step S71104, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the fluctuation starts, and then the process proceeds to step S71105. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S71105, a change start process is executed to start the change display on the main display unit 45 and the change display on the pattern display device 41. Details of the change start process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S71106.

In step S71106, it is determined whether the PNC count flag is ON. The PNC count flag is set ON when the open/close execution mode, which was executed as a result of a jackpot in which high frequency support mode was set, ends (see Figure 338), and is set OFF when the high frequency support mode ends (see Figure 337). The PNC count flag is set to confirm the timing for starting to count the number of times play is executed in high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S71106 that the PNC count flag is ON (S71106: YES), the process proceeds to step S71107.

In step S71107, the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. The play count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of plays executed in high frequency support mode. After step S71107 is executed, this play count control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71106 that the PNC count flag is not ON (S71106: NO), the play count control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71102 that the main display unit 45 is displaying a variable value (S71102: YES), processing for progressing through the game rounds is executed in steps S71108 to S71113.

In step S71108, it is determined whether the variable time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variable time is the time from when the symbol sequence begins to change until all symbol sequences stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S71108, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of RAM 64 has become "0." The value of this variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (Figure 330) described below. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated.

If it is determined in step S71108 that the change time has not elapsed (S71108: NO), the process proceeds to step S71109, where the change display process is executed. The change display process is a process that changes the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After step S71109 is executed, the game round control process ends.

If it is determined in step S71108 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S71108: YES), the process proceeds to step S71110, where the fluctuation end process is executed. The fluctuation end process controls the display of the symbol display section so that the pattern to be displayed in the symbol display section determined in the fluctuation start process (Fig. 328) described below is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. After executing step S71110, the process proceeds to step S71111.

In step S71111, it is determined whether either the big win flag or the small win flag is ON. The big win flag is turned ON in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 328) described below if the result of the winning lottery is a big win. The small win flag is turned ON in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 328) described below if the result of the winning lottery is a small win. In addition, the big win flag and small win flag are turned OFF in the flag erasure processing in the transition processing (FIG. 338) at the end of the ending period described below.

If it is determined in step S71111 that either the big win flag or the small win flag is ON (S71111: YES), the process proceeds to step S71112, where the open/close execution mode flag is set ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S71113, where an open/close execution mode start command is set. The open/close execution mode start command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close execution mode has begun. The open/close execution mode start command is sent to the audio/light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 325: step S71003), which will be described later. After executing step S71113, the game play control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71111 that either the big win flag or the small win flag is not ON (S71111: NO), the game play control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game play control process (FIG. 326: S71104).

Figure 327 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S71201, it is determined whether the holding area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, if the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 309) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information (holding information stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 309), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra, the holding area to be processed is determined to be the second holding area Rb. In other words, by executing the processing of step S71201, the pending information can be processed in the order in which it was stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

If it is determined in step S71201 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step S71201: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area is performed in steps S71202 to S71207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71201 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S71201: NO), data setting processing for the second holding area is performed in steps S71208 to S71213.

In step S71202, the first start pending number RaN in the first pending area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S71203, where the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S71204. In step S71204, the data stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S71205.

In step S71205, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S71205, proceed to step S71206.

In step S71206, if the second symbol display unit flag in the various flags storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF; if it is not ON, the flag is maintained in that state. The second symbol display unit flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display will start from the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, proceed to step S71207.

In step S71207, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. The data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S71207 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S71003 of normal processing (Figure 325). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

If it is determined in step S71201 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S71201: NO), proceed to step S71208.

In step S71208, the second start pending number RbN in the second holding area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step S71209. In step S71209, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step S71210, where the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step S71211.

In step S71211, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S71211, proceed to step S71212.

In step S71212, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON; if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step S71213.

In step S71213, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the holding area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the holding area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, i.e., corresponds to the second starting port 34, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. This data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S71213 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S71003 of normal processing (Figure 325). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 326: S71105).

Figure 328 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S71301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the memory area (reserved area) due to a ball entering the starting hole in the starting hole ball entry processing (Figure 317) is read. Then, proceed to step S71302.

In step S71302, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 being processed is information acquired in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, or information acquired in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S71302 that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S71302: NO), the process proceeds to step S71303. In step S71303, the win/loss table for the first starting gate is referenced, and then the process proceeds to step S71305.

If it is determined in step S71302 that the second symbol display flag is ON (S71302: YES), the process proceeds to step S71304. In step S71304, the win/loss table for the second starting slot is referenced, and then the process proceeds to step S71305.

In step S71305, it is determined whether the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S71305 that the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery (S71305: YES), proceed to step S71306.

In step S71306, the stop result setting process for a jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a jackpot will be won. Specifically, the stop result table for a jackpot stored in the stop result table memory area 63e is referenced to obtain address information for the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot, and this address information is stored in the stop result address memory area of RAM 64. After executing step S71306, the process proceeds to step S71307.

In step S71307, the jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S71308, where a specific process execution determination process is executed. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the process described in FIG. 314, i.e., a process including the execution of a W chance suggestion effect, in the open/close execution mode executed after the end of a game in which a jackpot has been won. Details of the specific process execution determination process will be described later. After executing step S71308, the process proceeds to step S71315.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71305 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 read does not indicate a jackpot in the winning lottery (S71305: NO), proceed to step S71309.

In step S71309, it is determined whether the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a small win in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S71309 that the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a small win in the winning lottery (S71309: YES), proceed to step S71310.

In step S71310, the stop result setting process for a small win is executed. The stop result setting process for a small win is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a small win will be won. After executing step S71310, proceed to step S71311.

In step S71311, the small win flag is turned ON. After executing step S71311, proceed to step S71315.

In step S71309, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 does not indicate a small win in the winning lottery (S71309: NO), proceed to step S71312.

In step S71312, it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current game round being executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read. Then, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table memory area 63c is referenced. After that, as a result of referencing the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step S71312 that a reach will occur in the current game round (S71312: YES), proceed to step S71313.

In step S71313, a reach stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, a process is executed to set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game turn, which results in a reach stop result. More specifically, by referencing the reach stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S71313, the process proceeds to step S71315.

If it is determined in step S71312 that no reach will occur in the current game round (S71312: NO), proceed to step S71314.

In step S71314, a stop result setting process for a loss is executed. The stop result setting process for a loss is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which results in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and this address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S71314, the process proceeds to step S71315.

In step S71315, a process for setting the variable time is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on whether or not a jackpot has occurred and whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S71315, the process proceeds to step S71316.

In step S71316, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S71316 that the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON (S71316: NO), the process proceeds to step S71317, where the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S71315.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71316 that the second symbol display flag is ON (S71316: YES), the process proceeds to step S71318, where a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information obtained based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and the variation time set in step S71315. After executing step S71317 or step S71318, the process proceeds to step S71319.

In step S71319, a change type command is set. The change type command includes information on whether a jackpot has occurred, whether a reach has occurred, and whether a specific process has been executed.

The variation commands and variation type commands set in steps S71317 to S71319 are sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S71003 of the normal processing (Figure 325). The audio and light emitting control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation commands and variation type commands, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step S71319, proceed to step S71320.

In step S71320, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, begins displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display unit 37a and a changing display is initiated; if the second pattern display unit flag is ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display unit 37b and a changing display is initiated. After step S71320 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Specific Process Execution Determination Process>
Next, the specific process execution determination process will be described. The specific process execution determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 328: S71308). Here, the specific process means the series of processes described in Fig. 314. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the specific process.

Figure 329 is a flowchart showing the specific process execution determination process. In step S71401, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON. As mentioned above, the process described in Figure 314 is executed when the game turn in question results in a jackpot in the winning lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first start hole 33. Therefore, in order to determine whether the game turn to be processed is executed when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or when a game ball enters the second start hole 34, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S71401 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S71401: NO), proceed to step S71402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71401 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S71401: YES), the specific processing execution determination process is terminated.

In step S71402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game that will result in a jackpot in the winning lottery is a predetermined specific value. As explained in FIG. 314, the processing shown in FIG. 314 is not executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, but is executed only in specific cases. Therefore, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game that will result in a jackpot is a predetermined specific value, and if it is a specific value, it is determined to execute a specific processing. In this embodiment, the specific value is set to two values, "0" and "1," out of the values "0 to 4" of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the first starting hole shown in FIG. 310. Therefore, in step S71402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game that will result in a jackpot in the winning lottery is "0" or "1." In step S71402, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is a specific value (S71402: YES), proceed to step S71403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71402 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not a specific value (S71402: NO), the specific process execution determination process is terminated.

In step S71403, the specific processing flag is turned ON. In the processing described in FIG. 314, an opening/closing scenario (opening pattern) in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened must be set during the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode. The specific processing flag is provided to identify whether or not a specific process is to be executed in the processing for determining the opening/closing scenario (FIG. 333: Opening/closing scenario setting processing). After executing step S71403, proceed to step S71404.

In step S71404, a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a specific processing will be executed. The specific processing command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process for normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003), which will be described later. After step S71404 is executed, the specific processing execution determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable time start process (FIG. 328: S71015).

Figure 330 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable time. In step S71501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, proceed to step S71502.

In step S71502, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the lottery for the current game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if the jackpot flag is ON (S71502: YES), the process proceeds to step S71503.

In step S71503, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S71509, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S71502 that a jackpot has not been won in the lottery for the current game (S71502: NO), the process proceeds to step S71504, where it is determined whether a small jackpot has been won in the lottery for the current game. Specifically, it is determined whether the small jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if the small jackpot flag is ON (S71504: YES), the process proceeds to step S71505.

In step S71505, the small win variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S71509, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S71504 that the player has not won a small prize in the winning lottery for this game (S71504: NO), the process proceeds to step S71506.

In step S71506, it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current round of play. Since this process (S71506) is executed if a jackpot or a small jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery for the current round of play in step S71502 above, in step S71506 it is determined whether a reach will occur among the rounds of play in which a jackpot or small jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach will occur (S71506: YES), and the process proceeds to step S71507. Note that when determining whether a reach will occur using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 is referenced.

In step S71507, the variable time table for reaching a winning position stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for reaching a winning position is constant. Then, the process proceeds to step S71509, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S71506 that a reach will not occur in the current game (S71506: NO), the process proceeds to step S71508, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S71509, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process ends.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data in the fluctuation time table referenced will differ depending on the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN when determining the fluctuation time for that game round.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is configured to be set so that the larger the values of the first start-up pending number RaN and the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, other configurations are also possible, such as the larger the value of the total hold number CRN, so that the fluctuation time is set to be shorter. Furthermore, without being limited to this, for example, the configuration may be independent of the total hold number CRN, and the smaller the total hold number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0," the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the shorter the fluctuation time. When the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss is reached may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a special jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a miss is allowed, and a variable time table for a complete miss may be set separately.

<Game status transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 325: S71007).

Figure 331 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S71601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending presentation in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S71601 that the ending period flag is not ON (S71601: NO), proceed to step S71602, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is transitioned to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

If it is determined in step S71602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S71602: NO), proceed to step S71603, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S71603 that the opening period flag is not ON (S71603: NO), proceed to step S71604, where it is determined whether the timing has come when the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S71604 that the variable display has not come to an end (S71604: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71604 that the variable display has ended (S71604: YES), the process proceeds to step S71605, where it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening and closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game session that triggered the start of the opening and closing execution mode ends (Figure 326: S71112), and is turned OFF when the opening and closing execution mode ends (Figure 331: S71629).

If it is determined in step S71605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S71605: YES), the process proceeds to step S71606. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S71605: NO), the game state transition process ends.

In step S71606, it is determined whether the game result of the current game (the result of the winning lottery) is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether the small win flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71606 that the game result of the current game (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small win (S71606: NO), the process proceeds to step S71607.

In step S71607, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In step S71606, it is determined that the game result (the result of the winning lottery) for this game is not a small win, so the result of the winning lottery for this game is a big win. In order to change the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a big win, to low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step S71607, proceed to step S71608.

In step S71608, it is determined whether the type determination completion flag is ON. The type determination completion flag is a flag used to determine whether the jackpot type has been determined. It is set ON when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process that determines the jackpot type (Figure 332: S71709), and is set OFF immediately before the opening/closing scenario setting process is executed (S71610). In step S71608, if it is determined that the type determination completion flag is not ON (S71608: NO), the process proceeds to step S71609.

In step S71609, the type determination process is executed. The type determination process is described below.

If it is determined in step S71608 that the type determination completion flag is ON (S71608: YES), proceed to step S71610, where the type determination completion flag is set to OFF. Then, proceed to step S71611.

Also, if it is determined in step S71606 that the game result for this round (the result of the winning lottery) is a small win (S71606: YES), the process proceeds to step S71611.

In step S71611, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. As described above, the opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which the opening patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 during round play are set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step S71611, the process proceeds to step S71612.

In step S71612, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S71612, proceed to step S71613.

In step S71613, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90 in step S71003 of normal processing (Figure 325). This opening command includes information about the set opening time, information about the jackpot type, and information about the jackpot or small jackpot that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode. The information about the jackpot or small jackpot is information such as whether a jackpot or small jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed when a gaming ball entered the first starting port 33, whether a new jackpot was won by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222 during a round of play executed by the jackpot or small jackpot, whether a jackpot or small jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed when a gaming ball entered the second starting port 34, or whether a new jackpot was won by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222 during a round of play executed by the jackpot or small jackpot. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 determines the content of the effects corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode, and controls various devices to execute the determined content. After executing step S71613, the process proceeds to step S71614, where the opening period flag is set to ON. The game state transition process then ends.

If it is determined in step S71603 that the opening period flag is ON (S71603: YES), proceed to step S71615.

In step S71615, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0." If it is determined in step S71615 that the opening period has ended (S71615: YES), the process proceeds to step S71616, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S71617.

In step S71617, processing is executed to start the round display to notify the type of the current open/close execution mode. Specifically, when a jackpot type is determined by the type determination processing, a display indicating the number of rounds of play set for the determined jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39, and when a jackpot is confirmed by a game ball entering the V winning port 222, a display indicating the number of rounds of play set for the jackpot type determined by the confirmation of the jackpot is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step S71617, the program proceeds to step S71618.

In step S71618, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S71602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is ON (S71602: YES), the process proceeds to step S71619, where the special prize opening/closing processing is executed. The special prize opening/closing processing will be described later. After executing step S71619, the process proceeds to step S71620.

In step S71620, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the large prize opening/closing process has ended (S71620: YES), the process proceeds to step S71621. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71620 that the large prize opening/closing process has not ended (S71620: NO), the large prize opening/closing process ends immediately.

In step S71621, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then processing proceeds to step S71622.

In step S71622, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is terminated so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S71622, the process proceeds to step S71623.

In step S71623, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). After executing step S71623, proceed to step S71624.

In step S71624, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S71003 of normal processing (Figure 325). Upon receiving the ending command, the audio and light emission control device 90 starts a performance corresponding to the ending period. After executing step S71624, proceed to step S71625.

In step S71625, the ending period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S71601 that the ending period flag is ON (S71601: YES), proceed to step S71626.

In step S71626, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S71623), is "0." If it is determined in step S71626 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (S71626: YES), proceed to step S71627.

In step S71627, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S71628, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period has ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S71628, the process proceeds to step S71629, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned OFF. Then, this game state transition process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71626 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (S71626: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In Figure 331, an arrow extending from a figure marked with the letter "A" indicates that processing proceeds to step S71611, and the figure marked with the letter "A" corresponds to the figure marked with the letter "A" displayed in Figure 337. In other words, this indicates that processing proceeds from step S72112 in the transition processing at the end of the ending period (Figure 337) to step S71611 in the game state transition processing (Figure 331). The game state transition processing has been explained above.

<Type determination process>
Next, the type determination process will be described. The type determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 331: S71609).

Figure 332 is a flowchart showing the type determination process. In step S71701, it is determined whether the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i, and is turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined.

If it is determined in step S71701 that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is not ON (S71701: NO), proceed to step S71702.

In step S71702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, which triggers the opening/closing execution mode and the type determination process to be executed. In the ball entry process for the type determination gate (Figure 322), the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which determines the jackpot type, is stored in the memory area, and then the flag is turned OFF (Figure 322: S70705).

If it is determined in step S71702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (S71702: NO), proceed to step S71703, set the type determination permission flag to ON, and then terminate the type determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (S71702: YES), terminate the type determination process.

If it is determined in step S71701 that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON (S71701: YES), proceed to step S71704.

In step S71704, it is determined whether the second pattern display unit flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S71704 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S71704: NO), the process proceeds to step S71705, where the allocation table for the first starting slot is referenced to identify the jackpot type (allocation result) corresponding to the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2. Then, the process proceeds to step S71707.

If it is determined in step S71704 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S71704: YES), the process proceeds to step S71706, where the allocation table for the second starting slot is referenced to identify the jackpot type (allocation result) corresponding to the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2. Then, the process proceeds to step S71707.

In step S71707, the jackpot type identified in step S71705 or step S71706 is set as the jackpot type for the current jackpot. After executing step S71707, proceed to step S71708.

In step S71708, the type determination completion flag is turned ON, and then processing proceeds to step S71709. In step S71709, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned OFF. Then, the type determination process ends.

<Open/close scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 331: S71611).

Figure 333 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process. In step S71801, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71801 that the jackpot flag is ON (S71801: YES), the process proceeds to step S71802.

In step S71802, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71802 that the specific processing flag is not ON (S71802: NO), proceed to step S71803.

In step S71803, the opening and closing scenario for the jackpot is set for the normal case (when no specific processing is performed) according to the type of jackpot.

Figure 334 is an explanatory diagram explaining the opening and closing scenarios in this embodiment. In this embodiment, opening and closing scenarios are broadly categorized into three types.

The first is the opening and closing scenario for a normal jackpot, as shown in Figure 334 (a). The opening and closing scenario for a normal jackpot is an opening and closing scenario in which the opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 are set in an opening and closing execution mode in which no specific processing is executed when a jackpot occurs. As shown in the figure, an opening and closing scenario is set for each number of rounds of play (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each opening and closing scenario set as a normal jackpot opening and closing scenario is set with an opening and closing pattern in which only the first opening and closing door 36b opens and closes in round play.

The second is the jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed, as shown in Figure 334 (b). The jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are set in the opening/closing execution mode in which a specific process is executed when a jackpot occurs. As shown in the figure, an opening/closing scenario is set for each number of rounds of play (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as the jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed has an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens and closes once in the first round (1R) of round play, and in subsequent rounds of play, only the first opening/closing door 36b opens and closes. More specifically, in the first round, the operation of the second opening/closing door 213 and the storage valve 216 described in Figure 307 is executed.

The third is the small win opening/closing scenario shown in Figure 334 (c). In this embodiment, the small win opening/closing scenario is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode when a small win occurs are set. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as a small win opening/closing scenario is set with an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door opens and closes only once in the first round (1st round) of a round game.

Referring back to Figure 333 for the explanation, in step S71803, the opening and closing scenario for a normal jackpot (Figure 334 (a)) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set, and then the opening and closing scenario setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71802 that the specific processing flag is ON (S71802: YES), proceed to step S71804.

In step S71804, the opening and closing scenario of the jackpot (Figure 334 (b)) is set when specific processing is executed according to the type of jackpot. The opening and closing scenario setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S71801 that the jackpot flag is not ON (S71801: NO), proceed to step S71805.

In step S71805, the opening and closing scenario for a small win (Figure 334 (c)) is set. The opening and closing scenario setting process then ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 331: S71612).

Figure 335 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S71901, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71901 that the jackpot flag is ON (S71901: YES), the process proceeds to step S71902.

In step S71902, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71902 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S71902: NO), the process proceeds to step S71903.

In step S71903, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71903 that the specific processing flag is ON (S71903: YES), proceed to step S71904.

In step S71904, an opening time corresponding to the specific processing is set. Specifically, a time corresponding to the opening period in the specific processing described in FIG. 314 is set. During this opening period, as described in FIG. 314, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step S71904, the process proceeds to step S71905, where the specific processing flag is turned OFF. The opening time setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S71903 that the specific processing flag is not ON (S71903: NO), proceed to step S71906.

In step S71906, an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the first starting slot is set. During this opening period, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. The opening time setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S71902 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S71902: YES), proceed to step S71907.

In step S71907, an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the second starting slot is set. During this opening period, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. The opening time setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S71901 that the jackpot flag is not ON (S71901: NO), proceed to step S71908.

In step S71908, it is determined whether the V-winning jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71908 that the V-winning jackpot flag is ON (S71908: YES), proceed to step S71909.

In step S71909, an opening time corresponding to a V-winning jackpot is set. During this opening period, an effect (V-winning notification effect) indicating that a game ball has entered the V-winning slot 222 and resulted in a jackpot, and a right-hit suggestion effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the V-winning notification effect and right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step S71909, the process proceeds to step S71910, where the V-winning jackpot flag is turned OFF. The opening time setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S71908 that the V-winning jackpot flag is not ON (S71908: NO), proceed to step S71911.

In step S71911, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71911 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S71911: NO), the process proceeds to step S71912.

In step S71912, the opening time corresponding to the small jackpot for the first starting port is set. If a small jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port 33, the processing described in Figure 315 is executed. As shown in Figure 315, during the opening period, a right-hit suggestion effect and a W-chance suggestion effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect and the W-chance suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71911 that the second pattern display unit flag is ON (S71911: YES), proceed to step S71913.

In step S71913, an opening time corresponding to a small win for the second starting slot is set. During this opening period, a right-hit suggestion effect and an effect encouraging the player to place the game ball in the V winning slot 222 are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect and an effect encouraging the player to place the game ball in the V winning slot 222 can be executed is set as the opening time. The opening time setting process then ends.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 331: S71619).

Figure 336 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. This large prize opening/closing process is broadly composed of three control processes. Specifically, steps S72001 to S72007 are the opening/closing control process for the first opening/closing door 36b, steps S72008 to S72014 are the opening/closing control process for the second opening/closing door 213, and steps S72015 to S72022 are the opening/closing control process for the storage valve 216.

In step S72001, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step S72001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is not open (S72001: NO), the process proceeds to step S72002.

In step S72002, it is determined whether the opening conditions for the first door 36b have been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is time to open the first door 36b. In step S72002, if it is determined that the opening conditions for the first door 36b have been met (S72002: YES), the process proceeds to step S72003.

In step S72003, the first opening and closing door 36b is opened. Then, proceed to step S72004.

In step S72004, a first door open command is set. The first door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first door 36b has been opened. The first door open command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72004, proceed to step S72008.

If it is determined in step S72002 that the opening conditions for the first opening/closing door 36b are not met (S72002: NO), proceed directly to step S72008.

If it is determined in step S72001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is open (S72001: YES), proceed to step S72005.

In step S72005, it is determined whether the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b has been met. The closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is met when the continuous open time (e.g., 15 seconds) for the first opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or when it is detected that a preset number of game balls have entered the first large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S72005 that the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b has been met (S72005: YES), the process proceeds to step S72006.

In step S72006, the first opening and closing door 36b is closed. Then, proceed to step S72007.

In step S72007, a first door closing command is set. The first door closing command is a command for the sub-side control device to recognize that the first door 36b is closed. The first door closing command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72007, proceed to step S72008.

If it is determined in step S72005 that the closing conditions for the first opening/closing door 36b are not met (S72005: NO), proceed directly to step S72008.

In step S72008, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 213 is open. If it is determined in step S72008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is not open (S72008: NO), the process proceeds to step S72009.

In step S72009, it is determined whether the opening conditions for the second door 213 have been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is time to open the second door 213. In step S72009, if it is determined that the opening conditions for the second door 213 have been met (S72009: YES), the process proceeds to step S72010.

In step S72010, the second opening and closing door 213 is opened. Then, proceed to step S72011.

In step S72011, a second door open command is set. The second door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second door 213 has been opened. The second door open command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72011, proceed to step S72015.

If it is determined in step S72009 that the opening conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are not met (S72009: NO), proceed directly to step S72015.

If it is determined in step S72008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is open (S72008: YES), proceed to step S72012.

In step S72012, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 have been met. The closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are met when the continuous open time (e.g., 15 seconds) for the second opening/closing door 213 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or when it is detected that a preset number of game balls have entered the second large winning opening 212. If it is determined in step S72012 that the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 have been met (S72012: YES), the process proceeds to step S72013.

In step S72013, the second opening and closing door 213 is closed. Then, proceed to step S72014.

In step S72014, a second door closing command is set. The second door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second door 213 is closed. The second door closing command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72014, proceed to step S72015.

If it is determined in step S72012 that the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are not met (S72012: NO), proceed directly to step S72015.

In step S72015, it is determined whether the storage valve 216 is open. If it is determined in step S72015 that the storage valve 216 is not open (S72015: NO), proceed to step S72016.

In step S72016, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the storage valve 216 have been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is time to open the storage valve 216. If it is determined in step S72016 that the conditions for opening the storage valve 216 have been met (S72016: YES), the process proceeds to step S72017.

In step S72017, the storage valve 216 is opened. Then, proceed to step S72018.

In step S72018, the Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned ON. The Kroon ball entry permission flag is a flag provided to prevent a V-entry jackpot from occurring even if a defect or abnormality occurs in the structure of the storage valve 216, causing a gaming ball to unintentionally flow from the storage section 218 to the Kroon 220 via the flow path 211 and enter the V-entry port 222. The Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened during the jackpot opening/closing process, and is turned OFF when a gaming ball enters the V-entry port 222 or non-V-entry port 224 provided in the Kroon 220. After executing step S72018, proceed to step S72019.

In step S72019, a storage valve open command is set. The storage valve open command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the storage valve 216 has opened. The storage valve open command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72019, the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S72016 that the conditions for opening the storage valve 216 are not met (S72016: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S72015 that the storage valve 216 is open (S72015: YES), proceed to step S72020.

In step S72020, it is determined whether the closing condition for the storage valve 216 has been met. The closing condition for the storage valve 216 is met when it is detected that the continuous open time (e.g., 2 seconds) for the storage valve 216 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed. In step S72020, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 has been met (S72020: YES), the process proceeds to step S72021.

In step S72021, the storage valve 216 is closed. Then, proceed to step S72022.

In step S72022, a storage valve close command is set. The storage valve close command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the storage valve 216 has closed. The storage valve close command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72022, the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S72020 that the conditions for closing the storage valve 216 are not met (S72020: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 331: S71628).

Figure 337 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S72101, it is determined whether the V-winning jackpot flag is ON. In [Case 2] of Figure 315, if a small jackpot occurs in play round U2 and then a game ball enters the V-winning opening 222 during the opening and closing execution mode, a new jackpot is confirmed, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, an opening and closing execution mode based on the new jackpot is initiated. In this step S72101, in order to determine whether such processing should proceed, it is determined whether the V-winning jackpot flag is ON during the transition processing at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S72101 that the V-winning jackpot flag is not ON (S72101: NO), proceed to step S72102.

In step S72102, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a jackpot with high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S72102 that the current jackpot is a jackpot with high frequency support mode (S72102: YES), proceed to step S72103.

In step S72103, the value of the play count counter PNC corresponding to the jackpot type is set. In other words, the number of play times that can be performed with high frequency support is set in the play count counter PNC. The number of play times that can be performed with high frequency support is set for each jackpot type. The number of play times that can be performed with high frequency support set for each jackpot type has been explained in Figure 312, so explanation will be omitted here.

After executing step S72103, proceed to step S72104 and turn the PNC count flag ON. Then proceed to step S72105.

In step S72105, a high-frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize information regarding the number of games that can be played in high-frequency support. The high-frequency support mode command is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72105, proceed to step S72106.

In step S72106, a flag clearing process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag and the second symbol display section flag are turned OFF. After executing step S72106, the process proceeds to step S72107.

In step S72107, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

If it is determined in step S72102 that the current jackpot is not a jackpot with a high frequency support mode (S72102: NO), proceed to step S72108.

In step S72108, the flag clearing process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, V-winning jackpot flag, and second symbol display unit flag are turned OFF. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72101 that the V-winning jackpot flag is ON (S72101: YES), proceed to step S72109.

In step S72109, V winning processing is executed. V winning processing will be described later. After executing step S72109, step S72110 is executed. In step S72110, a high frequency support mode command is set. As described above, the high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output processing of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72110, proceed to step S72111.

In step S72111, the open/close execution mode start command is set. As described above, the open/close execution mode start command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close execution mode is being started. The open/close execution mode start command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). After executing step S72111, proceed to step S72112.

In step S72112, the V entry jackpot flag is turned OFF. After step S72112 is executed, processing proceeds to step S71611 in the game state transition processing (Figure 331). As described above, in [Case 2] in Figure 315, if a small win occurs in game round U2 and a game ball then enters the V entry port 222 during the open/close execution mode, a new jackpot is confirmed, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the open/close execution mode based on the new jackpot is initiated. For this reason, after step S72112 is executed, processing proceeds to step S71611 in the game state transition processing (Figure 331). The game state transition processing (Figure 331) has already been explained, so further explanation will be omitted. This concludes the explanation of the transition processing at the end of the ending period.

<V prize processing>
Next, the V winning process will be described. The V winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the transition process at the end of the ending period (FIG. 337: S72109).

Figure 338 is a flowchart showing the V winning process. In step S72201, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. If it is determined in step S72201 that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (S72201: NO), the process proceeds to step S72202.

In step S72202, the allocation table for V-winning, triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole (Fig. 312(b)), is referenced, and the type of jackpot in the V-winning jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball entry process for the Kruun (Fig. 324). After executing step S72202, proceed to step S72204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72201 that the second pattern display unit flag is ON (S72201: YES), proceed to step S72203.

In step S72203, the allocation table for the second starting hole (Figure 312 (c)) is referenced, and the jackpot type for the V winning jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball entry process for the Kruun (Figure 324). After executing step S72203, proceed to step S72204.

As can be seen from steps S72202 and S72203, even if a gaming ball enters the same V entry port 222 resulting in a V entry jackpot, the allocation table referenced is different between a case where a gaming ball enters the first start port 33 resulting in a small win, causing the second opening/closing door 213 to open and the gaming ball to enter the V entry port 222 resulting in a V entry jackpot, and a case where a gaming ball enters the second start port 34 resulting in a small win, causing the second opening/closing door 213 to open and the gaming ball to enter the V entry port 222 resulting in a V entry jackpot.

In step S72204, the jackpot type identified in step S72202 or step S72203 is set as the jackpot type for the V prize jackpot. After step S72204 is executed, the V prize processing is terminated.

<Electrical support treatment>
Next, the electric support processing will be described. The electric support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 325: S71008).

Figure 339 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing. In step S72301, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step S72301, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (S72301: NO), the process proceeds to step S72302.

In step S72302, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is turned ON if the electric feature opening lottery, which determines whether or not the electric feature 34a will be opened, is selected to open, and is turned OFF if the support in progress flag is ON. In step S72302, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (S72302: NO), the program proceeds to step S72303.

In step S72303, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In step S72303, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S72303: NO), the main power support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S72303: YES), the processing proceeds to step S72304.

In step S72304, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step S72304 that it is time to end the variable display (S72304: YES), the process proceeds to step S72305, where a miss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the miss display displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72304 that it is not time to end the variable display (S72304: NO), the process proceeds to step S72306.

In step S72306, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S72306 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (S72306: NO), the main electric reel support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72306 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (S72306: YES), the processing proceeds to step S72307.

In step S72307, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S72307 that the device is in high-frequency support mode (S72307: YES), proceed to step S72308.

In step S72308, a lottery to open an electric feature is held. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 461, the electric feature opening lottery is won (see Figure 313 (b)). In addition, simultaneously with the electric feature opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 seconds). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, proceed to step S72309.

In step S72309, it is determined whether the result of the electric reel opening lottery in step S72308 is a support win. If it is determined in step S72309 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is a support win (S72309: YES), the process proceeds to step S72310, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric reel 34a has been opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S72311.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72309 that the result of the electric feature opening lottery is not a support win (S72309: NO), the process proceeds to step S72311 without executing the processing of step S72310.

In step S72311, it is determined whether the play count counter area is "0". When in high frequency support mode, the play count counter is decremented by 1 each time a play is completed. If it is determined in step S72311 that the play count counter area is not "0" (S72311: NO), the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72311 that the play count counter area is "0", the processing proceeds to step S72312, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step S72312, the processing proceeds to step S72313.

In step S72313, the PNC count flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step S72314.

In step S72314, a low-frequency support mode command, which includes information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the electric support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S72314 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the external output processing of normal processing (Figure 325: step S71003). Based on receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S72307 that the mode is not high frequency support mode (S72307: NO), the program proceeds to step S72315, where a lottery is held to open an electric feature. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric feature opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric feature opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e., 29.5 seconds). The program then proceeds to step S72316.

In step S72316, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step S72315 is a support win. If it is determined in step S72316 that there is no support win (S72316: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72316 that there is a support win (S72316: YES), the processing proceeds to step S72317, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S72302 that the support win flag is ON (S72302: YES), the process proceeds to step S72318, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol unit 38. If it is determined in step S72318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S72318: NO), the normal symbol unit 38 is currently displaying a fluctuating pattern, so the main electric symbol support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S72318: YES), the process proceeds to step S72319.

In step S72319, a win display is set. This ends the display of the changing symbols on the regular unit 38 with the win display still displayed. Then, proceed to step S72320, where the support in progress flag is turned ON and the support win flag is turned OFF. Then, the main role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S72301 that the support flag is ON (S72301: YES), the process proceeds to step S72321, where an electric open/close control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. The electric open/close control process will be described later. After step S72321 is executed, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electrical switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 339: S72321).

Figure 340 is a flowchart showing the electric device opening/closing control process. In step S72401, it is determined whether the electric device 34a is open. Whether the electric device 34a is open is determined by whether the electric device drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the electric device 34a is open (S72401: YES), the process proceeds to step S72402.

In step S72402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a. In step S72402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S72402: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a has not ended, the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S72402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S72402: YES), the process proceeds to step S72403, where a closing process is performed to control the electric device 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being open, is "0," the electric device 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is then used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250." After executing step S72403, the process proceeds to step S72404.

In step S72404, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S72405, where it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S72405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S72405: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S72405: YES), the process proceeds to step S72406, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. The main electric role opening/closing control process is then terminated.

If it is determined in step S72401 that the electric role 34a is not open (S72401: NO), proceed to step S72407 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the closed state of the electric role 34a. If it is determined in step S72407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S72407: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S72407: YES), proceed to step S72408 to execute an opening process that controls the electric role 34a to the open state. Then, proceed to step S72409.

In step S72409, it is determined whether the device is in opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that the device is not in opening/closing execution mode (S72409: NO), the process proceeds to step S72410, where it is determined whether the device is in high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S72410 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S72410: YES), the process proceeds to step S72411, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). The main electric switch opening/closing control process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72409 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S72409: YES), or if it is determined in step S72410 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S72410: NO), proceed to step S72412 and set the second timer counter area T2 to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). Then, this electric opening/closing control process ends.

G6. Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 341 is a block diagram that mainly shows the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components, such as the power supply device 85, have been omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on the audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is a device that incorporates a ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, part of the area of RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92; they may each be configured as individual chips.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the performance operation button 24, speaker 46, various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102; they may each be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various received commands, thereby controlling the VDP 105 (specifically, generating internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 104 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 102.

VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP 105 adjusts the timing of MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM 107 from character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and other data. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106, with each character ROM 106 responsible for storing image data and other data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

Video RAM 107 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively; the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 will also be referred to as the audio/light MPU 92, audio/light ROM 93, and audio/light RAM 94, respectively; and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will also be referred to as the display MPU 102.

G7. Various processes executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the acoustic/optical side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 342 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is executed repeatedly at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing is explained below.

In step S74101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio-visual RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio-visual RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. Commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step S74101, the process proceeds to step S74102.

In step S74102, a hold command response process is executed. In the hold command response process, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a hold command has been received, a process corresponding to that hold command is executed. Details of the hold command response process will be described later. After executing step S74102, the process proceeds to step S74103.

In step S74103, the game round presentation setting process is executed. In the game round presentation setting process, it is determined whether a variation command and a variation type command have been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that these commands have been received, the content (type) of presentation to be executed in that game round is determined, and the determined presentation is set to be executed in that game round. Details of the game round presentation setting process will be described later. After executing step S74103, the process proceeds to step S74104.

In step S74104, the standby period effect setting process is executed. In the standby period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the standby period described above is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during that standby period. Details of the standby period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74104, proceed to step S74105.

In step S74105, the opening period effect setting process is executed. In the opening period effect setting process, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an opening command has been received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the opening period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Details of the opening period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74105, the process proceeds to step S74106.

In step S74106, the opening/closing processing period performance setting process is executed. In the opening/closing processing period performance setting process, the content (type) of the performance to be executed during the opening/closing processing period is determined, and the determined performance is set to be executed during the opening/closing processing period. Details of the opening/closing processing period performance setting process will be described later. After executing step S74106, proceed to step S74107.

In step S74107, the ending period effect setting process is executed. In the ending period effect setting process, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an ending command has been received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the ending period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during that ending period. Details of the ending period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74107, proceed to step S74108.

In step S74108, a command transmission process is executed. In the command transmission process, various effect commands for displaying video corresponding to the effects set in the various effect setting processes described above are transmitted to the display control device 100. After executing step S74108, the process proceeds to step S74109.

In step S74109, light emission control processing is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control processing, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processing of steps S74102 to S74107 above. In other words, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps S74102 to S74107 above. After executing step S74109, the program proceeds to step S74110.

In step S74110, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the processes of steps S74102 to S74107 above. In other words, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that audio corresponding to the effects set in steps S74102 to S74107 above is output. After step S74110 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Pending command response processing>
Next, the hold command response process will be described. The hold command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 342: S74102).

Figure 343 is a flowchart showing the hold command response process. In step S74201, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S74201 that a hold command has been received (S74201: YES), the process proceeds to step S74202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74201 that a hold command has not been received (S74201: NO), the hold command response process ends.

In step S74202, an update process is executed when a ball enters. In the update process when a ball enters, processing is executed to enable the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information items acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 33, the number of pending information items acquired based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 34, and the total number of these pending information items. Details of the update process when a ball enters in step S74202 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of pending information items acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 will be referred to as the "first pending number," the number of pending information items acquired based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 will be referred to as the "second pending number," and the sum of the first pending number and the second pending number will be referred to as the "total pending number." After executing step S74202, proceed to step S74203.

In step S74203, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled based on the number of hold information items acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 identified in step S74202 and the number of hold information items acquired based on the game ball entering the second start port 34. After step S74203 is executed, this hold command response process is terminated.

<Update process when the ball goes in>
Next, the update process when a ball goes in will be described. The update process when a ball goes in is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command response process (FIG. 343: S74202).

Figure 344 is a flowchart showing the update process when a ball enters the game. In step S74301, it is determined whether the pending command to be read in this timer interrupt process was sent based on a game ball entering the first start hole 33. If it is determined in step S74301 that the pending command to be read in this timer interrupt process was sent based on a game ball entering the first start hole 33 (S74301: YES), proceed to step S74302, where update processing is performed for the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The first pending number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information obtained based on a game ball entering the first start hole 33. In the update processing for the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the information on the pending number included in the pending command to be read in this timer interrupt process. After executing step S74302, proceed to step S74304, which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S74301 that the pending command to be read in this timer interrupt process was not sent based on a game ball entering the first start port 33 (S74301: NO), that is, if it is determined that the pending command was sent based on a game ball entering the second start port 34, the process proceeds to step S74303, where an update process is performed on the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The second pending number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information obtained based on a game ball entering the second start port 34. In the update process of the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the information on the pending number included in the command to be read in this timer interrupt process. After executing step S74303, the process proceeds to step S74304.

The reason for the processing of steps S74302 and S74303 as described above will now be explained. In this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio and light-emitting control unit 90. Therefore, if power is cut off while reserved information related to game balls entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60, the reserved information will be stored and maintained in the main control unit 60, but the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 will recognize that there are zero reserved information items. In this case, if the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 were configured to count up the first reserved item number counter area or the second reserved item number counter area each time it receives a reserve command, a problem could arise in which the number of reserved information items actually stored in the main control unit 60 would not match the number of reserved information items recognized by the audio and light-emitting control unit 90. In contrast, in the present embodiment described above, the main control unit 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio and light emission control unit 90 sets the information on the number of held items included in the command in the first held item number counter area or the second held item number counter area each time it receives a hold command, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step S74304, an update process is executed for the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The total reserved number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to determine the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on game balls entering the first starting hole 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on game balls entering the second starting hole 34. In this update process, the information in the total reserved number counter area is updated to the sum of the information on the number of reserved items measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information on the number of reserved items measured in the second reserved number counter area. After executing step S74304, the update process for this ball entry is terminated.

<Game performance setting process>
Next, the game play effect setting process will be described. The game play effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 342: S74103).

Figure 345 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation setting process. In step S74401, it is determined whether a fluctuation command and a fluctuation type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S74401 that a fluctuation command and a fluctuation type command have not been received (S74401: NO), this game round presentation setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74401 that a fluctuation command and a fluctuation type command have been received (S74401: YES), the process proceeds to step S74402.

In step S74402, the information contained in the received fluctuation command and fluctuation type command is read and stored. Specifically, whether the game round to be started is based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, whether there is a jackpot or a small jackpot as a result of the winning lottery for that game round, whether there is a reach or not, and the fluctuation time for that game round are read and stored. Then, proceed to step S74403.

In step S74403, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. As described above, the specific processing command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when the result of the winning lottery for a game round is a jackpot and it is determined that the specific processing shown in Case 1 above will be executed. In step S74403, if it is determined that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74403: YES), the process proceeds to step S74404, where the presentation pattern corresponding to the game round in which the specific processing (the processing shown in Case 1) will be executed is set to be executed in that game round. Thereafter, this game round presentation setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74403 that a specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74403: NO), the process proceeds to step S74405, where it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for this game is a small prize based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33. In this embodiment, a small prize won based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also called a "special 1 small prize," and a small prize won based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also called a "special 2 small prize."

In step S74405, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for this game is a special 1 small win (S74405: YES), the process proceeds to step S74406, where a presentation pattern corresponding to a special 1 small win is set to be executed in that game. Note that the presentation pattern corresponding to a special 1 small win is a presentation pattern that includes the presentation executed in the game shown in Case 2 above. Thereafter, the presentation setting process for this game is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74405 that the result of the winning lottery for this game is not a special 1 small win (S74405: NO), proceed to step S74407 and set a presentation pattern corresponding to any other result of the winning lottery (a big win that does not execute specific processing, a small win that is not a special 1 small win, a miss, etc.) to be executed in that game. Then, the presentation setting process for this game is terminated.

<Waiting period effect setting process>
Next, the standby period effect setting process will be described. The standby period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 342: S74104).

Figure 346 is a flowchart showing the standby period effect setting process. In step S74501, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S74501 that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74501: YES), the process proceeds to step S74502, where the sound/light specific processing flag is set to ON. The sound/light specific processing flag is a flag stored in the sound/light RAM 94, and is used by the audio/light emitting control device 90 to determine whether or not to execute an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned specific processing (case 1) in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, if the opening/closing execution mode is started with the sound/light specific processing flag set to ON, an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned specific processing (case 1) will be executed in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S74502, the process proceeds to step S74503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74501 that a specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74501: NO), step S74502 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S74503.

In step S74503, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S74503 that an opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74503: NO), the standby period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74503 that an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74503: YES), the process proceeds to step S74504, where it is determined whether the above-mentioned sound/light specific processing flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S74504 that the specific processing flag for sound and light is ON, that is, if the above-mentioned case 1 applies (S74504: YES), proceed to step S74505, and set the right-hit suggestion effect and W-chance suggestion effect to be executed during the waiting period. Then, this waiting period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74504 that the specific processing flag for sound and light is not ON (S74504: NO), proceed to step S74506, and set the right-hit suggestion effect to be executed during the waiting period. Then, this waiting period effect setting process is terminated.

<Opening period performance setting process>
Next, the opening period effect setting process will be described. The opening period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 342: S74105).

Figure 347 is a flowchart showing the opening period effect setting process. In step S74601, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, as described above, the opening command contains the result of the lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period). Therefore, the audio and light emission control device 90 can determine the result of the lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period) based on the information contained in the received opening command. If it is determined in step S74601 that an opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74601: NO), the opening period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74601 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74601: YES), the process proceeds to step S74602.

In step S74602, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a jackpot, based on the information contained in the received opening command. If it is determined in step S74602 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a jackpot (S74602: YES), the process proceeds to step S74603, where an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, a right-hit suggestion effect is set to be executed during the opening period. The opening period effect setting process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74602 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was not a jackpot (S74602: NO), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a small jackpot, the process proceeds to step S74604.

In step S74604, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a special 1 small win. If it is determined in step S74604 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a special 1 small win (S74604: YES), proceed to step S74605, and set the opening effect corresponding to the special 1 small win to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in Case 1 above, the right-hit suggestion effect and the W chance suggestion effect are set to be executed during the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74604 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was not a special 1 small win (S74604: NO), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a special 2 small win, proceed to step S74606, and set the opening effect corresponding to the special 2 small win to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-hit suggestion effect is set to be executed during the opening period. After that, the opening period effect setting process ends.

<Opening/closing processing period effect setting process>
Next, the opening/closing process period effect setting process will be described. The opening/closing process period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 342: S74106).

Figure 348 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing processing period effect setting process. In step S74701, the first chance effect setting process is executed. In the first chance effect setting process, processing related to setting the first chance effect in case 1 and case 2 described above is executed. Details of the first chance effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74701, proceed to step S74702.

In step S74702, the non-storage second chance effect setting process is executed. In the non-storage second chance effect setting process, it is determined whether game balls have been stored in the storage section 218 in the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2, and if game balls have not been stored in the storage section 218, the second chance effect is set to be executed. Details of the non-storage second chance effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74702, the process proceeds to step S74703.

In step S74703, the V winning effect setting process is executed. In the V winning effect setting process, it is determined whether a game ball has accumulated in the V winning opening 222, and if a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, it is set to execute the V winning effect. Details of the V winning effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74703, the process proceeds to step S74704.

In step S74704, the second chance effect setting process for when a V prize is not awarded is executed. In the second chance effect setting process for when a V prize is not awarded, if a game ball is stored in the storage section 218 in the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2, but the game ball does not enter the V prize opening 222, but enters the non-V prize opening 224, the second chance effect is set to be executed. Details of the second chance effect setting process for when a V prize is not awarded will be described later. After executing step S74704, proceed to step S74705.

In step S74705, the effect for the opening/closing processing period corresponding to another jackpot type is set to be executed. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot type in which an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 does not open is selected, the effect to be executed during the opening/closing processing period of that opening/closing execution mode is set. After step S74705 is executed, this opening/closing processing period effect setting process ends.

<First chance effect setting process>
Next, the first chance effect setting process will be described. The first chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period effect setting process (FIG. 348: S74701).

Figure 349 is a flowchart showing the first chance effect setting process. In step S74801, it is determined whether a second door opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, the second door 213 opens when a big win that executes a specific process or a small win is won in the winning lottery. The second door opening command also includes the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 231 (big win, small win, etc.). Therefore, the audio and light emission control device 90 can determine the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 231 (big win, small win, etc.) based on the information included in the received second door opening command. In step S74801, if it is determined that a second door opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74801: NO), the first chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74801 that a second door open command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74801: YES), the process proceeds to step S74802.

In step S74802, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot. If it is determined in step S74802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot (S74802: YES), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot that executes a specific process, the process proceeds to step S74803, and the first chance effect in case 1 described above is set to be executed. After step S74803 is executed, the first chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was not a jackpot (S74802: NO), the process proceeds to step S74804.

In step S74804, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win. If it is determined in step S74804 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win (S74804: YES), the process proceeds to step S74805, and the first chance effect in case 2 described above is set to be executed. After step S74805 is executed, the first chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74804 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was not a special 1 small win (S74804: NO), the first chance effect setting process is terminated.

<Second chance effect setting process when not storing>
Next, the second chance effect setting process when no reserve is performed will be described. The second chance effect setting process when no reserve is performed is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing processing period effect setting process (FIG. 348: S74702).

Figure 350 is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when not storing. In step S74901, it is determined whether a second large prize entry command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S74901 that a second large prize entry command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74901: NO), the process proceeds to step S74904, described below. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74901 that a second large prize entry command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74901: YES), the process proceeds to step S74902, where it is determined whether the second large prize entry command for sound and light is ON. The sound and light second large winning opening ball entry flag is a flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94, and is a flag used by the sound and light control device 90 to determine whether a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 212, i.e., whether a game ball has been stored in the storage section 218.

If it is determined in step S74902 that the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is not ON (S74902: NO), the process proceeds to step S74903, where the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S74904. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74902 that the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is ON (S74902: YES), the process proceeds directly to step S74904. In other words, if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 212 and the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is not ON, the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is set to ON.

In step S74904, it is determined whether a second door close command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S74904 that a second door close command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74904: NO), the non-reservation second chance performance setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74904 that a second door close command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74904: YES), the process proceeds to step S74905.

In step S74905, it is determined whether the sound and light second large prize opening ball entry flag is ON, i.e., whether a gaming ball has entered the second large prize opening 212 and been stored in the storage section 218. If it is determined in step S74905 that the sound and light second large prize opening ball entry flag is ON (S74905: YES), the non-storage second chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74905 that the sound and light second large prize opening ball entry flag is not ON (S74905: NO), the process proceeds to step S74906.

In step S74906, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot. In step S74906, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot (S74906: YES), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot that executes a specific process, the process proceeds to step S74907, where the second chance effect and jackpot announcement effect in case 1 described above are set to be executed before the start of the second round of the opening/closing processing period. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S74908, where the effects to be executed during the opening/closing processing period from the second round onwards are set. Thereafter, this non-accumulation second chance effect setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S74906 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was not a jackpot (S74906: NO), the process proceeds to step S74909, where it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win. If it is determined in step S74909 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win (S74909: YES), the process proceeds to step S74910, where the second chance effect and the loss notification effect in case 2 described above are set to be executed. Thereafter, the non-accumulation second chance effect setting process is terminated.

<V winning effect setting process>
Next, the V winning effect setting process will be described. The V winning effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period effect setting process (FIG. 348: S74703).

Figure 351 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process. In step S75001, it is determined whether a V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. The V winning command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222 as a result of a small win in the winning lottery.

If it is determined in step S75001 that a V entry command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S75001: YES), the process proceeds to step S75002, where the V entry jackpot effect is set to be executed. As described above, the V entry jackpot effect is an effect that indicates that a gaming ball has entered the V entry port 222 and that a jackpot has occurred. After executing step S75002, the process proceeds to step S75005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S75001 that a V winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S75001: NO), proceed to step S75003.

In step S75003, it is determined whether a dummy V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. The dummy V winning command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222 as a result of a jackpot in the winning lottery.

If it is determined in step S75003 that a dummy V entry command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S75003: YES), the process proceeds to step S75004, where a V entry jackpot effect is set to be executed. As described above, the V entry jackpot effect is an effect that suggests that a gaming ball has entered the V entry port 222 and that a jackpot has occurred. As described above, in this embodiment, the V entry jackpot effect set to be executed in step S75002 and the V entry jackpot effect set to be executed in step S75004 are effects of the same or similar content. After executing step S75004, the process proceeds to step S75005.

In step S75005, the second large winning slot ball entry flag for sound and light described above is turned OFF. The V winning effect setting process then ends.

<Second chance effect setting process when V is not won>
Next, the second chance effect setting process when V is not won will be described. The second chance effect setting process when V is not won is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening and closing processing period effect setting process (FIG. 348: S74704).

Figure 352 is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when a V ball does not win. In step S75101, it is determined whether a V non-winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. The V non-winning command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when the gaming ball enters the non-V winning port 224. If it is determined in step S75101 that a V non-winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S75101: NO), the second chance effect setting process when a V ball does not win is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S75101 that a V non-winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S75101: YES), the process proceeds to step S75102.

In step S75102, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 213 was a jackpot. If it is determined in step S75102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 213 was a jackpot (S75102: YES), i.e., if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 213 was a jackpot that executes a specific process, the process proceeds to step S75103, where the second chance effect and jackpot announcement effect described above in Case 1 are set to execute. After executing step S75103, the process proceeds to step S75104, where the second big winning slot ball entry flag for sound and light described above is turned OFF. The process then ends the second chance effect setting process when the main V is not entered. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S75102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 213 was not a jackpot (S75102: NO), the process proceeds to step S75105.

In step S75105, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win. If it is determined in step S75105 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win (S75105: YES), the process proceeds to step S75106, where the second chance effect and the loss notification effect in case 2 described above are set to be executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S74804 described above, where the ball entry flag for the second large winning slot for sound and light is turned OFF. Then, the second chance effect setting process for when this V does not win is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S75105 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was not a special 1 small win (S75105: NO), the process proceeds to step S74804 described above, where the ball entry flag for the second large winning slot for sound and light is turned OFF. After that, the second chance effect setting process will end when the main V is not won.

<Ending period performance setting process>
Next, the ending period effect setting process will be described. The ending period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 342: S74107).

Figure 353 is a flowchart showing the ending period effect setting process. In step S75201, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, the ending command contains the result of the lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period). Therefore, the audio and light emission control device 90 can determine the result of the lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period) based on the information contained in the received ending command. If it is determined in step S75201 that an ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S75201: NO), this ending period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S75201 that an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S75201: YES), the process proceeds to step S75202.

In step S75202, it is determined whether the result of the lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a jackpot, based on the information contained in the received ending command. If it is determined in step S75202 that the result of the lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a jackpot (S75202: YES), proceed to step S75203, and set the ending effect corresponding to the type of jackpot to be executed during the ending period. Then, the ending period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S75202 that the result of the lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was not a jackpot (S75202: NO), that is, if the result of the lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a small jackpot, the ending period effect setting process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include main processing, which is executed repeatedly from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90, and V interrupt processing, which is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected simultaneously, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 354 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step S75301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written to the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Other settings required for initialization are also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S75302.

In step S75302, interrupt permission is set. Once interrupt permission is set, the main processing executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, once interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 355 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S75401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described below, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 356 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and then instructs the VDP 105 to draw and display that image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated by the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed. As a result, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process for the image is completed, which prevents the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information currently being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are explained below.

In step S75501, command response processing is executed. In command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing (Figure 355) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to that command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command has been stored, control of image drawing and display is initiated so that the performance mode specified by that performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a performance operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed. If it is determined that it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode corresponding to the pressing of the performance operation button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, the contents of the next command are analyzed without executing any processing.

The command response process (S75501) analyzes all commands currently stored in the command memory area and executes processing corresponding to all analyzed commands. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed every 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command memory area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of a performance is set by the audio and light control device 90 and the performance begins, it is highly likely that various commands for specifying the content of that performance will be stored in the command memory area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the type of performance, such as the preview performance or LCD pattern set by the audio and light control device 90, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that type is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step S75502, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which was set by the command response process (S75501) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S75503.

In step S75503, task processing is executed. In task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as determined by the display setting process (S75502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up that image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S75504.

In step S75504, drawing processing is executed. In drawing processing, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters required to draw each character, as determined by task processing (S75503), are sent to VDP 105. VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and sends the image data to pattern display device 41 along with a drive signal to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S75505, where other processing is executed, and V interrupt processing is terminated.

As explained above, whether a jackpot is won (Case 1) or a small jackpot is won (Case 2) in the winning lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the first symbol display unit 37a will display a symbol pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery, but no effect will be executed suggesting the result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio sound. Therefore, a player who is aware of the result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio sound will not be able to recognize the result of that game round at the end of the game round. As a result, even if a player has won a small jackpot, this can give the player the feeling of anticipation that they may have won a jackpot.

Furthermore, after the game has finished, in both Case 1 and Case 2, the right-hit suggestion effect and the second chance suggestion effect are executed, so even during the period when these effects are being executed after the game has finished, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the player may have won a big jackpot rather than a small jackpot in the lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot is not determined at the time of the lottery, but is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode. Once the type of jackpot is determined, the round lamp on the round display unit 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of rounds played that correspond to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, if a small jackpot is won, the round lamp does not light up. In other words, whether a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the round lamp does not light up immediately after the end of a play round, so the player can avoid having to determine whether they won a jackpot or a small jackpot in that play round based on the round lamp after the play round has ended.

As a result, after a round of play ends, the player is not aware of the results of the winning lottery until they make a right hit and cause the game ball to enter the type determination gate 202, and this allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time that they may have won a big win rather than a small win. In other words, even after a round of play ends and the opening and closing execution mode based on a big win or small win begins, this allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, attracting their attention to the game. Furthermore, when the type of big win is determined, the player is required to make a right hit and cause the game ball to enter the type determination gate 202, which allows the player to be actively involved in determining the type of big win, and allows the player to further focus their attention on the game during the opening and closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is confirmed when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222, the pachinko machine 10 determines the type of jackpot triggered by the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222. This allows the player to feel a sense of speed in the progress of the game when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot is determined by having the gaming ball enter the type determination gate 202, and the game progresses relatively slowly until the round of play begins. As a result, the game progresses at a different pace depending on whether a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 or a jackpot is confirmed when a gaming ball enters the V winning hole 222, adding variety to the player's expectations for the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In Case 1, even though a jackpot is won in the lottery for game round U1 and a game ball subsequently enters V winning slot 222, the round of play that was initiated as a result of the jackpot win in the lottery for game round U1 continues, the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering V winning slot 222 is not confirmed, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the game ball entering V winning slot 222 is not initiated. Furthermore, the game ball entering V winning slot 222 does not grant the player any benefits, and the game status is not changed. On the other hand, in case 2, if a small prize is won in the winning lottery for game round U2 and the game ball then enters the V winning opening 222, a big prize is confirmed, and after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small prize win in the winning lottery for game round U2 ends, a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by the big prize based on the game ball entering the V winning opening 222 begins. In other words, since a bonus may or may not be awarded to the player when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during play, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the player is allowed to guess whether or not a bonus will be awarded, and a sense of anticipation can be created in the player that a bonus may be awarded.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 222, the player is prompted to guess whether the result of the lottery in the game that triggered the gaming ball to enter the V winning slot 222 will be a big win or a small win, giving the player an even greater sense of anticipation.

In addition, in case 1, when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222, a V winning jackpot presentation is executed in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, even though no special benefit is awarded in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222. In case 2, when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222, a special benefit is awarded in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, and a V winning jackpot presentation is executed in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222. Therefore, even in cases where no special benefit is awarded in response to the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in a player who recognizes that a V winning jackpot has been executed, that a special benefit may be awarded.

In case 1, even if a gaming ball enters the V winning hole 222, no special bonus will be awarded as a result of that ball entering. However, the first chance performance executes an effect that encourages the player to enter the V winning hole 222. This gives players who recognize that this effect has been executed hope that a special bonus may be awarded, and further encourages the player to launch the gaming ball in a manner that will result in the gaming ball entering the V winning hole 222.

Furthermore, in Case 1, when a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 222, even though the first round of the round game that was executed as a result of winning the jackpot in the lottery for game round U1 ends and the second round (2R) begins, from the second round onwards, an effect is executed that suggests that a new opening/closing execution mode has begun. By doing this, the player can be made to perceive as if a new opening/closing execution mode has begun based on the gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222, and a sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player. In other words, a new sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player during the round game that was executed as a result of winning the jackpot in the lottery for game round U1.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, the specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute a specific process, and then determines the number of rounds to be played corresponding to the jackpot. In other words, whether or not to open and close the second opening and closing door 213 as part of a round of play and the number of rounds to be played are determined separately. Therefore, various operating modes of the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 during round play can be realized by combining whether or not the second opening and closing door 213 is opened and closed with the number of rounds to be played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

G8. Modification of the seventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, including the following modifications: Note that in the modifications described below, descriptions of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

G8-1. Variation 1:
In the seventh embodiment, the same presentation pattern may be set for the presentation executed in a game run in case 1, i.e., the presentation executed in a game run when a big win is won in the winning lottery in a game run triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and when it is decided to execute a specific process in the specific process execution determination process, and the presentation executed in a game run in case 2, i.e., the presentation executed in a game run when a small win is won in the winning lottery in a game run triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33. By setting the same presentation pattern for case 1 and case 2, it becomes even more difficult for the player to determine whether the game run is case 1 or case 2, and the player can be made to feel even more hopeful that the game run in question may have won the winning lottery.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a presentation pattern table is provided in which multiple dedicated presentation patterns for Case 1 and Case 2 are set corresponding to the variable time of the play round, and a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time of the play round is selected from the presentation pattern table. By selecting a presentation pattern from the same presentation pattern table for Case 1 and Case 2, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether it is Case 1 or Case 2, and this gives the player a sense of anticipation that the play round in question may have been won in the lottery.

G8-2. Variation 2:
In the seventh embodiment described above, when a jackpot is confirmed as a result of a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, a configuration is adopted in which the type of jackpot is determined as a result of the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the type of jackpot is determined by having the gaming ball enter the type determination gate 202 after the gaming ball has entered the V winning port 222 and a jackpot is confirmed, just as in the case in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game session that is executed as a result of a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33. By doing this, the process for determining the type of jackpot can be unified and the process simplified in three cases: when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game session triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port 33; when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game session triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 34; and when a jackpot is confirmed when the game ball enters the V winning port 222.

A configuration may also be adopted in which a dedicated ball entry section (V entry jackpot type determination gate) is provided to determine the type of jackpot triggered by a gaming ball entering the V entry port 222. The V entry jackpot type determination gate may then be positioned downstream of the V entry port 222 in the direction of ball circulation. In this case, the jackpot type triggered by a gaming ball entering the V entry jackpot type determination gate can be determined using the same processing as the type determination processing in the seventh embodiment, thereby simplifying the processing.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the V-entry jackpot type determination gate is located in a position that is not downstream of the V-entry opening 222 in the direction of game ball circulation. For example, if a jackpot is confirmed when a game ball enters the V-entry opening 222, the V-entry jackpot type determination gate is located in a position where the game ball will not enter unless the mode of launching the game ball is changed. In this way, the player can play the game by changing the operating mode of the operating handle 25 in various ways, which can frequently change the flow of the game, encourage active player involvement in the game, and add variety to the player's anticipation.

G8-3. Variation 3:
In the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game played when a gaming ball enters the first starting gate 33, the type determination process is executed to determine the type of jackpot when the gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the end of the game. However, other configurations are also possible. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired when the gaming ball enters the first starting gate 33, and the jackpot type is determined in the variable start process for the game. In other words, the jackpot type is determined before the end of the game. If the game is a jackpot, the round lamp is illuminated in a display mode corresponding to the determined jackpot type when the game is over. The illumination timing is set to the end of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (immediately before the start of the opening/closing process period), and the opening period is set to be longer than usual. By doing this, the result of the winning lottery is not recognized until the round lamp is lit, and the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation that he or she may have won a jackpot for a relatively long period of time. In other words, even after the game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or small jackpot begins, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, and can be made to pay attention to the game. In the seventh embodiment, the timing for lighting the round lamp was the end of the opening period, but a configuration in which the lamp is lit at the start of the opening period may also be adopted.

G8-4. Variation 4:
In the seventh embodiment, the opening and closing process executed in Case 1 and Case 2 is set to an opening and closing scenario in which the second opening and closing door 213 opens and closes only once, but it is also possible to adopt an opening and closing scenario in which the second opening and closing door 213 opens and closes multiple times. This increases the probability that the gaming ball will enter the V winning opening 222, and can increase the player's sense of anticipation.

G8-5. Variation 5:
In the seventh embodiment, the specific process execution determination process was executed at the start of the fluctuation of a game turn executed when a game ball entered the first starting port 33, more specifically, during the fluctuation start process ( FIG. 328 ). However, it may be executed at any other timing as long as it is before the game turn ends and the standby period begins. For example, it may be executed during the game state transition process. In this way, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24 during a game turn executed when a game ball entered the first starting port 33, and the specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute a specific process based on whether or not the player operated the effect operation button 24 in response to the execution of the effect. Also, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute a specific process based on whether or not a game ball entered a specific ball entry port during a game turn executed when a game ball entered the first starting port 33. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which, in the case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed as a result of a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, the mode of processing in the opening/closing execution mode executed after the end of the game round is determined according to the mode of game progress during the game round. By adopting such a configuration, in the case where a jackpot is won, the player can concentrate on playing the game even in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round.

G8-6. Variation 6:
In the seventh embodiment, the result of the winning lottery for the reserved game turn is determined by a prior determination process. If the result of the prior determination process indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery for the reserved game turn, a specific process execution determination process may be executed as a process in the prior determination process to determine whether or not to execute a specific process such as that shown in Case 1 before the reserved game turn is executed as a game turn. Then, in a game turn executed before the reserved game turn is executed as a game turn, an effect suggesting that a specific process will be executed later (specific process execution suggestion effect) may be executed. This can give the player a sense of anticipation for the reserved game turn to be executed later. Furthermore, the prior determination process may determine whether the reserved game turn corresponds to Case 2, and similarly, a specific process execution suggestion effect may be executed. This allows the player a wider range of speculation about the outcome when the reserved game turn is executed as a game turn, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

G8-7. Variation 7:
In the seventh embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the right-hit suggestion effect executed during the waiting period (see FIG. 314 ), which is the period from the end of the game in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery to the start of the opening period, gradually changes over time as the waiting period progresses. The waiting period begins at the end of the game in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery and continues until a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202. In other words, the opening period does not begin unless a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202. If a player does not realize that they should hit right and instead hits left, the game will not proceed as intended, lowering the player's expectations.

Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the suggestion to the player to hit the right becomes increasingly stronger as the waiting period from the end of the game in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery passes. For example, a right-hit suggestion effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed between 0 and 5 seconds may be more strongly urging the player to hit the right than a right-hit suggestion effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed between 5 and 10 seconds; and further, a configuration may be adopted in which a right-hit suggestion effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed between 10 and 15 seconds is more strongly urging the player to hit the right than a right-hit suggestion effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed between 5 and 10 seconds.

As a suggestion to hit the right during the waiting period, for example, the sound suggesting a right hit may be gradually increased (or decreased) as the waiting period progresses, thereby gradually encouraging the player to hit the right; the size of the image indicating a right hit (e.g., an image of an arrow pointing right) may be gradually increased as the waiting period progresses, thereby gradually encouraging the player to hit the right; the brightness, lightness, color, etc. of the image indicating a right hit may be gradually changed (e.g., increased or decreased) as the waiting period progresses, thereby gradually encouraging the player to hit the right; or the tone of the voice guidance instructing the player to hit the right may be gradually increased as the waiting period progresses, thereby gradually encouraging the player to hit the right.

By adopting this configuration, it becomes easier for players to recognize that they are hitting the right hand during the waiting period, which promotes smooth gameplay. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in players' expectations and increase their interest in the game.

G8-8. Variation 8:
In the seventh embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to have one type determination gate, but a configuration including multiple type determination gates may also be adopted. For example, a type determination gate (hereinafter also referred to as the left-side type determination gate) may be provided in a position where the game ball is likely to enter when the player is playing from the left (e.g., the left side of the game board 30), and a type determination gate (hereinafter referred to as the right-side type determination gate) may be provided in a position where the game ball is likely to enter when the player is playing from the right (e.g., the right side of the game board 30). Then, for each value of the win random number counter C1 set to win a jackpot in the win/loss table for the first starting hole (see Figure 310), it is preset whether the type of jackpot will be determined by the game ball entering the type determination gate, the left-side type determination gate or the right-side type determination gate, after the jackpot is won. Then, after the end of the round of play in which the jackpot was won, a decision is made as to whether to execute an effect suggesting a left hit (left hit suggestion effect) or a right hit suggestion effect depending on the value of the hit random number counter C1 that resulted in the jackpot, and the suggestion effect is executed according to the result of the decision. By doing this, after the end of the round of play in which the jackpot was won, the player needs to decide how to operate the operating handle 25, which makes it possible to actively involve the player in the game and, as a result, to attract the player's attention to the game.

In addition, for each value of the winning random number counter C1 set to win a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the first starting gate (see Figure 310), a value that determines the type of jackpot when the gaming ball enters the left-side type determination gate, a value that determines the type of jackpot when the gaming ball enters the right-side type determination gate, or a value that determines the type of jackpot when the gaming ball enters either the left-side type determination gate or the right-side type determination gate may be set.

G8-9. Variation 9:
In the seventh embodiment, a configuration was used in which an effect (double chance effect) was executed to suggest that two opportunities (chances) for winning the jackpot were prepared during the waiting period in case 1 and the opening period in case 2, but a configuration may also be adopted in which an effect (single chance effect) is executed to suggest that one opportunity (chance) for winning the jackpot is prepared. In this case, the second chance effect can be omitted in each case, and therefore the processing required to execute the second chance effect can be omitted, thereby simplifying the processing.

Furthermore, in Case 1 and Case 2, a configuration may be adopted in which a double chance effect is executed and a single chance effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game even more in the period after the game round has ended.

G8-10. Variation 10:
In the seventh embodiment, a ball entering the V winning port 222 during the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a winning jackpot in a lottery, is essentially invalid, and only a ball entering the V winning port 222 during the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a winning jackpot in a lottery, is essentially valid. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which an operating mechanism (hereinafter also referred to as a V winning assist mechanism) is provided to assist the game ball in entering the V winning port 222 only during the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a winning jackpot in a lottery.

The V entry assist mechanism may, for example, be a mechanism (hereinafter also referred to as a non-V entry port closing mechanism) that temporarily closes only the non-V entry port 224 of the V entry port 222 and non-V entry port 224 provided on the crane 220. In this case, the non-V entry port closing mechanism assists the entry of game balls into the V entry port 222 only when entry into the V entry port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed as a result of winning a jackpot in a lottery, is substantially invalid, and therefore the operation of the non-V entry port closing mechanism does not substantially affect the progress of the game.

However, by operating the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is assisted, and the player's sense of anticipation when they realize that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 can be increased. In other words, by operating the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation without substantially affecting the progress of the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation of the V winning assist mechanism is controlled by a control means other than the main control unit 60 (for example, the audio and light control device 90). For example, in Case 1, the audio and light control device 90 may receive a specific processing command to decide to operate the V winning assist mechanism, and may control the operation of the V winning assist mechanism when the opening/closing processing period begins, thereby closing the non-V winning opening 224. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which, when game balls are stored in the storage section 218, the non-V winning opening 224 is closed at the timing when the storage valve 216 is opened. By adopting such a configuration, the operation of the V winning assist mechanism is controlled by a control means other than the main control unit 60, thereby reducing the processing burden on the main control unit 60.

The V entry assist mechanism is not limited to the non-V entry port closing mechanism described above, and other mechanisms may be used as long as they assist the entry of game balls into the V entry port 222. For example, a mechanism may be used that moves the flow path 211 so that the outlet of the flow path 211 that discharges game balls into the crane 220 is positioned directly above the V entry port 222. A mechanism may also be used that temporarily places a magnet near the V entry port 222.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described. The main difference between the eighth embodiment and the seventh embodiment is that in the eighth embodiment, if a jackpot is awarded in a winning lottery in a game played in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, and if the game ball enters the V winning hole 222 during a round game played in response to the jackpot, the jackpot is confirmed based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 222, and the ongoing round game is interrupted, and a round game is played in response to the newly confirmed jackpot due to the game ball entering the V winning hole 222. This will be described in detail below.

H1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 357 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a generally rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the gaming hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are located on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing when a winning lottery, a jackpot, or a reach occurs, etc., conducted by the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that is pressed by the player to stop the game ball from being launched by the game ball launching mechanism, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism toward the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

In addition, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with a predetermined launch strength, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched toward the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the operating handle 25 is rotated to the maximum. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows toward the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. In other words, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can perform a so-called "right hit." Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched toward the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is on. In other words, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26, thereby realizing the launch of a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is configured to be located on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 may also be located in another position. For example, the game ball launch button 26 may be located inside (on the periphery of) the operating handle 25, similar to the weight button 25b. This allows the player to operate the operating handle 25, weight button 25b, and game ball launch button 26 with just their right hand.

Figure 358 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a type determination gate 202, and a variable winning device 36. The gaming board 30 is also provided with a V winning mechanism 210. Furthermore, the gaming board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

General winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which game balls can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the bottom center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is held.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, and is located on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. The second starting hole 34 is also provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is the gate that triggers the execution of a lottery to open the electric device 34a. Specifically, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 uses this passage as an opportunity to execute an internal lottery (electric device release lottery). If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to the electric device release, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device release state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 has a first large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the first large winning opening 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state so that a gaming ball cannot enter the first large winning opening 36a. When a gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). If the winning lottery results in a big win or a small win, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that executes the opening and closing process of the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 and the second opening/closing door 213 provided in the V winning mechanism 210, which will be described later. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and then transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The type determination gate 202 is a ball entry port used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery during a specified round of play and the round of play ends, the open/close execution mode is initiated. In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the open/close execution mode is initiated, a presentation (right-hit suggestion presentation) is executed to guide the player to fire the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30. In accordance with the right-hit suggestion presentation, the player operates the operating handle 25 to fire the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the main control unit 60 executes a type determination process to determine the type of jackpot, triggered by the game ball's entry. The type of jackpot is then determined by this type determination process. The type determination process executed by the main control unit 60 and the jackpot types set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a static first pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second pattern. The second pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a static second pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first pending display unit 37c and a second pending display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 can be reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 can be reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps (hereinafter also referred to as round lamps) arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the first open/close door 36b or the second open/close door 213 remains open until one of the following conditions is met: the elapse of a predetermined maximum duration, or the entry of a predetermined maximum number of game balls into the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. When the open/close execution mode is initiated and a jackpot type is determined in the type determination process executed in response to a game ball entering the type determination gate 202, the round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds that correspond to the determined jackpot type, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends. In other words, even if the open/close execution mode is initiated, if no gaming ball has entered the type determination gate 202 after the start of the open/close execution mode, the type determination process will not be initiated, the jackpot type (including the number of rounds of play) will not be determined, and the number of rounds of play will not be displayed on the round display unit 39. If a gaming ball subsequently enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process will be initiated, the jackpot type (including the number of rounds of play) will be determined, and the number of rounds of play will be displayed on the round display unit 39.

The special drawing unit 37, the regular drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured as segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may also be configured as various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device equipped in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display based on a preview of the lottery results, etc. in accordance with this. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display based on this. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display based on a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, but also displays effects during the opening/closing execution mode, which is entered when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 359 is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns and display surface 41a on the pattern display device 41. Figure 359(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed LCD patterns on the pattern display device 41. The LCD patterns are images displayed on the pattern display device 41, and correspond to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b. When a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface 41a, and when a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is being played, the LCD pattern corresponding to the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in Figure 359(a), the pattern display device 41 displays variably the numbers 1 to 8 as LCD patterns. The variably displayed patterns may also be the numbers 1 to 8 with characters or other designs added.

Figure 359(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol column Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 359(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed in which each symbol column scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 359(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the symbols are displayed statically, if the result of the winning lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is displayed is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various other variations of the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change round ends, the static display is displayed, and the static display ends. It is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the results of a winning lottery for special information acquired based on a ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the results of a winning lottery for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, it causes the segment display in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to change for each play round, and then causes the segment display to change to a static display corresponding to the result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a pattern row as a first LCD pattern or a second LCD pattern for each play, and then statically displays the pattern row so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts to when the specified lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the specified lottery result is statically displayed.

As shown in Figure 359 (b), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2. The first pending display area Ds1 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending play times based on a ball entering the first starting port 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays a display corresponding to the number of pending play times based on a ball entering the second starting port 34. A pending play time is an unexecuted play time for which a variable display has not yet begun to notify the winning lottery results for special information obtained based on a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The number of pending play times that can be reserved based on a ball entering the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display a pending display (hereinafter also referred to as the first pending play time display) corresponding to four pending play times. Furthermore, the number of pending play times that can be reserved based on a ball entering the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending play times (hereinafter also referred to as second pending play time displays).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 359(b), the display surface 41a is equipped with a first synchronization display unit Sync1 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stopped display of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a of the special pattern unit 37, and a second synchronization display unit Sync2 that flashes and lights up in synchronization with the changing and stopped display of the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display unit 37b of the special pattern unit 37. Specifically, when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a changing pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 flashes, and when the first pattern display unit 37a is displaying a stopped pattern, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 lights up. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a changing pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 flashes, and when the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a stopped pattern, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 lights up.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first hold display area Ds1, the second hold display area Ds2, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2, but the display surface 41a may be configured not to display some or all of these displays.

Figure 360 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the V winning mechanism 210. As shown in Figure 360(a), the V winning mechanism 210 includes a crane 220, a flow path 211 that allows game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30 to flow to the crane 220, a second opening/closing door 213 that opens and closes the second large winning opening 212 so that game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30 can enter the flow path 211, a detection sensor 214 that detects the flow of game balls from the second large winning opening 212, an outlet 215 that communicates with the back side of the game area, a storage valve 216 that temporarily stores game balls that flow in from the second large winning opening 212 in a storage section 218 of the flow path 211, and a storage valve drive mechanism 217 that drives the storage valve 216. The crane 220 also has one V winning slot 222 and five non-V winning slots 224. The V winning slot 222 is a winning slot that will result in a jackpot if a gaming ball enters it. The non-V winning slots 224 do not result in a jackpot even if a gaming ball enters them, and instead eject the gaming ball from the gaming area.

Next, we will explain the operation of the V winning mechanism 210. If a specific type of big win or small win is won in the winning lottery during a game round and the opening/closing execution mode is initiated after the game round ends, the opening conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are met, and the second opening/closing door 213 opens as shown in Figure 360 (a).

When the player operates the operating handle 25 to launch a game ball to the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball passes near the second opening/closing door 213 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, the game ball is guided by the open second opening/closing door 213 and flows from the second large winning opening 212 into the flow path 211, as shown in FIG. 360 (b). The game ball that first flows into the flow path 211 after the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is stored in the storage section 218 by the closed storage valve 216. In this embodiment, the storage section 218 can store only one game ball. As a variant, a configuration in which multiple game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 may be adopted.

As shown in Figure 360 (c), when one game ball is stored in the storage section 218 and a game ball flows in from the second large winning opening 212, the game ball is prevented from flowing into the storage section 218 by the game ball already stored in the storage section 218, and flows in the direction of the discharge opening 215 in the flow path 211, and is discharged from the discharge opening 215 to the back side of the play area.

As shown in Figure 360 (d), when the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are met, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Details of the closing conditions will be described later. Thereafter, as shown in Figure 360 (e), the storage valve drive mechanism 217 drives the storage valve 216 in the opening direction, and the game balls stored in the storage section 218 flow in the direction of the crane 220 in the flow path 211. The game balls discharged from the flow path 211 then flow over the top surface of the crane 220 and then enter the V winning port 222 or the non-V winning port 224. As described above, if a game ball enters the V winning port 222, a jackpot is awarded, and if a game ball enters the non-V winning port 224, it is not a jackpot and is discharged from the game area.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time a gaming ball enters (flows into) the second large winning opening 212 of the V winning mechanism 210, 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71. The entry of a gaming ball into the second large winning opening 212 is detected by the detection sensor 214.

As mentioned above, if a modified configuration is adopted in which the storage section 218 is capable of storing multiple game balls, opening the storage valve 216 will allow multiple game balls to flow over the top surface of the crane 220, thereby increasing the probability that a game ball will enter the V entry port 222 and raising the player's expectations. In this case, even if two game balls enter the V entry port 222, only the game ball that first enters the V entry port 222 will be treated as a jackpot; the second game ball entering the V entry port 222 will not be treated as a jackpot and will be ejected to the back of the play area, just like a game ball entering the non-V entry port 224.

H2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 361 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is primarily composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio/light emitting control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs stored in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 70 and the power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control unit 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. In addition, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to various detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports and through gates, such as the general entry port 32, first start port 33, second start port 34, through gate 35, and variable entry device 36. Based on signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each entry port, and whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first entry port 33 and the second entry port 34.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are a first opening/closing door drive unit 36c that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34, a second opening/closing door drive unit 213b that opens and closes the second opening/closing door 213, a storage valve drive mechanism 217 that drives the storage valve 216, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 drives and controls the first opening/closing door drive unit 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b opens and closes, and drives and controls the second opening/closing door drive unit 213b so that the second opening/closing door 213 opens and closes. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a specific jackpot or small win, the MPU 62 drives and controls the storage valve drive mechanism 217 so that the storage valve 216 opens and closes. Furthermore, if the electric role release is selected as a result of the electric role release lottery, the MPU 62 drives and controls the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a opens. Furthermore, during each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, the MPU 62 controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a game ball has entered the general prize entry port 32, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. If a game ball has entered the second start port 34, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the control handle 25. As described above, the control handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When a player grips the control handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on. When the player rotates the control handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, a game ball is launched onto the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio and light control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it references the command information storage area 63f in the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio and light control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting devices such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 100. The audio and light control device 90 is also connected to a performance operation button 24, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a specified timing, it controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects that operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect that will be executed while the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a static manner, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 362 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in winning lotteries, etc. The various counter information is used by the MPU 62 when performing winning lotteries, allocating jackpot types, setting the display on the main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for winning lotteries. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when allocating jackpot types. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination to determine whether or not a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to a miss.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also has a reserve information storage area 64b, a determination process execution area 64c, and a type determination process execution area 64i. The reserve information storage area 64b has a first reserve area Ra and a second reserve area Rb. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b.

The winning random number counter C1 will now be described in detail. As mentioned above, the winning random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one in sequence within the range of 0 to 1199, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, where it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot. The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, where it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The winning random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will result.

Next, we will explain the details of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the pending information storage area 64d when a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode, or when a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 222.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses these winning random number counter C1 values to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which is obtained when a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the opening/closing execution mode has started and is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i. The jackpot type (the number of rounds played) determined by the type determination process is displayed on the round display unit 39.

Next, we will explain the details of the reach random number counter C3. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. However, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 359(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed as varying symbols in symbol column Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained in detail. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 when determining the change time in the first and second pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the change time of the patterns on the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 begins to fluctuate. When determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e using the value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role opening counter C4, and the variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in this invention. Also, at least one of the values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, we will explain the hit/miss table. The hit/miss table is table data used to compare the hit random number counter C1 when a hit lottery is conducted based on the hit random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes for the hit lottery: a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode. When a hit lottery is conducted in the low-probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low-probability mode is referenced, and when a hit lottery is conducted in the high-probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high-probability mode is referenced. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores, as separate table data, a hit/miss table used to compare the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c when a gaming ball enters the second start hole 34. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 stores four win/loss tables in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63: a win/loss table for the first starting hole (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting hole (for high probability mode), a win/loss table for the second starting hole (for low probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting hole (for high probability mode).

Figure 363 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. As shown in the figure, the hit/miss table for the first starting port has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the five values from 5 to 9 are set as small hits (misses). Small hits (misses) will be discussed later. Values other than the ten values from 0 to 9 (10 to 1199) are normal misses.

Figure 364 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. As shown in the figure, the hit/miss table for the second starting port has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) will result in a small hit (miss).

Here, a small win (loss) is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to opening/closing execution mode, in which the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is opened or closed, but does not trigger a transition to support mode. In contrast, a normal loss is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to opening/closing execution mode, and does not trigger a transition to support mode either. In the following explanation, a small win (loss) will also be referred to simply as a "small win," and a normal loss will also be referred to simply as a "loss."

Next, the types of jackpots will be explained. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode
(2) The manner of opening and closing control of the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) The manner of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the first opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 game balls have entered the first opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the first opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have entered the first opening and closing door 36b.

The opening time limit for each opening of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 and the number of balls that can be opened per opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 or the V winning mechanism 210 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for each opening may be longer or the number of balls that can be opened per opening may be set higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that balls do not actually enter the variable winning device 36 or the V winning mechanism 210.

In this embodiment, if a winning lottery results in a jackpot and a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed in response to the jackpot, or if a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 222, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 365 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. Figure 365(a) shows the allocation table for the first starting gate (when a jackpot is won). This allocation table is referenced when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game played triggered by the ball entering the first starting gate.

Figure 365(b) shows the allocation table for a V entry triggered by a ball entering the first starting port. This allocation table is referenced when a small win occurs in a game session triggered by a ball entering the first starting port, and when the ball enters the V entry port 222 during the open/close execution mode triggered by the small win, resulting in a big win.

Figure 365(c) shows the allocation table for the second starting port (when a jackpot is won and when a V entry is triggered by a ball entering the second starting port). This allocation table is referenced when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game played in which a ball enters the second starting port, and when a small jackpot is won in a game played in which a ball enters the second starting port, and the jackpot is won when the ball enters the V entry port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting hole in Figure 365 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the types of jackpots that can be won in the winning lottery in a game played after a ball has entered the first starting hole are set to 5R Type 1 jackpot, 5R Type 2 jackpot, and 10R regular jackpot.

A 5R Type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is five, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of times that a Type 1 jackpot can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to 90. In other words, after 90 times of play in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

A 5R Type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is five, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of rounds that can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to five. In other words, after five rounds of play in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

A 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is 10, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0 to 99," "0 to 44" corresponds to a 5R Type 1 jackpot, "45 to 60" corresponds to a 5R Type 2 jackpot, and "61 to 99" corresponds to a 10R regular jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for V winnings triggered by a ball entering the first starting port in Figure 365 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a small win occurs in a game session triggered by a ball entering the first starting port, and the ball enters the V winning port 222 during the open/close execution mode triggered by the small win, resulting in a jackpot, the jackpot types are set to be a 5R Type 1 jackpot or a 10R normal jackpot.

The 5R Type 1 jackpot and 10R regular jackpot have already been explained in the allocation table for the first starting slot in Figure 365(a) above, so further explanation will be omitted.

In the distribution table for V wins triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0-99," "0-64" corresponds to a 5R Type 1 jackpot, and "65-99" corresponds to a 10R regular jackpot.

As shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in Figure 365 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types are set as 15R Type 1 jackpot, 4R Type 1 jackpot, and 4R Type 2 jackpot when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game session triggered by a ball entering the second starting port, and when a small jackpot is won in a game session triggered by a ball entering the second starting port and the jackpot is won by a ball entering the V winning port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small jackpot.

A 15R Type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which 15 rounds of play are executed during the opening and closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of times that a Type 1 jackpot can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to 90. In other words, after 90 rounds of play are executed in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

A 4R Type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is four, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of times that a Type 1 jackpot can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to 90. In other words, after 90 times of play in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

A 4R Type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of rounds played during the opening and closing execution mode is four, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this embodiment, the number of times that a Type 2 jackpot can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is limited to five. In other words, after five rounds of play in the high-frequency support mode, the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

In the allocation table for the second starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0 to 99," "0 to 49" corresponds to a 15R Type 1 jackpot, "50 to 57" corresponds to a 4R Type 1 jackpot, and "58 to 99" corresponds to a 4R Type 2 jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot differs depending on whether the jackpot is won in a lottery held in a game played triggered by a ball entering the first starting port, a small win in a game played triggered by a ball entering the first starting port and the jackpot is won when the ball enters the V winning port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small win, a jackpot is won in a lottery held in a game played triggered by a ball entering the second starting port, or a small win in a game played triggered by a ball entering the second starting port and the jackpot is won when the ball enters the V winning port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small win, and there is a clear difference in the advantages to the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the type determination process execution area 64i. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the values of the winning random number counter C1 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed in the first and second symbol display units 37a and 37b, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the round display unit 39. When determining the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed in the first and second symbol display units 37a and 37b, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released into the game area PA in the same manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery using the electric role release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role release 34a per time is set longer when the electric role release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs in high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one electric role. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, the time between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in meeting the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 366 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table (win/loss table for the lottery to open electric reels) used when conducting the lottery to open electric reels.

Figure 366(a) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 366(a), the win/loss table for the electric feature opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature opening. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in low-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the electric feature opening is won with a probability of 1 in 233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in low-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 366(b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 366(b), the winning/losing table for the electric feature opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in winning the electric feature opening. Four values from 462 to 465 have been set as the electric feature opening counter C4 values that result in losing. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in high-frequency support mode and the electric feature opening lottery is executed, the electric feature opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature opening lottery is won in high-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low-frequency support mode.

H3. Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game on the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 358.

When a player starts playing, he or she operates the operating handle 25 to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30. Hereinafter, launching the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30 will also be referred to as a "left hit," and launching the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 will also be referred to as a "right hit."

When a player starts hitting with the left hand and causes the game ball to land in the first starting hole 33, a game round begins to notify the results of the winning lottery triggered by the ball landing in the first starting hole 33. If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the opening and closing execution mode begins after the end of that game round. Here, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the type of jackpot (see Figure 365) has not been determined at the time a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined in the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed after the end of the game round in which the winning lottery was won.

When the round in which the jackpot was won ends, the open/close execution mode begins. When the open/close execution mode begins, an effect (right-hit suggestion effect) is executed that suggests to the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 (right hit). When the player recognizes the right-hit suggestion effect and shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and the game ball enters (passes) the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is executed in response to the first game ball entering (passing) the type determination gate 202 after the open/close execution mode begins. The type determination process is a process for determining the type of jackpot. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

Once the type of jackpot is determined by executing the type determination process, a round of play begins in which the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 perform opening and closing operations based on the opening/closing scenario set for that jackpot type. The opening/closing scenario is a program that predetermines the patterns of the opening and closing operations of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213. Details of the opening/closing scenario will be provided later.

When a game ball hit by a player from the right side enters the first large prize opening 36a or the second large prize opening 212 during the period when a round of play is being played (hereinafter referred to as the opening/closing processing period), the player is awarded the number of game balls set for each large prize opening as a bonus (prize balls).

In this embodiment, an opening/closing scenario is set in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens only in specific cases, allowing a gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening 212. As described in FIG. 360, when a gaming ball enters the second large winning opening 212, one of the gaming balls that entered the second large winning opening 212 is stored in the storage section 218, and then, after the storage valve 216 opens, the gaming ball flows from the flow path 211 to the crane 220 (see FIG. 360(e)). When a gaming ball flowing through the crane 220 enters the V winning opening 222, a new jackpot is confirmed. When a new jackpot is confirmed as a result of a gaming ball entering the V winning opening 222, the currently running opening/closing execution mode is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the gaming ball into the V winning opening 222 is initiated. As mentioned above, when a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined when the gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode after the end of the game in which the jackpot was won. However, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is triggered by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, the type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

As explained in Figure 365, the allocation of jackpot types for a jackpot triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33 (Figure 360(a)) is different from the allocation of jackpot types for a jackpot triggered by a V entry triggered by a ball entering the first starting port (Figure 360(b)). In this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types for a jackpot triggered by a V entry triggered by a ball entering the first starting port is more likely to award a player with a larger bonus. Therefore, even if a jackpot triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33 has been confirmed, if the second opening/closing door 213 opens during a round of play, the player will hope that the gaming ball will enter the second large entry port 212 and then enter the V entry port 222. This can increase the player's sense of anticipation even during a round of play.

If the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball can be placed in the second large prize opening 212, but the game ball cannot be placed in the V prize opening 222, the round of play based on the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the first start opening 33 will continue.

When a round of play ends and the open/close execution mode subsequently ends, if the high-frequency support mode is set for the type of jackpot that triggered the open/close execution mode, the support mode for the next play session executed after the open/close execution mode ends will be the high-frequency support mode. In this case, the player hits the ball to the right to cause the ball to enter the through gate 35, triggering a lottery to open the electric device. If the player wins the lottery to open the electric device, the electric device 34a opens, allowing the ball to enter the second start opening 34. As a result, a winning lottery is executed triggered by the ball entering the second start opening 34.

The result of the lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 34 will be a jackpot or a small jackpot. If a jackpot is won, just as in the case of a jackpot being won in the lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot is determined by having a gaming ball enter the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode executed after the round in which the jackpot was won has ended. Then, a round of play set to the determined jackpot type is played.

On the other hand, if a small prize is won in the lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting opening 34, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened once after the round in which the small prize was won is completed. If a gaming ball enters the second large prize opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open and then a gaming ball enters the V prize opening 222, a jackpot is confirmed and the opening/closing execution mode is initiated in response to the jackpot. In the opening/closing execution mode, a round of play set for that jackpot type is played, and a bonus is awarded to the player.

Next, we will explain what happens when a player starts playing, hits the ball with his left hand to land it in the first starting hole 33, and wins a small prize in the lottery triggered by the ball landing in the first starting hole 33.

If a small jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting opening 33, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens once after the end of the game in which the small jackpot was won. After the open/close execution mode begins, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed, suggesting the player to make a right hit. If the player makes a right hit in accordance with the right-hit suggestion effect, causes the gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and then the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222, a jackpot is confirmed, and the open/close execution mode is initiated in response to the jackpot. In the open/close execution mode, a round of play set for the type of jackpot is played, and a bonus is awarded to the player. The above explains the general flow of play on the gaming machine in this embodiment.

H4. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 367 is a time chart that explains, as Case 1, the case where a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. The outline of the processing described below is not executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, but is executed only in specific cases.

When a player hits the ball with their left hand and the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, game round U1 begins, and the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a begin to change. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in game round U1. After that, the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a stop changing. At this time, a symbol pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a, but no effect is executed that clearly suggests that a jackpot has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio signal; instead, an effect is executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether they have won a jackpot or a minor jackpot. Therefore, a player who is aware of the results of the winning lottery through the image display on the symbol display device 41 or the audio output will not be able to recognize that they have won a jackpot in the winning lottery corresponding to game round U1.

After the game round U1 in which the winning lottery was won has ended, the open/close execution mode is initiated. As described above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot has not been determined at the time the jackpot is won in the lottery. The type of jackpot is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the open/close execution mode is executed. Therefore, even when the game round in which the winning lottery was won has ended, the round display unit 39 does not display the number of rounds to be executed in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the period from the start of the open/close execution mode until the type of jackpot is determined is also referred to as the "waiting period."

After the winning play U1 is completed, the open/close execution mode begins, and at the same time, a presentation suggesting a right hit (right hit suggestion presentation) is executed, along with a presentation indicating that the player may be awarded a special prize; more specifically, a presentation suggesting that there are two opportunities (chances) to win the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the "double chance presentation") is executed.

When a player recognizes that the right-hit suggestion effect and the second chance effect have been executed, they execute a right hit, and when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is executed and the type of jackpot is determined. Once the type of jackpot is determined, the waiting period ends and the opening period begins. The right-hit suggestion effect is also executed during the opening period. After the opening period ends, the opening/closing process period begins. During the opening/closing process period, rounds of play are executed the number of times corresponding to the determined jackpot type. At this time, a round of play is executed in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens during the first round of play (first round) of the number of rounds of play corresponding to the jackpot type. In addition, when the opening/closing process period begins, an effect is executed (hereinafter also referred to as the first chance effect) that suggests that the first of two opportunities (chances) to win a jackpot has begun.

More specifically, in the first chance presentation, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, and the presentation is executed to encourage the player to place the game ball in the second big prize opening 212, and then to place the game ball in the V prize opening 222 to confirm the big win.

If the player recognizes the first chance effect being executed and hits the right button, and is able to cause the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and the game ball is able to be stored in the storage section 218 (see Figure 360) (progress to "Stored in storage section" on the time chart), the storage valve 216 will perform one opening and closing operation after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. At this time, the one game ball stored in the storage section 218 will flow through the flow path 211 and into the crane 220.

A gaming ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V winning slot 222 or the non-V winning slot 224. When a gaming ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V winning slot 222 (proceed to [Ball enters V winning slot] on the time chart), a new jackpot is confirmed. When a new jackpot is confirmed as a result of a gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222, the currently running opening/closing execution mode is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222 is initiated. As mentioned above, when a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined when the gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode after the end of the game in which the jackpot was won. However, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is triggered by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, the type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

On the other hand, if a game ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the non-V entry port 224 (progressing to [Ball not entering V entry port] on the time chart), an effect indicating that the second of two available chances to win the jackpot has begun (hereinafter referred to as the second chance effect) is executed. The second chance effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time, an effect is executed indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed at the time the player operates the effect operation button 24. Furthermore, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed is executed. Note that the confirmation of a jackpot suggested in the second chance effect suggests that a jackpot has been won (or had been won) in the winning lottery for game round U1.

After the second chance performance is executed, the first round of the round play that was executed in response to the winning of the jackpot in the lottery for play round U1 ends, and the second round (2nd round) begins.

Next, we will explain what happens when a player recognizes the first chance effect and hits the right button, but is unable to cause the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 212 when the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and is therefore unable to store the game ball in the storage section 218 (progressing to "Not stored in storage section" on the time chart). In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. The second chance effect in this case also prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a specified period of time, an effect is executed indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed at the time the player operates the effect operation button 24. Furthermore, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a specified period of time after the execution of the effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect is executed indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed after the specified period has elapsed.

After the second chance effect is executed, the first round of the round play that was executed in response to the jackpot being won in the lottery for play round U1 ends, and the second round (2nd round) begins. This concludes the explanation for Case 1.

Figure 368 is a time chart illustrating Case 2, where a small prize is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. In this embodiment, the processing described below is executed in all cases where a small prize is won in a lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33.

When the player hits the ball with his left hand and the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, starting game round U2, the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a begin to change. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in game round U2. After that, the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a stop changing. At this time, a symbol pattern indicating a small win is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a, but no effect is executed that clearly suggests that a small win has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio signal, and instead, an effect is executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether they have won a big win or a small win. Therefore, a player who is aware of the results of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio signal will not be able to recognize that they have won a small win in the winning lottery corresponding to game round U1.

After the game round U2 in which the small prize was won ends, the open/close execution mode begins. If a small prize is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the open/close execution mode begins. Then, during the opening period of the open/close execution mode, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed, as well as an effect indicating that the player may be awarded a special prize; more specifically, an effect indicating that there are two opportunities (chances) to win the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a "double chance effect") is executed.

After the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period begins. During the opening/closing processing period, a round of play is played in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened only once. Furthermore, when the opening/closing processing period begins, an effect is played (hereinafter also referred to as the "first chance effect") indicating that the first of two available opportunities (chances) to win a jackpot has begun.

More specifically, in the first chance presentation, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, and the presentation is executed to encourage the player to place the game ball in the second big prize opening 212, and then to place the game ball in the V prize opening 222 to confirm the big win.

When the player recognizes the first chance effect being executed and hits the right button, the game ball enters the second large winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and the game ball is stored in the storage section 218 (see Figure 360) (progress to "Stored in storage section" on the time chart), the storage valve 216 performs one opening and closing operation after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. At this time, the one game ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the flow path 211 and into the crane 220.

A gaming ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V winning slot 222 or the non-V winning slot 224. When a gaming ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the V winning slot 222 (proceed to [Ball enters V winning slot] on the time chart), a jackpot is confirmed. When a jackpot is confirmed as a result of a gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222, the opening/closing execution mode currently being executed is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222 is initiated. Note that when a jackpot is triggered by a gaming ball entering the V winning slot 222, the type of jackpot is determined along with the confirmation of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if a game ball circulating through the crane 220 enters the non-V entry port 224 (progressing to [Ball not entering V entry port] on the time chart), an effect indicating that the second of two available chances to win the jackpot has begun (hereinafter also referred to as the second chance effect) is executed. The second chance effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time, an effect indicating that a loss has been confirmed at the time the player operates the effect operation button 24 is executed. Furthermore, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect indicating that a loss has been confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed is executed. Note that the confirmation of a loss suggested in the second chance effect suggests that the winning lottery for game round U2 has resulted in a loss (or was a loss).

After the second chance effect is executed, the round play that was being executed in response to the small jackpot being won in the winning lottery for play round U2 ends, and the open/close execution mode then ends. Then, an effect is executed that encourages the player to make a left-handed hit (left-handed hit suggestion effect). The player makes a left-handed hit and again attempts to get the game ball into the first starting hole 33.

Next, we will explain what happens when a player recognizes the first chance effect and hits the right button, but is unable to cause the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and is therefore unable to store the game ball in the storage section 218 (progressing to "Not stored in storage section" on the time chart). In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. The second chance effect in this case also prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a specified period of time, an effect is executed indicating that a miss has been confirmed at the time the player operates the effect operation button 24. Furthermore, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a specified period of time after the execution of the effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation button 24, an effect is executed indicating that a miss has been confirmed after the specified period has elapsed.

After the second chance effect is executed, the round play that was being executed in response to the small jackpot being won in the winning lottery for play round U2 ends, and the open/close execution mode then ends. Then, an effect is executed that encourages the player to make a left-handed hit (left-handed hit suggestion effect). The player makes a left-handed hit and again attempts to get the game ball into the first starting hole 33.

As explained above, whether a jackpot is won (Case 1) or a small jackpot is won (Case 2) in the winning lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the first symbol display unit 37a will display a symbol pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery, but no effect will be executed suggesting the result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio sound. Therefore, a player who is aware of the result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio sound will not be able to recognize the result of that game round at the end of the game round. As a result, even if a player has won a small jackpot, this can give the player the feeling of anticipation that they may have won a jackpot.

Furthermore, after the game has finished, in both Case 1 and Case 2, the right-hit suggestion effect and the second chance suggestion effect are executed, so even during the period when these effects are being executed after the game has finished, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the player may have won a big jackpot rather than a small jackpot in the lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot is not determined at the time of the lottery, but is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode. Once the type of jackpot is determined, the round lamp on the round display unit 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of rounds played that correspond to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, if a small jackpot is won, the round lamp does not light up. In other words, whether a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the round lamp does not light up immediately after the end of a play round, so the player can avoid having to determine whether they won a jackpot or a small jackpot in that play round based on the round lamp after the play round has ended.

As a result, after a round of play ends, the player is not aware of the results of the winning lottery until they make a right hit and cause the game ball to enter the type determination gate 202, and this allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time that they may have won a big win rather than a small win. In other words, even after a round of play ends and the opening and closing execution mode based on a big win or small win begins, this allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, attracting their attention to the game. Furthermore, when the type of big win is determined, the player is required to make a right hit and cause the game ball to enter the type determination gate 202, which allows the player to be actively involved in determining the type of big win, and allows the player to further focus their attention on the game during the opening and closing execution mode.

H5. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
369 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is initiated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60.

In step S80101, the process of reading various detection sensors is executed. That is, the status of the various detection sensors connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the status of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S80102.

In step S80102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S80103.

In step S80103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric device release counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, proceed to step S80104. Note that the value of the variable type counter CS is updated during normal processing (Fig. 378) described below.

In step S80104, a ball entry process for the starting hole is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting hole in step S80104 will be described later. After executing step S80104, proceed to step S80105.

In step S80105, a through ball entry process is executed in response to the game ball entering (passing through) the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step S80105 will be described later. After executing step S80105, proceed to step S80106.

In step S80106, ball entry processing for the category determination gate is executed in response to a game ball entering the category determination gate. Details of the ball entry processing for the category determination gate in step S80106 will be described later. After executing step S80106, proceed to step S80107.

In step S80107, ball entry processing for the large prize opening is executed in response to a game ball entering the large prize opening. Details of the ball entry processing for the large prize opening in step S80107 will be described later. After executing step S80107, proceed to step S80108.

In step S80108, the Kloun ball entry process is executed in response to the game ball entering the Kloun. Details of the Kloun ball entry process in step S80108 will be described later. After executing step S80108, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Starting point entry processing>
Next, the ball-entry process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-entry process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 369: S80104).

Figure 370 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting hole. In step S80201, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (start entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. If it is determined in step S80201 that the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (S80201: YES), the process proceeds to step S80202, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S80203.

In step S80203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step S80204.

In step S80204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and this first start pending number RaN is set as the target for the processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the first start port 33. Then, proceed to step S80209.

If it is determined in step S80201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (S80201: NO), the process proceeds to step S80205, where it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S80205 that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (S80205: YES), the process proceeds to step S80206, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Then, the process proceeds to step S80207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80205 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S80205: NO), the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step S80207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step S80208.

In step S80208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read, and this second start pending number RbN is set as the target for the processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step S80209.

In step S80209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S80204 or step S80208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S80209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (S80209: NO), the ball entry process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, if in step S80209 the number of pending start items N is less than the upper limit (S80209: YES), proceed to step S80210, add 1 to the number of pending start items N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step S80211, add 1 to the value stored in the total number of pending items storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total number of pending items CRN). The total number of pending items CRN indicates the sum of the first number of pending start items RaN and the second number of pending start items RbN. Then proceed to step S80212.

In step S80212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS, updated in step S80103 (Figure 369), and the values of the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS, updated in normal processing (Figure 378), are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding holding area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the number of reserved items to which 1 was added in step S80210. Specifically, if the first start reserved number RaN is set as the target for processing, the values of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS, updated in step S80103 (Figure 369), are stored in the first free memory area of the first holding area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step S80210. Also, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the target for processing, the values of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S80103 (Fig. 369) are stored in the first free memory area in the second holding area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step S80210. After executing step S80212, proceed to step S80213.

In step S80213, a first-time determination process is executed. The first-time determination process is a process that determines the winning lottery result (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, the variable time for the number of games, etc., based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the first-time determination process will be described later. After executing step S80213, proceed to step S80214.

In step S80214, a process for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the result of the first determination process (first determination information) executed based on the information (pending information) on the values of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is set as a pending command.

The hold command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the determination result (first determination information) made by the first determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entry, before the hold information becomes the subject of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of the normal process (Figure 378: step S81003), which will be described later.

In addition, when the audio and light control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the first starting port 33, it sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio and light control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the second starting port 34, it sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step S80214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for this starting hole.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the lead determination process will be described. The lead determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the starting hole ball entry process (FIG. 370: S80213).

Figure 371 is a flowchart showing the advance determination process. As described above, the advance determination process is a process that, based on the reserved information, determines whether the winning lottery will be successful, the type of jackpot, whether a reach has occurred, and the variable time for the number of play rounds, etc., before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control unit 60.

In step S80301, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process determines whether the winning lottery was successful, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S80301, the process proceeds to step S80302.

In step S80302, variable time information acquisition processing is executed. This processing determines the variable time of the game session. Details of the variable time information acquisition processing will be described later.

After executing step S80302, the destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/Reach Information Acquisition Processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 371: S80301).

Figure 372 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S80401, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the memory area (reserved area) due to a ball entering the starting hole in the starting hole ball entry process (Figure 370) is read. Then, proceed to step S80402.

In step S80402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 that was read is based on the first holding area Ra. In other words, it is determined whether the holding information that is the target of the advance determination process is information acquired in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, or information acquired in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 34. In step S80402, if it is determined that the read holding area is based on the first holding area Ra (S80402: YES), the process proceeds to step S80403, where the winning/losing table for the first starting hole is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S80405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80402 that the read-out holding area is not based on the first holding area Ra, i.e., if the read-out holding area is based on the second holding area Rb (S80402: NO), proceed to step S80404 and refer to the win/loss table for the first starting port. Then proceed to step S80405.

In step S80405, it is determined whether the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S80405 that the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery (S80405: YES), the process proceeds to step S80406.

In step S80406, the jackpot information is stored in the advance determination process result storage area 64h. Then, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80405 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 read does not indicate a jackpot in the winning lottery (S80405: NO), proceed to step S80407.

In step S80407, it is determined whether the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a small win in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S80407 that the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a small win in the winning lottery (S80407: YES), proceed to step S80408.

In step S80408, the small win information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the big win/reach information acquisition process ends.

In step S80407, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 does not indicate a small win in the winning lottery (S80407: NO), proceed to step S80409.

In step S80409, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read. Then, the process proceeds to step S80410, where the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step S80411, where, based on the reference to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step S80411 that a reach has occurred (S80411: YES), the process proceeds to step S80412, where reach occurrence information is stored in the next determination process result storage area 64h. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80411 that a reach has not occurred (S80411: NO), the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 371: S80302).

Figure 373 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step S80501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the memory area upon a ball entering the starting hole in the starting hole ball entry process (Figure 370) is obtained. Then, proceed to step S80502.

In step S80502, it is determined whether the winning lottery for the current game has resulted in a win. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the winning lottery result determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if a jackpot has been won (S80502: YES), the process proceeds to step S80503.

In step S80503, the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. After executing step S80503, proceed to step S80509.

In step S80509, the acquired variable time information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64. Then, this variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S80502 that the result of the winning lottery is not a big win (step S80502: NO), proceed to step S80504 to determine whether or not a small win has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round. If it is determined in step S80504 that a small win has been won (S80504: YES), proceed to step S80505.

In step S80505, the small win variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. After executing step S80505, proceed to step S80509.

In step S80509, the acquired variable time information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64. Then, this variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S80504 that a small win has not been won in the winning lottery for this play (S80504: NO), the process proceeds to step S80506, where it is determined whether a reach has occurred. If it is determined in step S80506 that a reach has occurred (S80506: YES), the process proceeds to step S80507.

In step S80507, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S80509, where the obtained variable time information is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64h of RAM 64, and the variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S80506 that a reach will not occur in this game (step S80506: NO), the process proceeds to step S80508, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S80509, where the obtained fluctuation time information is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64h in RAM 64, and the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

<Processing a through ball>
Next, the through ball scoring process will be described. The through ball scoring process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 369: step S80105).

Figure 374 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for through play. In step S80601, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S80601 that a gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 (S80601: YES), the process proceeds to step S80602, where it is determined whether the number of reserved feature items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved feature items SN is a value indicating the number of balls that have entered the through gate 35 and are reserved for the purpose of holding a lottery to open an electric feature item. In this embodiment, the maximum value for the number of reserved feature items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80601 that a gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S80601: NO), the ball entry process for through play is terminated.

If it is determined in step S80602 that the number of reserved reel items SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S80602: YES), proceed to step S80603, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reel items SN. Then, proceed to step S80604.

In step S80604, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S80103 (Fig. 369) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64c of RAM 64. Then, the ball entry process for the through play is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80602 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (S80602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is the upper limit, the ball entry process for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Ball entry processing for category determination gate>
Next, the ball scoring process for the category determination gate will be described. The ball scoring process for the category determination gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 369: step S80106).

Figure 375 is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the category determination gate. In step S80701, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the category determination gate 202. If it is determined in step S80701 that the gaming ball has entered the category determination gate 202 (S80701: YES), the process proceeds to step S80702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80701 that the gaming ball has not entered the category determination gate 202 (S80701: NO), the ball entry processing for the category determination gate ends immediately.

In step S80702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, which triggers the opening/closing execution mode and the type determination process (see FIG. 385) to be executed. In the ball entry process for this type determination gate, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which determines the jackpot type, is stored in the memory area, and then the flag is turned OFF (S80705).

If it is determined in step S80702 that the category determination permission flag is ON (S80702: YES), proceed to step S80703. If it is determined in step S80702 that the category determination permission flag is not ON (S80702: NO), the ball entry process for the category determination gate ends.

In step S80703, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding memory area (type determination process execution area 64i). Then, proceed to step S80704.

In step S80704, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i, and is turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process (see FIG. 385) described below. After executing step S80704, proceed to step S80705.

In step S80705, the category determination permission flag is turned OFF. Then, the ball entry process for the category determination gate is terminated.

<Ball entry processing for the big prize slot>
Next, the ball entry process for the big prize opening will be described. The ball entry process for the big prize opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 369: step S80107).

Figure 376 is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the large prize opening. In step S80801, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the first large prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step S80801 that the gaming ball has entered the first large prize opening 36a (S80801: YES), the process proceeds to step S80802. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S80801 that the gaming ball has entered the first large prize opening 36a (S80801: NO), the process proceeds to step S80804.

In step S80802, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on a ball entering the first large prize opening 36a is set. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the first large prize opening 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step S80802, proceed to step S80803.

In step S80803, a first major prize opening ball entry command is set. The first major prize opening ball entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the first major prize opening 36a. The first major prize opening ball entry command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 378: step S81003) described below. After executing step S80803, proceed to step S80804.

In step S80804, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second large prize opening 212. If it is determined in step S80804 that the gaming ball has entered the second large prize opening 212 (S80804: YES), the process proceeds to step S80805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80804 that the gaming ball has not entered the second large prize opening 212 (S80804: NO), the ball entry process for the large prize opening is terminated.

In step S80805, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on a ball entering the second large prize opening 212 is set. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second large prize opening 212, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step S80805, proceed to step S80806.

In step S80806, a second large prize opening ball entry command is set. The second large prize opening ball entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 212. The second large prize opening ball entry command is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 378: step S81003) described below. After step S80806 is executed, the ball entry process for the large prize opening is terminated.

<Ball entry process for the Kroon>
Next, the process for scoring a ball for the Kroon will be described. The process for scoring a ball for the Kroon will be executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 369: step S80108).

Figure 377 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the Kroon. In step S80901, it is determined whether the Kroon ball entry permission flag is ON. The Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened during the large prize opening/closing process (Figure 388), and is turned OFF when a game ball enters the V prize opening 222 or non-V prize opening 224 of the Kroon 220 (Figure 377: S80908). This prevents game balls from unintentionally flowing into the Kroon due to damage or abnormality in the storage valve drive mechanism 217 or the storage valve 216, resulting in a big win, even when the storage valve 216 has not performed an opening operation. If it is determined in step S80901 that the Kroon ball entry permission flag is ON (S80901: YES), proceed to step S80902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80901 that the Kroon entry permission flag is not ON (S80901: NO), the Kroon entry process ends.

In step S80902, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the V winning opening 222. If it is determined in step S80902 that a gaming ball has entered the V winning opening 222 (S80902: YES), the process proceeds to step S80903.

In step S80903, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding memory area (type determination processing execution area 64i). As described above, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting gate 33 or the second starting gate 34, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding memory area (type determination processing execution area 64i) in the ball entry processing for the type determination gate, triggered by a gaming ball entering the type determination gate 202 during execution of the open/close execution mode. However, in the case of a jackpot triggered by a gaming ball entering the V winning gate 222, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding memory area (type determination processing execution area 64i) upon the gaming ball entering the V winning gate 222. After executing step S80903, proceed to step S80904.

In step S80904, the V entry jackpot flag is turned ON. The V entry jackpot flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V entry port 222, and is turned OFF after the opening time for the V entry jackpot opening/closing execution mode has been set (Fig. 388: S81910). After executing step S80904, proceed to step S80905.

In step S80905, a V entry command is set. The V entry command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a game ball has entered the V entry port 222. The V entry command is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 378: step S81003), which will be described later. After executing step S80905, proceed to step S80908.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80902 that a gaming ball has not entered the V winning hole 222 (S80902: NO), proceed to step S80906.

In step S80906, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224. If it is determined in step S80906 that a game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224 (S80906: YES), the process proceeds to step S80907. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S80906 that a game ball has not entered the non-V winning opening 224 (S80906: NO), the ball entry process for the Kluen is terminated.

In step S80907, a non-V winning command is set. The non-V winning command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a game ball has entered the non-V winning port 224. The non-V winning command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003) described below. After executing step S80907, proceed to step S80908.

In step S80908, the Kroon entry permission flag is turned OFF. Then, the Kroon entry process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 378 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S81001, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings for each control device are performed upon power-on, and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 is determined. Then, processing proceeds to step S81002.

In step S81002, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command that causes each sub-control device to start a demo video when power is turned on. Then, proceed to step S81003.

In step S81003, output data such as the start-up command set in step S81002, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variable command, a variable type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step S81003, proceed to step S81004.

In step S81004, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S81005.

In step S81005, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S81006. In step S81006, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the drawing of winning balls, setting the variable display of patterns by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S81006, the process proceeds to step S81007.

In step S81007, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S81008.

In step S81008, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric device 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric device 34a. Details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S81009.

In step S81009, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (more precisely, the start of the command output processing in step S81003). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step S81009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (S81009: NO), in steps S81010 and S81011, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step S81010, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step S81011, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81009 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (S81009: YES), the process returns to step S81003, and the processes from step S81003 to step S81008 are executed.

Note that the execution time for each process from step S81003 to step S81008 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 378: S81006).

Figure 379 is a flowchart showing the game round control processing. In step S81101, it is determined whether or not a special game state is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the pattern change has finished in a game round in which a big win or small win has been won in the winning lottery (S81112), and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing (Figure 384) (Figure 384: S81631).

If it is determined in step S81101 that the open/close execution mode flag is ON (S81101: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S81102 onwards. In other words, if the special game state is in progress, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81101 that the open/close execution mode flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the special game state is not in progress (S81101: NO), proceed to step S81102.

In step S81102, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is currently displaying a variable value. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b is currently displaying a variable value. This determination is made by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when variable display is to begin for either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step S81102 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying a variable value (S81102: NO), the process proceeds to steps S81103 to S81107 to start the game. In step S81103, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0." If the total reserved number CRN is "0," this means that the start reserved number for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is "0." Therefore, if it is determined in step S81103 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S81103: YES), the game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81103 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S81103: NO), the process proceeds to step S81104.

In step S81104, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the fluctuation starts, and then the process proceeds to step S81105. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S81105, a change start process is executed to start the change display on the main display unit 45 and the change display on the pattern display device 41. Details of the change start process will be described later. Then, proceed to step S81106.

In step S81106, it is determined whether the PNC count flag is ON. The PNC count flag is set ON when the open/close execution mode, which was executed as a result of a jackpot in which the high frequency support mode was set, ends (see Figure 390), and is set OFF when the high frequency support mode ends (see Figure 391). The PNC count flag is set to confirm the timing for starting to count the number of times play is executed in the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S81106 that the PNC count flag is ON (S81106: YES), the process proceeds to step S81107.

In step S81107, the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. The play count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of plays executed in high frequency support mode. After step S81107 is executed, this play count control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81106 that the PNC count flag is not ON (S81106: NO), the play count control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S81102 that the main display unit 45 is displaying a variable value (S81102: YES), processing for progressing through the game rounds is executed in steps S81108 to S81113.

In step S81108, it is determined whether the variable time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variable time is the time from when the symbol sequence begins to change until all symbol sequences have stopped, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S81108, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of RAM 64 has become "0." The value of this variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (Figure 383) described below. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated.

If it is determined in step S81108 that the change time has not elapsed (S81108: NO), the process proceeds to step S81109, where the change display process is executed. The change display process is a process that changes the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After step S81109 is executed, the game round control process ends.

If it is determined in step S81108 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S81108: YES), the process proceeds to step S81110, where the fluctuation end process is executed. The fluctuation end process controls the display of the symbol display section so that the pattern to be displayed in the symbol display section determined in the fluctuation start process (Fig. 381) described below is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. After executing step S81110, the process proceeds to step S81111.

In step S81111, it is determined whether either the big win flag or the small win flag is ON. The big win flag is turned ON in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 381) described below if the result of the winning lottery is a big win. The small win flag is turned ON in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 381) described below if the result of the winning lottery is a small win. In addition, the big win flag and small win flag are turned OFF in the flag erasure processing in the transition processing (FIG. 390) at the end of the ending period described below.

If it is determined in step S81111 that either the big win flag or the small win flag is ON (S81111: YES), the process proceeds to step S81112, where the open/close execution mode flag is set ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S81113, where an open/close execution mode start command is set. The open/close execution mode start command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close execution mode has begun. The open/close execution mode start command is sent to the audio/light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 378: step S81003), which will be described later. After executing step S81113, the game play control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81111 that either the big win flag or the small win flag is not ON (S81111: NO), the game play control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game play control process (FIG. 379: S81104).

Figure 380 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S81201, it is determined whether the holding area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, if the earliest-stored holding information (the holding information stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra (Figure 362) is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information (the holding information stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb) among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb (Figure 362), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb is stored in the holding area before the earliest-stored holding information among the holding information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra, the holding area to be processed is determined to be the second holding area Rb. In other words, by executing the processing of step S81201, the pending information can be processed in the order in which it was stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

If it is determined in step S81201 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step S81201: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area is performed in steps S81202 to S81207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81201 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S81201: NO), data setting processing for the second holding area is performed in steps S81208 to S81213.

In step S81202, the first start pending number RaN in the first pending area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S81203, where the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S81204. In step S81204, the data stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S81205.

In step S81205, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S81205, proceed to step S81206.

In step S81206, if the second symbol display unit flag in the various flags storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF; if it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display will start from the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, proceed to step S81207.

In step S81207, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data from the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. The data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S81207 is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S81003 of normal processing (Figure 378). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light emitting control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

If it is determined in step S81201 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step S81201: NO), proceed to step S81208.

In step S81208, the second start pending number RbN in the second holding area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step S81209. In step S81209, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step S81210, where the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step S81211.

In step S81211, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in areas 1 to 4 sequentially toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in area 1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from area 2 to area 1, area 3 to area 2, area 4 to area 3, and so on. After executing step S81211, proceed to step S81212.

In step S81212, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flags storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON; if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step S81213.

In step S81213, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio and light control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift in data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63f of ROM 63 that includes information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, i.e., corresponds to the second starting port 34, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light control device 90. This data setting process then ends.

The shift command set in step S81213 is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in step S81003 of normal processing (Figure 378). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold items.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 379: S81105).

Figure 381 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S81301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the memory area (reserved area) due to a ball entering the starting hole in the starting hole ball entry processing (Figure 370) is read. Then, proceed to step S81302.

In step S81302, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 being processed is information acquired in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, or information acquired in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step S81302 that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S81302: NO), the process proceeds to step S81303. In step S81303, the win/loss table for the first starting gate is referenced, and then the process proceeds to step S81305.

If it is determined in step S81302 that the second symbol display flag is ON (S81302: YES), the process proceeds to step S81304. In step S81304, the win/loss table for the second starting gate is referenced, and then the process proceeds to step S81305.

In step S81305, it is determined whether the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S81305 that the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery (S81305: YES), proceed to step S81306.

In step S81306, the stop result setting process for a jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a jackpot is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a jackpot will be won. Specifically, the stop result table for a jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e is referenced to obtain address information for the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot, and this address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S81306, the process proceeds to step S81307.

In step S81307, the jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S81308, where a specific process execution determination process is executed. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the process described in FIG. 367, i.e., a process including the execution of a W chance suggestion effect, in the open/close execution mode executed after the end of a game in which a jackpot has been won. Details of the specific process execution determination process will be described later. After executing step S81308, the process proceeds to step S81315.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81305 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 read does not indicate a jackpot in the winning lottery (S81305: NO), proceed to step S81309.

In step S81309, it is determined whether the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a small win in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S81309 that the value of the read-out winning random number counter C1 indicates a small win in the winning lottery (S81309: YES), proceed to step S81310.

In step S81310, the stop result setting process for a small win is executed. The stop result setting process for a small win is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a small win will be won. After executing step S81310, proceed to step S81311.

In step S81311, the small win flag is turned ON. After executing step S81311, proceed to step S81315.

In step S81309, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 does not indicate a small win in the winning lottery (S81309: NO), proceed to step S81312.

In step S81312, it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current game round being executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read. Then, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table memory area 63c is referenced. After that, as a result of referencing the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step S81312 that a reach will occur in the current game round (S81312: YES), proceed to step S81313.

In step S81313, a reach stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, a process is executed to set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game turn, which results in a reach stop result. More specifically, by referencing the reach stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S81313, the process proceeds to step S81315.

If it is determined in step S81312 that no reach will occur in the current game round (S81312: NO), proceed to step S81314.

In step S81314, a stop result setting process for a loss is executed. The stop result setting process for a loss is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which will result in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and this address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step S81314, the process proceeds to step S81315.

In step S81315, a process for setting the variable time is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on whether or not a jackpot has occurred and whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S81315, the process proceeds to step S81316.

In step S81316, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S81316 that the second symbol display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON (S81316: NO), the process proceeds to step S81317, where a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information obtained based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S81315.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81316 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S81316: YES), the process proceeds to step S81318, where a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round relates to the pending information obtained based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and the variation time set in step S81315. After executing step S81317 or step S81318, the process proceeds to step S81319.

In step S81319, a change type command is set. The change type command includes information on whether a jackpot has occurred, whether a reach has occurred, and whether a specific process has been executed.

The variation commands and variation type commands set in steps S81317 to S81319 are sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step S81003 of normal processing (Fig. 378). The audio and light emitting control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation commands and variation type commands, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step S81319, proceed to step S81320.

In step S81320, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, begins displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display unit flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display unit 37a and a changing display is initiated; if the second pattern display unit flag is ON, the pattern display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display unit 37b and a changing display is initiated. After step S81320 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Specific Process Execution Determination Process>
Next, the specific process execution determination process will be described. The specific process execution determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 381: S81308). Here, the specific process means the series of processes described in Fig. 367. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the specific process.

Figure 382 is a flowchart showing the specific process execution determination process. In step S81401, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON. As mentioned above, the process described in Figure 367 is executed when the game turn in question results in a jackpot in the winning lottery that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first start hole 33. Therefore, in order to determine whether the game turn to be processed is executed in response to a game ball entering the first start hole 33 or a game ball entering the second start hole 34, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S81401 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S81401: NO), proceed to step S81402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81401 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S81401: YES), the specific processing execution determination process is terminated.

In step S81402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game that will result in a jackpot in the winning lottery is a predetermined specific value. As explained in FIG. 367, the processing shown in FIG. 367 is not executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first starting port 33, but is executed only in specific cases. Therefore, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game that will result in a jackpot is a predetermined specific value, and if it is a specific value, it is determined to execute a specific processing. In this embodiment, the specific value is set to two values, "0" and "1," out of the "0 to 4" values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the first starting port shown in FIG. 363. Therefore, in step S81402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game that will result in a jackpot in the winning lottery is "0" or "1." In step S81402, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is a specific value (S81402: YES), proceed to step S81403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81402 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not a specific value (S81402: NO), the specific process execution determination process ends.

In step S81403, the specific processing flag is turned ON. In the processing described in FIG. 367, an opening/closing scenario (opening pattern) in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened must be set during the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode. The specific processing flag is provided to identify whether or not a specific process is to be executed in the processing for determining the opening/closing scenario (FIG. 386: Opening/closing scenario setting processing). After executing step S81403, proceed to step S81404.

In step S81404, a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that a specific processing will be executed. The specific processing command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output processing for normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003), which will be described later. After step S81404 is executed, the specific processing execution determination processing ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 381: S81015).

Figure 383 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable time. In step S81501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, proceed to step S81502.

In step S81502, it is determined whether a jackpot has been won in the lottery for the current game. Specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if the jackpot flag is ON (S81502: YES), the process proceeds to step S81503.

In step S81503, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S81509, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S81502 that a jackpot has not been won in the lottery for the current game (S81502: NO), the process proceeds to step S81504, where it is determined whether a small jackpot has been won in the lottery for the current game. Specifically, it is determined whether the small jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if the small jackpot flag is ON (S81504: YES), the process proceeds to step S81505.

In step S81505, the small win variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S81509, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S81504 that the player has not won a small prize in the winning lottery for this game (S81504: NO), proceed to step S81506.

In step S81506, it is determined whether a reach will occur in the current round of play. Since this process (S81506) is executed if a jackpot or a small jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery for the current round of play in step S81502 above, in step S81506 it is determined whether a reach will occur among the rounds of play in which a jackpot or small jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach will occur (S81506: YES), and the process proceeds to step S81507. Note that when determining whether a reach will occur using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 is referenced.

In step S81507, the variable time table for reaching a winning position stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time for reaching a winning position is constant. Then, the process proceeds to step S81509, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S81506 that a reach will not occur in this game (S81506: NO), the process proceeds to step S81508, where the non-reach reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step S81509, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process ends.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data in the fluctuation time table referenced will differ depending on the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN when determining the fluctuation time for that game round.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is configured to be set so that the larger the values of the first start-up pending number RaN and the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, other configurations are also possible, such as the larger the value of the total hold number CRN, so that the fluctuation time is set to be shorter. Furthermore, without being limited to this, for example, the configuration may be independent of the total hold number CRN, and the smaller the total hold number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0," the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the shorter the fluctuation time. When the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Furthermore, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first start-up pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time; when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or greater, the larger the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or it may be set to be constant and independent of each pending number RaN, RbN.

Furthermore, the non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information items is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time when a reach occurs, and the variable time that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won and when a miss is reached may be different from the variable time that is unlikely to be selected. Also, a variable time table for a special jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a miss is allowed, and a variable time table for a complete miss may be set separately.

<Game status transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 378: S81007).

Figure 384 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S81601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending presentation in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S81601 that the ending period flag is not ON (S81601: NO), proceed to step S81602, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is transitioned to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

If it is determined in step S81602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S81602: NO), proceed to step S81603, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set ON at the start of the opening period and set OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S81603 that the opening period flag is not ON (S81603: NO), proceed to step S81604, where it is determined whether the timing has come when the variable display of the patterns in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S81604 that the variable display has not come to an end (S81604: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S81604 that the variable display has ended (S81604: YES), the process proceeds to step S81605, where it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening and closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game session that triggered the start of the opening and closing execution mode ends (Figure 379: S81112), and is turned OFF when the opening and closing execution mode ends (Figure 384: S81631).

If it is determined in step S81605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S81605: YES), the process proceeds to step S81606. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S81605: NO), the game state transition process ends.

In step S81606, it is determined whether the game result of the current game (the result of the winning lottery) is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether the small win flag is ON. If it is determined in step S81606 that the game result of the current game (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small win (S81606: NO), the process proceeds to step S81607.

In step S81607, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In step S81606, it is determined that the game result (the result of the winning lottery) for this game round is not a small win, so the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a jackpot. In order to change the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a jackpot win, to low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step S81607, proceed to step S81608.

In step S81608, it is determined whether the type determination completion flag is ON. The type determination completion flag is a flag used to determine whether the jackpot type has been determined. It is set ON when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process that determines the jackpot type (Figure 385: S81709), and is set OFF immediately before the opening/closing scenario setting process is executed (S81610). In step S81608, if it is determined that the type determination completion flag is not ON (S81608: NO), the process proceeds to step S81609.

In step S81609, the type determination process is executed. The type determination process is described below.

If it is determined in step S81608 that the type determination completion flag is ON (S81608: YES), proceed to step S81610, where the type determination completion flag is set to OFF. Then, proceed to step S81611.

Also, if it is determined in step S81606 that the game result for this round (the result of the winning lottery) is a small win (S81606: YES), the process proceeds to step S81611.

In step S81611, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. As described above, the opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which the opening patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 during round play are set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step S81611, the process proceeds to step S81612.

In step S81612, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the duration of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S81612, proceed to step S81613.

In step S81613, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90 in step S81003 of normal processing (Figure 378). This opening command includes information about the set opening time, information about the jackpot type, and information about the jackpot or small jackpot that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode. The information about the jackpot or small jackpot is information such as whether a jackpot or small jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed when a gaming ball entered the first starting port 33, whether a new jackpot was won by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222 during a round of play executed by the jackpot or small jackpot, whether a jackpot or small jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed when a gaming ball entered the second starting port 34, or whether a new jackpot was won by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222 during a round of play executed by the jackpot or small jackpot. The audio and light emitting control device 90 determines the content of the effects corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined content. After executing step S81613, the process proceeds to step S81614, where the opening period flag is turned ON. The game state transition process then ends.

If it is determined in step S81603 that the opening period flag is ON (S81603: YES), proceed to step S81615.

In step S81615, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0." If it is determined in step S81615 that the opening period has ended (S81615: YES), the process proceeds to step S81616, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S81617.

In step S81617, processing is executed to start the round display to notify the type of the current open/close execution mode. Specifically, when a jackpot type is determined by the type determination processing, a display indicating the number of rounds of play set for the determined jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39, and when a jackpot is confirmed by a game ball entering the V winning port 222, a display indicating the number of rounds of play set for the jackpot type determined by the confirmation of the jackpot is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step S81617, the program proceeds to step S81618.

In step S81618, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S81602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is ON (S81602: YES), the process proceeds to step S81619, where the special prize opening/closing processing is executed. The special prize opening/closing processing will be described later. After executing step S81619, the process proceeds to step S81620.

In step S81620, it is determined whether the V-winning jackpot flag is ON. The V-winning jackpot flag is turned ON when a gaming ball enters the V-winning opening 222, and is turned OFF after the opening time for the V-winning jackpot opening/closing execution mode has been set (Figure 388: S81910).

If it is determined in step S81620 that the V prize jackpot flag is ON (S81620: YES), the process proceeds to step S81621, where V prize processing is executed. V prize processing will be described later.

In step S81621, the V winning process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81620 that the V-winning jackpot flag is not ON (S81620: NO), proceed to step S81622.

In step S81622, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the large prize opening/closing process has ended (S81622: YES), the process proceeds to step S81623. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81622 that the large prize opening/closing process has not ended (S81622: NO), the large prize opening/closing process ends immediately.

In step S81623, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then processing proceeds to step S81624.

In step S81624, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is terminated so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S81624, the process proceeds to step S81625.

In step S81625, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). After executing step S81625, proceed to step S81626.

In step S81626, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step S81003 of normal processing (FIG. 378). Upon receiving the ending command, the audio and light emission control device 90 starts a performance corresponding to the ending period. After executing step S81626, proceed to step S81627.

In step S81627, the ending period flag is turned ON. Then, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step S81601 that the ending period flag is ON (S81601: YES), proceed to step S81628.

In step S81628, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S81625), is "0." If it is determined in step S81628 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (S81628: YES), proceed to step S81629.

In step S81629, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S81630, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period has ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S81630, the process proceeds to step S81631, where the open/close execution mode flag is turned OFF. Then, this game state transition process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81628 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (S81628: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Type determination process>
Next, the type determination process will be described. The type determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 384: S81609).

Figure 385 is a flowchart showing the type determination process. In step S81701, it is determined whether the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i, and is turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined.

If it is determined in step S81701 that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is not ON (S81701: NO), proceed to step S81702.

In step S81702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, which triggers the opening/closing execution mode and the type determination process to be executed. In the ball entry process for the type determination gate (Fig. 375), the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which determines the jackpot type, is stored in the memory area, and then the flag is turned OFF (Fig. 375: S80705).

If it is determined in step S81702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (S81702: NO), proceed to step S81703, set the type determination permission flag to ON, and then terminate the type determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (S81702: YES), terminate the type determination process.

If it is determined in step S81701 that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON (S81701: YES), proceed to step S81704.

In step S81704, it is determined whether the second pattern display unit flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S81704 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S81704: NO), the process proceeds to step S81705, where the allocation table for the first starting slot is referenced to identify the jackpot type (allocation result) corresponding to the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2. Then, the process proceeds to step S81707.

If it is determined in step S81704 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S81704: YES), the process proceeds to step S81706, where the allocation table for the second starting slot is referenced to identify the jackpot type (allocation result) corresponding to the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2. Then, the process proceeds to step S81707.

In step S81707, the jackpot type identified in step S81705 or step S81706 is set as the jackpot type for the current jackpot. After executing step S81707, proceed to step S81708.

In step S81708, the type determination completion flag is turned ON, and then processing proceeds to step S81709. In step S81709, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned OFF. Then, the type determination process ends.

<Open/close scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 384: S81611).

Figure 386 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process. In step S81801, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S81801 that the jackpot flag is ON (S81801: YES), the process proceeds to step S81802.

In step S81802, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S81802 that the specific processing flag is not ON (S81802: NO), proceed to step S81803.

In step S81803, the opening and closing scenario for the jackpot is set for the normal case (when no specific processing is performed) according to the type of jackpot.

Figure 387 is an explanatory diagram explaining the opening and closing scenarios in this embodiment. In this embodiment, opening and closing scenarios are broadly categorized into three types.

The first is the opening and closing scenario for a normal jackpot, as shown in Figure 387 (a). The opening and closing scenario for a normal jackpot is an opening and closing scenario in which the opening and closing patterns of the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 are set in an opening and closing execution mode in which no specific processing is executed when a jackpot occurs. As shown in the figure, an opening and closing scenario is set for each number of rounds of play (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each opening and closing scenario set as a normal jackpot opening and closing scenario is set with an opening and closing pattern in which only the first opening and closing door 36b opens and closes in round play.

The second is the jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed, as shown in Figure 387 (b). The jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are set in the opening/closing execution mode in which a specific process is executed when a jackpot occurs. As shown in the figure, an opening/closing scenario is set for each number of rounds of play (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as the jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed has an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens and closes once in the first round (1R) of round play, and in subsequent rounds of play, only the first opening/closing door 36b opens and closes. More specifically, in the first round, the operation of the second opening/closing door 213 and the storage valve 216 described in Figure 360 is executed.

The third is the small win opening/closing scenario shown in Figure 387 (c). In this embodiment, the small win opening/closing scenario is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode when a small win occurs are set. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as a small win opening/closing scenario is set with an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door opens and closes only once in the first round (1st round) of a round game.

Referring back to Figure 386 for the explanation, in step S81803, the opening and closing scenario for a normal jackpot (Figure 387(a)) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set, and then the opening and closing scenario setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S81802 that the specific processing flag is ON (S81802: YES), proceed to step S81804.

In step S81804, the opening and closing scenario for the jackpot (Figure 387 (b)) is set when specific processing is executed according to the type of jackpot. The opening and closing scenario setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S81801 that the jackpot flag is not ON (S81801: NO), proceed to step S81805.

In step S81805, the opening and closing scenario for a small win (Figure 387 (c)) is set. The opening and closing scenario setting process then ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 384: S81612).

Figure 388 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S81901, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S81901 that the jackpot flag is ON (S81901: YES), the process proceeds to step S81902.

In step S81902, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S81902 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S81902: NO), the process proceeds to step S81903.

In step S81903, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S81903 that the specific processing flag is ON (S81903: YES), proceed to step S81904.

In step S81904, an opening time corresponding to the specific processing is set. Specifically, a time corresponding to the opening period in the specific processing described in FIG. 367 is set. During this opening period, as described in FIG. 367, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step S81904, the process proceeds to step S81905, where the specific processing flag is turned OFF. The opening time setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S81903 that the specific processing flag is not ON (S81903: NO), proceed to step S81906.

In step S81906, an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the first starting slot is set. During this opening period, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. The opening time setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S81902 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S81902: YES), proceed to step S81907.

In step S81907, an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the second starting slot is set. During this opening period, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. The opening time setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S81901 that the jackpot flag is not ON (S81901: NO), proceed to step S81908.

In step S81908, it is determined whether the V-winning jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S81908 that the V-winning jackpot flag is ON (S81908: YES), proceed to step S81909.

In step S81909, an opening time corresponding to a V-winning jackpot is set. During this opening period, an effect (V-winning notification effect) indicating that a game ball has entered the V-winning slot 222 and resulted in a jackpot, and a right-hit suggestion effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the V-winning notification effect and right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step S81909, the process proceeds to step S81910, where the V-winning jackpot flag is turned OFF. The opening time setting process then ends.

If it is determined in step S81908 that the V-winning jackpot flag is not ON (S81908: NO), proceed to step S81911.

In step S81911, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S81911 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S81911: NO), the process proceeds to step S81912.

In step S81912, the opening time corresponding to the small jackpot for the first starting port is set. If a small jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting port 33, the processing described in Figure 368 is executed. As shown in Figure 368, during the opening period, a right-hit suggestion effect and a W-chance suggestion effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect and the W-chance suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S81911 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S81911: YES), proceed to step S81913.

In step S81913, an opening time corresponding to a small win for the second starting slot is set. During this opening period, a right-hit suggestion effect and an effect encouraging the player to place the game ball in the V winning slot 222 are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hit suggestion effect and an effect encouraging the player to place the game ball in the V winning slot 222 can be executed is set as the opening time. The opening time setting process then ends.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 384: S81619).

Figure 389 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. This large prize opening/closing process is broadly composed of three control processes. Specifically, steps S82001 to S82007 are the opening/closing control process for the first opening/closing door 36b, steps S82008 to S82014 are the opening/closing control process for the second opening/closing door 213, and steps S82015 to S82022 are the opening/closing control process for the storage valve 216.

In step S82001, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step S82001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is not open (S82001: NO), the process proceeds to step S82002.

In step S82002, it is determined whether the opening conditions for the first opening/closing door 36b have been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is time to open the first opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step S82002 that the opening conditions for the first opening/closing door 36b have been met (S82002: YES), the process proceeds to step S82003.

In step S82003, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened. Then, proceed to step S82004.

In step S82004, a first door open command is set. The first door open command is a command for the sub-side control device to recognize that the first door 36b has been opened. The first door open command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003). After executing step S82004, proceed to step S82008.

If it is determined in step S82002 that the opening conditions for the first opening/closing door 36b are not met (S82002: NO), proceed directly to step S82008.

If it is determined in step S82001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is open (S82001: YES), proceed to step S82005.

In step S82005, it is determined whether the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b has been met. The closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is met when the continuous open time (e.g., 15 seconds) for the first opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or when it is detected that a preset number of game balls have entered the first large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S82005 that the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b has been met (S82005: YES), the process proceeds to step S82006.

In step S82006, the first opening and closing door 36b is closed. Then, proceed to step S82007.

In step S82007, a first door closing command is set. The first door closing command is a command for the sub-side control device to recognize that the first door 36b is closed. The first door closing command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003). After executing step S82007, proceed to step S82008.

If it is determined in step S82005 that the closing conditions for the first opening/closing door 36b are not met (S82005: NO), proceed directly to step S82008.

In step S82008, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 213 is open. If it is determined in step S82008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is not open (S82008: NO), the process proceeds to step S82009.

In step S82009, it is determined whether the opening conditions for the second door 213 have been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is time to open the second door 213. In step S82009, if it is determined that the opening conditions for the second door 213 have been met (S82009: YES), the process proceeds to step S82010.

In step S82010, the second opening and closing door 213 is opened. Then, proceed to step S82011.

In step S82011, a second door open command is set. The second door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second door 213 has been opened. The second door open command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003). After executing step S82011, proceed to step S82015.

If it is determined in step S82009 that the opening conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are not met (S82009: NO), proceed directly to step S82015.

If it is determined in step S82008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is open (S82008: YES), proceed to step S82012.

In step S82012, it is determined whether the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 has been met. The closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is met when the continuous open time (e.g., 15 seconds) for the second opening/closing door 213 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or when it is detected that a preset number of game balls have entered the second large winning opening 212. If it is determined in step S82012 that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 has been met (S82012: YES), the process proceeds to step S82013.

In step S82013, the second opening and closing door 213 is closed. Then, proceed to step S82014.

In step S82014, a second door closing command is set. The second door closing command is a command for the sub-side control device to recognize that the second door 213 is closed. The second door closing command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003). After executing step S82014, proceed to step S82015.

If it is determined in step S82012 that the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are not met (S82012: NO), proceed directly to step S82015.

In step S82015, it is determined whether the storage valve 216 is open. If it is determined in step S82015 that the storage valve 216 is not open (S82015: NO), proceed to step S82016.

In step S82016, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the storage valve 216 have been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is time to open the storage valve 216. If it is determined in step S82016 that the conditions for opening the storage valve 216 have been met (S82016: YES), the process proceeds to step S82017.

In step S82017, the storage valve 216 is opened. Then, proceed to step S82018.

In step S82018, the Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned ON. The Kroon ball entry permission flag is a flag provided to prevent a V-entry jackpot from occurring even if a defect or abnormality occurs in the structure of the storage valve 216, causing a gaming ball to unintentionally flow from the storage section 218 to the Kroon 220 via the flow path 211 and enter the V-entry port 222. The Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened during the jackpot opening/closing process, and is turned OFF when a gaming ball enters the V-entry port 222 or non-V-entry port 224 provided in the Kroon 220. After executing step S82018, proceed to step S82019.

In step S82019, a storage valve open command is set. The storage valve open command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the storage valve 216 has opened. The storage valve open command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003). After executing step S82019, the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S82016 that the conditions for opening the storage valve 216 are not met (S82016: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S82015 that the storage valve 216 is open (S82015: YES), proceed to step S82020.

In step S82020, it is determined whether the closing condition for the storage valve 216 has been met. The closing condition for the storage valve 216 is met when it is detected that the continuous open time (e.g., 2 seconds) for the storage valve 216 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed. In step S82020, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 has been met (S82020: YES), the process proceeds to step S82021.

In step S82021, the storage valve 216 is closed. Then, proceed to step S82022.

In step S82022, a storage valve close command is set. The storage valve close command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the storage valve 216 has closed. The storage valve close command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the command output process of normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003). After executing step S82022, the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S82020 that the conditions for closing the storage valve 216 are not met (S82020: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

<V prize processing>
Next, the V winning process will be described. The V winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 384: S81621). As shown in Fig. 384, when the game ball is detected to have entered the V winning hole 222 in the ball entry process for the crane (Fig. 377) and the V winning jackpot flag is turned ON (Fig. 377: S80904), the V winning process is executed by determining that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Fig. 384: S81620: YES).

Figure 390 is a flowchart showing the V winning process. In step S82101, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. If it is determined in step S82101 that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (S82101: NO), the process proceeds to step S82102.

In step S82102, the allocation table for V-winning triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole (Fig. 365(b)) is referenced, and the type of jackpot in the V-winning jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball entry process for the Kruun (Fig. 377). After executing step S82102, proceed to step S82104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82101 that the second pattern display unit flag is ON (S82101: YES), proceed to step S82103.

In step S82103, the allocation table for the second starting hole (Figure 365 (c)) is referenced, and the jackpot type for the V winning jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball entry process for the Kruun (Figure 377). After executing step S82103, proceed to step S82104.

As can be seen from steps S82102 and S82103, even if a gaming ball enters the same V entry port 222 resulting in a V entry jackpot, the allocation table referenced is different between a case where a gaming ball enters the first start port 33 resulting in a small win, causing the second opening/closing door 213 to open and the gaming ball to enter the V entry port 222 resulting in a V entry jackpot, and a case where a gaming ball enters the second start port 34 resulting in a small win, causing the second opening/closing door 213 to open and the gaming ball to enter the V entry port 222 resulting in a V entry jackpot.

In step S82104, the jackpot type identified in step S82102 or step S82103 is set as the jackpot type for the V-winning jackpot. Then, proceed to step S82105.

In step S82105, the type determination completion flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step S82106, where the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF. As can be seen from step S81602 in FIG. 384, by turning the opening/closing processing period flag OFF, the opening/closing execution mode that was in progress can be ended and a new opening/closing execution mode can be started in response to a V prize jackpot. After step S82106 is executed, the V prize processing ends.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 384: S81630).

Figure 391 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S82201, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a jackpot with high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S82201 that the current jackpot is a jackpot with high frequency support mode (S82201: YES), the process proceeds to step S82202.

In step S82202, the value of the play count counter PNC corresponding to the jackpot type is set. In other words, the number of plays that can be performed with high frequency support is set in the play count counter PNC. The number of plays that can be performed with high frequency support is set for each jackpot type. The number of plays that can be performed with high frequency support set for each jackpot type has been explained in Figure 365, so explanation will be omitted here.

After executing step S82202, proceed to step S82203 and turn the PNC count flag ON. Then proceed to step S82204.

In step S82204, a high-frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command that causes the sub-side control device to recognize information regarding the number of games that can be played in high-frequency support. The high-frequency support mode command is sent to the audio and light control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003). After executing step S82204, proceed to step S82205.

In step S82205, the flag clearing process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, V-winning jackpot flag, and second symbol display section flag are turned OFF. After executing step S82205, proceed to step S82206.

In step S82206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82201 that the current jackpot is not a jackpot with a high frequency support mode (S82201: NO), proceed to step S82207.

In step S82207, the flag clearing process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, V-winning jackpot flag, and second symbol display flag are turned OFF. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electrical support treatment>
Next, the electric support processing will be described. The electric support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 378: S81008).

Figure 392 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing. In step S82301, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step S82301, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (S82301: NO), the process proceeds to step S82302.

In step S82302, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is turned ON if the electric feature opening lottery, which determines whether or not the electric feature 34a will be opened, is selected to open, and is turned OFF if the support in progress flag is ON. In step S82302, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (S82302: NO), the program proceeds to step S82303.

In step S82303, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In step S82303, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S82303: NO), the main power support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S82303: YES), the processing proceeds to step S82304.

In step S82304, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step S82304 that it is time to end the variable display (S82304: YES), the process proceeds to step S82305, where a miss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the variable display of the symbols in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the miss display displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82304 that it is not time to end the variable display (S82304: NO), the process proceeds to step S82306.

In step S82306, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reel items SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S82306 that the value of the number of reserved reel items SN is "0" (S82306: NO), the main electric reel support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82306 that the value of the number of reserved reel items SN is greater than "0" (S82306: YES), the processing proceeds to step S82307.

In step S82307, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S82307 that the device is in high-frequency support mode (S82307: YES), proceed to step S82308.

In step S82308, a lottery to open an electric feature is held. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 461, the electric feature opening lottery is won (see Figure 366 (b)). In addition, simultaneously with the electric feature opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 seconds). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, proceed to step S82309.

In step S82309, it is determined whether the result of the electric reel opening lottery in step S82308 is a support win. If it is determined in step S82309 that the result of the electric reel opening lottery is a support win (S82309: YES), the process proceeds to step S82310, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric reel 34a has been opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S82311.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82309 that the result of the electric feature opening lottery is not a support win (S82309: NO), the process proceeds to step S82311 without executing the processing of step S82310.

In step S82311, it is determined whether the play count counter area is "0". The play count counter is decremented by 1 each time a play is completed in high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S82311 that the play count counter area is not "0" (S82311: NO), the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82311 that the play count counter area is "0", the processing proceeds to step S82312, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step S82312, the processing proceeds to step S82313.

In step S82313, the PNC count flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step S82314.

In step S82314, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command containing information to make the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the electric support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S82314 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 during the external output processing of normal processing (Figure 378: step S81003). Based on receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the support mode is low-frequency support mode and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S82307 that the mode is not high frequency support mode (S82307: NO), the program proceeds to step S82315, where a lottery is held to open an electric feature. Specifically, the value stored in the electric feature reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric feature opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric feature opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric feature opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e., 29.5 seconds). The program then proceeds to step S82316.

In step S82316, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step S82315 is a support win. If it is determined in step S82316 that there is no support win (S82316: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82316 that there is a support win (S82316: YES), the process proceeds to step S82317, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S82302 that the support win flag is ON (S82302: YES), the process proceeds to step S82318, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol unit 38. If it is determined in step S82318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S82318: NO), the normal symbol unit 38 is currently displaying a fluctuating pattern, so the main electric symbol support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S82318: YES), the process proceeds to step S82319.

In step S82319, a win display is set. This ends the variable display of the symbols on the normal unit 38 with the win display still displayed. Then, proceed to step S82320, where the support in progress flag is turned ON and the support win flag is turned OFF. Then, the main role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step S82301 that the support flag is ON (S82301: YES), the process proceeds to step S82321, where an electric open/close control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. The electric open/close control process will be described later. After step S82321 is executed, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electrical switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 392: S82321).

Figure 393 is a flowchart showing the electric device opening/closing control process. In step S82401, it is determined whether the electric device 34a is open. Whether the electric device 34a is open is determined by whether the electric device drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the electric device 34a is open (S82401: YES), the process proceeds to step S82402.

In step S82402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a. In step S82402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S82402: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a has not ended, the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S82402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S82402: YES), the process proceeds to step S82403, where a closing process is performed to control the electric device 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being open, is "0," the electric device 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is then used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric device 34a being closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250." After executing step S82403, the process proceeds to step S82404.

In step S82404, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S82405, where it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S82405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S82405: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S82405: YES), the process proceeds to step S82406, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. The main electric role opening/closing control process is then terminated.

If it is determined in step S82401 that the electric role 34a is not open (S82401: NO), proceed to step S82407 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0." In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the closed state of the electric role 34a. If it is determined in step S82407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S82407: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S81507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S82407: YES), proceed to step S82408 to execute an opening process that controls the electric role 34a to the open state. Then, proceed to step S82409.

In step S82409, it is determined whether the device is in opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that the device is not in opening/closing execution mode (S82409: NO), the process proceeds to step S82410, where it is determined whether the device is in high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S82410 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S82410: YES), the process proceeds to step S82411, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). The main electric switch opening/closing control process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S82409 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S82409: YES), or if it is determined in step S82410 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S82410: NO), the process proceeds to step S82412, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). Then, this electric switching control process ends.

H6. Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 394 is a block diagram that mainly shows the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components, such as the power supply device 85, have been omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is a device that incorporates a ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, part of the area of RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92; they may each be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the performance operation button 24, speaker 46, various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102; they may each be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various received commands, thereby controlling the VDP 105 (specifically, generating internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 104 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 102.

VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP 105 adjusts the timing of MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM 107 from character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and other data. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106, with each character ROM 106 responsible for storing image data and other data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

Video RAM 107 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively; the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emitting control device 90 will also be referred to as the audio/light MPU 92, audio/light ROM 93, and audio/light RAM 94, respectively; and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will also be referred to as the display MPU 102.

H7. Various processes executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the acoustic/optical side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 395 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is executed repeatedly at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing is explained below.

In step S84101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio-visual RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio-visual RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. Commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step S84101, the process proceeds to step S84102.

In step S84102, a hold command response process is executed. In the hold command response process, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a hold command has been received, a process corresponding to that hold command is executed. Details of the hold command response process will be described later. After executing step S84102, the process proceeds to step S84103.

In step S84103, the game round presentation setting process is executed. In the game round presentation setting process, it is determined whether a variation command and a variation type command have been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that these commands have been received, the content (type) of presentation to be executed in that game round is determined, and the determined presentation is set to be executed in that game round. Details of the game round presentation setting process will be described later. After executing step S84103, the process proceeds to step S84104.

In step S84104, the standby period effect setting process is executed. In the standby period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the standby period described above is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during that standby period. Details of the standby period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S84104, proceed to step S84105.

In step S84105, the opening period effect setting process is executed. In the opening period effect setting process, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an opening command has been received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the opening period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Details of the opening period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S84105, the process proceeds to step S84106.

In step S84106, the opening/closing processing period performance setting process is executed. In the opening/closing processing period performance setting process, the content (type) of the performance to be executed during the opening/closing processing period is determined, and the determined performance is set to be executed during the opening/closing processing period. Details of the opening/closing processing period performance setting process will be described later. After executing step S84106, proceed to step S84107.

In step S84107, the ending period effect setting process is executed. In the ending period effect setting process, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an ending command has been received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the ending period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during that ending period. Details of the ending period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S84107, proceed to step S84108.

In step S84108, a command transmission process is executed. In the command transmission process, various effect commands for displaying video corresponding to the effects set in the various effect setting processes described above are transmitted to the display control device 100. After executing step S84108, the process proceeds to step S84109.

In step S84109, light emission control processing is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control processing, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processing of steps S84102 to S84107 above. In other words, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps S84102 to S84107 above. After executing step S84109, proceed to step S84110.

In step S84110, audio output control processing is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control processing, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio output data read in the processing of steps S84102 to S84107 above. In other words, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed so that audio corresponding to the effects set in steps S84102 to S84107 above is output. After executing step S84110, this timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Pending command response processing>
Next, the hold command response process will be described. The hold command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 395: S84102).

Figure 396 is a flowchart showing the hold command response process. In step S84201, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S84201 that a hold command has been received (S84201: YES), the process proceeds to step S84202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84201 that a hold command has not been received (S84201: NO), the hold command response process ends.

In step S84202, an update process is executed when a ball enters. In the update process when a ball enters, processing is executed to enable the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of reserved information items acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 33, the number of reserved information items acquired based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 34, and the total number of these reserved information items. Details of the update process when a ball enters in step S84202 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of reserved information items acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 will be referred to as the "first reserved number," the number of reserved information items acquired based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 will be referred to as the "second reserved number," and the sum of the first reserved number and the second reserved number will be referred to as the "total reserved number." After executing step S84202, proceed to step S84203.

In step S84203, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled based on the number of hold information items acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 identified in step S84202 and the number of hold information items acquired based on the game ball entering the second start port 34. After step S84203 is executed, this hold command response process is terminated.

<Update process when the ball goes in>
Next, the update process when a ball goes in will be described. The update process when a ball goes in is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command response process (FIG. 396: S84202).

Figure 397 is a flowchart showing the update process when a ball enters the game. In step S84301, it is determined whether the pending command to be read in this timer interrupt process was sent based on a game ball entering the first start hole 33. If it is determined in step S84301 that the pending command to be read in this timer interrupt process was sent based on a game ball entering the first start hole 33 (S84301: YES), proceed to step S84302, where update processing is performed for the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The first pending number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information obtained based on a game ball entering the first start hole 33. In the update processing for the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the information on the pending number included in the pending command to be read in this timer interrupt process. After executing step S84302, proceed to step S84304, which will be described later.

In step S84301, if it is determined that the pending command to be read in this timer interrupt process was not sent based on a game ball entering the first start port 33 (S84301: NO), that is, if it is determined that the pending command was sent based on a game ball entering the second start port 34, proceed to step S84303, where an update process is performed on the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The second pending number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information obtained based on a game ball entering the second start port 34. In the update process of the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the information on the pending number included in the command to be read in this timer interrupt process. After executing step S84303, proceed to step S84304.

The reason for the processing of steps S84302 and S84303 as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio and light-emitting control unit 90. Therefore, if power is cut off while reserved information related to game balls entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60, the reserved information will be stored and maintained in the main control unit 60, but the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 will recognize that there are zero reserved information items. In this case, if the audio and light-emitting control unit 90 were configured to count up the first reserved item number counter area or the second reserved item number counter area each time it receives a reserve command, an inconvenience could arise in which the number of reserved information items actually stored in the main control unit 60 would not match the number of reserved information items recognized by the audio and light-emitting control unit 90. In contrast, in the present embodiment described above, the main control unit 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio and light emission control unit 90 sets the information on the number of held items included in the command in the first held item number counter area or the second held item number counter area each time it receives a hold command, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step S84304, an update process is executed for the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The total reserved number counter area is a counter area used by the sound/light side MPU 92 to determine the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on game balls entering the first starting hole 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on game balls entering the second starting hole 34. In this update process, the information in the total reserved number counter area is updated to the sum of the information on the number of reserved balls measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information on the number of reserved balls measured in the second reserved number counter area. After executing step S84304, the update process for this ball entry is terminated.

<Game performance setting process>
Next, the game play effect setting process will be described. The game play effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 395: S84103).

Figure 398 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation setting process. In step S84401, it is determined whether a fluctuation command and a fluctuation type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S84401 that a fluctuation command and a fluctuation type command have not been received (S84401: NO), this game round presentation setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84401 that a fluctuation command and a fluctuation type command have been received (S84401: YES), the process proceeds to step S84402.

In step S84402, the information contained in the received fluctuation command and fluctuation type command is read and stored. Specifically, whether the game round to be started is based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, whether there is a jackpot or a small jackpot as a result of the winning lottery for that game round, whether there is a reach or not, and the fluctuation time for that game round are read and stored. Then, proceed to step S84403.

In step S84403, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. As described above, the specific processing command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when the result of the winning lottery for a game round is a jackpot and it is determined that the specific processing shown in Case 1 above will be executed. In step S84403, if it is determined that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S84403: YES), the process proceeds to step S84404, where the presentation pattern corresponding to the game round in which the specific processing (the processing shown in Case 1) will be executed is set to be executed in that game round. Thereafter, this game round presentation setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84403 that a specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S84403: NO), the process proceeds to step S84405, where it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for this game is a small prize based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33. In this embodiment, a small prize won based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also called a "special 1 small prize," and a small prize won based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also called a "special 2 small prize."

In step S84405, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for this game is a special 1 small win (S84405: YES), the process proceeds to step S84406, where a presentation pattern corresponding to a special 1 small win is set to be executed in that game. Note that the presentation pattern corresponding to a special 1 small win is a presentation pattern that includes the presentation executed in the game shown in Case 2 above. Thereafter, the presentation setting process for this game is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84405 that the result of the winning lottery for this game is not a special 1 small win (S84405: NO), proceed to step S84407 and set a presentation pattern corresponding to any other result of the winning lottery (a big win that does not execute specific processing, a small win that is not a special 1 small win, a miss, etc.) to be executed in that game. Then, the presentation setting process for this game is terminated.

<Waiting period effect setting process>
Next, the standby period effect setting process will be described. The standby period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 395: S84104).

Figure 399 is a flowchart showing the standby period effect setting process. In step S84501, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S84501 that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S84501: YES), the process proceeds to step S84502, where the sound/light specific processing flag is set to ON. The sound/light specific processing flag is a flag stored in the sound/light RAM 94, and is used by the audio/light emitting control device 90 to determine whether or not to execute an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned specific processing (case 1) in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, if the opening/closing execution mode is started with the sound/light specific processing flag set to ON, an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned specific processing (case 1) will be executed in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S84502, the process proceeds to step S84503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84501 that a specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S84501: NO), step S84502 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S84503.

In step S84503, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S84503 that an opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S84503: NO), the standby period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84503 that an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S84503: YES), the process proceeds to step S84504, where it is determined whether the above-mentioned sound/light specific processing flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S84504 that the specific process flag for sound and light is ON, that is, if the above-mentioned case 1 applies (S84504: YES), proceed to step S84505, and set the right-hit suggestion effect and W-chance suggestion effect to be executed during the waiting period. Then, this waiting period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84504 that the specific process flag for sound and light is not ON (S84504: NO), proceed to step S84506, and set the right-hit suggestion effect to be executed during the waiting period. Then, this waiting period effect setting process is terminated.

<Opening period performance setting process>
Next, the opening period effect setting process will be described. The opening period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 395: S84105).

Figure 400 is a flowchart showing the opening period effect setting process. In step S84601, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, as described above, the opening command contains the result of the lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period). Therefore, the audio and light emission control device 90 can determine the result of the lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period) based on the information contained in the received opening command. If it is determined in step S84601 that an opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S84601: NO), the opening period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84601 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S84601: YES), the process proceeds to step S84602.

In step S84602, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a jackpot, based on the information contained in the received opening command. If it is determined in step S84602 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a jackpot (S84602: YES), proceed to step S84603, where an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, a right-hit suggestion effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84602 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was not a jackpot (S84602: NO), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a small jackpot, proceed to step S84604.

In step S84604, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a special 1 small win. If it is determined in step S84604 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a special 1 small win (S84604: YES), proceed to step S84605, and set the opening effect corresponding to the special 1 small win to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in Case 1 above, the right-hit suggestion effect and the W chance suggestion effect are set to be executed during the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84604 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was not a special 1 small win (S84604: NO), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a special 2 small win, proceed to step S84606, and set the opening effect corresponding to the special 2 small win to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-hit suggestion effect is set to be executed during the opening period. After that, the opening period effect setting process ends.

<Opening/closing processing period effect setting process>
Next, the opening/closing process period effect setting process will be described. The opening/closing process period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 395: S84106).

Figure 401 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing processing period effect setting process. In step S84701, the first chance effect setting process is executed. In the first chance effect setting process, processing related to setting the first chance effect in case 1 and case 2 described above is executed. Details of the first chance effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S84701, proceed to step S84702.

In step S84702, the second chance effect setting process when no balls are stored is executed. In the second chance effect setting process when no balls are stored, it is determined whether or not game balls have been stored in the storage section 218 in the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2, and if game balls have not been stored in the storage section 218, the second chance effect is set to be executed. Details of the second chance effect setting process when no balls are stored will be described later. After executing step S84702, the program proceeds to step S84703.

In step S84703, the V winning effect setting process is executed. In the V winning effect setting process, it is determined whether a game ball has accumulated in the V winning opening 222, and if a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, it is set to execute the V winning effect. Details of the V winning effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S84703, the process proceeds to step S84704.

In step S84704, the second chance effect setting process for when a V prize is not awarded is executed. In the second chance effect setting process for when a V prize is not awarded, if a game ball is stored in the storage section 218 in the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2, but the game ball does not enter the V prize opening 222, but enters the non-V prize opening 224, the second chance effect is set to be executed. Details of the second chance effect setting process for when a V prize is not awarded will be described later. After executing step S84704, proceed to step S84705.

In step S84705, the effect for the opening/closing processing period corresponding to another jackpot type is set to be executed. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot type in which an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 does not open is selected, the effect to be executed during the opening/closing processing period of that opening/closing execution mode is set. After step S84705 is executed, this opening/closing processing period effect setting process ends.

<First chance effect setting process>
Next, the first chance effect setting process will be described. The first chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period effect setting process (FIG. 401: S84701).

Figure 402 is a flowchart showing the first chance effect setting process. In step S84801, it is determined whether a second door opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, the second door 213 opens when a big win that executes a specific process or a small win is won in the winning lottery. The second door opening command also includes the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 231 (big win, small win, etc.). Therefore, the audio and light emission control device 90 can determine the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 231 (big win, small win, etc.) based on the information included in the received second door opening command. In step S84801, if it is determined that a second door opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S84801: NO), the first chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84801 that a second door open command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S84801: YES), the process proceeds to step S84802.

In step S84802, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot. If it is determined in step S84802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot (S84802: YES), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot that executes a specific process, the process proceeds to step S84803, and the first chance effect in case 1 described above is set to be executed. After step S84803 is executed, the first chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was not a jackpot (S84802: NO), the process proceeds to step S84804.

In step S84804, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win. If it is determined in step S84804 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win (S84804: YES), the process proceeds to step S84805, and the first chance effect in case 2 described above is set to be executed. After step S84805 is executed, the first chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84804 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was not a special 1 small win (S84804: NO), the first chance effect setting process is terminated.

<Second chance effect setting process when not storing>
Next, the second chance effect setting process when no reserve is performed will be described. The second chance effect setting process when no reserve is performed is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing processing period effect setting process (FIG. 401: S84702).

Figure 403 is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when not storing. In step S84901, it is determined whether a second large prize entry command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S84901 that a second large prize entry command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S84901: NO), the process proceeds to step S84904, described below. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84901 that a second large prize entry command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S84901: YES), the process proceeds to step S84902, where it is determined whether the second large prize entry command for sound and light is ON. The sound and light second large winning opening ball entry flag is a flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94, and is a flag used by the sound and light control device 90 to determine whether a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 212, i.e., whether a game ball has been stored in the storage section 218.

If it is determined in step S84902 that the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is not ON (S84902: NO), the process proceeds to step S84903, where the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S84904. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84902 that the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is ON (S84902: YES), the process proceeds directly to step S84904. In other words, if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 212 and the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is not ON, the second large prize opening ball entry flag for sound and light is set to ON.

In step S84904, it is determined whether a second door close command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S84904 that a second door close command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S84904: NO), the non-reservation second chance performance setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84904 that a second door close command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S84904: YES), the process proceeds to step S84905.

In step S84905, it is determined whether the sound and light second large prize opening ball entry flag is ON, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 212 and been stored in the storage section 218. If it is determined in step S84905 that the sound and light second large prize opening ball entry flag is ON (S84905: YES), the non-storage second chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S84905 that the sound and light second large prize opening ball entry flag is not ON (S84905: NO), the process proceeds to step S84906.

In step S84906, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot. In step S84906, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot (S84906: YES), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a jackpot that executes a specific process, the process proceeds to step S84907, where the second chance effect and jackpot announcement effect in case 1 described above are set to be executed before the start of the second round of the opening/closing processing period. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S84908, where the effects to be executed during the opening/closing processing period from the second round onwards are set. Thereafter, this non-accumulation second chance effect setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S84906 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was not a jackpot (S84906: NO), the process proceeds to step S84909, where it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win. If it is determined in step S84909 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win (S84909: YES), the process proceeds to step S84910, where the second chance effect and the loss notification effect in case 2 described above are set to be executed. Thereafter, the non-accumulation second chance effect setting process is terminated.

<V winning effect setting process>
Next, the V winning effect setting process will be described. The V winning effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period effect setting process (FIG. 401: S84703).

Figure 404 is a flowchart showing the V prize presentation setting process. In step S85001, it is determined whether a V prize presentation command has been received from the main MPU 62. The V prize presentation command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when a gaming ball enters the V prize presentation opening 222. If it is determined in step S85001 that a V prize presentation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S85001: NO), the V prize presentation setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S85001 that a V prize presentation command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S85001: YES), the process proceeds to step S85002, where a V prize presentation is set to be executed, which is a presentation indicating that a gaming ball has entered the V prize presentation opening 222. Then, the process proceeds to step S85003, where the above-mentioned second large prize presentation opening ball entry flag for sound and light is turned OFF. Then, the V prize presentation setting process ends.

<Second chance effect setting process when V is not won>
Next, the second chance effect setting process when V is not won will be described. The second chance effect setting process when V is not won is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing processing period effect setting process (FIG. 401: S84704).

Figure 405 is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when a V prize is not awarded. In step S85101, it is determined whether a non-V prize winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. A non-V prize winning command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when a gaming ball enters the non-V prize winning port 224. If it is determined in step S85101 that a non-V prize winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S85101: NO), the second chance effect setting process when a V prize is not awarded is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S85101 that a non-V prize winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S85101: YES), the process proceeds to step S85102.

In step S85102, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 213 was a jackpot. If it is determined in step S85102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 213 was a jackpot (S85102: YES), i.e., if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 213 was a jackpot that executes a specific process, the process proceeds to step S85103, where the second chance effect and jackpot announcement effect described above in Case 1 are set to be executed. After executing step S85103, the process proceeds to step S85104, where the second big winning slot ball entry flag for sound and light described above is turned OFF. The process for setting the second chance effect when the main V is not entered is then terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S85102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second door 213 was not a jackpot (S85102: NO), the process proceeds to step S85105.

In step S85105, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win. If it is determined in step S85105 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was a special 1 small win (S85105: YES), the process proceeds to step S85106, where the second chance effect and the loss notification effect in case 2 described above are set to be executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S84804 described above, where the ball entry flag for the second large winning slot for sound and light is turned OFF. Then, the second chance effect setting process for when this V does not win is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S85105 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 was not a special 1 small win (S85105: NO), the process proceeds to step S84804 described above, where the ball entry flag for the second large winning slot for sound and light is turned OFF. After that, the second chance effect setting process will end when the main V is not won.

<Ending period performance setting process>
Next, the ending period effect setting process will be described. The ending period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 395: S84107).

Figure 406 is a flowchart showing the ending period effect setting process. In step S85201, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, the ending command contains the result of the lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period). Therefore, the audio and light emission control device 90 can determine the result of the lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period) based on the information contained in the received ending command. If it is determined in step S85201 that an ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S85201: NO), this ending period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S85201 that an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S85201: YES), the process proceeds to step S85202.

In step S85202, based on the information contained in the received ending command, it is determined whether the result of the lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a jackpot. If it is determined in step S85202 that the result of the lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a jackpot (S85202: YES), proceed to step S85203, and set the ending effect corresponding to the type of jackpot to be executed during the ending period. Then, the ending period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S85202 that the result of the lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was not a jackpot (S85202: NO), that is, if the result of the lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode was a small jackpot, the ending period effect setting process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include main processing, which is executed repeatedly from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90, and V interrupt processing, which is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected simultaneously, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 407 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is explained below.

In step S85301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written to the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Other settings required for initialization are also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S85302.

In step S85302, interrupt permission is set. Once interrupt permission is set, the main processing executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, once interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 408 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S85401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described below, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 409 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and then instructs the VDP 105 to draw and display that image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated by the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed. As a result, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process for the image is completed, which prevents the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information currently being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are explained below.

In step S85501, command response processing is executed. In command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing (Figure 408) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to that command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command has been stored, control of image drawing and display is initiated so that the performance mode specified by that performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a performance operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed. If it is determined that it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode corresponding to the pressing of the performance operation button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, the contents of the next command are analyzed without executing any processing.

The command response process (S85501) analyzes all commands currently stored in the command memory area and executes processing corresponding to all analyzed commands. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed every 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command memory area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of a performance is set by the audio and light control device 90 and the performance begins, it is highly likely that various commands for specifying the content of that performance will be stored in the command memory area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the type of performance, such as the preview performance or LCD pattern set by the audio and light control device 90, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that type is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step S85502, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which was set by the command response process (S85501) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S85503.

In step S85503, task processing is executed. In task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as determined by the display setting process (S85502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up that image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S85504.

In step S85504, drawing processing is executed. In drawing processing, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters required to draw each character, as determined by task processing (S85503), are sent to VDP 105. VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and sends the image data to pattern display device 41 along with a drive signal to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S85505, where other processing is executed, and V interrupt processing is terminated.

As explained above, whether a jackpot is won (Case 1) or a small jackpot is won (Case 2) in the winning lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the first symbol display unit 37a will display a symbol pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery, but no effect will be executed suggesting the result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio sound. Therefore, a player who is aware of the result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting an audio sound will not be able to recognize the result of that game round at the end of the game round. As a result, even if a player has won a small jackpot, this can give the player the feeling of anticipation that they may have won a jackpot.

Furthermore, after the game has finished, in both Case 1 and Case 2, the right-hit suggestion effect and the second chance suggestion effect are executed, so even during the period when these effects are being executed after the game has finished, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the player may have won a big jackpot rather than a small jackpot in the lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in a lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot is not determined at the time of the lottery, but is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode. Once the type of jackpot is determined, the round lamp on the round display unit 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of rounds played that correspond to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, if a small jackpot is won, the round lamp does not light up. In other words, whether a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the round lamp does not light up immediately after the end of a play round, so the player can avoid having to determine whether they won a jackpot or a small jackpot in that play round based on the round lamp after the play round has ended.

As a result, after a round of play ends, the player is not aware of the results of the winning lottery until they make a right hit and cause the game ball to enter the type determination gate 202, and this allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time that they may have won a big win rather than a small win. In other words, even after a round of play ends and the opening and closing execution mode based on a big win or small win begins, this allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, attracting their attention to the game. Furthermore, when the type of big win is determined, the player is required to make a right hit and cause the game ball to enter the type determination gate 202, which allows the player to be actively involved in determining the type of big win, and allows the player to further focus their attention on the game during the opening and closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is confirmed when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222, the pachinko machine 10 determines the type of jackpot triggered by the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222. This allows the player to feel a sense of speed in the progress of the game when a gaming ball enters the V winning port 222, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, the type of jackpot is determined by having the gaming ball enter the type determination gate 202, and the game progresses relatively slowly until the round of play begins. As a result, the game progresses at a different pace depending on whether a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 or a jackpot is confirmed when a gaming ball enters the V winning hole 222, adding variety to the player's expectations for the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a game ball enters the V winning slot 222 and a new jackpot is confirmed during a round of play that is being executed as a result of a winning lottery that is executed as a result of a game ball entering the first starting slot 33, the round of play that is being executed as a result of the winning lottery that is executed as a result of a game ball entering the first starting slot 33 will be stopped, but a new round of play will be started as a result of the jackpot that was won when the game ball entered the V winning slot 222, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation for the new round of play.

In this case, it is anticipated that players will be concerned that the type of jackpot allocated when a gaming ball lands in the V winning slot 222 and a new jackpot is confirmed may be less favorable than the type of jackpot allocated in the lottery held when a jackpot is won in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting slot 33.

However, as shown in Figure 365, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the allocation of jackpot types when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33 (Figure 365(a)) is compared with the allocation of jackpot types when a jackpot is confirmed by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222 triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33 (Figure 365:(b)), the probability of being allocated a 5R Type 1 jackpot, which is the allocation result that grants the most advantageous benefit to the player, is higher when a jackpot is confirmed by a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222 triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33. This can reduce the player's anxiety as described above and create an even greater sense of anticipation in the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the V winning opening 222 is located downstream of the type determination gate 202 in the direction in which the game balls flow on the game board 30. Furthermore, the V winning opening 222 is located downstream of the second jackpot winning opening 212. Therefore, in the above case 1, if a player fires a game ball toward the type determination gate 202, the jackpot type is determined upon the game ball entering the type determination gate 202, the opening/closing processing period begins, and the second opening/closing door 213 opens, the game ball fired toward the type determination gate 202 is more likely to enter the V winning opening 222. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting slot 33, a round of play begins, and then a game ball naturally enters the second large winning slot 212, followed by a game ball entering the V winning slot 222, and a transition to a round of play triggered by the game ball entering the V winning slot 222 is possible. This allows the game to proceed smoothly. As a result, the player is not left with any anxiety that the jackpot type assigned when a game ball enters the V winning slot 222 and a new jackpot is confirmed will be less favorable than the jackpot type assigned when a jackpot is won in the lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting slot 33, or such anxiety can be alleviated. This can create an even greater sense of anticipation in the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33, the specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute a specific process, and then determines the number of rounds to be played corresponding to the jackpot. In other words, whether or not to open and close the second opening and closing door 213 as part of a round of play and the number of rounds to be played are determined separately. Therefore, various operating modes of the first opening and closing door 36b and the second opening and closing door 213 during round play can be realized by combining whether or not the second opening and closing door 213 is opened and closed with the number of rounds to be played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

H8. Modification of the eighth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, including the following modifications: Note that in the modifications described below, descriptions of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

H8-1. Variation 1:
In the eighth embodiment, the same presentation pattern may be set for the presentation executed in a game run in case 1, i.e., the presentation executed in a game run when a big win is won in the winning lottery in a game run triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33 and when it is decided to execute a specific process in the specific process execution determination process, and the presentation executed in a game run in case 2, i.e., the presentation executed in a game run when a small win is won in the winning lottery in a game run triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33. By setting the same presentation pattern for case 1 and case 2, it becomes even more difficult for the player to determine whether the game run is case 1 or case 2, and the player can be made to feel even more hopeful that the game run in question may have won the winning lottery.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a presentation pattern table is provided in which multiple dedicated presentation patterns for Case 1 and Case 2 are set corresponding to the variable time of the play round, and a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time of the play round is selected from the presentation pattern table. By selecting a presentation pattern from the same presentation pattern table for Case 1 and Case 2, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether it is Case 1 or Case 2, and this gives the player a sense of anticipation that the play round in question may have been won in the lottery.

H8-2. Variation 2:
In the eighth embodiment described above, when a jackpot is confirmed as a result of a gaming ball entering the V winning port 222, a configuration is adopted in which the type of jackpot is determined as a result of the gaming ball entering the V winning port 222. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the type of jackpot is determined by having the gaming ball enter the type determination gate 202 after the gaming ball has entered the V winning port 222 and a jackpot is confirmed, just as in the case in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game session that is executed as a result of a gaming ball entering the first starting port 33. By doing this, the process for determining the type of jackpot can be unified and the process simplified in three cases: when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game session triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port 33; when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game session triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 34; and when a jackpot is confirmed when the game ball enters the V winning port 222.

A configuration may also be adopted in which a dedicated ball entry section (V entry jackpot type determination gate) is provided to determine the type of jackpot triggered by a gaming ball entering the V entry port 222. The V entry jackpot type determination gate may then be positioned downstream of the V entry port 222 in the direction of ball circulation. In this case, the jackpot type triggered by a gaming ball entering the V entry jackpot type determination gate can be determined using the same processing as the type determination processing in the eighth embodiment, thereby simplifying the processing.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the V-entry jackpot type determination gate is located in a position that is not downstream of the V-entry opening 222 in the direction of game ball circulation. For example, if a jackpot is confirmed when a game ball enters the V-entry opening 222, the V-entry jackpot type determination gate is located in a position where the game ball will not enter unless the mode of launching the game ball is changed. In this way, the player can play the game by changing the operating mode of the operating handle 25 in various ways, which can frequently change the flow of the game, encourage active player involvement in the game, and add variety to the player's anticipation.

H8-3. Variation 3:
In the eighth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game played when a gaming ball enters the first starting gate 33, the type determination process is executed to determine the type of jackpot when the gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the end of the game. However, other configurations may be employed. For example, a configuration may be employed in which the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired when the gaming ball enters the first starting gate 33, and the jackpot type is determined in the variable start process for the game. In other words, the jackpot type is determined before the end of the game. If the game is a jackpot, the round lamp is illuminated in a display mode corresponding to the determined jackpot type when the game is over. The illumination timing is set to the end of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (immediately before the start of the opening/closing process period), and the opening period is set to be longer than usual. By doing this, the result of the winning lottery is not recognized until the round lamp is lit, and the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation that he or she may have won a jackpot for a relatively long period of time. In other words, even after the game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or small jackpot begins, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, and can be made to pay attention to the game. In the above eighth embodiment, the timing for lighting the round lamp was the end of the opening period, but a configuration in which it is lit at the start of the opening period may also be adopted.

H8-4. Variation 4:
In the eighth embodiment, the opening and closing process executed in Case 1 and Case 2 is set to an opening and closing scenario in which the second opening and closing door 213 opens and closes only once, but it is also possible to adopt an opening and closing scenario in which the second opening and closing door 213 opens and closes multiple times. This increases the probability that the gaming ball will enter the V winning opening 222, and can increase the player's sense of anticipation.

H8-5. Variation 5:
In the eighth embodiment, the specific process execution determination process was executed at the start of the fluctuation of a game turn executed when a game ball entered the first starting port 33, more specifically, during the fluctuation start process ( FIG. 381 ). However, it may be executed at any other timing as long as it is before the game turn ends and the standby period begins. For example, it may be executed during the game state transition process. In this way, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24 during a game turn executed when a game ball entered the first starting port 33, and the specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute a specific process based on whether the player operated the effect operation button 24 in response to the execution of the effect. Also, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute a specific process based on whether a game ball entered a specific ball entry port during a game turn executed when a game ball entered the first starting port 33. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which, in the case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed as a result of a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, the mode of processing in the opening/closing execution mode executed after the end of the game round is determined according to the mode of game progress during the game round. By adopting such a configuration, in the case where a jackpot is won, the player can concentrate on playing the game even in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round.

H8-6. Variation 6:
In the eighth embodiment, the result of the winning lottery for the reserved game turn is determined by a prior determination process. If the result of the prior determination process indicates a jackpot in the winning lottery for the reserved game turn, a specific process execution determination process may be executed as a process in the prior determination process to determine whether or not to execute a specific process such as that shown in Case 1 before the reserved game turn is executed as a game turn. Then, in a game turn executed before the reserved game turn is executed as a game turn, an effect suggesting that a specific process will be executed later (specific process execution suggestion effect) may be executed. This can give the player a sense of anticipation for the reserved game turn to be executed later. Furthermore, the prior determination process may determine whether the reserved game turn corresponds to Case 2, and similarly, a specific process execution suggestion effect may be executed. This allows the player a wider range of speculation about the outcome when the reserved game turn is executed as a game turn, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

H8-7. Variation 7:
In the eighth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the right-hit suggestion effect executed during the waiting period (see FIG. 367 ), which is the period from the end of the game in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery to the start of the opening period, gradually changes over time as the waiting period progresses. The waiting period begins at the end of the game in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery and continues until a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202. In other words, the opening period does not begin unless a gaming ball enters the type determination gate 202. If a player does not realize that they should hit right and instead hits left, the game will not proceed as intended, lowering the player's expectations.

Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the suggestion to the player to hit the right becomes increasingly stronger as the waiting period from the end of the game in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery passes. For example, a right-hit suggestion effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed between 0 and 5 seconds may be more strongly urging the player to hit the right than a right-hit suggestion effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed between 5 and 10 seconds; and further, a configuration may be adopted in which a right-hit suggestion effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed between 10 and 15 seconds is more strongly urging the player to hit the right than a right-hit suggestion effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed between 5 and 10 seconds.

As a suggestion to hit the right during the waiting period, for example, the sound suggesting a right hit may be gradually increased (or decreased) as the waiting period progresses, thereby gradually encouraging the player to hit the right; the size of the image indicating a right hit (e.g., an image of an arrow pointing right) may be gradually increased as the waiting period progresses, thereby gradually encouraging the player to hit the right; the brightness, lightness, color, etc. of the image indicating a right hit may be gradually changed (e.g., increased or decreased) as the waiting period progresses, thereby gradually encouraging the player to hit the right; or the tone of the voice guidance instructing the player to hit the right may be gradually increased as the waiting period progresses, thereby gradually encouraging the player to hit the right.

By adopting this configuration, it becomes easier for players to recognize that they are hitting the right hand during the waiting period, which promotes smooth gameplay. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in players' expectations and increase their interest in the game.

H8-8. Variation 8:
In the eighth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to have one type determination gate, but a configuration with multiple type determination gates may also be adopted. For example, a type determination gate (hereinafter also referred to as the left type determination gate) may be provided in a position where the game ball is likely to enter when the player is playing from the left (e.g., the left side of the game board 30), and a type determination gate (hereinafter referred to as the right type determination gate) may be provided in a position where the game ball is likely to enter when the player is playing from the right (e.g., the right side of the game board 30). Then, for each value of the win random number counter C1 set to win a jackpot in the win/loss table for the first starting hole (see Figure 363), it is preset whether the type of jackpot will be determined by the game ball entering the type determination gate (the left type determination gate or the right type determination gate) after the jackpot is won. Then, after the end of the round of play in which the jackpot was won, a decision is made as to whether to execute an effect suggesting a left hit (left hit suggestion effect) or a right hit suggestion effect depending on the value of the hit random number counter C1 that resulted in the jackpot, and the suggestion effect is executed according to the result of the decision. By doing this, after the end of the round of play in which the jackpot was won, the player needs to decide how to operate the operating handle 25, which makes it possible to actively involve the player in the game and, as a result, to attract the player's attention to the game.

In addition, for each value of the winning random number counter C1 that is set to win a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the first starting gate (see Figure 363), a value that determines the type of jackpot when the gaming ball enters the left-side type determination gate, a value that determines the type of jackpot when the gaming ball enters the right-side type determination gate, or a value that determines the type of jackpot when the gaming ball enters either the left-side type determination gate or the right-side type determination gate may be set.

H8-9. Variation 9:
In the eighth embodiment, a configuration was used in which an effect (double chance effect) was executed to suggest that two opportunities (chances) for winning the jackpot were prepared during the waiting period in case 1 and the opening period in case 2, but a configuration may also be adopted in which an effect (single chance effect) is executed to suggest that one opportunity (chance) for winning the jackpot is prepared. In this case, the second chance effect can be omitted in each case, and therefore the processing required to execute the second chance effect can be omitted, thereby simplifying the processing.

Furthermore, in Case 1 and Case 2, a configuration may be adopted in which a double chance effect is executed and a single chance effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game even more in the period after the game round has ended.

H8-10. Variation 10:
In the eighth embodiment described above, if a game ball enters the V winning port 222 during a round of play that is being executed as a result of winning a jackpot in a lottery, the round of play is interrupted and a round of play is executed as a result of the game ball entering the V winning port 222, but other configurations may also be adopted.

For example, if a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during a round of play that is being executed as a result of winning a jackpot in a lottery, the game progress may not change as a result of the game ball entering the V winning opening 222, and the round of play that is being executed as a result of winning a jackpot in a lottery may be executed to the end. In this case, the round of play that is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening 222 is not executed. In other words, a ball entering the V winning opening 222 during the open/close execution mode that is being executed as a result of winning a jackpot in a lottery is effectively invalid, and only a ball entering the V winning opening 222 during the open/close execution mode that is being executed as a result of winning a small jackpot in a lottery is effectively valid.

By adopting this configuration, even if a game ball enters the V winning slot 222 during a round of play that is being executed as a result of winning a jackpot in a lottery, the game's progress can be maintained. This makes it possible to avoid the process of interrupting the open/close execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot, thereby simplifying the process.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which balls entering the V winning opening 222 during the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a winning jackpot in a lottery, are effectively invalid, and only balls entering the V winning opening 222 during the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a winning jackpot in a lottery, are effectively valid, a configuration may be adopted in which an operating mechanism (hereinafter also referred to as a V winning assist mechanism) is provided to assist game balls in entering the V winning opening 222 only during the opening and closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a winning jackpot in a lottery.

The V entry assist mechanism may, for example, be a mechanism (hereinafter also referred to as a non-V entry port closing mechanism) that temporarily closes only the non-V entry port 224 of the V entry port 222 and non-V entry port 224 provided on the crane 220. In this case, the non-V entry port closing mechanism assists the entry of game balls into the V entry port 222 only when entry into the V entry port 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed as a result of winning a jackpot in a lottery, is substantially invalid, and therefore the operation of the non-V entry port closing mechanism does not substantially affect the progress of the game.

However, by operating the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is assisted, and the player's sense of anticipation when they realize that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 can be increased. In other words, by operating the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation without substantially affecting the progress of the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation of the V winning assist mechanism is controlled by a control means other than the main control unit 60 (for example, the audio and light control device 90). For example, in Case 1, the audio and light control device 90 may receive a specific processing command to decide to operate the V winning assist mechanism, and may control the operation of the V winning assist mechanism when the opening/closing processing period begins, thereby closing the non-V winning opening 224. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which, when game balls are stored in the storage section 218, the non-V winning opening 224 is closed at the timing when the storage valve 216 is opened. By adopting such a configuration, the operation of the V winning assist mechanism is controlled by a control means other than the main control unit 60, thereby reducing the processing burden on the main control unit 60.

The V entry assist mechanism is not limited to the non-V entry port closing mechanism described above, and other mechanisms may be used as long as they assist the entry of game balls into the V entry port 222. For example, a mechanism may be used that moves the flow path 211 so that the outlet of the flow path 211 that discharges game balls into the crane 220 is positioned directly above the V entry port 222. A mechanism may also be used that temporarily places a magnet near the V entry port 222.

I. Application to other configurations:
The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple types of symbols circumferentially attached, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players with a bonus such as a medal payout if a specific symbol or combination of specific symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

Furthermore, some of the functions implemented by software in the above embodiments may be implemented by hardware, or some of the functions implemented by hardware may be implemented by software.

J. Regarding inventions extracted from the above embodiments:
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the following will appropriately indicate corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments in parentheses, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
The group of features A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
An information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) that is stored inside the housing of the gaming machine main body and stores detection information acquired based on the detection by the detection means in a non-volatile manner;
a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature A1, the processing execution means includes information storage means for non-volatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means. Because the detection information correlates with the behavior of the gaming ball during a game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to Feature A1, the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the information storage means of the processing execution means housed inside the housing of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to retain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature A1 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the information storage means of the processing execution means housed inside the cabinet of the gaming machine main body, so that detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, a gaming machine with Feature A1 can always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and detection information, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (whether installed in an amusement hall or in circulation), and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1,
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game is provided.
The gaming machine, wherein the processing execution means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to Feature A2, the processing execution means operates on the same power source as the control means. Therefore, for example, if the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall and a hall computer is acquiring information about the characteristics of the gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer or in the processing of the hall computer, detection information can be acquired as long as power is being supplied to the gaming machine. If the control means and processing execution means operate on different power sources and there is a malfunction in the power supply to the processing execution means, a malfunction will occur in which detection information cannot be acquired even though game play is being performed on the gaming machine. In contrast, according to Feature A2, because the control means and processing execution means operate on the same power source, detection information can always be acquired as long as game play is possible. This improves the reliability of the detection information.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each period until a specified number (500) of gaming balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h).

According to Feature A3, detection information is stored for each period until a specified number of game balls is detected by a specified detection means. Therefore, even if there is variation in the time it takes for each gaming machine to detect the specified number of game balls, it is possible to obtain detection information that is not affected by that variation. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which game balls are fired, it is possible to obtain highly accurate detection information that is less affected by this.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period (every hour).

According to feature A4, the information storage means stores detection information for each predetermined period, allowing statistical processing using the concept of time to be performed using the detection information.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine is started to when the power is cut off.

According to Feature A5, the information storage means stores detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine begins to be supplied to when power is interrupted. Therefore, for example, if the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, detection information can be obtained for each business day of the amusement hall.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A5,
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out from the payout means as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A calculation execution means (CPU 308) that executes a predetermined calculation based on the detection information and the prize ball number information;
Equipped with
The information storage means stores calculation result information, which is information relating to the calculation results (such as the ratio of bonus items) calculated by the calculation execution means.

According to feature A6, the processing execution means stores calculation result information. The calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and prize ball number information, and therefore reflects information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine. Therefore, according to feature A6, it is possible to obtain the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls paid out. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls paid out.

<Features Group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for executing calculation processing based on first information acquired based on the executed game and second information set in advance, and acquiring third information;
an information storage means (a memory 309 for storing calculation results) for storing the third information in a non-volatile manner;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the calculation execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to Feature B1, the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, and the third information is information acquired based on the first information. Therefore, the third information includes information about the executed game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including information about the executed game, it is possible to acquire information about games previously executed using the third information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, by using the third information, it is possible to manage the game characteristics of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the calculation execution means and the information storage means operate on the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired as long as power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the calculation execution means, the information storage means, and the control means were operated on different power sources, a malfunction in the power supply to the calculation execution means and the information storage means could result in the third information not being acquired even when a game is being executed by the gaming machine. In contrast, according to Feature B2, since the calculation execution means, the information storage means, and the control means operate on the same power source, the third information can always be acquired as long as a game is executable. This improves the reliability of the third information. As a result, the reliability of gaming machine inspections can be improved, and the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

Feature B2 includes a transmission means for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the gaming machine, making it possible to use the specified device to manage the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine using the third information.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
Equipped with
the first information is information acquired based on detection by the detection means,
The second information is information regarding the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the third information is information relating to the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

According to feature B3, the third information is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, the third information stored in the information storage means can be used to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls actually paid out.

<Feature Group C>
The group of features C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game;
information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) for non-volatilely storing first information acquired based on the executed game;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside a cabinet that leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the information storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is altered through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to determine this alteration from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the first information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated and therefore come into contact with various external elements during distribution. However, since the information storage means is stored inside a cabinet that leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the first information by someone can be prevented, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated frequently. Furthermore, because the first information is information obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the first information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature C1 prevents unauthorized alteration of the first information, which reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature C2, the information storage means operates on the same power source as the control means, and therefore the first information can be acquired as long as power is being supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means were operated on different power sources, a malfunction in the power supply to the information storage means could result in the first information not being acquired even though game play is being performed by the gaming machine. In contrast, according to feature C2, the information storage means and the control means operate on the same power source, and therefore the first information can be acquired as long as game play is possible. This improves the reliability of the first information. As a result, the reliability of gaming machine inspections can be improved, and the soundness of game play can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A gaming machine comprising a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

Feature C3 includes a transmission means for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the gaming machine, making it possible to use the specified device to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine using the first information.

<Feature Group D>
The group of features D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A first prize ball number information storage means (main ROM 63) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
a prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means;
A second prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a combination ratio) that is information relating to the history of a game by performing calculations based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The prize ball count information set for gaming machines generally has different values set for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature D1, the processing execution means acquires prize ball count information stored in the first prize ball count storage means. Therefore, even if different prize ball count information is set for each type (model) of gaming machine, the processing execution means can calculate correct gaming history information using the prize ball count information set for each type of gaming machine.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the calculated gaming history information may be an unnatural value that differs from the expected value. Therefore, by checking the gaming history information, gaming machine inspectors can properly determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine according to feature D1,
a prize ball number information transmitting means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means to the processing execution means;
The acquisition means acquires the prize ball number information by receiving the signal transmitted from the prize ball number information transmission means.

According to feature D2, a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means is sent to the processing execution means. Therefore, even if the processing execution means is configured so that it cannot access the first prize ball number storage means or so that it cannot grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the processing execution means can obtain the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature D3, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. The gaming machine inspector can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature D4, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the launching means is configured so that it cannot launch game balls until the processing execution means has completed storing the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage means.

According to feature D5, game balls are not launched until the storage of prize ball count information in the second prize ball count information storage means is complete, thereby preventing game balls from being omitted from the calculation of game history information by the calculation execution means.

<Feature Group E>
The group of features E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as the ratio of prize balls) that is information about the history of games by performing calculations based on information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage _means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means each time the number of game balls (the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N OUT ) detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means reaches a specified value (500 balls);
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, gaming history information is calculated each time the number of gaming balls detected by a specified detection means reaches a specified value. Therefore, even if there is variation in the time it takes for the number of gaming balls detected by each gaming machine to reach the specified value, gaming history information can be calculated that is not affected by that variation in time. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency with which gaming balls are detected, highly accurate gaming history information that is less affected by this can be calculated. As a result, gaming machine inspectors can confirm highly accurate gaming history information and appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. This can improve the soundness of gaming.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
a first calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63) for storing information about the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) and the specified value (500) as a calculation execution condition for executing the calculation;
The processing execution means
a calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means;
a second calculation execution condition storage means (a calculation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the obtained calculation execution conditions;
Equipped with
The operation execution means executes the operation when the operation execution condition stored in the second operation execution condition storage means is established.

Different types (models) of gaming machines have different gameplay characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing calculations to calculate gaming history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature E2, the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, and is therefore able to execute a calculation when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of gaming machine are met.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The processing execution means
a deletion means for deleting information relating to the number of gaming balls stored in the number information storage means after the calculation execution means executes the calculation.

According to feature E3, after the calculation execution means executes a calculation, the information regarding the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means is erased, making it possible to store information regarding the number of game balls in the number information storage means again. This reduces the storage capacity required for the number information storage means.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature E4, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. An inspector of the gaming machine can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature E5, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature Group F>
The group of features F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a combination ratio) that is information about the history of a game by performing calculations based on information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number information storage means every time a predetermined time (one hour) has elapsed;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature F1 calculates gaming history information every time a predetermined time period has elapsed. This allows gaming machine inspectors to check the gaming history information calculated through statistical processing that uses the concept of time, enabling them to properly determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. This improves the integrity of gaming.

[Feature F2]
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
a first calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63) for storing information on a time interval for executing the calculation as a calculation execution condition that is a condition for executing the calculation;
The processing execution means
a calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage means;
a second calculation execution condition storage means (a calculation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the obtained calculation execution conditions;
Equipped with
The operation execution means executes the operation when the operation execution condition stored in the second operation execution condition storage means is established.

Different types (models) of gaming machines have different gameplay characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing calculations to calculate gaming history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature F2, the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, and is therefore able to execute a calculation when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of gaming machine are met.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since the calculation was executed;
a determination means for determining whether a game is being played by a player;
Equipped with
The measuring means suspends measurement of the elapsed time during a period in which the determining means determines that no game is being played.

Feature F3 suspends measurement of the elapsed time since the calculation was performed during periods when it is determined that no play is being performed, allowing game history information to be calculated based only on periods when play is actually being performed.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature F4, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. An inspector of the gaming machine can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature F5, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature Group G>
The group of features G is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A monitoring means (power outage monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a ratio of game devices) that is information relating to the history of games by performing calculations based on the information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the information relating to the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number information storage means when the monitoring means detects a power outage;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, gaming history information is calculated when a power interruption is detected, so that the gaming history information can be calculated based on the number of gaming balls detected during the period from when power is supplied to the gaming machine to when the power interruption occurs. In other words, gaming history information is calculated for each period from when the amusement hall opens to when it closes, so gaming history information is calculated for each business day of the amusement hall. Therefore, gaming machine inspectors can easily determine whether there have been any changes in the characteristics of the gaming history information across business days of the amusement hall, making it possible to appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
A gaming machine comprising a supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after a power interruption occurs.

Feature G2 includes a supply means for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after a power outage occurs, thereby ensuring that the calculation execution means can complete the calculation of the game history information and the storage of the game history information in the game history information storage means.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature G3, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. The gaming machine inspector can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature G4, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature H group>
The group of features H is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
a notification means for issuing a notification in a predetermined case;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a ratio of prize balls) that is information relating to a game history based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means;
a game history information storage means (a memory 309 for storing calculation results) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
Equipped with
The notification means issues a notification when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature H1 provides an alert when the gaming history information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose gaming history information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature H2 provides an alert when a specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature H3 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily grasp the degree to which a specific value included in the gaming history information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature H4 includes a display means that displays a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's play history information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature H5, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. An inspector of the gaming machine can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature H6, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature Group I>
The group I of features is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a ball-entry information storage means (a memory 309b for storing ball-entry information) for sequentially storing ball-entry information indicating that a game ball has been detected by the detection means each time the detection means detects a game ball;
a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the winning ball information stored in the winning ball information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize balls information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature I1, ball entry information and prize ball count information are sent to a specified device, which can then calculate gaming history information, which is information about gaming history, within any range based on the ball entry information and prize ball count information. Therefore, a gaming machine inspector can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated within any range by the specified device, and can properly determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
A time and date information acquisition unit (RTC 96) is provided for acquiring time and date information, which is information relating to time and date;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when storing the ball entry information, the ball entry information storage means stores the ball entry information by adding the date and time information corresponding to the date and time when the gaming ball was detected by the detection means.

According to Feature I2, a specified device that receives ball entry information with added date and time information can specify a date and time range and calculate gaming history information. Therefore, gaming machine inspectors can perform detailed inspections based on gaming history information with a specified date and time range. Furthermore, if the specified device is configured to display ball entry information with added date and time information, gaming machine inspectors can also ascertain the date and time when gaming balls were detected by each detection means.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (pattern display device 41) for displaying the winning information stored in the winning information storage means.

According to Feature I3, the ball-entry information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the ball-entry information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the ball-entry information.

<Feature J group>
The group of features J is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A prize ball number information storage means (main ROM 63) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (jackpot lottery processing, electric role release lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, variable pattern display processing on the main display unit 45, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) which is processing for progressing the game based on the detection of game balls by the detection means, and also executes processing to calculate game history information (role ratio, etc.) which is information about the history of the game by performing calculations based on the detection information of the game balls detected by the detection means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means;
a game history information storage means (main RAM 64, flash memory 64x) that is stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine main body and stores the game history information calculated by the processing execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature J1, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming history information storage means for storing gaming history information. Because gaming history information is information correlated with the behavior of gaming balls during play, the gaming history information differs for each gaming machine and is information specific to each gaming machine. In other words, the gaming history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to Feature J1, the gaming history information, which is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in a gaming history information storage means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the gaming history information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature J1 stores game history information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a game history information storage means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. This means that game history information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature J1 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and game history information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature J1, a single processing execution means executes the game progress processing and the processing for calculating game history information, eliminating the need to provide a separate calculation chip or the like for executing the calculation processing, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
The processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
In the second mode, the gaming machine is configured not to execute the game progress processing even if the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area.

Feature J2 makes it possible to execute a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, making it possible to execute in the second mode processes that are undesirable to execute in parallel with game progress processing or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. Furthermore, because feature J2 does not execute game progress processing in the second mode, when developing a program for processing to be executed in the second mode, there is no need to consider countermeasures for when game progress processing is executed in parallel, which significantly improves the efficiency of developing programs for processing to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to Feature J2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the gaming history information is output.

The game history information is information whose content changes when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration were adopted in which processing to output game history information was executed in parallel with game progress processing, the game progress processing would be executed while a gaming machine inspector was inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine using the game history information, causing the content of the game history information to change from time to time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, feature J3 outputs game history information in a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even if a game ball has passed through a specified area, thereby preventing the content of the game history information from changing while it is being output. As a result, the gaming machine inspector can carry out the inspection smoothly.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
The processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first condition is met during execution of the game progress processing in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switch button is performed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button is performed, when an inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, or when a predetermined time has come), the machine is configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when a second condition is met (when the game progress processing has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as when the processing of displaying changing patterns has ended, or when all processing of each game progress processing being executed has been completed).

According to feature J4, if the first condition is met in the first mode, the system is configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is met. This reduces the occurrence of processing problems when transitioning to the second mode, compared to a configuration in which the system transitions from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the second condition is met.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first mode transitions to the second mode immediately after the first condition is met, regardless of whether the second condition is met, and the first condition is met, that is, a predetermined operation is performed while the variable symbol display process is being executed as part of the game progression process in the first mode, the transition to the second mode will occur in the middle of the variable symbol display, making it difficult to control the timing of the symbol stopping and the symbol change time. In contrast, according to feature J4, for example, if the first condition is met, that is, a predetermined operation is performed while the variable symbol display process is being executed as part of the game progression process in the first mode, the transition to the second mode will occur when the second condition is met, that is, when the variable symbol display process is not being executed, i.e., after the variable symbol has stopped. This prevents processing malfunctions such as difficulty in controlling the timing of the symbol stopping and the symbol change time.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a third condition is met during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode), the gaming machine is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if a transition operation (an operation of pressing a mode switching button, an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a mode switching button) that is an operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed.

According to feature J5, if the third condition is met during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed. This prevents a situation in which the transition operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, this prevents a situation in which an administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform the transition operation after transitioning to the second mode, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
A gaming machine according to Feature J5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the third condition is that a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time (10 minutes have passed from the point in time when the mode was changed to the inspection mode).

According to feature J6, if a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if the transition operation to transition from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed. This reliably prevents a situation in which the transition operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, even if the gaming machine administrator or inspector forgets to perform the transition operation after transitioning to the second mode, the system will return to the first mode once a predetermined time has passed from the predetermined point in time. This prevents a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6,
A game progress processing information storage means (main RAM 64) that is stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and stores information related to the game progress processing;
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means based on the execution of an erasing operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button) for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
The erasing means is configured not to erase the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means even if the erasing operation is executed in a state after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode (a state during the inspection mode, or a state in which the power is turned off after transition to the inspection mode).

According to feature J7, even if an erase operation is performed to erase information stored in the game progress processing information storage means after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased. Therefore, even if an erase operation is accidentally performed in an attempt to transition to the first mode after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information can be prevented from being accidentally erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the erase operation for erasing information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erase button, and the operation for transitioning between the first mode and the second mode is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, there is a risk that when attempting to transition from the second mode to the first mode by pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the player may accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature J7, even if the operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button is performed after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally erased.

More specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which, when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress processing being executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to the second mode is stored in the game progress processing information storage means, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the transition button to return from the second mode to the first mode, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for resuming the game progress processing will be erased, making it impossible to resume the game progress processing after returning to the second mode, which could be detrimental to the player. In contrast, feature J7 prevents the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means from being accidentally erased, even if, after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, the power button is accidentally pressed while pressing the erase button in an attempt to transition to the first mode. This prevents detrimental effects on the player.

[Feature J8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information.

According to feature J8, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

[Feature J9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming history information storage means is composed of a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) that can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature J9, gaming history information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and the gaming history information, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature J10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game history information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that retains traces of opening and closing.

According to feature J10, the gaming history information storage means is stored inside a cabinet that leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the gaming history information storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means is altered through physical contact with the gaming history information storage means, it is possible to determine the alteration from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and therefore come into various external contact during distribution. However, since the gaming history information storage means is stored inside a cabinet that leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information by someone can be prevented, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated frequently. Furthermore, because the gaming history information is information acquired based on games played, it is possible to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine using the gaming history information. Therefore, feature J10 prevents unauthorized alteration of gaming history information that reflects the characteristics of gaming on a gaming machine, allowing for proper management and inspection of gaming machines. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature J11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for notifying when the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature J11 provides an alert when the gaming history information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose gaming history information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature J12]
A gaming machine according to Feature J11,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature J12 provides an alert when a specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature J13]
A gaming machine according to Feature J12,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature J13 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily understand how much a specific value included in the gaming history information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature J14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J11 to J13,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature J14 provides a display means for displaying a predetermined notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's play history information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

<Feature K group>
The group of features K is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a pattern change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) that is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a predetermined condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
In the second mode, the gaming machine is configured not to execute the game progress processing even if the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area.

Feature K1 makes it possible to execute a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through a specified area, making it possible to execute in the second mode processes that are undesirable to execute in parallel with game progress processing or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. Feature K1 also makes it possible to execute no game progress processing in the second mode, so when developing a program for processing to be executed in the second mode, there is no need to consider countermeasures for when game progress processing is executed in parallel, which significantly improves the efficiency of developing programs for processing to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to feature K1,
The gaming machine is provided with storage means (a memory for storing calculation results 309, a memory for storing the number of balls 309a, a memory for storing ball information 309b, a main RAM 64, a flash memory 64x) that are stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine body and store detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

Feature K2 allows the detection information to be stored and output in the second mode. Because the detection information is information correlated with the behavior of the gaming ball during play, it differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. Feature K2 stores the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a memory device housed in the gaming machine's housing. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature K2 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a memory device housed in the housing of the gaming machine itself, so that the detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine itself even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature K2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

Furthermore, the detection information is information whose content changes when a gaming ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration were adopted in which processing to output detection information was executed in parallel with game progress processing, the game progress processing would be executed while a gaming machine inspector was inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information, causing the content of the detection information to change from time to time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, feature K2 outputs detection information in a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even when a gaming ball has passed through a specified area, thereby preventing the content of the detection information from changing while it is being output. As a result, gaming machine inspectors can carry out their inspections smoothly.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K2,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature K3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of balls scored, memory 309b for storing ball scoring information, flash memory 64x) that can retain data even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature K4, the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and the detection information, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature K5, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to determine this from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and as they are subject to various external contacts during distribution, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be prevented. Furthermore, because the detection information is obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the detection information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature K5 prevents unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K5,
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for issuing a notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature K6 provides an alert when the detection information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose detection information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature K7]
A gaming machine according to feature K6,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature K7 provides an alert when a specific value included in the detection information falls outside a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the detection information falls outside the predetermined range. By checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with in any way. This results in improved game integrity.

[Feature K8]
A gaming machine according to feature K7,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature K8 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily understand how much a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature K9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K6 to K8,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature K9 provides a display means for displaying a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's detection information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

<Feature L group>
The group of features L is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a pattern change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) that is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first condition is met during execution of the game progress processing in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switch button is performed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button is performed, when an inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, or when a predetermined time has come), the machine is configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when a second condition is met (when the game progress processing has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as when the processing of displaying changing patterns has ended, or when all processing of each game progress processing being executed has been completed).

According to feature L1, if the first condition is met in the first mode, the system is configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is met. This reduces the occurrence of processing problems when transitioning to the second mode, compared to a configuration in which the system transitions from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the second condition is met.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first mode transitions to the second mode immediately after the first condition is met, regardless of whether the second condition is met, and the first condition is met, that is, a predetermined operation is performed while the variable symbol display process is being executed as part of the game progression process in the first mode, the transition to the second mode will occur in the middle of the variable symbol display, making it difficult to control the timing of the symbol stopping and the symbol change time. In contrast, according to feature L1, for example, if the first condition is met, that is, a predetermined operation is performed while the variable symbol display process is being executed as part of the game progression process in the first mode, the transition to the second mode will occur when the second condition is met, that is, when the variable symbol display process is not being executed, i.e., after the variable symbol has stopped. This prevents processing malfunctions such as difficulty in controlling the timing of the symbol stopping and the symbol change time.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
The gaming machine is provided with storage means (a memory for storing calculation results 309, a memory for storing the number of balls 309a, a memory for storing ball information 309b, a main RAM 64, a flash memory 64x) that are stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine body and store detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

According to feature L2, detection information can be stored and output in the second mode. Because the detection information is information correlated with the behavior of the gaming ball during play, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature L2, the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in a memory means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature L2 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a memory device housed in the housing of the gaming machine itself, so that detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine itself even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature L2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and detection information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L2,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature L3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of balls scored, memory 309b for storing ball scoring information, flash memory 64x) that can retain data even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature L4, the detection information is retained even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and the detection information, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature L5, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to determine this from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and as they are subject to various external contacts during distribution, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be prevented. Furthermore, because the detection information is obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the detection information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature L5 prevents unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5,
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for issuing a notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature L6 provides an alert when the detection information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose detection information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L7]
A gaming machine according to feature L6,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature L7 provides an alert when a specific value included in the detection information falls outside a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the detection information falls outside the predetermined range. By checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L8]
A gaming machine according to feature L7,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature L8 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily understand how much a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature L9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L8,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature L9 includes a display means that displays a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's detection information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

<Feature M group>
The group of features M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a pattern change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) that is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a second condition is met during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode), the gaming machine is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if a predetermined operation (such as pressing a mode switching button or pressing a power button while pressing a mode switching button) for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed.

According to feature M1, if the second condition is met during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if the specified operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode is not performed. This prevents a situation in which the specified operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, it prevents a situation in which an administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform the specified operation after transitioning to the second mode, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to feature M1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second condition is that a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time (10 minutes have passed from the point in time when the mode was changed to the inspection mode).

According to feature M2, if a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if the predetermined operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed. This reliably prevents a situation in which the predetermined operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, even if the gaming machine administrator, inspector, etc. forgets to perform the predetermined operation after transitioning to the second mode, the system will return to the first mode once a predetermined time has passed from the predetermined point in time. This prevents a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be executed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
The gaming machine is provided with storage means (a memory for storing calculation results 309, a memory for storing the number of balls 309a, a memory for storing ball information 309b, a main RAM 64, a flash memory 64x) that are stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine body and store detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

Feature M3 allows the detection information to be stored and output in the second mode. Because the detection information is information correlated with the behavior of the gaming ball during play, it differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. Feature M3 allows the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, to be stored in a memory device housed in the gaming machine's housing. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature M3 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a memory device housed in the housing of the gaming machine itself, so that detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine itself even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature M3 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and detection information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

Furthermore, feature M3 can prevent situations in which an inspector of a gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information output in the second mode, then forgets to perform a specified operation, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be executed, and preventing the player from playing the gaming machine.

[Feature M4]
A gaming machine according to feature M3,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature M4, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to feature M3 or feature M4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of balls scored, memory 309b for storing ball scoring information, flash memory 64x) that can retain data even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature M5 allows detection information to be maintained even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, regardless of the state the gaming machine is in (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and the detection information, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature M6, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to determine this from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and as they are subject to various external contacts during distribution, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be prevented. Furthermore, because the detection information is obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the detection information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature M6 prevents unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M6,
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for issuing a notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature M7 provides an alert when the detection information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose detection information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature M8]
A gaming machine according to feature M7,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature M8 provides an alert when a specific value included in the detection information falls outside a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the detection information falls outside the predetermined range. By checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature M9]
A gaming machine according to feature M8,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature M9 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily understand how much a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature M10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M9,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature M10 includes a display means that displays a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's detection information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

<Feature N group>
The group of N features is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a pattern change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) that is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
A storage means (main RAM 64) that is stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and stores information related to the game progress processing;
an erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means when a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button) is performed;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a predetermined condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
The erasing means is configured not to erase the information stored in the memory means even if the specified operation is performed in a state after transition to the second mode and before transition to the first mode (a state during the inspection mode, or a state in which the power is turned off after transition to the inspection mode).

According to feature N1, even if a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is performed after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information stored in the storage means is not erased. Therefore, even if a predetermined operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to transition to the first mode after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information can be prevented from being accidentally erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is to press the power button while pressing the erase button, and the operation for transitioning between the first mode and the second mode is to press the power button while pressing the transition button, there is a risk that when attempting to transition from the second mode to the first mode by pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the user may accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature N1, even if the operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button is performed after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally erased.

More specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which, when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress processing being executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to the second mode is stored in the storage means, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the transition button to return from the second mode to the first mode, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for resuming the game progress processing will be erased, making it impossible to resume the game progress processing after returning to the second mode, which could be detrimental to the player. In contrast, feature N1 prevents the information stored in the storage means from being accidentally erased, even if, after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, the power button is accidentally pressed while pressing the erase button in an attempt to transition to the first mode. This prevents detrimental effects on the player.

[Feature N2]
A gaming machine according to feature N1,
The gaming machine is provided with a detection information storage means that is stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine body and stores detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and bonus item ratios) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball count information, and bonus item ratios).

According to Feature N2, detection information can be stored and output in the second mode. Because the detection information is information correlated with the behavior of the gaming ball during play, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to Feature N2, the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in a detection information storage means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature N2 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a detection information storage means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. This means that detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature N2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and detection information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to feature N2,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature N3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that leaves traces of opening and closing.

According to feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the detection information storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is altered through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to determine this alteration from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and as they are subject to various external contacts during distribution, the detection information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be prevented. Furthermore, because the detection information is obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the detection information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature N4 prevents unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N4,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for issuing a notification when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature N5 provides an alert when the detection information does not meet the specified conditions, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose detection information does not meet the specified conditions. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N6]
A gaming machine according to feature N5,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature N6 provides an alert when a specific value included in the detection information falls outside a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the detection information falls outside the predetermined range. By checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N7]
A gaming machine according to feature N6,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature N7 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily grasp the degree to which a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature N8 includes a display means that displays a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's detection information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

The inventions of Feature Group A to Feature Group N above solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made in various aspects, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the entertainment value of the game.

In addition to increasing the enjoyment of gaming, various technological improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

For example, if a player engages in fraudulent behavior (so-called cheating), or if the nails on the game board of a pachinko machine are bent or modified in an unauthorized manner, the rate at which game balls enter each entry port, such as the general entry port or the starting port, may differ from what was originally expected, thereby compromising the expected performance and playability of the pachinko machine. However, detecting such fraud has been extremely difficult.

This type of fraud may be committed by a player during the amusement hall's business hours. It may also be committed by someone who tampered with the machine after the amusement hall's business hours. It may also be committed when a gaming machine is being transported before it is installed in the amusement hall. It may also be committed when a gaming machine is being shipped to the amusement hall. It is also possible that tampering may occur even earlier than that.

In light of this situation, the aim is to detect fraudulent activities and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines and improve the integrity of gaming.

<Feature O group>
The group of features O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A gaming machine equipped with a process execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts the execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
the process execution means is capable of executing a specific process (a calculation process that calculates gaming history information) as one process included in the predetermined process;
The specific process is composed of multiple process steps (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29 ),
The processing execution means
In one execution of the predetermined process, one processing step among the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific process can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that all of the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing are executed by executing the predetermined processing a plurality of times.

According to Feature O1, one of the multiple processing steps that make up a specific process can be executed in a single execution of the specified process, and by executing the specified process multiple times, all of the multiple processing steps that make up the specific process are executed. This reduces the time required for a single execution of the specified process compared to a configuration in which all of the multiple processing steps that make up the specific process are executed in a single execution of the specified process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for a single execution of the specified process from becoming longer than the specified interval for starting execution of the specified process, making it impossible to execute the specified process at the specified interval.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine according to feature O1,
the specific process is composed of a series of processes whose execution order is determined,
the plurality of processing steps are obtained by dividing the series of processing steps that constitute the specific processing;
The processing execution means executes one of the plurality of processing steps (task 1 in FIG. 29), and then specifies the processing step (task 2 in FIG. 29) to be executed next to the one processing step.

Feature O2 divides a series of processes with a set execution order, and in one execution of the specified process, one of the multiple processing steps is executed, and then the processing step to be executed after that is specified. Therefore, even if a series of processes would take longer to execute than the specified interval if incorporated into the specified process, they can be incorporated into the specified process and executed at the specified interval.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O2,
The processing execution means is capable of executing a game progress processing, which is a processing related to the progress of a game, as a processing included in the predetermined processing,
The specific processing is a processing (arithmetic processing) different from the game progress processing.

According to Feature O3, even in gaming machines configured such that when a process other than game progress processing is incorporated into a predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval, the process other than the game progress processing can be incorporated into the predetermined process executed at predetermined intervals and executed. Furthermore, since the process other than game progress processing does not affect game progress even if not all processing steps are executed in one execution of the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress processing included in the predetermined process, thereby improving the flexibility of gaming machine design. Note that the process other than game progress processing can be any of a variety of arbitrary processes, such as a process for calculating game history information, which is information related to the history of games, or a transmission process for transmitting information about the status of games at predetermined times to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine according to feature O3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific processing is a calculation processing (arithmetic processing) that calculates gaming history information, which is information related to gaming history.

According to Feature O4, even in gaming machines configured such that when a calculation process for calculating game history information is incorporated into a predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process would be longer than the predetermined interval, the calculation process can be incorporated into the predetermined process that is executed at predetermined intervals. Furthermore, since the calculation process for calculating game history information does not affect the progress of play even if not all processing steps are executed in one execution of the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, thereby improving the flexibility of gaming machine design.

<Feature P group>
The group of features P is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A gaming machine equipped with a process execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts the execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The processing execution means
As one of the processes included in the predetermined process, a specific process (a prize ball counting process) can be executed,
In one execution of the predetermined process, some of the processing target candidates (two bits) from among a plurality of processing target candidates (eight bits in the buffer area) are set as processing targets for the specific process (prize ball counting process), and the specific process can be executed on the set processing targets,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific process is executed for all of the plurality of process target candidates by executing the predetermined process multiple times.

According to feature P1, in a single execution of a predetermined process, some of the multiple processing target candidates can be set as processing targets for a specific process, and the specific process can be executed on the set processing targets. By executing the predetermined process multiple times, the specific process is executed on all of the multiple processing target candidates. Therefore, the time required for a single execution of the predetermined process can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the specific process is executed on all of the multiple processing target candidates in a single execution of the predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for a single execution of the predetermined process from becoming longer than the specified interval for starting execution of the predetermined process, which would make it impossible to execute the predetermined process at the specified interval.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine according to feature P1,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the plurality of processing target candidates are fixed in advance.

According to feature P2, since the multiple processing target candidates are fixed in advance, there is no need to execute a process to select multiple processing target candidates, which simplifies the process and, as a result, improves processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to select multiple processing target candidates.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The processing target setting means, when setting the part of the processing target candidates from the plurality of processing target candidates as the processing target for the specific processing, sets them in a predetermined order.

According to feature P3, when some of the processing target candidates from multiple processing target candidates are set as the processing target for a specific process, they are set in a predetermined order. This eliminates the need to perform a determination process to determine which processing target candidate to set as the processing target for the specific process, simplifying the process and thereby improving processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to perform the determination process.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
It has multiple ball entry areas where game balls can enter,
each of the plurality of processing target candidates corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry portions;
Each of the processing target candidates is information (ball entry detection information stored in each bit of the buffer area) that is updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each of the ball entry sections,
The processing execution means is capable of executing the specified processing for all of the processing target candidates by executing the specified processing multiple times (four times) in a time shorter than the shortest interval (approximately 18 msec) between two game balls successively entering one of the ball entry sections and being detected.

According to feature P4, the time required for specific processing to be performed on all candidate processing targets can be made shorter than the shortest interval between the detection of two consecutive game balls entering one ball entry point. Therefore, information updated based on the detection of game balls entering each ball entry point can be stored as information updated based on the detection of a single game ball entering. Specifically, if two game balls enter a ball entry point in succession, the information updated based on the detection of the first game ball entering the ball entry point is set as the processing target and specific processing is performed. Even if the remaining candidate processing targets are then set as processing targets and specific processing is performed, all of these specific processing can be completed before the next game ball is detected at the ball entry point. In other words, by the time the information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entering the ball entry section is set as the processing target and specific processing is executed, the specific processing for the information updated based on the detection of the first game ball entering the ball entry section has already been completed, and the information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entering the ball entry section can be treated as information updated based on the detection of the new first game ball entering the ball entry section. Therefore, information updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each ball entry section can be stored as information updated based on the detection of a single game ball entering the ball entry section. As a result, for example, information updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each ball entry section can be stored as binary information indicating whether or not a ball has entered the ball. In this case, the memory capacity required to store information updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each ball entry section can be reduced, and the processing speed of the specific processing can be improved.

<Feature Q group>
The group of features Q is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
A process execution means (main CPU 62x) capable of executing a specific process (a process for a game history) and other processes (a process related to the progress of a game) other than the specific process;
A storage area (main RAM 64) into which information can be written;
A gaming machine comprising:
the process execution means includes a storage means (register) for storing information (register information) for executing the process;
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for executing the other process into the storage area;
a second process (recovery process) for causing the storage unit to store the information written in the storage area in the first process;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to Feature Q1, the specific process includes a first process that writes information stored in the storage means for the execution of another process to a memory area. Therefore, if the storage means is storing information for the execution of another process that was being executed immediately before the specific process began when the process execution means begins the specific process, the information for the execution of the other process stored in the storage means can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to a memory area. Therefore, the information for the execution of the other process stored in the storage means can be erased, and when the process execution means executes the specific process, the information for the execution of the specific process can be stored in the storage means. Furthermore, the specific process includes a second process that causes the storage means to store the information written in the memory area during the first process. Therefore, when the specific process is terminated, the information for the execution of the other process can be stored again in the storage means, and the other process that was being executed before the specific process began can be executed again from the state it was in immediately before the specific process began. Furthermore, because the first and second processes are included in the specific process, a gaming machine can be provided in which processes other than the specific process can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program that executes a specific process without modifying the programs that execute other processes. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute a specific process.

[Feature Q2]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The processing execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first process included in the specific process, information for executing the other process is written to a predetermined specific area (second area) of the memory area, and the writing of information in the specific process is executed only to the specific area (second area) of the memory area.

According to feature Q2, in a first process included in a specific process, the process execution means writes information for executing other processes to a predetermined specific area in the storage area, and writes information for the specific process only to the specific area in the storage area. This prevents information written in areas other than the specific area in the storage area from being overwritten by the execution of the specific process. Therefore, when a process using the other area is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting the process.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2,
The processing execution means
The gaming machine is characterized in that the writing of information in the other process is executed only to an area (first area) other than the specific area of the memory area.

According to feature Q3, writing of information in other processes is performed only in areas other than the specific area of the storage area, thereby preventing information written in the specific area of the storage area from being overwritten by the execution of other processes. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process execution means using the specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3,
The specific processing is a processing different from a game progress processing, which is a processing related to the progress of a game,
The gaming machine, wherein the other processing is the game progress processing.

Feature Q4 makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which game progress processing can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing processing other than the game progress processing is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing processing other than the game progress processing. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute processing other than the game progress processing, or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute processing other than the game progress processing. Note that various arbitrary processes can be used as processing other than the game progress processing, such as a process for calculating and displaying game history information, which is information related to the history of games, or a transmission process for transmitting information about the status of games at a predetermined timing to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to Feature Q4,
The specific processing is a gaming history information related processing (processing for gaming history) that calculates and displays gaming history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio), which is information related to gaming history.

Feature Q5 makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows game progress processing to be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing game history information-related processing is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing game history information-related processing. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute game history information-related processing, or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute game history information-related processing.

<Feature R group>
The group of features R is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
A process execution means (main CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of processes including a specific process (a game history process);
A storage area (main RAM 64) into which information can be written;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
The gaming machine is characterized in that the writing of information in the specific process is executed only to a predetermined specific area (second area) of the memory area.

According to feature R1, the process execution means writes information for a specific process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, thereby preventing information written in areas other than the specific area of the storage area from being overwritten by the execution of the specific process. Therefore, when the process execution means executes a process that uses an area other than the specific area of the storage area, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting that process.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
The processing execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that writing of information for processes other than the specific process (processes related to the progress of the game) is performed only to an area (first area) other than the specific area of the memory area.

According to feature R2, the process execution means writes information for processes other than the specific process only to areas other than the specific area of the storage area, thereby preventing information written in the specific area of the storage area from being overwritten by the execution of the other process. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process execution means using the specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The processing execution means
a storage means (register) for storing information (register information) for executing a process, and the specific process and the other process are executed exclusively;
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for executing the other process into the specific area;
a second process (recovery process) for causing the storage unit to store the information written in the specific area in the first process;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to Feature R3, the specific process includes the first process. Therefore, if the storage means holds information for the execution of another process that was being executed immediately before the specific process began when the process execution means begins the specific process, the information for the execution of the other process held in the storage means can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to a specific area. Therefore, the information for the execution of the other process held in the storage means can be erased, and when the process execution means executes the specific process, the information for the execution of the specific process can be stored in the storage means. Furthermore, since the specific process includes the second process, when the specific process ends, the information for the execution of the other process can be stored again in the storage means, and the other process that was being executed before the specific process began can be executed again from the state it was in immediately before the specific process began. Furthermore, because the first and second processes are included in the specific process, a gaming machine can be provided in which processes other than the specific process can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without modifying the programs for executing processes other than the specific process. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving a gaming machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute a specific process.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3,
The specific processing is a processing different from a game progress processing, which is a processing related to the progress of a game,
The gaming machine, wherein the processing other than the specific processing is the game progress processing.

According to feature R4, the processing execution means writes information for processing other than the game progress processing only to a predetermined specific area of the memory area. Therefore, when the game progress processing is executed by the processing execution means, it is possible to prevent processing other than the game progress processing from affecting the game progress processing.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to feature R4,
The specific processing is a gaming history information related processing (processing for gaming history) that calculates and displays gaming history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio), which is information related to gaming history.

According to feature R5, the processing execution means writes information in the game history information-related processing only to a predetermined specific area of the memory area, thereby preventing the game history information-related processing from affecting the game progress processing when the game progress processing is executed by the processing execution means.

<Feature S group>
The group of features S is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A ball entry detection means (ball entry detection sensor) for detecting a game ball entering the ball entry section;
A parameter storage means (a prize ball tally buffer) for storing a predetermined parameter (a prize ball tally value);
A processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The processing execution means
As the predetermined processing,
A parameter update process (a prize ball tallying process) for updating the predetermined parameters stored in the parameter storage means when a game ball enters the ball entry section;
A calculation process (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating game history information, which is information relating to game history, based on the predetermined parameters stored in the parameter storage means;
is executable,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in one of the predetermined processes, when the parameter update process is executed, the calculation process is not executed.

According to feature S1, when a parameter update process is executed in a single predetermined process, a calculation process is not executed. In other words, since both a parameter update process and a calculation process are not executed in a single predetermined process, the time required for a single execution of the predetermined process can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for a single execution of the predetermined process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, which would result in the predetermined process being unable to be executed at the predetermined interval. Furthermore, according to feature S1, parameter update processes in which the game ball entry status and processing load are correlated are executed with priority over calculation processes in which the game ball entry status and processing load are not correlated. This prevents the interval between parameter update processes from becoming too long, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the processing result of the parameter update process (prize ball tally value) from being unable to accurately reflect the game ball entry status.

[Feature S2]
A gaming machine according to feature S1,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute the calculation process (the process of step S10810 in FIG. 29 ),
The processing execution means
a game machine that executes the calculation process when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines that the calculation process is to be executed.

According to feature S2, when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines that the calculation process should be executed, the calculation process is executed. Therefore, neither the parameter update process nor the calculation process is executed in the specified process, and in that situation, it is possible to execute another process independent of the parameter update process and the calculation process (for example, a process for determining the validity of updated parameters or the calculation results of the calculation process). Furthermore, if the configuration is such that when either the parameter update process or the calculation process is executed in a single execution of the specified process, the time required for one execution of the specified process is shorter than the predetermined interval, then by executing a process with a shorter processing time than the parameter update process and the calculation process in that situation, it is possible to reliably prevent the time required for one execution of the specified process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
The processing execution means is capable of calculating multiple types of game history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio) in the calculation process, but in the calculation process for one of the specified processes, executes processing (task 1 or task 2 in Figure 29) for calculating one type of game history information.

According to feature S3, even though multiple types of gaming history information can be calculated in the calculation process, the calculation process in a single predetermined process only executes the calculation of one type of gaming history information. This reduces the time required for one execution of the predetermined process compared to a configuration in which the calculation process in a single predetermined process executes the calculation of multiple types of gaming history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required to execute the predetermined process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, resulting in the predetermined process being unable to be executed at the predetermined interval. It is also possible to reduce the storage capacity required for temporarily storing calculated gaming history information.

[Feature S4]
A gaming machine according to feature S3,
The processing execution means
A gaming machine characterized by calculating the gaming history information of one type by executing the process for calculating the gaming history information of the one type (task 1 or task 2 in Figure 29) over multiple times of the specified process.

According to feature S4, the processing for calculating one type of gaming history information is performed over multiple predetermined processes to calculate the one type of gaming history information. This reduces the time required to perform one predetermined process compared to a configuration in which the calculation of one type of gaming history information is completed in a single predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required to perform the predetermined process from exceeding the interval between executions of the predetermined process.

The inventions of Feature Group O to Feature Group S solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature T group>
The group of features T is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the master CPU 62x of the first embodiment)
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, handicap ratio, number of balls entered, etc.);
an operation means (flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the operation of the operating means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operating means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to Feature T1, the operating means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of its opening. Therefore, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine must be opened and the operating means must be operated, leaving traces of its opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of its opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been erased.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space in the gaming machine and operate the operating means. This leaves evidence of the opening in the space in the gaming machine, so even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, there will remain evidence that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. This makes it difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to a gaming machine, which in turn makes it possible to curb the motivation to make fraudulent modifications to a gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who have a legitimate reason to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine could erase all traces of the machine's opening, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is capable of retaining the stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature T2 allows information acquired based on games played to be retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if power is not supplied to the gaming machine during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal games were played on the gaming machine.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball total value).

Feature T3 makes it possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to feature T4, the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the motivation to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

<Feature U group>
The group of features U is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature U1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the master CPU 62x of the aspect 39 of the first embodiment);
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, handicap ratio, number of balls entered, etc.);
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) can be connected;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is provided with means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receipt of a predetermined signal (erasure command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to Feature U1, the erasing means includes means for erasing information stored in the information storage means upon receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means, so that anyone who has the predetermined device can erase the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of the information by anyone who does not have the predetermined device.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, erasing the information stored in the information storage means requires a specific device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine. By restricting who can own this specific device, it is possible to prevent unauthorized individuals from erasing the information stored in the information storage means, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the emergence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand gaming machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of a gaming machine can own the required equipment, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
a transmitting means for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the specified device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means.

According to Feature U2, a transmission means is provided that transmits the information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the connection means before the erasure means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation against the will of the owner of the specified device, the information that has been erased from the information storage means can be confirmed using the specified device.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is capable of retaining the stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature U3 allows information acquired based on games played to be retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if power is not supplied to the gaming machine during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal games were played on the gaming machine.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball total value).

Feature U4 makes it possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of being opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to feature U5, the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the motivation to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

<Feature Group V>
The group of features V is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the first embodiment mode 40);
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, handicap ratio, number of balls entered, etc.);
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) can be connected;
an operation means (flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The operating means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box with a seal attached),
The erasing means is provided with means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting the specified operation and receiving a specified signal (erasure command signal) from the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to Feature V1, the operating means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine must be opened and the operating means must be operated, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the erasing means includes means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means. Therefore, anyone who possesses the predetermined device can erase the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, based on whether traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the space of the gaming machine may have been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been erased, and it is also possible to restrict the erasure of that information by anyone who does not possess the predetermined device.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, erasing information stored in the information storage means requires a specific device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine. By restricting who can have the specific device, it is possible to prevent unauthorized individuals from erasing information stored in the information storage means. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized individual does obtain the specific device, they must open the relevant space of the gaming machine and operate the operation means in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means. This leaves evidence of the opening in the relevant space of the gaming machine, so even if information stored in the information storage means is erased, evidence remains that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized individuals from erasing information stored in the information storage means and to make it more difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the motivation to make fraudulent modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand gaming machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those with a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of a gaming machine could obtain the appropriate equipment and all traces of the space having been opened could be erased, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

[Feature V2]
A gaming machine according to feature V1,
a transmitting means for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the specified device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means.

According to Feature V2, a transmission means is provided that transmits the information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the connection means before the erasure means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation against the will of the owner of the specified device, the information that has been erased from the information storage means can be confirmed using the specified device.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is capable of retaining the stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature V3 allows information acquired based on games played to be retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if power is not supplied to the gaming machine during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal games were played on the gaming machine.

[Feature V4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball total value).

Feature V4 makes it possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature V5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of being opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to Feature V5, the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to tamper with the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been tampered with. This makes it difficult to conceal tampering with the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately reduces the motivation to tamper with the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

<Feature W group>
The group of features W is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature W1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the master CPU 62x of the first embodiment)
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used in game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used to control the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as prize ball totals, bonus item ratios, and ball number information stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed;
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means includes a means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means when erasing the second information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature W1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, thereby preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, is not erased but remains as is even though the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed, has been erased.

Specifically, for example, the second information, which is information obtained based on the executed game, serves as a guarantee for determining the fairness of the game executed on the gaming machine. Therefore, when the second information is erased, it is preferable to erase the first information used to control the execution of the game on the gaming machine (for example, information related to a high probability mode flag or a high frequency support mode flag indicating the game status) and initialize the game status of the gaming machine. According to this feature, the erasing means includes a means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the game status of the gaming machine is maintained as is because the first information is not erased even though the second information, which serves as a guarantee for determining the fairness of the game, has been erased.

[Feature W2]
A gaming machine according to feature W1,
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information from among the information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature W2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information but not the second information stored in the information storage means, making it possible to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, while leaving the second information, which is information obtained based on the game that has been executed.

Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in controlling game execution or when an amusement hall opens or closes for business, there is a desire to erase the first information used to control game execution and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not erase the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been played. This feature makes it possible to erase the first information used to control game execution while leaving the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been played, and initialize the control of the gaming machine.

<Feature X group>
The group of features X is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature X1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the aspect 42 of the first embodiment);
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used in game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used to control the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as prize ball totals, bonus item ratios, and ball number information stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed;
A first operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) that accepts a first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM clear button is pressed);
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information from the information stored in the information storage means, based on the first operation being received by the first operation means, and not erasing the second information.

According to feature X1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information from the information stored in the information storage means and not erasing the second information based on the first operation being received by the first operating means. This makes it possible to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, while leaving the second information, which is information obtained based on the game that has been executed.

Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in controlling game execution or when an amusement parlor opens or closes, there is a desire to erase the first information used to control game execution and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not erase the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been played. According to this feature, by operating the first operating means, it is possible to erase the first information used to control game execution while leaving the second information acquired based on the game that has been played, and initialize the control of the gaming machine.

[Feature X2]
A gaming machine according to feature X1,
a second operation means (a second RAM clear button) for accepting a second operation (an operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON);
The erasing means includes means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the second operation being accepted by the second operation means.

According to feature X2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the second operation being received by the second operating means, so that the second information that cannot be erased by operating the first operating means can be erased by operating the second operating means.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second operating means (second RAM clear button) is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to feature X3, the second operating means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of its opening. Therefore, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine must be opened and the second operating means must be operated, leaving traces of its opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of its opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the second information stored in the information storage means may have been erased.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications made to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be a person (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the gaming machine and operate the second operating means. This leaves traces of the opening in the space of the gaming machine, so even if the second information stored in the information storage means is erased, there will remain traces that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. This makes it difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to a gaming machine, which in turn makes it possible to curb the motivation to make fraudulent modifications to a gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand gaming machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the secondary information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who have a legitimate desire to erase the secondary information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine could erase any traces of the space being opened, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

<Characteristic Group Y>
The group of features Y is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x in aspects 43 and 44 of the first embodiment);
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used in game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used to control the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as prize ball totals, bonus item ratios, and ball number information stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed;
Operation means for accepting predetermined operations (RAM clear button and power switch);
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is
The operation means erases the first information stored in the information storage means based on the acceptance of a first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and setting the RAM clear button to a state where it is not pressed within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting a second operation different from the first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing a RAM clear button and continuing to hold the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined period of time).

According to Feature Y1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting a first operation, and for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting a second operation different from the first operation. Therefore, by performing different operations on the operation means, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, since the information to be erased can be selected without providing a separate operation means for selecting the information to be erased, the structure of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, if a malfunction occurs in controlling game execution or when an amusement hall opens or closes, and you want to erase the first information used to control game execution and initialize the control of the gaming machine, you can execute the first operation. Conversely, if you want to erase the second information obtained based on the game that has been played and put the gaming machine into circulation anew, you can execute the second operation. In this way, by executing different operations on the operating means, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the information storage means.

[Feature Y2]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The erasing means is provided with a means for erasing the first information in addition to erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting the second operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing to hold the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined period of time).

According to feature Y2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information in addition to erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting the second operation, so that both the first information and the second information can be erased by executing the second operation on the operation means.

<Feature Z group>
The group of features Z is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the first embodiment)
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, handicap ratio, number of balls entered, etc.);
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A reception means for receiving authentication information (PIN number);
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is provided with a means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the authentication information accepted by the accepting means satisfying a predetermined condition.

According to Feature Z1, the erasing means includes means for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the authentication information accepted by the accepting means satisfying a predetermined condition, allowing a person who has authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition to erase the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of information by a person who does not have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to have authentication information that meets the specified conditions. By restricting the individuals who can have authentication information that meets the specified conditions, it is possible to prevent information stored in the information storage means from being erased by unauthorized individuals, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the emergence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called used gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who have a legitimate reason to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine could obtain authentication information that meets the specified conditions, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

[Feature Z2]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is capable of retaining the stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature Z2 allows information acquired based on games played to be retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if power is not supplied to the gaming machine during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal games were played on the gaming machine.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball total value).

Feature Z3 makes it possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of being opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to Feature Z4, the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the motivation to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

The inventions of Feature Group T to Feature Group Z solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and provide a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature αA group>
The group of features αA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) based on the determination;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αA1, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specified device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

[Feature αA2]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with a means for determining whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry sections, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to Feature αA2, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry points to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output via a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device can be simplified, and the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information can also be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must be equipped with an output section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must be equipped with an input section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections equipped in a gaming machine differs depending on the type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device equipped with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means only needs to be configured to include at least one output unit that can output judgment information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. This allows for a simplified configuration of the connection means. Similarly, the specified device only needs to be configured to include at least one input unit that can input judgment information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, allowing for a simplified configuration of the specified device. Furthermore, even when the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections via a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used with other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. This increases the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αA3]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αA3, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of the gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of the game can be ensured.

<Feature αB group>
The group of features αB is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
A plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter;
A plurality of signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting signals based on the balls entering each of the plurality of ball entry sections;
a judgment information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that judges whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, and outputs judgment information (ball entry information) that is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry sections;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the judgment information output means includes means for outputting the judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αB1, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry points to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output via a parallel transmission method, for example, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device, and it is also possible to simplify the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must be equipped with an output section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must be equipped with an input section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections equipped in a gaming machine differs depending on the type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device equipped with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means only needs to be configured to include at least one output unit that can output judgment information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. This allows for a simplified configuration of the connection means. Similarly, the specified device only needs to be configured to include at least one input unit that can input judgment information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, allowing for a simplified configuration of the specified device. Furthermore, even when the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections via a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used with other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. This increases the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αB2]
A gaming machine according to feature αB1,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αB2, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of a gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αB3]
A gaming machine according to feature αB1 or feature αB2,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αB3, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specified device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

<Feature αC group>
The group of features αC is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) based on the determination;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with an output control means that outputs the judgment information to the specified device only when the relationship with the specified device connected to the connection means satisfies specified conditions (when a Hi level signal is input from the inspection machine 320).

According to Feature αC1, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means only when the relationship with the specified device satisfies a specified condition. This prevents the determination information of the gaming machine from being output to the outside when the specified condition is not met. This prevents the determination information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes receiving a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

Feature αC2 prevents the gaming machine's judgment information from being output to the outside when certain conditions, including receiving a certain signal from a certain device connected to the connection means, are not met. This prevents the gaming machine's judgment information from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with a means for determining whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry sections, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αC3, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry points to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output via a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device can be simplified, and the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information can also be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must be equipped with output units corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must be equipped with input units corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections equipped in a gaming machine differs depending on the type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device equipped with a different number of input units for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means only needs to be configured to include at least one output unit that can output judgment information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. This allows for a simplified configuration of the connection means. Similarly, the specified device only needs to be configured to include at least one input unit that can input judgment information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, allowing for a simplified configuration of the specified device. Furthermore, even when the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections via a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used with other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. This increases the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αC4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αC4, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of the gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αC5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC4,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αC5, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specified device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

<Feature αD group>
The group of features αD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) based on the determination;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The gaming machine further comprises:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a prize ball number information output means for outputting prize ball number information, which is information that can identify the number of gaming balls that will be paid out as prize balls when one gaming ball enters the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

Feature αD1 includes a prize ball number information output means that outputs prize ball number information to a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby eliminating the need to manually input prize ball number information into the specified device and preventing incorrect prize ball number information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device can perform processing based on the judgment information and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Feature αD2]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a type information output means for outputting type information, which is information that can identify the type of the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

Feature αD2 includes a type information output means for outputting type information to a specified device connected to the connection means, eliminating the need to manually input type information into the specified device and preventing incorrect type information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device can execute processing based on the determination information output from the determination information output means and the accurate type information output from the type information output means. The type of ball entry area refers to the type of ball entry area that is provided with signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h), such as a first start opening, a second start opening, a big prize opening, or an ejection passage.

[Feature αD3]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with a means for determining whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry sections, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αD3, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry points to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output via a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device can be simplified, and the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information can also be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must be equipped with an output section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must be equipped with an input section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections equipped in a gaming machine differs depending on the type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device equipped with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means only needs to be configured to include at least one output unit that can output judgment information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. This allows for a simplified configuration of the connection means. Similarly, the specified device only needs to be configured to include at least one input unit that can input judgment information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, allowing for a simplified configuration of the specified device. Furthermore, even when the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections via a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used with other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. This increases the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting the prize ball number information based on receiving a predetermined signal (a ball entrance information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD4, the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting prize ball number information based on receiving a specified signal from a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby preventing prize ball number information from being output to the outside in inappropriate circumstances or at inappropriate times.

[Feature αD5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting the prize ball number information when the specified device is connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD5, the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting prize ball number information when a specified device is connected to the connection means, so the specified device can quickly obtain the prize ball number information after being connected to the connection means. Therefore, for example, after being connected to the connection means, the specified device can quickly execute processing that requires the prize ball number information.

[Feature αD6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD5,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αD6, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of the gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αD7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD6,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αD7, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specified device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

[Feature αD8]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type information output means includes means for outputting the type information based on receiving a predetermined signal (entrance information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD8, the type information output means includes means for outputting type information based on receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means, thereby preventing type information from being output to the outside in inappropriate circumstances or at inappropriate times.

[Feature αD9]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2 or feature D8,
The gaming machine, wherein the type information output means comprises means for outputting the type information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD9, the type information output means includes means for outputting type information when a specific device is connected to the connection means, so the specific device can quickly obtain type information after connecting to the connection means. Therefore, for example, after connecting to the connection means, the specific device can quickly execute processing that requires the type information.

<Feature αE group>
The group of features αE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) based on the determination;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
A calculation means (main CPU 62x, game history management chip 300) for calculating game history information (game history information such as bonus ratios) that is information related to the game history based on the judgment information;
a storage means (flash memory 64x, gaming history management chip 300) for storing the gaming history information calculated by the calculation means;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The gaming machine further comprises:
a game history information output means for outputting the game history information stored in the storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means;

Feature αE1 includes means for outputting game history information stored in the storage means and means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means, so that the specified device connected to the connection means can receive the game history information stored in the storage means and can execute processing based on the judgment information.

Specifically, for example, a specified device can display gaming history information (hereinafter also referred to as first gaming history information) stored in the memory means of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the specified device can calculate gaming history information based on assessment information received during a specified inspection period while connected to the connection means of the gaming machine, and display the gaming history information (hereinafter also referred to as second gaming history information). Therefore, for example, an inspector inspecting a gaming machine can compare the first gaming history information stored in the memory means of the gaming machine with the second gaming history information based on assessment information received by the specified device during a specified inspection period.

If a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine or unauthorized modifications (such as tampering with the nails) cause a change in the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, a difference may arise between the first gaming history information stored in the memory means of the gaming machine (the gaming history information calculated by the calculation means based on judgment information from a predetermined period in the past) and the second gaming history information calculated by a predetermined device based on judgment information from a predetermined inspection period. Therefore, by noting the difference between the two pieces of gaming history information, an inspector inspecting the gaming machine can check whether a malfunction or unauthorized modifications (such as tampering with the nails) have occurred in the gaming machine.

[Feature αE2]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1,
A gaming machine characterized by having a prize ball number information output means for outputting prize ball number information, which is information that can identify the number of gaming balls that will be paid out as prize balls when one gaming ball enters the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αE2, a prize ball number information output means is provided that outputs prize ball number information to a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby eliminating the need to manually input prize ball number information into the specified device and preventing incorrect prize ball number information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device can perform processing based on the judgment information output from the judgment information output means and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Feature αE3]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1 or feature αE2,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αE3, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of a gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be ensured.

[Feature αE4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αE1 to αE3,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αE4, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, thereby enabling the specified device to receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

<Feature αF group>
The group of features αF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
a first process group execution means for repeatedly executing a first process group (remaining processes of the main process);
a second processing group execution means for interrupting the first processing group and executing a second processing group (a game progress processing including a game number control processing, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous execution of the second processing group);
A gaming machine comprising:
the first process group execution means includes means for repeatedly executing the first process group during a period (remaining time) from the end of execution of one of the second process groups to the start of execution of the next of the second process group;
The first processing group includes a gaming history information related process (gaming history process) which is a process related to the calculation of gaming history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio, etc.), which is information relating to the gaming history.

According to feature αF1, the first process group including the gaming history information-related processing is repeatedly executed during the period from the end of execution of one second process group to the start of execution of the next second process group, thereby preventing the first process group including the gaming history information-related processing from starting even though the execution of one second process group has not yet finished. In other words, by prioritizing the execution of the second process group and repeatedly executing the first process group including the gaming history information-related processing during the period when the second process group is not being executed, it is possible to quickly calculate gaming history information.

Furthermore, if this characteristic configuration were not adopted and a configuration were adopted in which the game history information-related processing was included in the second processing group and executed, the time required from start to finish for one execution of the second processing group would be long. For example, when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of execution of the next second processing group is met, execution of one second processing group may not have yet finished, and execution of the next second processing group may not be able to start until execution of the first second processing group has finished. In this case, there is a risk of a malfunction occurring due to the delay in starting execution of the next second processing group.

In contrast, according to this feature, since the gaming history information-related processing is executed as part of the first processing group, the time required from start to finish for one execution of the second processing group can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the gaming history information-related processing is executed as part of the second processing group. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which execution of one second processing group has not yet finished when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of execution of the next second processing group is met, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which execution of the next second processing group cannot start until execution of the one second processing group has finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions due to delays in the start of execution of the next second processing group.

As described above, this feature makes it possible to efficiently and quickly calculate gaming history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group, which includes gaming history information-related processing, during periods when the second processing group is not being executed, while preventing malfunctions caused by delays in the start of execution of the next second processing group.

[Feature αF2]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1,
The gaming machine, wherein the second processing group includes a game progress processing that is a processing related to the progress of a game.

Feature αF2 prevents delays in the start of execution of the second processing group, which includes game progress processing, which is processing related to the progress of the game. This prevents problems from occurring in the progress of the game, and makes it possible to quickly calculate game history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group, which includes game history information-related processing, during periods when the second processing group is not being executed.

[Feature αF3]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
the gaming history information-related process includes a plurality of processing steps (a plurality of types of tasks) that are executed sequentially to complete calculation of the gaming history information;
The first process group execution means executes a part of the plurality of process steps in one execution of the game history information related process.

According to feature αF3, the first processing group execution means executes some of the multiple processing steps in one execution of the gaming history information-related processing. This reduces the time required from start to finish for one execution of the gaming history information-related processing, compared to, for example, a configuration in which all of the multiple processing steps are executed in one execution of the gaming history information-related processing. Specifically, for example, even if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the gaming history information-related processing, the currently executing gaming history information-related processing is completed in a short time, thereby reducing the time from the fulfillment of the predetermined condition to the start of execution of the second processing group. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate gaming history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group, while suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions caused by delays in the start of execution of the second processing group.

[Feature αF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous execution of the second process group.

According to feature αF4, the predetermined condition includes the passage of a predetermined time since the start of the previous execution of the second process group, allowing the second process group to be executed periodically. Then, after the execution of the second process group has finished and during the period from the start of execution of the second process group until the predetermined time has elapsed, the first process group, including the game history information-related processing, can be repeatedly executed, thereby enabling the game history information to be calculated quickly.

The inventions of the above feature group αA to feature group αF solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, and simplifying control (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Characteristic αG group>
The group of features αG is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
a first processing execution means (main control device 60) capable of transmitting first information (opening command) and second information (opening start command);
a second processing execution means (audio and light emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information transmitted by the first processing execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The second processing execution means
When the first information is received, a plurality of processes (opening effect and right-hit notification effect) are set to be executed sequentially, and the plurality of processes set are executed sequentially,
When the second information is received while the plurality of set processes are being executed in sequence due to the reception of the first information, the process being executed is terminated and a specific process (round effect) is executed.

In a typical gaming machine that does not have feature αG1, when the second process execution means is to execute multiple processes sequentially, the first process execution means transmits information to the second process execution means to cause the second process execution means to execute each process. When the second process execution means is to execute a specific process, the first process execution means transmits information to the second process execution means to cause the second process execution means to execute the specific process. In other words, the more processes the second process execution means is to execute, the more times the first process execution means transmits information to the second process execution means.

Specifically, for example, if the second processing execution means is caused to execute a first processing (opening effect), then a second processing (right-hit notification effect), and then a specific processing (round effect), the first processing execution means will transmit information (opening command) to the second processing execution means to cause it to execute the first processing (opening effect), then transmit information (right-hit notification command) to cause it to execute the second processing (right-hit notification effect), and then transmit information (open start command) to cause it to execute the specific processing (round effect). In this case, the first processing execution means will transmit information (commands) to the second processing execution means three times. Furthermore, when the second processing execution means is caused to execute a first processing (opening effect) and then a specific processing (round effect) without executing a second processing (right-hit notification effect), the first processing execution means transmits information (opening command) to the second processing execution means to execute the first processing (opening effect), and then transmits information (open start command) to execute the specific processing (round effect) without transmitting information (right-hit notification command) to execute the second processing (right-hit notification effect). In this case, the first processing execution means transmits information (command) to the second processing execution means twice. That is, in a typical gaming machine, when the second processing execution means is not caused to execute the second processing (right-hit notification effect), the first processing execution means only needs to transmit information (command) to the second processing execution means twice. However, when the second processing execution means is caused to execute the second processing (right-hit notification effect), the first processing execution means transmits information (command) to the second processing execution means three times.

In contrast, according to feature αG1, if the second process execution means receives the second information while sequentially executing multiple processes set in response to the reception of the first information, it terminates the currently executing process and executes a specific process. Therefore, whether the second process execution means is caused to execute a specific process after all of the multiple processes have been executed, or whether the second process execution means is caused to execute a specific process without executing any unexecuted processes among the multiple processes, the first process execution means only needs to send the first information and the second information to the second process execution means. In other words, in either case, the first process execution means only needs to send information to the second process execution means twice.

Specifically, for example, if the second processing execution means is configured to sequentially execute a first processing (opening effect) and a second processing (right-hit notification effect) as multiple processing, the first processing execution means only needs to transmit the first information (opening command) and the second information (release start command) to the second processing execution means, whether the second processing execution means executes the first processing (opening effect) and the second processing (right-hit notification effect) and then executes a specific processing (round effect), or whether the second processing execution means executes the first processing (opening effect) and then executes a specific processing (round effect) without executing the second processing (right-hit notification effect). In other words, the first processing execution means only needs to transmit information (commands) to the second processing execution means twice, whether the second processing execution means executes the second processing (right-hit notification effect) or not. Therefore, feature αG1 can reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means, thereby reducing the processing load on the first processing execution means.

Furthermore, according to feature αG1, the number of processes (number of effects) actually executed out of the multiple set processes changes as the timing at which the second process execution means receives the second information changes. Therefore, by controlling and changing the timing at which the first process execution means transmits the second information, it is possible to change the number of processes executed by the second process execution means.

[Feature αG2]
A gaming machine according to feature αG1,
The second processing execution means
When the first information is received, the first processing (opening effect) and the second processing (right-hit notification effect) are set to be executed sequentially as the plurality of processings,
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the second information is received after the first information is received and before the second processing is executed, the specific processing (round presentation) is executed without executing the second processing which is set to be executed after the first processing.

According to feature αG2, even if the second processing execution means is caused to execute a specific processing (round processing) after executing the first processing (opening effect) and the second processing (right-hit notification effect), or even if the second processing execution means is caused to execute a specific processing (round processing) after executing the first processing (opening effect) without executing the second processing (right-hit notification effect), the first processing execution means only needs to send the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command) to the second processing execution means. In other words, whether the first processing execution means causes the second processing execution means to execute the second processing (right-hit notification effect) or not, the first processing execution means only needs to send information (commands) to the second processing execution means twice. This reduces the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means, thereby reducing the processing load on the first processing execution means.

[Feature αG3]
A gaming machine according to feature αG1 or feature αG2,
the first processing execution means executes processing related to the progress of a game;
The gaming machine, wherein the second process execution means executes a process related to game presentation.

Feature αG3 allows a gaming machine in which a first processing execution means executes processing related to the progress of a game to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means.

[Feature αG4]
A gaming machine according to a feature αG3 subordinate to the feature αG2,
The first process execution means
A bonus granting process (opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode) that grants a bonus to a player can be executed,
The second processing execution means
As the first process, a bonus award start effect (opening effect) is executed, which is an effect that indicates to the player that the bonus award process will start;
As the second process, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-hit notification effect) is executed, which is an effect that suggests to the player a recommended launch mode of the game ball during the execution of the benefit granting process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as the specific processing, a bonus awarding effect (round effect) is executed, which is an effect that indicates to the player that the bonus awarding processing is being executed.

Feature αG4 allows for a reduction in the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means in a gaming machine that executes a bonus award start effect, a launch mode suggestion effect, and a bonus award in progress effect.

<Characteristic αH group>
The group of features αH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
a first processing execution means (main control device 60) capable of transmitting first information (opening command) and second information (opening start command);
a second processing execution means (audio and light emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information transmitted by the first processing execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first process execution means transmits the first information and then transmits the second information at different intervals,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second process execution means is configured to execute a process in a different manner.

In a typical gaming machine that does not have feature αH1, the first processing execution means transmits various types of information to the second processing execution means. The second processing execution means then executes processing corresponding to the content of the information received from the first processing execution means. In other words, in a typical gaming machine, the first processing execution means transmits various types of information to the second processing execution means in order to have the second processing execution means execute various types of processing.

In contrast, according to feature αH1, the manner of processing performed by the second processing execution means is configured to differ depending on the interval between transmissions of the first information and the second information by the first processing execution means. Therefore, the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the first processing execution means transmits various types of information to the second processing execution means in order to have the second processing execution means execute various types of processing.

[Feature αH2]
A gaming machine according to feature αH1,
The first process execution means
a first transmission mode in which, after transmitting first information (opening command), a first period (a 10-second opening period) has elapsed, second information (open start command) is transmitted;
a second transmission mode in which, after transmitting the first information (opening command), a second period (a 7-second opening period) has elapsed, the second information (open start command) is transmitted;
is executable,
The second processing execution means
When the first processing execution means executes the first transmission mode, the first processing (opening effect) is executed, and then the second processing (right-hit notification effect) is executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first processing execution means executes the second transmission mode, the processing mode is one in which the second processing (right-hit notification effect) is not executed after the first processing (opening effect) is executed.

According to Feature αH2, even when the second processing execution means is caused to execute the first processing (opening effect) and then the second processing (right hit notification effect), or even when the second processing execution means is not caused to execute the second processing (right hit notification effect) after executing the first processing (opening effect), the first processing execution means only needs to send the first information (opening command) and then the second information (opening start command). Therefore, the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced compared to a configuration (comparative example) that executes control such as sending information (opening command) to cause the second processing execution means to execute the first processing (opening effect), and sending information (right hit notification command) to cause the second processing to be executed if the second processing (right hit notification effect) is to be executed after the first processing (opening effect), and not sending information (right hit notification command) to cause the second processing to be executed if the second processing (right hit notification effect) is not to be executed after the first processing (opening effect).

[Feature αH3]
A gaming machine according to feature αH2,
The second processing execution means
When the first processing execution means executes the first transmission mode, the first processing (opening effect) and the second processing (right hit notification effect) are executed, and then the third processing (round effect) is executed.
When the first processing execution means executes the second transmission mode, the gaming machine is characterized in that after executing the first processing (opening effect), the processing mode is changed to execute the third processing (round effect) without executing the second processing (right-hit notification effect).

According to feature αH3, even if the second processing execution means is made to execute the first processing (opening effect) and then the second processing (right-hit notification effect) and then the third processing (round effect), or even if the second processing execution means is made to execute the first processing (opening effect) and then the third processing (round effect) without executing the second processing (right-hit notification effect), the first processing execution means only needs to send the first information (opening command) and then the second information (opening start command). Therefore, for example, the first processing execution means can send information (opening command) to cause the second processing execution means to execute the first processing (opening effect) and then the first processing In comparison with a configuration (comparative example) that executes control such that if a second process (right-hit notification effect) is to be executed after the first process (opening effect), information for executing the second process (right-hit notification command) is transmitted, if the second process (right-hit notification effect) is not to be executed after the first process (opening effect), information for executing the second process (right-hit notification command) is not transmitted, and if a third process (round effect) is to be executed after the first process (opening effect) or the second process (right-hit notification effect) is to be executed, information for executing the third process (opening start command) is transmitted, the processing load of the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αH4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αH1 to αH3,
the first processing execution means executes processing related to the progress of a game;
The gaming machine, wherein the second process execution means executes a process related to game presentation.

Feature αH4 allows a gaming machine in which a first processing execution means executes processing related to the progress of a game to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means.

[Feature αH5]
A gaming machine according to feature αH4 subordinate to feature αH3,
The first process execution means
A bonus granting process (opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode) that grants a bonus to a player can be executed,
The second processing execution means
As the first process, a bonus award start effect (opening effect) is executed, which is an effect that indicates to the player that the bonus award process will start;
As the second process, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-hit notification effect) is executed, which is an effect that suggests to the player a recommended launch mode of the game ball during the execution of the benefit granting process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as the third process, a bonus awarding effect (round effect) is executed, which is an effect that indicates to the player that the bonus awarding process is being executed.

Feature αH5 allows a gaming machine that executes a bonus award start effect, a launch mode suggestion effect, and a bonus award in progress effect to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means.

[Feature αH6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αH1 to αH5,
The first processing execution means is a game progress processing execution means (main control device 60) that executes processing related to the progress of a game,
The game progress processing execution means
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
a transmitting means for sequentially transmitting a plurality of predetermined pieces of information (an opening command and an opening start command) when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined result (a jackpot);
a transmission interval determination means for determining an interval at which the transmission means sequentially transmits the plurality of pieces of predetermined information based on a game state (a state of a support mode) when the predetermined lottery process resulting in the predetermined result is executed;
A gaming machine equipped with:

According to Feature αH6, the interval between sequential transmissions of a predetermined number of pieces of information is determined based on the game state when a predetermined lottery process that resulted in a predetermined result was executed. Therefore, for example, a device that receives the predetermined number of pieces of information can execute processing that corresponds to the game state when the lottery process that resulted in a predetermined result was executed, based on the different intervals at which the predetermined number of pieces of information was received. Therefore, the processing load on the game progress processing execution means can be reduced compared to a configuration in which various pieces of information with different content are sent to another device in order to have that device execute processing that corresponds to the game state.

[Feature αH7]
A gaming machine according to feature αH6,
The second processing execution means is a performance processing execution means (a sound and light emission control device 90) that executes processing related to game performance,
The effect processing execution means receives the predetermined plurality of pieces of information transmitted by the transmission means, and executes an effect of a type corresponding to the game state based on the difference in the intervals between the receptions (executing an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect in response to the low-frequency support mode, and executing only the opening effect in response to the high-frequency support mode).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to Feature αH7, the effect processing execution means receives multiple predetermined pieces of information transmitted by the transmission means of the game progress processing execution means, and executes an effect in a manner corresponding to the game status based on the different intervals between such receptions. This reduces the processing load on the game progress processing execution means compared to a configuration in which various pieces of information with different contents are transmitted to the effect processing execution means in order for the effect processing execution means to execute processing corresponding to the game status.

[Feature αH8]
A gaming machine according to feature αH6 or feature αH7,
The game progress processing execution means includes a benefit granting processing execution means for executing a benefit granting processing (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode) which is a processing for granting a benefit to a player when a result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the predetermined result,
The recommended launch mode of the game ball in the first game state (in the low frequency support mode) is the first launch mode (left-handed shot),
The recommended game ball launch mode in the second game state (high frequency support mode) is the second launch mode (right hit),
The recommended launch mode of the game ball during the execution of the benefit granting process is the second launch mode (right-hand shot),
The transmission interval determination means
If the gaming state when the predetermined lottery process resulting in the predetermined result is executed is the first gaming state, determining to transmit the predetermined plurality of pieces of information at a first transmission interval (10 second interval);
If the gaming state when the predetermined lottery process resulting in the predetermined result is executed is the second gaming state, it is determined that the predetermined plurality of pieces of information are to be transmitted at a second transmission interval (7 seconds interval);
The performance processing execution means
When the predetermined plurality of pieces of information transmitted at the first transmission interval are received, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-hit notification effect) is executed, which is an effect that suggests to the player that it is recommended to launch the game ball in the second launch mode,
When the predetermined plurality of pieces of information transmitted at the second transmission interval are received, the gaming machine does not execute the launch mode suggestion effect (right-hit notification effect).

According to feature αH8, if the recommended game ball launch mode changes from the first launch mode to the second launch mode as a result of the bonus awarding process being executed, a launch mode suggestion effect recommending the second launch mode is executed, and if the recommended game ball launch mode remains the second launch mode even as a result of the bonus awarding process being executed, the launch mode suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game progress processing execution means while executing an effect of an appropriate mode corresponding to the game state when the specified lottery process is executed.

<Characteristic αI group>
The group of features αI is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αI1]
a game progress processing execution means (main control device 60) that executes processing related to the progress of a game;
An effect processing execution means (audio and light emission control device 90) for executing processing related to game effects;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game progress processing execution means
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
a game round processing execution means for executing a game round processing (variable display and stop display of symbols) which is a process for displaying the result of the predetermined lottery processing;
a bonus awarding process execution means for executing a bonus awarding process (opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode) which is a process for awarding a bonus to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined result (jackpot);
A waiting period determination means for determining the length of a waiting period (opening period) which is the period from the end of the game processing resulting in the predetermined result to the start of the benefit granting processing based on the game state (support mode state);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect processing execution means executes the same processing (processing to set an opening effect and a right-hit notification effect) regardless of the game status at the start of the standby period, but executes effects with different content depending on the game status during the standby period.

According to feature αI1, the effect processing execution means executes the same processing regardless of the game state at the start of the standby period, but executes different effects depending on the game state during the standby period. Therefore, it is possible to execute effects appropriate for standby periods whose lengths change depending on the game state without executing different processing depending on the game state at the start of the standby period. In other words, the effect processing execution means does not need to grasp the game state at the start of the standby period and execute different processing depending on the game state in order to execute effects appropriate for standby periods whose lengths change depending on the game state. This reduces the processing load on the effect processing execution means.

[Feature αI2]
A gaming machine according to feature αI1,
The game progress processing execution means transmits first information (opening command) at the start of the waiting period, and transmits second information (opening start command) at the start of the benefit granting processing,
The performance processing execution means
When the first information is received, a process is executed to set a plurality of effects (opening effect and right-hit notification effect) to be executed sequentially regardless of the game state,
When the second information is received while the plurality of set processes are being executed in sequence due to the reception of the first information, the currently executed effect is terminated and a specific effect (round effect) is executed.

According to feature αI2, the interval between when the effect processing execution means receives the first information and when it receives the second information varies depending on the gaming state, so that the shorter the interval, the fewer effects will actually be executed out of the multiple effects set by receiving the first information, and the longer the interval, the more effects will be executed. In other words, according to feature αI2, by performing a simple process of setting the effect processing execution means to execute multiple effects sequentially regardless of the gaming state when it receives the first information, it is possible to vary the content of the effects executed during the standby period depending on the gaming state.

[Feature αI3]
A gaming machine according to feature αI2,
The performance processing execution means
When the first information is received, regardless of the game state, the first effect (opening effect) and the second effect (right-hit notification effect) are set to be executed sequentially as the plurality of effects,
a gaming machine that, when receiving the second information after receiving the first information and before executing the second effect, executes the specific effect without executing the second effect that is set to be executed after the first effect.

According to feature αI3, the interval between when the effect processing execution means receives the first information and when it receives the second information varies depending on the game state, so that the second effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, according to feature αI3, by executing a simple process in which the effect processing execution means receives the first information and then sets the first effect and the second effect to be executed sequentially regardless of the game state, it is possible to vary whether the second effect is executed during the standby period depending on the game state.

[Feature αI4]
A gaming machine according to feature αI3,
The performance processing execution means
As the first effect, a bonus award start effect (opening effect) is executed, which is an effect that indicates to the player that the bonus award process will be started;
As the second effect, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-hit notification effect) is executed, which is an effect that suggests to the player the recommended launch mode of the game ball during the execution of the benefit granting process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as the specific effect, a bonus awarding effect (round effect) is executed, which is an effect that indicates to the player that the bonus awarding process is being executed.

According to feature αI4, when the effect processing execution means receives the first information, it executes a simple process of setting the bonus award start effect and the launch mode suggestion effect to be executed sequentially regardless of the game state. This makes it possible to vary whether or not the launch mode suggestion effect is executed during the waiting period before the bonus award effect starts depending on the game state.

<Feature αJ group>
The group of features αJ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the second embodiment.

[Feature αJ1]
a first processing execution means (main control device 60) capable of transmitting predetermined information (opening command);
a second processing execution means (audio and light emission control device 90) capable of receiving the predetermined information transmitted by the first processing execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The second processing execution means
It is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state) of the first processing execution means,
When the control state is the first state (low frequency support mode) and the predetermined information (opening command) is received, a first process (opening effect) is executed;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the control state is in the second state (high frequency support mode) and the specified information (opening command) is received, a process (short opening presentation) different from the first process is executed.

According to feature αJ1, even when the second processing execution means is caused to execute the first processing, or when the second processing execution means is caused to execute processing different from the first processing, the first processing execution means only needs to send predetermined information (information with the same content). Therefore, the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced compared to a configuration in which, for example, when the second processing execution means is caused to execute the first processing, information for causing the second processing execution means to execute the first processing is sent to the second processing execution means, and when the second processing execution means is caused to execute processing different from the first processing, information for causing the second processing execution means to execute the different processing is sent to the second processing execution means.

[Feature αJ2]
A gaming machine according to feature αJ1,
The second processing execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that when the control state is the first state (low frequency support mode) and the specified information (opening command) is received, the first processing (opening presentation) is executed and then the second processing (right hit notification presentation) is executed.

According to feature αJ2, when the second processing execution means receives predetermined information (opening command) while the control state of the first processing execution means is in the first state (low frequency support mode), it executes the first processing (opening effect) and then executes the second processing (right hit notification effect). Therefore, compared to a configuration (comparative example) in which the first processing execution means transmits information (opening command) to cause the second processing execution means to execute the first processing (opening effect), and further transmits information (right hit notification command) to cause the second processing execution means to execute the second processing (right hit notification effect), the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means can be reduced, and the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature αJ1 or feature αJ2,
the first process execution means transmits status information (a high-frequency support mode command, a low-frequency support mode command) that is information relating to the status of the control when the status of the control changes;
The second processing execution means grasps the control state of the first processing execution means based on the state information received from the first processing execution means.

According to feature αJ3, the first processing execution means transmits status information, which is information relating to the state of control, when the state of control changes, and the second processing execution means grasps the control state of the first processing execution means based on the status information. Therefore, the first processing execution means does not need to include information relating to the control state of the first processing execution means in the specified information and transmit it, thereby reducing the processing load when the first processing execution means transmits the specified information.

[Feature αJ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ3,
the first processing execution means executes processing related to the progress of a game;
The gaming machine, wherein the second process execution means executes a process related to game presentation.

Feature αJ4 allows a gaming machine in which a first processing execution means executes processing related to the progress of a game to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means.

[Feature αJ5]
A gaming machine according to feature αJ4 subordinate to feature αJ2,
The first process execution means
A bonus granting process (opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode) that grants a bonus to a player can be executed,
The second processing execution means
As the first process, a bonus award start effect (opening effect) is executed, which is an effect that indicates to the player that the bonus award process will start;
As the second process, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-hit notification effect) is executed, which is an effect that suggests to the player the recommended launch mode of the game ball during the execution of the bonus awarding process.

Feature αJ5 allows a gaming machine that executes a bonus award start effect and a launch mode suggestion effect to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means.

<Characteristic αK group>
The group of features αK is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the second embodiment.

[Feature αK1]
A gaming machine equipped with a game progress processing execution means (main control device 60) that executes processing related to the progress of a game,
The game progress processing execution means
A first game mode (low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second game mode (high frequency support mode, high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game mode can be executed;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
a game round processing execution means for executing a game round processing (variable display and stop display of symbols) which is a process for displaying the result of the predetermined lottery processing;
a bonus awarding process execution means for executing a bonus awarding process (opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode) which is a process for awarding a bonus to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined result (jackpot);
Equipped with
The benefit granting process execution means
If the result of the predetermined lottery process during the first game mode is the predetermined result, the bonus awarding process is started after a first period (a 10-second opening period) has elapsed since the end of the game round process that resulted in the predetermined result;
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the result of the predetermined lottery process during the second gaming mode is the predetermined result, the bonus granting process is started after a second period (a 4-second opening period) that is shorter than the first period has elapsed since the end of the gaming round process that resulted in the predetermined result.

According to feature αK1, if the result of the predetermined lottery process during the first game mode is a predetermined result, the game progress process execution means starts the bonus awarding process a first period of time after the end of the game round process that resulted in the predetermined result; and if the result of the predetermined lottery process during the second game mode is a predetermined result, the game progress process execution means starts the bonus awarding process a second period of time that is shorter than the first period of time after the end of the game round process that resulted in the predetermined result. This adds a sense of speed to the game during the second game mode, making it more enjoyable to play.

Specifically, for example, during the second game mode, which is advantageous to the player, there is a high expectation that the bonus awarding process will begin, so the player plays the game hoping that the bonus awarding process will begin sooner rather than hoping that the bonus awarding process will actually begin. In other words, during the second game mode, the player seeks a sense of speed in the game. According to feature αK1, during the second game mode, the bonus awarding process begins sooner after the end of the game round process in which the result of the predetermined lottery process is achieved, compared to the first game mode. This gives the game in the second game mode a sense of speed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature αK2]
A gaming machine according to feature αK1,
The device includes a performance processing execution means (audio and light emission control device 90) for executing processing related to game performance,
The game progress processing execution means
an information transmitting means for transmitting predetermined information (opening command) when the game round processing in which the result of the lottery processing is the predetermined result is completed, and transmitting second information (opening start command) when the benefit granting processing is started;
The performance processing execution means
A first bonus award start effect (opening effect) that indicates to the player that the bonus award process will begin;
a second bonus award start effect (short opening effect) that indicates to the player that the bonus award process will begin and that is shorter in time than the first bonus award start effect;
is executable,
The type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means can be grasped,
When the predetermined information is received during the first gaming mode, the first benefit award start effect is executed during the first period;
When the predetermined information is received during the second gaming mode, the second benefit award start effect is executed during the second period.

According to feature αK2, the effect processing execution means is capable of grasping the type of game mode of the game progress processing execution means, and when predetermined information is received during the first game mode, executes the first bonus award start effect during the first period, and when predetermined information is received during the second game mode, executes the second bonus award start effect during the second period. This allows the effect processing execution means to execute a bonus award start effect appropriate for the duration of the first period or the second period, respectively. Furthermore, according to feature αK2, whether the effect processing execution means is caused to execute the first bonus award start effect or the second bonus award start effect, the game progress processing execution means only needs to send predetermined information (information with the same content). Therefore, the processing load on the game progress processing execution means can be reduced compared to, for example, a configuration in which, when the effect processing execution means is caused to execute the first bonus award start effect, information for executing the first bonus award start effect is sent to the effect processing execution means, and when the effect processing execution means is caused to execute the second bonus award start effect, information for executing the second bonus award start effect is sent to the effect processing execution means.

[Feature αK3]
A gaming machine according to feature αK2,
The performance processing execution means
During the execution of the benefit granting process, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-hit notification effect) can be executed, which is an effect that suggests to the player the recommended launch mode of the game ball,
When the predetermined information is received during the first gaming mode, the gaming machine executes the first bonus award start effect during the first period, and then executes the launch mode suggestion effect.

According to Feature αK3, when the effect processing execution means receives specified information during the first game mode, it executes the first bonus award start effect during the first period and then executes the launch mode suggestion effect. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the recommended game ball launch mode during the bonus awarding process before the bonus awarding process is executed, and also reduces the frequency of information transmission by the information transmission means of the game progress processing execution means compared to, for example, a configuration in which the information transmission means of the game progress processing execution means separately transmits information to the effect processing execution means for executing the launch mode suggestion effect.

[Feature αK4]
A gaming machine according to feature αK2 or feature αK3,
The game progress processing execution means transmits type information (high frequency support mode command, low frequency support mode command) which is information regarding the type of the game mode when the game mode changes,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation processing execution means grasps the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means based on the type information received from the game progress processing execution means.

According to feature αK4, when the game mode changes, the game progress processing execution means transmits type information, which is information relating to the type of that game mode, and the presentation processing execution means determines the type of game mode of the game progress processing execution means based on the type information received from the game progress processing execution means. Therefore, the game progress processing execution means does not need to include information relating to the type of game mode of the game progress processing execution means in the specified information and transmit it, thereby reducing the processing load when the game progress processing execution means transmits the specified information.

<Feature αL group>
The group of features αL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modifications 2 and 3 of the second embodiment.

[Feature αL1]
a first processing execution means (main control device 60) capable of transmitting second information (opening start command) after transmitting first information (opening command);
a second processing execution means (audio and light emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information;
A gaming machine comprising:
The second processing execution means
It is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state) of the first processing execution means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the content of the processing (content of the presentation) to be executed during the period (opening period) from when the first information is received to when the second information is received is determined based on the state of the control.

According to feature αL1, the second processing execution means is capable of grasping the control state of the first processing execution means and determines the content of the processing to be executed during the period from receiving the first information to receiving the second information based on the control state of the first processing execution means. Therefore, the first processing execution means does not need to change the mode in which it transmits the first information and the second information depending on its own control state, and can transmit the first information and the second information in the same transmission mode each time. Therefore, the control required for the first processing execution means to change the transmission mode in which it transmits the first information and the second information depending on its own control state can be omitted, and the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced. Furthermore, according to feature αL1, the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the first processing execution means transmits various types of information to the second processing execution means to have the second processing execution means execute various types of processing depending on the control state of the first processing execution means.

[Feature αL2]
A gaming machine according to feature αL1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first process execution means transmits the first information and the second information at the same interval even if the control state is different.

According to feature αL2, the first processing execution means transmits the first information and the second information at the same interval even if its own control state is different. This eliminates the control required for the first processing execution means to change the interval at which it transmits the first information and the second information depending on its own control state, thereby reducing the processing load on the first processing execution means.

[Feature αL3]
A gaming machine according to feature αL1 or feature αL2,
The second processing execution means
When the state of the control is the first state, an effect (opening effect) including a first content is executed in a first partial period included in a period (opening period) from when the first information is received to when the second information is received, and an effect (right-hit notification effect) including a second content is executed in a second partial period included in a period from when the first information is received to when the second information is received and after the first partial period,
When the control state is the second state, a presentation including the first content (the portion from 0 seconds to 7 seconds of the long opening presentation) is executed in the first partial period, and a presentation including the third content (the portion from 7 seconds to 10 seconds of the long opening presentation in variant 2, and a round presentation in variant 3) is executed in the second partial period.

According to feature αL3, during the first partial period, an effect containing the same content is executed regardless of the control state of the first processing execution means, and during the second partial period, an effect containing different content is executed depending on the control state of the first processing execution means, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation as to how the content of the effect will change from the first partial period to the second partial period. Furthermore, according to feature αL3, during the second partial period, an effect containing content appropriate to the control state of the first processing execution means can be executed.

[Feature αL4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL3,
the first process execution means transmits state information (a high-frequency support mode command, a low-frequency support mode command) that is information relating to the state of the control when the state of the control changes;
The second processing execution means grasps the control state of the first processing execution means based on the state information received from the first processing execution means.

According to feature αL4, the first processing execution means transmits state information, which is information relating to the state of control, when the state of control changes, and the second processing execution means grasps the state of control of the first processing execution means based on the state information. Therefore, the first processing execution means does not need to include information relating to the state of control of the first processing execution means in the first information and transmit it, thereby reducing the processing load when the first processing execution means transmits the first information.

The inventions of the above feature groups αG to αL solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, and simplifying control.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Characteristic αM group>
The group of features α M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αM1]
A flow path through which game balls circulate;
A first ball entry area (non-V winning area FNV in the third embodiment) provided on the flow path and into which the game ball can enter;
A second ball entry area (V entry area FV) is provided downstream of the first ball entry area on the flow path based on the flow direction of the game balls flowing through the flow path, and into which the game balls can enter;
A mechanism that contributes to the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, a state transition means (second opening and closing door) that transitions between a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state);
Equipped with
The state transition means
In the first state, the first and second goal areas are made to be in a state where it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the goal area;
In the second state, the first and second ball entry areas are set in a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the area.

According to feature αM1, the state transition means controls the timing of the state transition between the first state and the second state, thereby controlling the ball entry area into which the game ball is allowed to enter.

[Feature αM2]
A gaming machine according to feature αM1,
The state transition means
By transitioning a first flow path area (an area on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entry area (non-V winning area FNV) on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door) from the first state to a second state during the period in which a game ball is circulating, it is possible or easy for a game ball circulating on the flow path to enter the first ball entry area,
A gaming machine characterized by maintaining the first state while a gaming ball is circulating through the first flow path area, and transitioning from the first state to the second state while the gaming ball passes through the first flow path area and circulates through a second flow path area (an area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the top surface of the second opening and closing door), which is an area on the flow path corresponding to the second winning area (V winning area FV), thereby making it possible or easy for the gaming ball circulating on the flow path to enter the second winning area.

According to feature αM2, the state transition means controls the timing of the state transition between the first state and the second state, thereby enabling various control of the entry zone into which the game ball enters, such as causing a game ball flowing through the flow path to enter the first entry zone, or causing a game ball flowing through the flow path to enter the second entry zone. In other words, control of the entry zone into which the game ball enters can be performed for two entry zones by a single state transition means.

[Feature αM3]
A gaming machine according to feature αM1 or feature αM2,
The state transition means
an operation mode (open/close execution mode) in which a state transition between the first state and the second state is performed a plurality of times;
A region on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entry region is defined as a first flow path region;
The time required for the game ball to pass through the first flow path region is defined as a first flow path region passing time;
When the duration of the first state sandwiched between the second state and the next second state in the operation mode is defined as a first state duration,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operating mode includes a first operating mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a first type jackpot) that includes a predetermined operating pattern in which the duration of the first state is longer than the time it takes to pass through the first flow path region.

According to feature αM3, when game balls periodically arrive at the first flow path region and the time interval between game balls arriving at the first flow path region is shorter than the first flow path region passing time, the state transition means executes the first operating mode, thereby causing at least one of the game balls periodically arriving at the first flow path region to enter the second ball entry region.

[Feature αM4]
A gaming machine according to feature αM3,
A region on the flow path corresponding to the second ball entry region is defined as a second flow path region;
When the time required for a game ball to enter the first flow path area and exit the second flow path area is defined as the ball entry area passing time,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined operation pattern included in the first operation mode is characterized in that the first state duration is longer than the first flow path area passage time and shorter than the ball entry area passage time.

According to feature αM4, while a predetermined operation pattern is being executed, at least one of the game balls that periodically arrive at the first flow path region can be made to land in the second ball entry region, and almost all game balls that arrive at the first flow path region can be made to land in either the first ball entry region or the second ball entry region.

[Feature αM5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM4,
The state transition means
an operation mode in which a state transition between the first state and the second state is performed a plurality of times;
A region on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entry region is defined as a first flow path region;
The time required for the game ball to pass through the first flow path region is defined as a first flow path region passing time;
When the duration of the first state sandwiched between the second state and the next second state in the operation mode is defined as a first state duration,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operating mode includes a second operating mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second jackpot) in which all of the first state durations are shorter than the first flow path region passing time.

Feature αM5 enables the prevention of game balls from entering the second ball entry area while the second operating mode is being executed, while also enabling almost all game balls that reach the first flow path area to enter the first ball entry area.

[Feature αM6]
A gaming machine according to feature αM5,
A third ball entry area (first large winning hole) is provided on the upstream side of the flow path from the first ball entry area and into which game balls can enter;
The third ball entry area can transition between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball;
A region on the flow path corresponding to the third ball entry region is defined as a third flow path region;
When the time required for the game ball to enter the third flow path region and exit the first flow path region is defined as the second ball entry region entry time,
The state transition means
When the second operation mode is executed, the state transition from the first state to the second state in the second operation mode is started before the second ball entry area entry time has elapsed, based on the time point when the third ball entry area has transitioned from a state in which the game ball can or is easy to enter to a state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Feature αM6 prevents game balls from circulating through the second flow path region when the second operation mode begins. As a result, when the state transition means transitions from the first state to the second state upon the start of the second operation mode, game balls can be prevented from entering the second ball entry region. This further prevents game balls from entering the second ball entry region while the second operation mode is being executed.

<Feature αN group>
The group of features αN is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αN1]
A flow path through which game balls circulate;
Based on the flow direction of the game balls flowing through the flow path, an upstream ball entry section (first large prize entry port in the third embodiment) and a downstream ball entry section (second large prize entry port) are provided in order from the upstream side of the flow path,
an upstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the upstream ball entry section between a non-entry state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the game, and an entry state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the game;
a downstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the downstream goal section between the non-goal-entry state and the goal-entry state;
a control means for controlling the upstream state transition means and the downstream state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The downstream ball entry section is divided into a first ball entry area (non-V winning area FNV) and a second ball entry area (V winning area FV) in order from the upstream side of the flow path,
When the operation of the upstream side state transition means transitioning the upstream side goal section from the non-goal-winning state to the goal-winning state and then transitioning it to the non-goal-winning state, and the operation of the downstream side state transition means transitioning the downstream side goal section from the non-goal-winning state to the goal-winning state and then transitioning it to the non-goal-winning state are defined as unit operations,
A gaming machine characterized in that the unit operation by the upstream side state transition means and the unit operation by the downstream side state transition means are executed exclusively.

According to Feature αN1, by controlling the timing at which the control means executes the unit operations by the upstream state transition means and the downstream state transition means, it is possible to control the entry area or area into which the game ball enters, such as by having the game ball flowing through the flow path enter only the upstream entry area, or only the first entry area of the downstream entry area, or both the first and second entry areas of the downstream entry area.

[Feature αN2]
A gaming machine according to feature αN1,
The control means
When a predetermined game state is started, the upstream state transition means executes the unit operation before the downstream state transition means executes the unit operation;
A gaming machine characterized in that the time from the end of the unit operation by the upstream state transition means to the start of the unit operation by the downstream state transition means is controlled to be shorter than the time required for a gaming ball to enter an upstream flow path region, which is the region on the flow path corresponding to the upstream entry portion in the non-enterable state, and to exit a first flow path region, which is the region on the flow path corresponding to the first entry region of the downstream entry portion in the non-enterable state.

Feature αN2 prevents a gaming ball from being present in the downstream flow path region, which is the region on the flow path corresponding to the downstream entry portion in a non-enterable state, when a unit operation by the downstream state transition means is initiated, and prevents the gaming ball from unintentionally entering the downstream entry portion upon initiation of the unit operation by the downstream state transition means. For example, when controlling the timing of execution of a unit operation by the upstream state transition means and a unit operation by the downstream state transition means to control gaming balls circulating through the flow path so that they enter only the upstream entry portion, if a unit operation by the downstream state transition means is initiated first, there is a risk that the gaming ball will be present in the downstream flow path region and unintentionally enter the downstream entry portion upon initiation of the unit operation by the downstream state transition means. On the other hand, control according to this feature makes it possible to roughly control the timing at which the gaming ball flows through the upstream flow path region and the downstream flow path region, making it easier to control the entry portion or entry region into which the gaming ball will enter.

[Feature αN3]
A gaming machine according to feature αN1 or feature αN2,
When a first gaming state (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second type jackpot) is started, the control means executes a first operation pattern in which the downstream state transition means executes the unit operation multiple times in succession, and
A gaming machine characterized in that the time from the end of one unit operation in the multiple consecutive unit operations by the downstream state transition means for the first operation pattern to the start of the next unit operation is shorter than the time required for a gaming ball to enter a first flow path area, which is an area on the flow path corresponding to the first entry area of the downstream entry section in the non-entry state, and exit the first flow path area.

According to feature αN3, while the first operation pattern is being executed, almost all game balls that reach the downstream flow path area can be made to enter the first ball entry area of the downstream ball entry section.

[Feature αN4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αN1 to αN3,
When a second gaming state (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a first type jackpot) is started, the control means executes a second operation pattern in which the downstream state transition means executes the unit operation multiple times in succession,
A gaming machine characterized in that the time from the end of one unit operation in the multiple consecutive unit operations by the downstream state transition means for the second operation pattern to the start of the next unit operation includes cases where it is longer than the time required for a gaming ball to enter the first flow path region and exit the first flow path region.

According to feature αN4, while the second operation pattern is being executed, the gaming ball can be made to land in the second ball entry area of the downstream ball entry section.

[Feature αN5]
A gaming machine according to feature αN4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the time from the end of one unit operation in the multiple consecutive unit operations by the downstream state transition means for the second operation pattern to the start of the next unit operation is longer than the time required for a gaming ball to enter the first flow path region and exit the first flow path region, and is shorter than the time required for a gaming ball to enter the downstream flow path region, which is the region on the flow path corresponding to the downstream entry portion in the non-entry state, and exit the downstream flow path region.

Feature αN5 allows game balls to enter the second ball entry area of the downstream ball entry section while the second operation pattern is being executed, and furthermore, allows almost all game balls that reach the downstream flow path area while the second operation pattern is being executed to enter the downstream ball entry section.

<Feature αO group>
The group of features αO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αO1]
A plurality of ball entry areas into which game balls can enter;
a control means for controlling the states of the plurality of ball entry areas;
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means synchronizes the transition of the states of the plurality of ball-entry areas (third embodiment and fourth modification of the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature αO1, the gaming machine synchronizes the state transitions of multiple goal entry areas, simplifying control compared to controlling the state transitions for each goal entry area separately.

[Feature αO2]
A gaming machine according to feature αO1,
A flow path through which game balls flow is provided,
Based on the flow direction of the game balls flowing through the flow path,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged adjacent to each other from upstream to downstream of the flow path.

According to Feature αO2, the multiple ball entry areas are arranged adjacently from upstream to downstream of the flow path. Therefore, when the control means synchronizes the state transitions of the multiple ball entry areas in response to the behavior of game balls circulating through the flow path, it becomes possible to execute control in response to the behavior of a small number of game balls. Specifically, in order for the control means to synchronize the state transitions of the multiple ball entry areas in response to the behavior of game balls circulating through the flow path, it is necessary to grasp the behavior of game balls circulating in the surrounding area of each ball entry area. For example, as a comparative example, if the multiple ball entry areas are arranged at distant locations, in order for the control means to synchronize the state transitions of the multiple ball entry areas in response to the behavior of the circulating game balls, it is necessary to control the surrounding area of each distant ball entry area in response to the behavior of the circulating game balls, which complicates control. In other words, the total area including the surrounding areas of each ball entry area is relatively large, and the number of game balls circulating through that total area is relatively large. This increases the number of game balls whose behavior needs to be grasped, complicating control. On the other hand, because the multiple ball entry areas in this feature are arranged adjacent to each other, the total area including the surrounding areas of each ball entry area is smaller than in the comparative example. This reduces the number of game balls circulating through this total area, thereby reducing the number of game balls whose behavior needs to be understood, simplifying control. Furthermore, according to this feature, the multiple ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, making it easier to understand the behavior of game balls arriving at each ball entry area and further simplifying control. Specifically, because the multiple ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, the direction of game balls arriving at each ball entry area is relatively consistent, and the speed of game balls arriving at each ball entry area also varies little, reducing the variation in the behavior of each game ball arriving at each ball entry area. As a result, it becomes easier to understand the behavior of game balls arriving at each ball entry area, further simplifying control.

[Feature αO3]
A gaming machine according to feature αO1 or feature αO2,
The control means synchronously transitions the plurality of goal areas between a non-goal-entry state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to go in and a goal-entry state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to go in,
The control means defines an operation of transitioning the plurality of goal scoring areas from the non-goal scoring state to the goal scoring state and then transitioning them back to the non-goal scoring state as a unit operation,
When the time required for the game ball to pass through the area corresponding to each of the entry areas in the non-entry state is defined as the entry area passing time,
A gaming machine characterized in that the non-scoring state maintenance time, which is the time from the unit operation executed by the control means to the next unit operation, is set based on the time it takes to pass through each of the multiple scoring areas.

According to feature αO3, the non-scorable state maintenance time is set based on the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of multiple goal zones. Because it is possible to determine the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of multiple goal zones, it is easy to determine and set the non-scorable state maintenance time, and control can be simplified.

[Feature αO4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αO1 to αO3,
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player when a game ball enters each of the plurality of ball entry areas;
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the plurality of ball entry areas (the V entry area FV in the third embodiment) has a different bonus awarded to the player by the bonus awarding means when a gaming ball enters the area than the other ball entry areas.

According to feature αO4, the bonus awarded to the player has a ball entry area that is different from other ball entry areas, so the control means can control the state transition of multiple ball entry areas that are executed synchronously, thereby controlling the bonus awarded to the player.

<Feature αP group>
The group of features αP is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αP1]
A flow path through which game balls circulate;
A first ball entry area provided on the flow path and into which a game ball can enter;
a state transition means for transitioning the state of the first goal area between a non-goal-entry state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the goal area and a goal-entry state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the goal area;
a first ball entry flow path area passage time adjustment means (a convex portion provided on the second opening/closing door in the third embodiment, or a magnetic member provided on the second opening/closing door in variant 2 of the third embodiment) that adjusts the first ball entry flow path area passage time, which is the time required for a game ball to pass through the first ball entry flow path area, which is the area on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entry area, when the first ball entry area is in the non-entry state by the state transition means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αP1, the ease with which a game ball can enter the first ball entry area can be controlled by controlling the timing at which the state transition means transitions the state of the first ball entry area and adjusting the time it takes to pass through the first ball entry flow path area.

[Feature αP2]
A gaming machine according to feature αP1,
When the operation of the state transition means to transition the first goal area from the non-goal-scoring state to the goal-scoring state and then transition to the non-goal-scoring state is defined as a unit operation,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the state transition means has a first operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second type jackpot) which is an operation mode in which multiple unit operations are executed, and in which the time interval between the end of a unit operation and the start of the next unit operation is shorter than the time it takes for the ball to pass through the first ball entry flow path area.

According to feature αP2, while the state transition means is executing the first operating mode, almost all game balls that reach the first ball entry area can be made to enter the first ball entry area.

[Feature αP3]
A gaming machine according to feature αP1 or feature αP2,
When the state transition means defines an operation of transitioning the first goal area, which is in the non-goal-scoring state, to the goal-scoring state and then transitioning it to the non-goal-scoring state as a unit operation,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the state transition means has a second operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a first type jackpot) which is an operation mode in which multiple unit operations are executed, and in which the time interval between the end of a unit operation and the start of the next unit operation is longer than the time it takes for the ball to pass through the first ball entry flow path area.

According to feature αP3, while the state transition means is executing the second operation mode, the proportion of game balls that enter the first entry area can be reduced compared to the first operation mode described above. In other words, a predetermined proportion of game balls that reach the first entry area can be allowed to pass through without entering the first entry area.

[Feature αP4]
A gaming machine according to feature αP3,
a second ball entry area that is provided downstream of the first ball entry area on the flow path based on the flow direction of the game balls flowing through the flow path, and into which the game balls can enter;
the state transition means transitions the first goal area to the non-goal-scoring state and the second goal area to the non-goal-scoring state at the same time, transitions the first goal area to the goal-scoring state and the second goal area to the goal-scoring state at the same time,
A region on the flow path corresponding to the second ball entry region is defined as a second ball entry flow path region;
When the time required for the game ball to pass through the first ball entry flow area and exit the second ball entry flow area is defined as the total ball entry flow area passing time,
The second operating mode provided by the state transition means is characterized in that the time interval between the end of a unit operation and the start of the next unit operation is longer than the first ball entry flow path area passing time and shorter than the total ball entry flow path area passing time.

According to feature αP4, when the state transition means is executing the second operation mode, it is possible to cause almost all game balls that pass through the first ball entry area without entering it to enter the second ball entry area.

[Feature αP5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP4,
the state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes an opening of the first ball entry area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry flow path area passage time adjustment means is a convex member arranged on the flow surface through which gaming balls flow in the opening and closing member when the first ball entry area is in the non-ball entry state.

According to feature αP5, the passage time through the first ball inlet flow path region can be easily adjusted by adjusting the number of convex members placed on the flow surface of the opening/closing member.

[Feature αP6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP5,
the state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes an opening of the first ball entry area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry flow path area passage time adjustment means is a magnetic member arranged on the flow surface through which gaming balls flow in the opening and closing member when the first ball entry area is in the non-ball entry state.

According to feature αP6, the magnetic force exerted by the magnetic material on the gaming balls causes the gaming balls circulating on the circulation surface to move in a unique manner, thereby increasing the entertainment value of the game.

[Feature αP7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP6,
the state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes an opening of the first ball entry area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry flow path area passage time adjustment means is the inclination of the flow surface through which the gaming ball flows in the opening and closing member when the first ball entry area is in the non-entry state.

According to feature αP7, the passage time through the first inlet flow path region can be easily adjusted by adjusting the inclination angle of the flow surface.

<Feature αQ group>
The group of features αQ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αQ1]
A flow path through which game balls circulate;
Based on the flow direction of the game balls flowing through the flow path, an upstream ball entry section (first large prize entry port in the third embodiment) and a downstream ball entry section (second large prize entry port) are provided in order from the upstream side of the flow path,
an upstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the upstream ball entry section between a non-entry state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the game, and a entry state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the game;
a downstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the downstream goal section between the non-goal-entry state and the goal-entry state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The downstream inlet portion is
A gaming machine characterized by having a specific area (V winning area FV) in which the entry of a gaming ball is set as one of the conditions for changing the state of the game to a specific state, and having a predetermined area (non-V winning area FNV) upstream of the specific area that is different from the specific area.

According to Feature αQ1, a predetermined area is located upstream of the specific entry area of the downstream entry section. Therefore, by controlling the timing at which the downstream state transition means transitions the state of the downstream entry section, it is possible to control whether a gaming ball entering the downstream entry section is more likely to enter the specific area. In the case of a typical gaming machine, when a single entry section has two areas, the entry section has a guidance mechanism that guides the gaming ball to control which of the two areas the gaming ball will enter. In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to control the operation of the above-mentioned guidance mechanism in addition to controlling the operation of the state transition means that controls the state of the entry section between a non-enterable state and a enterable state. This complicates control and requires the allocation of memory space to store the program for executing this control. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, the control of whether the gaming ball will enter the predetermined area or the specific area of the downstream ball entry section can be achieved by controlling the operation of the downstream state transition means, which simplifies control compared to the general gaming machine described above and reduces the memory area required to store the program.

[Feature αQ2]
A gaming machine according to feature αQ1,
When the downstream ball entry section is in the non-entry state, the predetermined area and the specific area are both in a state where it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the downstream ball entry section is in the ball entry-enabled state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where it is possible or easy for gaming balls to enter.

According to feature αQ2, by controlling the timing at which the downstream state transition means transitions the state of the downstream entry section, even if the state of the downstream entry section is transitioned to a ball entry possible state at a time when it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the specific area, when the downstream entry section is in a ball entry possible state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where it is possible or easy for a gaming ball to enter, so the player can expect the gaming ball to enter the specific area. More specifically, even if the state of the downstream entry section is transitioned to a ball entry possible state at a time when it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the specific area, or even if the state of the downstream entry section is transitioned to a ball entry possible state at a time when it is easy for a gaming ball to enter the specific area, in either case, when the downstream entry section is in a ball entry possible state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where it is possible or easy for a gaming ball to enter, so the player can expect the gaming ball to enter the specific area.

[Feature αQ3]
A gaming machine according to feature αQ1 or feature αQ2,
an opening of the downstream inlet facing the flow path surface;
the downstream state transition means transitions the state of the downstream ball entry section to a ball non-entry state by closing the downstream ball entry section opening, and transitions the state of the downstream ball entry section to a ball entry state by opening the downstream ball entry section opening,
When the downstream ball entry section is in the non-entry state, a specific area opening, which is an opening through which the game ball enters the specific area, and a predetermined area opening, which is an opening through which the game ball enters the predetermined area, are both in a closed state,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the downstream ball entry section is in the ball entry-enabled state, the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are both in an open state.

According to feature αQ3, when the downstream ball entry opening is closed, both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are closed, and when the downstream ball entry opening is open, both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are open. This makes it easier for a player to visually determine whether both the specific area and the predetermined area are in a state where it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter, or whether both are in a state where it is possible or easy for game balls to enter. Furthermore, by controlling the timing at which the downstream state transition means transitions the state of the downstream ball entry opening, even if the downstream ball entry opening is actually transitioned to an open state at a time when it is difficult for game balls to enter the specific area, both the predetermined area opening and the specific area opening are open when the downstream ball entry opening is open, allowing the player to expect the game ball to enter the specific area. To be more specific, whether the downstream ball entry opening is transitioned to an open state at a time when it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the specific area, or whether the downstream ball entry opening is transitioned to an open state at a time when it is easy for a gaming ball to enter the specific area, in either case, when the downstream ball entry opening is in an open state, both the predetermined area opening and the specific area opening are in an open state, allowing the player to expect the gaming ball to enter the specific area.

[Feature αQ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ3,
The downstream ball entry opening, which is an opening of the downstream ball entry section, faces the flow path surface of the flow path, and is divided into a specific area opening, which is an opening through which the game ball enters the specific area, and a predetermined area opening, which is an opening through which the game ball enters the predetermined area,
The predetermined area opening faces the upstream side of the flow path surface relative to the specific area opening.

According to feature αQ4, the downstream ball entry section opening is divided into a specific area opening and a predetermined area opening, and the predetermined area opening faces the upstream side of the flow path surface relative to the specific area opening. Therefore, the downstream state transition means can control the timing of transitioning the state of the downstream ball entry section in response to the behavior of the game ball flowing along the flow path surface, thereby controlling whether or not to make it easier for a game ball entering the downstream ball entry section to enter the specific area.

<Feature αR group>
The group of features αR is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αR1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the ball entry section between a non-entry state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball entry section, and a ball entry state (open state) in which it is possible or easy to enter the ball entry section;
Discharge means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball entry section;
a control means for controlling the state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising:
a goal-scoring state transition condition is set in the control means, which is a condition under which the state transition means transitions the goal scoring section from the non-goal-scoring state to the goal-scoring state;
The ball entry possible state transition condition includes that no game ball is present in the ball entry portion,
The gaming machine further comprises a discharge delay means (discharge delay means in variant 5 of the third embodiment) that delays the discharge of the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry section by the discharge means.

According to feature αR1, the condition for transitioning to the ball-scoring state is that no game ball is present in the ball-scoring area, and a discharge delay means is provided that delays the discharge of a game ball that has entered the ball-scoring area by the discharge means. Therefore, the time until the ball-scoring state transition condition is met varies depending on the length of time the discharge delay means delays the discharge of the game ball, and therefore the time until the state transition means transitions the ball-scoring area from a non-ball-scoring state to a ball-scoring state varies. In other words, the time until the state transition means transitions the ball-scoring area from a non-ball-scoring state to a ball-scoring state can be made irregular. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the discharge delay means, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Feature αR2]
A gaming machine according to feature αR1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the condition for transitioning to the ball-scoring state includes the elapse of a predetermined time since the state transition means transitioned the ball-scoring section to the non-ball-scoring state.

According to Feature αR2, the condition for transitioning to the score-scoring state includes the elapse of a predetermined time since the state transition means transitioned the score-scoring section to a non-scoring state. Therefore, if the time from the transition of the score-scoring section to the non-scoring state until the predetermined time has elapsed is longer than the time from the transition of the score-scoring section to the non-scoring state until all game balls in the score-scoring section are discharged by the discharge means and no game balls remain in the score-scoring section, then the time for the score-scoring section to transition from the non-scoring state to the score-scoring state is the predetermined time. On the other hand, if the time from the transition of the score-scoring section to the non-scoring state until all game balls in the score-scoring section are discharged by the discharge means and no game balls remain in the score-scoring section due to the function of the discharge delay means is longer than the time from the transition of the score-scoring section to the non-scoring state until the predetermined time has elapsed, then the time for the score-scoring section to transition from the non-scoring state to the score-scoring state depends on the extent to which the discharge delay means delays the discharge of game balls. This makes it possible to make the time it takes for the state transition means to transition the goal area from a non-goal-scoring state to a goal-scoring state more irregular, and through simple control, the goal area's state transition behavior can be made more complex. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the goal area and increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature αR3]
A gaming machine according to feature αR1 or feature αR2,
A flow path through which game balls flow is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the ball entry section comprises a first ball entry area where game balls can enter, and a second ball entry area (V entry area FV) where game balls can enter, which is located downstream on the flow path from the first ball entry area based on the flow direction of game balls flowing through the flow path.

According to feature αR3, the goal area includes a first goal area and a second goal area downstream of the first goal area. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the goal area transitions from a non-goal-entry state to a goal-entry state, a game ball that enters the goal area may enter either the first goal area or the second goal area. Because the time it takes for the state transition means to transition the goal area from a non-goal-entry state to a goal-entry state is irregular, it is difficult for a player to predict whether a game ball that enters the goal area will enter the first goal area or the second goal area. This allows the player to focus their attention on the goal area and creates a sense of tension for the player.

[Feature αR4]
A gaming machine according to feature αR3,
The control unit
A gaming machine characterized by controlling the entry of gaming balls into the second entry area by transitioning the entry area from the non-entry-enabled state to the entry-enabled state when a predetermined time has elapsed since the state transition means transitioned the entry area to the non-entry-enabled state.

According to Feature αR4, a predetermined time can be set to make it more difficult for game balls to enter the second goal area, or a predetermined time can be set to make it easier for game balls to enter the second goal area. On the other hand, when the discharge delay means functions, if the time from when the goal area transitions to a non-goal area due to the function of the discharge delay means until all game balls present in the goal area are discharged by the discharge means and there are no game balls in the goal area is longer than the time from when the goal area transitions to a non-goal area until the predetermined time has elapsed, the time it takes for the goal area to transition from a non-goal area to a goal area depends on the amount of time the discharge delay means delays the discharge of game balls. In other words, there are cases where the control unit can control the entry of game balls into the second goal area, and cases where it cannot. As a result, even if a predetermined time is set to make it difficult for a gaming ball to enter the second goal area, the discharge delay means may function to cause the goal area to transition from a non-goal-entry state to a goal-entry state at a time when it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the second goal area, creating a sense of anticipation and tension for the player.

[Feature αR5]
A gaming machine according to feature αR3 or feature αR4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second ball entry area is an area in which the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry area is set as one of the conditions for changing the state of the game to a specific state.

Feature αR5 can create an even greater sense of anticipation and tension for the player regarding whether or not the game ball will land in the second ball entry area.

<Feature αS group>
The group of features αS is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αS1]
A flow path through which game balls circulate;
A ball entry area provided on the flow path and into which a game ball can enter;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the goal area between a non-goal-entry state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to go in and a goal-entry state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to go in;
A passing prevention means (plate-shaped member MD1 and magnetic member MD2 in the modified example 1 of the third embodiment) that prevents the game ball from passing through the ball-entry area without entering the ball-entry area in the ball-entry possible state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature αS1 includes a passing prevention means, which prevents a game ball from passing through a goal area without scoring a goal, even though the goal area is in a goal-scoring state. If a game ball passes through a goal area without scoring a goal, even though the goal area is in a goal-scoring state, the player will not be awarded a legitimate bonus, which will lower the player's expectations for the game. This feature prevents such occurrences, legitimately awards the player the bonus that should be awarded, and gives the player a sense of expectation and security.

[Feature αS2]
A gaming machine according to feature αS1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the passage suppression means is equipped with a direction correction member (plate-shaped member MD1 in variant example 1 of the third embodiment) that corrects the direction of travel of a gaming ball that is traveling in a direction that passes through the entry area without entering it to a direction that travels toward the entry area.

According to feature αS2, the passage suppression means is equipped with a travel direction correction means, so that, for example, if a gaming ball bounces in a direction different from the goal area due to an external mechanical factor applied to the gaming ball, the travel direction of the gaming ball can be corrected, allowing the gaming ball to enter the goal area.

[Feature αS3]
A gaming machine according to feature αS2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the travel direction correction member is a member provided above an area on the flow path corresponding to the ball entry area.

Feature αS3 makes it possible to prevent a gaming ball traveling along a flow path from floating off the flow path for some reason, causing it to pass through the ball entry area in a floating state. In other words, even if a gaming ball becomes floating in the ball entry area, it can change its direction of travel downward by hitting a component located above the area on the flow path that corresponds to the ball entry area, allowing the gaming ball to enter the ball entry area.

[Feature αS4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αS1 to αS3,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the passage suppression means includes a magnetic member provided upstream of the ball entry area in the flow path.

According to feature αS4, even if a force acting on a gaming ball traveling along the flow path causes it to float away from the flow path due to some factor, the magnetic force exerted on the gaming ball by the magnetic material attached to the flow path surface acts on the gaming ball in a direction toward the flow path surface, preventing the gaming ball from floating away from the flow path. As a result, the gaming ball can be made to enter the ball entry area.

[Feature αS5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αS1 to αS4,
The passage suppression means is provided upstream of the ball entry area in the flow path and includes a buffer member that buffers impact between the game ball and the flow path.

According to feature αS5, even if a force acting on a gaming ball traveling along the flow path causes it to float away from the flow path due to some factor, the force in the direction of floating away from the flow path is buffered by the buffer member, preventing the gaming ball from floating away from the flow path. As a result, the gaming ball can be made to enter the ball entry area.

The inventions of the above feature αM group to feature αS group solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, and simplifying control.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature αT group>
The group of features αT is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αT1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round is provided,
The changing means is
A gaming machine comprising a change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so that the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value (10 points).

Feature αT1 includes a change control means that changes the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold during each game, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the predetermined amount changes until it reaches the threshold. It is also possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player about the game after the predetermined amount reaches the threshold.

[Feature αT2]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment) is provided,
The specific process execution means
The probability of executing the specific process in the game round is higher when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition;
The change control means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so that it reaches the threshold value (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific process execution means executes the specific process.

According to feature αT2, the probability of a specific process being executed in a game turn is higher when the special information corresponding to the game turn satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game turn does not satisfy the specified condition, so by executing the specific process, it is possible to create a great sense of anticipation in the player. Furthermore, when the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the change control means changes the specified amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player each time the specified amount is changed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player in stages by changing the specified amount and executing the specific process.

[Feature αT3]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1 or feature αT2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a reset means that executes a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) that returns the predetermined amount that has changed during a game round to a preset initial value when the game round ends.

Feature αT3 includes a reset means that executes a reset process that returns a predetermined amount that has changed during a game round to a preset initial value when that game round ends, creating a sense of anticipation in the player that the predetermined amount will reach a preset threshold before the game round ends. Furthermore, once a game round has started and the player recognizes that the predetermined amount has begun to change, this makes the player aware of when the game round will end and draws their attention to the changing pattern of the predetermined amount.

[Feature αT4]
A gaming machine according to feature αT3,
The reset means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: in the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), a means for returning the predetermined amount (accumulated points) that has changed during the game round to an initial value at the end of the game round; and in the second case (when the game round is a carryover game round), a means for not returning the predetermined amount (accumulated points) that has changed during the game round to an initial value at the end of the game round (carrying over accumulated points).

According to feature αT4, the predetermined amount may or may not return to its initial value at the end of a round of play. Therefore, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in a round of play, the predetermined amount does not return to its initial value at the end of that round of play but is maintained until the next round of play, giving the player a sense of anticipation that the predetermined amount may reach the threshold value in the next round of play. In other words, a sense of anticipation can be given to the player even at the end of a round of play.

[Feature αT5]
A gaming machine according to feature αT3 or feature αT4,
The reset means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a reset execution control means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process when the first game round ends, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round that is executed after the first game round.

According to feature αT5, whether or not to execute a reset process is determined at the end of the first round of play based on special information corresponding to the second round of play that is executed after the first round of play. This allows the mode of returning or maintaining the predetermined amount to its initial value to be relevant across multiple rounds of play. In other words, a player who recognizes a change in the predetermined amount in the first round of play is not only given a sense of anticipation for the first round of play, but is also given a sense of anticipation for the second round of play, creating new gameplay value.

[Feature αT6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αT3 to αT5,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a reset process execution suggestion means (a function for executing a stage display control process) that suggests, during a specified game round, whether or not the reset means will return the specified amount that has changed during the specified game round to its initial value upon completion of the specified game round.

Feature αT6 suggests during a given game round whether the reset means will return the predetermined amount that has changed during that given game round to its initial value at the end of that given game round. Therefore, the suggestion from the reset process execution suggestion means gives a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount will not return to its initial value at the end of the game round a sense of anticipation that the predetermined amount that has not returned to its initial value may reach the threshold value in the next game round.

<Feature αU group>
The group of features αU is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αU1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the change means;
A resetting means for executing a resetting process (point resetting process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value;
Equipped with
The reset means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for returning the predetermined amount that has changed during a game round to its initial value when the game round ends in the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), and for not returning the predetermined amount that has changed during a game round to its initial value when the game round ends in the second case (when the game round is a carryover game round).

According to feature αU1, the predetermined amount may or may not return to its initial value at the end of a round of play, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of a round of play. Furthermore, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value during a round of play, the predetermined amount does not return to its initial value at the end of that round of play but is maintained until the next round of play, giving the player a sense of anticipation that the predetermined amount may reach the threshold value during the next round of play. In other words, a sense of anticipation can be given to the player even at the end of a round of play.

[Feature αU2]
A gaming machine according to feature αU1,
The reset means
A reset execution control means is provided for determining whether or not to execute the reset process when the first game round ends, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round that is executed after the first game round (the effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature αU2, whether or not to execute a reset process is determined at the end of the first round of play based on special information corresponding to the second round of play that is executed after the first round of play. This allows the pattern of change in the predetermined amount to be related across multiple rounds of play. In other words, a player who recognizes a change in the predetermined amount in the first round of play is not only given a sense of anticipation for the first round of play, but is also given a sense of anticipation for the second round of play, creating new gameplay enjoyment.

[Feature αU3]
A gaming machine according to feature αU1 or feature αU2,
If the predetermined number of games in which the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold value (10 points) is the third game,
The specific process execution means
A specific processing execution control means is provided for determining whether the specific processing (button press effect) is to be executed in the third game round or in a game round to be executed after the third game round, based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round to be executed after the third game round (effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

Feature αU3 determines whether a specific process will be executed in the third play round or in a play round executed after the third play round based on special information corresponding to the fourth play round executed after the third play round. This allows for correlation across multiple play rounds regarding the timing of the execution of a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing of the execution of a specific process, the player can make various inferences regarding the special information corresponding to the third play round and the special information corresponding to play rounds executed after the third play round. For example, even if a specific process is not executed in a play round, the player can make various inferences, such as inferring that the specific process will be executed in the next play round, so there is a possibility that the specific process will not be executed in that play round, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature αU4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU3,
The specific process execution means comprises means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

Feature αU4 executes a specific effect as a specific process, which can draw the player's attention to the effect executed during a game round. Furthermore, the execution of the specific effect can create a sense of anticipation in the player.

[Feature αU5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU4,
Operation receiving means (effect operation button) for receiving input operations from a player is provided,
The specific processing includes processing for starting execution of a preset processing (an effect executed after pressing a button) when the input operation is accepted.

According to feature αU5, the specific processing includes processing that initiates execution of a preset process when an input operation is accepted. Therefore, at the timing when the execution of the specific processing creates a sense of anticipation in the player, the player can be further actively involved in the game through input operations, thereby drawing even more attention to the game and further increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

[Feature αU6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU5,
A gaming machine characterized by having a predetermined amount display means (function to execute point accumulation processing/function to display an image of a pearl on the stage) that displays a display corresponding to the predetermined amount (accumulated points).

Feature αU6 includes a predetermined amount display means that displays a predetermined amount, allowing players to always be aware of the predetermined amount and focus their attention on the game.

[Feature αU7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU6,
A reset process execution suggestion means is provided for suggesting whether or not the reset means should reset the predetermined amount that has changed during a predetermined game round to its initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round (the performance information setting process in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

Feature αU7 suggests during a given game round whether the reset means will return the predetermined amount that has changed during that given game round to its initial value at the end of that given game round. Therefore, the suggestion from the reset process execution suggestion means gives a player who realizes that the predetermined amount will not return to its initial value at the end of the game round a sense of anticipation that the predetermined amount that has not returned to its initial value may reach the threshold value in the next game round.

<Feature αV group>
The group of features αV is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αV1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment);
Equipped with
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing (button press effect), it is provided with a change control means that changes the specified amount so that it reaches a preset threshold value before the specific processing is executed.

According to feature αV1, when the specific process execution means executes a specific process, the change means changes the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player each time the change means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature αV2]
A gaming machine according to feature αV1,
The change means includes a change amount determination means for determining the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round based on special information corresponding to a second game round to be executed after the first game round (the effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature αV2, the predetermined amount to be changed in the first play is determined based on special information corresponding to the second play that is executed after the first play. This allows the predetermined amount to be changed in each play to be relevant across multiple play times. In other words, a player who recognizes the change in the predetermined amount in the first play time is not only given a sense of anticipation for the first play time, but is also given a sense of anticipation for the second play time, creating new gameplay value.

[Feature αV3]
A gaming machine according to feature αV1 or feature αV2,
The change means includes a change timing determination means for determining the timing of changing the predetermined amount in a game round based on special information corresponding to the game round (effect information setting process and effect setting process in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

According to feature αV3, the timing for changing the predetermined amount during a game is determined based on the special information corresponding to that game. This allows the predetermined amount to be changed at a timing that is appropriate for the special information that determines the fluctuation time of that game, as well as various other factors determined by other special information.

[Feature αV4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV3,
A reset means is provided to execute a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) that resets the predetermined amount that has changed during a game to a preset initial value upon completion of the game,
The reset means
A means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process at the end of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round that is executed after the first game round is provided (the effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

Feature αV4 determines whether to execute a reset process at the end of a first round of play based on special information corresponding to a second round of play that is executed after the first round of play. This allows the mode of returning or maintaining a predetermined amount to its initial value to be relevant across multiple rounds of play. In other words, a player who recognizes a change in the predetermined amount in a first round of play is not only given a sense of anticipation for that first round of play, but is also given a sense of anticipation for the second round of play, creating new gameplay value.

[Feature αV5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV4,
A reset means is provided for executing a reset process that resets the predetermined amount that has changed during a game to a preset initial value upon completion of the game;
The reset means
A means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process at the end of a game based on the special information corresponding to the game (the effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Feature αV5 determines whether to execute a reset process at the end of a game session based on special information corresponding to that game session. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether to reset a predetermined amount that has changed during that game session to its initial value, taking into account the special information that determines the fluctuation time of that game session and various other factors determined by special information.

[Feature αV6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV5,
The specific process execution means comprises means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

Feature αV6 executes a specific effect as a specific process, which can draw the player's attention to the effect executed during a game round. Furthermore, the execution of the specific effect can create a sense of anticipation in the player.

[Feature αV7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV6,
Operation receiving means (effect operation button) for receiving input operations from a player is provided,
The specific processing includes an execution start processing that starts the execution of a preset processing (an effect that is executed after a button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

According to feature αV7, the specific processing includes processing that initiates execution of a preset process when an input operation is accepted. Therefore, by creating a sense of anticipation in the player through the execution of the specific processing, the player can be further actively involved in the game through input operations, thereby drawing the player's attention to the game even more and further increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

<Feature αW group>
The group of features αW is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αW1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect) when the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches a preset threshold value (10 points) as a result of the change by the change means;
When the predetermined amount reaches the threshold, a time suggestion means (a function for executing a control process when points are charged) executes a time suggestion process (a timer effect) that suggests the time until the specific process (a button press effect) is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature αW1 includes a time suggestion means that executes a time suggestion process that suggests the time until a specific process is executed when a predetermined amount reaches a threshold. This makes it possible to continuously create a sense of anticipation in the player for the specific process that will be executed after the suggested time has passed, throughout the period from when the time until the specific process is executed is suggested until the specific process is actually executed. Furthermore, since the time suggestion means suggests that the time until the specific process is executed will become shorter as time passes, the player's sense of anticipation can increase as time passes.

[Feature αW2]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1,
When the number of games in which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold is defined as the first number of games,
The time suggestion means (function for executing control processing at the time of point charging)
In the first case, the execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is started in the first game round,
In the second case, the gaming machine is characterized by having a means for not starting execution of the time suggestion processing (timer presentation) in the first game round, but starting execution of the time suggestion processing in a second game round that is executed after the first game round.

According to feature αW2, when a predetermined amount reaches a threshold value in a first play round, the execution of a time suggestion process may begin in the first play round, or may be executed in a second play round that is executed after the first play round. Therefore, by recognizing whether a time suggestion process will be executed in that play round when a predetermined amount reaches a threshold value, the player can enjoy guessing when a specific process will be executed.

[Feature αW3]
A gaming machine according to feature αW2,
In the first case, the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing (button press effect) in the first game round,
The second case is a case in which the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect) in a game round executed after the first game round.

According to feature αW3, if the predetermined amount reaches the threshold and the execution of the time suggestion process is initiated in the first play round, the player is made aware that the specific process will be executed in the first play round, creating a sense of anticipation for the first play round. Furthermore, if the predetermined amount reaches the threshold and the execution of the time suggestion process is not initiated in the first play round, the player is made aware that the specific process will be executed in a play round after the first play round, creating a sense of anticipation for the subsequent play round.

[Feature αW4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW3,
When the number of games in which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold is the third number of games,
The specific process execution means
A gaming machine comprising a specific processing execution control means for determining whether the specific processing will be executed in the third game round or in a game round executed after the third game round, based on the special information corresponding to a fourth game round executed after the third game round.

Feature αW4 allows the timing of a specific process to be associated with multiple gameplay rounds. Therefore, based on the timing of the execution of a time suggestion process that indicates the time until a specific process is executed, the player can predict which game round they can expect, creating new gameplay elements.

[Feature αW5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW4,
The specific process execution means comprises means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

Feature αW5 executes a specific effect as a specific process, which can draw the player's attention to the effect executed during a game round. Furthermore, the execution of the specific effect can create a sense of anticipation in the player.

[Feature αW6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW5,
Operation receiving means (effect operation button) for receiving input operations from a player is provided,
The specific processing includes an execution start processing that starts the execution of a preset processing (an effect that is executed after a button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

According to feature αW6, the specific processing includes processing that initiates execution of a preset process when an input operation is accepted. Therefore, at the timing when the execution of the specific processing creates a sense of anticipation in the player, the player can be actively involved in the game through further input operations, thereby drawing even more attention to the game and further increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

<Feature αX group>
The group of features αX is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αX1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
a first process execution means for executing a first process (a standby effect) when a specific condition is satisfied (in the fourth embodiment, when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated);
a second process execution means for executing a second process (a timer effect) when the specific condition is satisfied (when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more);
Equipped with
When the specific condition is met in the first game,
The first process execution means
When the second processing execution means executes the second processing (timer effect) in a second game round executed after the first game round, the second processing execution means executes the first processing (standby effect) in the first game round,
When the second processing execution means executes the second processing (timer presentation) in the first game round, the first processing (standby presentation) is not executed.

According to feature αX1, if a specific condition is met in a first game round and a second process is executed in a second game round, there is a period of time between the specific condition being met and the second process being executed. In such a case, the first process execution means executes the first process in the first game round, so that even during the period between the specific condition being met and the second process being executed, the player can be made aware that the second process will be executed later, thereby maintaining anticipation for the second process.

[Feature αX2]
A gaming machine according to feature αX1,
a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect) when the specific condition is satisfied (when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more);
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game and the specific processing (button press effect) is executed in the first game, the second processing (timer effect) is executed in the first game,
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific processing (button press effect) is executed in the second game round, the second processing (timer effect) is executed in the second game round.

According to feature αX2, when a specific condition is met in a first game round, the player can predict in which game round the specific process will be executed by recognizing in which game round the second process will be executed. This allows the player to focus on the timing when the second process will be executed, and creates a sense of anticipation in players who recognize the execution of the second process.

[Feature αX3]
A gaming machine according to feature αX2,
The specific processing execution means is provided with a specific processing execution control means that determines whether to execute the specific processing (button press effect) in the first game round or the second game round based on special information corresponding to the second game round.

Feature αX3 determines whether a specific process will be executed in the first or second game round based on special information corresponding to a second game round that is executed after the first game round, thereby creating a relationship across multiple game rounds regarding the timing of the execution of the specific process. This allows a player who recognizes the execution of the second process to infer the timing at which the specific process will be executed, and based on the inferred timing at which the specific process will be executed, allows the player to infer whether the special information for each game round satisfies a specified condition. This allows the player to infer whether the special information for each game round satisfies a specified condition based on various factors, maintaining the player's sense of anticipation.

[Feature αX4]
A gaming machine according to feature αX2 or feature αX3,
The second process (timer effect) is a process that indicates the time until the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific condition is met (when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated).

Feature αX4 makes it possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player about the specific process that will be executed after the suggested time has elapsed, during the period from when the execution of the second process suggests the time until the specific process is executed until the specific process is actually executed. Furthermore, because it is suggested that the time until the specific process is executed will become shorter as time passes, the player's sense of anticipation can increase as time passes.

[Feature αX5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αX1 to αX4,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the first process (standby effect) is a process that suggests that the second process (timer effect) will be executed.

According to feature αX5, the first process is a process that suggests that the second process will be executed, so that a player who recognizes that the first process has been executed can be given a sense of anticipation for the execution of the second process.

<Feature αY group>
The group of features αY is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αY1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round is provided,
The changing means is
When the first processing (the predetermined effect in the first modification of the fourth embodiment) is executed in the game, after the first processing of the game is executed, the predetermined amount may be changed or may not be changed.
When a second process (a specific presentation in variant 1 of the fourth embodiment) is executed in the game, the predetermined amount is always changed after the second process in the game is executed.

According to feature αY1, when the second process is executed in a game round, a predetermined amount will always change in that game round. This can create a sense of anticipation for the execution of the second process for players hoping for a change of the predetermined amount, and can attract their attention to the game. Furthermore, when the second process is executed, it can create a sense of excitement for players hoping for a change of the predetermined amount, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

[Feature αY2]
A gaming machine according to feature αY1,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect) is provided,
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect), it is provided with a change control means that changes the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so that it reaches a preset threshold value (10 points) before the specific process is executed.

According to feature αY2, when the specific process execution means executes a specific process, the change means changes the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player each time the change means changes the predetermined amount. Furthermore, when the second process is executed, the predetermined amount always changes in that game round, creating a sense of anticipation in the player who recognizes that the second process has been executed for the specific process to be executed.

[Feature αY3]
The gaming machine according to feature αY2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the specific processing (button press effect) being executed in a game round is higher when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the specified condition.

According to feature αY3, by executing a specific process, it is possible to create a great sense of anticipation for the player. Therefore, by executing the second process, a change in a predetermined amount, and the specific process, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the player in stages.

[Feature αY4]
A gaming machine according to feature αY3,
The first process is a predetermined effect (the predetermined effect in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment),
The gaming machine, wherein the second processing is a predetermined specific effect (the specific effect in the first variant of the fourth embodiment).

Feature αY4 can draw the player's attention to the effects that are executed during a game. When a specific effect is executed, it can create a great sense of anticipation and excitement in the player.

[Feature αY5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αY2 to αY4,
Operation receiving means (effect operation button) for receiving input operations from a player is provided,
The specific processing includes an execution start processing that starts the execution of a preset processing (an effect that is executed after a button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

According to feature αY5, the specific processing includes processing that initiates execution of a preset process when an input operation is accepted. Therefore, at the timing when the execution of the specific processing creates a sense of anticipation in the player, the player can be actively involved in the game through further input operations, thereby drawing even more attention to the game and further increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

<Feature αZ group>
The group of features αZ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αZ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for executing a predetermined processing (a point awarding effect in the fourth embodiment) in the game round is provided,
The predetermined processing execution means
When the mode of the game round is the first mode, in a game round executed after the game round, there is a case where the predetermined processing is executed or a case where the predetermined processing is not executed,
When the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in a game round executed after the game round.

According to feature αZ1, if the mode of a game round is the second mode, the specified processing will always be executed in the game round that follows that game round, which creates anticipation for players who desire the specified processing regarding the mode of that game round and allows them to focus on the game in that game round. Furthermore, if the mode of a game round is the second mode, it is possible to create anticipation for players who desire the specified processing to be executed in the game round that follows that game round, which creates a sense of excitement, and thereby increases the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature αZ2]
A gaming machine according to feature αZ1,
The predetermined processing execution means
A change means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round is provided,
The changing means (a function for executing the point awarding effect in the second modification of the fourth embodiment)
When the mode of the game round is the first mode, in a game round executed after the game round, there is a case where the predetermined amount is changed, and a case where the predetermined amount is not changed,
When the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount is always changed in a game round executed after the current game round.

According to feature αZ2, if the mode of a game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount will always change in the game round that follows that game round. This can create a sense of anticipation for the mode of that game round for players who desire a change of the predetermined amount and can draw their attention to the game in that game round. Furthermore, if the mode of a game round is the second mode, it can create a sense of anticipation for players who desire a change of the predetermined amount that the predetermined amount will change in the game round that follows that game round, and can create a sense of excitement, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature αZ3]
A gaming machine according to feature αZ2,
A resetting means is provided to perform a resetting process (point resetting process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value,
The first aspect of the game is that the reset means resets the predetermined amount to an initial value upon completion of the game,
The second aspect of the game round is an aspect in which the reset means does not reset the predetermined amount to an initial value when the game round ends.

According to feature αZ3, if the reset means does not reset the predetermined amount to its initial value at the end of a game round, the predetermined amount will always change in subsequent game rounds. This makes it possible to create a sense of anticipation for players hoping for a change in the predetermined amount that the end of that game round will not reset the predetermined amount to its initial value. This allows players to focus on the game even at the end of that game round. Furthermore, if the predetermined amount does not return to its initial value at the end of a game round, it is possible to create an anticipation for players hoping for a change in the predetermined amount that will occur in subsequent game rounds, as well as create a sense of excitement, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature αZ4]
A gaming machine according to feature αZ2 or feature αZ3,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect) is provided,
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing, it is provided with a change control means that changes the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold value before the specific processing is executed.

According to feature αZ4, when the specific process execution means executes a specific process, the change means changes the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player each time the change means changes the predetermined amount. Furthermore, if the predetermined amount does not return to its initial value at the end of a game round, the predetermined amount will always change in the game round executed after that game round. This creates anticipation in the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount did not return to its initial value at the end of that game round for the specific process to be executed.

[Feature αZ5]
A gaming machine according to feature αZ4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the specific processing (button press effect) being executed in a game round is higher when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the specified condition.

Feature αZ5 allows the player to feel a great sense of anticipation by executing a specific process. Therefore, the presence or absence of a reset process, the change in a predetermined amount, and the execution of a specific process can gradually increase the player's sense of anticipation.

[Feature αZ6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αZ3 to αZ5,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a reset process execution suggestion means (a function for executing a stage display control process) that suggests, during a specified game round, whether or not the reset means will return the specified amount that has changed during the specified game round to its initial value upon completion of the specified game round.

Feature αZ6 suggests, during a given game round, whether the reset means will return the predetermined amount that has changed during that given game round to its initial value at the end of that given game round. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount will not return to its initial value at the end of a game round, due to the suggestion from the reset process execution suggestion means, can be given a sense of expectation that the predetermined amount will definitely change in a game round after that given game round, and that the predetermined amount that has not returned to its initial value may reach the threshold value in a game round after that given game round.

[Feature αZ7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αZ4 to αZ6,
Operation receiving means (effect operation button) for receiving input operations from a player is provided,
The specific processing includes an execution start processing that starts the execution of a preset processing (an effect that is executed after a button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

According to feature αZ7, the specific processing includes processing that initiates execution of a preset process when an input operation is accepted. Therefore, at the timing when the execution of the specific processing creates a sense of anticipation in the player, the player can be further actively involved in the game through input operations, thereby drawing even more attention to the game and further increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

<Characteristic βA group>
The feature group βA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A predetermined processing execution means for executing a predetermined processing in the game;
a predetermined effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect (point awarding effect) before the predetermined process execution means executes the predetermined process;
Equipped with
The predetermined processing execution means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a non-execution means for executing a non-execution process (a point-granting effect in which the awarded points are 0) in which the predetermined processing is not executed even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect.

According to feature βA1, the predetermined processing execution means is equipped with a non-execution means that executes a non-execution process that does not execute the predetermined processing even when the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect. This makes it possible for a player who recognizes that the predetermined effect has been executed to expect that the non-execution process will not be executed. Furthermore, if the non-execution process is not executed, the player can be given a sense of elation, and if the non-execution process is executed, the player will be disappointed. In other words, the execution or non-execution of the non-execution process can add variety to the player's expectations, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature βA2]
A gaming machine according to feature βA1,
The predetermined processing execution means
As the predetermined processing, a change means is provided for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round,
The non-execution means is
A gaming machine comprising a non-change means for executing a non-change process (a point awarding effect in which the awarded points are 0) that does not change the predetermined amount even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect.

According to feature βA2, even when the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect, the device is equipped with a no-change means that executes a no-change process that does not change a predetermined amount. This makes it possible for a player who recognizes that the predetermined effect has been executed to expect that the no-change process will not be executed. Furthermore, if the no-change process is not executed, the player can be given a sense of elation, and if the no-change process is executed, the player will be disappointed. In other words, the execution or non-execution of the no-change process can add variety to the player's expectations, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature βA3]
A gaming machine according to feature βA2,
A reset means is provided to execute a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) that resets the predetermined amount that has changed during a game to a preset initial value upon completion of the game,
An upper limit is set on the number of times that the no-change means executes the no-change process (point awarding effect in which the awarded points are 0) during the period from the start of a game round to the time that the reset means executes the reset process (variation 3 in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βA3, an upper limit is set on the number of times the no-change means executes the no-change process during the period from the start of a game round until the reset means executes the reset process. This allows a player who recognizes that the no-change process has been executed the maximum number of times to feel a strong sense of anticipation that a specified effect will be executed. This is because, if the no-change process has been executed the maximum number of times, the specified amount will always change when the specified effect is executed thereafter. Therefore, even when the no-change process is executed, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that the number of executions will reach the maximum. In other words, when the specified effect is executed, the specified amount changes if the no-change process is not executed, which gives the player a sense of excitement. Furthermore, even when the no-change process is executed, the player can feel a sense of anticipation (anticipation that the number of executions will reach the maximum). As a result, the player's sense of anticipation can be increased in both cases, when the no-change process is not executed and when the no-change process is executed.

[Feature βA4]
A gaming machine according to feature βA2 or feature βA3,
a specific processing execution means for executing a specific processing;
The specific process execution means
The probability of executing the specific process in the game round is higher when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition;
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing, it is provided with a change control means that changes the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold value before the specific processing is executed.

According to Feature βA4, when the specific process execution means executes a specific process, the change means includes change control means that changes the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player each time the change means changes the predetermined amount. Furthermore, by executing a specific process, an even greater sense of anticipation can be created in the player. Therefore, a sense of anticipation can be created in the player in stages depending on the specified presentation, the presence or absence of a no-change process, the number of times the no-change process is executed, the change in the predetermined amount, and the execution of a specific process.

[Feature βA5]
A gaming machine according to feature βA3 or feature βA4,
The reset means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for returning the predetermined amount that has changed during a game round to its initial value when the game round ends in the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), and for not returning the predetermined amount that has changed during a game round to its initial value when the game round ends in the second case (when the game round is a carryover game round).

According to feature βA5, the predetermined amount may or may not return to its initial value at the end of a round of play. Therefore, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in a round of play, the predetermined amount does not return to its initial value at the end of that round of play but is maintained until the next round of play, giving the player hope that the predetermined amount will reach the threshold value in the next round of play. In other words, a sense of anticipation can be created in the player even at the end of a round of play.

<Characteristic βB group>
The feature group βB is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
a first specific process execution means for executing a first specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount has reached a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the change means;
A second specific process execution means for executing a second specific process (an unfilled effect in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second specific processing (unfilled effect) is executed, the expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round will satisfy the specified condition is higher when the amount of change (accumulated points) from the initial value of the specified amount before the second specific processing is executed is a second amount of change that is larger than the first amount of change than when the amount of change is a first amount of change.

According to feature βB1, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold and the first specific process is not executed, if the second specific process is executed, the greater the change in the predetermined amount from its initial value, the higher the likelihood that the special information will satisfy the predetermined condition, which can create a sense of anticipation in the player. In other words, if the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold and the first specific process is not executed, and the change in the predetermined amount from its initial value is relatively large, the player can be created to anticipate that the second specific process will be executed.

[Feature βB2]
A gaming machine according to feature βB1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first specific process (button press effect) is more likely to be executed when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the specified condition.

Feature βB2 creates a strong sense of anticipation in a player who recognizes that the first specific process has been executed, that the special information corresponding to the game will satisfy a predetermined condition. Furthermore, because the first specific process is executed when a predetermined amount reaches a threshold, a sense of anticipation can be created in the player each time the change means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature βB3]
A gaming machine according to feature βB1 or feature βB2,
The second specific process (unfilled effect) varies in content depending on the predetermined amount (accumulated points) before the second specific process is executed (variation 4 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With feature βB3, the content of the second specific process varies depending on the predetermined amount before the second specific process is executed. This allows the player to focus on the content of the second specific process regardless of the predetermined amount, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature βB4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βB1 to βB3,
A third specific processing execution means is provided for executing a third specific processing (unfilled development effect in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment) after the second specific processing (unfilled effect) is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game round, when the third specific process (unfilled development effect) is executed, there is a higher expectation that the special information corresponding to that game round will satisfy the specified condition than when the first specific process (button press effect) is executed.

According to feature βB4, when the third specific process is executed, there is a higher expectation that the special information corresponding to that game round will satisfy the specified condition than when the first specific process is executed. Therefore, even if the specified amount does not reach the preset threshold and the first specific process is not executed, when the second specific process is executed, the player can be given a strong sense of anticipation that the third specific process will be executed thereafter. Furthermore, when the third specific process is executed, there is a higher expectation that the special information corresponding to that game round will satisfy the specified condition than when the first specific process is executed, so a player who recognizes that the third specific process has been executed can be given an even stronger sense of anticipation. In summary, when the specified amount reaches the threshold, the first specific process is executed, creating a sense of anticipation in the player. Even if the specified amount does not reach the threshold, the player can be given a sense of anticipation that the second specific process will be executed. Furthermore, when the second specific process is executed, a player can be given a strong sense of anticipation that the third specific process will be executed. This gives players a sense of anticipation no matter what the game situation is.

<Characteristic βC group>
The group of features βC is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
a game number display means for displaying a game number display which is a display showing one game number that is on hold or being executed;
A display mode change means for executing a display mode change process for changing the display mode of the game number display being displayed (a function for executing a process for changing the display mode of the game number display in the modified example 5 of the fourth embodiment);
A predetermined processing execution means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for executing a predetermined processing (a point awarding effect in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
Equipped with
a timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and a timing at which the predetermined process executing means executes the predetermined process, the timing having a temporal correlation;

Feature βC1 allows for a synergistic increase in the player's sense of anticipation by correlating the timing of changes in the display mode of the game number display with the execution of a specified process.

[Feature βC2]
A gaming machine according to feature βC1,
The predetermined processing execution means
A change means is provided for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) during a game (variation example 5 in the fourth embodiment),
a timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and a timing at which the changing means changes the predetermined amount have a temporal correlation.

Feature βC2 allows for a synergistic increase in the player's sense of anticipation by correlating the timing of changes in the display mode of the game number display with changes in a predetermined amount.

[Feature βC3]
A gaming machine according to feature βC2,
The changing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode changing means changes the predetermined amount within a predetermined time after executing the display mode changing process.

Feature βC3 allows a player who has become more excited after noticing that the display mode of the number of plays has changed to also be made aware that a specified amount has changed within a specified time, thereby creating an even stronger sense of anticipation and excitement.

[Feature βC4]
A gaming machine according to feature βC2,
a timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and a timing at which the changing means changes the predetermined amount are simultaneous.

Feature βC4 allows the player to simultaneously recognize the change in the display mode of the game number display and the change in the specified amount, thereby synergistically increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

[Feature βC5]
A gaming machine according to feature βC2,
The display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process within a predetermined time after the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

Feature βC5 allows a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount and whose sense of anticipation has increased to recognize that the display mode of the number of plays has changed within a predetermined time, thereby creating an even stronger sense of anticipation and excitement.

[Feature βC6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βC2 to βC5,
The display mode of the game number display after being changed by the display mode changing means and the predetermined amount of change by the changing means have a correlation (Modification 5 in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

Feature βC6 creates a correlation between the display mode of the game number display after the display mode change means has changed it and the predetermined amount of change made by the change means. This gives the player an even stronger sense of anticipation and superiority when the display mode of the game number display after the display mode change means has changed it meets the player's expectations, and when the predetermined amount of change made by the change means is large.

[Feature βC7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βC2 to βC6,
The display mode changing means
When the special information corresponding to the game number satisfies the predetermined condition, there is a higher probability that the display mode of the game number display will be changed to the second display mode than that of the game number display will be changed to the first display mode;
When the display mode changing means changes the game number display to the first display mode, the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means is set as a first change amount;
When the display mode changing means changes the game number display to the second display mode, the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means is set to a second change amount,
The average value of the second change amount is greater than the average value of the first change amount (Modification 5 of the Fourth Embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βC7, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, there is a high probability that the display mode of the game number display will be changed to the second display mode. Furthermore, when the display mode changing means changes the game number display to the second display mode, the change is often greater by the predetermined amount than when it changes to the first display mode. Therefore, by executing the change in the display mode of the game number display and the change in the predetermined amount in a timing that is correlated, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's anticipation that the special information will satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature βD group>
The group of features βD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
A change mode information display means for displaying change mode information, which is information about the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed (a function for displaying an image of a pearl on the stage St indicating accumulated points in the modified example 13 of the fourth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature βD1 includes a change mode information display means for displaying change mode information, which is information about the mode of change of a predetermined amount that has already been changed. This allows the player to easily understand how the predetermined amount has changed, prompting the player to make various guesses based on the change mode information, and creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

[Feature βD2]
A gaming machine according to feature βD1,
the changing means includes means for changing a predetermined amount at a plurality of timings,
The change mode information display means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for displaying the change mode information in a manner that enables the amount of change of the predetermined amount made by the change means at each timing to be identified (a function for displaying an image of a pearl on stage St indicating accumulated points in variant example 13 of the fourth embodiment).

Feature βD2 displays the change mode information in a manner that allows the amount of change made by the change means at each timing to be identified. This makes it possible to encourage a player who recognizes the change mode information to, for example, try to find a pattern in the amount of change made at each timing up to now, or to guess the amount of change that will be made at the next timing onwards, thereby providing the player with new enjoyment based on the change mode information.

[Feature βD3]
A gaming machine according to feature βD1 or feature βD2,
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for determining the manner of change of the predetermined amount based on special information corresponding to the game round (a function for determining a point awarding scenario based on a presentation scenario in variant 12 of the fourth embodiment).

Feature βD3 determines the manner in which a predetermined amount changes based on special information corresponding to a play session, thereby creating a sense of anticipation for the special information corresponding to that play session in players who recognize change mode information, which is information about the manner in which a predetermined amount has already changed.

[Feature βD4]
A gaming machine according to feature βD3,
A performance determination means is provided for determining a performance to be executed in a game round based on special information corresponding to the game round,
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for determining the manner of change of the predetermined amount (point awarding scenario in variant 12 of the fourth embodiment) based on the determined presentation (presentation scenario in variant 12 of the fourth embodiment).

Feature βD4 determines the effect to be executed in a given game round based on special information corresponding to that round, and then determines the manner in which the predetermined amount of change will occur based on the effect that was determined. This allows a player who recognizes the change mode information, which is information about the manner in which the predetermined amount of change has already occurred, to make various guesses about the content of the effect that will be executed later in that game round, creating a sense of anticipation based on the change mode information.

<Feature βE group>
The group of features βE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (a point award suggestion effect in Modification 14 of the fourth embodiment) which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed;
a second effect execution means for executing a second effect (a point awarding execution effect in Modification 14 of the fourth embodiment) which is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed after the first effect is executed;
Equipped with
The second performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing the second effect once after the first effect has been executed once in the first case, and for executing the second effect N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2) times after the first effect has been executed once in the second case.

According to feature βE1, the first effect suggests that a predetermined amount will change, creating a sense of anticipation for a player who recognizes the first effect that the predetermined amount may change. The second effect indicates that a predetermined amount will change, creating a sense of superiority and satisfaction for a player who recognizes the second effect, allowing the player to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, thereby creating a sense of superiority and satisfaction. Therefore, if the second effect is executed N times after the first effect is executed once, the player can recognize that the predetermined amount has changed N times since the first effect was executed once. As a result, a player who recognizes the first effect can create an expectation of how many times the predetermined amount will change thereafter. Furthermore, if the second effect is executed N times after the first effect is executed once, a sense of surprise and intrigue can be created for a player who recognizes that the first effect has been executed and who assumed that the second effect would be executed once afterwards.

[Feature βE2]
A gaming machine according to feature βE1,
the changing means includes a change amount information acquiring means for acquiring change amount information which is information corresponding to the change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed;
The second performance execution means
In the first case, after the first effect is executed once, the second effect is executed once, which indicates that the predetermined amount is changed by a change amount corresponding to the change amount information;
In the second case, the change amount corresponding to the change amount information is divided into N parts, and after the first effect is executed once, the second effect is executed N times, which indicates that the predetermined amount is changed by a divided change amount, which is one of the N divided change amounts (variation 14 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βE2, in both the first and second cases, it is sufficient to acquire change amount information corresponding to the first effect being executed. Therefore, even when the second effect is executed N times, as in the second case, the process up to acquiring change amount information is the same as in the first case, simplifying the process. Furthermore, the change amount information can be set without distinguishing between when the information is used for the first case and when it is used for the second case, simplifying the setting of change amount information.

[Feature βE3]
A gaming machine according to feature βE1,
The change means includes second performance change amount information acquisition means for acquiring second performance change amount information, which is information corresponding to a predetermined amount of change indicating a change to be made in one second performance;
The second performance execution means
In the first case, one piece of second effect change amount information is acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, the second effect is executed once, which indicates that the predetermined amount is changed by a change amount corresponding to the acquired second effect change amount information;
In the second case, N pieces of second effect change amount information are acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, the second effect, which indicates that the predetermined amount is changed by the change amount corresponding to each of the acquired N pieces of second effect change amount information, is executed N times corresponding to each of the acquired N pieces of second effect change amount information (variation 14 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βE3, in the second case, it is sufficient to acquire the number of second effect change amount information corresponding to the number of second effect executions to be performed. This simplifies the processing, for example, by eliminating the need to perform a process such as dividing the change amount corresponding to one acquired piece of second effect change amount information into N pieces according to the number of second effect executions.

[Feature βE4]
A gaming machine according to feature βE1 or feature βE2,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment) is provided,
The specific process execution means
The probability of executing the specific process in the game round is higher when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition;
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so that it reaches a preset threshold value (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific process execution means executes the specific process.

According to feature βE4, the probability of a specific process being executed in a game turn is higher when the special information corresponding to the game turn satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game turn does not satisfy the specified condition, so by executing the specific process, it is possible to create a great sense of anticipation in the player. Furthermore, when the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the change means changes the specified amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player every time the specified amount is changed. In other words, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player every time the second effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player gradually by changing the specified amount (executing the second effect) and executing the specific process.

<Feature βF group>
The feature group βF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (the first effect in the tenth modification of the fourth embodiment) which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed;
a second effect execution means for executing a second effect (the second effect in the tenth modification of the fourth embodiment) which is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed after the first effect is executed;
Equipped with
The first performance execution means
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in a second game which is a game executed after the first game,
a means for starting, in the first game round, the first effect corresponding to the change of the predetermined amount by the change means in the second game round;
a means for starting, in the second game round, the first effect corresponding to the change of the predetermined amount by the change means in the second game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βF1, the first effect suggests that a predetermined amount will be changed, creating a sense of anticipation in a player who recognizes the first effect that the predetermined amount may change. The second effect indicates that a predetermined amount will be changed, creating a sense of superiority and satisfaction in a player who recognizes the second effect, making the player realize that the predetermined amount has changed. Furthermore, the first effect, which corresponds to the change means changing the predetermined amount in the second play round, may be initiated in the first play round or executed in the second play round. In other words, when the first effect is executed in a predetermined play round, the predetermined amount may change in that play round or in a play round executed after that play round. This allows a player who recognizes that the first effect has been executed to guess which of these two cases is occurring, creating a sense of anticipation.

[Feature βF2]
A gaming machine according to feature βF1,
The first performance execution means
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in the second game round,
a means for notifying, in the first game round, the amount of change of the predetermined amount that is changed by the changing means in the second game round;
a means for notifying the amount of change of the predetermined amount that is changed by the changing means in the second game round;
(Modification 10 of the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βF2, when a predetermined amount is changed in a second play round, the predetermined amount to be changed in the second play round may be announced in the first play round, or the predetermined amount to be changed in the second play round may be announced in the second play round. In other words, when a predetermined amount of change is announced in a predetermined play round, the predetermined amount corresponding to the announced amount of change may change in that predetermined play round, or the predetermined amount corresponding to the announced amount of change may change in a play round executed after that predetermined play round. This allows a player who recognizes that a predetermined amount of change has been announced to guess which of these cases is occurring, building a sense of anticipation.

[Feature βF3]
A gaming machine according to feature βF1 or feature βF2,
a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the change means;
A resetting means for executing a resetting process (point resetting process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value;
Equipped with
The reset means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for returning the predetermined amount that has changed during a game round to its initial value when the game round ends in the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), and for not returning the predetermined amount that has changed during a game round to its initial value when the game round ends in the second case (when the game round is a carryover game round).

Feature βF3 allows the predetermined amount to either return to its initial value at the end of a game round or not, thereby drawing the player's attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. Furthermore, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value during a game round, the predetermined amount does not return to its initial value at the end of that game round but is maintained until the next game round, giving the player a sense of anticipation that the predetermined amount may reach the threshold value during the next game round. Therefore, when the first effect is executed using feature βF1, the predetermined amount may change during that game round or may change during a game round executed after that. Furthermore, feature βF3 allows the predetermined amount to change, and may or may not return to its initial value at the end of a game round, giving the player a variety of senses of anticipation as the game round transitions.

<Characteristic βG group>
The group of features βG is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round is provided,
the effect execution means includes a change effect execution means for executing, when the change means changes a predetermined amount, a change effect (point award effect) which is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount has changed;
The change effect execution means is provided with a means for determining the mode of the change effect (point awarding effect in variant example 11 of the fourth embodiment) based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the change means changes the specified amount.

According to feature βG1, the change effect execution means determines the type of change effect based on special information corresponding to the game round in which the change means changes the specified amount, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the type of change effect being executed. Furthermore, once a player recognizes that a change effect has been executed, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the game round in which the specified amount will change.

[Feature βG2]
A gaming machine according to feature βG1,
The performance execution means
A game time presentation determination means is provided for determining a game time presentation (presentation scenario in the modified example 11 of the fourth embodiment) that is a presentation to be executed in the game time based on the special information corresponding to the game time;
The change effect execution means is provided with a means for determining the mode of the change effect (point awarding effect in variant 11 of the fourth embodiment) based on the content of the game play effect (effect scenario in variant 11 of the fourth embodiment).

According to feature βG2, the change effect execution means determines the type of change effect based on the content of the game round effect. This allows a player who recognizes that a change effect has been executed to guess the content of the game round effect that will be executed subsequently based on the type of change effect, creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

[Feature βG3]
A gaming machine according to feature βG2,
The change effect execution means
In the case where the game presentation includes a specific presentation and the change means changes the predetermined amount before the specific presentation is executed, the game device is provided with a means for executing the change presentation in a specific manner, which indicates that the predetermined amount has changed (variation 11 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

According to Feature βG3, when a specific effect is included in the game round effects and the change means changes a predetermined amount before the specific effect is executed, the change effect execution means executes a change effect indicating that the predetermined amount will change in a specific manner, thereby allowing the player to consider the relationship between the manner of each executed change effect and the content of the game round effect executed thereafter, and each time a change effect is executed, the player can guess the content of the game round effect to be executed thereafter. Furthermore, based on the content of the game round effect guessed, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for special information corresponding to that game round.

<Characteristic βH group>
The group of features βH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βH1]
a predetermined amount display means for displaying a predetermined amount;
a calculation suggestion effect execution means for executing a calculation suggestion effect, which is an effect of a mode suggesting that a calculation process will be executed on the displayed predetermined amount;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation suggestion effect execution means
A calculation processing mode change effect execution means is provided for executing a calculation processing mode change effect, which is an effect that changes, as one of the calculation suggestion effects, from one of a mode suggesting that an addition process will be performed on the displayed predetermined amount or a mode suggesting that a multiplication process will be performed on the displayed predetermined amount to the other of a mode suggesting that an addition process will be performed on the displayed predetermined amount or a mode suggesting that a multiplication process will be performed on the displayed predetermined amount (variation example 15 in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βH1, by changing the mode of the calculation suggestion presentation, it is possible to make the player realize that the calculation method performed for the displayed predetermined amount has changed, adding an element of surprise. Furthermore, since the new predetermined amount after the calculation process is performed can differ significantly depending on the calculation method performed for the predetermined amount, changing the mode of the calculation suggestion presentation can create a sense of tension for the player and add a tone to the player's anticipation.

[Feature βH2]
A gaming machine according to feature βH1,
the mode indicating that an addition process will be performed on the displayed predetermined amount is an additive symbol display mode in which a “+” arithmetic symbol indicating addition is displayed;
the aspect indicating that a multiplication process will be performed on the displayed predetermined amount is a multiplication symbol display aspect in which an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication is displayed;
The calculation processing mode change effect execution means
As the effect of changing the arithmetic processing mode, a means for rotating either the displayed arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition or the arithmetic symbol "×" indicating multiplication to change the display to the other of the arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition or the arithmetic symbol "×" indicating multiplication is provided (Modification 15 in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

Feature βH2 allows for the meaning of nearly identical line drawing symbols, such as "+" and "x," to be significantly changed by rotating them. This creates a great sense of tension for the player, despite the simple process, and adds a sense of excitement to the player's expectations.

[Feature βH3]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature βH1 and feature βH2,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment);
Equipped with
The specific process execution means
The probability of executing the specific process in the game round is higher when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition;
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so that it reaches a preset threshold value (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific process execution means executes the specific process.

According to feature βH3, the probability of a specific process being executed in a game turn is higher when the special information corresponding to the game turn satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game turn does not satisfy the specified condition, so executing the specific process can create a great sense of anticipation in the player. Furthermore, when the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the change means changes the specified amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed, so that a sense of anticipation can be created in the player each time the specified amount is changed. This can further increase the player's sense of tension as the form of the calculation suggestion presentation changes, and can create a great sense of excitement in the player's sense of anticipation for the game when the form of the calculation suggestion presentation is changed.

<Characteristic βI group>
The feature βI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βI1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
a predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount;
a multiplication mode effect execution means for executing a multiplication mode effect which is an effect of a mode suggesting that a multiplication process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount before the predetermined amount changes;
(Modification 15 of the fourth embodiment),
The predetermined amount display means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for displaying a multiplication result amount, which is the amount resulting from multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount when the multiplication mode effect execution means executes the multiplication mode effect.

Feature βI1 includes a multiplication mode effect execution means for executing a multiplication mode effect, which gives players who recognize the execution of a multiplication mode effect a sense of anticipation for the value that will be multiplied by a predetermined amount, and draws their attention to the multiplication mode effect.

[Feature βI2]
A gaming machine according to feature βI1,
The multiplication mode effect execution means
A means for controlling the mode of the multiplication mode effect to be executed in accordance with the magnitude of the value by which the displayed predetermined amount is multiplied (Modification 15 of the fourth embodiment) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

According to feature βI2, the multiplication effect execution means controls the mode of the multiplication effect to be executed depending on the magnitude of the value by which the displayed predetermined amount is multiplied, thereby drawing attention to the mode of the multiplication effect.

[Feature βI3]
A gaming machine according to feature βI1 or feature βI2,
The predetermined amount display means
The fourth embodiment further includes a means for displaying, when the multiplication effect execution means executes the multiplication effect, a quantity greater than the multiplication result quantity, which is the quantity obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined quantity, as a new predetermined quantity (Modification 15 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βI3, when the multiplication mode effect execution means executes the multiplication mode effect, a new predetermined amount is displayed that is greater than the multiplication result amount, which is the amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount. This gives the player a sense of surprise and happiness when they recognize the new predetermined amount that is greater than the multiplication result amount.

[Feature βI4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βI1 to βI3, further comprising: an addition mode effect execution means for executing an addition mode effect, which is an effect of a mode suggesting that an addition process will be executed on the displayed predetermined amount, before the predetermined amount changes;
The predetermined amount display means
The fourth embodiment further includes a means for displaying an addition result amount, which is the amount resulting from adding the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount when the addition effect execution means executes the addition effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Feature βI4 includes an addition mode effect execution means, which gives the player a sense of urgency and suspense as to whether an addition mode effect or a multiplication mode effect will be executed.

[Feature βI5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βI1 to βI4,
an addition mode effect execution means for executing an addition mode effect which is an effect of a mode suggesting that an addition process will be executed on the displayed predetermined amount before the predetermined amount changes;
The predetermined amount display means
When the addition mode effect execution means executes the addition mode effect, a means is provided for displaying, as a new predetermined amount, an amount greater than the addition result amount, which is the amount obtained by adding the displayed predetermined amount (Modification 15 in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βI5, when the addition mode effect execution means executes the addition mode effect, a new predetermined amount is displayed that is greater than the summation result, which is the result of multiplying the displayed predetermined amount. This gives the player a sense of surprise and happiness when they recognize the new predetermined amount that is greater than the summation result.

<Feature βJ group>
The group of features βJ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βJ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A first change means (a function of awarding points in the modified example 22 of the fourth embodiment) for changing a first amount in the game;
A second change means (a function of awarding points in the modified example 22 of the fourth embodiment) for changing a second amount in the game;
a first specific process execution means for executing a first specific process;
a second specific process execution means for executing a second specific process;
Equipped with
The first changing means is
a means for changing the first amount so that the first amount reaches a predetermined first threshold (10 points) before the first specific process is executed when the first specific process execution means executes the first specific process,
The second changing means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing the second amount so that it reaches a predetermined second threshold value (10 points) before the second specific process is executed when the second specific process execution means executes the second specific process.

According to feature βJ1, when the first specific process execution means executes a first specific process, the first change means changes the first amount so that it reaches a predetermined first threshold before the first specific process is executed, and when the second specific process execution means executes a second specific process, the second change means changes the second amount so that it reaches a predetermined second threshold before the second specific process is executed.This makes it possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player when the first amount changes, and also creates a sense of anticipation in the player when the second amount changes.In other words, it is possible to draw the player's attention to changes in at least two quantities during a game round, and to create a sense of anticipation in the player.

[Feature βJ2]
A gaming machine according to feature βJ1,
A gaming machine characterized in that a game in which the first specific processing is executed has a higher expectation that the special information corresponding to that game in which the first specific processing is executed will satisfy the predetermined condition than a game in which the first specific processing is not executed.

Feature βJ2 allows a player who recognizes that a first specific process has been executed in a game round to feel a sense of anticipation that the special information corresponding to that game round will satisfy a predetermined condition.

[Feature βJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature βJ1 or feature βJ2,
A gaming machine comprising a reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) that resets at least one of the first amount and the second amount that have changed during a game round to a preset initial value upon completion of the game round.

Feature βJ3 includes a reset means, which creates a sense of anticipation in the player that at least one of the first amount and the second amount will reach the corresponding threshold (first threshold, second threshold) before the end of a round of play. Furthermore, once a round of play has begun and the player recognizes that at least one of the first amount and the second amount has begun to change, this makes the player aware of when the round of play will end and draws their attention to the manner in which the first amount and the second amount are changing.

[Feature βJ4]
A gaming machine according to feature βJ3,
The reset means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for, in a first case, returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount that has changed during a game round to an initial value at the end of the game round, and for, in a second case (when the game round is a carryover game round), not returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount that has changed during a game round to an initial value at the end of the game round (carrying over accumulated points).

According to feature βJ4, at least one of the first amount and the second amount may or may not return to their initial value at the end of a round of play. Therefore, even if at least one of the first amount and the second amount does not reach the threshold value corresponding to each amount during a round of play, the amount does not return to its initial value at the end of the round of play but is maintained until the next round of play, giving the player a sense of anticipation that the threshold value may be reached during the next round of play. In other words, a sense of anticipation can be given to the player even at the end of a round of play.

<Characteristic βK group>
The group of features βK is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βK1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount has reached a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the change means;
A resetting means for executing a resetting process (point resetting process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value;
Equipped with
The reset means
In the first case (when the game is not a carryover game), the predetermined amount that has changed during the game is returned to its initial value at the end of the game, and in the second case (when the game is a carryover game), the predetermined amount that has changed during the game is not returned to its initial value at the end of the game,
The more times the reset means does not reset the predetermined amount changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value at the end of the game round, the higher the likelihood that the special information corresponding to a game round executed after the predetermined game round will satisfy the predetermined condition (Variation 25 in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βK1, the more times the reset means ends a given game round, the higher the expectation that the special information corresponding to a game round executed after the given game round will satisfy the specified condition. Therefore, the longer there are times when the reset means does not return the given amount, which has been changed during that game round, to its initial value, the greater the expectation that the player will be given.

[Feature βK2]
A gaming machine according to feature βK1,
When the special information in the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies a predetermined condition,
The reset means
a means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the first game round to an initial value until the second game round;
The changing means is
A gaming machine comprising: a means for limiting a change in the predetermined amount so that the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value between the first game round and the second game round.

Feature βK2 allows a player to feel a sense of anticipation when they recognize that the predetermined amount does not return to its initial value upon the end of a game round, and that the trigger for the end of a game round continues, and that the predetermined amount has not reached the threshold. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's anticipation when the predetermined amount has not reached the threshold.

<Feature βL group>
The group of features βL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βL1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) from a preset initial value in the game;
a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the change means;
a threshold value changing unit that executes a threshold value changing process to change the value of the threshold value (Modification 26 of the fourth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature βL1 changes a predetermined amount during a game and executes a specific process when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold, thereby drawing the player's attention to the manner in which the predetermined amount changes. Furthermore, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold and a specific process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and anticipation. Furthermore, because the threshold may be changed, it is difficult for the player to guess when the specific process will be executed, making it possible for the specific process to be executed at a time the player does not expect. As a result, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player.

[Feature βL2]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1,
The threshold value changing means
A gaming machine comprising a threshold value change processing determination means for determining whether or not to execute the threshold value change processing in a game round based on the special information corresponding to the game round.

Feature βL2 determines whether to execute a threshold change process for a given game turn based on the special information corresponding to that game turn. This gives a player who recognizes that the threshold has been changed, or a player who recognizes that the threshold has been changed when a specific process is executed, a sense of anticipation as to whether the special information corresponding to that game turn meets a predetermined condition.

[Feature βL3]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1 or feature βL2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of executing the specific processing in a game round is higher when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the specified condition.

According to feature βL3, the probability of a specific process being executed in a game turn is higher when the special information corresponding to the game turn satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game turn does not satisfy the specified condition, so when a specific process is executed, a sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player. Furthermore, because a specific process is executed when a specified amount reaches a threshold, a sense of anticipation can also be imparted to the player when the specified amount changes.

<Feature βM group>
The group of features β M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βM1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one game is defined as the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started to when the game operation is ended,
A change means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game;
a change amount display means for displaying a change amount display (a display suggesting points to be awarded in the modification 27 of the fourth embodiment) showing information about the change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed by the change means before the predetermined amount is changed;
A gaming machine equipped with:

Feature βM1 displays a change amount display showing information about the amount of change made by the change means before the predetermined amount is changed, allowing a player who recognizes the change amount display to make various guesses and feel a sense of anticipation about the game session corresponding to the change amount display.

[Feature βM2]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1,
a game number display means for displaying a game number display which is a display showing one game number that is on hold or being executed;
The change amount display means
A gaming machine comprising: a display unit for displaying the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined number of games in association with the number of games display corresponding to the predetermined number of games.

According to feature βM2, a change amount display corresponding to a predetermined number of plays is displayed in association with a play count display corresponding to the predetermined number of plays. This allows a player who recognizes the change amount display displayed in association with a play count display to make various guesses and feel a sense of anticipation about the number of plays corresponding to the displayed change amount display. For example, if a change amount display is displayed in association with a play count display corresponding to a pending play count, a player who recognizes the change amount display can make various guesses and feel a sense of anticipation about the pending play count.

[Feature βM3]
A gaming machine according to feature βM2,
The change amount display means
A gaming machine comprising a means for displaying the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined number of games in association with the game number display corresponding to a game number different from the predetermined number of games, and then displaying the change amount display corresponding to the game number display corresponding to the predetermined number of games.

According to feature βM3, the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined number of plays is displayed in association with a play number display corresponding to a play number different from the predetermined number of plays, and then displayed in association with the play number display corresponding to the predetermined number of plays. This makes it possible to overturn the player's guess based on the change amount display displayed in association with a play number display corresponding to a play number different from the predetermined number of plays, and provides the player with a sense of surprise.
[Feature βM4]
A gaming machine according to feature βM2 or feature βM3,
The change amount display means
a change amount display corresponding to the change amount changed by the changing means in the specified game round, after which a change amount display corresponding to the change amount changed by the changing means in the specified game round is displayed.

According to feature βM4, after displaying a change amount display corresponding to a change amount different from the change amount made by the change means in a given number of plays, a change amount display corresponding to the change amount made by the change means in a given number of plays is displayed. This makes it possible to overturn the player's guess based on the change amount display corresponding to a change amount different from the change amount made by the change means in a given number of plays, providing the player with a sense of surprise and adding a tone to the player's anticipation.

[Feature βM5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βM1 to βM4,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (a button press effect in the fourth embodiment) is provided,
The changing means is
a change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so that the amount reaches a preset threshold value (10 points);
The specific process execution means
The probability of executing the specific process in the game round is higher when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition;
The change control means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so that it reaches the threshold value (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific process execution means executes the specific process.

According to feature βM5, the probability of a specific process being executed in a game turn is higher when the special information corresponding to the game turn satisfies the specified condition than when the special information corresponding to the game turn does not satisfy the specified condition, so by executing the specific process, it is possible to create a great sense of anticipation in the player. Furthermore, when the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the change control means changes the specified amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player each time the specified amount is changed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player in stages by changing the specified amount and executing the specific process.

The inventions of the above feature αT group to feature βM group solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature βN group>
The group of features βN is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature βN1]
an acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition;
an image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
a sound output means for outputting video-compatible sound (background music) corresponding to the first video in a first output mode (a mode in which background music is output at a predetermined volume);
a transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a transition condition is satisfied, which is a condition for transitioning the image display means from the first display mode to the second display mode (a mode in which a demo video is displayed) and transitioning the sound output means from the first output mode to the second output mode (a mode in which output of background music is stopped);
a return condition determination means for determining whether a return condition is satisfied, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode and the sound output means to the first output mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the transition condition is met,
the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode,
the sound output means transitions from the first output mode to the second output mode,
If the return condition is met after the sound output means has transitioned to the second output mode and the image display means has transitioned to the second display mode,
the image display means, when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image in the first display mode, starts displaying the first moving image from a predetermined time position of the first moving image;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sound output means returns to the first output mode and, when outputting the video-compatible sound in the first output mode, starts outputting the video-compatible sound from a predetermined time position of the video-compatible sound.

According to Feature βN1, if a return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has transitioned to the second output mode and the image display means has transitioned to the second display mode, the image display means, upon returning to the first display mode and displaying the first video, begins displaying the first video from a predetermined temporal position in the video, and the sound output means, upon returning to the first output mode and outputting video-related sound, begins outputting the video-related sound from a predetermined temporal position in the video. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display means begins displaying the first video varies depending on the timing at which the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has transitioned to the second output mode and the image display means has transitioned to the second display mode, the display of the first video and the output of the video-related sound can be easily synchronized. This results in improved game presentation quality and increased enjoyment. Examples of configurations in which the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first video varies depending on when the return condition is satisfied include a configuration in which, when the return condition is satisfied after the image display means has transitioned to the second display mode, the image display means starts displaying the first video from the temporal position of the first video that was displayed immediately before the transition to the second display mode; a configuration in which, when the image display means returns from the second display mode to the first display mode, the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first video is determined based on the elapsed time since the transition to the second display mode; and a configuration in which the image display means continues playing the first video as an internal process even after transitioning from the first display mode to the second display mode, and, when returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, displays the first video that is still being played as an internal process.

[Feature βN2]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1,
When the transition condition is met,
the sound output means transitions from the first output mode to the second output mode via a reduction mode in which the volume of the video-compatible sound is reduced over time while continuing to output the video-compatible sound,
the image display means transitions from the first display mode to the second display mode after the sound output means transitions to the second output mode,
If the restoration condition is met while the sound output means is in the reduction mode,
the image display means continues the first display mode in which the first moving image is displayed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sound output means returns the volume of the video-compatible sound to the volume in the first output mode, thereby returning to the first output mode.

According to feature βN2, if the return condition is met during the reduction mode, the image display means continues the first display mode, and the sound output means returns to the first output mode by restoring the volume of the video-compatible sound. This allows for a natural, seamless return to the mode before the transition condition was met, while maintaining synchronization between the display of the first video and the output of the video-compatible sound.

[Feature βN3]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1 or feature βN2,
When the transition condition is met,
the sound output means shifts from the first output mode in which the video-compatible sound is output at a first volume level to the second output mode in which the video-compatible sound is output at a second volume level that is lower than the first volume level;
the image display means transitions to the second display mode after a predetermined time has elapsed since the sound output means transitioned to the second output mode,
If the return condition is met after the sound output means has transitioned to the second output mode and before the image display means has transitioned to the second display mode,
the image display means continues the first display mode in which the first moving image is displayed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the video-compatible sound to the first volume.

According to Feature βN3, if the return condition is met after the sound output means has transitioned to the second output mode but before the image display means has transitioned to the second display mode, the image display means continues in the first display mode displaying the first video, and the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the video-associated sound to the first volume. This allows for a natural, unnatural return to the mode before the transition condition was met, while maintaining synchronization between the display of the first video and the output of the video-associated sound.

[Feature βN4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βN1 to βN3,
the predetermined time position of the first moving image is a time leading position of the first moving image,
The predetermined time position of the video-compatible sound is a time leading position of the video-compatible sound.

According to Feature βN4, if a return condition is met after the sound output means has transitioned to the second output mode and the image display means has transitioned to the second display mode, and the display and image display modes are respectively returned to the first display mode and the first output mode, the display of the first video begins from the temporal beginning of the first video, and the output of the video-compatible sound begins from the temporal beginning of the video. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the display begins from a temporal beginning of the first video and the output of the video-compatible sound begins from a temporal beginning of the video, the sense of discomfort felt by the player can be reduced. For example, if a configuration in which the display begins from a temporal beginning of the first video and the output of the video-compatible sound begins from a temporal beginning of the video were adopted, the player would view the first video and video-compatible sound from a temporal beginning after the return condition is met, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or dissatisfied, as if they had not yet viewed parts of the first video and video-compatible sound. In contrast, feature βN4 allows the player to view the first video and video-related sound from the beginning in time, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and providing the player with a sense of satisfaction that they are able to view the entire first video and video-related sound from the beginning in time. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Feature βN5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βN1 to βN4,
the second display mode is a mode in which a second moving image different from the first moving image is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the first moving image is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the first moving image is not displayed, a mode in which a still image different from the first moving image is displayed, or a mode in which neither the moving image nor the still image is displayed,
the first output mode is a mode in which the video-compatible sound is output at a first volume;
The second output mode is a mode in which the video-compatible sound is output at a second volume level that is lower than the first volume level, or a mode in which output of the video-compatible sound is stopped.

Feature βN5 allows the player to recognize that the transition condition has been met and the image display means and sound output means have transitioned to the second display mode and second output mode, respectively.

[Feature βN6]
A gaming machine according to feature βN5,
The gaming machine, wherein the second volume is equal to or lower than a volume that cannot be heard by a player.

According to feature βN6, when the sound output means transitions to the second output mode, the volume of the video-compatible sound drops below a volume that the player cannot perceive, allowing the player to clearly recognize that the transition condition has been met and the sound output means has transitioned to the second output mode.

[Feature βN7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βN1 to βN6,
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state advantageous to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The transition condition determination means determines that the transition condition has been established when a predetermined time has passed after the end of a game round in which a display corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means is made without the start of either the special game state or the next game round.

If a predetermined amount of time passes after a game has ended without either the special game state or the next game state starting, it is highly likely that the player is not playing on the gaming machine. Therefore, feature βN7 makes it possible to establish a transition condition in a state where it is highly likely that the player is not playing.

[Feature βN8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βN1 to βN7,
A detection means for detecting that a game ball has been shot onto a game board is provided,
The transition condition determination means determines that the transition condition is met when the detection means does not detect a gaming ball for a predetermined time.

According to feature βN8, the transition condition is not met if the game ball has been ejected onto the game board, thereby reducing the occurrence of unpleasant situations for players, such as when the transition condition is met even while the player is playing.

[Feature βN9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βN1 to βN8,
The return condition determination means determines that the return condition has been met when the special information is acquired by the acquisition means after the transition condition has been met.

According to feature βN9, when special information is acquired, the image display means returns to the first display mode and the sound output means returns to the first output mode, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that special information has been acquired and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature βN10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βN1 to βN9,
A detection means for detecting that a game ball has been shot onto a game board is provided,
The return condition determination means determines that the return condition has been met when a gaming ball is detected by the detection means after the transition condition has been met.

According to feature βN10, even after the transition condition is met, the return condition is met if the game ball is released onto the game board. This reduces unpleasant situations for players, such as when the return condition is not met for a long period of time (e.g., one minute) even though the player has started playing.

<Characteristic βO group>
The group of features βO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature βO1]
an image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
a sound output means for outputting, as a first output mode, a moving image corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image at a predetermined output level;
command receiving means for receiving a command;
A gaming machine comprising:
an identification information storage means for storing identification information (a cue determination flag) that can identify a specific mode in which the image display means is in another display mode (a mode in which a demo video is displayed) in which continuity with the predetermined video is broken, and the sound output means is in another output mode (a mode in which output of background music is stopped) in which continuity with the video-related sound is broken;
a determination means for determining whether or not the specific mode is present based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means when the command receiving means receives a specific command (a return condition establishment command);
Equipped with
When the command receiving means receives the specific command and the determining means determines that the specific mode is present based on the identification information (when the mode is from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 200),
The image display means returns to the first display mode and starts displaying the predetermined moving image from a predetermined time position (FIG. 200).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the video-compatible sound from a predetermined time position (FIG. 200).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to Feature βO1, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from a specific mode, the time position at which the image display means begins displaying a specified video and the time position at which the sound output means begins outputting video-related sound are each predetermined, making it easy to synchronize the specified video and video-related sound.

[Feature βO2]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1,
When the command receiving means receives the specific command and the determining means determines that the specific mode is not present based on the identification information, and the image display means is in a display mode that maintains continuity with the predetermined video (the mode from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 200),
The image display means returns to the first display mode and continues to display the predetermined moving image in a mode that maintains the continuity (FIGS. 201 and 202).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and outputs the video-compatible sound corresponding to the predetermined video whose continuity is maintained (FIGS. 201 and 202).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βO2, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from a display mode in which continuity with the predetermined video is maintained, the image display means continues to display the predetermined video in a mode in which continuity is maintained, and the sound output means outputs video-related sound corresponding to the predetermined video in which continuity is maintained, so that the image display means can be returned to the first display mode and the sound output means to the first output mode without causing the player any sense of discomfort.

[Feature βO3]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1 or feature βO2,
the predetermined time position of the predetermined moving image is a time leading position of the predetermined moving image,
The predetermined time position of the video-compatible sound is a time leading position of the video-compatible sound.

According to Feature βO3, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from a specific mode, the time position at which the image display means begins displaying the specified video and the time position at which the sound output means begins outputting the video-related sound are each the beginning of time. Therefore, compared to when the display begins partway through the specified video and the output of the video-related sound begins partway through, the processing performed by the image display means and the sound output means is easier and the sense of discomfort felt by the player can be reduced.

[Feature βO4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βO1 to βO3,
The other display mode is a mode in which the image display means displays an image different from the predetermined moving image, or a mode in which image display is stopped.

According to feature βO4, when the image display means is returned from a specific mode to the first display mode, the other display mode as the specific mode before returning to the first display mode is a mode in which an image different from the predetermined video is displayed, or a mode in which the display of the image is stopped. Therefore, even if the display returns to the first display mode and starts from a predetermined time position in the predetermined video, the sense of discomfort felt by the player can be reduced. Note that images include both videos and still images.

[Feature βO5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βO1 to βO4,
The other output mode is a mode in which the sound output means outputs a sound different from the video-compatible sound, a mode in which the sound output means outputs the video-compatible or other sound at an output level that the player cannot recognize, or a mode in which the sound output means stops outputting.

According to Feature βO5, when the sound output means is returned from a specific mode to the first output mode, the other output mode as the specific mode before returning to the first output mode is a mode in which a sound other than video-compatible sound is output, a mode in which video-compatible or other sound is output at an output level that cannot be discerned by the player, or a mode in which output is stopped. Therefore, even if the sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting video-compatible sound corresponding to a specified video that begins displaying from a predetermined time position, the sense of discomfort felt by the player can be reduced.

<Characteristic βP group>
The group of features βP is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature βP1]
an acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition;
an elapsed time determination means for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed;
an image display means for displaying a first moving image (a background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 236, and a demo moving image in the example shown in FIG. 237) as a first display mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The image display means
When the elapsed time determination means determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, the display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode (a mode in which an RTC effect moving image is displayed) (FIGS. 236 and 237).
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode has ended, the display mode is switched from the second display mode to the first display mode, and when the display mode is switched to the first display mode and the first moving image is displayed, the display starts from a predetermined time position of the first moving image (FIGS. 236 and 237).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βP1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the display transitions from the second display mode to the first display mode, and when the display mode returns to the first display mode and the first video is displayed, the display begins from a predetermined temporal position in the first video. Therefore, control can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first video begins changes when the display mode is transitioned to the first display mode and the first video is displayed. Examples of configurations in which the temporal position at which display of the first video begins varies when transitioning to the first display mode and displaying the first video include a configuration in which, when a predetermined display period for the second display mode has ended, display of the first video begins from the temporal position of the first video that was displayed immediately before transitioning to the second display mode; a configuration in which, when the image display means transitions from the second display mode to the first display mode, the temporal position at which display of the first video begins is determined based on the elapsed time since transitioning to the second display mode; a configuration in which the image display means continues playback of the first video as an internal process even after transitioning from the first display mode to the second display mode, and, when transitioning from the second display mode to the first display mode, displays the first video that is still being played as an internal process.

Furthermore, if multiple gaming machines with feature βP1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode will end on each gaming machine at substantially the same time, and the gaming machines will transition to the first display mode. Furthermore, when each gaming machine transitions to the first display mode and displays the first video, it will begin displaying the first video from a predetermined time position in the first video, allowing the first video displayed on each gaming machine to be synchronized. In other words, a spectacular situation can be created in which the first video displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, thereby enhancing the excitement of the game.

[Feature βP2]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1,
a transition condition determination means for determining whether a transition condition for transitioning the image display means to a third display mode (a mode for displaying a demo video) is satisfied;
The image display means
If the transition condition is satisfied during the first display mode (a mode in which a background video is displayed), the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the satisfaction of the transition condition (FIG. 200).
If the transition condition is met during the second display mode (during the mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed), the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the predetermined display period of the second display mode (FIG. 238).
A gaming machine characterized in that, when transitioning to the third display mode and displaying a third video (demo video), the display starts from a predetermined time position of the third video.

According to feature βP2, even if the transition condition is met during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted during the predetermined display period, but transitions to the third display mode when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if multiple gaming machines with feature βP2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode will end on each gaming machine at substantially the same time, and the gaming machines will transition to the third display mode. Furthermore, when each gaming machine transitions to the third display mode and displays the third video, it will begin displaying the third video from a predetermined time position, allowing the third video displayed on each gaming machine to be synchronized. In other words, a spectacular situation can be created in which the third video displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature βP3]
A gaming machine according to feature βP2,
a return condition determination means for determining whether a return condition, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode (a mode in which a background moving image is displayed), is satisfied;
The image display means
If the return condition is satisfied during the third display mode (during the display of the demo video), the display returns to the first display mode upon satisfaction of the return condition (FIG. 200).
If the return condition is met during the second display mode (during the mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed), the display returns to the first display mode upon the expiration of the predetermined display period of the second display mode (FIG. 239).
a gaming machine, characterized in that when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the display starts from the predetermined time position of the first moving image.

According to feature βP3, even if the return condition is met during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted during the predetermined display period, and the return to the first display mode occurs when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature βP4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βP1 to βP3,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined time position of the first moving image is a time leading position of the first moving image.

Feature βP4 can reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player compared to a configuration in which the display starts from a temporally intermediate position in the first video when transitioning to or returning to the first display mode and displaying the first video. For example, if a configuration in which the display starts from a temporally intermediate position in the first video when transitioning to or returning to the first display mode and displaying the first video were adopted, the player would have to watch the first video from a temporally intermediate position, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or dissatisfied as if there was a portion of the first video that they had not viewed. In contrast, feature βP4 allows the player to watch the first video from its temporally beginning, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and providing the player with a sense of satisfaction that they have been able to watch the entire first video from its temporal beginning. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Feature βP5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βP1 to βP4,
a sound output means for outputting moving image corresponding sound, which is sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the image display means starts displaying the first video from the predetermined time position, the sound output means starts outputting a first video-corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the first video from the predetermined time position.

Feature βP5 makes it easier to synchronize the display of the first video and the output of the first video-related sound, compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the output of the first video-related sound begins varies. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. Examples of configurations in which the temporal position at which output of the first video-related sound starts varies include a configuration in which, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends and the image display means starts displaying the first video from a predetermined temporal position, output of the first video-related sound starts from the temporal position of the first video-related sound that was being output immediately before the image display means transitioned to the second display mode; a configuration in which, when transitioning to a mode in which the first video-related sound is to be output, the temporal position at which output of the first video-related sound starts is determined based on the elapsed time since the image display means transitioned to the second display mode; a configuration in which playback of the first video-related sound continues as an internal process even after the image display means transitions from the first display mode to the second display mode, and when the image display means transitions from the second display mode to the first display mode or returns to the first display mode, the first video-related sound that has been continuously played as an internal process is output.

[Feature βP6]
A gaming machine according to feature βP5,
The predetermined time position of the first moving image corresponding sound is a time leading position of the first moving image corresponding sound.

Feature βP6 can reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player compared to a configuration in which output of the first video-compatible sound begins at a temporally intermediate position. For example, if a configuration in which output of the first video-compatible sound begins at a temporally intermediate position were adopted, the player would have to listen to the first video-compatible sound from a temporally intermediate position, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or unsatisfied as if there was a portion of the first video-compatible sound that they had not listened to. In contrast, feature βP6 allows the player to listen to the first video-compatible sound from the temporally beginning position, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and providing the player with a sense of satisfaction that they have been able to listen to the entire first video-compatible sound from the temporally beginning position. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature βP7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βP2 to βP3,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined time position of the third moving image is a time leading position of the third moving image.

Feature βP7 can reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player compared to a configuration in which the display of the third video begins from a temporally intermediate position in the third video when transitioning to the third display mode and displaying the third video. For example, if a configuration in which the display of the third video begins from a temporally intermediate position in the third video when transitioning to the third display mode and displaying the third video were adopted, the player would have to watch the third video from a temporally intermediate position, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or unsatisfied as if there was a portion of the third video that they had not viewed. In contrast, feature βP7 allows the player to watch the third video from its temporally beginning position, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and providing the player with a sense of satisfaction that they have been able to watch the entire third video from its temporal beginning position. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature βP8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βP2 to βP4,
a sound output means for outputting moving image corresponding sound, which is sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the image display means starts displaying the third video from the predetermined time position, the sound output means starts outputting a third video-compatible sound (demo music) corresponding to the third video from the predetermined time position.

Feature βP8 makes it easier to synchronize the display of the third video and the output of the third video-related sound, compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the output of the third video-related sound begins varies. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. Examples of configurations in which the temporal position at which output of the third moving image corresponding sound begins to vary include a configuration in which, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends and the image display means begins displaying the third moving image from a predetermined temporal position, output of the third moving image corresponding sound begins from the temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound that was being output immediately before the image display means transitioned to the second display mode; a configuration in which, when transitioning to a mode in which the third moving image corresponding sound is to be output, the temporal position at which output of the third moving image corresponding sound begins is determined based on the elapsed time since the image display means transitioned to the second display mode; a configuration in which playback of the third moving image corresponding sound continues as an internal process even after the image display means transitions from the third display mode to the second display mode, and when the image display means transitions from the second display mode to the third display mode, the third moving image corresponding sound that has been continuously played as an internal process is output.

[Feature βP9]
A gaming machine according to feature βP8,
The predetermined time position of the third moving image corresponding sound is a time leading position of the third moving image corresponding sound.

Feature βP9 can reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player compared to a configuration in which output of the third video-compatible sound begins at a temporally intermediate position. For example, if a configuration in which output of the third video-compatible sound begins at a temporally intermediate position were adopted, the player would hear the third video-compatible sound from a temporally intermediate position, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable or unsatisfied as if there was a portion of the third video-compatible sound that they had not heard. In contrast, feature βP9 allows the player to hear the third video-compatible sound from the temporally beginning position, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player and providing the player with a sense of satisfaction that they have been able to hear the entire third video-compatible sound from the temporally beginning position. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventions of the above feature βN group, feature βO group, and feature βP group solve the following problems:

Amusement machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines use a variety of effects to enhance the enjoyment of the game. For example, some gaming machines display videos on a display device such as an LCD screen, and output music corresponding to the videos from speakers.

Here, further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines like those mentioned above in order to increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature βQ group>
The group of features βQ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βQ1]
a playback means (a playback function in audio channel 1) for playing back a sound (BGM piece M1) based on audio data (plural audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 in FIG. 258, or single BGM piece M1 audio data in FIG. 301), which is data in which the sound is recorded;
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the sound being reproduced by the reproduction means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The regeneration means
A gaming machine comprising means for playing back the sound recorded in the sound data from a temporal start position to a temporal end position, and then starting playback of the sound recorded in the sound data from a predetermined temporal position after the temporal start position of the sound recorded in the sound data.

According to feature βQ1, after the sound recorded in the sound data is played from its beginning to its end, playback of the sound recorded in the sound data begins from a predetermined time position after the beginning of the sound recorded in the sound data. This prevents the player's mood from dropping as a result of the entire sound recorded in the sound data being played repeatedly.

Specifically, for example, if the sound recorded in the sound data is a song, and the predetermined time position of the song is set at the separation between the introductory section, which corresponds to the introduction of the song, and the main section, which corresponds to the main melody of the song, then after the introductory section and main section of the song have been played, playback will begin from the main section of the song. This prevents a player who has been excited by listening to the main section of the song from losing their enthusiasm when the introductory section is played again.

[Feature βQ2]
A gaming machine according to feature βQ1,
the sound data is data in which a piece of music is recorded,
The predetermined time position of the music recorded in the sound data coincides with a break between bars of the music.

Feature βQ2 allows a song to be played up to its final position in time, and then playback begins from the break between bars of that song, so playback of the song can be started from a different time position than the beginning of the song without causing the player any discomfort.

[Feature βQ3]
A gaming machine according to feature βQ1 or feature 2,
the sound data is data in which sounds including voices are recorded,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the sound containing the voice recorded in the sound data is a temporal position within a period of playback time of the sound containing the voice in which the voice is not included.

According to feature βQ3, the voice is not played back from the middle after the sound recorded in the sound data has been played back to the end in time, so the player can start playing the sound containing the voice without feeling strange or uncomfortable, as if the voice were to be played back from the middle after the sound recorded in the sound data has been played back to the end in time.

[Feature βQ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βQ1 to βQ3,
The sound data is composed of at least first divided sound data (sound data constituting the introduction of the BGM piece M1) and second divided sound data (sound data constituting the main part of the BGM piece),
the reproduction means comprises means for reproducing the sound recorded in the first divided sound data, and then reproducing the sound recorded in the second divided sound data;
The predetermined time position of the sound recorded in the sound data is the time beginning position of the sound recorded in the second divided sound data.

Feature βQ4 makes it possible to start playback of the sound recorded in the data from a predetermined time position, even if the sound is recorded in a data format that makes it impossible or difficult to specify a time position in the recorded sound to start playback.

<Feature βR group>
The group of features βR is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βR1]
a first playback means (a playback function in audio channel 1) for playing back a first sound (BGM piece M1) based on first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 in FIG. 258, or a single BGM piece M1 audio data in FIG. 301), the first sound being recorded;
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
a mute state initiation means for initiating a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
a mute state ending means for ending the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first reproducing means comprises:
The first sound recorded in the first sound data can be started to be reproduced from a plurality of predetermined time positions (the time beginning positions of the sounds recorded in each piece of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1, and a plurality of reproduction start positions set in the BGM piece M1 audio data),
means for executing a process capable of identifying a playback position during the mute state, which is a temporal playback position of the first sound when, in a case where the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being played back at the start of the mute state, playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is continued or is assumed to be continued even after the start of the mute state;
means for starting playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data, when the mute state ends, from a predetermined time position (in FIG. 259, the beginning time position of the sound recorded in the third main-part sound data of the BGM piece M1) immediately after the mute state playback position (in FIG. 259, the beginning time position of the sound recorded in the second main-part sound data of the BGM piece M1) at the time the mute state ends, among the plurality of predetermined time positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βR1, the first sound continues to be played even during the mute state, and it is possible to start playback of the first sound from a predetermined temporal position while minimizing the discrepancy between the player's imagination of the temporal position of the first sound after the mute state ends, who expects the first sound to continue playing even after the mute state ends, and the temporal position of the first sound that actually begins playing upon the end of the mute state. As a result, for example, if the multiple predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data are set so that starting playback of the first sound from those temporal positions does not feel strange to the player, playback of the first sound can be started when the mute state ends without causing the player to feel strange.

[Feature βR2]
A gaming machine according to feature βR1,
a second reproducing means (a reproducing function in an audio channel 2) for reproducing a second sound (a sound corresponding to the reach effect R1) based on second sound data (a sound data corresponding to the reach effect R1) in which the second sound is recorded,
the output means is capable of outputting the second sound being reproduced by the second reproduction means,
the mute state initiation means includes means for initiating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means starts reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data;
the mute state ending means includes means for ending the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means has finished reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data.

According to feature βR2, while the second sound is being played by the second playback means, the first sound is muted and not output from the output means, making the second sound stand out even more and allowing the player to focus their attention on the second sound.

[Feature βR3]
A gaming machine according to feature βR1 or feature βR2,
the first sound data is data in which a piece of music is recorded,
a plurality of predetermined time positions of the music recorded in the first sound data, each of which coincides with a break between bars of the music.

Feature βR3 allows playback of the music to begin from the break in the bar when the mute state ends, so playback of the music can begin without causing the player any discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βR4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βR1 to βR3,
the first sound data is data in which sounds including voices are recorded,
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the sound including the voice recorded in the first sound data is a temporal position within a period of playback time of the sound including the voice in which the voice is not included.

According to feature βR4, the voice is not played back from the middle when the muted state ends, so the player does not feel uncomfortable or annoyed that the voice is played back from the middle when the muted state ends, and the playback of the sound containing the voice can be started.

[Feature βR5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βR1 to βR4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of sound data constituting the BGM musical piece M1),
the first reproduction means includes means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data;
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is the temporal beginning position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data.

Feature βR5 makes it possible to start playback of the sound recorded in the data from a predetermined time position, even if the sound is recorded in a data format in which it is impossible or difficult to specify a time position in the recorded sound and start playback.

<Feature βS group>
The feature βS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βS1]
a first playback means (a playback function in audio channel 1) for playing back a first sound (BGM piece M1) based on first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 in FIG. 258, or a single BGM piece M1 audio data in FIG. 301), the first sound being recorded;
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
a mute state initiation means for initiating a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
a mute state ending means for ending the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first reproducing means comprises:
The first sound recorded in the first sound data can be started to be reproduced from a plurality of predetermined time positions (the time beginning positions of the sounds recorded in each piece of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1, and a plurality of reproduction start positions set in the BGM piece M1 audio data),
means for executing a process capable of identifying a playback position during the mute state, which is a temporal playback position of the first sound when, in a case where the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being played back at the start of the mute state, playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is continued or is assumed to be continued even after the start of the mute state;
a means for storing information for identifying the first time position reached by the mute state playback position after the mute state begins among the plurality of predetermined time positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data (in FIG. 290, the time position of the beginning of the sound recorded in the first main sound data of the BGM piece M1);
a means for starting playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from the predetermined time position identified from the stored information when the muted state ends;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βS1, the temporal position of the first sound that begins playback upon the end of the muted state is the predetermined temporal position of the first sound that the muted state playback position first reached during the muted state. This prevents the length of time that the first sound is not output from the output means and therefore inaudible to the player from the period from the start of the muted state to the end of the muted state from becoming too long. Therefore, it becomes possible to start playback of the first sound from a predetermined temporal position while preventing player frustration such as when a desired part of the first sound ends and is not heard during the muted state. As a result, for example, if the predetermined multiple temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data are set so that starting playback of the first sound from those temporal positions does not cause discomfort to the player, playback of the first sound can be started without causing discomfort to the player when the muted state ends.

[Feature βS2]
A gaming machine according to feature βS1,
a second reproducing means (a reproducing function in an audio channel 2) for reproducing a second sound (a sound corresponding to the reach effect R1) based on second sound data (a sound data corresponding to the reach effect R1) in which the second sound is recorded,
the output means is capable of outputting the second sound being reproduced by the second reproduction means,
the mute state initiation means includes means for initiating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means starts reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data;
the mute state ending means includes means for ending the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means ends reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data.

According to feature βS2, while the second sound is being played by the second playback means, the first sound is muted and not output from the output means, making the second sound stand out even more and allowing the player to focus their attention on the second sound.

[Feature βS3]
A gaming machine according to feature βS1 or feature βS2,
the first sound data is data in which a piece of music is recorded,
a plurality of predetermined time positions of the music recorded in the first sound data, each of which coincides with a break between bars of the music.

Feature βS3 allows playback of the music to begin from the break in the bar when the mute state ends, so playback of the music can begin without causing the player any discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βS4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βS1 to βS3,
the first sound data is data in which sounds including voices are recorded,
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the sound including the voice recorded in the first sound data is a temporal position within a period of playback time of the sound including the voice in which the voice is not included.

According to feature βS4, the voice is not played back from the middle when the muted state ends, so the player does not feel uncomfortable or annoyed that the voice is played back from the middle when the muted state ends, and the playback of the sound containing the voice can be started.

[Feature βS5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βS1 to βS4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of sound data constituting the BGM musical piece M1),
the first reproduction means includes means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data;
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is the temporal beginning position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data.

Feature βS5 makes it possible to start playback of the sound recorded in the data from a predetermined time position, even if the sound is recorded in a data format in which it is impossible or difficult to specify a time position in the recorded sound and start playback.

<Feature βT group>
The feature βT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βT1]
a first playback means (a playback function in audio channel 1) for playing back a first sound (BGM piece M1) based on first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 in FIG. 258, or a single BGM piece M1 audio data in FIG. 301), the first sound being recorded;
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
a mute state initiation means for initiating a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
a mute state ending means for ending the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first reproducing means comprises:
The first sound recorded in the first sound data can be started to be reproduced from a plurality of predetermined time positions (the time beginning positions of the sounds recorded in each piece of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1, and a plurality of reproduction start positions set in the BGM piece M1 audio data),
If the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the start of the mute state,
a means for starting playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from one time position selected and set from among the plurality of predetermined time positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data when the mute state ends.

According to feature βT1, the player cannot predict from which predetermined time position the first sound that was being played at the start of the mute state will start playing when the mute state ends. This provides a sense of surprise and surprise to the player, and makes it possible to start playing the first sound from a predetermined time position while preventing the game from becoming monotonous. As a result, for example, if the multiple predetermined time positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data are set so that starting playback of the first sound from those time positions does not feel strange to the player, playback of the first sound can start when the mute state ends without causing the player to feel strange.

[Feature βT2]
A gaming machine according to feature βT1,
a second reproducing means (a reproducing function in an audio channel 2) for reproducing a second sound (a sound corresponding to the reach effect R1) based on second sound data (a sound data corresponding to the reach effect R1) in which the second sound is recorded,
the output means is capable of outputting the second sound being reproduced by the second reproduction means,
the mute state initiation means includes means for initiating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means starts reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data;
the mute state ending means includes means for ending the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means has finished reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data.

According to feature βT2, while the second sound is being played by the second playback means, the first sound is muted and not output from the output means, making the second sound stand out even more and allowing the player to focus their attention on the second sound.

[Feature βT3]
A gaming machine according to feature βT1 or feature βT2,
the first sound data is data in which a piece of music is recorded,
a plurality of predetermined time positions of the music recorded in the first sound data, each of which coincides with a break between bars of the music.

According to feature βT3, when the mute state ends, playback of the music begins from the break in the bar, so playback of the music can begin without causing the player any discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βT4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βT1 to βT3,
the first sound data is data in which sounds including voices are recorded,
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the sound including the voice recorded in the first sound data is a temporal position within a period of playback time of the sound including the voice in which the voice is not included.

According to feature βT4, the voice is not played back from the middle when the muted state ends, so the player does not feel uncomfortable or annoyed that the voice is being played back from the middle when the muted state ends, and the sound containing the voice can be started to be played back.

[Feature βT5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βT1 to βT4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of sound data constituting the BGM musical piece M1),
the first reproduction means includes means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data;
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is the temporal beginning position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data.

Feature βT5 makes it possible to start playback of the sound recorded in the data from a predetermined time position, even if the sound is recorded in a data format in which it is impossible or difficult to specify a time position in the recorded sound and start playback.

<Feature βU group>
The group of features βU is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βU1]
a first playback means (a playback function in audio channel 1) for playing back a first sound (BGM piece M1) based on first sound data (plurality of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 in FIG. 258, or single BGM piece M1 audio data in FIG. 301), the first sound being recorded;
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
a mute state initiation means for initiating a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
a mute state ending means for ending the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first reproducing means comprises:
The first sound recorded in the first sound data can be started to be reproduced from a plurality of predetermined time positions (the time beginning positions of the sounds recorded in each piece of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1, and a plurality of reproduction start positions set in the BGM piece M1 audio data),
means for executing a process capable of identifying a playback position during the mute state, which is a temporal playback position of the first sound when, in a case where the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being played back at the start of the mute state, playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is continued or is assumed to be continued even after the start of the mute state;
a means for storing information for identifying the last time position reached by the playback position during the mute state before the end of the mute state among the plurality of predetermined time positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data (in FIG. 295, the time position of the beginning of the sound recorded in the second main sound data of the BGM piece M1);
a means for starting playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from the predetermined time position identified from the stored information when the muted state ends;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βU1, the temporal position of the first sound that begins playback upon the end of the mute state is the predetermined temporal position of the first sound that was last reached during the mute state. This makes it possible to start playback of the first sound from a predetermined temporal position while minimizing discrepancies between the temporal position of the first sound that actually begins playback upon the end of the mute state and the imagined temporal position of the first sound after the mute state ends, even though the first sound continues to be played during the mute state and the player expects playback of the first sound to continue even after the mute state ends. As a result, for example, if the predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data are set so that starting playback of the first sound from those temporal positions does not feel strange to the player, playback of the first sound can begin without causing the player to feel strange when the mute state ends.

[Feature βU2]
A gaming machine according to feature βU1,
a second reproducing means (a reproducing function in an audio channel 2) for reproducing a second sound (a sound corresponding to the reach effect R1) based on second sound data (a sound data corresponding to the reach effect R1) in which the second sound is recorded,
the output means is capable of outputting the second sound being reproduced by the second reproduction means,
the mute state initiation means includes means for initiating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means starts reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data;
the mute state ending means includes means for ending the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means ends reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data.

According to feature βU2, while the second sound is being played by the second playback means, the first sound is muted and not output from the output means, making the second sound stand out even more and allowing the player to focus their attention on the second sound.

[Feature βU3]
A gaming machine according to feature βU1 or feature βU2,
the first sound data is data in which a piece of music is recorded,
a plurality of predetermined time positions of the music recorded in the first sound data, each of which coincides with a break between bars of the music.

According to feature βU3, when the mute state ends, playback of the music begins from the break in the bar, so playback of the music can begin without causing the player any discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βU4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βU1 to βU3,
the first sound data is data in which sounds including voices are recorded,
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the sound including the voice recorded in the first sound data is a temporal position within a period of playback time of the sound including the voice in which the voice is not included.

According to feature βU4, the voice is not played back from the middle when the muted state ends, so the player does not feel uncomfortable or annoyed that the voice is being played back from the middle when the muted state ends, and the playback of the sound containing the voice can be started.

[Feature βU5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βU1 to βU4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of sound data constituting the BGM musical piece M1),
the first reproduction means includes means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data;
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is the temporal beginning position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data.

Feature βU5 makes it possible to start playback of the sound recorded in the data from a predetermined time position, even if the sound is recorded in a data format in which it is impossible or difficult to specify a time position in the recorded sound and start playback.

<Characteristic βV group>
The feature βV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βV1]
a first playback means (a playback function in audio channel 1) for playing back a first sound (BGM piece M1) based on first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 in FIG. 258, or a single BGM piece M1 audio data in FIG. 301), the first sound being recorded;
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
a mute state initiation means for initiating a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
a mute state ending means for ending the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first reproducing means comprises:
a means for executing a process capable of identifying a playback position during the mute state, which is a temporal playback position of the first sound when, in a case where the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being played back at the start of the mute state, the playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is continued or is assumed to be continued even after the start of the mute state;
The mute state ending means
a means for ending the mute state when the playback position during the mute state reaches one of a plurality of predetermined time positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data (the time beginning positions of the sounds recorded in each sound data constituting the BGM piece M1, a plurality of playback start positions set in the BGM piece M1 sound data) (in FIG. 298, the time beginning position of the sound recorded in the third main part sound data of the BGM piece M1).

According to feature βV1, during the muted state, the muted state is ended when the playback position during the muted state reaches one of multiple predetermined temporal positions of the first sound. Therefore, for example, if the multiple predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data are set so that starting the output of the first sound from those temporal positions does not cause discomfort to the player, the muted state of the first sound can be ended and the output of the first sound can be started without causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data continues even after the muted state is started, the output of the first sound can be started from the predetermined temporal position of the first sound simply by ending the muted state of the first sound, without controlling the temporal position at which playback of the first sound starts when the muted state of the first sound is ended.

[Feature βV2]
A gaming machine according to feature βV1,
a second reproducing means (a reproducing function in an audio channel 2) for reproducing a second sound (a sound corresponding to the reach effect R1) based on second sound data (a sound data corresponding to the reach effect R1) in which the second sound is recorded,
the output means is capable of outputting the second sound being reproduced by the second reproduction means,
the mute state initiation means includes means for initiating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means starts reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data;
The mute state ending means
a means for ending the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means at a timing when the playback position during the mute state reaches the nearest time position after the timing of the end of playback of the second sound, among the predetermined time positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data.

According to feature βV2, while the second sound is being played by the second playback means, the first sound is muted and not output from the output means, making the second sound more prominent and allowing the player to focus their attention on the second sound. Furthermore, depending on the playback position during the muted state of the first sound at the timing when playback of the second sound ends, it may take some time for the playback position during the muted state to reach a predetermined temporal position of the first sound. In other words, a period in which neither the second sound nor the first sound is being output may be inserted between the timing when playback of the second sound ends and the timing when the muted state of the first sound ends. Here, if two sounds are played back to back without a silent period in between, it may be difficult to accurately hear the beginning of the later of the two sounds. Therefore, according to this feature, a period in which neither the second sound nor the first sound is output can be inserted between the timing at which the playback of the second sound ends and the timing at which the muted state of the first sound ends. This allows the player to accurately hear the portion of the first sound immediately after the muted state ends (the output start portion), making it possible to direct the player's attention to the first sound after the playback of the second sound ends. Furthermore, if the playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data continues after the muted state begins, the output of the first sound resumes from the same time position as if the first sound had continued to be output from the start to the end of the playback of the second sound. This does not cause a sense of incongruity to the player, who has been imagining the first sound continuing to be played from the start to the end of the playback of the second sound. In other words, according to this feature, the output of the first sound can be resumed after the playback of the second sound ends without causing a sense of incongruity to the player.

[Feature βV3]
A gaming machine according to feature βV1 or feature βV2,
the first sound data is data in which a piece of music is recorded,
a plurality of predetermined time positions of the music recorded in the first sound data, each of which coincides with a break between bars of the music.

With feature βV3, playback of the music begins from the break in the bar when the mute state ends, so playback of the music can begin without causing the player any discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βV4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βV1 to βV3,
the first sound data is data in which sounds including voices are recorded,
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the sound including the voice recorded in the first sound data is a temporal position within a period of playback time of the sound including the voice in which the voice is not included.

With feature βV4, the voice is not played back from the middle when the mute state ends, so the player does not feel uncomfortable or annoyed that the voice is being played back from the middle when the mute state ends, and the playback of the sound containing the voice can be started.

[Feature βV5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βV1 to βV4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of sound data constituting the BGM musical piece M1),
the first reproduction means includes means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data;
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is the temporal beginning position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data.

<Characteristic βW group>
The group of features βW is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βW1]
a first playback means (a playback function in audio channel 1) for playing back a first sound (BGM piece M1) based on first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1 in FIG. 258, or a single BGM piece M1 audio data in FIG. 301), the first sound being recorded;
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
a mute state initiation means for initiating a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
a mute state ending means for ending the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The mute state ending means
a first mute state ending means for ending the mute state based on a first mute end trigger (the end of playback of sound corresponding to the reach effect R1, or the start of fluctuation of symbols in the mute state while the demo video is not displayed);
a second mute state ending means for ending the mute state based on a second mute end trigger (start of variation of symbols in the mute state while the demo video is being displayed), which is a trigger for ending the mute state;
Equipped with
The first reproducing means comprises:
The first sound recorded in the first sound data can be started to be reproduced from a plurality of predetermined time positions (the time beginning positions of the sounds recorded in each piece of audio data constituting the BGM piece M1, and a plurality of reproduction start positions set in the BGM piece M1 audio data),
means for starting playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from any one of the plurality of predetermined time positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data, when the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being played back at the start of the mute state, in response to the end of the mute state based on the first mute end trigger;
means for starting playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from a time leading position of the first sound recorded in the first sound data when the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being played back at the start of the mute state, in response to the end of the mute state based on the second mute end trigger;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature βW1 makes it possible to start playback of the first sound from an appropriate temporal position depending on the type of trigger for ending the muted state when the muted state is ended. Specifically, this feature allows playback of the first sound to start from one of multiple predetermined temporal positions of the first sound, or from the temporal beginning of the first sound, depending on the type of trigger for ending the muted state.

For example, if the first muting end trigger occurs while the player is playing on the gaming machine, and the multiple predetermined time positions of the first sound are set so that the player does not feel uncomfortable when the first sound starts playing from those time positions, then the first sound can be started to play when the muting state ends without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, for example, if the second muting end trigger is triggered by a new player starting play on the gaming machine, playback of the first sound will begin from the temporal beginning of the first sound when the muting state is ended, allowing the new player who has started play to hear the first sound without omission from the temporal beginning of the first sound, further increasing the player's anticipation for the upcoming game.

Accordingly, this feature makes it possible to start playback of the first sound from an appropriate time position when ending the muted state, depending on the type of trigger for ending the muted state.

[Feature βW2]
A gaming machine according to feature βW1,
a second reproducing means (a reproducing function in an audio channel 2) for reproducing a second sound (a sound corresponding to the reach effect R1) based on second sound data (a sound data corresponding to the reach effect R1) in which the second sound is recorded,
the output means is capable of outputting the second sound being reproduced by the second reproduction means,
the mute state initiation means includes means for initiating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means starts reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data;
the first mute state ending means includes means for ending the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means ends reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data as the first mute end trigger.

According to feature βW2, while the second sound is being played by the second playback means, a muted state is entered in which the first sound is not output from the output means, making the second sound stand out even more and allowing the player to focus their attention on the second sound. The end of playback of the second sound is the trigger for ending the muted state, and playback of the first sound is initiated from one of multiple predetermined temporal positions of the first sound. Therefore, for example, if the multiple predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data are set so that starting playback of the first sound from those temporal positions does not cause discomfort to the player, playback of the first sound can be initiated when the muted state ends without causing discomfort to the player.

[Feature βW3]
A gaming machine according to feature βW1 or βF2,
a pattern display means for displaying a pattern;
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a pattern change starting means for starting a change of the pattern displayed on the pattern display means based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
Equipped with
the mute state initiation means includes means for initiating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the variation of the symbols has not started for a predetermined period of time;
the second mute state ending means includes means for ending the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, when the start of variation of the symbols is used as the second mute state ending trigger.

According to feature βW2, in a situation where the changing of symbols has not started for a predetermined period of time, i.e., a situation where it is highly likely that no player is playing on the gaming machine, a muted state in which the first sound is not output from the output means can be initiated. Then, in a situation where the changing of symbols has started, i.e., a situation where it is highly likely that a new player has started playing on the gaming machine, the muted state is terminated and playback of the first sound begins from the temporal beginning of the first sound. This allows a new player who has started playing to hear the first sound without omission, from the temporal beginning of the first sound, further increasing the player's anticipation for the upcoming game.

[Feature βW4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βW1 to βF3,
The first reproducing means comprises:
means for executing a process capable of identifying a playback position during the mute state, which is a temporal playback position of the first sound when, in a case where the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being played back at the start of the mute state, playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is continued or is assumed to be continued even after the start of the mute state;
means for starting playback of the first sound recorded in the first sound data, triggered by the termination of the mute state based on the first mute termination trigger, from a predetermined time position (in FIG. 259, a time leading position of the sound recorded in the third main-part sound data of the BGM piece M1) located immediately after the mute state playback position at the time the mute state terminates (in FIG. 259, a time leading position of the sound recorded in the second main-part sound data of the BGM piece M1);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βW4, the first sound continues to be played even during the mute state, and it is possible to start playback of the first sound from a predetermined temporal position while minimizing the discrepancy between the temporal position of the first sound that a player, who expects the first sound to continue playing even after the mute state ends, imagines after the mute state ends and the temporal position of the first sound that actually begins playing upon the end of the mute state. As a result, for example, if the multiple predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data are set so that starting playback of the first sound from those temporal positions does not feel strange to the player, playback of the first sound can be started when the mute state ends without causing the player to feel strange.

[Feature βW5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βW1 to βW4,
the first sound data is data in which a piece of music is recorded,
a plurality of predetermined time positions of the music recorded in the first sound data, each of which coincides with a break between bars of the music.

According to feature βW5, when the mute state ends, playback of the music begins from the break in the bar, so playback of the music can begin without causing the player any discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βW6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βW1 to βW5,
the first sound data is data in which sounds including voices are recorded,
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the sound including the voice recorded in the first sound data is a temporal position within a period of playback time of the sound including the voice in which the voice is not included.

According to feature βW6, the voice is not played back from the middle when the muted state ends, so the player does not feel uncomfortable or annoyed that the voice is played back from the middle when the muted state ends, and the playback of the sound containing the voice can be started.

[Feature βW7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βW1 to βW6,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of sound data constituting the BGM musical piece M1),
the first reproduction means includes means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data;
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined plurality of temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is the temporal beginning position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data.

Feature βW7 makes it possible to start playback of the sound recorded in the data from a predetermined time position, even if the sound is recorded in a data format in which it is impossible or difficult to specify a time position in the recorded sound and start playback.

<Feature βX group>
The group of features βX is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βX1]
a first playback means (a playback function in audio channel 1) for playing back a piece of music (BGM piece of music M1) based on first sound data (plural pieces of audio data constituting the BGM piece of music M1 in FIG. 258, or single BGM piece of music M1 audio data in FIG. 301), the first sound being data in which the piece of music (BGM piece of music M1) is recorded;
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the music piece being reproduced by the first reproduction means;
A gaming machine comprising:
the first playback means is capable of starting playback of the music piece from a predetermined time position after the time-wise beginning position of the music piece recorded in the first sound data,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined time position of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a break between bars of the music.

According to feature βX1, the predetermined temporal position of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with the break between bars of the music, so starting playback from the predetermined temporal position of the music does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to start playback of the music recorded in the first sound data from the predetermined temporal position without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Feature βX2]
A gaming machine according to feature βX1,
the first playback means is capable of starting playback of the music piece recorded in the first sound data from a plurality of predetermined time positions of the music piece,
a plurality of predetermined time positions of the music recorded in the first sound data, each of which coincides with a break between bars of the music.

According to feature βX2, each of the multiple predetermined temporal positions in the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with the breaks between bars in the music, so starting playback of the music from any of the multiple predetermined temporal positions in the music will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to start playback of the music recorded in the first sound data from various temporal positions without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Feature βX3]
A gaming machine according to feature βX2,
a mute state initiation means for initiating a mute state in which the music piece is not output from the output means;
a mute state ending means for ending the mute state;
Equipped with
a first playback means for starting playback of the music recorded in the first sound data from one of the predetermined plurality of time positions of the music recorded in the first sound data when the mute state starts, when the mute state ends.

Feature βX1 allows the music recorded in the first sound data to begin playing when the mute state ends without causing the player any discomfort.

[Feature βX4]
A gaming machine according to feature βX3,
a second reproducing means (a reproducing function in an audio channel 2) for reproducing a second sound (a sound corresponding to the reach effect R1) based on second sound data (a sound data corresponding to the reach effect R1) in which the second sound is recorded,
the output means is capable of outputting the second sound being reproduced by the second reproduction means,
the mute state initiation means includes means for initiating the mute state in which the music piece is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means starts reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data, and
the mute state ending means includes means for ending the mute state in which the music piece is not output from the output means, when the second reproduction means ends reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data.

According to feature βX4, while the second sound is being played by the second playback means, the music is muted and not output from the output means, making the second sound stand out even more and allowing the player to focus their attention on the second sound.

[Feature βX5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βX2 to βX4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of sound data constituting the BGM musical piece M1),
the first reproduction means includes means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data;
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the predetermined multiple temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data is the temporal beginning position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data.

Feature βX5 makes it possible to start playback of the sound recorded in the data from a predetermined time position, even if the sound is recorded in a data format in which it is impossible or difficult to specify a time position in the recorded sound and start playback.

The inventions of the above feature group βQ to feature group βX solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, and simplifying control.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Characteristic βY group>
The feature group βY is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature βY1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game when a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation is defined as one game;
a performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means
a means for executing an effect (right-hit suggestion effect) that prompts a player to launch a game ball in a predetermined manner in a period after the game execution means has finished the game in a first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a jackpot based on the ball entering the starting hole);
a means for executing an effect (right-hit suggestion effect) that prompts a player to launch a game ball in a predetermined manner in a period after the game execution means has finished the game in question, in a second case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game does not satisfy the predetermined condition and that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small win);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βY1, in both the first and second cases, the effect execution means executes an effect that prompts the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner. Therefore, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, a player who is determining based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions can be given a sense of expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case.

[Feature βY2]
A gaming machine according to feature βY1,
a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player after a game has ended when the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
A type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be given to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
a benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information about the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type determination means is equipped with a means (a function of executing a type determination process) for determining the one type of benefit to be granted to the player after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies the specified conditions.

According to Feature βY2, the type determination means determines a type of benefit to be awarded to a player after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, compared to a gaming machine in which a type of benefit to be awarded to a player is determined before the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the timing at which the benefit type display means displays information about the type of benefit determined by the type determination means can be delayed. Therefore, when an effect prompting the player to launch a game ball in a predetermined manner is executed after the end of a game in which a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is executed, a player who is determining based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game is in which the game satisfies the predetermined condition can be given a sense of anticipation that the effect has been executed based on the first case. Furthermore, the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game is in which the game satisfies the predetermined condition can be delayed based on whether the benefit type display means displays information about the benefit. This lengthens the period during which anticipation that the effect has been executed based on the first case can be given, compared to a gaming machine in which a type of benefit to be awarded to a player is determined before the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature βY3]
A gaming machine according to feature βY2,
a type determination ball entry section (type determination gate 202) into which game balls can enter;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type determination means is provided with a means for determining the type of benefit to be granted to the player when a gaming ball enters the type determination ball entry section after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies the specified conditions.

According to feature βY3, the bonus type display means displays information about one type of bonus determined by the type determination means after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies the specified conditions and after the player has thrown the game ball into the type determination ball entry section, thereby further delaying the timing at which the bonus type display means displays information about one type of bonus determined by the type determination means. Therefore, when an effect encouraging the player to launch a gaming ball in a predetermined manner is executed after a round of play has ended, the player, who is determining based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the round of play satisfies the predetermined conditions, can be given a sense of anticipation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case. Furthermore, the point at which it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the round of play satisfies the predetermined conditions based on whether information related to the bonus is displayed on the bonus type display means can be delayed until after the player has inserted a gaming ball into the type-determining ball entry section after the round of play has ended. This further extends the period during which anticipation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case can be given, compared to gaming machines that determine the type of bonus to be awarded to the player before the end of a round of play in which the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions.

[Feature βY4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βY1 to βY3,
a specific processing execution means for executing a specific processing including causing the effect execution means to execute an effect that prompts the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner after the end of a game corresponding to the first case;
a specific process execution determination means for determining whether or not the specific process is to be executed;
Equipped with
The type determination means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits based on the result of a determination by the specific processing execution determination means as to whether or not to execute the specific processing (processing of Case 1 in Figure 313).

According to feature βY4, the type determination means can determine the type of benefit from among multiple predetermined types of benefits depending on whether or not a specific process has been executed. In other words, the manner in which the benefit of the type determined by the type determination means is granted can be related to the manner in which the specific process is executed by the specific process execution means.

<Feature βZ group>
The feature βZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature βZ1]
A gaming machine including a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus,
The benefit granting means
In the first case, a means for granting a benefit when the gaming ball passes through a specific area;
In the second case, a means for not awarding a benefit even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βZ1, a bonus may be awarded when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, or no bonus may be awarded even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area. This allows the player to guess whether or not a bonus will be awarded when the gaming ball passes through a specific area during play, and creates a sense of anticipation that a bonus may be awarded.

[Feature βZ2]
A gaming machine according to feature βZ1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game when a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation is defined as one game;
Equipped with
The first case is when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and when the judgment means judges that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, after the game round corresponding to the judgment is over, a process corresponding to the result of the judgment (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small win) is executed.
The second case is when the judgment means judges that the special information corresponding to a game round satisfies the predetermined condition, and after the game round corresponding to said judgment has ended, a process corresponding to the result of said judgment (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot) is executed.

Feature βZ2 not only creates a sense of anticipation by prompting the player to guess whether or not a bonus will be awarded when the game ball passes through a specific area during play, but also allows the player to guess whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a specified condition, or whether the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the specified condition but satisfies a specific, pre-determined condition, thereby creating an even greater sense of anticipation for the player.

[Feature βZ3]
A gaming machine according to feature βZ1 or feature βZ2,
A performance execution means for executing a performance is provided,
The performance execution means
In the first case, when the game ball passes through the specific area, a means for executing an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the specific area is provided;
In the second case, when the game ball passes through the specific area, a means for executing an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the specific area is provided;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βZ3, when a gaming ball passes through a specific area during play, whether or not a bonus is awarded, the passing of the gaming ball through the specific area is triggered by the execution of an effect suggesting that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area. This creates a sense of anticipation in players who recognize that an effect suggesting that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area has been executed, such as that a bonus may be awarded.

[Feature βZ4]
A gaming machine according to feature βZ2 or feature βZ3,
The benefit granting means
means for granting a bonus to a player after the end of a game when the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run execution means satisfies the predetermined condition;
means for granting a bonus to a player after the end of a game when special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run execution means does not satisfy the predetermined condition but satisfies a predetermined specific condition;
Equipped with
Furthermore, the gaming machine
a type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits when the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run execution means satisfies the predetermined condition;
a benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information about the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type determination means is equipped with a means (a function of executing a type determination process) for determining the one type of benefit to be granted to the player after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies the specified conditions.

According to feature βZ4, the type determination means determines a type of benefit to be awarded to a player after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, compared to gaming machines in which a type of benefit to be awarded to a player is determined before the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the timing at which the benefit type display means displays information about a type of benefit determined by the type determination means can be delayed. When the benefit type display means displays information about a type of benefit determined by the type determination means, the player can determine that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. However, because the timing at which the information is displayed can be delayed, the player can be given a longer period of time to guess whether the special information corresponding to a game in question satisfies the predetermined condition, or whether the special information corresponding to a game in question satisfies a predetermined specific condition even if it does not satisfy the predetermined condition, thereby lengthening the period during which the player is given a sense of anticipation.

<Feature γA group>
The feature group γA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γA1]
A reward granting means for granting a reward;
a performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting means
In the first case, a means for granting a benefit when the gaming ball passes through a specific area;
In the second case, a means for not awarding a benefit even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area;
Equipped with
The performance execution means
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a means for executing an effect that encourages the launch of the gaming ball in a manner that causes the gaming ball to pass through the specific area, regardless of the second case.

Feature γA1 executes an effect that encourages the player to launch the game ball in a manner that will cause it to pass through a specific area, even if the second case is true. This creates a sense of anticipation in the player who recognizes that this effect has been executed, as if the first case may be true, and encourages the player to launch the game ball in a manner that will cause it to pass through a specific area.

[Feature γA2]
A gaming machine according to feature γA1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game when a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation is defined as one game;
Equipped with
The first case is when the special information corresponding to the game does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small win),
The second case is when the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a jackpot),
moreover,
In the second case, a type determination means determines one type of benefit to be given to the player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
a benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information about the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means;
a type determination ball entry section (type determination gate 202) that is an entry section into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The type determination means includes means for determining the type of benefit to be granted to the player when a game ball enters the type determination ball entry section after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The type determination ball entry section (type determination gate 202) is arranged at a position where a game ball can enter the type determination ball when it is launched in a manner that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area.

According to feature γA2, the type determination means determines one type of benefit to be granted to the player from among multiple types of benefits predetermined for the second case. Furthermore, the benefit type display means displays information related to the one type of benefit determined by the type determination means. Therefore, the player can determine whether the first case or the second case is occurring by checking whether or not information related to the one type of benefit is displayed on the benefit type display means. Therefore, even if the effect execution means executes an effect encouraging the game ball to be launched in a manner that causes the game ball to pass through a specific area despite the second case being occurring, the player can determine whether the first case or the second case is occurring by checking whether or not information related to the one type of benefit is displayed on the benefit type display means, which would reduce the player's sense of anticipation.

However, in this feature group, the type determination means determines a type of benefit to be awarded to a player when a gaming ball enters the type determination ball entry section after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and the type determination ball entry section is located in a position where a gaming ball fired in a manner that causes it to pass through a specific area can enter the category determination ball. Therefore, even though the effect execution means is in the second case, at the time when it executes an effect encouraging the firing of a gaming ball in a manner that causes it to pass through a specific area, the benefit type display means does not display information regarding the type of benefit determined by the type determination means. Only when the player fires a gaming ball in a manner that causes it to pass through a specific area and the ball enters the type determination ball entry section does the benefit type display means display information regarding the type of benefit determined by the type determination means. Therefore, when the effect execution means executes an effect that encourages the game ball to be launched in a manner that will cause it to pass through a specific area even though the second case is occurring, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the first case or the second case is occurring, and it is possible to encourage the player to launch the game ball in a manner that will cause it to pass through a specific area while creating a sense of anticipation that it may be the first case.

<Characteristic gamma B group>
The feature γ B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game when a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation is defined as one game;
a performance execution means for executing a performance;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting means
a first granting means for granting a bonus to a player after the end of a game when the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
A second awarding means for awarding a benefit when the gaming ball passes through a specific area;
Equipped with
The benefit granting means
a means for continuing to grant the benefit by the first granting means without granting the benefit triggered by the game ball passing through the specific area if the game ball passed through the specific area during a period in which the first granting means was granting the benefit, even though the game ball passed through the specific area;
The performance execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area during a period in which the first granting means is granting the benefit, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, an effect is executed that suggests that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area.

According to feature γB1, if the gaming ball passes through a specific area during a period in which the first awarding means is awarding a bonus, the first awarding means continues to award the bonus without awarding the bonus triggered by the gaming ball passing through the specific area. However, if the gaming ball passes through a specific area during a period in which the first awarding means is awarding a bonus, an effect is executed suggesting that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area. This creates a sense of anticipation in a player who recognizes that this effect has been executed, as if the awarding by the first awarding means will be interrupted and the awarding of the bonus triggered by the gaming ball passing through the specific area will begin.

[Feature γB2]
A gaming machine according to feature γB1,
The performance execution means
When the first awarding means awards the bonus, the gaming machine executes an effect suggesting that the gaming ball will be launched in a manner that causes it to pass through the specific area.

According to feature γB2, when the first awarding means awards a bonus, an effect is executed suggesting that the gaming ball will be launched in a manner that causes it to pass through a specific area. Therefore, if the gaming ball passes through the specific area during a period in which the first awarding means is awarding a bonus, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player, even though no bonus will be awarded as a result of the ball passing through the specific area. Furthermore, by having the player launch the gaming ball in a manner that causes it to pass through the specific area, the player's sense of anticipation can be further enhanced.

<Feature γC group>
The feature γ C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γC1]
A bonus granting means (a function for executing an opening/closing execution mode) for granting a bonus to a player;
A plurality of bonus award trigger ball entry areas (first start opening 33, second start opening 34, V winning opening 222) into which game balls can enter, which serve as an opportunity to award the bonus;
A type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be given to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
A gaming machine comprising:
The type determination means
a first benefit type determination means for determining the type of benefit to be granted based on the game ball entering the first benefit-granting trigger ball entry area (first start gate 33, second start gate 34) when the game ball enters the first benefit-granting trigger ball entry area, when the game ball enters an entry area (type determination gate 202) different from the first benefit-granting trigger ball entry area;
a second benefit type determination means for determining, when a gaming ball enters a second benefit-granting opportunity ball entry area (V winning opening 222), the type of benefit to be granted based on the gaming ball entering the second benefit-granting opportunity ball entry area (V winning opening 222), using the gaming ball entering the second benefit-granting opportunity ball entry area (V winning opening 222) as a trigger;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature γC1, the method used by the type determination means to determine the type differs depending on whether the gaming ball enters the first bonus-granting opportunity ball entry area or the second bonus-granting opportunity ball entry area. This allows for a variety of gameplay aspects to be created when determining the type of bonus, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature γC2]
A gaming machine according to feature γC1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game when a game is defined as a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the first bonus awarding opportunity ball entry area, the acquisition condition is fulfilled,
The first benefit type determination means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for determining the type of benefit to be awarded when a gaming ball enters a ball entry area different from the first benefit-granting trigger ball entry area during a period after the end of a game round executed by the game round execution means in response to a game ball entering the first benefit-granting trigger ball entry area.

Feature γC2 allows the player to actively participate in determining the type of bonus during the period following the end of a game session executed by the game session execution means when a game ball enters the first bonus-granting trigger ball entry area, thereby allowing the player to focus on the game even during the period following the end of the game session.

[Feature γC3]
A gaming machine according to feature γC1 or feature γC2,
When a game ball enters the second special offer opportunity ball entry area,
The gaming machine, wherein the bonus awarding means comprises a means for confirming that the bonus will be awarded.

According to feature γC3, when a gaming ball enters the second bonus-granting trigger ball entry area, the bonus granting means determines that a bonus will be granted. Furthermore, according to feature γC1, when a gaming ball enters the second bonus-granting trigger ball entry area, the second bonus type determination means determines the type of bonus to be granted based on the gaming ball's entry into the second bonus-granting trigger ball entry area, triggered by the gaming ball's entry into the second bonus-granting trigger ball entry area. Therefore, when a gaming ball enters the second bonus-granting trigger ball entry area, it is determined that a bonus will be granted, and the type of bonus to be granted is also determined. As a result, a sense of speed can be imparted to the player regarding the progress of the game when a gaming ball enters the second bonus-granting trigger ball entry area, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned feature γC2, when a gaming ball lands in the first bonus-granting trigger ball entry zone, a game turn triggered by the gaming ball's entry in the first bonus-granting trigger ball entry zone is executed, and during the period after the end of that game turn, the type of bonus to be awarded is determined in response to the gaming ball's entry in a ball entry zone other than the first bonus-granting trigger ball entry zone, and the bonus is then awarded. Therefore, when a gaming ball lands in the first bonus-granting trigger ball entry zone, the bonus is not awarded as quickly as when a gaming ball lands in the second bonus-granting trigger ball entry zone. As a result, the progress of the game can be varied between when a gaming ball lands in the first bonus-granting trigger ball entry zone and when a gaming ball lands in the second bonus-granting trigger ball entry zone, which can add variety to the player's expectations for the game and increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature γD group>
The group of features γD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game when a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation is defined as one game;
a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player after a game has ended when the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
A first winning port is an entry portion that serves as an opportunity to award a prize ball, which is a game ball as a privilege, to a player;
A second winning hole which is a ball entry portion that triggers the awarding of prize balls, which are game balls as a privilege, to a player and is a ball entry portion different from the first winning hole;
a first winning port state transition means (first opening/closing door 36b) for transitioning the first winning port between a winning state in which a game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a non-winning state in which a game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than the winning state;
a second winning port state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) for transitioning the second winning port between a ball entry state in which a game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a non-ball entry state in which a game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than the ball entry state;
a state transition means operation control means for controlling the operation of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The state transition means operation control means
a second winning port state transition determination means for determining whether or not to operate the second winning port state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) during the period in which the bonus is awarded after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round execution means satisfies the predetermined condition;
an operation number determination means for determining the number of operations of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means;
A gaming machine equipped with:

According to feature γD1, when special information corresponding to a game session executed by the game session execution means satisfies a predetermined condition, the process of determining whether to operate the second winning slot state transition means during the period in which the bonus is awarded after the end of that game session and the process of determining the number of times the first winning slot state transition means and the second winning slot state transition means will operate are executed separately. Therefore, when a bonus is awarded, various operating modes of the first winning slot state transition means and the second winning slot state transition means can be realized by combining whether or not the second winning slot state transition means operates and the number of times the first winning slot state transition means and the second winning slot state transition means operate, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature γD2]
A gaming machine according to feature γD1,
The operation number determination means
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a means for determining the number of times the first winning port state transition means and the second winning port state transition means are to be operated after the second winning port state transition determination means has determined whether or not to operate the second winning port state transition means during the period in which the bonus is awarded after the end of the relevant game session.

According to feature γD2, the number of times the first winning slot state transition means and the second winning slot state transition means will operate is determined after a determination is first made as to whether or not to operate the second winning slot state transition means. Therefore, during the period from when it is determined whether or not to operate the second winning slot state transition means to when it is determined how many times the first winning slot state transition means and the second winning slot state transition means will operate, processing can be executed based on the result of the determination as to whether or not to operate the second winning slot state transition means. For example, if the determination is to operate the second winning slot state transition means, during the period from when it is determined whether or not to operate the second winning slot state transition means to when it is determined how many times the first winning slot state transition means and the second winning slot state transition means will operate, it is possible to start the execution of a presentation suggesting that the second winning slot state transition means will operate, and after the presentation has begun, the number of times the first winning slot state transition means and the second winning slot state transition means will operate can be determined.

[Feature γD3]
A gaming machine according to feature γD1 or feature γD2,
an effect execution means including: a means for executing an effect to encourage game balls to enter the second winning port during a period after the game execution means has finished the game in a first case where the determination means has determined that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (jackpot); and a means for executing an effect to encourage game balls to enter the second winning port during a period after the game execution means has finished the game in a second case where the determination means has determined that the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition but satisfies a predetermined specific condition (small win);
a specific processing execution means for executing a specific processing including causing the effect execution means to execute an effect that encourages a game ball to enter the second winning hole after the end of a game corresponding to the first case;
a specific process execution determination means for determining whether or not the specific process is to be executed;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the second winning port state transition determination means includes means for determining whether or not to operate the second winning port state transition means based on the result of the determination by the specific processing determination means.

According to feature γD3, the second winning opening state transition determination means determines whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means based on the result of the determination by the specific processing determination means, so that the manner in which the specific processing is executed can be related to the manner in which the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means operate.

<Feature γE group>
The group of features γ E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game round when a period from the start of a game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game round operation is defined as one game round;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player;
a prize opening, which is an entry section into which a game ball can enter and which, when the game ball enters the entry section, awards a prize ball, which is a game ball, to the player as a special benefit;
A winning port state transition means (a function for executing a large winning port opening and closing process) for transitioning the winning port between a winning state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a non-entering state in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the winning state;
A state transition mode determination means (type determination process) for determining a state transition mode in which the winning port state transition means causes the winning port to transition to a new state;
a performance execution means for executing a performance;
Equipped with
The winning port state transition means
In a first case (in the case of a jackpot) in which the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to a game round satisfies the predetermined condition, after the end of the game round, the state of the winning port is transitioned from the non-ball-entered state to the ball-entered state;
In a second case (a case of a small win) in which the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to a game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and that the special information satisfies a predetermined specific condition, after the end of the game round, a means for transitioning the state of the winning port from the non-ball winning state to the ball winning state is provided;
The means of performance execution is
In the first case, a means for executing a performance that prompts the player to launch a game ball in a predetermined manner during a period (standby period) from the time when the game in the first case ends to the time when the state transition mode determining means determines the state transition mode;
In the second case, a means for executing an effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball in a predetermined manner during a period (opening period) from the time when the game has ended in the second case and after the state transition mode determining means has determined the state transition mode until the winning port state transition means first transitions the state of the winning port from the non-ball-entered state to the ball-entered state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature γE1, even though the first and second cases are processed during different periods, an effect is executed in both cases to prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect prompting the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined manner is executed during different periods in the first and second cases. As a result, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, it is possible to give the player, who is judging based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the game round meets the predetermined conditions, a sense of expectation that the effect was executed based on the first case.

[Feature γE2]
A gaming machine according to feature γE1,
The effect of encouraging the launch of the game ball in the predetermined manner is an effect of encouraging the launch of the game ball in a manner in which the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning opening 222),
The specific area is an area through which only the gaming ball that has entered the winning hole can pass.

According to feature γE2, the specific area is an area through which only gaming balls that have entered the winning opening can pass. And, according to feature γE1 above, in both the first and second cases, after executing an effect that encourages the gaming ball to be launched in a manner that causes the gaming ball to pass through the specific area, the winning opening state transition means first transitions the state of the winning opening from a non-entered state to an entered state. Therefore, for players who progress through the game in accordance with the effect, it is possible to make it easier for the gaming ball to enter the winning opening, and further, to make it easier for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area.

[Feature γE3]
A gaming machine according to feature γE1 or feature γE2,
a ball entry section for determining a state transition mode (type determination gate 202) that is a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the first case, the state transition mode determination means is provided with a means for determining the state transition mode when a gaming ball enters the state transition mode determination ball entry section after the end of a game round corresponding to the first case.

Generally, in the first case, the gaming machine displays information relating to the determined state transition mode.
According to feature γE3, in the first case, the state transition mode determination means determines the state transition mode when the gaming ball enters the state transition mode determination ball entry section after the end of the game round corresponding to the first case, so that information regarding the state transition mode is not displayed at least until the gaming ball enters the state transition mode determination ball entry section, and depending on how the player launches the gaming ball, the period until the player recognizes whether the first case or the second case is occurring can be extended. Therefore, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, the period during which the player can be given a sense of expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case can be extended.

In addition, in the first case, by determining the state transition mode when a game ball enters the state transition mode determination ball entry section after the end of a game round corresponding to that first case, the player is actively involved in determining the state transition mode, which makes it possible to keep the player's attention on the game even after the end of a game round in which the special information meets the specified conditions, and also increases the player's anticipation for the state transition mode that will be determined.

[Feature γE4]
A gaming machine according to feature γE3,
The specific area is located downstream of the ball entrance section for determining the state transition mode in the direction in which the game ball flows.

According to feature γE4, the specific area is located downstream of the ball entry section for determining the state transition mode in the direction in which the game ball flows. Therefore, in the first case, if an effect is executed that encourages the game ball to be launched in a manner that causes the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the player progresses the game in accordance with this effect, the player can unconsciously cause the game ball to enter the ball entry section for determining the state transition mode, allowing the state transition mode to be smoothly determined and the game to proceed smoothly.

<Feature γZ group>
The feature γZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γZ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a control means for controlling the progress of a game, the control means including a game execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as a period from the start of a game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game round operation;
A specific area that is an area that can be an opportunity to change the progress state of the game when the game ball passes through;
A specific area state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) that transitions the specific area between a passing state in which the game ball can pass or can pass easily, and a non-passing state in which the game ball cannot pass or is more difficult to pass than the passing state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific area state transition means
A means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state in a first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a jackpot based on a ball entering a starting hole in the tenth modified example of the seventh embodiment),
In a second case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small win in the modified example 10 of the seventh embodiment), a means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state;
Equipped with
The control means
means for not changing the progress state of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the passing state in the first case;
In the second case, when the game ball passes through the specific area in the passing state, a means for changing the progress state of the game;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature γZ1, the specific area state transition means transitions the specific area from a non-passing state to a passing state in both the first and second cases, so the player is not able to distinguish between the first and second cases based on the state transition of the specific area. Therefore, when the specific area transitions from a non-passing state to a passing state, the player can guess whether it is the first or second case, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation. Furthermore, in the first case, the control means does not change the state of progress of the game even if the gaming ball passes through a specific area that is in a passing state, so the state of progress of the game based on the first case can be maintained.

[Feature γZ2]
A gaming machine according to feature γZ1,
A performance execution means for executing a performance is provided,
The performance execution means
In the first case, a means for executing a performance (right-hit suggestion performance) that prompts the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined manner during a period after the game execution means has finished the game;
In the second case, a means for executing a performance (right-hit suggestion performance) that prompts the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined manner during a period after the game execution means has finished the game;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature γZ2, in both the first and second cases, the effect execution means executes an effect that prompts the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner. Therefore, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, a player who is determining based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions can be given a sense of expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case.

[Feature γZ3]
A gaming machine according to feature γZ1 or feature γZ2,
a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player after a game has ended when the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
A type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be given to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
a benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information about the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type determination means is equipped with a means (a function for executing a type determination process) for determining the one type of benefit to be granted to the player after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies the specified conditions.

According to feature γZ3, the type determination means determines a type of benefit to be awarded to a player after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, compared to a gaming machine in which a type of benefit to be awarded to a player is determined before the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the timing at which the benefit type display means displays information about the type of benefit determined by the type determination means can be delayed. Therefore, when an effect prompting the player to launch a game ball in a predetermined manner is executed after the end of a game in which a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is executed, a player who is determining based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game is in which the game satisfies the predetermined condition can be given a sense of anticipation that the effect has been executed based on the first case. Furthermore, the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game is in which the game satisfies the predetermined condition can be delayed based on whether the benefit type display means displays information about the benefit. This lengthens the period during which anticipation that the effect has been executed based on the first case can be given, compared to a gaming machine in which a type of benefit to be awarded to a player is determined before the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

<Characteristic γG group>
The feature group γ G is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A first control means (main control device 60) for controlling the progress of the game, the first control means including a game execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as a period from the start of a game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game round operation;
A specific area (V winning hole 222) that is an area that can be an opportunity to change the progress state of the game by the passage of the game ball;
A second control means (a sound and light emission control device 90, a display control device 100) that is different from the first control means and controls processing that does not affect the progress of the game;
An operating mechanism (V winning assist mechanism) that performs an operation that may affect the behavior of circulating game balls;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first control means
In a first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a jackpot based on the ball entering the starting hole in the tenth modified example of the seventh embodiment), when the game ball passes through the specific area, a means for not changing the progress of the game;
In a second case where the special information corresponding to a game does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determining means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small win in the tenth modified example of the seventh embodiment), when the game ball passes through the specific area, a means for changing the progress of the game;
a specific information transmitting means for transmitting specific information to the second control means in the first case and not transmitting the specific information to the second control means in the second case;
Equipped with
The second control means
a means for transitioning the operating mechanism between a first state in which circulating game balls can pass through the specific area and a second state in which circulating game balls can pass through the specific area more easily than in the first state;
a means for transitioning the operating mechanism from the first state to the second state when the specific information is received from the specific information transmitting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature γG1, the second control means controls the transition of the state of the operating mechanism, thereby reducing the processing load of the first control means. Furthermore, in the first case, the second control means transitions the operating mechanism from the first state to the second state when specific information is received, and in the second case, the second control means does not transition the operating mechanism from the first state to the second state because specific information is not received. Furthermore, in the first case, the first control means does not change the progress of the game even if the game ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, the progress of the game can be prevented from being affected by the control of the transition of the state of the operating mechanism by the second control means.

[Feature γG2]
The gaming machine described in the γA1,
a specific area state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) that is arranged upstream of the operating mechanism in the direction in which the game balls flow, and that transitions the specific area between a passing state in which game balls can pass through the specific area or pass easily through the specific area, and a non-passing state in which game balls cannot pass through the specific area or pass through more difficultly than in the passing state;
The specific area state transition means
In the first case (when a jackpot is reached based on a ball entering a starting hole), a means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state;
a means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state in the second case (when a small win occurs);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature γG2, the specific area state transition means transitions the specific area from a non-passing state to a passing state in both the first and second cases, so the player is not able to distinguish between the first and second cases based on the state transition of the specific area. Therefore, when the specific area transitions from a non-passing state to a passing state, the player can guess whether it is the first or second case, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation. Furthermore, in the first case, the first control means does not change the state of progress of the game even if the gaming ball passes through a specific area that is in a passing state, so the state of progress of the game based on the first case can be maintained.

[Feature γG3]
A gaming machine according to feature γG1 or feature γG2,
the second control means includes a performance execution means for executing a performance;
The performance execution means
In the first case, a means for executing a performance (right-hit suggestion performance) that prompts the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined manner during a period after the game execution means has finished the game;
In the second case, a means for executing a performance (right-hit suggestion performance) that prompts the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined manner during a period after the game execution means has finished the game;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature γG3, in both the first and second cases, the effect execution means executes an effect that prompts the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner. Therefore, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, a player who is determining based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions can be given a sense of expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case.

[Feature γG4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features γG1 to γG3,
a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player after a game has ended when the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
A type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be given to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
a benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information about the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type determination means is equipped with a means (a function of executing a type determination process) for determining the one type of benefit to be granted to the player after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies the specified conditions.

According to feature γG4, the type determination means determines a type of benefit to be awarded to a player after the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, compared to a gaming machine in which a type of benefit to be awarded to a player is determined before the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the timing at which the benefit type display means displays information about the type of benefit determined by the type determination means can be delayed. Therefore, when an effect prompting the player to launch a game ball in a predetermined manner is executed after the end of a game in which a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is executed, a player who is determining based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game is in which the game satisfies the predetermined condition can be given a sense of anticipation that the effect has been executed based on the first case. Furthermore, the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game in which the game is in which the game satisfies the predetermined condition can be delayed based on whether the benefit type display means displays information about the benefit. This lengthens the period during which anticipation that the effect has been executed based on the first case can be given, compared to a gaming machine in which a type of benefit to be awarded to a player is determined before the end of a game in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

<Characteristic γH group>
The feature γ H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game when a game is defined as a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation;
a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player after a game has ended when the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
A type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be given to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bonus awarding means is provided with a means for terminating the awarding of the one type of bonus even if the awarding of the one type of bonus has not yet ended, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area (V winning port 222) during the period in which the one type of bonus determined by the type determination means is being awarded.

According to feature γH1, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area during a period in which a type of benefit determined by the type determination means is being awarded, the awarding of that type of benefit is terminated even if the awarding of that type of benefit has not yet ended. This makes it possible to avoid conflict between new processing triggered by the gaming ball passing through a specific area and processing executed in conjunction with the awarding of that type of benefit. In other words, it is possible to enable the execution of processing that is the same as the processing executed in conjunction with the awarding of that type of benefit as processing to be executed when a gaming ball passes through a specific area during a period in which a type of benefit determined by the type determination means is being awarded.

[Feature γH2]
A gaming machine according to feature γH1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bonus awarding means is equipped with a means (function of executing game state transition processing in the seventh embodiment/S72106 in V winning processing) that, when a gaming ball passes through a specific area during the period in which the bonus of one type determined by the type determination means is being awarded, ends the awarding of the bonus of the one type, even though the awarding of the bonus of the one type has not yet ended, and starts the awarding of a new bonus based on the gaming ball passing through the specific area.

According to feature γH2, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area during the period in which a type of benefit determined by the type determination means is being awarded, the awarding of that type of benefit will end even though the awarding of that type of benefit has not yet ended. However, since the awarding of a new benefit will begin based on the gaming ball passing through the specific area, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player for the awarding of a new benefit.

[Feature γH3]
A gaming machine according to feature γH1 or feature γH2,
a type determination ball entry section (type determination gate 202) into which game balls can enter;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type determination means is equipped with a means (a function for executing a type determination process) for determining the one type of benefit to be granted to the player when a gaming ball enters the type determination ball entry section after the end of a game session in which the special information satisfies the specified conditions.

According to feature γH3, the type of benefit to be awarded to a player is determined when a game ball enters the type-determining ball entry section after the end of a game in which the special information meets the specified conditions. This allows the player to actively participate in determining the type of benefit to be awarded, making it possible to keep the player's attention on the game even after the end of a game in which the special information meets the specified conditions, and to increase the player's anticipation for the type of benefit to be determined.

[Feature γH4]
A gaming machine according to feature γH2 or feature γH3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type determination means is equipped with a means for determining the type of benefit to be awarded when a gaming ball passes through the specific area (V winning port 222) when the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

According to feature γH4, the type determination means determines the type of benefit to be awarded when a gaming ball passes through a specific area when the gaming ball passes through that specific area. Therefore, the player does not need to have the type determination means determine a specific type of benefit by having the gaming ball enter the type determination ball entry section. Instead, a new benefit can be awarded based on the gaming ball passing through a specific area in a series of steps following the gaming ball's passage through the specific area, giving the player a sense of speed in the progress of the game when the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

<Feature γI group>
The group of features γI is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh and eighth embodiments.

[Feature γI1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game execution means for executing a game round when a period from the start of a game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game round operation is defined as one game round;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player after the end of a game in a first case where the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run executing means satisfies the predetermined condition (a jackpot due to the ball entering the starting hole), and for awarding a bonus to a player in a second case where the game ball passes through a specific area (a V winning hole) (a V winning jackpot);
a type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be given to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits in the first case and the second case;
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific area (V winning slot) is:
During the period when the bonus awarding means awards the bonus, the game ball is allowed to pass through,
The benefit granting means
a means for stopping the provision of the benefit corresponding to the first case and starting the provision of the benefit corresponding to the second case when the gaming ball passes through the specific area during the period in which the benefit corresponding to the first case is being provided;
The type determination means
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the one type of benefit to be given to the player will be determined to be the most advantageous type of benefit to the player from among the plurality of predetermined types of benefits is higher in the second case than in the first case.

According to feature γI1, a gaming ball can pass through a specific area while the bonus awarding means is awarding a bonus. If the gaming ball passes through the specific area during the period when the bonus corresponding to the first case is being awarded and the bonus awarding means enters the second case, the bonus awarding means stops awarding the bonus corresponding to the first case and starts awarding the bonus corresponding to the second case. This prevents conflicts between bonus awarding processes. Furthermore, if the gaming ball passes through the specific area during the period when the bonus corresponding to the first case is being awarded and the second case is entered, the awarding of the bonus corresponding to the first case is stopped, and the awarding of the bonus corresponding to the second case is started, it is anticipated that the player may feel anxious that they will be at a disadvantage compared to the type of bonus that was previously awarded corresponding to the first case. However, in this gaming machine, the type determination means is more likely to determine the most advantageous type of bonus for the player from among multiple predetermined types of bonuses in the second case than in the first case. This reduces the player's anxiety and creates an even greater sense of anticipation in the player.

[Feature γI2]
A gaming machine according to feature γI1,
a type determination ball entry section (type determination gate 202) into which game balls can enter;
The type determination means includes a means for determining, in the first case, the type of benefit to be granted to the player in response to a game ball entering the type determination ball entry section after the end of a game round corresponding to the first case;
The specific area is located downstream of the ball category determination entrance in the direction in which the game balls flow.

According to feature γI2, the type determination means determines a type of benefit to be awarded to a player in accordance with the first case when a gaming ball enters the type determination ball entry section after the end of a game round corresponding to the first case. Therefore, at the end of the game round corresponding to the first case, the type of benefit to be awarded has not been determined, and the player cannot recognize the degree of advantage of the benefit corresponding to the first case. The player then circulates gaming balls toward the type determination ball entry section to determine the type of benefit to be awarded. Since the specific area is located downstream of the type determination ball entry section in the direction of the gaming balls' flow, gaming balls circulating toward the type determination ball entry section are likely to pass through the specific area. Therefore, after the benefit to be awarded in accordance with the first case is determined and the awarding of the benefit begins, the game can easily transition to the awarding of the benefit corresponding to the second case in a natural flow, allowing for smooth gameplay. Furthermore, because the transition from the awarding of the benefit corresponding to the first case to the awarding of the benefit corresponding to the second case occurs naturally, there is no need for the player to feel anxious that the transition from the awarding of the benefit corresponding to the first case to the awarding of the benefit corresponding to the second case will result in a disadvantage compared to the type of benefit that was previously awarded corresponding to the first case, or this anxiety of the player can be alleviated. This instills an even greater sense of anticipation in the player.

[Feature γI3]
A gaming machine according to feature γI1 or feature γI2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the type determination means is provided with a means for determining the one type of benefit to be granted to the player in response to the second case, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

According to feature γI3, in the second case, the type determination means determines a type of benefit to be awarded to the player in response to the gaming ball passing through a specific area. Therefore, in the second case, the player does not need to have the type determination means determine a type of benefit by having the gaming ball enter the type determination ball entry section; the type of benefit corresponding to the second case is determined in a series of steps from the gaming ball passing through the specific area, and the awarding of a new benefit begins. This gives the player a sense of speed in the progress of the game when the gaming ball passes through a specific area.

The inventions of the above feature group βY to feature group γI solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, and simplifying control (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration that appropriately combines one or more of the features included in the above Feature Group A to Feature Group γI. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect from the combined configuration.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or to which each feature can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a launching means that launches gaming balls toward a gaming area based on a launch operation by a player, a starting ball entry section that is provided in the gaming area and into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter, an information acquisition means that acquires special information based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry section, and an acquired information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a pattern display means for variably displaying multiple patterns, a start means for starting the variable display of the multiple patterns in response to operation of a start operation means, a stop means for stopping the variable display of the multiple patterns in response to operation of a stop operation means or the passage of a predetermined time, and a bonus award means for awarding a bonus to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and variations, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and variations corresponding to the technical features in each aspect described in the Summary of the Invention section can be replaced or combined as appropriate to solve some or all of the above-described problems or achieve some or all of the above-described effects. Furthermore, if a technical feature is not described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18...Window section 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Discharge outlet 23...Lever 24...Performance operation button 25...Operation handle 25a...Touch sensor 25b...Weight button 25c...Variable resistor 26...Game ball launch button 30...Game board 31...Guide rail 31a...Inner rail section 31b...Outer rail section 32...General winning port 32a...First winning port 32b...Second winning port 32c...Third winning port 33...First starting port 34...Second starting port 34a...Electric device 34b...Electric device drive section 35...Through gate 36...Variable winning device 36a...Large winning opening 36b...Opening and closing door 36c...Variable winning drive unit 37...Special pattern unit 37a...First pattern display unit 37b...Second pattern display unit 37c...First hold display unit 37d...Second hold display unit 38...Normal pattern unit 39...Round display unit 40...Variable display unit 41...Pattern display device 41a...Display surface 41aL...Display area 41aS...Display area 42...Nails 43...Outlet 44j...Stage 44j2...Stage 44k...Rising portion 44l...Left side drop section 44m...Right side drop section 44n...Central ball entry opening 44o...Central ball exit opening 44p...Central drop section 45...Main display unit 46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 48...V winning opening 48a...Opening and closing door 48b...opening/closing door drive unit 51...first control unit 52...second control unit 53...third control unit 54...tank 55...tank rail 56...case rail 57...first variable winning device 57a...first large winning opening 57b...first opening/closing door 57c...first variable winning drive unit 57d...first ball entry prevention member 58...second variable winning device 58a...large winning opening 58a...second large winning opening 58b...second opening/closing door 58c...second variable winning drive unit 58d...second ball entry prevention member 59...convex portion 59a...magnetic member 60...main control device 61...main control board 62...main side MPU
62x...Main CPU
63...Main ROM
64...Main RAM
64x...Flash memory 63a...Win/lose table storage area 63b...Allocation table storage area 63c...Reach determination table storage area 63d...Variation time table storage area 63e...Stop result table storage area 63f...Command information storage area 64a...Lottery counter buffer 64b...Hold information storage area 64c...Electric role hold area 64d...Various counter areas 64e...Various flag storage area 64f...First determination processing result storage area 67a...Various detection sensors 70...Payout control device 71...Payout device 80...Launch control device 81...Game ball launching mechanism 85...Power supply device 86...Power outage monitoring circuit 90...Audio and light emission control device 91...Audio and light emission control board 92...Sound and light side MPU
93...Sound/light side ROM
93a...Performance pattern table storage area 93b...Variable display pattern table storage area 94...Sound and light side RAM
94a...Various flag storage area 94b...Various counter area 94c...Lottery counter area 96...RTC
97...Sound output LSI97
98... ROM for audio data
100... Display control device 101... Display control board 102... Display side MPU
103...Program ROM
104...Work RAM
106...Character ROM
107...Video RAM
300... Game history management chip 302... Buffer 304... Register 306... Memory for storing prize ball number data 307... Memory for storing calculation execution conditions 307a... Memory for storing calculation execution conditions 308... CPU
309...Memory for storing calculation results 309a...Memory for storing the number of balls entered 309b...Memory for storing ball entry information 320...Inspection machine 321...CPU
328...Display unit 329...Connection cable PA...Game area PC...Prize counter area AE...Execution area Ra...First hold area Rb...Second hold area Dm11 to Dm14, Dm21 to Dm24...Hold display Sync1...First synchronization display unit Sync2...Second synchronization display unit MA...Main display area SA1...First sub-display area SA2...Second sub-display area Ds1...First hold display area Ds2...Second hold display area

Claims (1)

a predetermined detection means for detecting a predetermined operation;
a game value granting means electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executing a process for granting a game value for a game;
a game media providing means electrically connected to the game value providing means and configured to perform a process for providing game media;
a processing execution means electrically connected to the game value providing means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals, and which executes a specific processing which is a processing different from the processing for providing the game medium;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming value providing means
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information used in a process for awarding a game value to the game, the reference information being referenced in response to detection by the predetermined detection means;
a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means to the processing executing means after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine has started and before the execution of a predetermined game processing for progressing a game is started;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detecting means to the processing executing means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value providing means;
an execution means for executing the specific process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information relating to the processing result of the specific processing performed by the execution means;
Equipped with
the game value providing means is provided in a main control means for progressing the game, and the processing execution means is provided in a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The gaming value providing means and the processing execution means are operated by the same power source for the gaming machine,
This gaming machine is
a display means for displaying a game effect that is visible from the front of the gaming machine and is executed for each game, which is one unit of processing for announcing the result of a predetermined lottery processing;
a means for outputting the processing result information to the performance display means;
Equipped with
the game value providing means cannot directly change the processing result information stored in the processing result information storage means,
The gaming machine is configured such that the information based on the predetermined information signal is erased at a predetermined timing after the specific process is completed,
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined abnormality occurs, the game value providing means transmits information corresponding to the predetermined abnormality to the processing execution means, and the processing execution means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined abnormality.
A gaming machine characterized by: